Sailing Directions - Pub182bk

PUB.
182
SAILING DIRECTIONS
(ENROUTE)
★
NORTH AND WEST COASTS OF

NORWAY
★
Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Springfield, Virginia
© COPYRIGHT 2022 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.
2022
FIFTEENTH EDITION
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office
Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II
Preface NGA Maritime—Contact Information

0.0Pub. 182, Sailing Directions (Enroute) North and West E-mail MarHelp@nga.mil
Coasts of Norway, Fifteenth Edition, 2022, is issued for use in
conjunction with Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Maritime Quality
Guide) Arctic Ocean. Companion volumes are Pubs. 181 and Feedback System https://marhelp.nga.mil
183. (MQFS)
0.0Digital Nautical Charts 21 and 22 provide electronic chart
coverage for the area covered by this publication. Maritime Safety Office
0.0This publication has been corrected to 23 April 2022, includ- National Geospatial-Intelligence
ing Notice to Mariners No. 17 of 2022. Subsequent updates Agency
Mailing address
have corrected this publication to 30 July 2022 including No- Mail Stop N64-SFH
tice to Mariners No. 31 of 2022. 7500 Geoint Drive
Springfield VA 22150-7500
Explanatory Remarks
New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the
0.0
Sailing Directions are published by the National Geospatial-

0.0
date of publication shown above. Important information to
Intelligence Agency (NGA) under the authority of Department amend material in the publication is available is updated as
of Defense Directive 5105.60, dated 29 July 2009, and pursu- needed and available as a downloadable corrected publication
ant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10, Chapter from the NGA Maritime Domain web site.
22, Section 451 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing Directions,
covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the world, provide
information that cannot be shown graphically on nautical NGA Maritime Safety Office Web Site
charts and is not readily available elsewhere.
https://msi.nga.mil
Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and
0.0
port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence 0.0Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same
Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a
called “Sectors.” course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of
Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees
0.0
origin along a track having the identical meridional angle as
from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General the designated course. Vessels following the directives must
bearings are expressed by the initial letters of the points of the allow for every influence tending to cause deviation from such
compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb track, and navigate so that the designated course is
endings have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are continuously being made good.
intended, degrees are used. 0.0Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward
Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this
0.0
which currents set.
publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital 0.0Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1
Nautical Chart (DNC). minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed
Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,
0.0
in meters, or tenths of miles.
additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk, 0.0Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally
as follows: those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in paren-
theses following another name are alternate names that may
appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted
NGA Maritime—Contact Information
only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,
Maritime Operations Desk such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to
specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the
Toll free 1-800-362-6289 interest of typographical simplicity.
0.0Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily re-
Commercial 571-557-5455 flect recognition of the political status of an area by the United
States Government.
DSN 547-5455 0.0Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference
used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.
E-mail navsafety@nga.mil
0.0Internet Links.—This publication provides Internet links to
Maritime Safety Office web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, includ-
ing but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hy-
DNC web site https://dnc.nga.mil drographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.
NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the
Maritime Domain accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of these
https://msi.nga.mil
web site web sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and
omissions in the contents of these web sites.
Pub. 182
III
International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS)

0.0 U.S. Maritime Advisory System.—The U.S. Maritime
0.0
Code.—The ISPS Code is a comprehensive set of measures to Advisory System is a streamlined inter-agency approach to
enhance the security of ships and port facilities developed in identifying and promulgating maritime security threats. The
response to the perceived threats to ships and port facilities in system replaces Special Warnings to Mariners (State
the wake of the 9/11 attacks in the United States. Information Department), MARAD Advisories (Maritime Administration),
on the ISPS Code can be found at the International Maritime and Marine Safety Information Bulletins (U.S. Coast Guard)
Organization web site: and consists of the following items:
1. U.S. Maritime Alert—Provides basic information
International Maritime Organization Home Page (location, incident, type, date/time) on reported maritime
security threats to U.S. maritime industry interests. U.S.
http://www.imo.org Maritime alerts do not contain policy or recommendations
for specific courses of information.
2. U.S. Maritime Advisory—Provides more detailed
0.0Lights and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not information, when appropriate, through a “whole-of-gov-
described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light ernment” response to an identified maritime threat.
Lists should be consulted for complete information.
0.0National Ocean Claims.—Information on national ocean
claims and maritime boundary disputes, which have been com- Maritime Administration (MARAD)—U.S.
piled from the best available sources, is provided solely in the Maritime Advisory System
interest of the navigational safety of shipping and in no way
constitutes legal recognition by the United States. These non- https://www.marad.dot.gov/environment-and-safety/
recognized claims and requirements may include, but are not office-of-security/msci
limited to:
1. A requirement by a state for advance permission or Winds.—Wind directions are the true directions from which
0.0
notification for innocent passage of warships in the territorial winds blow.

sea.
2. Straight baseline, internal waters, or historic waters Reference List
claims.
3. The establishment of a security zone, where a state The principal sources examined in the preparation of this
0.0
claims to control activity beyond its territorial sea for securi- publication were:
ty reasons unrelated to that state’s police powers in its terri- British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.
0.0
tory, including its territorial sea. Norwegian Sailing Directions.

0.0
0.0Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids and ra- Various port handbooks.
0.0
dio weather services are not described in detail. Publication Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and
0.0
No. 117 Radio Navigational Aids and NOAA Publication, Se- various shipping companies.
lected Worldwide Marine Weather Broadcasts, should be con- Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and docu-
0.0
sulted. ments.
0.0Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other docu-
0.0
charts and are expressed in meters. ments in possession of the Agency.

0.0Telephone and Facsimile Numbers.—Within this publica- Internet web sites, as follows:
0.0
tion, the international telephone and facsimile numbers provid- 0.0 1. Arctic Pictures of Hornsund, Spitsbergen
ed as contact information contain the minimum digits 0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
necessary to dial. Please note that these contact numbers do not 0.0 http://www.bergheims.com/hornsund
include additional digits or special characters, such as (0) or 0.0 2. Bergen City and Port Guide
(+), which may be required when dialing. The necessity of 0.0 http://www.bergenport.com
such digits and characters depend upon numerous factors and 0.0 3. Le Club de Voyageurs
conditions, such as the user’s geolocation and service provider. 0.0 (Paul Kerrien: paul.kerrien@laposte.net)
Mariners are advised to consult their communications equip- 0.0 http://expresscotier.free.fr
ment and service provider manuals for guidance. 0.0 4. The Coast Route, Norge
0.0Time.—Time is normally expressed as local time unless 0.0 http://www.rv17.no
specifically designated as Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). 0.0 5. Eurofishsales Europewide Fishing Port Index
0.0Time Zone.—The Time Zone description(s), as well as in- 0.0 http://www.eurofishsales.com
formation concerning the use of Daylight Savings Time, are in- 0.0 6. Haugesund City and Port Guide
cluded. The World Time Zone Chart is available on the Inter- 0.0 http://www.haugesund.com
net at the web site given below. 0.0 7. Haugesund Home Page
0.0 http://www.haugesund.net
Standard Time Zone of the World Chart 0.0 8. Haugesund (Norway) Regional Home Page
0.0 http://www.haugalandet.net
https://www.cia.gov/maps/world-regional 0.0 9. Instytut Geografii UMK
0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
Pub. 182
IV
0.0 http://www.geo.uni.torun.pl 0.0 http://www.portfocus.com

0.0 10. Karmsund Havnevesen Informerer (Eirik Hustvedt) 0.0 13. The Svalbard Pages
0.0 http://www.karmsund-havn.no 0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
0.0 11. Nordic Shipping Agency Homepage 0.0 http:/www.svalbard.com
0.0 http://www.ndic.no 0.0 14. Uniwersytet Mikolaja Kopernika
0.0 12. Port Focus Homepage (Ports/Harbors/Marinas 0.0 (Marek Szymocha: msz@ka.onet.pl)
0.0 Worldwide) 0.0 http://www.uni.torun.pl
Date of Change: 30 July 2022

Notice to Mariners: 31/2022
Sector Paragraphs
Sector 1 Paragraphs 1.16, 1.29, 1.37, 1.47, and 1.49
Sector 2 Paragraph 2.5
Sector 3 Paragraphs 3.10, 3.37, 3.45, and 3.48
Sector 4 Paragraphs 4.15, 4.24, and 4.31
Sector 5 Paragraphs 5.7, 5.16, and 5.21
Pub. 182
V
0.0 SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 182
Pub. 182
Conversion Tables
Feet to Meters
Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74
10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79
20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84
30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89
40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93
50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98
60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03
70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08
80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13
90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17
Fathoms to Meters
Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46
10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75
20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03
30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32
40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61
50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90
60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19
70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47
80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76
90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05
Meters to Feet
Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53
10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34
20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14
30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95
40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76
50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57
60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38
70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19
80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99
90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80
Meters to Fathoms
Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92
10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39
20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86
30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33
40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79
50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26
60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73
70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20
80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67
90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
VI Pub. 182
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units
°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)
cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)
cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars
dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz
FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)
gt gross tons nrt net registered tons
kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units
Directions
N north S south
NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest
NE northeast SW southwest
ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest
E east W west
ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest
SE southeast NW northwest
SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest
Vessel types
LASH Lighter Aboard Ship Ro-Ro Roll-on Roll-off
LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier
LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier
OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil VLOC Very Large Ore Carrier
Lo-Lo Lift-on Lift-off FSO Floating Storage and Offloading
Vessels (System)
NGL Natural Gas Liquids
Time
ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time
ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time
Water level
MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs
HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps
LW low water MHWS mean high water springs
MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps
MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs
HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide
HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide
LWS low water springs
LWN low water neaps
Communications
D/F direction finder MF medium frequency
R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency
GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency
LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency
Navigation
LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SBM Single Buoy Mooring
NAVSAT Navigation Satellite SPM Single Point Mooring
ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System TSS Traffic Separation Scheme
CBM Conventional Buoy Mooring System VTC Vessel Traffic Center
MBM Multi-Buoy Mooring SysteM VTS Vessel Traffic Service
Miscellaneous
Pub. 182 VII

VIII
The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

AIS Automatic Identification System MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
Code
COLREGS Collision Regulations No./Nos. Number/Numbers
IALA International Association of Lighthouse PA Position approximate
Authorities PD Position doubtful
IHO International Hydrographic Organization Pub. Publication
IMO International Maritime Organization SOLAS International Convention for
Safety of Life at Sea
IMDG Intermational Maritime Dangerous Goods (Code)
LOA length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
UKC Under keel clearance ISPS International Ship and Port facility
Security
Pub. 182
Contents
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II
Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII
Sector 1
Sector 1—Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Sector 2
Sector 2—Norway—Feistein to Geitungane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Sector 3
Sector 3—Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Sector 4
Sector 4—Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Sector 5
Sector 5—Norway—Fedje to Alesund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Sector 6
Sector 6—Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sector 7
Sector 7—Norway—Trondheim to Bodo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Sector 8
Sector 8—Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sector
Sector 9—Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Sector 10
Sector 10—Jan Mayen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Sector 11
Sector 11—Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Index-Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Pub. IX
1.
Sector 1—Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
1.0 Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
Pub. 182
1
3
SECTOR 1
NORWAY—LINDESNES TO JAERENS REV
Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway be

1.0 ens Rev, tidal currents are minimal. Small currents are found in
tween Lindesnes, the S point on the Norwegian coast and Jaer- the narrow channels of the fjords, such as in Skudenesfjorden,
ens Rev, a point approximately 4.6 miles S of Feistein Light. but little is known about these currents.
1.1The highest frequency of sea and swell is from the W quad-
General Remarks rant. Observations along the exposed coast during winter,
showed that 65 per cent of the sea waves were less than 1.5m in
1.1 General.—The SW coast of Norway between height and 9 per cent of the waves observed were greater than
Lindesnes, the S mainland point of the country, and Jaerens 3.6m in height. However, 20 per cent of the recorded observa
Rev trends in a general NW direction for about 68 miles. Sev- tions on swell were recorded to exceed 3.6m in height and at
eral large fjords, and numerous small ones branching in all di- times, the heights reach greater than 7.6m.
rections, indent the coast. Close-lying islands, islets, and rocks 1.1During summer, the weakening of the “Icelandic Low” and
front part of this coastal stretch, particularly the section be- the decrease in wind velocities causes a decrease in swell, and,
tween Lindesnes and Steinodden, the vicinity of Listafjorden, most often, a decrease in sea on the S and W coasts of Norway.
and near Egersund. This part of the coast, although high in Only about 6 per cent of the total observations taken along the
places, is predominately lower than the coast to the N. exposed portions showed a swell wave height in excess of
1.1It includes the two lowland regions of Lista and Jaeren, 3.6m; 68 per cent showed a swell wave height of less than 1.8m
which are unlike any other part of the Norwegian coast. Steep, in height. Observations with regard to sea showed that 83 per-
high mountains back the coastal hills and plains. The fjords of- cent of the total waves observed were less than 1.5m in height
fer numerous well-protected anchorages and harbors. and that 4 per cent were greater than 3.6m in height.
Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the W and S 1.1Sea breezes are frequent along the entire coast in summer.
coasts of Norway reflect the average pressure distribution and Wind speeds increase slightly in autumn and gales become
its seasonal changes. With the shift from high pressure in win- more frequent, especially along the exposed coast.
ter to low pressure in summer, the winds on the W coast 1.1Fog is the main cause of poor visibility. It is most frequent
change from S in winter to N in summer. However, the prevail- over the sea in summer and most frequent in the upper fjords
ing winds only blow from a N or S direction not more than 40 and over land in winter. Occasionally, sea fog occurs in winter
per cent of the time. The usual situation is one of variable when air lying over a warm water surface is blown over colder
winds induced by passing cyclones. water. However, the most frequent fog in winter is radiation
1.1Because of land and sea breezes, and topographical effects, fog. Radiation fog is a nighttime occurrence. It is produced
the wind in the fjords and along the coast is usually different when the land gives up its heat and becomes cooler. The cooler
from that in the open sea. Also, because of the mountainous na- land cools the air immediately above it. This causes a tempera
ture of the coast, any wind blowing from a direction between S ture inversion to form, the temperature increasing with height
and WSW is deflected and becomes S wind, and any wind and fog forms. Usually radiation fog occurs at the heads of
blowing between NW and N is deflected and becomes a N deep fjords when there is severe frost inland and cold winds
wind. blow into the open fjords.
1.1The speed of the wind increases outward from the coast to a 1.1Another form of fog, which particularly affects the upper
distance of 150 miles at times. reaches of fjords, is “frost smoke.” This occurs during spells of
1.1Along the coast, when the winds are fresh or strong, most of- severe frost. It may be expected if the wind is light and from an
ten there is turbulence; when the coast is swept by violent offshore direction and if skies are clear or nearly so over land.
winds and they penetrate the fjords, they become turbulent. 1.1In spring, fog decreases generally, as radiation fog becomes
1.1There are frequent, strong downward currents, usually from less likely because of the gradual warming of the land. It in-
the E or SE, close to the coast, in the vicinity of 60° N. creases only at Skudenes, where sea fog of the warm season in-
1.1 A steep gradient may extend as much as 150 miles seaward creases in frequency. Poor visibility is least common in
from the coast. When a steep gradient develops along the W summer over the land area of this region. However, sea fog is
coast, strong S winds are produced; when deep depressions are not uncommon during the early part of the summer along and
on a NE track, moving between the British Isles and Iceland, over the coast.
gale winds frequently occur. Northwest gales occur occasion 1.1In general, autumn is the season when fog is least common
ally on the W coast when the pressure falls over Scandinavia. on the coast. Over land its frequency increases towards the ap-
1.1In winter, gales and storms are common on both the S and W proach of winter.
coasts. In spring, there are more gales and storms on the W and 1.1The climate of SW Norway is mild in comparison to regions
SW coasts then on the S coast. As summer approaches, the of equal distance from the Equator. The maritime influence,
gales decrease in frequency. The strength of the winds decreas- which is responsible for the warm winters, is responsible for
es in summer, although gales are not unknown, particularly on the warm summers as well. The steady run of the warm water
the W coast. of the North Atlantic Drift, by way of the passage between the
1.1Off the coast and in the fjords between Lindesnes and Jaer- Shetland Islands, the Faeroe Islands, and the English Channel,
Pub. 182
4 Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev
into the North Sea and the Norwegian Sea, results in the water tug boat preparations in northern Norway. The VTS also moni-
of these seas in January being at least 20°C warmer than in oth- tors the seaward approaches to Melkoya, Hammerfest, Bell-
er areas of the same latitude. sund, and Van Mijenfjord on Svalbard.
1.1During all seasons, migratory low pressure centers, accom NOR VTS cooperates in close coordination with the Norwe-
1.1
panied by repeated intrusions of maritime polar air produce gian Coastal Administration’s Department for Emergency Re-
overcast skies, and warm temperatures. sponse; the Norwegian Armed Forces; the Joint Rescue
1.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is Coordination Center, North Norway and South Norway; and
present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast. coastal radio stations. All vessels entering and proceeding in
Floating ice is met in early spring, when small masses may the NOR VTS area of operation are strongly urged to follow
drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and occasionally from the recommendations, guidance, and advice provided by NOR
some of the larger fjords to the W and N of Lindesnes. VTS.
1.1Tides—Currents.—The tidal current just offshore N from
Jaeren to the vicinity of Korsfjorden flood to the N, and begin NOR VTS—Contact Information
about 5 to 6 hours after HW at Bergen and ebb to the S, and be-
gin about 30 minutes to 1 hour before HW at Bergen. From the Call sign NOR VTS
vicinity of Korsfjorden to approximately 60°51'N, the flood VHF VHF channel 16
begins about 6 hours after HW at Bergen, and sets to the E; the
ebb begins about the time of HW at Bergen and sets to the W. Telephone 47-78-989-898
1.1Surface currents in the fjords are predominantly tidal. They Facsimile 47-78-989-899
set inward on the flood and seaward on the ebb, except during
May and June. During these months, increased runoff from E-mail nor.vts@kystverket.no
melting snow and ice cause the surface currents to flow almost
continually seaward. The depths of the surface currents aver 1.1All tankers, all vessels exceeding 5,000 gt and all ocean-go-
age 3.6 to 5.5m, though they may vary from 0.91 to 18.3m at ing tugs in transit outside Norwegian territorial waters (12
times. Current speeds are strongest at the surface, decreasing miles off the baseline) are requested to report the following in-
with depth. An intermediate current sets into the fjords usually formation to NOR VTS upon entering the Norwegian Econom-
between 9.4 and 18.3m. Generally, the water below 73m either ic Zone (NEZ):
has a very weak seaward set or is stagnant, and is renewed only 1. Vessel name.
by a major meteorological disturbance. 2. IMO Number.
1.1Wind may alter the tidal currents in the fjords. Onshore 3. Primary telephone number.
winds may cause a rise in the water level with a corresponding 4. Primary facsimile number.
increase in the velocity and duration of incoming currents. 5. E-mail address.
When the winds cease, currents flow in the opposite direction 6. Primary INMARSAT-C number.
until equilibrium is established. Outflowing currents along the 7. Cargo type, including UN reference number(s) (IM-
sides of the fjords may occur when strong winds blow onshore DG Code).
for a prolonged period. Offshore winds may have an opposite 8. Amount of cargo (metric tons).
effect on the water level and currents. 9. Amount of bunker oil (metric tons).
1.1The term “tidal current” means the resultant of all water 10. Bunker oil (UN reference number).
movements; namely, ocean currents, tidal currents, wind-driv- 11. Number of crew.
en currents, and outflow of water from rivers, fjords, and em- 12. Number of passengers.
bankments. 13. Departure port.
1.1The tidal current of this section is subject to great variations. 14. Departure time in UTC (6 digits—ddhhhh).
West of Lindesnes, where the constant ocean current is weaker, 15. Arrival port.
the wind has more effect, and the current is less regular than on 16. ETA in UTC (6 digits—ddhhhh).
the SE coast between Kristiansand and Oslofjorden. 1.1The VTS will forward information of relevance for safe tran-
1.1A tidal current setting W and N is, however, prevalent espe- sit through the VTS coverage area. Vessels which are damaged
cially in summer. However, with continuous N and W winds or receive damage that can affect safe navigation must immedi-
the current may set S and E for perhaps a week continuously. ately report this information to the VTS.
Near the coast the direction of the current may be toward the 1.1Communication with the VTS can take place via any Norwe-
land. The current setting N off Jaeren may attain a velocity of gian coast radio station by requesting a VHF connection to
about 2 knots. NOR VTS.
1.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR 1.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco- (TSS) in Norwegian waters, including those off Egersund, Far-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to sund, and Lillesand, see Pub. 140, Sailing Directions (Planning
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the Guide) North Atlantic Ocean and Adjacent Seas.
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. 1.1Caution.—Off the coast of Norway, various types of ships
1.1The VTS is designed to promote safe and efficient naviga- and small craft used in the development of oil and gas fields
tion and to protect the marine environment. The VTS will mon- may be encountered.
itor traffic, exchange information, and interact with vessels and 1.1An IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Scheme lies in the ap-
government agencies. It will also coordinate, on a daily basis, proach to Risavika SW of Feistein and may best be seen on the
Pub. 182
Sector 1. Norway—Lindesnes to Jaerens Rev 5
Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field Complex

1.1
chart. The VTS Centers can be contacted 24 hours on VHF chan-

1.1
Norwegian authorities recommend that tankers of 40,000

1.1 nels 18 and 19.
dwt and over, when navigating off the coast of Norway, should
keep to seaward of a line joining the following positions: Off-lying Dangers
a. 57°46.2'N, 7°00.0'E, 13 miles from Lindesnes Light.
b. 57°54.3'N, 6°21.5'E. 1.2 Along the W coast of Norway, there are several sec-
c. 58°16.1'N, 5°35.7'E. tions within which unusually rough seas often prevail. Extreme
d. 58°30.8'N, 5°12.2'E. sea conditions and breaking surf have been observed, often in
e. 58°32.9'N, 4°57.1'E. connection with the currents, in the vicinity of these areas
f. 59°10.7'N, 4°27.5'E. These sections, known as Dangerous Wave Areas, are de-
g. 60°49.2'N, 4°08.1'E. scribed below, as follows:
By keeping seaward of this line, tankers will maintain a dis-
1.1 1. Viking Bank (60°35'N., 2°30'E.).
tance of 12 to 20 miles from the shore. 2. Outer part of Sognesjoen—The area between Hol-
Pilotage Districts.—The entire coast of Norway is divided
1.1 mengra (60°50.6”N., 4°39.0'E.) and Kvereknapp, 8.5 miles
into three Pilotage Districts; pilotage is controlled from the NNE, contains many shallow areas. When the ebb current
three VTS Centers, as follows: from Sognefjorden passes over the area and meets wind and
1. Horten—Covers the S coast from the Swedish border waves from the opposite direction, choppy seas form. Tum-
leading W to Egersund (58°27'N,. 6°00'E.). bling breakers have also been observed.
2. Kvitsoy—Covers the W coast from Egersund leading 3. Buefjorden (61°15'N., 4°42'E.)—Along the route
N to the parallel of 65°08'N. At Kvitsoy, pilots can be ar- from Gasvaerosen (61°12.0'N., 4°42.5'E.) through Bue-
ranged to board at the following positions: fjorden to Geita Light (61°16.2'N., 4°48.8'E.), rough seas oc-
a. Feistein (58°51.0'N., 5°30.3'E.). cur when the winds are from the W or NW. If there is also an
b. Skudenesfjorden West (59°02.0'N., 5°10.0'E.)—Via ebb current at the same time, a choppy ground swell occurs
helicopter and only by prior arrangement for vessels over and tumbling breakers have been observed.
30,000 tons carrying hazardous or polluting cargo. 4. Stattlandett (62°12'N., 5°00'E.)—An exposed and
c. Skudenesfjorden (59°06.5'N., 5°27.0'E.). dangerous area where winds from SW to N raise heavy seas.
d. Karmsundet (59°13.1'N., 5°21.0'E.). The ebb current, running at a rate of 2 to 4 knots, shortens
3. Lodingen—Covers the W and N coasts of Norway be- the swell and causes heavy tumbling seas. The waters around
tween the parallel of 65°08'N and the Russian border. Haugsholmen (62°11'N., 5°23'E.) and Stalrevet (62°13'N.,
Pub. 182
1.1 Reused with permission from Norwegian Petroleum (https://www.norskpetroleum.no)

1.1 Norwegian Offshore Oil and Gas Field
5°11'E.) are known as particularly rough areas. many, and SW to England and may best be seen on the chart.
Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field (56°33'N., 3°13'E.) is situated about Eldfisk and West Edofisk fields are located within 11 miles
1.2
150 miles SW of Lindesnes Light. A complex of production of the Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field. They consist of several pro-
platforms, gas and oil pipelines, and tanker-loading systems is duction platforms, some of which are equipped with aeronauti-
located in the field. The single point mooring (SPM) tanker- cal radiobeacons and racons.
loading systems are generally removed when the field-to-shore Hod Field, Valhall Field, and Gyda Field lie 23 miles SSE,
1.2
pipelines are operating normally, but installations remain on the 17 miles SSE, and 21 miles N, respectively, of Ekofisk Oil and
sea bed. Pipelines extend N to the Statpipe System, SE to Ger- Gas Field.
Pub. 182
Varg Field, with a well head platform standing in position

1.2
58°05'N, 1°54'E, was shut down in 2016. Decommissioning is

expected to be completed by the end of 2021.
Glitne Oil Field, with a well head situated in position
1.2
58°41.6'N, 1°40.4'E, was shut down in 2013.

A wreck is located in position 58°41.2'N, 1°40.1'E.
1.2
Ula Gas Field (57°06'N., 2°51'E.) is situated about 36 miles

1.2
NNW of Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field and consists of three plat-
forms connected by bridges.
Statpipe Platform No. 1 (58°11'N., 2°28'E.) is situated
1.2
about 103 miles SW of Feistein and equipped with a racon.

Submarine gas pipelines extend N and S to other fields and NE
to the coast.
Sleipner Gas Field (58°21'N., 1°54'E.) lies 23 miles NW of
1.2
the platform.
For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sectors 2 through 6.
1.2
For oil and gas fields NW of the above, see Pub. 192, Sailing
1.2
Directions (Enroute) North Sea.

Tambar Oil Field (56°58'N., 2°57'E.) lies 8.5 miles SSE of
1.2
Ula Field, where a lighted platform is located above the Gyda

and Ula gas line.
For more information on North Sea petroleum operations
1.2
visit the Norwegian Petroleum web site.
Norwegian Petroleum
https://www.norskpetroleum.no
Lindesnes to Steinodden
1.3 The coast line from Lindesnes to Steinodden mea-
sures about 18 miles and runs in a NW direction. Steinodden is
on the W extremity of the peninsula of Lista. The coast varies
in height, is mostly rocky, and contains trees and several small
beaches.
1.3Gronsfjorden, between the peninsula of Spangereid and the
mainland W, has steep and rugged shores. A group of rocky is- 1.3 Lindesnes Light
lands separates the entrance of the fjord from the entrance of
Rosfjorden. The shores of the latter are steep, rising to about Varnes.
152m. Between the entrance to Rosfjorden and Farsund for
about 6 miles WNW, there are many islands. The coast is in- 1.4 Lindesnes (57°59'N., 7°03'E.) is the S point on the
dented and rocky, but not steep. Norwegian peninsula. An important landfall, it extends SW
1.3The port of Farsund is at the entrance of Lyngdalsfjordenen. from the mainland and is on the S extremity of the rocky and
This fjord and its branch, Oftefjorden, penetrate deeply inland. forested peninsula of the Spangereid peninsula. It is about 40m
Their steep, and generally forested, shores rise to a height of high and lies on red, rugged, and uneven land. A light is shown
about 183m. from a tower.
1.3The peninsula of Lista lies W of Farsund. In the SW part, it Neskletten and Lamekletten, two small banks within 1.5
1.4
is low-lying, but in the NE part it rises to heights of about miles S and 2 miles WSW, respectively, of Lindesnes, have
244m. There are several patches of marshland and extensive ar- least known depths of 25m. In heavy weather, the sea breaks on
eas of farmland in the SW part. Neskletten.
1.3Aspect.—The rounded summit of Homsknipen, 477m high, Bispen, a small round above-water rock marked by an iron
1.4
is located about 11 miles ENE of Steinodden. A conspicuous beacon, is located about 1.3 miles W of Lindesnes and is the
radio tower stands on Kalaskniben, a hill situated 1.5 miles southernmost of all the dangers W of Lindesnes. In rough
NNE of Homsknipen. weather, the sea breaks constantly on the shoals N and E of
1.3Caution.—Mackerel fishing, by means of drift nets, purse Bispen.
seines, and trailing lines, flourishes along the S coast of Nor- The coast between Lindesnes and Einarsneset, about 10
1.4
way from May to September. The approximate area of greatest miles WNW, is indented. From the offing, the land appears to
activity is W of Lillesand to Lista. form a large bay studded with islands and islets.
1.3A restricted area, in which navigation is controlled by regu- Skarvoy, about 6 miles NW of Lindesnes, and Faeroy, about
1.4
lation, lies up to 1 mile from the coast between Einarsneset and 0.7 mile E of the S extremity of Einarsneset, can be easily iden-
Pub. 182
tified. The former has a hill resembling a sugarloaf in its SW and Haoy are located within 0.75 mile NW of Kjepsoy
part. (58°01'N., 7°00'E.). They are nearly joined together by their
fringing shoals. A group of rocks, partly above water, lie about
1.5 Gronsfjorden (58°02'N., 7°02'E.) is about 5 miles 183m SW of Langholm. A detached 11m patch, about 183m
long and up to 1 mile wide. It trends in a general NE direction farther SW, is the outermost shoal in this vicinity.
along the NW side of the Spangereid peninsula. Easy of access, 1.7 Detached islets, rocks, and shoals extend up to about 0.5
it is entered about 2 miles NNW of Lindesnes at the SE end of mile from the W side of Marquee and Kjepsoy.
Raevoy. Gronsfjorden is connected at its inner end with 1.7 Rosfjorden, which is easily recognized from seaward, lies
Lenefjorden by Jasundet. about 2 miles NW of Gronsfjorden.
1.5Several islets and numerous rocks and shoals extend about 1 1.7 From Hausvigodden (58°03'N., 6°59'E.), the E entrance
mile W and 2 miles S of Raevoy. Sveinene, two small low point, the fjord trends NNE for about 5 miles and has few dan-
rocks which are almost always marked by breakers, are located gers. A light is shown from the point. There are some good an-
about 0.7 mile ENE of Bispen. There are general depths of 146 chorages on both sides of the fjord. This deep fjord has a
to 183m, with few islets or dangers. maximum width of 1 mile; its narrowest part, with a width of
1.5Jasundet (58°04'N., 7°09'E.), which connects Gronsfjorden about 0.1 mile, is located about midway through the fjord.
with Lenefjorden, is very narrow and has a least fairway depth General depths in the approaches and inside the fjord are 55 to
of 3m; a bridge, with a vertical clearance of 14.9m, spans the 146m.
narrows. Two 1.8m rocks are located in the passage, one on ei- 1.7 The approach to Rosfjorden lies between Herreholmen
ther side of the channel. Currents in Jasundet attain velocities (58°02'N., 6°58'E.), a moderately-high islet of reddish color lo-
of 3 or 4 knots. cated about 0.2 mile NW of Sutnoy, and Ulleroy, an 86m high
1.5Lenefjorden has great depths throughout most of its 5.25 island nearly 1 mile WNW. A light is shown from a wooden
miles length, but can only be reached by vessels that can pass hut on the NW extremity of Herreholmen.
through Jasundet. 1.7 Midtfjordenskjaer, about 0.4 mile WNW of the W extremity
of Herreholmen, is marked by a black beacon with a white
1.6 Stusvik (58°00'N., 7°02'E.), on the E side of Grons- band. A 7.6m shoal patch lies about 183m N of Midtfjordensk-
fjorden, has a harbor for small vessels. The depth between the jaer.
jetties is 6.9m; farther in, depths from 3.7 to 6.9m are found. 1.7 Ytre Rosfjordenskjaerene and Indre Rosfjordenskjaerene,
The seas in the harbor may become quite rough during S and two groups of rocks, partly above water, are on the W side of
SW winds. the Rosfjorden approach between Midtfjordenskjaer and the
1.6Hovdebukta (58°04'N., 7°06'E.), on the NW side of the mainland to the N.
fjord, is a good harbor with depths up to 30m, sand, near its 1.7 Store Kubbesteinen and Lille Kubbesteinen, two above-wa-
head. ter rocks, are located on the W side of the approach about 0.5
1.6Flatstadbukta (58°05'N., 7°07'E.), on the N shore of the mile and 0.2 mile, respectively, SSW of the SE extremity of
fjord, has anchorage, in 16.9m, mud. Care must be taken to Ulleroy.
avoid a 2.7m rock that lies in the E side of the bay. 1.7 Bradsteinen, with less than 1.8m, lies between the two rocks
1.6Asevagen, about 0.4 mile E of Flatstadbukta, is a good har- and somewhat to the W. Other rocks lie between Bradsteinen
bor with anchorage, in 24 to 26m, mud. The best anchorage is and Ulleroy.
near the W part of the bay. The entrance to Asevagen is re- 1.7 Bjorneskjaer, about 0.1 mile NNW of Langholm, is above
stricted by an overhead cable with a clearance of about 15.2m. water; other above and below-water rocks lie within 137m N of
1.6During good weather, no difficulty should be experienced in it.
entering Gronsfjorden. Strong W winds, a heavy sea, and the 1.7 Bjorneskjaerflu, awash, lies about 183m SSW of Bjornesk-
backwash from the mainland sometimes combine to make jaer.
steering difficult.
1.6Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Raevoysund 1.8 Grotholm (58°02'N., 6°58'E.) is the larger of two is-
(58°02'N., 7°00'E.), the narrow passage between the N end of lets that lie about 0.25 mile NE of Herreholmen. Several rocks,
Raevoy and the mainland, and in Hundalshamn. A light is with depths of 1.8 to 4.6m, lie within 183m W, NW, and E of
shown on the NW side of the passage. Vessels with local Grotholm; two small islets and some rocks lie between the lat-
knowledge can anchor in the W part of Raevoysund, N of the ter and the mainland.
NW extremity of Raevoy, in 29 to 40m, clay. Raevoysund is 1.8Skonevigflu, with a depth of 4.6m, is located on the E side of
spanned at its W end by a fixed bridge with a vertical clearance Rosfjorden approach about 0.2 mile S of Hausvigodden.
of 20m. A light is shown from the middle of the bridge. Small 1.8Teroy (58°03'N., 6°56'E.) is located about 0.1 mile N of Ul-
vessels can anchor, in 20 to 29m, in Hundalshamn. leroy, from which it is separated by Ulleroysund. A light is
1.6Numerous above and below-water dangers, some of them shown from the SW extremity of Teroy.
marked by iron perches or beacons, lie in the several approach- 1.8Andreholm lies close off the W entrance point of Ros-
es to Raevoysund. fjorden, about 0.4 mile WNW of Hausvigodden. Bukkene,
1.6See Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pub. 180 - Arctic about 0.1 mile NE of Andreholm and the outermost danger on
Ocean for examples of Norwegian fixed marks, including iron this side of the fjord entrance, is awash; it is marked by an iron
perches. post.
1.8Other rocks, above and below-water, lie close W and NW of
1.7 Langholm (58°02'N., 6°58'E.), Sutnoy, Kjerringoy, Bukkene. A rock, with a depth of 5.9m, lies about 137m NW of
Pub. 182
Hausvigodden. Ostre Roholmflu, about 0.4 mile SE of Roholme, has a depth

1.10
of 4.5m; a 10.1m depth lies between them.

1.9 Eitlandskjaera (58°03'N., 6°59'E.), partly above wa- Vestre Bradsteinen (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), marked by an iron
1.10
ter, lies on the E side of the fjord about 0.6 mile NE of Hausvi- perch and almost always marked by breakers, is located about
godden. Boroflu, 0.2 mile farther NE is a reef with depths of 0.4 mile S of Roholme. Vestre Roholmflu, about 0.5 mile SSW
2m or less over it. of Roholme, has a depth of 10m.
1.9Boro, the largest island in Rosfjorden, is on the E side of the
fjord about 1 mile within the entrance. Shoal water extends 1.11 Ulleroysund (58°03'N., 6°55'E.), between Ulleroy
about 183m from the W shore of Rosfjorden abreast Boro. and Teroy, is a good roadstead where vessels can anchor, in 29
1.9Shoal water also fringes the head of the fjord for a distance to 35m, sand and clay. The best anchorage is located about 0.1
of about 183m offshore and several other short sections of the mile SW of the light on the SW side of Teroy.
W shore, particularly in the narrows of the fjord. Directions.—Of the two principal approaches to this sound,
1.9An overhead cable, with a clearance of 14m, spans the nar- the E is the better and the only one described.
row passage between the mainland and the E extremity of Approaching from the S, steer for the white sector of the
1.11
Boro. light on the E extremity of Ulleroy, which leads W of Bispen

1.9A light is shown from Syrhoved, about 2 miles NNE of and the islets and dangers extending SW from Marquee and
Boro, on the W side of the fjord. then E of Store Kubbesteinen.
1.9Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Borobukta, located After passing Store Kubbesteinen, steer to pass between
1.11
on the NE side of Boro, in 25m, clay. An 8.7m shoal is located Lille Kubbesteinen and Midfjordenskjaer, then through Ulle-
about 91m off the N end of Boro. roysund, taking care to avoid a 7.8m depth, marked by a black
1.9Anchorage can also be taken on the W side of the fjord, at and red spar buoy, which lies about 0.1 mile NE of Teroy light,
Agnefest, in depths of 25 to 35m. and keeping close to Ulleroy when abreast Teroy to avoid the
Directions.—Vessels approaching Rosfjorden should pass to foul ground extending about 91m S from the latter islet.
NW of Herreholmen and Skonevigflu and SE of Store Kub- The green sector of the light shown from the SW extremity
1.11
besteinen, Midtfjordenskjaer, and Ytre Rosfjordenskjaerene. One of Teroy, bearing between 306 and 319°, leads through the E
white sector of Hausvigodden Light leads clear of all dangers. part of Ulleroysund to within about 0.3 mile of the light.
1.9Pass Hausvigodden at a safe distance, taking care to avoid Skarvoyhamn is on the S side of Skarvoy, the next island N
1.11
the 5.9m rock about 137m NW of it. After passing that point, of Teroy. Anchorage can be taken in the outer part of the har-
another white sector of the same light indicates the fairway as bor, in 29 to 40m. Skarvoyflu, a 4m depth, lies about 0.2 mile
far N as Boro. Vessels are then guided by the white sector of N of the W extremity of Teroy. A 1m depth, marked by an iron
the light shown from Syrhoved, and N of Syrhoved by the perch, lies about 0.15 mile S of Skarvoyflu.
white sector astern. Sandholmane are two islets that lie on a reef on the W side of
1.11
Skarvoyhamn and close within the harbor entrance. The reef

1.10 Spindsfjorden (58°05'N., 6°56'E.), the next fjord W fringes and extends about 137m from the shore.
of Rosfjorden, trends NNE for about 3 miles from the SE end
of Skarvoy. Its approach lies between the mainland, on the E, 1.12 The approach to the port of Farsund lies between Lan-
and Ulleroy, Teroy, and Skarvoy, on the W. Two small bays ex- goy and a number of islets and reefs that extend NE toward that
tend E from its S part. Numerous dangers border the narrow island from Einarsneset (58°03'N., 6°47'E.).
channel and local knowledge is required. Langoy (58°04'N., 6°52'E.) is the largest island in the ap-
1.12
Ystesteinen (58°01'N., 6°53'E.), a cluster of above and be-

1.10 proach and lies on the NE side of the principal fairway. A light
low-water rocks, lies about 2 miles SW of Ulleroy. This isolat- is shown from a position about 0.2 mile NW of the S extremity
ed group is outside all other dangers in the area and will be of Langoy. A light is shown from the W side of Langoy in a po-
easily recognized. Ostre Steinsflu, a 16.5m patch, lies about sition about 1 mile NNW of Bremerodden, the S extremity of
0.2 mile ESE of the largest rock. Langoy.
Midfjordenskjaer (58°02'N., 6°54'E.) is located about 1
1.10 Pilot boarding station for Farsund lies 2 miles S of Sondre
1.12
mile NE of Ystesteinen. A detached 7m rock lies about 0.1 Katland Light (Sore Katland), (58°03'N., 6°51'E.) when ap-
mile NE of Midfjordenskjaer. Store Korken and Lille Korken, proaching from S. A racon is situated at the light. A small inlet
above-water rocks, and a detached 1.8m depth, lie between lies in the approach to Farsund, about 1 mile E of the SE ex-
Midfjordenskjaer and the SE extremity of Vikelen, about 0.7 tremity of Einarsneset.
mile NE. A light is shown from the S side of Store Haoy, an islet
1.12
Breiflu, with depths of 3.7 to 7.8m, lies about 0.5 mile S of

1.10 which lies about 0.1 mile NW of the NW extremity of Langoy.
Vikelen. Several 6.4 to 8.7m depths lie between them. Several islets and some rocks and reefs lie between Store Ei-
1.12
Roholme (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), about 1 mile W of Vikelen,

1.10 geroy, on the W side of the approach to Farsund and Store
reddish-colored, and easily identified, is the largest of a group Haoy.
of four islets. A 5m depth lies about 0.2 mile N of Roholme. A light is shown from the SE extremity of Sandoy, which is
1.12
Nordre Roholmflu a 14.6m depth about 0.2 mile NNW of Ro- located near the mainland about 0.6 mile WNW of Sondre Kat-
holme. land.
Odegardsgrunn, with a depth of 16.5m, and Kletten, with a
1.10
depth of 26m, are located about 1 mile S and 1.25 miles SW, 1.13 Faeroyflua, a 3.2m depth, marked on its S side by a
respectively, of Roholme. lighted buoy, lies about 1 mile SSW of Sondre Katland. Villa-
Pub. 182
flua, with a depth of 11.9m, and Austre Mellomflua, with a Sondre Haoyflua, lying between the NW end of Langoy and
1.15
depth of 5.5m, are located about 0.2 mile NE and 0.25 mile N, Store Haoy, has a depth of 4m and is marked on the SW side by
respectively, of Faeroyflua. a buoy.
Gunnarskjaer, awash, and Skarveskjaer, with a depth of
1.13 Vestre Haoyflua, on the SW side of the fairway 0.1 mile SW
1.15
4.6m, lie on the SE edge of the shoal that extends up to 0.3 of Store Haoy, has a depth of 4.7m over it and is marked by a
mile S and SE from Faeroy. Kalveflu, with a depth of 1.8m and buoy. Nordre Haoyflua, a 5.3m depth marked by a light, lies on
marked by a buoy, is on the W edge of the shoal. Breakers usu- the NE side of the channel about 0.1 mile WNW of Store Haoy.
ally mark these dangers. Lille Haoy and Lamholme lie on the SW side of the channel,
1.15
Revoyflu, marked on its N side by a buoy, is located about 1

1.13 about 0.1 mile WSW and 0.3 mile W of Store Haoy.
mile SW of Sondre Katland. Revoyskjaer, marked by an iron Engoy and Faroy front the town of Farsund, which is situated
1.15
beacon, lies near the S end of Revoyskjaergrunn about 1 mile about 1 mile NW of Store Haoy. Engoy is the S islet of the two.
SW of Sondre Katland. Skyskjer, about 0.4 mile SE of Engoy, is one of a group of
Revoy (58°03'N., 6°48'E.), about 0.3 mile S of the SE ex-
1.13 above and below-water rocks and is marked by an iron beacon.
tremity of Einarsneset, lies on foul ground together with a few Fisholmflua, on the NW side of Fisholmen about 0.2 mile
1.15
other smaller islets. A beacon stands on Revoy. A 7.3m rock is SE of Engoy, is marked by an iron perch.
located about 0.3 mile WSW of the S extremity of Revoy; a
12m depth lies about 183m farther WSW. Kraka is the south- 1.16 Farsund (58°06'N., 6°49'E.) (World Port Index No.
easternmost islet in the group. 23520), the inner harbor, lies between Engoy and Faroy on the
Sjuhausflua, marked by an iron perch, is located about 0.2
1.13 E, and the mainland on the W. The outer harbor lies between
mile W of Revoy; a reef extends about 0.1 mile N from it. Fisholmen and Sundsodden, a mainland projection about 0.3
Foul ground, on which the islet of Klubben lies, extends
1.13 mile SSW of Engoy. A causeway extends from the NW end of
nearly 0.3 mile E from the SW end of Einarsneset. Faroy to the NE end of the peninsula, on which the town of
Oddeflua, about 0.1 mile NE of Revoy, has a depth of 2.7m
1.13 Farsund stands on the side of a steep hill. Athreespan Bridge,
and is marked by a buoy. with a maximum clearance of 22m, connects Faroy with the E
entrance point of Lyngdalsfjordenen.
1.14 The principal approach channel to Farsund leads be- Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds in winter blow
1.16
tween Faeroyflua and the Roholmane group; then between from S and SE; in summer nearly half of the time the prevail-
Sondre Katland and Lindholmbaen; then W of Svartskjaer and ing winds blow from N or NW. These sea winds are largely re-
Brattholme; E of Bukkegrunnane, Futeskjaer, and Risholme; sponsible for the very mild temperatures in winter and the
and then between Lille Haoy and Store Haoy and toward the overall lack of extreme temperatures. Precipitation is high. The
respective parts of the harbor. harbor is ice free.
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels and
1.14 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise is about 0.3m. No local
1.16
is advisable for all vessels. Pilots should be requested through currents are reported in the Farsund approach. Winds have
the pilot stations at Hidra or Oksoy. Pilots board vessels about some effect on tides.
1 mile S of Faeroy. Depths—Limitations.—A depth of 33m is available
1.16
Several dangers lie near this channel, but a least depth of

1.14 through the approach, but Nordre Haoyflua, a 5.3m depth, lies
33m is charted in the fairway as far as the outer anchorage of close to the channel in the narrows between Store Haoy and
the port. Lille Haoy. General depths in the outer harbor are 14.6 to 29m;
A 14m depth is charted about 0.4 mile SSE of Sondre Kat-
1.14 in the inner harbor off the town the depths are 4.5 to 8.8m. Ves-
land; a depth of 10.1m lies about 0.5 mile ENE from the same sel up to 15,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 9.5m, can be ac-
islet. commodated. For more berthing details are shown in the
Lindholmbaen, a 4.6m depth, lies on the E side of the fair- accompanying table titled Farsund—Berth Information.
way about 0.2 mile WNW of the N end of Lindholmen
(58°03'N., 6°52'E.), a 26m high islet, and is marked by a spar Farsund—Berth Information
buoy. A 14m depth lies about 0.5 mile W of the same extremi-
ty. Berth Length Depth Remarks
Inner Harbor Terminal
1.15 Bukkegrunnane (58°04'N., 6°51'E.), marked on its E
side by a spar buoy, is the E edge of an area of reefs and islets General cargo
No. 1 130m 7.5-10.0m
which extends from a position about 0.4 mile NE of Sondre and dry bulk.
Katland to a position 0.5 mile NNW of that islet. A detached Deep Water
4.8m depth lies about 0.2 mile NE of Sondre Katland.
General cargo
Lyngholme is located about 0.7 mile NNE of Sondre Katland No. 10 130m 15.0m
and dry bulk.
1.15
and about 0.2 mile SE of the S end of Uroy. A rocky patch,

with a least depth of 3.2m, extends about 0.2 mile S from Lyn- Industrial Terminal
gholme, and a detached 5m depth lies 0.2 mile SE of it. A 7m No. 2 100m 7.5-8.5m Project heavy.
depth lies midway between Lyngholme and Uroy.
Futeskjaera, above water, lies about 0.1 mile E of Lyn-
1.15
gholme.
A 3.2m depth lies between Risholme and Uroy.
1.15
Pub. 182
Farsund—Berth Information Two unmarked rocks, with depths of 7.6 and 9m, lie on the
1.18
W side of the roadstead within about 206m of the E side of

Berth Length Depth Remarks Sondoy. The deeper rock never breaks.
Multipurpose Terminal Engelskjerflua, on the E side of the roadstead about 0.3 mile
1.18
NNW of Sondre Katland, is marked by a buoy.

Chemical, dry Raudsteinflua, at the N end of the dangers extending N from
1.18
Multipurpose 130m 14.5m bulk, breakbulk, Sondre Katland, has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by
and ro-ro. an iron perch.
A detached 6.9m depth lies in the NE part of the roadstead
1.18
Aspect.—A light is shown from the SW side of Faroy in

1.16 about 0.3 mile ESE of the S extremity of Lille Eigeroy.
range with a light shown from the SE side of Engoy. Lights are Directions to Ostre Faeroysundet.—From the vicinity of
1.18
shown from the S side of Faroy and a post in the water close E position 58°02.5'N, 6°50'E, the approach route to Farsund track
of the N extremity of Engoy. leads to Flama roadstead by passing Sondre Katland Light
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and requires 24 hours
1.16 (58°03.4'N, 6°50.5'E.) via Ostre Faeroysund, the passage be-
notice. Pilotage should be ordered through SafeSeaNet or tween Sondre Katland and Faeroy, which can be used in all
alternatively the Horten Pilot Booking Center. The pilot boards weather conditions.
in position 58°01.5'N, 6°50.0'E. This channel is approached between Faeroyflua and the Ro-
1.18
Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16.

1.16 holme group until the range lights shown from Lille Eikeroy
Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in the inner harbor;
1.16 are in line. When on the range line, care must be taken to avoid
the usual anchorage is N of Gulsteinen between the town and Foeroysundflua.
Gasholme. Mooring rings and dolphins are located along the
shore. Larger vessels can anchor anywhere between Gulsteinen 1.19 Kveldsund (58°04'N., 6°54'E.) separates the NE end of
and Skjolnes, the S entrance point of Lundevagen about 0.25 Langoy from the W extremity of Ytre Bugdoy. This narrow, rock
mile SE of Sundsodden. obstructed channel is near the E end of Indre Spindsfjorden, 0.25
to 0.5 mile in width, lying between Langoy and the mainland, N.
1.17 Lundevagen, the inlet immediately S of Farsund, ex- It trends E from Store Haoy for about 2 miles. Several anchorag-
tends W a little over 1 mile from its entrance between Sund- es are located in small coves that lead off from the inlet.
sodden and Skjolnes and narrows to a width of about 137m in a Vikholme lies close off the N shore of the inlet about 0.5
1.19
position about 1 mile from the entrance. mile NW of the NE extremity of Langoy. Shoal water extends
Kraka, an above-water rock, lies about 0.1 mile W of the nar-
1.17 about 137m S from Vikholme.
rows. A 3m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 73m SE of An overhead cable, with a clearance of 30m, spans the inlet,
1.19
Kraka. When passing through the narrows, vessels should keep about 0.3 mile E of Vikholme. A submarine cable crosses the
close to the S shore. inlet about 0.3 mile W of Vikholme.
A submarine cable is laid across the entrance to Lundevagen.
1.17 Midfjordenskjeret, a detached above-water rock, is located
1.19
A concrete wharf, 135m long, with a depth alongside of

1.17 in the W approach to the inlet in a position about 0.2 mile NW
14.5m, lies on the S shore of the inlet near the entrance. Anoth- of the N extremity of Store Haoy. A 16m depth lies about 0.2
er concrete wharf, 106m long, with depths alongside of 5 to mile ESE of Midfjordenskjeret.
9m, lies on the S shore close to the head of the inlet. Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of
1.19
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take sheltered anchorage in

1.17 14m, between the N side of Vikholme and the mainland; in a
the inner part of Lundevagen, in 16.5 to 18.3m, good holding depth of 22m, in a creek on the N side of Langoy, about 0.4
ground. The head of the inlet shoals to a distance of about 0.1 mile S of Vikholme; and, in a depth of 15m, in a cove about 1
mile offshore. mile E of Vikholme.
Anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge may be
1.19
1.18 Saltrak (58°03'N., 6°49'E.) is an island close SW of taken, in depths of 8m to 14m, sand, off Birkenes, 0.6 mile
Sandoy. Palsflua, on the end of a spit extending about 0.2 mile ENE of Store Haoy.
SW from Saltrak, is awash, always breaks, and is marked by an
iron perch. Sauflua is located on the edge of foul ground that 1.20 Lyngdalsfjorden extends about 4 miles NE from Far-
extends about 0.1 mile E from the SE extremity of Einarsneset. sund and then divides into two arms, each about 4 miles long.
It has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by an iron perch. The E arm continues under the name of Lyngdalsfjorden; the
Flama (58°04'N., 6°50'E.), a roadstead, lies between Faeroy, NW arm is known as Oftefjorden. About 1 mile from the head
on the S, Sandoy and the mainland on the W, and Lille Eigeroy of the latter fjord, Drangsfjorden branches NE for about 2
on the N. Reefs and islets extend N from Sondre Katland on miles.
the E. The roadstead is roomy and easy of access. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 22m at the center,
1.20
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken here, in about 33m,

1.18 spans the entrance of Lyngdalsfjorden. About 1 mile within the
clay, with good holding ground. entrance, an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m,
Caution.—Katlandflua, with a depth of less than 1.8m and
1.18 crosses the fjord.
lying within 0.1 mile W of Sondre Katland, is marked by an Oen (58°06'N., 6°47'E.), an island in the SW part of Lyngda-
1.20
iron perch and a buoy. lsfjorden, is separated from the mainland on its S, W, and N
Foeroysundflua, a detached 8m depth, lies close to the Lille
1.18 sides by channels which are, in places, both narrow and shal-
Eigeroy range line about 0.2 mile WNW of Sondre Katland. low. Helvigfjorden, W of Oen, has a depth of 3.2m in its ap-
Pub. 182
proach, which leads S and W of the island. Listahamn, lying between the SE end of Brekneholme and
1.22
With the exception of a shoal extending across the entrance

1.20 the mainland, is protected by a mole extending from the islet
of the E arm of Lyngdalsfjorden and a few scattered dangers, and one extending WNW from the mainland.
the fjords are deep throughout. Small vessels may anchor in Listahamn, in depths from 4 to
1.22
A 5m shoal lies on the E side of Lyngdalsfjorden entrance

1.20 6m, with their sterns secured to mooring rings because of limit-
about 137m W of the NW extremity of Spindsodden. Subma- ed swinging room. During SW storms, there is a considerable
rine cables are laid from Farsund to Oen and E of Kilsholme to current in the outer harbor.
the mainland. A submarine cable is laid across Lyngdals- Several above and below-water rocks lie within about 152m
1.22
fjorden, about 1 mile E of Farsund. of the S shore of Brekneholme.

From the S entrance point to the inner part of Lyngdals-
1.20 A projecting quay on the E side of Listahamn has depths of
1.22
fjorden, a submarine cable is laid NW across Oftefjorden to a up to 4m alongside.

position about 0.5 mile NE of Herred, at the head of a bight in- Lista Light (58°07'N., 6°34'E.), exhibited from a stone tow-
1.22
denting the W side of Oftefjorden. er, 34m in height, is on a level plain which projects about 2
Another cable is laid from the S entrance point along Lyn-
1.20 miles from the foot of the high land between Farsund and Lis-
gdalsfjorden to a position about 0.5 mile W of Lyngdal, located tafjorden and terminates in a low sandy shore bordered by
at the head of the fjord. ranges of sand hills.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Bjorsviken, on the
1.20
E side of Oen, in 11.9m, pebbles and shells.

Several anchorages are located in the E arm of Lyngdals-
1.20
fjorden; a 5.5m channel leads across the shoal fronting this

arm.
Anchorage can be taken off Herred, in 14.6 to 22m. Several
1.20
dangers lie in the NE part of the bight that Herred lies at the
head of. An anchorage is also located near the head of Of-
tefjorden, in a depth of about 27m.
1.21 The coast between Einarsneset and Steinodden, about

8.5 miles NW, is indented by several shallow bights. The first
1.5 miles of the coast is fringed by reefs and islets to a distance
of about 1.5 miles offshore.
Along the 7 miles stretch of the Lista peninsula, from
1.21
Steinodden to Rauna, the bottom slopes steeply. This leads to

sea waves being both reflected and deflected. In addition, the
current conditions in the area are variable with eddy forma-
tions, and the sea can be very rough. Heavy breakers have been 1.22 By Bjoertvedt (Own work) [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org/
observed. licenses/by-sa/3.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
Hummerdus is an islet close W of the S extremity of Einars-
1.21
Lista Light
1.22
neset. Between the islet and Havik, about 1.5 miles WNW,
there is a considerable extent of reddish-colored sand, which Steinodden to Svaholmane
has sometimes been mistaken for Mandalssand, a strip of yel-
low sand about 12 miles E of Lindesnes, to which it certainly 1.23 Steinodden (58°07'N., 6°33'E.) is the W extremity of
bears some slight resemblance. Such a mistake is possible in the peninsula of Lista. Numerous above and below-water rocks
thick weather. lie within 0.4 mile of Steinodden.
Havik (58°04'N., 6°44'E.) appears as a dark brown hill rising
1.21
Verevagen is a small shallow cove about 0.5 mile ENE of
1.23
from a small point 2 miles WNW of Einarsneset. Steinodden. Perches and beacons mark its two entrance chan-
Svaneflu (58°03'N., 6°45'E.), a 2.1m depth located about 1.5
1.21
nels. A flagstaff stands at the head of the cove.
miles SW of Einarsneset and marked by a spar buoy, is the out- Stavestoflua, a 1.8m depth, lies 0.2 mile offshore about 1
1.23
ermost of the many dangers in the vicinity. Between Svaneflu mile NE of Steinodden.
and Rauna the known dangers lie within 1 mile of shore. Varnesholme lies close NW of Varnes (58°11'N., 6°38'E.),
1.23
Rauna (58°04'N., 6°40'E.), an island, is located about 3

1.21
the S entrance of Listafjorden. Rocks border the SW and NW
miles W of Einarsneset. Shoal water extends up to 0.3 mile S sides of this small islet.
from Rauna.
Ostre Rauneflua, a 2.5m depth, lies near the coastal bank
1.21
1.24 Listafjorden (58°11'N., 6°37'E.) branches to form
about 0.25 mile SE of Rauna. A 1.5m depth lies about 0.3 mile Fedafjorden, Stolsfjorden, and Flekkefjorden. Fedafjorden runs
ENE of Ostre Rauneflua. Vestre Rauneflua is a 3.5m patch NE between steep forested shores, often rising to a height of
about 0.7 mile W of Rauna. about 305m. Flekkefjorden runs N from Stolsfjorden and has
steep shores up to the port of Flekkefjorden at its head.
1.22 Brekneholme (58°06'N., 6°35'E.) is an inconspicuous Brekneholmen Light (58°05'N., 6°36'E.) is exhibited from
1.24
flat islet, consisting entirely of pebbles and located a little over a white lantern on piles on Brekneholmen, a flat islet consist-
3.25 miles NW of Rauna. ing entirely of pebbles, which is not easily distinguishable.
Pub. 182
Listahamn, between Brekneholmen and the mainland, has a

1.24 narrowest part of the fjord, near Agnholmen, can attain a ve-
narrow entrance formed by two breakwaters. locity of up to 2 knots. The velocity is usually 0.5 knot.
Andabeloy and Hidra, large and hilly islands, lie N and NW
1.24
of Listafjorden. 1.26 Strandsfjorden (58°13'N., 6°39'E.), branching N be-

Farther NW, the coast is craggy and treeless, rising steeply to
1.24 tween Hidra and Andabeloy, is entered between Klubben and
a height of about 183m, and is indented only by a few small in- Hogsaedeskroa. The fjord is deep and relatively free from dan-
lets. The fjords are deep and mostly clear of dangers. gers. It trends N for about 2 miles to Kokodden (58°14'N.,
The fjord gap between Hidra and Varneset is only about 1
1.24 6°39'E.), a prominent mainland point, where it joins Hidrasun-
mile wide, and with an outgoing current, the sea will become det, and then NE toward Risholmsundet, the channel along the
rough. Large depths of about 300m, and a thereby steep shore, N side of Andabeloy.
means that reflection will cause a rough sea. Refraction can al- Katterauva is an islet lying close offshore on the E side of
1.26
so occur for certain directions. Strandsfjorden, about 0.3 mile NW of Hogsaedeskroa. Rocks,
Dangers on the NW side of Listafjorden include Myskesk-
1.24 with depths of less than 1.8m, lie near its SW end.
jaerne and Hunden. Myskeskjaerne, two groups of low rocks, Abelnes is a village on the NE shore of a small cove about
1.26
lie within 0.2 mile of the SE side of Andabeloy. 0.3 mile N of Kokodden. Good anchorage can be taken off
One group is located about 0.7 mile NE of Hogsaedeskroa,
1.24 Abelnes, in 14.6 or 16.5m, sand and clay.
the S extremity of Andabeloy; the other group, which is Risholmsundet (58°14'N., 6°40'E.), connecting Strands-
1.26
marked by a beacon 2m high, lies about 0.25 mile farther NE. fjorden and Stolsfjorden, is a narrow channel between the N
Hunden, one of a group of above and below-water rocks, lies
1.24 end of Andabeloy and Risholmen, a small islet about 0.5 mile
about 183m offshore, about 0.2 mile SSW of Tarmevikodden E of Kokodden.
(58°13'N., 6°41'E.), the E extremity of Andabeloy. Engelsholmen lies in the W approach to Risholmsundet. The
1.26
Eidsfjorden, branching E for about 1 mile from the SE side

1.24 islet is located close off the NW side of Andabeloy, about 0.3
of Listafjorden, has steep-to shores and ample depths. mile SE of Kokodden. Two buoys, moored close W and N of
the islet, mark the edges of the reef which fringes it.
1.25 Ytre Pollen (58°11'N., 6°42'E.), at the head of the in- Risholmen is the southernmost of a chain of islets, rocks,
1.26
let, affords good anchorage to small vessels, but during W and shoals that almost completely obstructs the passage be-
gales the sea breaks across the entrance. Buoys mark the ap- tween the mainland and Andabeloy. Foul ground extends about
proach to the anchorage. Hausen, a rock on the S side of the en- 137m W from Risholmen. A lighted iron perch, about 91m off
trance, is marked by an iron perch. Small vessels can also take the E side of the islet, marks the SE edge of a foul area.
sheltered anchorage, in about 7m, off Vikane, about 0.6 mile E Risholmbaen, close off the S side of Risholmen, is marked by a
of Varnes. light and an iron perch.
Fedafjorden, a continuation of Listerfjorden, extends NE for
1.25 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in most places
1.26
about 6 miles from its entrance between Ostre Stolen on the bank between the N end of Andabeloy and the main-
(58°13'N., 6°43'E.) and a point about 0.5 mile SE. The fjord is land. The bottom is mostly stiff mud and sand. The best an-
deep to within about 0.3 mile of its head, where a shoal fronts chorage is between Engelsholmen and Risholmen, in a depth
the mouth of the river Kvina. of 20m.
The NW shore of Fedafjorden is more irregular than the SE
1.25
shore. Anchorages in the fjord are all located on this side. 1.27 Stolsfjorden (58°14'N., 6°41'E.) is entered between
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 50m, crosses Fed-
1.25 Tarmevikodden and Ostre Stolen and extends N about 3 miles
afjorden in position 58°15.5'N, 6°50.6'E between Agholmen to the narrows of Straumsundet. The fairway through the fjord
(58˝15'N., 6°52'E.) and Teistdalsstranda. is deep and clear.
Sageflua, with a least depth of 5m, lies within 0.2 mile off-
1.25 Terneholmen (58°14'N., 6°41'E.), with a smaller islet and
1.27
shore in a position about 3 miles NE of Ostre Stolen. Binesflua, some foul ground near it, lies close off the NE side of Andabe-
with a 9m depth, is located about 0.6 mile NE of Sageflua. loy. A stone breakwater extends S from Terneholmen to the
A small bay lies off the settlement of Feda, close NE of
1.25 coast of Andabeloy.
Binesflua. Vessels can anchor in the middle of the bay, in 40m, Aleskjera, a group of above and below-water rocks, lies 0.2
1.27
hard sand. A stone beacon and two dolphins stand at the head mile N of Terneholmen and is marked by iron perches.
of the bay. Straumsundet is the middle of three narrow channels that
1.27
Agnholmen (58°16'N., 6°50'E.) lies on the N shore close NE

1.25 lead N among the several islets in the passage separating Stols-
of Feda. fjorden and Flekkefjorden. These islets, from S to N, are
Leirvik, located on the NW side of Fedafjorden, is a timber-
1.25 Kjeoy, Litle Torsoya, and Store Torsoya. The least charted
handling place, with a concrete pier about 92m long and a depth in the fairway of Straumsundet is 13.5m.
depth of 5.6m. Stamdalsflua, with a 1.8m depth marked on its W side by a
1.27
Oye, the site of a smelting works, lies across a small bay NE

1.25 buoy, lies about 183m offshore and about 0.2 mile S of Kjeoy.
of Leirvik. A concrete quay, 137m long, is located at Oye; a ro- Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can an-
1.27
ro berth on its N side has a depth of 8m while its S side has a chor in a cove on the S side of Kjeoy, in depths of 10 to 17m,
depth of 12m alongside. Two buoys mark the edge of shoal wa- sand.
ter SE of the quay. A quay, 40m long, with a depth alongside of There is anchorage for vessels of moderate size between the
1.27
3 to 7m, lies close NW of Oye. SE end of Kjeoy and Stamdalsflua, in a depth of 33m, clay.
Tides—Currents.—During floods, the outgoing flow in the
1.25
Pub. 182
1.28 Flekkefjorden extends N about 1.5 miles between Flekkefjorden—Contact Information

Straumsundet and Gronsundet. An islet group extends up to
about 0.2 mile from the W shore. Fairway depths through the Facsimile 47-38-328009
fjord are ample. Harbormaster
Anchorage.—Anchorage is indicated in the NW part of
1.28
Flekkefjorden, in about 25m. Care must be taken to avoid a Telephone 47-38-322265

4.8m depth on the E side of the anchorage close SW of the en-
trance to Gronsundet. Contact Information.—See the table titled Flek-
1.29
Gronsundet is the narrow channel joining Flekkefjorden

1.28
kefjorden—Contact Information.
and Tjorsvagbukta. A buoy marks the E and W sides of the Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken almost anywhere in
1.29
fairway through the channel. The least charted depth through Tjorsvagbukta, in up to 34m, stiff mud, good holding ground.
the fairway of the channel is 8.7m over a width of 60m. Range
lights, shown from the NW shore of Tjorsvagbukta, lead be- 1.30 Rasvagen (58°14'N., 6°34'E.), a deep, narrow inlet
tween the buoys through Gronsundet. indenting the S side of Hidra for about 2 miles in a NNW di-
Tjorsvagbukta, extending about 0.5 mile N from Gronsun-
1.28
rection, has several coves and anchorages and provides good
det and up to 0.5 mile in width, forms the harbor for the town shelter. A barrier of islets and rocks, among which are five nar-
of Flekkefjorden. row passages, stretches across the entrance between Nesodden,
the E entrance point, and a point about 1 mile NW.
1.29 Flekkefjorden (58°18'N., 6°40'E.) (World Port Index A submarine pipeline is laid in the N part of the inlet. The
1.30
No. 23510) is located in the N part of Tjorsvagbukta. Its harbor inlet is crossed by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance
is ice-free at all times. The harbor comprises all of Tjorsvag- of 21m.
bukta and the narrow channel connecting that small bay and Flekkefjorden can be approached from Listafjorden either by
1.30
Grisefjorden. A drawbridge, spanning the channel, joins the way of Stolsfjorden or through Strandsfjorden and Risholm-
two parts of the town. Vessels with a draft up to 3.7m can use sundet and then through the N part of Stolsfjorden. Vessels
the channel. from W can also approach through Hidrasundet and then
The harbor is free from dangers, except for the 5.2m shoal
1.29
through Risholmsundet.
immediately within the entrance close N of Gronsundet. On ei- Hobmannen, a group of rocks, is located about 91m offshore
1.30
ther side of the harbor, the country is rocky and broken up by about 0.9 mile ESE of Nesodden. Saueholmane is a small
small lakes. Sparsely-wooded hills rise on the NW to over group of islets and rocks lying close offshore about 0.3 mile
274m and on the SE to over 122m. ESE of Nesodden.
Depths—Limitations.—The least charted depth of 8.7m is
1.29
Sakseskjeret, marked by a beacon, lies about 0.6 mile SE of
1.30
found in Gronsundet. Vessels with a maximum draft of 5.3m can Nesodden. The beacon should be given a berth of at least 152m
be handled in the port. For more berthing information see table ti- to avoid the dangers extending NE from it.
tled Flekkefjord—Berth Information. Baan is a small low rock about 0.1 mile SW of Sakseskjeret.
1.30
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be

1.29
A rock lies awash close E.
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Sjonga, the outermost of a group of rocks about 183m N of
1.30
Horten Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot Baan, and Skarveskjerflua, the westernmost of a group of rocks
boards by prior arrangement at the entrance to Listafjorden in about 0.3 mile farther NW, are each marked by an iron perch.
position 58°10.9'N, 6°32.9'E.
The pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and
1.29
1.31 Rasvagholmane (58°13'N., 6°35'E.) is a group of
by telephone (47-33-034954). small islets and rocks on the E side of the inlet, close WSW of
the village of Rasvag. An iron perch marks the NW rock by
Flekkefjorden—Contact Information Rasvagholmane.
The entrances into Rasvagen are narrow but not very diffi-
1.31
Port Authority cult. Under ordinary circumstances, a pilot will board the ves-
VHF VHF channels 12, 13, 14, and 16 sel in time to take it into the inlet. If a pilot is unable to board,
the vessel should stand into Listafjorden or Hidrasundet, both
Telephone 47-38-322265 of which are easy of access.
Flekkefjord—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Remarks
Vessel Draft
Europris Flekkefjord
Europris 105m — Fast ferries and breakbulk.
General Cargo Terminal
General Cargo 86m 7.5m Breakbulk.
Pub. 182
Kirkehamn
The E entrance, between the coast of Hidra and Sakseskjeret,

1.31 fairway is free from known dangers and is deep, but is only
is the one generally used. It is relatively clear of dangers and is about 0.1 mile wide at its narrowest part.
deep. The other entrances require local knowledge. After From its entrance between Kvalsberget, the N extremity of
1.32
passing Sakseskjeret, keep E of Naudholme, Lille Hummeroy, Hidrsundet trends ESE for about 3 miles to Kokodden, where it
and Kregleholme and W of Rasvagholmane. joins Strandsfjorden.
Anchorage for Rasvag, in the cove fronting the village, is
1.31 Svertingane (58°15'N., 6°30'E.), a group of above and
1.32
prohibited because of submarine cables. Anchorage may be below-water rocks lying within about 0.3 mile NW of
taken about 0.4 mile NW of Nesodden, off the SW side of Prestoya, are the outermost dangers on the S side of the
Kreglingholmen, in depths of 20 to 30m. approach. A 1.5m shoal lies at the W end of the group.
A 9.2m patch lies about 91m S of Kreglingholmen.
1.31 Kadoyflua, a detached 12m shoal, lies about 0.2 mile N of
1.32
Caution.—Vessels must not proceed at more than 5 knots in

1.31 the N end of Kadoya, the island NE of Prestoya.
the upper part of Rasvagen when N of Vage. Stovika (58°15'N., 6°31'E.), on the N side of the W ap-
1.32
Breidlia (Breilien) (58°13'N., 6°34'E.) lies in a small cove

1.31 proach to Hidrasundet, is entered a little over 0.75 miles NNE
on the W side of Rasvagen and affords good anchorage, in of the N point of Kadoya. It affords good anchorage for small
16m, sand. Vessels anchor in the middle of the cove and moor vessels, in depths up to 20m, sand.
with stern lines to mooring rings. Smaller vessels can anchor, in 4m, at the head of the cove. W
1.32
Vage is a small harbor in a bight on the W side of Rasvagen,

1.31 winds send in a considerable swell. Stovika anchorage is ap-
about 0.6 mile N of Breidlia. Small vessels can find sheltered proached between an island group on the SW side of the cove
anchorage here, in 26m, sand. A stern line should be taken to and a rock, awash, located about 137m SW of the E entrance
the shore at the head of the bight. point. Vessels must pass close E of the rock awash to avoid the
shore bank extending from the E side of the cove.
1.32 Kirkehamn (58°14'N., 6°32'E.), on the W side of Hi-
dra, is a good harbor. Heavy seas from the W send in a heavy 1.33 Berefjorden (58°16'N., 6°28'E.) is entered E of Hol-
swell. The harbor is ice free. men, an islet 0.5 mile NW of Halsodden, the E entrance point.
Vessels anchor in the bight NW of the church, in depths of
1.32 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in a
20 to 30m, mud. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the E cove NW of Holmen, in depths up to 24m, mud, approaching
bight, off the village, in a depth of 20m, sand. by the wider channel N of the islet.
There is also anchorage near the NE end of Dragoya, in
1.32 Shoal water extends about 18m from the E side of this islet.
1.33
depths of 16.4 to 20m. A power line, 21m high, is reported N of Holmen. Small craft
Hidrasundet separates Hidra from the mainland N and can be can anchor between Furuholmen (58°16'N., 6°28'E.) and the
used by vessels approaching Flekkefjorden from the W. The head of Berefjorden, in depths up to 6m, mud; the wider chan-
Pub. 182
nel S of Furuholmen has a depth of 3.7m. position 58°17.9'N, 6°13.9'E.

A hill, 244m high, stands about 0.7 mile NE of Halsodden.
1.33 The pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and
1.35
Another hill, 218m high, lies about 2 miles NW of Halsodden. by telephone (47-33-034954).
Siragrunnen (58°15'N., 6°20'E.) lies off the outlet to Ana
1.33 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted by tele-
1.35
Sira (58°17'N., 6°26'E.); the depth varies from 10 to 100m. phone (47-51-470600).
The current conditions in the area are very variable. A little
1.33 Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage be-
1.35
further out from land, the coast current runs NE. At the Re- tween Vintersto and the shore of the cove, in 16.5 to 24m, sand.
kefjord entrance to Ana Sira, the outgoing current has been re- Mooring rings are available.
ported as high as 3 knots. Anchorages are also located in two coves on either side of a
1.35
small peninsula that projects from the E shore of the fjord near
1.34 Egdeholmen (58°17'N., 6°23'E.) lies close off the E Holmen, about 0.7 mile within the entrance.
entrance point of Ana Sira. During strong outgoing tidal cur- Mooring rings are available in the SW cove. Depths in these
1.35
rents and with onshore gales, the sea breaks on either side of anchorages are 20 to 24m. Larger vessels can anchor about 0.4
the entrance. mile from the head of the fjord, in 40 to 55m, fine sand and
Siragrunnen should be avoided in poor weather. Together
1.34 mud.
with winds from SE, through S to NW, the variable current Caution.—The approach to Jossingfjorden should only be
1.35
conditions will cause a rough sea. Even outside the current, the made from the W. Passage should be made N of Indrebaen,
bottom conditions will mean that refraction centers are formed Langholme, and Dynga.
on the shoal with waves from W to NW. Two submarine cables lie in the vicinity of the anchorage
1.35
The largest of three quays in Ana Sira is located at the head

1.34 near Holmen. An outfall pipeline runs from the vicinity of Hol-
of the inlet 2 miles ENE of Egdeholmen. It is 50m long, with a men, seaward along the E side of the fjord. Discharge is
depth of 3m alongside, and is approached through a shallow achieved through a pipe floating at a depth of 15m.
channel marked by buoys.
Between Ana Sira and Buvarodden, about 2 miles NW, and
1.34 1.36 The coast between the Jossingfjorden entrance and
up to a distance of about 2 miles W from that point, there are Rekefjord trends WNW for about 2 miles and is very irregular.
numerous small islets, rocks, and shoals. The channels among It is entirely covered with green grass in summer.
these islets, rocks, shoals and the coast, although deep, should In autumn and winter, when the grass is withered and before
1.36
only be used by vessels having local knowledge. the ground is covered with snow, it has a yellowish appearance.
The mountains flanking this coastal stretch are naked and dark,
1.35 Jossingfjorden (58°19'N., 6°20'E.), about 0.5 mile E presenting a striking contrast.
of Buvarodden, lies between Austre Kvalen and Vestre Kvalen, A chain of four islets and a group of rocks extends for about
1.36
about 183m W. From its narrow, well-defined entrance lying 1 mile across a coastal indentation comprising the harbor of
between steep, dark hills, Jossingfjorden extends NE for about Sogndalsstranda, in the SE part, and two small arms, Hellevik-
1 mile. The fjord is deep and, within the entrance, is from 0.2 en and Logevik, in the NW part. Vambelsund, the narrow but
to 0.3 mile wide. best entrance into this bay, is between the mainland and the SE
Overhead cables, with vertical clearance of 6.5m, cross the
1.35 end of Langholme, the southernmost islet of the chain.
entrance to Jossingfjorden E of Austre Kvalen Light. During spring and autumn after heavy rains, a strong current
1.36
Depths—Limitations.—An ore pier at the head of the fjord

1.35 runs out through Vambelsund. The entire bay is exposed to sea
has a depth of 15m alongside. Vessels of up to 16,000 dwt can and swell.
load from the silo with the help of a conveyor belt. Water may Sogndalsstranda (58°19'N., 6°18'E.) is a village located on
1.36
be obtained from the pier. Another pier at Holmen, on the E the E side of the bay. A small harbor formed by a jetty lies S of
shore of the fjord, is about 20m long, with depths of 7.7 to the village. Along the jetty there is a concrete quay, 25m long,
8.5m alongside; it is used for general cargo. with depths of 1.7 to 5.5m. Overhead cables with vertical clear-
Vintersto, a 2.7m rock marked by an iron perch from which a
1.35 ance of 8.5m are located in the vicinity of the village.
light is shown, lies in a small cove on the E side of the fjord
about 0.3 mile NNE of Austre Kvalen. Except for this rock, 1.37 Rekefjord (58°20'N., 6°16'E.), extending about 1
Jossingfjorden is clear of dangers. mile N, is entered between Lille Presteskjer and a point about
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
1.35 0.2 mile SE. Reefs fringe the shores of the fjord in places. A
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Horten light is shown from a 78m high pillar close W of the entrance
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards in channel.
Rekefjord—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Depth Remarks
Vessel Draft
Rekefjord Stone Terminal
East 143m 7.1m 5.6m Dirty products, aggregates, and multipurpose.
Southeast 15m — — Aggregates.
Pub. 182
Rekefjord—Berth Information
Maximum
Vessel Draft
Southwest 60m — — Aggregates.
West 19m 8.5m — Aggregates and limestone.
Depths—Limitations.—About 0.2 mile within the entrance,

1.37 fronting it. In the E part of the bay there is a depth of 21.9m
the fjord narrows to its minimum width of about 64m. The over a sandy bottom, where small vessels with local knowledge
least depth in the narrows is 17.8m. General depths elsewhere can take anchorage. A draft of 3.9m can be taken through the
in the fjord are 14.6 to 27m. Vessels with drafts up to 5.6m can channel between the second and third islets from W.
be handled in the port. For more berthing information see the However, the anchorage is seldom used because onshore
1.39
table titled Rekefjord—Berth Information. gales send in considerable swell. Under such conditions, there
Local knowledge is required. A 22m depth is located in the
1.37 are breakers in the channels between the islets.
fairway about 0.2 mile SE of Lille Presteskjer. Within the nar-
rows, there are several dangerous rocks that are marked by iron 1.40 Nalauviken (58°23'N., 6°04'E.) is a bight on the E
perches. side of Stapnes. It is entered between the S extremity of
Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor almost anywhere in
1.37 Stapnes and a point about 0.6 mile E.
Rekefjord. The outer roadstead, just within the entrance, has Haskjaer, an above-water rock with a reef projecting about
1.40
depths of 29 to 37m, but is exposed to onshore gales. 183m N from it, is located close off the E entrance point of Na-
Moderate size vessels can find sheltered anchorage about 0.5
1.37 lauviken. Storflu, an 11m depth, lies about 0.2 mile SW of Ha-
mile inside the entrance, in a depth of about 24m, clay. Stern skjaer. Lyreflu, with a least depth of 5.7m, lies close N of
lines can be passed to mooring rings on shore. Storflu. Foul ground, on the W side of the bay, extends about
A submarine cable crosses the S end of this anchorage and
1.37 0.1 mile SE and 0.3 mile ENE of the S end of Stapnes.
an overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 40m, crosses the Tenholme, on the E side of the bay about 0.3 mile NNW of
1.40
N end. Haskjaer, is joined to the mainland close E by a drying shoal.

The town of Rekefjord lies on the E side of the fjord near its
1.37 Tenholmflu, with a depth of less than 1.8m, and Kveidflu, a
1.40
head. Overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 10m, are lo- 1.8m rock on the E side of the bay about 0.1 mile farther N, are
cated in the vicinity of Rekefjord. each marked by an iron perch. Small vessels can anchor, in
5.9m, off Odden, at the head of Nalauviken. The approach to
1.38 Nordfjord (58°20'N., 6°15'E.), a narrow but sheltered the anchorage is narrow and difficult and should not be at-
fjord close W of Rekefjord, is entered on either side of Nord- tempted without a pilot. During onshore gales, a swell rolls in
fjordenholmane, which lies in the fjord entrance. over the shoals N of Tenholme.
The channels on either side are narrow. The E channel has a
1.38 At the head of Nalauviken, there is a good harbor, in depths
1.40
depth of 6.9m; the W channel has depths of 5 to 6.9m. of 5 to 7m, sand, protected by moles. Mooring buoys and rings
During onshore gales, the sea breaks across both channel en-
1.38 are available. There is a quay, 40m long, with a depth of 5m
trances. Nordfjord trends NNW for about 1 mile, but dries alongside, in the harbor.
about 0.3 mile from its head. Havsund, between the N side of Dragoya, and Prestoya, an
1.40
Overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 10m, exist at

1.38 island about 0.2 mile N, is the principal passage leading toward
Nordfjord. Kirkehamn. The fairway through Havsund is deep and free
Nordfjordenflu, with depths less than 1.8m and marked by
1.38 from dangers. Vessels should approach Kirkehamn from W in
an iron perch, lies close off the NE end of Nordfjordenhol- mid-channel.
mane.
Svaholmane to Ognabukti
1.39 The coast between the Nordfjorden entrance and
Stapnes, a mainland projection about 7 miles NW, is lofty and 1.41 About one half the coastal stretch between Svahol-
steep. Along this coastal stretch all known dangers are near the mane and Ognabukti comprises the approaches to, and the port
land. There is no shelter and the few anchorages should only be area of, Egersund.
resorted to in fine weather and with local knowledge. Egeroy (Eigeroy) (58°27'N., 5°58'E.) is relatively low and
1.41
Hadyret (58°20'N., 6°10'E.), a conspicuous 103m hill, is lo-

1.39 indented; seen from the sea it blends with the background.
cated on the coast about 3 miles NW of Lille Prestskjaer. Lundeviken and Soragapet, the S approach leading into the
Hadyret, resembling a perpendicular wall of rock with a
1.39 port area, are well defined.
sharp and slightly projecting peak at the outer extremity, is From W, the lowland region of Jaeren will be visible to the N
1.41
marked by a white patch. in clear weather. Eigeroy will resemble a high promontory; the
Vatlandsfluene, three detached depths, has depths of 16m,
1.39 coast SE will appear very high and precipitous. Nordregapet,
13.7m, and 24m, lying up to 0.3 mile offshore and between 0.3 the W approach to Egersund, will also be clearly visible.
and 0.6 miles SE of Hadyret. Between Egersund and Ognabukti, the coast is steep and
1.41
Vagene (58°20'N., 6°13'E.) is a small bay that indents the

1.39 rocky, but seldom rises above a height of 30m. There are a few
coast for about 0.3 mile N from the chain of islets and rocks patches of farmland but very few trees; the whole landscape is
Pub. 182
wild and inhospitable. A large number of islets front the sever- Moderate size vessels can anchor about 206m E of Tingelset,
al bays and coves that indent the coast between Nordregapet in 40m, sand.
and Ognabukti. Rekevika, a bight on the W side of Soragapet, about 0.5 mile
1.43
Svaholmane (58°23'N., 6°03'E.) is a group of low islets and

1.41 N of Skarvoy, provides anchorage to small vessels with local
rocks lying on the E side of the S approach to Egersund within knowledge, in 15 to 20m, good holding ground, sand.
0.5 mile W of Stapnes. Vessels entering must pass close to the N shore to avoid the
1.43
Kletten, Tysnesflu, and Stiksflu, with depths of 8.2m, 16m,

1.41 shoals and rocks extending from the W shore. A 3m shoal lies
and 8.2m, respectively, lie about 0.5 mile and 0.2 mile WSW in the middle of the entrance.
and 0.3 mile NW, respectively, of a lighted structure on Svahol- Gillestadvika is a small bight on the W side of Soragapet
1.43
mane. about 1 mile N of Skarvoy. Small vessels can anchor in the S

part of the bight, in 15 to 20m, sand. Mooring rings are avail-
1.42 Soragapet (Sondregapet) (58°26'N., 6°00'E.), the S able. Skreddaren, awash and marked by an iron perch, lies
and principal approach to the port of Egersund, is the sound be- about 0.1 mile NNW of Jektevikodden, the S entrance point. A
tween the mainland and the E side of Eigeroy. Its channel is concrete quay, located at Jektevikodden, is 60m long with
suitable for deep-draft vessels. depths of 8 to 9m alongside.
Entrance is made between Svaholmane and the shoals and
1.42 Hovlandsvika, a bay on the W side of Soragapet, which is
1.43
other dangers that lie up to 1 mile S of Skarvoy, an islet near entered between Fugleodden and a point about 0.3 mile NNW,
the SE end of Eigeroy, about 2 miles NNW of Svaholmane. is the best of these anchorages. It is the quarantine anchorage
The most constricted part of Soragapet is between Fugleod-
1.42 for the port of Egersund. Vessels can anchor here, in 10.1 to
den, a projection on the E side of Eigeroy about 1 mile N of 14.6m, good holding ground.
Skarvoy, and Synnavikodden(Sonnevi kodden), a small main- Rageskjaerflu, with depths of less than 1.8m and marked by
1.43
land point about 150m NE. A concrete silo, about 61m high, an iron perch, lies on the shore bank in a position about 0.3
stands on the point. mile NW of Fugleodden. A detached 7.2m depth is located in
Vardbergodden, the E entrance point of the outer harbor of
1.42 the N part of the bay.
Egersund, is located on the E side of Soragapet, about 0.5 mile
N of Synnavikodden. 1.44 Egersund (58°27'N., 6°00'E.) (World Port Index No.
Svanesfluene, with depths of 10m and 12m, lies on the E
1.42 23490) consists of an inner harbor and an outer harbor that lie
side of Soragapet, about 0.2 and 0.5 mile offshore and about between the mainland and the E side of Eigeroy. The outer har-
0.7 mile NW of the light structure on Svaholmane. Isakbaen, bor is separated from the inner harbor of Egersund by Lindoy,
with a least depth of 4m and marked on its SW side by a buoy, an islet which is joined to a peninsula that extends S from the
is located about 0.3 mile offshore and 1.5 miles NNW of the mainland and forms the NE side of the outer harbor. This outer
same light structure. harbor, comprising the N part of Soragapet, is protected from
the open sea by Eigeroy. The approach channel is dredged to
1.43 Stabsaet (58°24'N., 5°59'E.), a small islet, 10m high, 13m.
on the W side of Soragapet, is located about 0.7 mile S of Skar- A reach, trending NE from Soragapet, forms the sheltered in-
1.44
voy. Jensbaen, a 3m depth, lies about 0.2 mile SSE of Stabsaet. ner harbor, which is available only to small vessels and is used
Jensbohausen, a 20m depth, lies about 183m farther S. primarily by the local fishing fleet. Entrance is made close S of
Maerra, a rock, awash, about 0.2 mile NE of Stabsaet, is al-
1.43 Lindoy.
ways marked by breakers. Shoal water extends about 137m S
and E from the rock. Krabbeflu, a 23m depth, is located about Port of Egersund Home Page
0.3 mile WNW of Stabsaet.
Depths of 14.5m and 11.6m lie about 0.3 mile and 0.4 mile
1.43
http://www.egersund.havn.no
NNE, respectively, from Stabsaet.
Store Svetlingen, 17m high, and Lille Svetlingen, two islets,
1.43 Ice.—The harbor is ice free during normal winters.
1.44
are located about 0.7 mile and 0.8 mile SW of Skarvoy. A bea- Tides—Currents.—The tidal range is insignificant.
1.44
con stands on the NE side of Store Svetlingen. Shoal water ex- Depths—Limitations.—The main entrance channel has a
1.44
tends about 183m S and W from Store Svetlingen. Glana, a width between 110m and 230m and a depth of 12.5m. General
rock, awash, lies about 137m E of the smaller islet. depths in the outer harbor and anchorage area are 6 to 12m.
Bronnesfluene, situated about 0.3 mile NW of Store Svetlin-
1.43
The inner harbor, adjacent to the town, has depths of 5 to 6m.
gen, is marked at its E end by an iron perch and has a least Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
depth of 7m over its W part. Egersund—Berth Information.
A constant current, which is often very strong, sets S through
1.43
Soragapet. Egersund—Berth Information

Navigation is rarely restricted by ice, although sometimes
1.43
the portion of Soragapet above Fugleodden freezes over in Berth Name Length Depth
winter. General and Bulk Cargo
Anchorage.—Skjevollsvika, indenting the mainland about
1.43
Dampskipskaien 75m 9.0m

0.7 mile NE of Skarvoy, provides sheltered anchorage to small
vessels, in 12.8 to 22m. The approach to Skjevollsvika is made Kaupanesplant 220m 9.0m
SE of Tingelset, a 33m high islet on the E side of Soragapet.
Pub. 182
Egersund—Berth Information is conspicuous from the offing, as the land is lofty on both
sides and the inner part is bounded by a low sandy shore. When
Berth Name Length Depth approaching Eigeroy with an onshore wind and the weather is
Kongsteinkaien 207m 3.5-7.0m too heavy for pilots to go out, a vessel may safely stand in be-
tween Kjesholme, 19m high, the largest islet in the approach
Ro-Ro about 1.5 miles W of Skarvoy, and Fliset, a detached reef on
Kaupanes 170m 9.0m the W side of the approach, about 1 mile WNW of Kjesholme.
There are several rocks and shoals that lie near Kjesholme
1.45
Bertelsen og Garpestad 59m 5.3m

and Fliset, but the sea always breaks on them in heavy weather.
Ro-Ro and Cruise Ship Inside Lundeviken, the dangers are near the shore and are usu-
ally marked by breakers.
Nordsjoterminalen 160m 7.7-8.6m
Abreast Hodnhammeren, on the W side of the bay about 2
1.45
Ro-ro ramp 20m wide miles NNW of Kjesholme, the depth is 20 to 26m, stony
Fueling Berths ground. North from here, the bottom shoals regularly and is
sandy. Temporary anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m,
Statoil 50m 8.3m about 0.1 mile NE of Hodnhammeren. This anchorage is some-
Shell 115m 8.4m what exposed to sea and swell.
Sprangbukt (58°27'N., 5°56'E.), at the NE end of Lundevik-
1.45
Esso 127m 5.6m en, is entered between Oksnesodden, a S projecting point that
divides the head of the bay into two coves, and Ellevikholme,
Harbor facilities are located on both sides of the inner harbor
1.44
about 0.1 mile E.
and close N and S of Lindoy. Steamship Quay, in the outer har- Small vessels can anchor in 10.1m. Southwest winds send in
1.45
bor close SW of the entrance of the inner harbor, is the largest some swell. There are no dangers within the rocks at the en-
and most used of the berthing facilities; it is 288m long, with a trance. When entering, pass W of Ellevikholme, give it a fair
depth of 8m alongside. There is a ro-ro berth for vessels up to berth, and avoid a 2.7m shoal extending about 183m S from
1,500 dwt, with drafts up to 5.2m. Oksnesodden.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 24m, spans Nysund,
1.44
the narrow dredged channel, with a depth of 5.5m, connecting 1.46 Nordregapet (58°27'N., 5°52'E.), the W and second-
the N end of the outer harbor with the E end of Nordregapet. ary approach to the port of Egersund, is entered between
Aspect.—Barren hills, with rock outcrops, rise to heights of
1.44
Ruskodden, the NW extremity of Eigeroy, and Gulholme,
more than 122m both N and S of the town; those to the NW are about 0.2 mile NW. Pilots for Nordregapet boards 1.5 miles
over 244m high. WSW of Ruskodden Light (58°26'N., 5°53.4'E.).
1.44
Eigeroy Light (58°27'N., 5°52'E.) is located near the S end
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Horten of Midbrodoy.
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Gulholme is the southernmost of a group of rocks and islets
The pilot boards, as follows:
1.44
that extend about 0.5 mile S from the mainland and NNE of
1. North approach—58°26'58.2''N, 5°50'54.6''E. Midbrodoy. A beacon stands on the NE end of Gulholme.
2. South approach—58°22'57.6''N, 5°59'54.0''E. Beacons, buoys, perches, and several lights mark the inner
1.46
Contact Information.—See the table titled Egersund—

1.44
channel reaches. The least depth through the fairway of Nor-
Contact Information. dregapet is 5.5m and is found in the dredged channel across the
bar close N of Grundsundholmen.
Egersund—Contact Information Seilsteinen, the outermost of a group of above-water rocks, is
1.46
located about 0.3 mile SW of Ruskodden. This lofty, perpendic-

VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
ular rock resembles a sail. A whitewashed patch on it is visible
Telephone 47-51-463280 for about 2 miles. A beacon stands on the W side of the rock.
Facsimile 47-51-463281 Several shoals, best seen on the chart, lie off of Seilsteinen.
Tryet, an above-water rock marked by an iron perch, lies in
1.46
E-mail post@egersund.havn.no the fairway about 0.25 mile WSW of Ruskodden. Shoal water
extends about 91m NNE from the rock; several below-water
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 6 to 12m, in the
1.44
rocks lie between it and Eigeroy.
outer harbor W of Lindoy. The holding ground of sand and Svartholme is a small islet on the N side of the fairway about
1.46
clay is very good. Vessels in quarantine anchor between Fug- 137m NW of Gulholme. A 5.5m depth lies between the two is-
lodden and Svanavagodden, 0.35 mile SE, in depths of 8 to lets; shoal water extends about 91m SE and NE from the latter.
13m. Sundsgapholme, the NW and largest of the islets on the N
1.46
Caution.—Several submarine cables lie in the approach to

1.44
side of Nordregapet’s main entrance, lies with its W extremity
the port within Soragapet. A submarine pipeline, best seen on about 0.5 mile NW of Gulholme. Horsholme is the E islet. A
the chart, is laid across the S part of Egersund outer harbor. bar extends between the N side of Horsholme and the main-
land. This bar limits vessels that can enter through the N chan-
1.45 Lundeviken (58°26'N., 5°55'E.) divides Eigeroy into nel, which leads E between the mainland and the N sides of
two parts, which are connected by a narrow neck of low land. It Sundsgapholme and Horsholme, to drafts of less than 4m.
Pub. 182
the SW extremity of Dyroy. Raudskjaer, with a depth of less

than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, lies about 183m W of
the S extremity of Dyroy.
Dyroyflu, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an
1.47
iron perch, lies about 137m SSE of Karpusskjaer.

A shallow inlet indents the mainland N of Dyroy for about
1.47
0.5 mile, then extends about 0.7 mile E. Its much encumbered
approach lies between Karpusskjaer and numerous dangers N
of it, on the E, and Skjerpingerne, a chain of islets and rocks
that extends about 0.6 mile SSW from the mainland, on the W.
Oyafluene, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an
1.47
iron perch, lie nearly midway between Karpusskjaer and Skjer-

pingerne. The town of Hellvik stands on the N shore of the in-
let. The main terminal quay near Hellvik, can accommodate
vessels 90m in length, with a maximum draft of 5.3m and a
maximum beam of 14m. The quay handles aggregates and
sand. Two lighted ranges and other navigational aids mark the
entrance channel, which has been dredged to 6m. Entrance
should not be attempted without local knowledge.
1.48 Skraedderen (58°28'N., 5°51'E.), a 5.5m depth, lies

at the S end of Skjerpingerne. Lillegrunn, a detached 16m
depth, lies about 0.7 mile offshore and about 0.7 mile W of Sk-
raedderen. Mastefluene has several 12 to 18m depths that lie
close to the SW end of Skjerpingerne.
Laedersholme (58°29'N., 5°50'E.) lies close off a small pen-
1.48
Eigeroy Light
1.46
insula projecting S from the coast, on the E side of the S ap-
proach to Vatnemoholmene. Storflu, a 7m depth about 0.5 mile
Lusaskjaer, marked by an iron perch, is located within the
1.46
SSW of Laedersholme, is the outermost of numerous dangers
sound on the W side of the fairway, in a position about 91m E extending S from the islet.
of Horsholme. Vatnemoflu, a 4m shoal, lies closest to the approach range
1.48
The best entrance into Nordregapet is made between Tryet

1.46
line in a position about 0.1 mile NNE of Storflu. Hellarne is
and Gulholme. The channel between Tryet and Gulholme can- two rocky heads about 183m apart, of which the NW is awash
not be made out until the vessel is close to Tryet. and the SE is marked by an iron perch, located about 0.2 mile
After passing SE of Gulholme, course can be set for the an-
1.46
NE of Storflu.
chorage area E of Horsholme or for the buoys marking the
dredged channel N of Grundsundholmen. 1.49 Vatnemoholmene (58°29'N., 5°49'E.), a small har-
Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of
1.46
bor, is formed between the E side of a small coastal projection
12m, between Horsholme and Grundsundholmen. Anchorage and some close lying islets.
can be taken, in a depth of 12m, in the N channel NE of Sunds- There are two entrances; the S entrance has a depth of 10.1m
1.49
gapholme, but vessels with drafts exceeding 4m must approach while the W entrance has a depth of 5.9m. Northwest and SW
this latter anchorage from the W. winds send in a considerable swell. Mooring rings are available
and must be used. Entrance into Vatnemoholmene should not
1.47 Dyroy (58°28'N., 5°52'E.) lies close offshore. Rocks be attempted without local knowledge. The S, or preferred,
and shoals encumber the narrow passage between the mainland channel is marked by two pairs of range lights.
and this small islet. Hellesundfluene, with a depth of 4.8m, is located about 0.6
1.49
Svartskjaer is the outermost of several above and below-wa-

1.47
mile W of Vatnemoholmene.
ter rocks lying on the S side of the N approach to Nordregapet Ognabukti (58°31'N., 5°45'E.), an open bay, recedes NE for
1.49
and up to 0.25 mile SW of Sundsgapholme. about 1 mile and has general depths of from 11 to 22m.
Karpusskjaer, with a depth of less than 1.8m, is on the N side
1.47
of the approach close W of an islet that lies about 183m S of
Sirevag—Berth Information
Maximum
Vessel Draft
Sirevag Terminal
Fisheries 145m 3.4-6.2m — Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Freezer Storage 85m 7.0-14.0m 7.8m Breakbulk and reefer.
Pub. 182
Sirevag (58°30'N., 5°48'E.) is a small fishing harbor on the

1.49 is backed by sand dunes.
E side of Ognabukti. It affords anchorage with mooring rings, Jaeren is one of the most unusual tracts of land in Norway.
1.50
in depths from 6 to 8m, within a short mole which projects Its surface is undulating and occasionally rises into low hill-
from the N shore. ocks. Bogs dotted with peat stacks are varied by heather-cov-
Depths—Limitations.—Quays on the N shore have a total
1.49 ered tracts and luxuriant meadows and farm lands. Here and
length of 300m, with depths from 3 to 5m alongside. There is a there at rare intervals are small groups of trees; the whole plain
new jetty on the S side of the harbor. The harbor can is intersected by a network of stone walls.
accommodate vessel with a maximum draft of 7.8m. For more Tides—Currents.—The tidal current off Jaerens Rev is ir-
1.50
berthing information see the table titled Sirevag—Berth regular and much affected by the wind, which may be N for
Information. long periods in early summer. In fine, calm weather the tidal
1.49 current usually sets N with the rising tide and S with the falling
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the tide. The currents attain velocities of 1 knot to 2 knots and al-
Horten Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. ways set strongest to the N.
The pilot boards in position 58°26.9'N, 5°50.9'E.
1.49
The pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and

1.49 1.51 The coast between Ognabukti and Obrestad, about
by telephone (47-33-034954). 8.25 miles NNW, is relatively steep-to.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sirevag—Con-
1.49 Regulations.—Traffic is controlled by Kvitsoy Vessel Traf-
tact Information. fic Service (Kvitsoy VTS) from Kvitsoya (59°04'N., 5°25'E.).
For further information, see paragraph 2.6.
Sirevag—Contact Information Horr Farm (58°33'N., 5°40'E.) is a conspicuous landmark.
1.51
Its buildings stand higher than any structures in the vicinity and
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 appear from a distance to be built on a point. A church, located
Telephone 47-51-793000 about 2 miles N of Horr Farm and 1 mile inland, is white and
has a low tower and spire. Obrestad Light is exhibited from a
Facsimile 47-51-532684
granite house and is 16m high. Obrestadbrekra (58°40'N.,
E-mail sirevag-havn@ha.kommune.no 5°33'E.), from which a light is shown, is the highest point on
the Jaeren coast.
Vagsgabgrunn, with a depth of 3.5m, lies close W of the Si-
1.49 Jaerens Rev (58°45'N., 5°30'E.), a low point, is the W ex-
1.51
revag entrance. The inlet can be entered either S or N of this tremity of Jaeren. The coast at the point is a strip of land from
shoal, but local knowledge is required. 0.2 to 0.6 mile wide.
After entering Lundeviken, the vessel may either hove to
1.49 A reef extends 0.2 mile SW from Jaerens Rev. A lighted
1.51
when the water becomes smoother, to await a pilot, or stand buoy marks the W side of the reef extending W from Jaerens
farther in, keeping about 0.2 mile from the W shore. Rev.
Ognabukti to Jaerens Rev 1.52 Honsviki, between Jaerens Rev and Lyratangen, 4.5
miles NNE, is open W and clear of dangers. General depths in
1.50 From Ognabukti, the coast trends quite regularly the bay are 9.1 to 18.3m.
NNW for nearly 15 miles to Jaerens Rev, the westernmost ex- Skotamedgrunn (58°48'N., 5°26'E.) is located between 3
1.52
tension of the mainland in the S approach to Stavanger. A few miles and 3.5 miles NW of Jaerens Rev. The dangerous area
small coastal indentations provide limited shelter to small extends approximately 2 miles around the shoals in a SW-NW
craft, but there are no harbors. direction. The depths vary from about 40m in its W part to
Between Jaerens Rev and Lyratangen, a mainland projection
1.50 about 16m in its E part. Waves from SW to NW create rough
located abreast Feistein 4.5 miles NNE, the coast recedes about sea in the area.
0.7 mile E, forming Honsviki. During N weather, a refraction center will emerge on the
1.52
At Ognabukti, the mountainous coast begins to drop toward

1.50 shallow areas and, combined with a W current of 1 to 1.5
the sea; immediately to the N is the low land of Jaeren. This knots, the conditions will become even worse. Breaking surfs
part of the coast is so low that when approaching it from the have been observed in the area.
offing, the houses appear to rise straight from the sea. About 4 Tangerhaug, a 28m high hillock, lies close SE of Lyratangen
1.52
or 5 miles inland, a range of hills rises from the plain but pres- and is marked by a wooden beacon.
ents no conspicuous landmarks, A radio mast, 152m high, stands 2.25 miles NE of Jaerens
1.52
The beach between Ognabukti and Lyratangen, and about 2

1.50 Rev. Obstruction lights are shown from the mast.
miles farther N to Vigdelneset, is composed of white sand and
Pub. 182
2.
Sector 2—Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).
Pub. 182
2.0
23
25
SECTOR 2
NORWAY—FEISTEIN TO GEITUNGANE
Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway be-

2.0 month near the heads of deep fjords in summer, but only about
tween Feistein and Geitungane. Described in sequence are the once a month near the open sea. They occur occasionally in
approaches to Stavanger, the port of Stavanger, and the fjords winter during gales between SW and NW. In winter, heavy SW
lying S, E, and N of the port area, those branching from Skude- and W gales are often accompanied by thunder and lightning.
nesfjorden, those in the vicinity of Stavanger, and then, those in 2.1Fog is the primary cause of poor visibility. It varies widely
the outer areas of Skudenesfjorden. with the location of stations; that is, whether they are dominat-
ed by land or by sea. Over the sea, fog is most frequent in sum-
General Remarks mer. The upper fjords and land stations show distinct winter
maximum. Sea fog occurs occasionally in winter when cold air
2.1 Winds—Weather.—The changes in pressure result- moves over the warm waters, or when the air is warmer than
ing from the change in seasons on the W and S coasts of Nor- the water. The most frequent fogs in winter are the radiation
way affect the prevailing winds in this sector. The shift in type land fogs. They may be expected at the heads of deep
pressure over S Norway from high pressure in winter to low fjords when there is severe frost inland and cold wind blows
pressure in summer, results in the wind shifting from S in win- down on the open fjords. One form of fog, which affects partic-
ter to N in summer. The prevalence of winds from any one di- ularly the upper reaches of the fjords, is “frost smoke.” This oc-
rection is not in evidence more than 40 per cent of the time. curs during a spell of severe frost, and may be expected by an
The usual situation is one of winds induced by a passing cy- approaching ship if the wind is light and from an offshore di-
clone with shifting directions and velocities. Within the fjords rection and skies are clear or nearly so over the land. It is
and along the very indented coastline, the wind is usually caused by the water being warmer than the overlying air.
widely different from that in the open sea, owing to land and 2.1In spring, fog decreases generally as radiation land fog be-
sea breezes and topographical effects. come less likely under gradual warming of the land. It increase
Because of the mountainous nature of the coast any wind only at Skudenes. Poor visibility is least common in summer
blowing from a direction between S and WSW, is deflected to over the land area of this region
blow as a S wind on the coast, and any wind blowing between 2.1Sea fogs are not uncommon along and over the coasts, par-
NW and N is deflected to blow as a N wind. The winds in W ticularly in the early months of the season. In autumn fog in-
Norway therefore have a tendency to blow across the mouth of creases at those stations exposed to continental influences in
the fjords. The speed of the wind also increases outward from which radiation fog develops.
the coast to a distance of as much as 150 miles. 2.1In general, autumn is the season when fog is least common
2.1There is a lot of turbulence along the Norwegian coast when on the coast, though inland the frequency is increasing toward
winds are fresh or strong, due to the broken country. Gales oc- the winter maximum.
cur frequently over this area when deep depressions are mov-
ing N between the British Isles and Iceland, under which 2.2 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the North Sea are al-
condition a very steep gradient is apt to develop all along the W ways semi-diurnal, with very little diurnal inequality between
seaboard of Norway, producing strong S winds. This very steep the two HWs or the two LWs of each tidal day.
gradient at times extends 100 to 150 miles out to sea from the 2.2The tide progresses into the North Sea from the Atlantic
coast. Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the
2.1Under these conditions the coast is swept by violent winds North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal
which penetrate into the more sheltered fjords with great turbu- point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and
lence, though with reduced velocity. Spells of NW gales occur W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the
on the W coast when a suitable gradient is established by pres- 6th meridian.
sure falling over Scandinavia. Such gales are apt to persist but 2.2Along the W coast of Norway the progression is N to about
the gradient on some occasions falls off suddenly to the E of 60°N; N of this the progression is E.
the Shetland Islands. 2.2Along the west coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually in-
2.1In winter, gales and storms are common on both the S and W crease toward the N.
coasts of Norway. In spring they are more common on the W 2.2Tidal current off this section of coast is subject to great vari-
and SW coasts than the S coast. These gales decrease in fre- ations. A tidal current setting W and N is, however, prevalent,
quency as the season progresses. The strength of the winds de- especially in summer, but with continuous N and W wind it
creases markedly in summer though gales are by no means may set S and E for a week continuously. Near the coast the di-
unknown, particularly on the W coast of Norway. North gales rection of the current may be toward the land.
as well as W are reported on the W coast. Sea breezes are fre- 2.2Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of
quent along the entire coast in the summer season. Wind winds on the tide levels is small. This is probably due to the
speeds increase slightly in autumn, especially along exposed scattering effect of offshore islands and the relatively deep wa-
coasts, and gales become more frequent. ter close inshore. North from Jaeren to the vicinity of Kors-
2.1On the W coast, thunderstorms occur on two or three days a fjorden, the current just offshore floods to the N, beginning
Pub. 182
26 Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane
about 5 to 6 hours after HW at Bergen and ebbs to the S, begin- usually sets E with a rising tide and W with an ebbtide. The in-
ning about 30 minutes to 1 hour before HW at Bergen. From ward set begins about 5 hours 15 minutes after HW at Bergen;
the vicinity of Korsfjorden to approximately 60°10'N, the flood the outward set begins about 1 hour before HW at Bergen.
begins about 6 hours after HW at Bergen and set to the E; the 2.2Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
ebb begins about the time of HW at Bergen and set to the W. VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
2.2Surface currents in the fjords are predominantly tidal, setting nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
inward on the flood and seaward on the ebb, except during the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
May and June. During these months increased runoff from areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
melting snow and ice causes the surface currents to flow almost mation, see paragraph 1.1.
continually seaward. The depth of the surface current averages 2.2Traffic Separation Scheme (TSS).—IMO-adopted traffic
3.5 to 5.5m. Though they may vary from 0.9 to 18m. separation schemes, best seen on the chart, are located, as fol-
2.2Current speeds are strongest at the surface, decreasing with lows:
depth. An intermediate current sets into the fjord usually be- 1. About 12 miles SW of Feistein Light.
tween 9.4m and 18.3m. Generally, the water below 40 fathoms 2. In the approaches to Stavanger NNW, W, and SW of
either has a very weak seaward set or is stagnant, and is re- Kvitsoy.
newed only by major meteorological disturbance. 3. In the S end of Karmsundet between Karmoy and
2.2Wind may alter the tidal currents in the fjords. Onshore Vestre Boka
winds may cause a rise in the level with a corresponding in- 2.2Caution.—Crawford Oil Field (59°07'N., 1°30'E.) is situ-
crease in the velocity and duration of incoming currents. When ated about 115 miles W of Geitungane and consists of a pro-
the wind ceases, current flows in the opposite direction until duction platform and a tanker mooring buoy. Balder Oil Field
equilibrium is established. Outflowing currents along the sides lies 27 miles ENE of Crawford Oil Field.
of the fjord may occur when strong winds blow onshore for 2.2For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 3. For oil
prolonged periods. Offshore winds may have an opposite effect and gas fields S of the above, see Sector 1.
on the water level and currents.
2.2Off the coast and in the fjords between Lindesnes and Jaer- Approaches to Stravanger
ens Rev the tidal currents are inappreciable. Small currents
may be found in the narrow channel of the fjords, as in Skude- 2.3 Hasteinfjorden (59°00'N., 5°30'E.) is the best ap-
nesfjorden but little is know about them. proach to Stavanger from the S. It is entered between the
2.2Aspect.—Skudenesfjorden is the principal approach to Hastein group, in the E, and the S islets of the Kvitsoya group,
Stavanger and is entered S of Geitungane. Within the entrance, towards the NNW. This passage leads NE for about 7 miles to
and near Stavanger, are hundreds of islands and islets forming the hilly and comparatively steep islet of Alstein, in the vicinity
numerous sounds, channels, and inlets. The mainland S, E, and of Bragen, off Tungenes, and joins the S part of Kvit-
N of the island area is penetrated by a complex system of navi- syafjorden, where it joins with the N part of Byfjorden.
gable fjords and smaller inlets.
2.2Most of the water area between Feistein and Geitungane is
encumbered with low, rocky islands and islets and numerous
dangers, through which there are several channels leading N
toward the inner approaches to Stavanger. Skudenesfjorden is
entered between Geitungane and Kvitsoy. The best approach to
Stavanger is through Skudenesfjorden, then SE through the
length of Kvitsoyfjorden and Byfjorden.
2.2From Vigdelneset about 3 miles NE of Feistein, the Stavan-
ger peninsula extends N for about 10 miles to Tungeneset. The
important port of Stavanger is situated on the E side of the pen-
insula. Several bays indent the W side of the Stavanger penin-
sula, and Hafrsfjorden, with a narrow, shallow entrance,
occupies the middle part. A submarine pipeline is laid across
the fjord, SE of the bridge; a few lakes are in the N part, as
shown on the chart. Most of the land is low and cultivated.
There are several small stretches of sandy beach, especially on
the W side. East of Gandsfjorden, the country is high moor-
Photo: Roar Johansen
2.3
land, descending abruptly to the rocky shores of Hogsfjorden.

2.3 Tungenes Light
Many low rocky islands, the largest of which is Hundvag, lie
off Stavanger.
Bragen, an above-water rock about 0.5 mile NNW of Tun-
2.3
Sheltered anchorages are found in the bays and inlets of the

genes, is marked by a light equipped with a racon.
2.2
Stavanger peninsula, among some of the islands between the

Tungenes (59°02'N., 5°35'E.) is the N end of the Stavanger
2.3
peninsula, and in coves on the S side of Karmoya, in the vicin-

peninsula. Shoals fringe the NW and N sides of the point and
ity of Skudenshavn.
are within the 10m curve, which lies offshore in this vicinity.
Off the Skudenesfjorden entrance, the tidal current usually
Vestra Imsen (59°01'N., 5°22'E.), the SW islet of the Kvit-
2.3
sets N. Near the land, on both sides of the entrance, the current
Pub. 182
Sector 2. Norway—Feistein to Geitungane 27
By Konrad Lawson (DSCF9411.JPG)[CC BY 2.0 (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

2.3
2.3 Feistein Light
soya group, contains a light, which marks the entrance to Has- Stavanger Port District. Located on the North Sea side of the
steinfjorden. Stavanger peninsula, Risavika is a public port mainly operated
2.3Hastein (58°57'N., 5°26'E.), 45m high, is the largest of a by private companies. It functions as an oil-related base area
group of islets and rocks NW of the island of Rott. Lille Revin- with services that supply the oil fields of the North Sea.
gen and Storee Revingen lie S of Hastein.
Port of Risavika
2.4 Feistein (58°50'N., 5°30'E.), an islet, lies approxi-
mately 12 miles S of Hasteinfjorden. In the S approach to https://www.stavangerhavn.no/en/maritime/terminals/
Stavanger, it lies about 4 miles N of Jaerens Rev Beacon. Nu- risavika
merous detached shoals and rocks, best seen on the chart, lie
near Feistein. Risavika is a major oil terminal as well, and can accommo-
Feistein Light is exhibited from a red metal tower, 25m high,
2.4 date large tankers. The harbor is entered between Laksholm-
with two white bands, situated on the E side of Feistein. A baen (58°55.7'N., 5°34.3'E.) and Tangen, about 0.2 mile NE. A
racon is located at the light. breakwater joins Tangen, and runs SE to Melingsholmen. The
Hengsoy (58°53'N., 5°26'E.) lies about 4 miles NW of
2.4 small harbor formed is called Tananger. On the N side of the
Feistein. A beacon stands on the island. inlet, numerous quays and facilities are located at a fitting-out
Solaviki (58°53'N., 5°34'E.) is a small bay indenting the W
2.4
and supply base for oil operations in the North Sea.
side of the Stavanger peninsula. Depths in the middle of the 2.5Tides—Currents.—The HW interval at Tananger is 9 hours
bay are 9.1 to 18.7m. Kolnesholmene is a group of islets, best 36 minutes. The mean range of tide is 0.4m; the spring range of
seen on the chart, lying in the entrance of Solaviki. tide is 0.5m.
An airport runway points W into Solaviki Bay. Mariners are
2.4 2.5Depths—Limitations.—Risavika can accommodate ves-
advised of low-flying aircraft in this vicinity. sels up to 134,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 265m, a
maximum draft of 15.8m, and a maximum beam of 44m.
2.5 Risavika (58°56'N., 5°35'E.) (World Port Index No. Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled Ri-
23487) and the surrounding sea entrances are included in savika—Berth Information.
Risavika—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
North Harbor
Containers and general car-
No. 1 C 65m 11.0m — — — — go. Continuous berthing
length of 180m.
No. 1 A/B 115m 7.0m — — — —
No. 2 A/B 120m 11.0m — — — — General cargo.
Pub. 182
Risavika—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
General cargo. Consists of
three berths with a continu-
No. 3 A/B/C — 11.0m — — — —
ous berthing length of
128m.
Containers.General cargo
No. 4 A 35m 6.0m — — — —
and breakbulk.
Consists of two berths in a
No. 6 A/B — 5.4-7.0m — — — — jetty with a continuous
berthing length of 165m.
Shell AS Refinery
Bunkers. Displacement of
No. 15 115m 16.5m 265m 15.8m 44.0m 134,000 dwt
140,000t.
SkanGas LNG Terminal
Gas Refin- LNG and bunkers. Gas ca-
40m — 140m — — —
ery pacity of 12,000m3.
NorSea Tananger Marine Terminal
Chemicals, crude products,
No. 5A 75m 8.0m 135m 7.5m — 25,000 dwt and multipurpose. Displace-
ment of 38,000t.
East Harbor
Cement, scrap metal, break-
No. 19 100m 6.0m — — — —
bulk, and bulk cargo.
Ro-pax, containers, break-
No. 20 100m 11.0m — — — —
bulk and bulk cargo.
Ro-pax, containers, and
No. 21/22 180m 11.0m — — — —
breakbulk.
Ro-pax, offshore vessels,
No. 23/24 170m 11.0m — — — — project/heavy cargo, bulk
cargo, and breakbulk.
South Harbor
Ro-pax, containers, bulk
cargo, and breakbulk. Con-
No. 35/36 — 14.3m — — — — sists of two berths in a jetty
with a continuous berthing
length of 287m.
Ro-pax, bulk cargo, contain-
ers, and breakbulk. Continu-
No. 37 — 14.3m — — — —
ous berthing length of
200m.
Ro-pax, containers, and
breakbulk.Berthing length
No. 38 158m 14.3m — — — —
of 198m (including dol-
phins).
Norcem Cement
Cement, bulk cargo, and
No. 39 40m — — — — —
breakbulk.
Pub. 182
2.5Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 50 gt. (this may incur additional charges). The pilot will board,
The pilot station can be contacted by VHF radio and by tele- weather permitting, and only with prior permission of the pilot
phone. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may station, in Skudenesfjorden Vest (Boarding Position No. 1) in
be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an ad- position 59°02.0'N, 5°10.0'E. Otherwise, the pilot will board in
ditional cost. one of the following positions:
2.5Regulations.—Tankers over 40,000 dwt, when navigating 1. Skudenesfjorden (Boarding Position No. 2)—position
within territorial waters near Risavika, are to exhibit three red 59°06'30.0''N, 5°27'00.0''E.
vertical lights at night, or display a large black cylinder by day, 2. Karmsundet (Boarding Position No. 3)—position
to indicate that other vessels must not impede their safe naviga- 59°13'06.0''N, 5°21'00.0''E.
tion. 3. Feistein (Boarding Position Feisten No. 1)—position
2.5Contact Information.—See the table titled Risavika— 58°51'00.0''N, 5°30'17.4''E.
Contact Information. 2.6Regulations.—Vessels engaged in fishing within the area
covered by Kvitsoy VTS are required to maintain a continuous
Risavika—Contact Information listening watch and also to answer calls.
2.6Under conditions where two or more vessels are meeting or
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 passing one another within a distance of 0.5 mile in the VTS
Telephone 47-51-715900 area, they are required to contact one another on VHF. Each
must assure the other of the intent to a safe procedural action
and agree to yield.
E-mail post@risavika.no 2.6Vessel Traffic Service.—Traffic is controlled by Kvitsoy
(Kvitsoya) Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) for the area bound by
2.5Anchorage.—Risavika provides a good anchorage over a the following positions:
sand and clay bottom. Strong NW winds send in a considerable a. 58°45'00.0''N, 5°29'36.0''E. (Jaerens Rev)
swell. While anchoring, vessels must take care not to interfere b. 58°45'00.0''N, 5°21'36.0''E.
with the vessels mooring at the oil refinery in the SW part of c. 58°58'54.0''N, 5°14'54.0''E.
the bay. Anchorage can be taken in Tananger, in 6.9 to 9.1m, d. 59°05'36.0''N, 5°05'24.0''E.
sand and clay. There are mooring buoys and mooring rings. e. 59°14'18.0''N, 4°43'42.0''E.
Vessels awaiting berth/daylight navigation will be given in- f. 59°17'18.0''N, 4°42'48.0''E.
structions by the pilot on VHF. Any vessels above 40,000 dwt g. 59°19'36.0''N, 4°43'48.0''E.
and with a draft exceeding 10m normally berth and unberth on- h. 59°34'30.0''N, 4°53'36.0''E.
ly during daylight hours. i. 59°34'30.0''N, 5°11'05.4''E. (Bomlahuk)
2.5Caution.—Two submarine cables are laid across the en- j. 59°32'57.0''N, 5°14'23.4''E. (Haskru Light)
trance to Risavika. When the entrance of Risavika is obstructed 2.6The VTS area is divided into two sectors, as follows:
by the hawsers of ships maneuvering off the oil facility, red 1. The area N of 59°12.0'W and W of 5°21.5'E and the
flashing lights will be shown either on Melingsholme or on the area N of 59°20.0'W and W of 5°58.8'E—uses VHF channel
facility. Lights indicate which side of the channel is obstructed. 19.
2. The remainder of the area—uses VHF channel 18.
2.6 Skudenesfjorden (59°05'N., 5°15'E.), a deep clear 2.6Participation in the VTS is mandatory for the following:
opening, forms the principal outer and easiest approach to Stavan- 1. Vessels of 24m in length and above, including towing
ger. The entrance to the fjord lies between Geitungane; two close and pushing vessels.
lying islets off the S end of Karmoya, and the NW side of Kvitsoy; 2. Vessels towing an object that is longer or wider than
about 6 miles SE of Geitungane. Skudenesfjorden can be easily 24m.
entered by day or night. Geitungane Light is on the S islet. 3. Vessels engaged in towing operations where the total
2.6When nearing the land, the fjord entrance will be very con- length is greater than 35m.
spicuous. Cone-shaped mountains on Vestre Bokn and the light 4. Vessels of all length carrying dangerous and/or pollut-
structure on Kvitsoya are prominent. A radio tower, marked by ing liquid cargo in bulk.
obstruction lights, stands on Vestre Bokn. 2.6All vessels must request a sailing clearance at least 1 hour
2.6Tides—Currents.—There appear to be no perceptible tidal prior to entering the VTS area or leaving a quay or anchorage.
currents setting N or S across the entrance of Skudenesfjorden, The following information should be given:
but inside the fjord, weak tidal currents set inward and outward 1. Vessel name and call sign.
near the land. Off the fjord entrance, the tidal current usually sets 2. Sailing Plan and destination.
N, but the wind has much to do with its velocity. Near the land 3. ETA at the outer limit of the VTS area and the ETA at
on both sides of the entrance, this current usually sets inward the port, mooring, or anchorage—for vessels located outside
during a rising tide and outward during a falling tide. Near the S the operational area of the VTS.
end of Karmoya, a strong current sets E and into Karmsundet 4. ETD from the VTS area—for vessels inside the area.
during rising W winds. 5. Any other information requested by the VTS, such as
2.6Pilotage.—Karmoy pilot station provides pilotage for ves- vessel type, nationality, and port of registration.
sels exceeding 30,000 gross tons and classified to carry hazard- 2.6Vessels should send position reports to the Kvitsoy VTS, as
ous or polluting cargo. Pilotage should be ordered using follows:
SafeSeaNet, or alternatively, the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center 1. When passing the limits of the VTS area when head-
Pub. 182
By Birgit Juel Martinsen [CC BY 2.0 (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

Kvitsoy VTS Center
ing into the VTS area. Kvitsoy—Contact Information

2. When passing between VHF channel sectors.
3. Before moving with the VTS area (leaving the wharf, E-mail pilot.kvitsoy@kystverket.no
berth, or mooring facility). VTS Center
4. When being towed.
5. When at anchor. Call sign Kvitsoy VTS
6. When involved in an accident. VHF channel 19—When N of 59°12.0'N
7. Immediately if the vessel is in difficulty and likely to and W of 5°21.5'E and when N of
result in a change of voyage plan. VHF 59°20.0'N and E of 5°58.0'E.
8. When passing position 58°58'33.0''N, 5°43'37.8''E
VHF channel 18—the remainder of the
(Stavanger) (Inbound/Outbound).
VTS area.
All vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch on
2.6
the appropriate VHF channel for the area. All communication 47-71-736032 (south sector)
with the VTS shall be in a Scandinavian language or, if not us- Telephone 47-51-736033 (north sector)
ing a pilot, in English.
In certain cases, permission will have to be renewed from the
2.6 47-95-116032
VTS Center when passing through specific areas. For further Facsimile 47-71-736031
information contact Kvitsoy VTS.
E-mail vts.kvitsoy@kystverket.no
Kvitsoy—Contact Information
2.6Vessels of less than 100m loa do not need to obtain
Pilot Station permission from the VTS when only using the fairway E of a
VHF VHF channel 13 line joining Toftoy Light and Dusaviga Light.
2.6All vessels using the main fairway to/from Sauda should
47-51-735397
Telephone obtain permission from the VTS on VHF channel 19 when
47-51-735398 passing a line between Vardnes Light and Jelsahunden Light.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Kvitsoy—Con-
2.6
tact Information.
Pub. 182
2.7Settlement on the islands is concentrated at Ytstabohamn

and Leiasundet. Ytstabohamn is located on the S side of Kvit-
soya and Leiasundet is located on the W side of Kviting. Kvit-
soya Light, 27m high, standing on the SW side of Kvitsoya, is
conspicuous.
2.7Kvitsoya radio station is located on Krakoy, about 0.5 mile E
of Kvitsoya; the radio masts are conspicuous and stand up to
125m high. There are numerous radio masts on this island. A
group of four masts stands at the N end.
2.7Caution.—Due to a strong electromagnetic field around the
masts, navigation, and communication equipment in the vicini-
ty may be disturbed. Vessels passing close to Kvitsoya Broad-
casting Station (59°04'N., 5°24'E.) may experience electronic
interference due to the station electromagnetic fields.
2.8 Jarsteinen (59°09'N., 5°11'E.) is a small island about

0.5 mile off the SW end of Karmoya. Svelgjeskjaer, an above-
water rock, is located about 0.2 mile S of Jarsteinen. Floating
wind turbines are located about 5 miles W of Jarsteinen.
2.8Geitungane (59°08'N., 5°15'E.) are two islets that lie close S
of Karmoya. A light is shown from a tower, 11m high, standing
on the S islet. A racon is located at the light tower.
2.8Kryssgrunn, a 9.1m depth, lies about 0.5 mile ESE of the S
islet. An overhead cable, with a clearance of 20m, spans the
channel between the N islet and Karmoya.
Skudeneshavn (59°09'N., 5°16'E.) (World Port Index No.
23485) located on the S side of Karmoya island, is fronted on
its S side by Vikeholmen, Bakareholmen, Steiningsholmen,
and several smaller islets and rocks. Three small moles also en-
close the harbor. Skudeneshavn is a sheltered harbor used by
ferry and coastal vessels up to 5,000 dwt.
2.8Nesagapet, the E and principal entrance of Skudeneshavn, is
between Vikeholmen and the S coast of Karmoya. A light is
2.6 Kvitsoya Light shown from the head of a small mole on the N side of Nesaga-
pet. This entrance has a least charted depth in the fairway of
2.7 Kvitsoya (59°04'N., 5°25'E.), the largest of a group of 6.2m.
islands and islets, marks the E entrance of the approach to 2.8Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
Stavenger via Skudenesfjorden. The land of Kvitsoya is low Skudeneshavn—Berth Information.
and relatively inconspicuous from offshore. Lights are shown 2.8Caution.— Submarine cables are laid across the S and NW
from some of the islands and islets; buoys and perches mark parts of the harbor and a submarine pipeline is laid on the NE
the intricate channels leading to some of the anchorages. side. Care must be taken to pass S of a 5.3m depth which lies in
2.7A number of sheltered anchorages are indicated among the the narrowest part of the sound. There are several rocks in the
islands and islets, but entry should not be attempted without lo- harbor, some of which are marked by iron posts. Navigation is
cal knowledge. Some of the islands are connected by cause- not affected by ice.
ways.
Skudeneshavn—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Name Length Remarks
Vessel Draft
No. 1 80m 5.5m —
No. 2 80m 5.5m —
No. 3 80m 5.5m —
Refrigeration Plant Berth 100m 5.5m —
Cuxhaven Berth 100m 5.2m Ro-ro.
Ols Berth 60m 4.3m Ro-ro.
Pub. 182
2.9 Austbaen (59°08'N., 5°17'E.), the outermost danger Randabergviga (59°02'N., 5°37'E.) is a small bight about 1
2.10
in the approach to Skudeneshavn, lies about 1 mile ESE of mile SE of Tungeneset. Good anchorage can be taken here, in
Geitungane. Sondreflu is a 4.6m depth about 183m W of 12.8m, sand and mud.
Austbaen.
The S coast of Vestre Bokn, towards the NE, on the N shore 2.11 Dusavik (59°00'N., 5°40'E.), located on the W side of
of the Skudenesfjorden, E of Karmoya, is formed by Drivsund Amoyfjorden, provides a protected anchorage, in 22m, gravel
(59°10'N., 5°25'E.), an islet and shoal-encumbered bay; the S bottom. A large installation, with deep-water facilities for ser-
ends of the two parts of Vestre Bokn form the W and E shores vicing oil rigs, is located in Dusavik.
of this bay. Vestre Bokn is in two parts; its SW and smaller part Byfjorden extends in a SE direction, where it meets Amoy-
2.11
is separated from the main portion by Sundalandsstraumen, a fjorden. A chain of small islets and dangers, which are scat-
very narrow sound extending NW from the head of Drivsund. tered across the E end of Amoyfjorden, separates this basin
Drivsund has several anchorages for small vessels, but local from the NW end of Horgefjorden. General depths through the
knowledge is required. middle of Amoyfjorden are 64m to 101m.
2.9Arsgrunn (59°08'N., 5°26'E.), with a least depth of 3.2m A 10.1m depth and an 8.2m depth are located about 0.5 mile
2.11
and marked on its SW end by a buoy, is located about 1 mile NW and nearly 1 mile NNW, respectively, of the NE extremity
SSW of the SE extremity of Vestre Bokn. of Hundvag. Dangers elsewhere are those extending across the
2.9Kraka (59°09'N., 5°25'E.) is an above-water rock and E end of the fjord or lying within 0.2 mile offshore.
Skolleflu, 0.5 mile ENE, is a 3m shoal marked by a buoy. A light is shown from Klovningen, the largest of a group of
2.11
2.9Fjoloy and Mosteroy (59°05'N., 5°38'E.), with some islets four small islets in the E end of Amoyfjorden. A beacon stands
between and near them, form the NE side of Kvitsoyfjorden. on the largest islet. Buoys and perches mark a few of the dan-
The islets and dangers on the NE side of Kvitsoyfjorden, gers lying between Klovningen and the S side of Amoy.
between Alstein and Sveinane, together with those near Vessels proceeding through Amoyfjorden to Horgefjorden
2.11
Tungeneset, form the SW side of the fjord. should pass N of Storholmen, in a depth of 24m, staying in
2.9Mosteroy, the SE part of which is called Aske, is nearly mid-channel, with the S extremity of Hille Kjeoy (59°02'N.,
joined at its NW end to Klosteroy and is separated from Fjoloy 5°48'E.) bearing 075°.
by Klosterhamn, a sheltered harbor for small vessels with local The approach to Stavanger or to Sandnes, at the head of
knowledge. Gandsfjorden, can be made from Horgefjorden through Lin-
2.9Isgrunn, a 6.9m depth, lies about 0.5 mile off the SW side of doysund, the passage between Vassoy and Lindoy, or from
Mosteroy, in a position about 1 mile SSE of Ejoloy. Langeflu, a Hogsfjorden through the passage between Kalvoy and Uskjo.
12.8m depth, lies about 0.25 mile NE of Isgrunn. Revingen (59°00'N., 5°49'E.), which is marked by a lighted
2.11
beacon, lies in the N part of Lindoysund, about 0.2 mile N of

2.10 Dysjalandsvag (59°05'N., 5°40'E.), between the SE Lindoy. Shoal water extends about 91m N and S from this
end of Mosteroy and Aske, affords secure anchorage, in 12.8 to rock. Revingsgrunn is an 11.9m depth in the SW part of Horge-
18.3m. Local knowledge is required. fjorden, about 0.5 mile NNE of Revingen.
Gryda Light (59°03'N., 5°37'E.) stands on a rock, lies
2.10 Tunsoy (58°59'N., 5°49'E.) is close SE of Lindoy; between
2.11
awash on the NE side of the junction of Kvitsoyfjorden and them is Lindoygrunn, which is marked by an iron perch.
Byfjorden. It is located about 0.5 mile off the NW side of the
island of Bru and nearly 1.25 miles NE of Tungeneset. A Stavanger (58°59'N., 5°45'E.)
12.8m patch is located about 0.1 mile NW of Gryda.
Nordgrunn is a 6.9m depth lying about 1 mile NW of Gryda.
2.10 World Port Index No. 23480
Kolsboane, about 0.5 mile NNW of Gryda, is two rocks; the
SW rock is awash and marked by an iron beacon. while the NE 2.12 Stavanger was founded around the beginning of the
rock, with a depth of 1.5m, is marked by an iron perch. ninth century, and is one of Norway’s oldest cities. The port is
Byfjorden is the inner part of the approach to Stavanger. It is
2.10 noted for shipbuilding, fishing, and as a main support base for
entered from Kvitsoyfjorden between Gryda and Bragen. The the oil and gas industry in the North Sea area close to southern
island of Bru, on the NE side of the fjord, is comparatively Norway.
steep. The W slope of the high land descends almost perpen-
dicularly to the fjord. Brufjell, on the SW side of Bru, rises to a Port of Stavanger Home
height of 86m close inland.
Brukjeoy (59°02'N., 5°40'E.) lies on the NE side of By-
2.10
http://www.stavanger-havn.no
fjorden at its junction with Amoyfjorden. The islet lies about
0.5 mile SE of Bru; close W of it is the smaller Persholmen, Winds—Weather.—Gales are fairly frequent in winter and
2.12
from which a light is shown. Shoals, fringing the E end of are usually from the SE. Northwest gales make loading and un-
Brukjeoy, extend about 0.1 mile offshore and are marked by a loading difficult at most of the main quays. Prevailing winds in
buoy. the summer are SW and W; in winter they are E and NE. The
Flataskjaer is an above-water rock about 183m W of Per-
2.10
climate is mild, and there is frequent precipitation throughout
sholmen. An iron perch, about 183m NW of Flataskjaer, marks the year. Stavanger is an ice-free port.
the outer end of a reef extending from the rock. Sore Raune- Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are slight. During NW
2.12
grunn, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies about 0.2 gales, the water may rise to the decks on some piers. Normal
mile N of Flataskjaer. tidal range is 0.6m.
Pub. 182
Depths—Limitations.—General depths in the fairway be-

2.12 Vessels with drafts of up to 20m can be handled at this port.
2.12
tween the entrance of Stavanger at Ulsneset and the entrance of Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
Vagen are 23m to 50m.Numerous depths and rocks less than Stavanger—Berth Information.
charted exist in the approaches to Stavanger.
Stavanger—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Mekjarvik
Fast ferries and ro-pax. Berthing
Makjavik Ferry 68m 10.0m — — — length of 100m (including dol-
phins).
Scrap metal, containers, and break-
Mekjarvik 250m 15.0m 284.9m — —
bulk.
Monier Ardal
Monier 73m — 115.5m — — Cement and sand.
NCC Roads
Aggregates, others, gravel, crushed
NCC 40m — 90.6m — —
stone, and breakbulk.
Randaberg Industries Terminal
Randaberg E 230m 6.5-12.0m 147m — — Cement, containers, and breakbulk.
Randaberg W 80m — 97m — — Cement.
NorSea Dusavika
Offshore vessels, project/heavy
NorSea 235m 6.0-11.0m 160.6m — 50,000 dwt
Norstone Dirdal
ND 40m — 104.8m — — Aggregates.
Norgrain
East 130m 8.0m 113.7m — — Vegetable oils and grain.
Main 165m 15.5m 225m — — Vegetable oils and grain.
West 63m 6.5m — — — Vegetable oils and grain.
Rosenberg WorleyParsons
Breakbulk. Berthing length of
Rosenberg 90m — — — —
260m (including dolphins).
Stravanger International Cruise Terminal
021V 75m — 89.4m 10.0m — Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
018V Upper 149m 14.0m 58m 8.2m — Cruise.
018V Lower 53m 14.0m 58m 8.2m — Cruise.
016V 309m 8.5m 58m 7.5m — Cruise, ro-pax, and breakbulk.
013V 163m 8.2m 57.4m 7.5m — Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
O05V 149m 6.8m 68.3m — — Cruise and breakbulk.
O04V 78m 6.6m 69.6m — — Cruise.
O03V 55m 6.5m 68.3m — — Cruise.
O02V 60m 6.5m 68.3m — — Cruise.
Pub. 182
Stavanger—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
O01V 135m 7.2m 67.3m — — Cruise.
Kjerringholmen
No. 80 66m 5-8.8m 57.4m — — Fast ferry and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Jorenholmen Terminal
Jorenholmen 144m 9.3m 37.9m — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Fiskapiren Passenger Terminal
Fiskapiren 130m 4.6-16.8m 42m — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Forsand Sandkompani
FS 80m — 113.7m — — Handling grout.
Bekhuskaien Terminal
Ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore vessels, and
200 Ro-Ro 107m — 98.8m — —
breakbulk. Waiting berth.
210 109m 8-8.3m 109.1m — — Breakbulk.
Stavanger Recycling
Recycling 50m — 189.8m — — Scrap metal.
Felleskjopeet Rogalad Agder
FRA Vegetable oils, seeds, animal feeds,
50m — 175.5m — — fertilizer, others, and project/heavy
cargo.
Siriskjaer
Fast ferries and breakbulk. Waiting
Siriskjael 95m — — — —
berth.
Skogsto
Skogsto N 193m 4.8-7m 87.3m — — —
Skogsto S 112m 4.1-5m 87.3m — — —
Bunker Terminal Stravanger
Texaco 30m 9.0m 100m 7.2m 7,112 dwt Petroleum products and bunkers.
Skretting Terminal
Vegetable oils, fishing, salmon and
trout food, and liquid cargo. The
T Skretting 35m 6.0m 225m — — berth has numerous mooring points
along shoreside and mooring
buoys.
Aspect.—The principal part of the city faces a bay on the N

2.12 bor.
side of a small promontory which extends E from the main The basin just E of Stavanger is bounded by Steinsoya, Or-
2.12
peninsula. The port area now has a total quayage length of ap- moy, and Vassoy to the N; Lindoy, Hellesoy, and Kalvoy to the
proximately 5,000m and is divided into many separate termi- NE; and Uskjo to the S. A chain of islets and dangers extends
nals, spread across a large area, from the industry port of SW for about 1 mile through the middle of this area.
Mekjavik to the fish and animal feed silos at Felleskjopet. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for Stavanger and is
2.12
The principal deep-water quays line the shores of Vagen

2.12 available 24 hours. Pilots should be requested at least 24 hours
(58°58.3'N., 5°44.0'E.), an indentation on the N side, near the in advance. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
city. Numerous small shoals and rocky patches are scattered may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
among the islands and islets which form the NE side of the har- additional cost. The Kvitsoy pilots are to be advised of the ves-
Pub. 182
Stavanger from W
2.12
sel’s arrival, giving the following information: Stavanger—Contact Information

1. Vessel name.
2. Call sign. Port Control
3. Gross registered tons. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
4. Draft.
5. Cargo. Telephone 47-51-501201
6. Port of destination. Facsimile 47-51-511221
Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16 and meet
2.12
E-mail havneoppsyn@stavanger.havn.no
inbound vessels outside Feistein, as follows:
1. Approximately 21 miles S of Stavanger, in position Harbormaster
58°50'N, 5°26'E.
Telephone 47-51-501212
2. In Skudenesfjorden, at Skedenesfjorden Vest, in posi-
tion 59°02'N, 5°10'E.
3. At Skedenesfjorden, approximately 18 miles NW of Anchorages—Stavanger affords fairly good anchorage
2.12
Stavanger, in position 59°06'N, 5°26'E. throughout, but the best is in the E part S of Solyst and Gras-
Vessels greater than 30,000 gt carrying hazardous or pollut-
2.12
holmen, where the depths are 18.3 to 27.4m.
ing cargo will use the boarding position at Skudenesfjorden Deep-draft vessels also anchor NE of Grasholmen, ap-
2.12
Vest. proaching through Amoyfjorden and Horgefjorden.

Pilot boats are white and have orange superstructures.
2.12
Amoyfjorden provides anchorage for large vessels and oil
2.12
For detailed information on pilotage regulations, see Pub.

2.12
rigs. The water depth varies from 30m to 130m. Smaller ves-
180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. sels may anchor off Ulsnes Point, which has a maximum depth
Signals.—Storm signals are shown from a mast on the NE
2.12
of 40m.
side of Vagen. Vessels in quarantine or without berth assignment should an-
2.12
Contact Information.—See the table titled Stavanger— chor near the entrance at Ulsnes Point, taking care to avoid the
Contact Information. submarine cables and water pipelines.
Gandsfjorden is a construction site for large offshore struc-
2.12
tures (depth of 245m) and a lay-up area for oil rigs (depth of
Stavanger—Contact Information 180m).
Port Authority Stavanger Port Control is to be contacted prior to anchoring.
2.12
Port Control uses VHF channels 13 and 16 and may also be

47-51-501200
Telephone reached by telephone (51-73-53-97).
47-51-501201 (after hours) Caution.—Numerous changes to depths, lights, and aids to
2.12
Facsimile 47-78-501222 navigation have been reported (2008) in Stavanger and its ap-
proaches. Vessels should contact local authorities for further
E-mail info@stavanger.havn.no information.
Pub. 182
2.12 Stavanger Petroleum Museum
2.13 Sandnes (58°51'N., 5°45'E.) (World Port Index No. length and 11m draft can be accommodated. For more berthing
23470) extends around the head of and along the W shore of information see the table titled Sandnes—Berth Information.
Gandsfjorden. Behind the town, on the SE, the land rises in Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
2.13
hummocky hills, 101 to 198m high. East of Gandsfjorden and may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
immediately NE of the town, the hills rise more steeply to a additional cost.
height of about 189m. The country W of Sandnes is compara- Contact Information.—See the table titled Sandnes—Con-
2.13
tively low, about 46m high in some places, and is mainly fertile tact Information.
agricultural land.
Sandnes—Contact Information
Port of Sandnes
https://www.sandneshavn.no
47-51-608990
Telephone
Depths—Limitations.—Two concrete quays operated by
2.13
47-47-853012 (duty officer)
StatOil are located in Lurahammaren (58°52.7'N., 5°44.8'E.). Facsimile 47-51-608991
The N most quay is the largest, Further S past Luravika is the
E-mail post@sandneshavn.no
Somanset Public Industrial Quay (58°52.2'N., 5°44.8'E.), Con-
tinuing S along the W shore of the harbor is Rappaneset
(58°51.63'N., 5°44.88'E.), where there are three quays. Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor off Sandnes, in 13.7
2.13
The public quays (58° 51.3'N 5°44.6'E) are situated on the W

2.13
to 18.3m. Small vessels can also anchor near the head of the
side of Vagen. This long berthing area consists of a pier, at the fjord, in a depth of about 6.1m.
N end, and two concrete quays further S. Vessels up to 198m in
Sandnes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft
Oneco Technology AS Terminal
Offshore vessels and project/heavy
Oneco Technol-
— — — — cargo. Berthing length of 155m
ogies AS
(including dolphins).
Sandnes Harbor Terminal
Ro-ro freight, containers, breakbulk,
North 315m 8.0m — —
and reefer.
Equinor Terminal
Aviation fuel, chemicals, dirty prod-
Lura 77m 11.5m 198m 11.0m
ucts, and bunkers.
Pub. 182
The Fjords miles from the E end of Idsefjorden.

Most of Idsefjorden is deep and clear, but there are shoals
2.17
2.14 Gandsfjorden (58°55'N., 5°46'E.), a deep fjord, and rocks near shore and among the scattered islets at the W
trends S for about 7 miles from Store Maroy. There is a 5-knot and E ends. A few detached shoals lie near the fairway. Inside
speed limit in the inner part of the fjord. Botnefjorden, the depths shoal from about 81m in the entrance
Gandsflu, a 5m depth marked by a light, lies about 0.4 mile
2.14 to 16.5m near the head of the fjord.
SW of Store Maroy. Depths of 7.3 and 8.7m lie within about Jorpeland (59°01'N., 6°02'E.), a settlement in a small cove
2.17
0.1 mile NNE of Gandsflu. on the NE shore of Idsefjorden, is one of the larger places in
A quay, with a depth of 7.6m alongside, is located in the vi-
2.14 the area. It has numerous buildings and workshops and a quay
cinity of Fiskaneset (58°54'N., 5°45'E.), on the W shore of with 4 to 6m alongside. There is a steel works, with a quay
Gandsfjorden. Another quay, with a depth of 11m alongside, having a depth of about 5m alongside. A telegraph station is lo-
lies about 1 mile further S. cated here.
Buoys mark some of the shore banks in the inner part of
2.14 Hillefjorden (59°04'N., 5°49'E.) is a comparatively broad
Gandsfjorden. Two lights, in range 186.5° and shown from the sheet of open water between Aske, Rennesoy, and Brimse, on
E shore opposite Sandnes, lead into the fjord. the N, and Amoy and Hidle, on the S. Depths through the fair-
ways of Hidlefjorden range from about 29 to 180m.
2.15 Riskafjorden (58°56'N., 5°49'E.), which is about 0.2 Anchorage can be taken, in 13m, good holding ground, clay
2.17
mile wide in its narrowest part, is formed between the main- and mud. Mooring rings and buoys are available. In the NE
land SE of Stavanger and the S and E sides of the island of part of the cove, there is a quay, with depths of 3.1 to 4.8m
Uskjo. It branches off from the NE end of Gandsfjorden and, at alongside and a length of 84m. A grain elevator has a quay,
its N end, leads into the junction of Horgefjorden and Hog- 36m long, with a depth of 9m alongside.
fjorden. A secure harbor for small vessels lies on the E side of Hi-
2.17
Riskafjorden is deep and, except for Riskaholmene, two

2.15 dlefjorden off the village of Tau (59°04'N., 5°55'E.)
small islets in mid-channel SW of the S extremity of Uskjom,
is free from dangers in the fairway. 2.18 Mastrafjorden (59°06'N., 5°39'E.) is a good channel
In Riskafjorden, there is good anchorage, sand and shell, for
2.15 for vessels bound to any of the fjords E or S of Stavanger. From
small vessels at the head of a small inlet at Hammersak on the its NW entrance, it trends SE between the SW side of Renne-
SE side of the fjord. There are mooring buoys and several soy and the NE sides of Klosteroy, Mosteroy, and Aske for
quays, with depths up to 4m, located in the inlet. There is a about 6 miles to its junction with Hidlefjorden. The least width
speed limit of 8 knots the inlet. between the land on either side is about 0.4 mile; however,
Li (58°55'N., 5°48'E.) is located on the S shore of
2.15 shoals on either side reduce the navigable channel width to less
Riskafjorden, about 0.4 mile SSW of Riskaholmene. A con- than this in places. A least depth of 18.3m is available through
crete quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, is located at Li. the fairway, but there are lesser depths and dangers nearby.
Anchorage.—Medium-size vessels can take good anchorage
2.18
2.16 Horgefjorden (59°01'N., 5°50'E.) surrounds the islet in Finnesandbukt, the bay formed between Klosteroy and the N
Horge. The fjord is bounded on the SW and W by the many is- side of Mosteroya. The anchorage is in a depth of 20m, coarse
lands and islets lying off Stavanger, on the NW by the islets sand. Care is necessary to avoid Bakhodnagrunn, a 9m shoal
and dangers at the E end of Amoyfjorden and the SE side of lying in the entrance to this bay.
Amoy, on the N by Hille Kjeoy and the island of Hidle, and on Vikevag (59°06'N., 5°42'E.), on the N shore of Mas-
2.18
the E by Heng and Idse and the chain of islets and rocks be- trafjorden, is the main port on Rennesoy. The largest quay, on
tween these two islands. General depths throughout Horge- the NW side of the inlet, has depths to 5m alongside. A quay at
fjorden are ample, but there are some shoal patches. Vessels Dale, about 1 mile SE of Vikevag, has depths from 5 to 6m.
without local knowledge should not attempt passage between Caution.—Numerous submarine cables extend from Renne-
2.18
the islets and reefs lying between Heng and Idse. soy to the surrounding islands.
Hogsfjorden (58°56'N., 6°00'E.) trends SE for about 12 Saebosundet (59°10'N., 5°56'E.) is the narrow sound sepa-
miles, is from 0.5 mile to 1.5 miles wide, and is deep and clear rating the NE side of Fogn from Teistholme, Lindoy, Buoy,
of dangers in the fairway. Several small sounds lead off from Byre, Bokn, and other islands, islets, and rocks to the NE. It
Hogsfjorden. Lysefjorden is entered about midway along the leads from the N end of Fognafjorden into Finnoyfjorden. Al-
NE shore. though very narrow in places, the channel fairway has ample
Frafjorden, a continuation of Hogsfjorden, trends E for about
2.16 charted depths. Detached 4.1m to 9.1m depths lie near the fair-
3 miles, is about 0.5 mile wide, and is also deep and clear. The way. Some of the detached dangers and those extending from
shores of both fjords are mostly steep-to. the islets on the NE side of the passage are marked by buoys or
A wooden quay at the head of Frafjorden has a depth of
2.16 perches. Other navigable channels lead among these islets.
about 4.5m alongside and can accommodate vessels with drafts
to 5.5m. The Fjords Branching from Skudenesfjorden
2.17 Idsefjorden (59°01'N., 5°58'E.) is the basin formed 2.19 Boknafjorden (59°12'N., 5°38'E.), a continuation of
between the mainland, on the N and E; the islands of Idsal and Skudenesfjorden, trends NE for about 10 miles to the S en-
Idse, on the S; and Heng and the islets and rocks extending S, trance of Nedstrandsfjorden. It is about 4 to 6 miles wide be-
on the W. Botnefjorden, a narrow inlet, extends SE for about 2 tween the islands and islets on either side. Depths through the
Pub. 182
fairway are great, but there are some detached dangers, particu- Depths—Limitations.—A quay at Alvestadkroken, on the
2.20
larly in the NE part and along the SE side. W shore of Boknasundet, has depths up to 5m alongside. Fuel
Boknasundet (59°14'N., 5°27'E.) lies between Vestre Bokn oil and fresh water are available. A quay at Foresvik, about 1
and Austre Bokn and leads NW for about 3 miles between mile NW of Alvestadkroken, has depths from 5 to 7m along-
Boknafjorden and the S end of Boknaflaeet. Passage through side. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.
the sound may be difficult for vessels over 107m in length and Anchorage.—Anchorages for small vessels with local
2.20
with a draft of over 7.6m. knowledge are available on both sides of Boknasundet.
2.21 Boknaflaeet (59°16'N., 5°26'E.) is the basin between

Ognoy, Austeroy, and Vesteroy on the E, and Hovringoy and
the numerous islets on the W. Boknaflaeet is a continuation N
of Boknasundet and leads into Fordesfjorden.
Depths through the fairway are ample, but there are nearby
2.21
shoals and rocks on either side.

Anchorage.—On the NE side of Boknaflaeet, anchorage can
2.21
be taken between the W side of Austeroy (59°17'N., 5°27'E.)

and the SE end of Vesteroy, or between the N side of Austeroy
and Kvernholmane, about 0.2 mile N of the NW extremity of
Austeroy. A rock lies awash close off the W side of Austeroy in
the channel between these two anchorages.
The fairway through Austdjupet (59°16'N., 5°24'E.) is clear
2.21
Boknasundet
2.19
and deep except for Austdjupholmane, two islets which lie in
mid-channel about 2 miles from the S entrance. Other dangers
Two submarine cables cross the sound in the vicinity of Bok-
2.19 are near the islets on either side of the channel.
nasund Light. Guleskjaer, a detached rock, is on the W side of the fairway,
2.21
Knarrholme (59°13'N., 5°28'E.) is the farthest SW of a

2.19 about 0.3 mile W of the W islet of Austdjupholmane.
group of above-water rocks on the SW side of the fairway. Tallaksholmane, consisting of two islets and rocks, is the
2.21
Knarrholmgrunn, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked on outermost group in the SE part of Austdjupet.
its NE side by a buoy, lies about 91m E of Knarrholme.
Strandvikflu, lying near the E shore of the sound about 0.2
2.19 2.22 Karsto Gas Terminal (59°16'N., 5°30'E.) (World
mile NE of Knarrholmgrunn, has a depth of less than 1.8m and Port Index No. 23451) is located a little over 0.75 mile NW of
is marked by an iron perch. Arviksundet (59°16'N., 5°33'E.), which lies close N of the N
Ta (59°14'N., 5°27'E.), a reef marked at its S end by a bea-
2.19 extremity of Arvikholmen. Gas from the North Sea fields is
con, is on the W side of the fairway. It lies within about 0.1 piped to the terminal, where it is processed and stored while
mile offshore and about 2 miles NNW of Knarrholme. A 6.4m awaiting export.
depth is located about 183m E of the beacon. A submarine pipeline connects Karsto Gas Terminal with
2.22
Austre Bokn, 2 miles S. Vessels are prohibited to anchor within

2.20 Bleikje (59°15'N., 5°27'E.), a small islet, lies in mid- 0.2 mile of the pipeline. Karsto Control can be contacted on
channel about 0.5 mile N of Ta. A 1.8m depth is located about VHF channel 11.
137m SE of the islet. Depths—Limitations.—There are four berths with lengths
2.22
Brattholme lies 183m off the W side of Boknsundet and

2.20 between 160m and 275m and depths alongside between 10 and
about 0.5 mile W of Bleikje. A smaller islet is located about 14m. Gas and petroleum products are handled at these berths.
183m NW of Brattholme; Brattholmbaen, with a depth of A safety zone extends 300m from shore in the terminal area,
2.22
about 1.5m and marked by an iron perch, lies about 0.1 mile as shown on the chart.
SE of Brattholme. Pilotage.—A sea pilot should be embarked from Kvitsoya
2.22
Tides—Currents.—In Boknasundet, the tidal current de-

2.20 pilot station; they will also act as a harbor pilot.
pends mainly on the wind and may run in one direction contin- Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be or-
2.22
uously for a considerable time. It is very strong in the dered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an addition-
narrowest part of the sound. During long periods of calm al cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
weather at sea, the tidal current runs regularly, changes direc- Regulations.—Vessels over 50 grt and carrying dangerous
2.22
tion at half tide, and is strongest at HW. Farther N in Boknaf- cargo wishing to use Karsto Gas Terminal must obtain prior
laeet, the tidal current usually runs in the same direction as in permission from the harbor terminal before entering the regu-
Boknsundet. It often changes direction under Boknahovud, the lated area of Skudenesfjorden and Boknafjorden E of the line
NW extremity of Vestre Bokn, and is strongest round Bleikje between the light on Geitungen (59°08'N., 5°15'E.) and the
and between Vesteroy and Hovringoy. light on Vestre Imsen, 8 miles SSE. Such vessels must not ex-
In Austdjupet, the tidal current usually sets in a direction op-
2.20 ceed a speed of 10 knots in the regulated area.
posite to that in Karmsund, but depends greatly on the wind. Permission to enter must be applied for at least 1 hour before
2.22
Still farther N in Fordesfjorden, there is usually an incoming

2.20 arrival in the regulated area or before leaving the quays, an-
tidal current in bad weather and an outgoing current in fine chorages, or other mooring installations in those waters.
weather, but these currents are very weak. The vessel’s ETA should be sent, via the agent, at least 72
2.22
Pub. 182
Markus Johansson, Bitmap/Statoil

2.21 Karsto Gas Terminal from W
hours prior to arrival. The ETA must be confirmed 48 hours, 24 A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron
2.23
hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival. perch, is located about 183m NE of the SE end of Slattholme.
Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to berth at the terminal are to
2.22 A 5.9m depth and an 8.2m depth lie within about 0.2 mile E
anchor in the designated anchorage in Falkeidfaet, between and SE of this rock.
Rovetaerne Light and Billingen Light, and in Hervikfjorden. Lamholme (59°20'N., 5°45'E.) is a small islet in the ap-
2.23
Directions.—The main approach to Karsto Gas Terminal is

2.22 proaches to Muslandsvag. Gullholme lies about 0.1 mile S of
between Austre Vagholmflua (59°13'N., 5°31'E.), a 3m shoal Lamholme. Haskjaer, with other islets and rocks NW, lies
with a light, and Rovetaerne Light, standing on an outermost about 0.2 mile SSW of Gullholme.
rock lying a little over 1 mile ENE. Hunderavag (59°20'N., 5°49'E.), which indents the main-
2.23
land for about 1 mile N, is entered between Tveiteneset, about

2.23 Nedstrandsfjorden (59°15'N., 5°44'E.) is formed by 1 mile ESE of Lamholme, and Baustaneset, about 1 mile ENE.
the mainland on the NW, N, and NE, and by a group of islands Hestflu, marked by an iron perch, extends about 0.1 mile from
and islets, which are known collectively as Sjernaroyane and the E shore of the bay to a position about 0.4 mile NW of Baus-
the island of Ombo, on the S. Nedstrandsfjorden has an en- taneset.
trance that lies between the S end of Toftoy and Lundaroy, Anchorage.—Large vessels can take anchorage in Hunder-
2.23
about 4 miles ESE. From its entrance, it trends NE and E for avag, in 27 to 59m, but the anchorage is exposed to S winds.
about 11 miles to the entrance of Jelsafjorden. The best anchorage for small vessels is off Tveit, located on the
Great depths prevail through the fairway of Nedstrands- NW side of Hunderavag.
fjorden. Shoals and islets lie clear of the fairway.
Lindoy (59°17'N., 5°42'E.), NE of which is Slattholme, is
2.23 2.24 Nedstrandsvag (59°20'N., 5°52'E.) is entered be-
the largest of a group of islets and rocks lying within 1 mile E tween Lille Faeroy, about 1 mile ENE of Baustaneset, and Ton-
of the N end of Toftoy. Lindoygrunn, the southernmost danger ganes, a mainland projection about 0.2 mile farther ENE. A
of the group, is located about 0.2 mile S of Lindoy and is 5.9m depth lies in the middle of the entrance. Within Ned-
marked on its S side by an iron perch. strandsvag, there are numerous dangers, including above and
Heimraflu, the NW danger, is a 1.8m depth marked by a
2.23 below-water rocks, some of which are marked by iron perches.
buoy about 0.2 mile N of Lindoy. A quay has a least depth of 5m along its outer side.
Pub. 182
Foldoy (59°20'N., 5°58'E.) lies in the NE portion of Ned-

2.24 Anchorage.—On the N side of Garsundfjorden, anchorage
2.27
strandsfjorden. Sondre Breidvik, on the S side, and a smaller for small vessels is available, in 10.1 to 11.9m, in Eidsvag,
bight, on the N side, almost divide Foldoy in two. which indents the S side of Ombo about 0.5 mile E of the SE
Both parts of the island are fairly high; the E part rises to an
2.24 extremity of Ombo.
elevation of about 35m. Tjuvholme and other islets and rocks On the S side of the fjord, anchorage can be taken in Batviki,
2.27
lie within 0.25 mile SW of the S extremity of Foldoy; within on the NW side of Halsne.
0.25 mile farther SW there is a detached reef, on the NW end Breidvik (59°13'N., 6°03'E.), on the N shore of Randoy, pro-
2.27
of which a rock lies above water. vides good holding ground, in 16.5m. Oyehamn, in a narrow
Skindryggen, with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by
2.24 inlet about 1 mile W of the NE extremity of Randoy, provides
an iron perch, lies close off the N side of Foldoy in a position good anchorage to small vessels, in 10.1 to 11.9m; mooring
about 0.2 mile NW of the island’s NE extremity. rings are available.
Smaskjaer (59°17'N., 5°57'E.), marked by an iron perch,
2.24
lies about 0.1 mile N of the W entrance point of Jorstadvag, 2.28 Fognafjorden (59°07'N., 5°56'E.) lies between Ros-
which is on the NW side of Ombo, about 1 mile NE of the NW soya and the island of Fogn, on the NW, and the mainland, on
extremity of the island. the SE. It leads NE for about 3 miles from Hidlefjorden and
Brimsefjorden and joins the S end of Saebosund and the outer
2.25 Talgjefjorden (59°08'N., 5°49'E.) is the basin formed end of Ytre Ardalsfjorden. Fognafjorden is 0.75 mile to 1.25
between Rennesoy and Talgje, on the S, and Finnoy and the is- miles wide and throughout its middle part is deep and clear.
lets and dangers lying up to 3 miles W of Finnoy, on the N. Charted depths exceed 183m and all known dangers lie within
Fairway depths are sufficient for large vessels. A few detached 0.15 mile offshore.
dangers lie near the fairway, but most shoals, rocks, and islets Mosnesholmane, a group of three close-lying islets, are on
are in the N part W of Finnoy. A light is shown from the close the SE side of Fisterfjorden (59°09'N., 6°00'E.) within 0.4 mile
N point of Finnoy. NW of Helgoy. Kue is a small islet lies about 0.2 mile off the
Galtaholmen (59°09'N., 5°37'E.) is located close off the N
2.25 SE shore, nearly 0.75 mile NE of the larger islet of the group.
extremity of Rennesoy. Galten, a rock marked by a beacon, lies A below-water rock is located close off the NE side of Kue.
about 0.1 mile N of Galtaholme. Anchorage.—On the NW side of the fjord, vessels can an-
2.28
Ertensoy, comparatively steep-to, lies about 2 miles ENE of

2.25 chor in Sandangervag, about 1 mile farther NE; and in
Galtaholme; between these islets is the principal entrance of Kvaloysund. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of
Talgjefjorden. Midflu, a detached 7.8m patch, lies about 0.3 21.9m crosses the entrance of Sandangervag.
mile SW of Ertensoy. On the SE side of Fisterfjorden, small vessel anchorage can
2.28
Tjelmen is a detached 3.2m depth lying on the N side of the

2.25 be found in Fistervag, which is entered about 2 miles NE of
fjord approach, about 1 mile NW of Ertensoy. Kue; and in Vassvik, about 2 miles further NE.
Flustein (59°08'N., 5°39'E.), on which a beacon stands, lies
2.25
at the N end of a shoal that extends N from the N shore of Ren- 2.29 Ardalsfjorden (59°08'N., 6°00'E.), with its W end
nesoy. starting between Fognafjorden and Fisterfjorden, has numerous
islets and dangers. Helgoy is separated from the mainland N by
2.26 Finnoyfjorden (59°10'N., 5°54'E.), which is formed the narrow Helgoysund. A 10.1m shoal is located about 0.2
between Finnoy on the W, and the islands of Fogn, Bokn, and mile W of the W extremity of Helgoy. Kvaerholmane, within
Halsne (59°11'N., 5°57'E.) on the E, trends NE and N from 91m of which there are some above and below-water rocks,
Talgjefjorden for about 5 miles to the W approach to Garsund- lies about 0.4 mile off the S shore of Ardalsfjorden and 1.25
fjorden. It has a minimum width of about 1 mile, great depths miles E of Hoylandsneset.
through the middle part, and few dangers. Anchorage.—Good anchorage is available off Fiska, on the
2.29
Kjerringi, lying awash about 0.5 mile NNW of the NE ex-

2.26 S side of Ytre Ardalsfjorden about 1 mile SE of Hoylandsne-
tremity of Finnoy, is marked by a beacon. Kjerringer, about set. A concrete quay at Fiska has depths up to 6m.
183m N of Kjerringi, is awash and marked by an iron perch.
Anchorage.—Several good anchorages, suitable for small
2.26
The Outer Fjords
vessels with local knowledge, are located along both sides of
Finnoyfjorden. 2.30 Solbergfjorden (Gapafjorden) (59°15'N., 5°55'E.) is
the channel between the W side of Ombo and a group of is-
2.27 Garsundfjorden (Garssundfjorden) (Gardssund- lands and islets of which the largest are Kyrkjoy and Bjergoy. It
fjorden) (59°13'N., 6°00'E.), located N of Halsne and Randoy leads N from the W approach to Garsundfjorden to Ned-
(Randoyna) (Randoya) (59°12'N., 6°02'E.) and S of the island strandsfjorden and Jelsafjorden.
of Ombo, trends NE for about 8 miles to the entrance of Josen- Solbergfjorden has a minimum width of about 1 mile and is
2.30
fjorden. The minimum width of Garsundfjorden is about 0.7 deep and free from dangers in the fairway, except in the N part,
mile. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway; however a where there are some rocks awash.
marine farm with associated ground tackle lies just off the Om- Caution.—Marine farms have been established on the N
2.30
bo mid-coast shoreline. side of Solbergfjorden in position 69°02.12'N, 17°38.85'E.

Quays, with depths of 4 to 9m alongside, are at Vestersjo,
2.27 Ground tackle extends up to 0.7 mile into the fairway from
about 3 miles ENE of Eidsvag, and at Skar about 2 miles far- these farms.
ther ENE. Gapaskjaergrunnane, which is awash in places, lies in the N
2.30
Pub. 182
Mercy from Wikimedia Commons

2.29
2.29 The Lysefjorden Bridge
part of Solbergfjorden about in mid-channel. An iron beacon mum charted depth of 10.1m. A buoy marks the edge of the
marks the northernmost rock while an iron perch marks the shoal water off Oanes.
southernmost rock. Caution.—The Lysefjorden Bridge, with a vertical clear-
2.30
Kvellandsholme is located on the W side of the fjord, about

2.30 ance of 50m, spans Lysefjorden, about 2 miles from the en-
0.2 mile off the SE extremity of Bjergoy. A submarine cable trance.
crosses the fjord close N of Kvellandsholme. A submarine ca-
ble lies between Bjergoy and Hidleholme, an island about 0.6 2.31 Store Bergsholme (58°56'N., 6°07'E.), with Lille
mile SE of Bjergoy. Bergsholme close off its NW side, lies in Lysefjorden, about 2
Tennholme (59°17'N., 5°52'E.), on the W side of the N end
2.30 miles from the entrance. Navigable channels pass E of the larg-
of Solbergfjorden, lies on foul ground extending about 0.3 mile er islet and W of the smaller islet. A depth of 11.9m is avail-
from the NE side of Bjergoy. The N and NE edges of the foul able through the E channel; greater depths can be found in the
ground are each marked by an iron perch. western channel, but a 15.1m bank, which lies within 183m
Ombofjorden (59°17'N., 6°07'E.) is the passage between NW of Lille Bergsholme, should be avoided. An overhead ca-
Ombo and Josneset. To the E, it leads N from Garsundfjorden ble, with a clearance of 27m, spans the channel between Store
to Jelsafjorden. The minimum width of the passage is about 1 Bergsholme and the coast to the NE.
mile. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway. A concrete quay, with depths alongside of up to 4m, is locat-
2.31
On the E side of Ombofjorden, the coastal bank on the W

2.30 ed at Oanes. A quay at Eidane, about 4 miles NE of Oanes, has
side of the approach to Knutsvik, a cove about 2 miles NNW of depths up to 5m alongside. A quay at Bratteli, on the NW shore
the SW extremity of Josneset, is marked by an iron perch. of the fjord 4.5 miles further NE, has depths from 6 to 9m
Skarvagrunn, a 3.7m depth, lies close offshore about 0.4 mile alongside.
NNW of Knutsvik. Kvassnos Light is shown from the S shore of the fjord in a
2.31
Lysefjorden (58°54'N., 6°05'E.) is entered between Oanes position about 3 miles NE of Store Bergsholme.
and a point about 0.4 mile SE. From the entrance, Lysefjorden A submarine cable is laid from a position 1.75 miles ENE of
2.31
extends in a general NE direction for about 20 miles to its Kvassnos Light across the fjord to Sangesand; another cable is
head. The fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fairway. laid from the same position for about 7 miles E, close to the S
Noted for its wild and beautiful scenery, it trends between cliffs shore.
rising almost perpendicularly on either side to heights of from A light is shown from the N shore of Lysefjorden in a posi-
2.31
610 to 914m. tion about 9 miles NE of Store Bergsholme. Kallasteinsgrunn,

In the entrance, the channel leads between shoals extending
2.30 lying awash close off the N shore about 10 miles NE of Store
from either side and has a width of about 0.2 mile and a mini- Bergsholme, is marked by an iron perch.
Pub. 182
2.32 Fordesfjorden (59°20'N., 5°23'E.) trends N for about the N, and a chain of off-lying islets on the SE.
8 miles from its junction with Austdjupet and Boknaflaeet at Some islands and numerous islets, rocks, and shoals occupy
2.33
the N end of Hovringoy. It penetrates the mainland of the the N part of the basin. General depths through the fairway of
Haugesund peninsula; Fosenoy forms the S part of its W side. Falkeidflaeet are 46 to 92m. A few detached shoal patches lie
The minimum width through most of the fjord is about 0.3 near the fairway.
mile, but islets reduce the navigable channel in places to a The entrance to Falkeidflaeet is between Nordre Vaga-
2.33
width of about 0.2 mile. Charted depths in the fairway are am- holme (59°13'N., 5°31'E.) and Flata Rova, a rock at the SW
ple. end of the islet chain fronting Falkeidflaeet.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Fosnavag, an inlet
2.32 Austreflu, a 3m depth, lies on the SW side of the Falkeidf-
2.33
on the W side of the fjord, about 1 mile NW of Hovringoy. laeet entrance, in a position about 0.2 mile ESE of the N end of
Hellevik, on the W side of the fjord about 1 mile N of Fosna- Nordre Vagaholme.
holme, provides a good anchorage for small vessels. Nautoyflu, a 6.4m depth, is located about 0.2 mile off the W
2.33
Leirvagholme, Skarveskjaer, Flogholmane, and several

2.32 side of Nautoy in a position about 1 mile NE of Nordre Vaga-
above and below-water rocks are in the S part of Fordesfjorden holme. Nautoygrunn, with a depth of 11m, lies about 0.25 mile
within 0.5 mile N of the N extremity of Hovringoy. WNW of this shoal.
Fosnaholmen (59°18'N., 5°23'E.) is on the W side of the
2.32 Gasaholme (59°15'N., 5°32'E.) and Arvikholmen, together
2.33
fairway about 1 mile NNW of Hovringoy. Fosnaflu, a rock with some smaller islets and rocks, lie on foul ground in the
with a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, NE part of Falkeidflaeet. Holmeflu lies close off the NE end of
lies about 0.2 mile N of Fosnaholme. Other rocks lie between Arvikholmen.
Fosnaflu and the islet. Arviksund is the passage between Holmeflu and Haugsneset,
2.33
Hoyeholmane is on the E side of the fairway about 3 miles N

2.32 a mainland point about 0.3 mile N. It leads into Falkeidflaeet
of Fosnaholmen. Leirvagflu, a 3m depth, lies about 183m off- from Hervikfjorden.
shore and 0.15 mile SSE of the southernmost islet. Fjordenflu Austreflu lies at the edge of foul ground extending about 0.1
2.33
is a rock marked by an iron perch lying in mid-channel, about 3 mile S from Haugsneset. A detached 10.1m depth lies about
miles N of Hoyeholmane. 183m N of Holmeflu. An 11m depth lies about the same dis-
Many islands, islets and other hazards lie between Fjordenf-
2.32 tance SW of Austreflu.
lu and the head of Fordesfjorden. Krake, with a depth of 5.9m, and Ytre Krake, above water,
2.33
Royksundviki, on the W side of the fjord about 0.5 mile N of

2.32 are located about 0.5 mile and 1 mile, respectively, WNW of
Hellevik, provides good anchorage for small vessels. Holmeflu. There is an 11m depth about 183m SE of Krake;
rocks with depths of 4.6m and 6.4m lie within 0.4 mile of the N
2.33 Falkeidflaeet (59°14'N., 5°31'E.), a basin, lies on the shore.
NW side of Boknafjorden and is formed by Austre Bokn and Deep-draft vessels should not use Arviksund because of the
2.33
Ognoy on the W, the mainland of the Haugesund peninsula on above-mentioned dangers.
2.33 By Martin NH [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0)], from Wikimedia Commons

2.33 Sand from NE (Sandsfjorden and Vindafjorden in background)
Pub. 182
Caution.—The mainland shore on the N side of Falkeid-

2.33 about 0.3 mile N of the entrance to Sandsfjorden, is a secure
flaeet is fringed by reefs; depths in the vicinity are very irregu- anchorage for small vessels except during E winds. It has a
lar, and undiscovered shoals may exist. quay, with 2 to 5m alongside. Tveitavik, about 2 miles farther
NNE, is exposed to the S. Small vessels can anchor on either
2.34 Sandsfjorden (59°21'N., 6°00'E.) trends in a general side of a promontory at the head of the bay. There is a quay,
NE direction for about 11 miles from its entrance to its junction with depths of 2 to 5m alongside.
with Hylsfjorden. Skorpene, about 3 miles within the entrance, Vatlandsvag, about 2 miles further NNE, has a quay, with
2.35
divides Sandsfjorden into three channels. The fjord then be- depths of 3 to 12m alongside.
comes narrow and winding until it opens again near Naevoy, Jelsafjorden (59°19'N., 6°02'E.) trends E from Nedstrands-
about 5 miles farther NE. Depths through the fairway of Sands- fjorden to Ersfjorden and is deep and clear throughout. Jelsa-
fjorden are ample. hunden, marked by an iron perch, lies about 91m off the W
The Sandsfjord Bridge (59°24.53'N., 6°07.42'E.), with a
2.34 entrance to Jelsavag (59°20'N., 6°02'E.), on the N side of Jel-
vertical clearance of 65m, spans the narrows immediately N of safjorden. Jelsa, is on the NE side of a bight close W of Jelsav-
the overhead cable. ag.
Tides—Currents.—In Sandsfjorden and in Saudefjorden,
2.34 Depths—Limitations.—The port of Jelsa handles general
2.35
farther N, the tidal current (resultant of constant and tidal cur- cargo and aggregates. The maximum draft that can be accom-
rents) usually runs outward. At the head of Saudefjorden, the modated is 11.1m. For more information see table titled Jel-
current is strong and runs through the fjords to the narrow sa—Berth Information.
channel at Ytre Asaroy (59°25'N., 6°08'E.), where it may at-
tain a velocity of 3 to 4 knots; then it passes N of Ottoy toward Jelsa—Berth Information
the W shore, with a branch setting S into Ottoysand, SE of Ot-
toy, out through the three channels at Skorpene, with about Maximum
equal strength in all the channels. Berth Length Vessel Remarks
Kvitholm (59°23'N., 6°03'E.) is on the W side of the main
2.34
Draft
fairway about 3 miles NE of the entrance to Sandsfjorden. The Aggregates and
channel width abreast the islet is about 0.2 mile. Two 7.5m Lower 50m —
breakbulk.
depths are located about 0.2 mile and 0.5 mile SW of
Middle
Kvitholm. 60m — Aggregates.
Loading
Skorpene lies about 0.3 mile N and 0.5 mile NW of
2.34
Kvitholm. The easternmost of the three channels formed by Upper Aggregates and
160m 11.1m
these two islets is the main fairway. Midtholme lies about 0.2 Loading breakbulk.
mile NE of Kvitholm and an islet lies about 160m NE of the E
Skorpene island; both dangers lie close W of the main fairway. Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage within
2.35
A 4.5m depth is located about 0.2 mile NW of the western

2.34
Jelsavag.
Skorpene island. A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close S
of the 4.5m depth. 2.36 Okstrafjorden (59°20'N., 6°06'E.) trends N from its
A 7m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 91m N of Ottoy
2.34
entrance for about 2 miles to the entrance of Lindevik, where it
(59°24'N., 6°06'E.). A reef extends about 183m S from the becomes very narrow. It then continues NNE for 1 mile to its
shore N of Ottoy toward the fairway. head. North of Lindevik, the narrow channel is shallow, re-
A light is shown from Foreholmen, which lies on the N side
2.34
stricted by rocks, and icebound in winter. In the lower narrows
of the fairway about 0.5 mile E of the N extremity of Ottoy. off Holenes, about 1 mile from the fjord entrance, tidal currents
An above-water rock is located about 183m NW of Forehol-
2.34
may often set strongly.
men. Charted depths in the fairway as far as Lindevik entrance are
2.36
40 to 82m. Some of the dangers in the fjord are marked by iron

2.35 Sand (59°29'N., 6°15'E.), where there is a quay with perches. The lower narrows, for a distance of about 0.5 mile, is
depths of 9 to 10m alongside, lies on the N side of the shallow about 91m wide.
mouth of a river flowing into the E side of the fjord. There are An overhead cable, with a clearance of 15m, crosses the nar-
2.36
regular ferry services from here to Ropeid and Stavanger. row inner part of Okstrafjorden.
Omsmallneset, from which a light is shown, is a salient point
2.35
The Josenfjorden (59°15'N., 6°10'E.) entrance is between
on the E side of the fjord about 0.7 mile NE of Foreholmen. the SW extremity of Josneset and a point about 1 mile SE. The
Between Omsmallneset and Blaskjaer, about 0.1 mile W, fjord trends NE and E for about 14 miles and is deep and free
Sandsfjorden is at its narrowest and takes an abrupt turn N. from dangers throughout. Within about 2 miles of its head, it is
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in the N part
2.35
narrow. The land on either side of the fjord is very high; on the
of the cove off Sand, to avoid a submarine cable in the S part, S side it is very steep.
in 25m, clay. Anchorage.—The anchorages in Josenfjorden are suitable
2.36
Leirvika, on the E side of Nevoy, located 4 miles SW of

2.35
only for vessels with local knowledge.
Sand and 1.5 mile NE of Omsmallneset, has a secure anchor-
age for small vessels except during E winds. It has a quay, with 2.37 The entrance to Ersfjorden (59°19'N., 6°08'E.) lies
2 to 5m alongside. between Lyngneset, a projection at the NW end of Josneset,
Skorneset (59°21'N., 6°58'E) on the W side of the fjord
2.35
and Landsnes, about 0.5 mile N. Ersfjorden trends E for about
Pub. 182
2.36 Sauda Smelting Dock
5 miles to Kileneset, has a minimum width of about 0.3 mile, depths from 3 to 5.9m alongside.
and is deep and free from dangers in the fairway. The NW side
of Landsnes is foul for about 183m offshore. 2.39 Sauda (59°39'N., 6°21'E.) lies at the mouths of two riv-
Tyssefjorden (59°21'N., 6°14'E.) is a narrow branch trend- ers. There is an import quay, about 252m, long with depths of 6 to
ing NNW from the E end of Ersfjorden for about 3 miles. The 11m alongside. The export quay E of it, is 112m long, with depths
fairway is deep and clear, but is usually icebound in winter. A of 8 to 9m alongside. The public quays have depths from 5 to 6m
bridge with a vertical clearance of 23m spans the inlet en- alongside.
trance. The numerous anchorages in Tyssefjorden are only suit- Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
2.39
able for small vessels with local knowledge. may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
Hylsfjorden (59°31'N., 6°16'E.), from its junction with additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Sandsfjorden and Saudefjorden, trends ENE for about 10.75 Contact Information.—See the table titled Sauda—Contact
2.39
miles to its head. It is deep and free from dangers in the fair- Information.
way. Anchorages for small vessels with local knowledge are
available in several places within the fjord. Sauda—Contact Information
2.38 Saudefjorden (Saudafjorden) (59°33'N., 6°17'E.) trends VHF VHF channels 6, 9, and 16
NNE for about 8 miles from its junction with Sandsfjorden and Telephone 47-52-782585
Hylsfjorden. The fjord is deep and free from dangers in the fair-
way. Facsimile 47-52-781588
In winter, Saudefjorden is icebound from its head S to So-
2.38
land, which is on the W side about 4 miles NNE of the en- Anchorage.—At the head of the fjord, vessels can anchor
2.39
trance. off Saudasjoen, in 11 to 20m, and off Sauda, in 40 to 50m, clay.

A light is shown from Asneset, on the W side of the fjord,
2.38
Caution.—Vessels going alongside the quays at Sauda must
2.39
about 1 mile N of the entrance. A quay located in a cove S of exercise caution because of the strong currents from the rivers.
Asneset has depths of 6m alongside. Careful attention should be paid to wind direction.
2.39
A light is shown from Ramsnes (59°38'N., 6°20'E.), a point on

2.38
the E shore, about 7 miles NNE of the entrance. 2.40 Vindafjorden (59°20'N., 5°56'E.) trends NNW from
A light is shown from Saunes, on the N side of the fjord,
2.38
its entrance for about 6 miles to Krossfjorden, a basin formed
about 1 mile N of Ramsnes. by the junction of four separate fjord arms. The E arm, under
Shoal water extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in places along
2.38
the name of Vindafjorden, leads ENE for about 9 miles.
the N shore of the fjord NE of Saunes. A buoy marks a sand From Krossfjorden, Sandeidfjorden trends NNW for about 5
2.40
and gravel bank at the mouth of a river. miles, and Yrkefjorden trends SW for about 7 miles.
Ekkjegrunn, with a depth of about 1.8m and marked by a
2.38
Vatsfjorden extends NNW for about 3 miles from about the
2.40
lighted beacon, lies 0.2 mile WNW of Hesthamaren, a point on middle of the N side of Yrkefjorden.
the E side of the head of Saudefjorden, about 1 mile E of There are few good harbors in Vindafjorden and its connect-
2.40
Saunes. Several buoys also mark this shoal. ing fjords to the N, due to the generally steep-to shoreline.
Saudasjoen is on the NW side of the head of the fjord. It has
2.38
Ice.—Vindafjorden is usually free from ice. Ice sometimes
2.40
a concrete pier, 87m long, with a depth of over 9.1m alongside. forms in Sandeidfjorden, but seldom lasts very long.
Two other piers, one 37m long and the other 46m long, have
2.38
Vatsfjorden and the head of Yrkefjorden may be icebound
2.40
Pub. 182
for several months continuously. A quay, with depths of 3 to 6m alongside, is located at

2.40
A light is shown from Skjervheim (59°28'N., 5°45'E.) in a

2.40 Vikedal on the E shore of Sandeidfjorden.
position on the E shore of Vatsfjorden about 2 miles NNW of A submarine cable is laid in Sandeidfjorden between Ilsvag
2.40
the entrance. and Sandeid at the head of the fjord.

Flatskjaerbaen, at the S end of a reef on the E side of the
2.40 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 18m, crosses
2.40
Vatsfjorden entrance, is marked by an iron beacon. Forholme is Yrkefjorden about 0.2 mile from its head.
a small islet at the N end of the reef.
Pub. 182
3.
Sector 3—Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
Pub. 182
3.0
47
49
SECTOR 3
NORWAY—SKUDENESFJORDEN TO KORSFJORDEN
Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast between Skude-

3.0 present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast.
nesfjorden and Korsfjorden, and then the inner route and adja- Floating ice is met in spring, when small masses, which are
cent inlets between these two major fjords. The arrangement is soon dispersed, may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and
N, starting from Getungane, two islets directly S of Karmoya occasionally from some of the larger fjords to the W and N of
on the N shore of Skudensfjorden, and Store Marstein, an islet Lindesnes.
on the S side of Korsfjorden. 3.1Tides—Currents.—North of Skudenesfjorden entrance the
current sets N with a decreasing velocity. An average velocity
General Remarks of about 2 knots is maintained about 5 miles offshore as far N
as Breidsundet.
3.1 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds on the W 3.1The velocity decreases both toward the coast and seaward,
and S coasts of Norway reflect the average pressure distribu- and about 15 miles offshore is not more than about 0.2 knots.
tion and its seasonal changes. With the shift from high pressure 3.1The decrease seaward may be caused by a S current E of the
over S Norway in winter to low pressure in summer, the winds Shetland Islands. These two currents form large weak eddies,
on the W coast change from S in winter to N in summer. The rotating counterclockwise and centered 30 to 40 miles off-
prevalence of winds from any one direction is not in evidence shore.
more than 40 per cent of the time. The more usual situation is 3.1Tidal currents between Skudenesfjorden entrance and Kors-
one of winds induced by a passing cyclone with shifting direc- fjorden entrance the tidal currents about 5 miles offshore usual-
tions and velocities. ly sets N. With long periods of SW and W gales, the set is N
3.1Within the fjords and along the very indented coast line the and fairly strong, especially during the rising tide (beginning
wind is usually widely different from that in the open sea, ow- about 5 hours 45 minutes after HW at Bergen).
ing to land and sea breezes and topographical effects. 3.1Closer inshore, the tidal current component is more appre-
3.1Because of the mountainous nature of the coast any wind ciable, resulting in a N set during the rising tide and a S set
blowing from a direction between S and WSW is deflected to during the falling tide (beginning about 30 minutes before the
blow as a S wind on the coast, and any wind blowing between HW at Bergen).
NW and N is deflected to blow as a N wind. The winds in W 3.1The tidal current usually sets outward from the entrances of
Norway therefore have a tendency to blow across the mouth of the large fjords.
the fjords. The speed of the wind also increases outward from 3.1In Stokksund and Nyleid the tidal currents set N with the ris-
the coast to a distance of as much as 150 miles. ing tide and S with the falling tide. Before the onset of unset-
3.1There is a lot of turbulence along the Norwegian coast when tled weather, however, there may be a set in one direction,
winds are fresh or strong, due to the broken country. Gales oc- either N or S, for a considerable period of time.
cur very frequently over this area when deep depressions are 3.1In Alfjorden the tidal currents may be very strong, but there
moving NE between the British Isles and Iceland, under which may also be tidal currents setting in opposite directions in the
condition a very steep gradient is apt to develop all along the W outer and inner parts of the fjord. The tidal currents near the
seaboard of Norway, producing strong S winds. This very steep land usually differ in direction from that in the middle of the
gradient at times extends 100 to 150 miles out to sea from the fjord.
coast. 3.1In Langenuen there is nearly always a N setting tidal current,
3.1Under these conditions the coast is swept by violent winds although occasionally in fine weather it sets S. Current veloci-
which penetrate into the more sheltered fjords with great turbu- ties of 4 to 5 knots during strong S winds have been reported
lence though with reduced velocity. Spells of NW gales occur off Skor Light. Dangerous eddies near the shores of Langenuen
on the W coast when a suitable gradient is established by pres- have also been reported. There is usually an ebb tidal current in
sure falling over Scandinavia. Such gales are apt to persist but Hardangerfjorden, however, there may be an incoming current
the gradient on some occasions falls off suddenly to the E of during W gales at sea, but only in the outer part. The outgoing
the Shetlands. tidal currents may be very strong in Bondesundet W of Varald-
3.1Weather conditions in this coastal sector are changeable. The soy, off Ljones in Hissfjorden, and off Krosnes at the entrance
prevailing winds are E from October to March and W from of Sorfjorden.
April to September. In winter the heaviest gale occur with SW 3.1Off Simadal, at the head of Eidfjorden, there is usually a
winds and are usually accompanied by rain or snow. Northwest weak outgoing current, which is somewhat increased during
winds are, as a rule, dry both in summer and winter. and after periods of heavy rains and after the snow melts, but
3.1The most rainy months are generally October and November. this current may cease with long continued SW winds.
Snow appears near the coast in December and in places re- 3.1In Lokksundet, the channel connecting Hardangerfjorden
mains until March. with Bjornefjorden the spring velocity of the current is no-
3.1Fog occurs off the coast in summer for an average period of where more than 0.3 knot. With onshore winds at sea, there is a
five days each month. continuous N tidal current in Lokkfsundet.
3.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is 3.1Tides in the North Sea are always semidiurnal, with very lit-
Pub. 182
50 Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
tle diurnal inequality between the two HW or the two LW of Mariners are advised to avoid these structures and associated
each tidal day. moorings.
3.1The tides progress into the North Sea from the Atlantic 3.2North of Skudenesfjorden, the characteristic features of the
Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the Norwegian coast begin gradually to appear; the islands in-
North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal crease in size and number, and the mountains attain a greater
point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and elevation, but there are as yet no traces of the bold, striking out-
W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the lines and savage grandeur which distinguish the coastal scen-
6th meridian. Along the W coast of Norway the progression is ery N of Trondheim.
N to about 60° N.; N of this the progression is E. 3.2The entrances of Skudenesfjorden and Bomlafjorden are
3.1Along the W coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually increase conspicuous from offshore. Although, when sailing toward
toward the N, from 0.2m at Mandal to 0.91m at Bergen. Bomlafjorden, the elevation of the land along the coast de-
3.1Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of creases in height, when entering Bomlafjorden in clear weath-
wind on the tide level is small. This is probably due to the scat- er, the Hardanger Mountains are easily visible.
tering effect of offshore island and the relatively deep water 3.2An imaginary line drawn through the outermost islands, is-
close inshore. lets, and dangers fronting the mainland between the Bom-
3.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning lafjorden entrance and the Korsfjorden entrance runs
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. irregularly, but approximately N for about 35 miles.
3.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning 3.2Selbjornsfjorden is entered about 12 miles S of Korsfjorden.
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. These last two fjords are considered the most important N
3.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR fjords of this section. They are the principal S approaches to
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco- Bergen.
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the The Outer Coast—Off-lying Islets and Dangers
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1. 3.3 Beryl Oil Field (59°33'N., 1°32'E.) is situated about
3.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes 103 miles WNW of Utsira. There is a production platform with
(TSS) in Norwegian waters, including off Ryvingen, see Pub. an adjacent flare structure linked to it by a bridge. SPM tanker
180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. loading platforms stand close NE and SE of the platform.
3.1Caution.—A permanently-active firing practice area lies in Ness Oil Field and Bruce Gas Field, lie 4 miles W and 9
3.3
the SW and W approaches to Korsfjorden. For further informa- miles N, respectively, of Beryl Oil Field.
tion, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Heimdal Gas Field (59°35'N., 2°15'E.) lies 20 miles E of
3.3
Ocean. Beryl Oil Field; gas pipelines, which may best be seen on the
3.1In winter, falling snow is the greatest danger. The land is of- chart, extend S and SSW from it.
ten completely obscured in snow. In Indreleia, when a snow- Frigg Gas Field (59°53'N., 2°04'E.) was shut down and the
3.3
storm threatens, careful bearing of the nearest anchorage facilities disposed of in 2004. Redevelopment was under con-
should be taken to enable the vessel to seek shelter. Because of sideration in 2016.
the tidal current, it is dangerous to heave-to. Ringhorne Field (59°16'N., 2°27'E.), marked by a lighted
3.3
platform, is connected by a submarine pipeline to a storage

Skudensfjorden to Korsfjorden vessel moored about 5 miles SSW. The field is expected to pro-
duce into 2025.
3.2 The coast between Geitungane, two islets directly S of For oil and gas fields N of the above, see Sector 4. For oil
3.3
Karmoya on the N shore of Skudensfjorden, to about 60 miles and gas fields S of the above, see Sector 2 and Pub. 141, Sail-
N to Store Marstein, an islet W of Stora Kalsoy on the S side of ing Directions (Enroute) Scotland.
the entrance to Korsfjorden, consists of several large islands, For more information on North Sea petroleum operations
3.3
fringed with islets and rocks. The large islands include Kar- visit the Norwegian Petroleum web site.
moy, Bomlo, and Selbjornen. There are numerous detached
dangers along the irregular outer coast. Norwegian Petroleum
Bomlafjorden and Selbjornsfjorden are two deep inlets
which are entered from seaward and lead into the inner net- https://www.norskpetroleum.no
work of fjords.
3.2Hardangerfjorden is a continuation of Bomlafjorden and ex- 3.4 Utsira (59°18'N., 4°53'E.), 71m high, lies about 9
tends, under various names, about 70 miles in a NE direction miles off the W coast of Karmoy and, because of its isolated
from its entrance. Indreleia (Inner Lead), comprising all of the position, is conspicuous. Utsira is inhabited; during the spring
inner channels leading N toward Bergen, is entered from herring fishing season numerous fishing vessels visit the is-
Skudenesfjorden through Karmsundet, the passage on the E land. A light is shown from a prominent light tower, 13m high,
side of Karmoy. standing on the W part of the island.
3.2Caution.—Marine farms exist within the area of the inner 3.4Lights are shown from both sides of a sound that indents the
fjord of Bomlafjorden near Toflekalven. They may not all be SE side of Utsira close NW of Beiningen, a small islet. A light
shown individually and their positions change frequently. Ma- is shown from a rock close E of Beiningen.
rine farms may be marked by lighted or unlit buoys or beacons. 3.4Lausingen is the southernmost islet in the Utsira group and is
Pub. 182
Sector 3. Norway—Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden 51
located about 2 miles SSW of the S extremity of Utsira. This vessels at Sandvehamn only during good weather. Local
islet is low and foul on all sides. Vestreflu, a 5m depth, and knowledge is required before attempting to anchor in this area.
Lausingbaen, a 2m depth, lie about 0.1 mile SW and 0.2 mile 3.5Ferkingstadvag (59°14'N., 5°11'E.) is a good fishing harbor
N, respectively, of Lausingen. Skallen, a 14m depth, lies about entered N of a short mole. It has a dredged depth of 4m and has
0.6 mile SE of Lausingen. quays with mooring rings. Fuel oil and fresh water can be sup-
3.4Spannholmane (59°17'N., 4°51'E.), a group of islets, is lo- plied. Foul ground, with some above-water rocks, extends up
cated about 0.5 mile N of Lausingen. Holmegrunka is an 11m to 0.2 mile offshore NW from the S entrance point of Ferking-
depth, about 0.2 mile N of Spannholmane. stadvag.
3.4Vindballen, an above-water rock, and Vindballflu, with a
depth of less than 1.8m, lie within 0.3 mile SW of Beiningen. 3.6 Akrehamn (59°16'N., 5°11'E.), a harbor for small
Lille Seiskjaer, partly above-water, lies about 0.3 mile SSE of vessels and fishing boats, is on the W shore of Karmoy, mid-
Beiningen. Skarholmflu, a 4m shoal, is located 0.25 mile off way S of Veavagen.
the E extremity of Utsira. All other charted dangers near Utsira The approach to Akrehamn lies between the coast at the
3.6
lie within 0.2 mile offshore. Ferkingstadvag entrance and Maroy, which lies close offshore
3.4The two harbors in Utsira are Tuavag and Nordvikvag, on its about 3 miles N. The approach is encumbered with numerous
S side and N side, respectively. They are available only to small dangers extending up to 1.5 miles offshore.
vessels with local knowledge. The islets forming the harbor are joined by causeways and
3.4Tuavag provides anchorage, in a depth of 17m. A mole, near moles, leaving an opening from the S which is entered close E
the head of the cove, forms a boat harbor which has depths of of a short mole extending SE from Mortholme. There are sev-
1.8 to 7.6m. In the entrance to the boat harbor, there are depths eral approaches leading in among the outer dangers, but local
of 4.9 to 5.8m. A quay has depths of 4 to 5m alongside. knowledge is required. Buoys and perches mark the channels.
3.4Nordvikvag is free from dangers in the fairway and affords The inner harbor has been dredged to a depth of 4m.
anchorage, with good holding ground, in depths of 6 to 17m. Svortingen and Ryvingen, the outermost islets in the near ap-
3.6
Two quays have depths of up to 5m. proach to Akrehamn, are located about 1 mile WNW and 1.5
3.4Ferkingstadoyane (59°14'N., 5°04'E.), a group of compara- miles NNW, respectively, of Akrehamn. Both islets are dark
tively high islets, lies nearly 3 miles W of Ferkingstadneset, colored and are easily seen against the beach’s white sand.
which is on the W coast of Karmoy, about 5 miles N of Svortingflu, a 9m depth, lies about 0.5 mile WNW of Svortin-
Jarsteinen. The islets are unoccupied, but are frequented during gen.
the fishing season by lobster fishermen. There is no harbor in
the group. Fringing rocks and shoals, some of which are awash, 3.7 Veavagen (59°18'N., 5°13'E.), a narrow inlet, runs SE
lie within 0.25 mile of some of the islets. for about 2.25 miles from its entrance between Kvartnesholme,
3.4Urter (59°22'N., 5°02'E.) lies with its S end about 4 miles about 2 miles NE of Maroy, and Veavagneset, on Karmoy
NE of Utsira. It includes the small islet of Urter and a number about 0.2 mile farther NE. A light is shown from Veavagneset.
of islets and above and below-water rocks spread over an area Several islets and rocks, some marked by buoys and iron perch-
about 2 miles long, N and S. es, lie on a foul ground area W of the entrance to Veavagen.
3.4The Urter group is uninhabited, but is visited by fishermen The approaches to Veavagen within 1.5 miles SW, W, and
3.7
during the fishing season. On Urter, there is a building for their NW of Kvartnesholme are obstructed by numerous islets and
use. There are no harbors in the group. reefs, among which there are several channels. Only the N
3.4All the remaining islets and dangers along the coast between channel, leading in between the NE side of Kvitingane and
Geitungane and Korsfjorden entrance lie within 6 miles W of Meldrane, is recommended.
the larger islands forming this coast. Salvoy, Dyrholme, and Kavholme lie in the foul area SW, W,
3.7
and NW, respectively, of Kvartnesholme. A beacon stands on

Skudensfjorden to Bomlafjorden the NW extremity of Dyrholme.
Beacons marks some of the dangers in the area between Sal-
3.7
3.5 The coast between Skudenesfjorden and Bom- voy and Maroy; perches marks some of those near the ap-
lafjorden, the next N large fjord which leads in from seaward, proach channels.
is formed by the W coasts of Karmoy. It is part of the Hauge- A beacon stands on Svartholme, about 0.5 mile N of the N
3.7
sund peninsula. This peninsula is indented by smaller fjords, end of Kavholme. Between the beacon and the islet there is a
bays, and inlets, and is separated from Karmoy by Karmsun- group of above-water rocks named Kvitingane. A 4m depth,
det, which forms the S reach of Indreleia. marked by an iron perch, and a 5m depth, marked by a buoy, lie
3.5The irregular coast of Karmoy is fringed by close-lying islets about 0.2 mile WNW and 0.3 mile NNW, respectively, of
and dangers, which extend as far as 2.5 miles offshore. About Svartholme.
10 miles N and NW of Karmoy, in the seaward approaches to Lamholme (59°20'N., 5°12'E.) is located in a foul bight
3.7
Haugesund and Bomlafjorden, there are groups of islets and about 1 mile NNE of Svartholme. Rocks lie up to 0.2 mile SW
numerous dangerous rocks. of the islet. Meldrane, an above-water rock, is the outermost
3.5Hills in the SE part of Karmoy are 61 to 79m high and are danger in this direction. Stroka, with a depth of 15m, lies about
rugged. The beaches up to Veavagen, a distance N of about 10 0.3 mile NW of Lamholme on the N side of the entrance to
miles, are composed mainly of white sand and rocks. Veavagen.
3.5Sandvehamn (59°11'N., 5°11'E.) is a small harbor sheltered Breakwaters extend from each shore in a position about 1
3.7
by two sets of breakwaters. Anchorage is available for small mile SE of its entrance to Veavagen. The space between heads
Pub. 182
is about 60m. A light is shown on each side. above-mentioned islet chain and Killingoy and Hasseloy.
3.7Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Veavagen, in a 3.9Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots can be obtained
charted depth of 23.8m, with a mud and sand bottom, about 1 from Kvitsoy.
mile SSE of the entrance. There are several other anchorages From the vicinity of the N entrance to Haugesund, the main-
on both sides of the inlet. land coast trends in a general N direction for about 6 miles to
3.7Caution.—A submarine pipeline crosses the head of Veav- Ryvarden, the S entrance point of Bomlafjorden.
agen N of Brekke (59°17'N., 5°16'E.). It then extends NW for 3.9Four islet and rock-encumbered bays and a few small coves
about 2 miles, close to the NE shore of the inlet. indent the coastline. Numerous islets, shoals, and foul patches
3.7Gas pipelines extend seaward from a terminal located close front this coastal stretch, most of them lying in the seaward ap-
to the N end of the entrance to Veavagen. proach to Bomlafjorden, where they form the N side of Sletto.
3.9Sletto is an open stretch of sea NW of Haugesund. The
3.8 Feoy (59°23'N., 5°10'E.), an inhabited group of is- depths in the area are variable, from shoals with depths of 2m
lands and islets, lies within 2.5 miles of the W side of the N to places as deep as approximately 250m.
part of Karmoy. Foynfjorden lies between Feoy and Karmoy. 3.9The area is relatively narrow, and the great variations in
Most of the islets and islands are close to one another. Some
3.8 depth cause extremely turbulent and choppy seas when waves
of the narrow channels that separate the islands are navigable come in from the SW to NW. The conditions become even
by small vessels. Within and on the outer edge of the group, worse when the tidal current runs against the waves.
there are numerous smaller islets, rocks, and other dangers. 3.9Smorsundnes (59°30'N., 5°14'E.), marked by a beacon, is
Perches, beacons, and buoys mark some of the dangers near the located on the mainland about 4 miles N of the N entrance to
channels. Haugesund.
Foynfjorden (59°25'N., 5°11'E.) has a depth of more than
3.8 3.9Smorsundholme lies close NE of this point and is separated
14m in its fairway; some of the dangers on both sides are from Trettoy, NE of it, by a narrow channel named Smorsund.
marked by perches and buoys. It provides a navigable channel Viksefjorden is joined to the SE end of Smorsund by the nar-
leading N to the seaward approaches to Haugesund. row Straumen, which has depths of 0.9m in places.
3.9Molstrevag is entered between Langeneset (59°31'N.,
3.9 The approach to Haugesund leads in among the con- 5°14'E.) and a point about 0.3 mile farther N. The inner part of
centration of islets and rocks lying within 2 miles NW and N of Molstrevag is sheltered, but the entrance channels are very nar-
Osnesgavlen (59°25'N., 5°14'E.), the N extremity of Karmoy. row. Some of the rocks in the bay are marked by iron perches.
Haraldstotta, a conspicuous red granite obelisk, stands on the Among several quays at Molstrevag, the largest has depths of 5
mainland about 1 mile NNE of Osnesgavlen. to 7m alongside.
3.9Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Molstrevag, in
16.5m, sand bottom. The approach channels to this anchorage
are narrow. Smaller vessels anchor farther in.
Haugesund (59°25'N., 5°16'E.)

World Port Index No. 23440
3.10 Haugesund (Karmsund) was originally a fishing port;

it consists of six municipalities, with Karmsund being the larg-
est. Shipping and industry have gradually increased its impor-
tance. It has an expanding ship building and ship repairing
capability for conventional vessels, supply vessels, and off-
shore structures.
Haugesund’s harbor facilities extend from the mainland to
3.10
the adjacent islets of Risoy, Hasseloy, and Killingoy, and con-

tinuing across Karmsundet to Karmoy.
Port of Haugesund Home Page

Mark Voigt [CC BY 3.0 (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by/3.0)
3.9 http://www.karmsund-havn.no
Haraldstotta
Winds—Weather.—The weather at Haugesund is change-
3.10
3.9The port of Haugesund is entered by either one of two chan- able, which is characteristic of the W coast of Norway. Cargo
nels which are formed at the N end of Karmsund by a chain of operations are not interfered with. The port is well sheltered
islets extending SSE from Sorhaugoy (59°25'N., 5°14'E.). from all winds and is ice free. Winter storms are frequent and
3.9Vestre Karmsund, the SW and principal channel, lies be- may be from any quarter.
tween these islets and the N end of Karmoy at Osnesgavlen. It Tides—Currents.—The tidal current turns regularly 3 hours
3.10
is approached directly through the outer buoyed channel. before and 3 hours after HW, so that at about HW the current is
3.9Vibrandsoysund, the NE channel, leads in between the setting with its greatest velocity to the S; at LW the current is
Pub. 182
3.10 Haugesund
setting with its greatest velocity to the N. With strong, continu- mal use of the port.
ous N winds, the tidal current may set continuously S and, sim- Depths—Limitations.—The port of Karmsund in Hauge-
3.10
ilarly, with strong, continuous S winds, it may set continuously sund consists of many public and private quays. Vessels up to
N. 200,000 dwt, 362m in length, and 15m draft can be handled in
The tidal currents attain their maximum velocity through Vi-
3.10 the port. The port itself is divided into several sub-port regions.
brandsoysund, off Osnesgavlen in Vestre Karmsund, and in Berthing details for the most significant berths are shown in the
Salhusstraummen. In the latter channel, the current may attain table titled Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information.
a velocity of 3 knots, but in Vibrandsoysund it is seldom stron- A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 13.5m, connects Has-
3.10
ger than 2 knots. Strong winds, as mentioned above, also great- seloy with the mainland. Another bridge, with a vertical clear-
ly influence the velocity. ance of 22.5m, joins Risoy with the mainland. Lights are
In Smedasund and other parts of the harbor, the velocity is
3.10 shown from the center of the bridges to indicate the fairway.
usually about 1 knot. Nowhere do tidal currents affect the nor-
Port of Karmsund Area—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Karmsund Container Terminal
KCT1 270m 10.0m 213.4m — — 40,000 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and containers.
Langevag
Breakbulk. Berth handles equipment
Langevag 117m 5.5-11.7m 60.5m — — —
and spare parts for vehicles.
Espervik
Amrock Under construction. Aggregates, bulk
100m 10.0m — — — 25,000 dwt
Granite cargo, and breakbulk.
Garpeskjaerskaien
Ferry 11m 10.5m 68.3m — — — Cruise vessels.
East
260m 7.1m 220m — — — Cruise vessels.
Cruise
Pub. 182

Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
West Cruise vessels.
420m 9.5m 362m — — —
Cruise .
Haavik
Alumina
270m 11.0m 199.9m — — 147,000 dwt Aluminum and breakbulk.
Bulk
Killingoy Subsea and Offshore Base (Haugesund)
Offshore vessels, project/heavy car-
No. 1 160m 10.0m 81.5m — — — go, offshore industrial maintenance
and repair service, and breakbulk.
Offshore vessels, project/heavy car-
No. 2 110m 15.2m 81.5m — — — go, offshore industrial maintenance
and repair service, and breakbulk.
Kopervik
Kopervik 291m 5.2-14.5m 119.3m — — — Breakbulk.
Westcon
Two floating docks of 7,600t and
Floating
100m — 80-150m — — — 1,300t capacity, one of 100t, and two
Docks
40t cranes.
Vessels up to 3,000t and a quay with
depths alongside up to 11m for off-
Slipway — — — — — —
shore structures. with a width of
44m.
Aibel
273m 8.2m — — — 150,000 dwt Crane capacity of 75t.
Drydock
Rubbestad
neset — — 118m 6.9m 21.4m 1,400 dwt —
Slipway
Forsevik
Forsevik 43m 5.5-9.7m 90.6m — — — Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Norbar Minerals
NM 78m — 119.9m — — — Fertilizer, bulk cargo, and breakbulk.
Karsmund Maritime AS
Aggregates, cement, sand, offshore,
Concrete 75m 9.3-11.9m 93.4m — — — vessels, project/heavy cargo, break-
bulk, and cargo.
Gismarvik Harbor
Aggregates, cement, bulk cargo, and
Gismarvik 80m 16.5m 138.8m — — —
breakbulk.
Norcem Karmony
Aggregates, cement, bulk cargo, and
Cement 23m — 109.1m — — —
breakbulk.
Norscrap Karmoy
Scrap metal, demolition, recycling,
Norscrap 50m — 88.6m — — —
and breakbulk.
Pub. 182

Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Karsmund Havn
Export Containers, offshore vessels, bulk,
75m 10.0m 82.4m — — —
(KFXP) project/heavy cargo, and breakbulk.
Freezer Containers, offshore vessels, bulk,
98m 8.0m 81.8m — — —
(KFRY) project/heavy cargo, and breakbulk.
Karsmund Bulk
Karmsund Aggregates, animal feeds, fertilizer,
Bulk 50m 8.3m 170m — — 8,000 dwt grain, salt, and breakbulk. Berthing
Terminal length of 111m (including dolphins).
Husoy
Transshipment, bulk cargo, and
HUSO 120m 9.4m 137.9m — — —
breakbulk.
Koralfisk
Kony N 52m 8.0m 58.6m — — — Fishing vessels.
Kony S 51m 8.0m 58.6m — — — Fishing vessels.
Biomar
Biomar
46m 10.0m 123.6m — — — Fishing vessels and fish feed.
(AKBI)
East
(BIOO)
West
(BIOV)
Stena Recycling
Scrap metal and breakbulk. Berth al-
Stena 50m — 98.8m — — —
so handles electrical waste material.
Arsvagen
Ro-Ro 14m — — — — — Fast ferries and ro-ro/lo-lo.
Rubbestadneset
No. 1 65m — 67m — — — Breakbulk.
No. 2 36m — 48.1m — — — Project/heavy cargo.
No. 3 45m — 56.4m — — — Project/heavy cargo.
Herring Oil Factory
Fishing vessels, grain, others, fish
AKNY N 60m 8.0m 119.1m — — —
meal, fish oil, and clean products.
Fishing vessels, grain, fish meal, fish
AKNY W 91m 8.0m 119.1m — — —
oil, and clean products.
Statpipe Gas
Berthing length of 170m (including
Jetty No.1 80m 13.5m 220m 12.5m — —
dolphins).
Clean products, condensate, LPG,
Jetty No.2 76m 14.0m 275m 13.0m — — and bunkers.Berthing length of 331m
Pub. 182

Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Jetty No.3 61m 10.0m 160m 9.0m — — Clean products, LPG, and bunkers.
Shell
Shell 75m — 198m — — 20,000 dwt Dirty products (DDP).
Lemminkainen
Dirty products (DDP), and break-
Asphalt 65m 5.5m 106m — — —
bulk. Two storage tanks for bitumen.
Equinor
Oil
70m — 168m — 21.0m 20,320 dwt Dirty products (DDP).
Equinor
Skudeneshavn Ferry
Ro-Ro 13m — 90m 5.5m — 5,000 dwt Fast ferry and ro-ro/lo-lo.
There is a lay-up area for rigs and vessels up to 250,000 dwt,

3.10
in depths of 23 to 40m. It is reported that vessels are generally

restricted to a length of 320m and a sailing draft of 10m.
3.10
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-

soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Karmsund—
3.10
Contact Information.
Karmsund—Contact Information
Port Authority
E-mail havneovakte@karmsund-havn.no
Harbormaster
Telephone 47-52-703752 Photo: Roar Johansen
3.11
3.11 Ryvarden Light

Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 18.3 to 37m, good
3.10
width of about 0.5.
holding ground, about 0.1 mile off the SW side of Risoy. In this Raudholmene (59°33'N., 5°09'E.) is a group of islets and
3.11
anchorage caution is necessary because farther SW the depths rocks on the S side of Gunnarskjersholet, about 2 miles SW of
increase suddenly. Bomlahuk. Numerous islets, rocks and shoals, best seen on the
Caution.—Submarine cables and pipelines lie in the vicinity
3.10
chart, lie in the vicinity of Raudholmene. Gunnarskjersholet
E of Haugesund and close N of Karmoy. Mariners are advised lies about 1 mile NW of Raudholmene.
not to anchor or trawl in this vicinity. Directions.—There is no difficulty in approaching Bom-
3.11
A precautionary area, best seen on the chart, was established

3.10
lafjorden from seaward by way of Gunnarskjaersholet. Steer
(2019) on the SW side of Risoy islet. for the light structure on Raudholmene on a bearing of about
099° and, when about 0.5 mile from the light, alter course to
3.11 Bomlafjorden (59°34'N., 5°14'E.) is entered between pass about midway between Raudholmene and Gunnarskjaer.
Ryvarden (59°32'N., 5°14'E.) and Bomlahuk, the S extremity When clear of Raudholmene, alter course E into the fairway of
of Bomlo. Bomlafjorden is described along with Indreleia. Bomlafjorden.
Ryvarden Light stands on the N entrance point of Molstrevag.
3.11
Caution.—Vessels passing close to Sveio Broadcasting
3.11
Gunnarskjersholet
3.11 (Gunnarskjaershalet) (59°33'N., Station (59°37'N., 5°19'E.) may experience electronic interfer-
5°08'E.) is the name given to the approach leading in from the ence due to the station’s electromagnetic fields.
W to Bomlafjorden. Its fairway is deep and free and has a
Pub. 182
Bomlafjorden to Selbjornsfjorden local knowledge.

Sonoyosen (59°35'N., 5°07'E.) is the channel between the
3.14
3.12 The coast between the seaward entrances of Bom- Espevaer group and Nordoyane. It should not be used during
lafjorden and Selbjornsfjorden is irregular. It is formed by the stormy weather or without local knowledge. Iron perches mark
islands of Bomlo, Goddo, and Gissoy, and the many islets, some of the dangers near the fairway.
rocks, and shoals in their vicinity. Vikafjorden (59°38'N., 5°11'E.), on the W coast of Bomlo,
3.14
Bomlafjorden lies between the mainland, on the SE, and the can be used for anchorage by small vessels, but local knowl-
islands of Bomlo, Mosteroy, and Stord, on the NW. From its edge is necessary. Iron perches mark foul ground on the sides
entrance, the fjord runs NE for about 15 miles to Tittelsnes, of the fjord.
where it joins with the inner fjords of Alfjorden, Bjodafjorden, Gissoysund (59°38'N., 5°10'E.), immediately N of
and Klosterfjorden. Vikafjorden, is a passage between the coast of Bomlo and Nor-
Bomlafjorden is a broad, deep channel. Its fairway is free dre Gissoy and Sore Gissoy, the two parts of an off-lying is-
from dangers and is easily navigated. The current at its en- land.
trance is usually outgoing, but is incoming in bad weather, Holsoyane (59°39'N., 5°07'E.) is a group of islets and rocks
3.14
even during NE gales. which lies within 2.3 miles W and WNW of the N extremity of
When passing W of Bomlo, it is advisable to keep well clear
3.12 Nordre Gissoy.
of the outer dangers for, although most of them are either visi-
ble above-water or are indicated by breakers, they extend some 3.15 Grutlefjorden (59°40'N., 5°10'E.) indents the W
distance seaward; during light winds the flood current fre- coast of Bomlo. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile from the
quently sets strongly toward the shore. head of the inlet. Several of the dangers fringing the shores of
Most of Bomlo is moderately high and, as the off-lying islets
3.12 the inlet are marked by iron perches. A quay at the head of the
are much lower, they are not easily distinguished until within a inlet has depths of 5 to 7m alongside.
distance of about 10 miles. Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 20.1m, on the NW
3.15
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for most vessels.

3.12 side of Grutlefjorden about 0.3 mile within the entrance.
Siggja (59°45'N., 5°18'E.), a peak in the N part of Bomlo
3.12 Stokvik, on the Bomlo coast about 1 mile N of Grut-
3.15
about 20 miles N of the N end of Karmoy, is visible in clear lefjorden, provides anchorage for small vessels in about 5.5m.
weather for a distance of about 30 miles. It resembles a pyra- Lyklingfjorden (59°42'N., 5°11'E.), which indents the Bomlo
3.15
mid with a rounded top and a broad base. Siggja is normally coast, can accommodate small vessels with local knowledge.
seen before any other part of Bomlo is visible. Lyklingfjorden is very foul; iron perches mark some of the
There are numerous anchorages on this coast, some of which
3.12 dangers.
would possibly afford shelter to vessels of moderate draft, al- Store Hiskjo (59°44'N., 5°09'E.), Lille Hiskjo, and numer-
3.15
though the available sources of information generally limit ous other close-lying islets, fringing dangers, and detached
them to small vessels. rocks lie in a group close off the coast of Bomlo and NW of the
entrance to Kuleseidkanal.
3.13 Bomlo (59°40'N., 5°12'E.) is an irregularly-shaped is- The channels between Bomlo and these islands and between
3.15
land which is divided into two parts by the Kuleseidkanal, Store Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo are encumbered with dangers,
which is described in paragraph 3.16. The W coast of Bomlo is some of which are marked by iron perches. Dangers extend
somewhat protected by a number of scattered islet groups, about 0.5 mile offshore from the seaward sides of the islets.
through or E of which there is an inshore channel for small ves- Hiskosen is the water area between the SE sides of Store Hi-
sels with local knowledge. skjo and Lille Hiskjo and the coast of Bomlo.
Dyrneset (59°37'N., 5°10'E.), a point, is located about 3
3.13 Anchorage.—Anchorages for small vessels with local knowl-
3.15
miles NNW from the point of Bomlahuk. Four inlets between edge are available in several places in the channels separating
Dyrneset and Bomlahuk indent the island’s coast; Kalavag, Ei- Store Hiskjo and Lille Hiskjo and among the adjacent islets.
desvik, and Roaldsfjorden, the three southernmost inlets, pro-
vide anchorages for small vessels with local knowledge, in 7.3 3.16 The W approach to Kuleseidkanal leads through His-
to 12.8m. Iron perches mark some of the dangers on the ap- kosen, then NE through Adnanesosen, the water area between
proach to the anchorage areas. the SE side of Lille Hiskjo and the Bomlo coast, then SE
Dyrnesflu, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies 183m
3.13 through Troytarosen (59°44'N., 5°13'E.), an embankment.
offshore in a position about 0.3 mile S of Dyrneset. Dyroy (59°45'N., 5°11'E.), with Dyroykalven close S, forms
3.16
Espevaer (59°35'N., 5°09'E.) is the largest islet in the Espe-

3.13 the N side of Adnanesosen. A 2.7m depth extending a short
vaer group lying within 2 miles NW of Bomlahuk. distance S of Dyroykalven is marked by an iron perch.
Numerous above and below-water rocks lie within and on
3.13 Hanaskjaer (59°44'N., 5°10'E.), marked by a beacon, is on
3.16
the edge of the group. Fishing vessels frequent these islets, es- the NW side of the fairway about 0.3 mile SSE of the S extrem-
pecially during spring. Only small vessels with local knowl- ity of Lille Hiskjo. Tausastein, awash and marked by an iron
edge can enter the group. beacon, lies on the W side of the fairway at the N end of a
shoal in a position about 0.2 mile NNE of Hanaskjaer.
3.14 Nordoyane (59°36'N., 5°07'E.) is a group of small is- Selvagflu, marked by an iron perch, is on the edge of foul
3.16
lets and rocks that lie within about 2 miles NW of the NW ex- ground extending from Bomlo, on the E side of the fairway
tremity of Espevaer; these waters are very foul. Navigation about 1 mile E of Tausastein.
through them should be attempted only by small vessels with Vordnesholmen (59°45'N., 5°13'E.) lies close off the N side
3.16
Pub. 182
of Vordnes on the S side of the channel to Kuleseidkanal. extends for some distance from the S shore of the harbor.
A 7m depth is located about 0.1 mile WNW of Vordneshol-
3.16 Eldoyane (59°45'N., 5°30'E.), a man-made peninsula, ex-
3.18
men. Foul ground, marked by an iron perch, fringes the E side tends about 1 mile S from the SE side of Stord. A large ship-
of Vordnes. yard, equipped with cranes of up to 300 tons capacity, and a
Flatholmen is located about 183m NE of Vordnesholmen.
3.16 drydock, which is 325m long and 52m wide, and can accom-
Entrance into Troytarosen is made between these two islets. modate vessels up to 250,000 dwt, is located at Eldoyane.
Kuleseidvag (59°44'N., 5°14'E.) lies SE of Troytarosen and
3.16
is connected to that basin by a narrow channel between Bomlo, 3.19 Leirvik (59°47'N., 5°31'E.) (World Port Index No.
on the NE, and the small islet Straumsholmen, on the SW. A 23340) is a roomy harbor on the SE shore of Stord. It is shel-
light marks each end of the channel. tered from the E by several islets, but is open to the SE.
Kuleseidkanal leads NNE from Kuleseidvag to Finnasvik, at
3.16 Depths—Limitations.—The main wharf is 240m long, with
3.19
the NW end of Boroyfjorden. The canal is about 8.8m wide in depths of 6 to 12m alongside. There is 600m of private quay-
its narrowest part and 4m deep. A bridge, with a vertical clear- age, with depths of 5 to 12m alongside. There are facilities for
ance of 13m, spans the canal near its SW end. Vessels with a ro-ro vessels and coastal tankers. Vessels up to 160m in length
length of 38m and a draft of 3.6m can use the canal. There is a can be handled in the port.
speed limit of 5 knots in the canal. Lights mark each end of
Kuleseidkanal.
The coast from Storaneset (59°45'N., 5°08'E.), a projection
on the seaward side of Bomlo, to Slatteroy, on the S side of the
Selbjornsfjorden entrance about 9 miles N, is formed by the
seaward sides of Bomlo, Rogoy, Goddo, Gissoy, and numerous
other islets that are near and between these islands and larger
islets. Fringing dangers lie up to 1.25 miles off some of the
larger islets. A maze of intricate channels leads among the is-
lets into sheltered anchorages for small vessels, but local
knowledge is necessary for their navigation.
Beacons and perches mark some of the dangers near the fair-
3.16
3.19 By Wolfmann [CC BY 4.0 (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by/4.0)
ways and there are several lights. Leirvik
3.17 Melingsvag (59°47'N., 5°07'E.) (World Port Index Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.19
No. 23300) is a safe harbor. There are several quays, with may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
depths alongside of 3 to 9m. Fuel oil and fresh water are avail- additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
able. Contact Information.—See the table titled Leirvik—Con-
3.19
Two lights, in range 058°, are shown from the SE side of the
3.17
tact Information.
bay and lead through the fairway of the narrow entrance. An-
other light is shown from the SW extremity of Litlenesholmen. Leirvik—Contact Information
A beacon stands on Kattholme, on the NW side of the entrance
channel. Svelteflu, on the opposite side of the channel, is VHF VHF channel 16
marked by an iron perch. Telephone 47-53-496766
Strong onshore winds, especially from S, raise heavy seas in
3.17
the entrance and close to it. Facsimile 47-53-496768
3.18 Mosterhamn (59°42'N., 5°24'E.) (World Port Index Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 40m, sand and
3.19
No. 23310) is located at the SE end of Mosteroy on the N side clay, in the W part of Leirvik. Caution should be taken to avoid
of Bomlafjorden. It is noted for its church, the oldest in Scandi- a submarine cable along the N shore.
navia, which was built in the 10th century by Olaf Trygvesson. The entrance to Fordespollen (59°39'N., 5°25'E.) lies on the
3.19
There is a concrete quay, 47m long, with depths alongside from SE side of Bomlafjorden. The fjord extends S from its entrance
6.2 to 7.4m. Another quay, which is 19.8m long, has depths for about 3 miles and has several side leads. This branch of
from 3.4 to 5.9m alongside. Bomlafjorden does not freeze over in winter.
The outer harbor has anchorage depths of 14.6 to 18.3m,
3.18 Narrow and encumbered channels lead from the SW portion
3.19
sand and clay, and is provided with mooring rings. South gales of Fordespollen into Rodspollen.
send in considerable swell. The best anchorage position is to- Depths through the fairway of Fordespollen are ample, but
3.19
ward the E side of the harbor. Should the wind blow from S, it there are nearby dangers, particularly in the SE part of the ba-
is better to shift farther inside and anchor, in 11m, abreast the sin, some of which are marked by iron perches.
N end of Fyrholme, the islet close NE of Kaninholme, where As there are rocks and shoals in the vicinity of the anchorag-
3.19
the vessel will be less exposed to the swell. The inner harbor es, local knowledge is essential.
has a depth of 7.3m, but can only be entered by vessels of very
shallow draft. 3.20 The entrance to Boroyfjorden (59°40'N., 5°17'E.)
When entering or leaving Mosterhamn, keep well over to-
3.18
lies on the NW side of Bomlafjorden. From the entrance, the
ward Kaninholme, as a reef, which is marked by iron perches, fjord trends N for about 4 miles and has a maximum width, be-
Pub. 182
tween islands and islets on either side, of about 2 miles. Finn- Selbjornsfjorden to Korsfjorden
asvik, the head of which is about 5 miles N of the Boroyfjorden
entrance, is the largest of a number of bays and inlets which 3.22 This is the coastal sector between Furen and Store
lead off from the main fjord. Kuleseidkanal, previously de- Marstein, an islet on the S side of Korsfjorden entrance about
scribed in paragraph 3.16, is entered from the NW end of Finn- 10 miles N. It includes numerous islets and rocks fronting the
asvik. Fairway depths through Boroyfjorden are ample. islands of Stolmen, Huftaroy, and Hundvaga and is indented by
Secure anchorages are located in some of the side bays and
3.20 Skoltafjorden, Mokstrafjorden, and Horgefjorden.
inlets. In winter, the N half of Boroyfjorden is sometimes ice- Several good anchorages for both large and small vessels are
3.22
bound. Only small craft with local knowledge can anchor in found in this area. From offshore, the openings of Selbjorns-
Boroyfjorden. fjorden and Korsfjorden can be distinguished.
Langestraumen (59°41'N., 5°15'E.), the narrow channel be-
3.20 Veten (60°01'N., 5°15'E.), a hill in the S part of Huftaroy,
3.22
tween Bomlo and Straumoy, which leads S into Tjongspollen, should be easily identified. Maksteinen is located about 2 miles
has a least fairway depth of 3m and is only navigable at slack N of Fugloy and, because of its isolated position, cannot be
water. mistaken. The lights shown from the islets of Slatteroy and
Stokksund (59°45'N., 5°23'E.), one of the channels of Indre-
3.20 Store Marstein are also good landmarks.
leia, is formed between the island of Bomlo, on the W, and the The outermost dangers between Furen and Store Marstein all
3.22
island of Stord, on the E. It leads NNW for about 8 miles to a lie within 1 mile of the nearest islet. Even with a moderate
position E of Store Klakksoy (59°50'N., 5°16'E.), where it breeze, the sea breaks over them.
branches. One branch continues NNW for about 7 miles under Marsteinsbaen (60°08'N., 4°59'E.) lies, awash, about 1 mile
3.22
the name of Nyleid and gives access to the S side of Selbjorns- WSW of Store Marstein and is unmarked. This is a serious
fjorden. The other trends N under the name of Engesundsleid hazard and vessels should navigate with caution when in the
(59°52'N., 5°17'E.) and becomes very narrow and shallow in area of this shoal. Hillagrunn, about 2 miles WSW of Store
some of its reaches. Marstein, has a least depth of 21m and only breaks in very
The Stokksund-Nyleid route is safe in clear weather, but
3.20 heavy weather.
should not be attempted in thick weather without reliable local
knowledge. Large vessels should always use the main route 3.23 Skoltafjorden (60°02'N., 5°00'E.) is entered from
through Langenuen, on the E side of Stord. Langenuen, al- seaward between Skoltane and Englamarskaget and leads E to
though about 3 miles longer than the Stokksund-Nyleid route, Stolmasund, Mokstrafjorden, and the N approaches to Bek-
is wider, deeper, and free from dangers in the fairway. kjorviksund. Ample depths can be found through the fairway,
but there are a few islet groups and some detached dangers ly-
3.21 Sagvag (59°46'N., 5°23'E.) (World Port Index No. ing in mid-channel. Kalsoy, about 2 miles ENE of Skoltane, is
23330) is located at the head of a small islet-encumbered inlet. the largest islet on the N side of the channel.
The inner channel becomes very narrow but is well marked by Kalsoy is about 30m high. Brorne, a group of above and be-
3.23
lights, buoys, and iron perches. A quay on the S side of Sagvag low-water rocks, lies within 0.2 mile SW of the SW extremity
entrance has a depth of 12m. A shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies of Kalsoy. The S and E sides of the islet are fringed by foul
near the SW end of the quay. Small vessels with local knowl- ground extending 0.15 mile offshore in places, and on the E
edge can anchor in the inlet. side, Vardholme, Hestholme, and nearby rocks lie up to 0.3
Langenuen trends N and NW for about 14 miles from its S mile offshore.
entrance (59°48'N., 5°34'E.) to its junction with the E end of Larsaskjaer, a detached above-water rock marked by an iron
3.23
Selbjornsfjorden. The S part of the passage is formed between perch, is located about 0.4 mile E of the SE extremity of
Stord, on the W, and the islands of Huglo and Tysnesoy, on the Kalsoy. Vessels with local knowledge can use the narrow chan-
E. Langenuen continues N for an additional 10.5 miles be- nel on the NW side of Kalsoy.
tween Selbjornsfjorden and Korsfjorden and leads between the
islands of Huftaroy and Reksteren and then across the W end 3.24 Fjordaflu (60°01'N., 5°07'E.), a 5m depth marked by
of Bjornafjorden. a buoy, lies in the fairway of the N approach to Stolmasund. On
The S part of Langenuen narrows to a width of 0.5 mile in
3.21 the E side of the N approach to Stolmasund, Vadholmane, a
places; the least width of the N part is about 1 mile. Great group of several small islets and some rocks, lies up to 0.5 mile
depths prevail in the channel and there are no dangers in the off the N side of Selbjornen. Iron perches, beacons, and buoys
fairway. mark some of these rocks and other dangers closer inshore.
Heavy squalls occasionally sweep down from the high land
3.21 Stutaflu, a 4.5m depth marked by a buoy, is in the fairway of
3.24
of Stord. In Langenuen, there is nearly always a tidal current the Stolmasund approach in a position about midway between
setting N, although occasionally in fine weather it sets S. the NE extremity of Stolmen and the SW islet of Vadholmane.
Dangerous eddies near the shores of Langenuen have also
3.21 Mokstrafjorden entrance is between the N end of Mokster
been reported. (60°04'N., 5°06'E.) and the S extremity of Horgo, about 1 mile
Caution.—A permanently-active firing practice area lies in
3.21 NE. The channel leads in a general SE direction toward the N
the SW and W approaches to Selbjornsfjorden. For more infor- end of Bekkjorviksund and is connected SW with Skol-
mation, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arc- tafjorden and Stolmasund and NE with Hundvakosen. Ample
tic Ocean. depths prevail in the fairway.
Hysteinen, a 14m depth, lies in the Mokstrafjorden entrance,
3.24
about 2 miles WNW of the N extremity of Mokster.
Pub. 182
Nordstallen and Midstallen, with depths of 21m and 19m, lie

3.24 depth lies about 0.2 mile ESE of Bergsholme.
about 0.5 mile ESE and 0.75 mile SE, respectively, of Hystein- Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Kalsoyvik, near its
3.26
en. These depths may break during onshore gales. head, in 45 to 50m, clay. A detached shoal, with depths of 3 to
Kvitingsflu, a rocky area with a depth of 6m, lies about 0.1
3.24 3.9m, lies 183m off the S shore of Kalsoyvik nearly 0.5 mile W
mile S of Midstallen. of Smaskjaerflu. Barnehaughflu, marked by an iron perch, lies
Helgeskjaer and other rocks, some above water, lie within
3.24 close off the N shore NW of this detached shoal. Close SSE of
0.3 mile NW of Mokster. Blaasterstallen, a 4.5m depth, lies Barnehaughflu, there is a 4m depth.
about 183m N of Mokster. The best anchorage for small vessels is in the SW part of the
3.26
Stovholme (60°03'N., 5°06'E.) is located close offshore on

3.24 bay. Such vessels can also anchor off Hille, in a cove NW of
the E side of the approach to Naustvag, a cove on the SE side Barnehaughflu; an iron perch marks foul ground on the W side
of Mokster. Close E of the islet there is a 5.5m depth. of the cove.
A mole extends N from Stovholme to Mokster; another
3.24 Between Stora Kalsoy and Navoy, the NW part of Hundva-
3.26
mole, its outer end marked by a light, extends about 69m SW ga, are Hidleroy, Nautoy, Spissoy, Kvaloy, some other smaller
from Stovholme. islets, and numerous rocks. A reef extending about 91m SW
from Nautoy is marked by an iron perch.
3.25 Mokstra Groningen (60°03'N., 5°07'E.) is an islet Bakkasund is the narrow channel between Nautoy and the E
3.26
about 0.5 mile NE of the NE end of Kalsoy. Shoal water, side of Stora Kalsoy. Kubbholme and Aerholme lie within 0.3
marked by an iron perch, extends NW from Mokstra Gronin- mile SE of Hidleroy, and about 0.1 mile E of the latter there is a
gen to a position about 0.2 mile ESE of the S point of Mokster. 9m depth. Foul ground fringing the S end of Spissoy is marked
Krabbhausane, a group of above and below-water rocks, lies
3.25 by a buoy moored in a position about 0.2 mile NE of Aer-
within 0.3 mile E and ESE of Mokstra Groningen. Two below- holme. Svartaskjaer, about 0.3 mile E of Aerholme, is awash in
water rocks at the SW end of the group are each marked by an places. Arholme is located about 0.2 mile N of Svartaskjaer
iron perch. A detached 12m depth lies about 0.3 mile S of the and is foul on its S side. An 8m depth lies about 0.1 mile S of
southernmost rock of the Krabbhausane group. Arholme. Mjanesflu, lying 183m offshore about 0.2 mile E of
Terneskjaer is located on the NE side of the fjord about 0.2
3.25 Svartaskjaer, has a depth of less than 1.8m and is marked by an
mile SSE of Horgetrynet, the S point of Horgo. A 4.5m depth iron perch.
lies about 0.2 mile E of the same point. Austreflu, a 3m depth, marked by a buoy, lies about 0.5 mile
3.26
A number of islets also encumber the sound between the SE

3.25 N of the N entrance to Bakkasund. Some of the other dangers
side of Hundvaga and the W coast of Huftaroy, to the E. A nav- between Stora Kalsoy and Navoy are marked by buoys or iron
igable channel leads N among these latter islets from Mok- perches.
strafjorden to Hundvakosen. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25.9m, spans
3.26
Hundvakosen (60°07'N., 5°12'E.), a basin, lies between the

3.25 the N entrance of Bakkasund between Kvaloy and the NW ex-
E side of Hundvaga and the N end of Huftaroy. There are a tremity of Spissoy. Another overhead cable, with a vertical
number of islets at the N and S ends of Hundvakosen; the NW clearance of 19.8m, extends from the SW extremity of Nautoy
part is obstructed by above and below-water rocks, some of to Hidleroy.
which are marked by iron perches.
Charted depths through the fairway and in the approach
3.25
Skudenesfjorden to Korsfjorden
channels are irregular but ample.
Krosshavnsund (60°09'N., 5°12'E.), the channel between
3.25 3.27 Indreleia comprises the fjords and sounds forming the
Staloy and Krossoy to the W leads N from Hundvakosen to protected inland navigation route between Skudenesfjorden
Korsfjorden. Overhead cables, with a minimum vertical clear- and Korsfjorden. Karmsundet is the first, or southernmost,
ance of 35m cross, the channel. reach of Indreleia. Vessels proceeding N from Stavanger to
Bergen can enter Karmsundet from the N side of Skudenes-
3.26 Horgefjorden (60°06'N., 5°05'E.), a basin, is formed fjorden. Between Haugesund, at the N end of Karmsund, and
between the islet Horgo, on the S, and Stora Kalsoy, on the N, the entrance of Bomlafjorden, about 8 miles N, the route leads
and trends E to the W side of Hundvaga. It is connected to along the outer coast and is only partly protected by the inshore
Mokstrafjorden by a channel leading S between Hundvaga and islet groups.
Horgo and to Korsfjorden by the channels leading N between North of Bomlafjorden, Indreleia offers alternate routes, of
3.27
Hundvaga and Stora Kalsoy. which the E, through Langenuen, should be taken by large ves-
Sveinane, the S danger on the N side of the Horgefjorden en-
3.26 sels. The W route leads through Stokksund and Nyleid. Both
trance, lies awash on the S side of Stora Kalsoy. Sverslingen is routes join N of the island of Stord.
a small islet on the S side of the entrance about 1 mile SE of North of Stord, the principal route passes between Huftaroy
3.27
Sveinane. Within 91m S of Sverslingen there are numerous and Reksteren, through the W part of Bjornefjorden, and then
rocks, some of which are awash. E of Lille Laugaroy (60°09'N., 5°15'E.) into Korsfjorden.
On the N side of Horgefjorden, Bergsholme lies at the end of
3.26 The secondary route leads N through Bekkjorviksund, Mok-
3.27
a chain of islets which extends about 1 mile E from the SE end strafjorden, and Hundvakosen, then through the channel be-
of Stora Kalsoy. Kalsoyvik is formed between the N side of tween Krossoy and Staloy, and E of Store Skorpo into
these islets and the S side of Stora Kalsoy. Korsfjorden.
Reefs extend about 0.2 mile N and NE from Bergsholme.
3.26 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Indreleia.
3.27
Smaskjaerflu lies about 0.2 mile NE of Bergsholme. An 11m Most of the inner fjords and sounds which are adjacent to
3.27
Pub. 182
this section of Indreleia penetrate inland in a general NE direc- Smorstakk, an islet easily identified by its sugarloaf shape, is
3.28
tion through the Hardangerfjorden region and have the group the SW of the islets extending S from Fosenoy.
name of Hardangerfjordenane. This grand inlet is, perhaps, the
most beautiful of all the Norwegian fjords. Its various branches 3.29 Kopervik (59°17'N., 5°19'E.) (World Port Index No.
extend through districts abounding in game and presenting a 23450) is located on the W side of Karmsundet. The harbor is
great diversity of magnificent scenery. situated on both sides of an inlet. Vessels wishing to anchor
The main branch is a continuation of Bomlafjorden and ex-
3.27 should do so N of Byggnesskjera, which marked by an iron
tends, under various names, about 50 miles NE from its en- perch; the bottom holding ground is a mixture of clay and rock.
trance. It then branches, with one branch, Sorfjorden, The Stromsund Bridge spans the inlet about 0.3 mile within
extending about 20 miles S, and the other, Eidfjorden, extend- the entrance. Vessels with a draft up to 5.8m can pass the
ing 15 miles E. There are also numerous smaller branches, in bridge. The vertical clearance under the middle of the bridge is
most of which anchorages can be found. Hardangerfjordenane reported to be 3.3m.
is for the most part free from dangers; their shores are nearly
everywhere steep-to.
Caution.—In winter, falling snow is the greatest danger, as
3.27
the land is so often completely obscured for hours on end, even

when quite close. In Indreleia, when a snowstorm threatens,
careful bearings of the nearest anchorage should be taken to
enable the vessel to seek shelter. Because of the tidal currents,
it is dangerous to heave-to.
The Inner Fjords

3.28 Karmsundet (59°09'N., 5°21'E.) is about 17 miles long
from its S entrance in Skudenesfjorden, between Skudenes, the SE
extremity of Karmoy, and the SW point of Vestre Bokn, about 3
miles ENE. It lies in a generally N direction between Karmoy, on
the W, and Vestre Bokn, Fosenoy, and the mainland of the Hauge-
sund peninsula, N of Fosenoy, on the E.
Karmsundet may be considered the beginning of Indreleia.
3.28
The port of Haugesund (see paragraph 3.10) is on the E side of 3.29 Kopervik
the N end of Karmsundet, and Kopervik (see paragraph 3.29) is
on the W side, about 8 miles above the S entrance of the sound. Stangalandsvagen and Skipparvik are small inlets close S
3.29
It is easily navigated and is used often. Vessels of 40,000 dwt and N of the harbor. Skipparvik is spanned by a cable with a
with a draft of 9.7m can navigate the sound. Its S part is deep vertical clearance of 15.8m.
and its fairway is free from dangers. Special care should be tak- There are two berths for general cargo with depths alongside
3.29
en, however, near the W end and N end of Fosenoy and in other between 1.6 and 8.7m.
narrow portions of the sound. Kaleflu, awash and marked by an iron perch, lies close off a
3.29
Gronestadvag (59°12'N., 5°23'E.) lies on the E side of

3.28 point S of the entrance to Stangalandsvagen. Mandalsflu, a
Karmsundet. A beacon stands on the N entrance point of the 3.9m depth marked by a buoy, is located about 0.1 mile N of
bay. An 8m depth lies about 183m offshore, 0.15 mile NW of Kaleflu.
the beacon; a 4m depth lies about 183m W of the beacon. A light is shown from Koparnaglen, a rock close offshore N
3.29
Kjelsflu, which is marked by an iron perch, is on the N side of the approach to Kopervik. An iron perch marks a group of
close within the entrance of Gronestadvag. rocks, with depths of 1.8m and less, which lie between Kopar-
Foul ground fringes the S entrance point up to 183m off-
3.28 naglen and the shore W.
shore; a 5m depth lies nearly in the middle of the bay. Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.29
Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in

3.28 may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
Gronestadvag. additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Trosnavag (59°13'N., 5°23'E.) is another small bight on the
3.28 Contact Information.—See the table titled Kopervik—
3.29
E side of Karmsundet. Trosnavagneset, its SW entrance point, Contact Information.

is located about 1 mile N of the beacon at the entrance of
Gronestadvag. Skruholme is located about 0.1 mile NNE of Kopervik—Contact Information
Trosnavagneset. A number of rocks, one of which is awash and
marked by an iron perch, lie between them. Small vessels with Port Authority
local knowledge can anchor in Trosnavag. VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16
Ternholme, about 2 miles NNW of Trosnavagneset, is at the
47-52-850243
3.28
S end of a chain of islets and rocks extending about 2 miles Telephone

from the S point of Fosenoy. Ternholmflu, with a depth of 4m 47-52-851055
and marked by a buoy, lies at the end of foul ground extending Facsimile 47-52-852513
about 0.2 mile SSW from Ternholme.
Pub. 182
Kopervik—Contact Information rection from Bomlafjorden are called Hardangerfjorden. Occa-

sionally, there are heavy squalls, and visibility is reduced.
Harbormaster There are few other dangers, however, and the fjords are, for
47-52-852613 the most part, easy to navigate.
Telephone Generally, the shores are steep and rise to heights of about
3.32
47-52-815619 914m, but there are many bays and small fjords where flat, fer-
tile land is largely used for cherry and apple orchards.
Anchorage.—Vessels awaiting pilots should anchor, in
3.29
The lower slopes are generally covered with pine forests,
3.32
about 37m, with the light on Koparnaglen bearing about 290°. above which there is a belt of summer pasture land. The sum-
Anchorage can also be taken close E of the harbor entrance,
3.29
mits are, however, of bare rock, except where Folgefonni, a
in 14.6 to 20.1m. glacier about 1,654m high, covers 108 square miles of the
mountain region between the main fjord and Sorfjorden.
3.30 From Kopervik, Karmsundet trends N for about 3 miles, Regular ship communication is maintained between places
3.32
then continues NNW for about 3 miles to the narrows of the sound in Hardangerfjorden and other places on the Norwegian coast.
at Salhusstraummen. The E shore of this section is quite regular, Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for most vessels.
3.32
and there are few islets, but the W side is indented by three sepa- Anchorage.—When selecting an anchorage, avoid anchor-
3.32
rate areas in which there are numerous islets, rocks, and detached ing too near shore in places exposed to avalanches.
dangers, some of which are marked by perches or buoys. Man-
dalsflua, a 2.5m patch marked by an iron perch, lies on the S side 3.33 Laukhamarsund (59°52'N., 5°36'E.) is the navigable
of the approach to Kopervik, 0.4 mile SSE of Koparnaglen. channel between Huglo and Skorpo leading NW from Husnes-
A small 15m depth lies on the W side of the fairway about 1
3.30
fjorden into the SE part of Skjeljaviksund. Skolten, a rock with
mile NNE of Koparnaglen. a depth of less than 1.8m and marked by an iron perch, lies on
Several above and below-water rocks, marked by two iron
3.30
the N side of the fairway about 0.3 mile ENE of Kvarvaneset,
perches, lie along the W shore of Karmsundet, about 1 mile the NW extremity of Huglo. Skolten is the only known danger
NNW of the bridge. A 2.9m depth, marked by an iron perch, is in Laukhamarsund.
located close off the E shore opposite the rocks. A cable, with a vertical clearance of 50m, spans a narrow
3.33
Salhusstraummen (59°22'N., 5°18'E.) is the narrowest part

3.30
portion of the sound about 0.5 mile E of Kvarvaneset.
of Karmsundet. There is a bridge which has a vertical clear- Skorpesund (59°55'N., 5°38'E.) separates the island of
3.33
ance of 45m and a horizontal clearance of 90m. Green lights Skorpo from the SW side of the irregular peninsula extending
are shown from the bridge to indicate the fairway. An overhead from the SE side of Tysnesoy. The sound is narrow and should
cable, with a vertical clearance of 47m, spans the channel not be used without local knowledge. Near its middle part, a
about 183m S of the bridge. reef extends from each of the shores almost halfway across the
A fish oil factory and an oil tank farm on the N shore of the
3.30
sound; an iron perch marks each of these reefs.
bay have quays, with depths alongside of 6m. Quays, with An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25m, crosses
3.33
depths alongside of 3 to 4m, are located at Utvik, in the SW Skorpesund about 1 mile within its SE entrance.
corner of the bay. Seloysund, Midtoysund, and Anuglosund are the three chan-
3.33
nels, from W to E, leading N from Husnesfjorden to Onarhe-

3.31 Boviki (59°22'N., 5°18'E.), on the W side of the fair- imsfjorden (59°57'N., 5°41'E.) among Seloy, Midtoy, and
way, affords good anchorage, in depths up to 31m. In the outer Anuglo. Several small islets and many above and below-water
part of the bay, the bottom is mostly sand and shingle. From rocks lie in Seloysund and Anuglosund.
abreast the tile works and inward, it is mud. Boflu, lying in the Midtoysund is free from dangers, except near the middle of
3.33
N part of Boviki, has a depth of 2m and is marked by an iron its W side, where reefs extend about 0.1 mile offshore. At its N
perch. Kyrkjeflu, on the S side of Boviki about 0.2 mile off- end, Midtoysund becomes quite narrow and has a least charted
shore, has a depth of 2.7m and is marked by an iron perch. depth of 29m in the fairway.
Three overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 54m, span
3.31
An overhead cable crosses each of these sounds. There are
3.33
Karmsundet close S of Kulorten. Mariners are cautioned that, vertical clearances of 17m, 30m, and 25m, respectively, under
within a distance of about 1 mile, the overhead cable gives a ra- these cables. A submarine cable is laid across Midtoysund and
dar echo similar to that of a ship on a collision course. another across Anuglosund.
Kulorten, marked by a tower beacon, lies 91m offshore about
3.31
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Rysslandsvik
3.33
0.5 mile N of Koltrepynten. Storetang, a rock with less than (59°52'N., 5°44'E.), on the SE side of Husnesfjorden about 4
1.8m, lies about 0.1 mile S of Kulorten and is marked by a miles SSW of Heroy, in 14.6 to 29m, sand.
buoy.
Koltrepynten (59°19'N., 5°20'E.), on the W shore of Karm-
3.31
3.34 Husnes (59°52'N., 5°46'E.) (World Port Index No.
sundet, is the site of an aluminum works. There is a concrete 23355) is located on the E side of Ondarheimsvag, about 3
quay, 270m long, with a depth alongside of 11.6m. It is report- miles SSW of Heroy. A concrete quay at Husnes is 240m long,
ed that vessels of up to 100,000 dwt have been accommodated with depths alongside between 10.5m at the S end to 16.5m at
alongside. It has a large conspicuous warehouse, cranes, and a the N end. There is a hauling-off buoy moored off the quay.
plant for discharging alumina. The quay is well fendered and equipped with two cranes.
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.34
3.32 The fjords and channels which continue in a NE di- may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
Pub. 182
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6. Light (60°00'N., 5°44'E.) is shown from a white lantern on
Contact Information.—See the table titled Husnes—Con-
3.34 piles on the SW side of a reef fringing the E entrance point of
tact Information. Lokksundet. A 7.8m depth lies about 0.4 mile N of Sandsoy.
An 1.5m depth, marked by a perch, lies on the W side of the
3.36
Husnes—Contact Information channel, about 1 mile NNW of Sandsoy; a 3m depth lies about
160m SSE of the perch.
VHF VHF channel 9 At Nymark, on the W side of the sound about 1 mile NNW
3.36
47-53-475070 of Hamarhaugflu, there is a quay with 5m alongside.

Telephone
47-53-475000 (after office hours)
3.37 Storsundet (59°57'N., 5°53'E.), on the SE side of
Facsimile 47-53-475015 Kvinnheradsfjorden, is entered from the S between Skorpega-
E-mail firmapost@husneshavn.no vlen (59°56'N., 5°48'E.) and Heroy. This navigable channel has
depths greater than 37m throughout the fairway. It is formed
between the mainland and the S and E sides of Skorpo, Snilst-
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Husnes in Ondar-
3.34
veitoy, and Kalven, close-lying islets which extend in a contin-
heimsvag, in 12.8 to 16.5m, sand. This location is exposed to N uous chain from Skorpegavlen to Kalvtangen, 6 miles NE.
winds. Storsundet trends ENE for about 6 miles, then continuing in a
general N direction for 2.25 miles into Kvinnheradsfjorden.
3.35 Heroysund (59°55'N., 5°47'E.), between Heroy and The sound is notorious for squalls.
the mainland to the E, affords anchorage for small vessels, but Flatholmen (59°56'N., 5°51'E.), on the S side of Storsundet,
3.37
it is exposed to strong squalls; small quays and mooring rings is joined to Neset, a prominent point about 2 miles E of Skor-
are available. Vessels entering from S should pass between He- pegavlen. Reclamation work is in progress (2021) in the vicini-
roy and the foul ground S of it. ty of Flatholmen.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 20m, spans
3.35
Skjeret, which is marked by a beacon, lies on the N side of
3.37
the N part of Heroysund. the fairway in a position about 0.2 mile S of Oyeneset, the SE
Kvinnheradsfjorden trends NE from Husnesfjorden for about
3.35
point of Snilstveitoy. A 4.5m depth is located between the rock
14 miles and joins Hissfjorden in the vicinity of the islet of and the point.
Sild. Holmeflu (59°57'N., 5°58'E.), with a depth of less than 1.8m
3.37
Tangeflu (59°56'N., 5°44'E.), marked by an iron beacon, lies

3.35
and marked by an iron perch, is on the S side of the fairway and
on the SW side of the junction of Kvinnheradsfjorden and Hus- extends about 0.1 mile W from Ytreholme, a small islet lying
nesfjorden, in a position about 0.2 mile ENE of the NE extrem- close off a salient point about 1 mile SE of Oyeneset. Two
ity of Anuglo. Rocks, with depths of 4.9m and less, lie up to rocks lie, awash, close NE of Holmeflu; a 6.1m depth is located
0.2 mile off the N side of this islet. close SW. Elsewhere in Storsundet, the known dangers are
Fjaereflu, on which a beacon stands, is located near the mid-
3.35
close inshore.
dle of Onarheimsfjorden, in a position about 2 miles NNW of Uskedal (59°56'N., 5°52'E.), on the SE side of Storsundet
3.37
Tangeflu. A 5m depth lies close SE of the rock. close E of Flatholmen, has quays with depths alongside of 4 to
Onarheim (59°57'N., 5°38'E.), located on the SW shore of
3.35
6m. Fresh water is available. A quay, with 5m alongside, is lo-
Onarheimsfjorden, has a 35m long quay, with depths of 3 to cated at Dimmelsvik, about 1 mile ESE of Skjeret.
6m alongside. Several quays, with depths of 4m alongside, are Rosendal (59°59'N., 6°00'E.), located on the E shore of
3.37
located at Vattedal, about 1 mile NNE of Onarheim. Storsundet, has a quay, with depths up to 6m alongside. Fuel
Anchorage.—The best anchorage in Onarheimsfjorden is lo-
3.35
oil is available. Another quay, with depths of up to 6m along-
cated on the NE side of the fjord in Teroysund, the channel E of side, is located at Seimsfoss about 1 mile S of Rosendal.
Teroy. Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1 to 18.3m, sand and clay. Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.37
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an

3.36 Lokksundet (60°03'N., 5°43'E.) is a narrow sound additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
separating the island of Tysnesoy from the mainland to the E Contact Information.—See the table titled Rosendal—
3.37
and joins Onarheimsfjorden with Bjornefjorden. It is about 5 Contact Information.

miles in length. The least depth of 12.8m is found in the nar-
rowest part of the sound, where the width is 183m.
Rosendal—Contact Information
Moderate-size vessels visiting Hardangerfjorden and the oth-
3.36
er fjords of this region use Lokksundet when bound N to Ber- VHF VHF channel 16
gen. The main channel of Indreleia is joined in Langenuen N of Telephone 47-46-932012
the island of Reksteren.
During calm weather, the current in Lokksundet always
3.36
E-mail post@rosendalhamn.no
flows N, with a velocity of up to 2 knots during S winds. The Web site http://www.rosendalhamn.no
current may flow S during N winds and has been reported to
reach a velocity of 3 knots. There are eddies in the bays on ei-
ther side of the channel. Anchorage.—Small vessel anchorages are found in several
3.37
coves along the S shore of Storsundet.

Sandoy is on the W side of Lokksundet S entrance. A rock
3.36
lies, awash, about 0.2 mile NE of its N end. Hamarhaugflu

3.38 Husavagen (60°00'N., 5°48'E.) indents the NW shore
Pub. 182
of Kvinnheradsfjorden for nearly 2 miles in a NNE direction.

The bay narrows gradually. Kyrkjevag, narrow and rock en-
cumbered, trends NE from the head of Husavagen for about 1
mile. Depths within Husavagen are ample and all known dan-
gers are inside the 9.1m curve, which lies within 183m off-
shore.
Ulke, on the NW shore of Husavagen close to the head of the
3.38
bay, has a quay, 21m long, with depths of up to 6.3m alongside.

Anchorage.—Husavagen affords anchorage to vessels of
3.38
considerable size, in about 40m, soft clay, S of Husa, which is

at the head of the bay. About 1 mile S of Husa, anchorage can
be taken, in about 35m, sand and clay. Husavagen is exposed to
S winds. A submerged cable crosses the bay from Travik in a
due E direction towards the opposite shoreline N of Gronevika.
3.39 Latrevikklubben (60°04'N., 5°59'E.) is the S extrem-

ity of Varaldsoy. Four coves, Latrevik, Ferjevag, Knarrevik, 3.40 By Anbjorn Hoivik (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5)
and Akrehamn, are on the SE side of Varaldsoy between Latre- Gjermundshamn
3.40
vikklubben and a point about 3 miles NE. Akreholme and two

above-water rocks W of it, lie close off the entrance of Austrepollen within 0.5 mile of its head. The two arms are usu-
Akrehamn. Three channels lead in among the islet and rocks. ally icebound during hard winters.
The middle channel is the deepest and leads between
3.39
Bondhusbre, a branch of the large glacier Folgefonn, is on
3.41
Akreholme and the rocks to the W. The E channel, which has a the S side of Maurangerfjorden. Steep cliffs are on both sides
depth of 5.5m, leads N of Akreholme; a rock on the S side of of the fjord.
the fairway is marked by an iron perch. Mountain squalls can be violent towards the head of the
3.41
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage in

3.39
fjord, especially during E winds. Because of possible land-
Akrehamn, in depths of 7 to 10m, mud. slides, vessels should avoid approaching the shores of Mau-
rangerfjorden too closely. Several submarine cables are laid
3.40 Oynafjorden (60°06'N., 5°55'E.), which is formed across the fjord and its two arms. A cable, with a vertical clear-
between Varaldsoy and the mainland to the W, trends N for ance of 65m, spans the fjord about 4 miles within the entrance,
about 5 miles and then turns NE into Bondesundet. In Bonde- close W of Sundal.
sundet, Kraka and other nearby rocks lie within 0.15 mile of Sundal, on the S shore about 4 miles within the entrance, has
3.41
the NW shore; an iron perch marks the outer edge of these dan- a small wharf, with alongside depths of 3 to 4m. Fuel oil and
gers. Other dangers in the sound and some small islets lie close fresh water are available. Eikanes, on the N shore of the fjord
offshore and are generally located within or near the few coves about 1 mile WNW of Sundal, has a small masonry quay, with
that indent both shores. An overhead cable, with a vertical alongside depths of 3.9 to 5m.
clearance of 50m, crosses Bondesund 2.25 miles NE of Bunde- Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the wharf of Sun-
3.41
sund Light. dal, in about 35m. Good anchorage can be taken near the head
Caution.—Because of the strong currents in Bondesundet,
3.40
of Nordpollen.
its use is not recommended. Submarine cables are laid SE from
Mundheim, at the head of Oynafjorden, to the E shore, and 3.42 Hissfjorden (60°12'N., 6°03'E.) extends N and NE
SSE for 2.5 miles and then E to Varaldsoy. for about 10 miles from the N portion of Kvinnheradsfjorden to
Gjermundshamn (60°04'N., 5°55'E.), located on the SW
3.40
its junction with Ytre Samlofjorden in the vicinity of Jondal.
side of the entrance to Oynafjorden, has a quay with a least The shores of Hissfjorden are mostly steep-to, except along the
depth of 7m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available. NW side. In places along this shore small islets and rocks lie
A local ferry runs a triangular route between Gjermund-
3.40
up to 0.25 mile offshore. Some of the outermost dangers are
shamn, Varaldsoy and Arsne. marked by iron perches. An overhead cable, with a vertical
Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in Gjer-
3.40
clearance of 65m, spans Hissfjorden about 2 miles SW of Jon-
mundshamn, in 15 to 20m, sand and mud. dal.
Vagen, located on the SW side of Varaldsoy, about 1 mile N
3.40
A quay at Fosse (60°16'N., 6°02'E.), on the NW shore of
3.42
of its S extremity, has quays with depths of 4 to 12m alongside. Hissfjorden, has alongside depths of 3 to 5m.
Two quays, with depths up to 5m alongside, are located at
3.40
Kysnes (60°12'N., 6°07'E.), located on the SE side of Hiss-
3.42
Mundheim. fjorden, has a quay, with depths of up to 5m alongside.

Torsnes, about 3 miles NE of Kysnes, has a quay with depths
3.41 Maurangerfjorden (60°06'N., 6°10'E.) trends NE of 5 to 6m.
from the NE part of Kvinnheradsfjorden for about 5 miles and A quay at Jondal (60°16'N., 6°15'E.) is 65m long, with
3.42
then branches. One branch, named Nordpollen, trends NNE for depths of 4 to 10m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are
about 2 miles; the other, named Austrepollen, trends ENE for available.
about 2 miles. Great depths prevail throughout the fjord, except Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.42
that numerous above and below-water rocks extend across may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
Pub. 182
additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6. shore and a 7.5m shoal 0.5 mile S of the head.
Contact Information.—The port can be contacted by VHF
3.42
(VHF channel 16) or by telephone (47-53-669510). 3.45 Fyksesundet (60°25'N., 6°15'E.) trends NNW for
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the village of Jon-
3.42 about 5 miles from the NW side of Ytre Samlafjorden. The
dal. sound varies in width from about 91m to 0.3 mile between
steep mountains on either side. It is the narrowest and most
3.43 Ytre Samlafjorden (60°21'N., 6°18'E.) extends NE gloomy branch of Hardangerfjorden. Squalls occur in the
for about 6 miles from Hissfjorden to its junction with Indre sound, especially during E winds.
Samlafjorden off of Samlaneset, a salient point on the S shore. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 26.5m, spans Fykse-
3.45
General depths through the main fjord are great, and the fair-
3.43 sundet about 1 mile from the entrance to the sound. Several
way is clear. There are some dangers and islets which lie close overhead cables, of which the least vertical clearance is 27m,
offshore and within the several bays indenting the shores on and several submarine cables cross the inlet throughout its
both sides. length. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 17m,
Herand (60°20'N., 6°23'E.) is at the head of a bay which is
3.43 crosses a small bight of the sound at its N end. Steinsto, on the
entered about 2 miles S of Samlaneset. Herandsholme is the E shore, close NW of the entrance to the sound, has a quay
largest of several islets lying close off the SW entrance point of with 8 to 10m alongside.
this bay. A quay with up to 4m alongside is located at Herand. A mooring buoy is located a little over 2.5 miles within the
3.45
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken near the head of the

3.43 entrance. A rock close off the SW entrance to the sound is
bay E of Herandsholme. Care must be taken to avoid a group of marked by an iron perch. Rysholme lies in mid-channel, about
rocks, marked by an iron perch, in the SE part of the anchor- 0.5 mile within the entrance.
age. Indre Samlafjorden extends in a NE direction from Samlane-
3.45
Norheimsund is an inlet extending in a NW direction from

3.43 set for about 8 miles to its junction with Utnefjorden.
the NW side of Ytre Samlafjorden. Fairway depths in the outer Ytre Alvik (60°25'N., 6°23'E.)also known as (Alvik), locat-
3.45
part of Norheimsund are 18.3 to 48m. The narrow inner part ed on the N shore of Indre Samlafjorden.
has a least charted depth of 11m in the deeper SW channel. Depths—Limitations.— Vessel up to 40,000 dwt, 200m in
There is a 6-knot speed limit in Norheimsund. length, and 10m draft can be accommodated. Berthing details
Vikoy is located on the S shore of Norheimsund about 2
3.43 are shown in the accompanying table titled Ytre Alvik—Berth
miles SE of the head of the inlet. Several rocks, including an Information.
above-water rock, lie up to 0.25 mile offshore in the vicinity of Two 7.5 ton cranes are located on the quay. Two mooring
3.45
Vikoy. A 9m depth lies about 0.3 mile E of the above-water buoys are located about 91m off the quay at Indre Alvik.
rock. A buoy marks the N edge of a shoal area extending N
from the S shore. A quay at a tank installation near Vikoy has a Ytre Alvik—BerthiInformation
depth of 6m alongside.
Vallandsgrunn, marked by a buoy, lies on the N side of the
3.43
Maximum
fairway N of Vikoy. A depth of 7m is charted close E of the Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
buoy. Between Vallandsgrunn and the shore NW, there are a LOA
number of rocks, some of which lie above water. A light is Alvik Port
shown from near the outer edge of these rocks.
East 100m 10.0m 200m Breakbulk.
An islet, with foul ground extending about 183m SE, lies in
3.43
the middle of the inner part of Norheimsundand forms two West 80m 10.0m 200m Breakbulk.
channels which lead NW to the head of the inlet. The SW
channel is the better one. A buoy is moored on the S edge of Indre Alvik, also located on the N shore of Indre Sam-
3.45
the foul ground. lafjorden about 2 miles further NE of Ytre Alvik, is the site of a
Norheimsund (60°22'N., 6°09'E.), is located at the head of
3.43
ferro-silicon works.
the sound. Several quays, with depths alongside of 3 to 6m, are Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered
3.45
located at Norheimsund. through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
3.44 Tjuvaholmen (60°22'N., 6°16'E.) is located between
Kvamsoy and the mainland to the NW. A rock close S of Tju-
Indre Alvil—Contact Information
vaholmen is marked by an iron perch. Another iron perch
marks a group of rocks close off the mainland, NW of Tjuva- VHF VHF channels 9 and 16
holmen. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m, Telephone 47-56-550800
spans the channels between the mainland and Tjuvaholmen
and between that islet and Kvamsoy. Facsimile 47-56-550950
Oystesevagen (60°23'N., 6°12'E.) trends N for about 1.25
3.44
miles from its entrance. Several quays, with alongside depths 3.46 Utnefjorden (60°26'N., 6°38'E.) trends about 4 miles
of up to 7m, are located at Oystese, a village at the head of the in a SE direction from Indre Samlafjorden to its junction with
inlet. Eidfjorden and Sorfjorden. The fjord is deep and clear in the
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken close off the head of
3.44 fairway.
the inlet. Take caution to avoid the submarine cable along the E Utne (60°26'N., 6°37'E.), on the SW shore, has a quay, with
3.46
Pub. 182

3.48

additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Eidfjord—
3.48
Eidfjord—Contact Information
VHF VHF channel 12
Anchorage.—Good anchorage with clay bottom can be tak-

en by vessels of moderate size 0.3 mile W of the quay, avoiding
submarine cables NW of the village; mooring rings are avail-
able.
Ringoy (60°27'N., 6°47'E.), on the SE shore about 3 miles
3.48
ENE of the entrance to Eidfjorden, has a quay with depths of

up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh water are available. Ves-
sels approaching the quay must avoid a reef extending a short
distance from the nearby Ringoynes and which is marked by an
3.45 Benjamin Endre Larsen (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by/3.0) iron perch. Brimnes, on the S shore about 4 miles further NE,
Indre Alvik has a quay with depths of up to 5m alongside.
depths from 4 to 7m alongside. Tingnesflu, marked by an iron 3.49 Simadalsfjorden (60°30'N., 7°05'E.) extends about 2
perch, lies close offshore about 0.2 mile NW of the quay at miles ENE from Eidfjorden. Vessels are warned against an-
Utne. Numerous submarine cables are laid in Utnefjorden. choring in this fjord due to rock falls from the steep mountain
Granvinfjorden (60°28'N., 6°37'E.) trends in a general NE sides and to submarine cables. The fjord often freezes during
direction for about 5 miles and in places is reduced to a width the winter.
of about 0.2 mile. Depths of about 134 to 200m prevail in the Osafjorden (60°30'N., 6°55'E.) extends 6.75 miles NE from
fairway up to the anchorage near the head of the fjord. Eidfjorden to Osa and is deep and free from dangers. Squalls
Granvinfjorden is reported to be ice-free.
3.46
occur in the fjord and are worse during SE winds. During hard
Kvanndal lies on the NW side of Granvinfjorden, about 1
3.46
winters, the inner part of Osafjorden is icebound. Small vessels

mile within its entrance. There are quays, 100m long, with can anchor off Osa, in 40m, clay. A mooring buoy is located off
depths of 4 to 11m alongside located at Kvanndal. About 1 Osa. Several submarine cables cross the fjord.
mile farther up the fjord, on the W side, there is a quay, with up Ulvikfjorden, a smaller inlet, trends N and NE for about 3
3.49
to 5m, alongside at Folkedal. miles from the W side of Osafjorden. During hard winters the
Eide, a village at the head of Granvinfjorden, has a quay,
3.46
entire fjord is icebound. Ulvik, on the NW shore about 1 mile

100m long, with a depth of 12m alongside. Fuel oil and fresh from the head of Ulvikfjorden, has an angled quay, with depths
water are available. off its longest side of 6 to 7m.
Pilotage.—Pilotage for Ulvik should be ordered using Safe-
3.49
3.47 Eidfjorden (60°25'N., 6°43'E.) extends ENE from its SeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking
junction with Utnefjorden for about 11 miles to the village of Center at an additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see
Eidfjorden. Eidfjorden is very deep and free from dangers in paragraph 2.6.
the fairways. Hetlenes, on the W shore about 0.5 mile within the entrance
3.49
Eidfjorden is spanned by overhead cables, with a vertical

3.47
of the inlet, has a quay, with depths of 5 to 8m alongside. A

clearance of 60m, and a bridge, with a vertical clearance of rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close off the E shore about
55m, between Gangstod (60°28.5'N., 6°50.4'E.), about 0.7 mile 0.2 mile SE of Ulvik.
NW. Caution.—A seaplane landing area is situated in Ulvik-
3.49
Djonno (60°28'N., 6°45'E.), on the N side of Eidfjorden

3.47 fjorden.
about 3 miles NE of the entrance, has a quay, with depths of 6
to 10m alongside. Another quay at Vallavik, 2.5 miles ENE of 3.50 Sorfjorden (60°24'N., 6°42'E.) extends SSW from
Djonno, has depths of 5 to 6m alongside. the junction of Utnefjorden and Eidfjorden for about 20 miles
to the town and port of Odda, at its head. This fjord is one of
3.48 Eidfjord (60°28'N., 7°04'E.) is a scattered village on the most beautiful branches of Hardangerfjorden. Sorfjorden is
the S side of the head of Eidfjorden. A berth at Eidfjorden is narrow and straight. Near its entrance there are extensive farm
120m in length, with depths of 10.7m alongside, and can ac- lands along both sides, but S of Hovland bare rock walls rise
commodate a vessel with a maximum length of 350m. The almost perpendicularly from the water’s edge.
berth handles cruise vessels. The width of Sorfjorden varies between about 0.2 mile and 2
3.50
Pub. 182
miles. The narrowest part is within 1.25 miles of the head of

the fjord. Throughout the length of the fjord the depths are am-
ple and in places they exceed 366m. There are few dangers and
all of these lie within 0.3 mile offshore.
Winds—Weather.—Squalls occur in Sorfjorden and are of-
3.50
ten very strong. During hard winters, ice forms in the fjord, but
a channel is usually kept open.
3.51 Kinsarvikbukta (60°23'N., 6°43'E.) is a clear bay lo-

cated on the E side of Sorfjorden. Large vessels can anchor
here; the best berth, in 12.8 to 31m, lies in a position SW of the
quay, which is near the village church at the head of the bay. A
rock, marked by an iron perch, lies awash close offshore W of
the church. Two quays at Kinsarvik, at the head of the bay,
have depths of 5 to 6m alongside. Odda
Ullensvang (60°19'N., 6°39'E.), in a bight on the E shore of
3.51
the fjord, has quays with depths of up to 5m alongside. close N of Berth 1 and Berth 2.
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Ullensvang, in
3.51 Aspect.—The harbor of Odda is formed by the S part of
3.52
25.6m, but vessels must be prepared for sudden violent squalls. Sorfjorden. It is entered through the narrows, about 1 mile N of
A quay at Lofthus, close N of Ullensvang, has 5m alongside.
3.51 the head of the fjord, which is formed by a small peninsula ter-
Fuel oil and fresh water are available. Quays at Lutro and Ins- minating S in Eitrheimsnes and the shore, to the E.
tanes, on the E shore of the fjord about 2 and 3 miles, respec- Except for the head of the fjord where the town of Odda is
3.52
tively, NNE of Lofthus, have alongside depths of up to 5m. located, the harbor is surrounded by mountains. The E and W
Grimo (60°23'N., 6°39'E.) and Aga, on the W shore of the
3.51 shores rise steeply from the water’s edge to heights of 1,067m
fjord about 2 miles and 7 miles, respectively, SSW of the en- and 1,189m. There are no beaches as such.
trance to Sorfjorden, each have a quay, with depths alongside Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
3.52
of up to 7m. Na, on the W shore about 3 miles SSW of Aga, may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an
has two quays, with depths of up to 5m alongside. additional cost. For pilot boarding positions, see paragraph 2.6.
Espe (60°12'N., 6°36'E.), located on the E shore, has quays
3.51 Signals.—VHF channel 16 is guarded from 0900 to 1600
3.52
with depths of 6 to 10m alongside. and has a range as far as the entrance to Sorfjorden.
Tyssedal (60°07'N., 6°34'E.), located on the E shore, has
3.51 Contact Information.—See the table titled Indre Alvil—
3.52
about 335m of quayage. One 45-ton crane and one 2.5-ton Contact Information.
crane are available. Depths alongside the larger of the quays
range from 12 to 14m. The largest of the several quays at a zinc Indre Alvil—Contact Information
works at Eitrem, on the W shore, 1 mile SW of Tyssedal is 73m
long with depths from 9 to 11m alongside. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
3.52 Odda (60°05'N., 6°33'E.) (World Port Index No.
23240) is located at the S end of Sorfjorden. Facilities of the
port are adjacent to the town at the head of the fjord and at Ei-
trem, about 1 mile NNW. Odda is known for its extensive elec- Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the W part of the basin
3.52
tro-chemical and electro-metallurgical industries. N of the town, in 29.3m, clay, well sheltered from all winds.
Wind—Weather.—During the summer months there is usu-
3.52
The holding ground is good to the W portion of the basin. Cau-
ally considerable haze and rain, much of the haze being attrib- tion must be taken to avoid submarine cables and outfall pipe-
utable to the smog given off by the plants in the town. There is lines.
some smoke control. Because the harbor is protected from the Caution.—Navigation through the fjords leading to Odda
3.52
winds, such control is inadequate. presents no difficulties, but, because of the many fierce squalls,
Tides—Currents.—The spring tidal rise is 0.6m. A slight
3.52
caution is always necessary.
tidal current sets outward through Sorfjorden.
Depths—Limitations.—The E and W shores of the harbor
3.52
3.53 Bjornafjorden (60°06'N., 5°25'E.) trends E for about
are steep-to. The 18.3m curve lies about 0.3 mile N of the head 13 miles from Langenuen. It is bound on the S by the N sides
of the fjord and in the NW part of the harbor rounds Eitrhe- of the islands of Reksteren and Tysnesoy and on the N and E
imnes to a position about the same distance S of that point. by the mainland.
Shoal water extends about 183m S from Eitrheimsnes. The fairway leading through the length of Bjornafjorden is
3.53
General depths in the middle part of the harbor are 35 to

3.52
clear and deep. On the S side of the fjord, a number of islets
50m. Depths in the anchorage area range from 29m to about and rocks lie within 2 miles off the N side of Tysnesoy and
44m. about 1 mile off the NE end of Reksteren.
There are quays, with reported depths of 4 to 14m alongside.
3.52
On the NW side is lands, islets and rocks lie up to 2 miles off
3.53
There are facilities for container and bulk vessels. Underwater the mainland. Elsewhere, the shores of Bjornafjorden are rela-
rocks, with a least depth of 1.5m, were reported (2018) to lie tively steep-to. In the side fjords there are some islets and dan-
Pub. 182
gers. and 15m, connect Stegleholme to Storholme and Storholme to

Store Vernoy (60°05'N., 5°26'E.) is separated from the NE
3.53 the mainland.
side of Reksteren by a narrow channel which dries. It is the
largest of a group of islets lying within 1.5 miles E of the NE 3.55 Strandvik (60°10'N., 5°41'E.), which has several
point of Reksteren. Numerous small islets and above and be- quays with depths of up to 8m alongside, is on the mainland
low-water rocks are in this group. NW of Knapholme. A reef extending about 183m SW from
Veaneset (60°03'N., 5°29'E.) is the NW extremity of Tysne-
3.53 Knapholme is marked by an iron perch.
soy. From Veaneset, the N side of Tysnesoy trends very irregu- Saevareidfjorden is entered between Storholme and a main-
3.55
larly ENE for about 7 miles to Krossnes, on the W side of the land point about 1 mile E. This side fjord trends N and NE
Lokksundet entrance. It is indented by several bays and coves. from Bjornafjorden for about 3 miles to Saevareid at its head.
Off the N coast of Tysnesoy there are some larger islets, in-
3.53 Depths through the fairway are ample, and most of the shore is
cluding Store Godoy and Lille Godoy, and many close-lying steep-to. A depth of 4.3m is charted about 0.2 mile off the E
small islets and above and below-water rocks. shore in a position nearly 1 mile NE of Storholme.
Godoysund, a channel which is navigable by small vessels
3.53 Very heavy squalls are experienced in Saevareidfjorden, es-
3.55
with local knowledge, separates Store Godoy and Lille Godoy. pecially off Mulsodden, a projection on the NW shore about 1
Iron perches mark some of the dangers in both approaches to mile NNE of Storholme.
Godoysund. A overhead cable and several submarine cables Saevareid (60°11'N., 5°45'E.) has several small quays. The
3.55
cross the channel. largest is 43m long, with depths of 7.8 to 19.3m alongside. A
Tysnesvik (60°03'N., 5°32'E.) is entered about 1.25 miles E
3.53 salmon farm installation is moored at the W end of the quay.
of Veaneset. Above and below-water rocks are on both sides of
the entrance and within the inlet. Some of the dangers in the 3.56 Lygrepollen (60°04'N., 5°46'E.), located at the E end
entrance to Tysnesvik are marked by two iron perches and a of Bjornefjorden, is available only to small vessels with local
buoy. knowledge. The entrance channel is very narrow and is fringed
Vage, on the W shore of Tysnesvik, has a quay, with depths
3.53 by islets and above and below-water rocks, some of which are
of 4 to 13m alongside. Two other quays have depths of up to marked by aids. The least depth in the fairway is 5.5m.
7m alongside. About 1 mile within the entrance, the basin becomes deeper
3.56
Gripnesvag (60°04'N., 5°40'E.) is a small inlet about 1 mile

3.53 and broader and then leads off into three separate branches.
WSW of Krossnes. The entrance channel is narrow and has a Overhead cables, with a least vertical clearance of 20m, span
3.56
least depth of 4.5m. the entrance. Several submarine cables are laid across the en-
trance and in the N branches.
3.54 Soreidsvik (60°03'N., 5°28'E.) is entered between Anchorage.—Small vessels can take anchorage in various
3.56
Veaneset and Raftodden, a projection on Reksteren about 1 coves inside the bay.
mile WSW. From the entrance, Soreidsvik trends S for about 4
miles, and, except at its head, is deep and free from dangers in 3.57 Fusafjorden (60°10'N., 5°32'E.) is a deep inlet which
the fairway. extends in a NNE direction from the N side of Bjornefjorden.
Many small bays and coves indent the shores of the inlet;
3.54 About 7 miles within the entrance, Eikelandsfjorden branch-
3.57
small quays are located at several of these places. es E for 3.5 miles, and Adlandsfjorden branches NE for the
A quay at Bruntveit (60°02'N., 5°26'E.), on the W shore of
3.54 same distance. The fairway is free from dangers. Except for
the inlet, has a least alongside depth of 5m. Sandholmane, the islets and dangers in the fjord are close off-
Uggdalseidet, close to the SE head of the inlet, has quays
3.54 shore.
with depths of up to 5m alongside. Fuel oil is available. Sandholmane, a group of small islets and nearby rocks, lies
3.57
Indroy (60°09'N., 5°25'E.), on the N side of Bjornafjorden,

3.54 on the W side of the fairway about 3 miles within the
lies in a bight of the mainland, with its S extremity about 2 Fusafjorden entrance. A rock, with a depth of 2.5m and marked
miles ENE of Rotingtangen. Ytroy lies close W of Indroy. by a buoy, is located about 0.2 mile NNE of the northernmost
Hauglandssund, between Indroy and the mainland E of it, is
3.54 islet of Sandholmane.
entered between Skjerholme and Bjornahaug, the S extremity Raudholmane (60°10'N., 5°28'E.), a group of above and be-
3.57
of the mainland, about 0.5 mile E. A light is shown from a rock low-water rocks, lies up to 0.3 mile offshore about 1 mile
close SW of Bleikja, an islet in mid-channel, about 0.5 mile WSW of Sandholmane. Two iron perches mark two detached
NW of Bjornahaug. rocky patches, with depths of less than 1.8m, lying about 183m
Hauglandssund is narrow in places but free from dangers in
3.54 SW and SSW of Raudholmane.
the fairway. A depth of 6m is available through the sound. Ves- Another iron perch marks a rock lying, awash, near Ferstad-
3.57
sels must not exceed a speed of 8 knots in Hauglandssund vag, about 0.2 mile SW of Raudholmane. Depths of 2.4m are
when N of Bleikja. charted up to 183m offshore in the vicinity of Mobergvik,
A quay, 46m long, with depths of 4 to 8m alongside, is locat-
3.54 about 0.5 mile N of Raudholmane.
ed at Halgjem, on the mainland about 0.5 mile N of Bleikja. Os (60°11'N., 5°28'E.) is located on the SW shore of
3.57
Stegleholme (60°09'N., 5°41'E.) is the farthest S of several

3.54 Fusafjorden. An angled quay at Os has a depth of 4m along-
islets fronting Strandvik to a distance of 0.5 mile off the NE side.
shore of Bjornafjorden. Knapholme and Storholme are other Hattevik lies at the head of a small inlet on the W side of
3.57
islets in the group. Foul ground extends about 0.1 mile SE from Fusafjorden, about 3 miles NE of Os. It has a quay, with 4 to
Storholme. Overhead cables, with vertical clearances of 20m 6m alongside. Anchoring in the cove is not recommended be-
Pub. 182
cause of submarine cables. Ferry service is maintained be- close off Hovdanes the W extremity of Bogoy, which point is
tween Hattevik and Fusa, across the fjord about 3 miles E. located about 1 mile NNW of Holsundskjaer.
Fusa, where there is a quay with 4 to 7m alongside, is locat-
3.57 Two rocks lie awash close off the opposite shore of the fjord
3.59
ed in a cove. An iron perch marks a shoal close off the W en- in a position about 0.5 mile SSW of Hovdeflu.
trance point of the cove. A light is shown from Hovdanes.
3.59
Eilelandsfjorden extends in a ENE direction for about 4 Bogavik (60°16'N., 5°35'E.) is located on the W shore of
3.59
miles from Altaneset, the N entrance point. Samnangerfjorden, about 1 mile N of Hovdanes. A quay locat-
Gjerdevikflu, awash, marked by an iron perch and with
3.57 ed in a cove at Bogavik has a least depth of 6m alongside.
depths of 3 to 4m extending close NE, lies about 1 mile ESE of A light is shown from the W shore of Samnangerfjorden,
3.59
Altaneset. This shoal and other known dangers along the S about 2 miles NE of Bogavik.
shore of the fjord all lie within 0.2 mile offshore. Boroy, on the E side of Samnangerfjorden close off the NW
3.59
On the N shore a small islet, about 1 mile NE of Altaneset,

3.57 side of Bogoy, is separated from that island by Boroysund. A
lies about the same distance offshore and is connected by a depth of 7.3m can be taken through this very narrow channel,
shoal to the shore. Bergsvik, on the S shore of the fjord about 2 but in it there is a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch.
miles E of Altaneset, has a quay with depths of 5m alongside. A depth of 3.7m is available through Kluresund, the narrow
3.59
Eikelandsosen, at the head of the fjord, has a projecting quay channel separating Boroy from the mainland to the N. Iron
with depths of up to 4m along its N side. perches mark dangers on either side of the fairway through
Small vessels can anchor SSE of the quay, avoiding subma-
3.57 Kluresund. Both channels lead into Tveitevag. This inlet is
rine cables. West winds send in a considerable sea. about 2 miles long and very narrow in places.
Solbjorg (60°18'N., 5°37'E.), located on the W shore of the
3.59
3.58 Adlandsfjorden (60°15'N., 5°38'E.) is formed be- fjord about 1 mile W of the N extremity of Boroy, has a quay,
tween the SE side of Bogoy and a mainland peninsula which with depths of 4 to 5m alongside.
terminates in Altaneset. Adlandsfjorden’s entrance is between Rolsflu, a rock awash and marked by an iron perch, is on the
3.59
Altaneset and Holsundskjaer, about 1 mile W. Holsundskjaer, W side of the fjord about 2 miles NNW of the N end of Boroy.
consisting of above and below-water rocks, extends about 0.2 It lies near the end of a reef extending about 0.2 mile N of a
mile SSW from the S end of Bogoy. The southernmost danger point extending N from the shore.
is marked by an iron perch; close N of the perch there is a bea- A light is shown from Utskot, on the E side of Samnanger-
3.59
con. fjorden, about 2 miles N of Boroy.

Adlandsholme lies in the middle of the fjord about 2 miles
3.58 Skjeljavag (60°22'N., 5°40'E.) is located on the NE shore of
3.59
NNE of Altaneset. Two other small islets lie between Adland- the NW branch of Samnangerfjorden, about 2 miles N of
sholme and Bogoy. Samnoyholme lies about 0.2 mile SW of Utskot. A quay located on the W side of the head of this branch
Adlandsholme, with rocks marked by perches between the is- has depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A 10-ton crane is available.
lets. A light is shown from the E extremity of Adlandsholme.
Samnoy, a village on Bogoy about 0.5 mile SW of Adland-
3.58 3.60 Gaupholmen (60°22'N., 5°42'E.) lies 183m off the S
sholme, has a small quay with depths of 2 to 7m alongside. A shore of the E branch of Samnangerfjorden, about 3 miles NE
narrow 5.5m channel leads to the quay. Three rocks, each of Utskot. Furoyi is located close off the S shore about 1 mile E
marked by an iron perch, lie in the approach to Samnoy. of Gaupholmen.
A quay, close to Gaupholmen, has depths of up to 7m along-
3.60
3.59 Holmefjorden (60°17'N., 5°40'E.) lies at the head of side. Fuel oil and fresh water are available.
Adlandsfjorden. Iron perches mark some of the dangers in the A light is shown from the W side of the fjord, about 0.5 mile
3.60
approach. Two quays have least depths of about 5 and 6m W of Gaupholmen.

alongside. Fresh water is available. Tysse, about 0.5 mile E of Furoyi, has a quay, with depths of
3.60
The entrance to Samnangerfjorden lies between Holsundsk- 3 to 5m alongside. A doctor is available. There is bus and rail
jaer and the mainland to the W. About 7 miles above the en- transportation to Bergen.
trance, Samnangerfjorden divides; one branch continuing N for Anchorage.—Moderate-sized vessels can anchor in the area
3.60
about 2 miles to Trengeried, at its head while the other trends between Furoyi and Tysse.
in a general NE direction for about 4 miles to Arland, at the A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies awash close off the W
3.60
head of a basin. side of Haukaneset, a prominent point on the N shore nearly 1

A shoal, marked by an iron perch, lies close NW of Holsund-
3.59 mile N of Furoyi.
skjaer. Hovdeflu, a 1.8m depth marked by an iron perch, lies
Pub. 182
4.
Sector 4—Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
Pub. 182
4.0
71
73
SECTOR 4
NORWAY—KORSFJORDEN TO FEDJEOSEN
4.0Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway from cent of the seas during winter are less than 5 feet in height.
Korsfjorden to the island of Fedje, which is in the vicinity of 4.1It is significant to note that 9 per cent were observed to be
Fensfjorden and Fedjefjorden. The description is of the outer greater than 3.6m high. During the summer, decreased wind
islands and islets starting from Korsfjorden and working N; the velocities associated with the weakening of the Icelandic
approaches to, and the port of Bergen; and the inner fjords NE “Low” results in lower sea heights. Observations along the ex-
of Bergen. posed portions of the coast show 83 per cent of the waves to be
less than 1.5m and 4 per cent greater than 3.6m in height.
General Remarks 4.1Swell conditions along the Norwegian coast are generally
rough. During the winter, 20 per cent of the swell recorded, for
4.1 Winds—Weather.—Winds, in general, blow from S exposed portions of the coast, exceeds 3.6m in height. This
and SE in winter and from the N and NE in summer, but there swell is generated over the North Atlantic. During the summer,
are local variations. Fog occurs during summer. conditions are moderated, with only about 6 per cent of the
4.1Weather conditions are changeable, varying between the out- swells in excess of 3.6m. With 68 per cent of the swells ob-
er islands and the region near Bergen and the head of the main served to be less than 1.8m in height.
fjord system of the sector. The climate at Bergen is mild, hu- 4.1Fog.—Bergen experiences both sea and land fog, the maxi-
mid, and rainy. Bergen harbor freezes only in very severe win- mum (16 per cent) occurring in July, where a exposed coastal
ters. At the head of the fjord system there is slightly less rain, station like Llsta and Skudenes have lower frequency, with the
and the temperatures are lower in winter. maximum occurring in early summer.
4.1The climate along the SW coast of Norway is milder than 4.1Tides—Currents.—Tides in the North Sea are always
that of other regions so remote from the Equator. The steady semidiurnal, with very little diurnal inequality between the two
run of warm water of the North Atlantic Drift by way of the HWs or the two LWs of each tidal day.
passage between the Shetland Islands and the Faeroe Islands 4.1The tide progresses into the North Sea from the Atlantic
and the English Channel into the North Sea and the Norwegian Ocean, between the Shetland Islands and Norway. Within the
Sea results in the water of these seas being, in January, at least North Sea, HW progresses counterclockwise about a nodal
20° warmer than in others at the same latitude. This condition point off the S coast of Norway, moving S in the North Sea and
is naturally reflected in the meteorology of the region. Migra- W along the S coast of Norway between Kristiansand and the
tory low pressure centers frequent this area in all seasons, ac- 6th meridian. Along the W coast of Norway the progression is
companied by repeated intrusions of maritime polar air which N to about 60°N; N of this, the progression is E.
produce overcast to broken cloud decks, unsettled weather and 4.1Along the W coast of Norway, tide ranges gradually increase
warm temperatures. toward the N, from 0.2m at Mandal to about 0.9m at Bergen.
4.1This maritime influence which is responsible for the warm 4.1Currents, in general set at right angles to the coast. In the S
winters is present during the summer months as well, exerting half of the sector the set is seaward during the falling tide and
moderating influence on the temperatures, particularly on the toward the land during the rising tide.
coast. 4.1In the N half of the sector, the set is NW with the greatest ve-
4.1Large variations in temperature occur throughout this region locity during the falling tide. These currents are not strong,
in winter as it is located on the borderline between the cold of however, except in the narrow passage and are affected by the
the continent and the mild climate of the Atlantic. Sharp tem- winds.
perature contrasts are observed at a short distance inland, ac- 4.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
cording to the direction of motion of the air. With W, SW, and Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
NW winds from the ocean, temperatures are comparatively 4.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
high. The E, SE, and NE winds, particularly the latter, usher in Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
continental air with the lowest temperatures observed here. 4.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
4.1Generally, along the W coast of Norway, the influence of VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
winds on the tide levels is small. This is probably due to the nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
scattering effect of offshore islands and the relatively deep wa- the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
ter close inshore. areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayne Island. For further infor-
4.1Ice.—Ice in this area offers no hindrance to navigation and is mation, see paragraph 1.1.
present only in the upper reaches of the fjords along the coast. 4.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
Floating ice is met in spring, when small masses, which are (TSS) in Norwegian waters, including off Sotra, see Pub. 140,
soon dispersed, may drift out of Oslofjorden and Kattegat, and Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
occasionally from some of the larger fjords to the W and N or 4.1Caution.—The N current off the S part of the W coast of
Lindesnes. Norway tends to set toward this coast. A considerable set to-
4.1Over the entire area the highest frequency of waves is from ward the coast may be experienced between the entrance of
the W quadrant. Along the exposed coast of Norway 65 per Bomlafjorden and Breisunddybet while the tide is rising at
Pub. 182
74 Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen
Bergen. This set occurs especially during SW, W, and NW of vessel movements by means of gathering, verification, and
gales. dissemination of information as to avert hazards and accidents
between vessels and the platforms, and between other vessels.
4.2 The coast between Store Marstein, an islet on the S 4.2Vessels with intent to navigate across the Entry Zone are re-
side of the entrance to Korsfjorden, and the island of Fedje, quested to inform Statoil Trafikkontroll when passing the limit
about 38 miles NNW, is irregular. It consists of numerous inlets of the Approach Zone stating their intentions. Vessels in the
and small fjords, and is scattered with many small islands and Approach Zone heading for the Entry Zone will be contacted in
peninsulas. due course. If necessary, Statoil Trafikkontroll will request a
4.2The general direction of the fjords is NW; the principal ex- vessel to increase its passing distance. If this is not possible or
ceptions are Osterfjorden and its continuation, which trends to the vessel fails to respond, the “Troll A” standby vessel will in-
the NE, and Sorfjorden and Veafjorden, on the E side of Oste- tercept the unknown vessel and the platform notified. The sur-
roy, which trend to the N. The fjords are deep and vary in veillance service will communicate in Norwegian or English.
width. Three zones have been established around the platform, as fol-
4.2Off-lying islands fronting this coastal sector and the peninsu- lows:
las are lower than 305m in height and are generally rocky with 1. Troll A Safety Zone—The Safety Zone is 500m from
stunted trees. The coast of the mainland, the island of Osteroy, the outer points of the platform. In certain hazard and acci-
and the Bergen peninsula rise to an elevation of about 610m dent situations the Safety Zone can be extended.
and have extensive patches of wooded, fertile land in the low- 2. Troll A Entry Zone—The Entry Zone comprises the
lands. area within a 3-mile radius centered on the platform
4.2Passages among the off-lying islands are intricate, narrow. (60°38.7'N, 3°43.6'E.).
and deep. 3. Troll A Approach Zone—The Approach Zone com-
4.2There are several anchorages for small vessels and some for prises the area within a 15-mile radius centered on the plat-
large vessels in this sector. Coastal vessels call at the many form.
small landings in the fjords. 4.2Vessels passing with a closest point of approach (CPA) of 3
4.2The Oseberg Oil Field, the Brage Oil Field, and the Vesle- miles or less from the installations must inform Statoil Traffic
frikk Oil Field are situated in an area centered about 50 miles Control when 1 hour before the time of closest possible ap-
W of Hellisoy. Numerous submarine pipelines and installations proach (TCPA).
exist in this area. A pipeline extends E to the coast from the Os- 4.2Statoil Traffic Control may be contacted 24 hours on VHF
eberg Field at the S end of the area. channel 16 or 68.
4.2For oil and gas fields located SSW of the above, see Sector 3.
For oil and gas fields NW of the above, see Sector 5.
Outer Islands and Islets

4.3 Store Marstein (60°08'N., 5°01'E.) lies about 1 mile
W of the NE end of Store Kalsoy on the S side of Korsfjorden
entrance. A light tower, 17m high and prominent, stands on the
summit next to a dwelling.
Marsteinboen lies about 1 mile WSW of Store Marstein
4.3
Light and is usually awash and marked by breakers.

Hillagrunnane, a shoal with a least depth of 21m, lies 1.5
4.3
miles WSW of Store Marstein Light; the sea only breaks in

very heavy weather.
copyright Oyvind Hagen - Statoil (https://data.norge.no/nlod/en/2.0)

4.2
Troll A Platform
4.2
4.2Troll Gas Field (60°44'N., 3°33'E.) and Huldra Gas Field

(60°51'N., 2°40'E.) lie about 16 miles E and 9 miles NNW of
the Veslefrikk Field. Production ceased at Huldra in 2014 and
the platform was removed in 2019.
4.2As of 1996 the Troll A platform was the tallest and heaviest
structure ever moved to another position, relative to the surface
of the Earth.
4.2Caution.—Troll A Platform Radar Surveillance Service and 4.3 By Frokor [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creative commons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0)
the VHF Base Station, located on the Troll A Platform, is con- 4.3 Store Marstein Light
trolled by Statoil Trafikkontroll at Sandsli (Statoil VTS). The
surveillance service is an advisory service for the coordination 4.4 Tekslo (60°09'N., 5°01'E.) is on the N side of the
Pub. 182
Sector 4. Norway—Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen 75
Korsfjorden entrance, about 1 mile N of Store Marstein. Foul mooring rings, in depths up to 17m, sand. There is a submarine
ground extends about 0.2 mile WNW from Tekslo. Teksleflu- pipeline crossing the channel close to its S entrance.
ene, with a least depth of 13m and Hysteinen, a 27m depth, lie Ternneset (60°14'N., 4°59'E.) is a projection on Store Sotra
4.6
about 0.3 mile and nearly 1 mile, respectively, W of Tekslo. close NE of Lutatangen. From Ternneset, the W coast of Store
4.4Under good conditions, the Korsfjorden entrance should be Sotra trends in a general N direction for about 5 miles to Roks-
identified at a great distance as an opening in the land, the neset, then irregularly ESE for 2.75 miles, and then in a general
mountains in the background being high and distinctive. N direction for about 10 miles to Vindneskarven (60°27'N.,
4.4The current flow in Korsfjorden is usually outgoing. The 5°00'E.), the N extremity of the island.
current may be incoming during rising W winds. The outgoing This side of the island is much indented by inlets and coves
4.6
flow in the entrance to Korsfjorden may be very strong during and is fronted by several islands; numerous islets and patches
floods. of foul ground extending up to 3.5 miles offshore.
4.4Pilotage.—The pilot vessel may cruise in the entrance to Stallen (60°17'N., 4°57'E.) is a point on Store Sotra about
4.6
Korsfjorden, about 1 mile N of Store Marstein, but is usually midway between Grimsoy and Rocksneset. South and SW of
stationed between the S side of Viksoy (60°10'N., 5°03'E.) and Stallen, the outermost dangers lie from 0.5 mile to 1.2 miles off
Flesa. Store Sotra. Malmen, marked by a beacon, is the largest of a
group of islets and rocks lying up to 1.25 miles W of Knappen,
4.5 Lyroddane (60°10'N., 4°59'E.), consisting of a group a point 1 mile S of Stallen. Teigen, a 7m depth, lies about 1
of islets and above and below-water rocks about 1 mile in di- mile W of Stallen.
ameter, are centered about 1 mile NW of Tekslo. Nordre Odd-
ane, on the NW side of the group, is 21m high. 4.7 Goltasteinen (60°13'N., 4°58'E.), a small islet, but
Fugloyhamn lies between Store Fugloy (60°10'N., 5°01'E.) lofty and easily identified by an iron perch on its summit, lies
and Store Vardoy, about 0.3 mile N. Vessels up to moderate about 1 mile WSW of Lutatangen, the NW extremity of Golta,
size can take good anchorage, in depths up to 20m, sand, in Fu- an island which lies in a bight on the SW side of Store Sotra.
gloyhamn. There may be a considerable swell during N or W Telavag (60°15'N., 4°59'E.), a narrow inlet about 1 mile N of
winds. Entrance can be made from SE, passing E of Tekslo and Ternneset, trends NNE for about 2 miles from its entrance.
Seiskjaer, W of foul ground fringing the W side of Naroy for a Grimsoy is a 55m islet on the NW side of the entrance.
distance of about 91m, then E of a 2.7m depth marked by a 4.7Nordre Stuholme and Sore Stuholme are two smaller islets
buoy, and W of a rock, marked by an iron perch. close off the NE side of Grimsoy.
4.7Valoyane lie on the W side of Telavag approach. A beacon
4.6 Store Sotra (60°20'N., 5°05'E.), extending about 18 stands on the E end of the largest islet of the group.
miles N from Korsfjorden, is the largest of the islands in the 4.7Within Telavag, Stekkholme lies in mid-channel, about 1
chain fronting the approaches to Bergen. This chain extends N mile from the entrance. A 3m shoal lies about 183m N of Stek-
from Korsfjorden to Fedjeosen, a distance of about 35 miles, kholme. Other known dangers near the fairway are marked by
and includes a number of other smaller islands and hundreds of iron perches. Several overhead obstructions, with a least verti-
close-lying islets and rocks. cal clearance of 13m, span Telavag. Some quays in Telavag
From offshore, Store Sotra appears to be a part of the main-
4.6 have alongside depths of up to 6m.
land, and, in contrast to the coastal aspect farther N, no off-ly- 4.7Anchorage.—Vessels of moderate draft can anchor in sever-
ing islets can be distinguished. Fordesveten, the highest peak in al places within Telavag. Care must be taken to avoid the 3m
the S part of Store Sotra, has a steep fall on its N side. The N shoal N of Stekkholme and the submarine cables that cross the
end of Store Sotra is considerably lower. inlet. Anchorage can be taken between Nordre Stuholme and
A radio mast, painted red and white in bands and with a
4.6 Sore Stuholme, E and N of Stekkholme, in sand and clay.
height of about 165m, stands on the N part of Store Sotra. A 4.7Small vessels can anchor, in up to 22m, in the W end of Ryn-
white flashing obstruction light is shown from the top. jelsosen, the channel between the N side of Grimsoy and Store
On nearing the land, Store Lonoy will be easily identified
4.6 Sotra.
from its height and isolated position. The high land in the S
part of Algroy has a jagged outline and from the N has a saw- 4.8 Hissoyna (60°18'N., 4°56'E.) lies with its SE point
tooth appearance; other hills in the vicinity are round. about 0.2 mile W of Rocksneset. Between Stallen and Roksne-
Turoy, about 2 miles W of the N end of Store Sotra, is higher
4.6 set the outermost shoals and rocks lie within 1 mile W of Store
than the N part of the larger island. A beacon stands on the Sotra.
81m summit of Turoy in the N part of that island. Toftevik, on Rabbarosen (60°18'N., 4°57'E.) a small bay which is en-
the W side of Toftoy between Turoy and Naroy, about 2 miles tered about 0.2 mile S of Roksneset, is available for small craft
N, is easily made out. with local knowledge. The approach from W is deep, but there
Pollen is the name given to the continuation of Austefjorden
4.6 are dangers near the fairway. The best approach is from SW,
N of its junction with Toftoyosen. passing between Mokalasset and Augnarholme. Myrbaerholme
Between Tekslo and the coast of Store Sotra, about 3 miles
4.6 is on the S side of the bay entrance. Augnarholme is a smaller
N, there are a number of islets and rocks which are nearly islet close W of Myrbaerholme.
joined together by foul ground. There are several anchorages 4.8Anchorage.—Small vessels can take good anchorage in the
for small vessels among the islets; some of the channels lead- S part of Rabbarosen E of Myrbaerholme, but care must be tak-
ing to them are marked by perches. en to avoid foul ground extending about 91m from the E shore.
Goltaosen (60°13'N., 5°01'E.) provides good anchorage with
4.6 Mokalasset (60°18'N., 4°56'E.) lies above water, about 0.3
Pub. 182
mile W of Augnarholme. Sore Mokalassflu and Nordre Moka- and many rocks, both above and below-water, lie nearby; a
lassflu, with depths of 9.5m and 5m, lie about 0.3 mile SSW chain of islets and dangers extends nearly 1 mile SE from near
and 0.25 mile WNW, respectively, of Modalasset. Grytebaen, a Giljeneset, the S extremity of Turoy.
rock, awash, is located about 0.2 mile NW of Mokalasset. Magoyna, Kvaloyna, and Sandoyni are the principal islets of
4.10
4.8Salen, an above-water rock, is on the N side of the fairway a group that includes many smaller islets and rocks and lies be-
about 0.2 mile N of Augnarholme. A reef extends about 91m tween 0.7 mile and 1.7 miles W of Turoy.
SW from Salen; there are depths of less than 9.1m within 183m Vestre Odden, an above-water rock, is near the SW edge of
4.10
E of the rock. this area. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile SSW from Vestre
4.8Between Hissoyna and Haveroyna (60°24'N., 4°56'E.), Odden.
about 5 miles N, are Lokoyna, Langoyna, Algroyna, and many Svartskjaeri, a small area of above and below-water rocks, is
4.10
islets and rocky areas. Overhead cables, with vertical clearance centered about 0.5 mile S of Magoyna.
of at least 10m, span the fairways between Hissoyna, Naroyna, Svartskjersosen is the basin that lies S and SSW of Turoy.
4.10
Syltoyna, Lokoyna, Langoyna, and Algroyna. An overhead ca- The entrance from seaward is S of Svartskjerosen. Hattholme
ble, with a vertical clearance of 24m, and a bridge, with a verti- lies on the SE side of the Svartskjerosen entrance, about 1 mile
cal clearance of 15m, span the channel between Langoyna and SSE of Maioy.
Store Sotra, about 0.4 mile S of the N extremity of Langoyna. Hattholmbaen, a 3.2m depth, and Svartskjergrunnane, with a
4.10
On the E side of the islands above are narrow channels leading least depth of 12.8m, lie about 0.2 mile NW and 0.5 mile W, re-
into an inner basin, which is formed in a bight on the W side of spectively, of the N end of Hattholme.
Store Sotra. Vindoysen, the basin E of Turoy, is bound on the N by Store
4.8This basin forms the approach to Fjellspollen (60°18'N., Skarvoy, some nearby smaller islets, and the S end of Toftoy;
5°03'E.). From its narrow and shallow entrance, Fjellspollen on the E by the island of Misje, and on the S by Store Vindoy,
trends N for about 2 miles and S for 1.25 miles through the Lille Vindoy, and Vearoy.
middle part of Store Sotra. Only small vessels should attempt A light is shown from a position close off the NW extremity
4.10
to use the channels leading to these inner basins. Some of the of Lille Vindoy.
dangers near the fairways are marked by perches. Solsviksund is the narrow channel between the N end of
4.10
Store Sotra and Misje. Svelgen is the channel between Misje

4.9 Kalsoyane (60°19'N., 4°56'E.), several close-lying is- and the SE side of Toftoy. Both channels lead into
lets from 13 to 20m high, lie within 0.5 mile NNW of Hissoy. Hjeltefjorden. Charted depths in these narrow channels are 16
4.9Kalsoyflu, with a least depth of 3m, lies about 0.2 mile W of to 21m.
the farthest SW islet. A light is shown from the SW extremity of Misje, close W of
4.10
4.9Store Lonoy, a conspicuous island, is located about 1 mile the entrance of Solsviksund. A light is shown from a hut on the
NW of Hissoy. Several islets lie close off the W and SW sides N extremity of Misje in Svelgen channel. The E end of the
of Store Lonoy; within 0.75 mile S and NW and 0.5 mile W of channel is also marked by lights. Iron perches mark some of
the island there are other small islets and foul areas. the dangers near the channel fairways.
Nordre Tjornoy (60°22'N., 4°55'E.), marked by a light, lies Solsviksund may be approached from S, but the principal ap-
4.10
about 0.3 mile off the NW side of Algroyna. proach is from W through Svartskjerosen and Hjelmeholsen
A beacon with a cross topmark stands on Ljosoy, about 2 (60°25'N., 4°56'E.), passing well S of Lille Hjelmen, the islet
miles N of Norde Tjornoy. at the SE extremity of the islet chain extending from Turoy, and
4.9Breidflu, a 9.1m depth, is located about 1 mile WNW of the then E of Geitaroy and Bollholme, two islets which are near
beacon on Sore Tjornoy. Other detached shoals, with depths of Store Sotra.
less than 1.8m to 11.9m, lie within 0.6 mile NNE of Breidflu. Care must be taken to avoid a 5m depth lying near the fair-
4.10
4.9Polleflu, an 11m depth, and Landrobaen, a 5.9m depth, lie way in a position about 137m E of the N end of Bollholme.
about 1 mile WSW and 1.5 miles W, respectively, of the bea- A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m, spans Sols-
4.10
con on Ljosoy. Numerous other dangers are located between viksund close within its S entrance. Fixed red lights mark the
the described dangers and the islands fronting the coast of centerline.
Store Sotra. A quay, located on the W side of Solsviksund, has an along-
4.10
4.9Kartveit (60°23'N., 5°00'E.), a village, lies on the E shore of side depth of 6m.
an inlet extending from Eideosen into the W side of Store A submarine cable runs from Utfall, located on the coast of
4.10
Sotra. There are two quays, with alongside depths of 4 to 7m, Store Sotra W of Bollholme, NW past Lille Vindoy, and then
located at Kartveit. Fuel oil is available. W to Turoy. A submarine cable exists in the N portion of Svel-
Approximately 5.4 miles NNE of Norde Tjornoy, the small gen, passing around the N extremity of Misje.
islet of Ertenskjaer lies about 0.6 mile W of Sandoyni At Utfall, there is a quay, with depths of up to 9m alongside.
4.10
(60°27'N., 4°53'E.) and is the W danger of the group of islands Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Solsviksund and Svel-
4.10
and islets in this area. The islets of Odden (60°26'N., 4°56'E.) gen set N into Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning
and the shoal Oddefluene lie about 0.6 mile S of Ertenskjaer about 6 hours 10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward
and Ertensskjerflu. from Hjeltefjorden during the falling tides (beginning about
HW at Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.
4.10 Turoyna (60°27'N., 4°55'E.) has a beacon on its 81m Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Tjuvvika, a cove
4.10
summit, about 0.25 mile from the N end of the island. Lille Tu- on the N side of Svelgen, N of the N extremity of Misje, in
royna is close off the SW side of Turoyna. Other smaller islets 18m, sand. Caution must be used to avoid the submarine cable
Pub. 182
off the N side of Misje. 32m.

Several narrow channels are formed by Store Skarvoy and
4.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Ulvsundet close W
4.12
the islets near it which lie between Turoy and Toftoy. They lead of an islet at its E end. The depths here are 11 to 16.5m; moor-
NW from Vindoyosen into the SE side of Tofteviki and are ing rings are available.
spanned by cables, with vertical clearances of 18m to 32m.
Shoals, marked by iron perches, lie in the channel between Tu- 4.13 Rorsund, between the NW side of Ulvoyni (60°31'N.,
roy and the islets close E, and in Skarvoysund (60°27'N., 4°53'E.) and the SW part of Blomoyni, leads into Blomvag N
4°56'E.) fairway, the channel between Store Skarvoy and Tof- of Ulvoyni. Small vessels can anchor here in 22 to 26m. Iron
toy. perches and lights mark some of the dangers in the approach.
4.13
4.11 The bay of Toftevika is bound on the S by Sandoy, Rorsund about 1 mile SSE of Blomvag. Several quays, with
Knappane, Turoyna, and Store Skarvoy and on the N by alongside depths of 2 to 17m, lie in Blomvag. Fuel oil and
Kvannholmen, Froa, Nuroyi, and Rongoyni (60°30'N., fresh water are available.
4°55'E.). Depths in Toftevika are irregular and, except for a few Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in the narrow
4.13
detached patches, exceed 36m. Navreskjaer, a detached reef sound between the W side of Blomoy and the islets Nautoy and
which is above-water near its S end, lies in the middle of Husholme, in about 14.6m, sand. A quay located in the sound
Tofteviki. has alongside depths of 3 to 10m.
Bjornoy lies near the NW side of Toftoyni, about 2 miles N
4.11 Osunder (60°33'N., 4°51'E.), the narrow sound leading NE
4.13
of Store Skarvoy. Kjempa, a rock marked by an iron perch, is into Hjeltefjorden between Blomoy and One, is free from dan-
on the outer edge of foul ground extending nearly 0.25 mile gers, but is only navigable by small vessels because of its nar-
SW from Bjornoy. A light is shown from an iron perch located row width.
off the NE extremity of Bjornoy, between Bjornoy and Toftoy. Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Osundet set N into
4.13
Rongsund is the channel between Toftoyni and Bjornoyni Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning about 6 hours
(60°29'N., 4°56'E.), on the E, and Rongoy and islets extending 10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward from
S from that island, on the W. It joins Tofteviki with Hjeltefjorden during the falling tide (beginning about HW at
Hjeltefjorden. Bergen). The currents set strongly at times.
Rongsund is narrow; the S approach is intricate. Depths in
4.11 Kollsoy lies on the SE side of Osundet entrance. Two smaller
4.13
the fairway are about 18.7 to 48m, but there are nearby dan- islets lie in Osundet approach about 0.1 mile W and 0.2 mile S,
gers. Cables exist in the inlet S of Rongsund and N of Bjorno. respectively, of the W extremity of Kollsoy. Flatskjaer, above
Anchorage is not permitted in this area. water, and Saskjaeri, partly above water, lie within 0.2 mile
SW and 0.3 mile SSW, respectively, of the S of the two above
4.12 Toftevag (60°29'N., 4°56'E.) indents the W side of islets.
Toftoy extending S from Bjornoy. Two quays, with alongside Forskjaer lies above water on the NW side of Osundet ap-
4.13
depths of 3 to 7m, are located at Toft close to the head of proach in a position about 0.2 mile SW of the N islet.
Toftevag. Husmannsflu, a 12m depth, lies in the fairway between Flat-
4.13
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Rongsund have the

4.12 skjaer and Forskjaer.
same characteristics as those in Solsviksund and Svelgen. Kvalosen (60°34'N., 4°50'E.) is the S and broadest part of
4.13
Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in Torsteinsvik, on

4.12 the sound between One and Skogsoyni, to the W.
the SE side of Rongsund, NE of Bjornoy. The anchorage has Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 40m, about 1 mile
4.13
depths of 12.8 to 22m and is free from dangers; mooring rings N of Forskjaer. Small vessels can anchor farther N in depths
are available. Quays, with depths of up to 4m, are located in the decreasing from 18.3 to 9.1m S of an above-water rock in the
cove. vicinity of Breidvik, close inside the N entrance to the sound.
Kjeldosen, between the N side of Nuroy and two islets
4.12 A mole and a bridge cross the passage between One and Sk-
4.13
named Borsholme and Sjurdholme, affords protected anchor- ogsoy close S of Breidvik. The mole and bridge prevent further
age to small vessels, in 9.1m, in its W part. progress N to all but small craft.
The best approach is E of Svelslingen, which lies above wa-
4.12 Breidvik has quays, with alongside depths of 4 to 5m. Fuel
4.13
ter near the SE edge of a shoal that extends 0.25 mile E from a oil is available.
position near the E side of Nuroy.
Ulvsundet, which is entered about 1 mile ENE of Skarvoy
4.12 4.14 Storodden (60°33'N., 4°48'E.) is the largest of several
(60°30'N., 4°50'E.), is the narrow sound between the islands of islets and rocks lying within 0.25 mile of the SW side of Skog-
Ono and Rongoy, on the S, and Ulvoy and Blomoy, on the N. soy. Tenen, a detached above-water rock, is located about 0.2
It leads ENE into Hjeltefjorden and is approached from sea-
4.12 mile S of the W extremity of Storodden.
ward between Skarvoy and Nessaengen, about 0.2 mile N, and Herdlevaer is an island close NW of Skogsoy. Rossoy and
4.14
the islets and rocks just E of these two outer islets. some smaller islets and rocks lie on foul ground extending
The channel fairway is very narrow, and although some of
4.12 about 0.3 mile S and SW from Herdlevaer.
the dangers are marked by lights or iron perches, its use is lim- Nordre Seiskallane, a detached 7.5m depth, lies about 0.3
4.14
ited to small vessels. Power-driven vessels must not exceed a mile SW of the W extremity of Rossoy. Sore Seiskallane, with
speed of 7 knots in Ulvsundet. a least depth of 1.5m, and Borsklakken, a 14m depth, are locat-
The E part of Ulvsundet is spanned by a bridge, with a verti-
4.12 ed about 1 mile SSW and 0.7 mile W, respectively, of the same
cal clearance of 20m, and a cable, with a vertical clearance of point.
Pub. 182
Straumsundi (60°35'N., 4°51'E.) are the channels between

4.14 Nordoy (60°43'N., 4°44'E.) lies on the S side of Fedjeosen,
4.15
One and Alvoyna, to the N, which lead from seaward into the principal approach from seaward leading into the channels
Hjeltefjorden and Indreleia. Islets, rocks, and bridges some- of Indreleia, which continue S to Bergen.
what obstruct the passage.
Entrance from the W can be made N of Geitingen. Straum-
4.14
Approach to Bergen from South
soy, with the islet of Galten close SW of it, lies in the E end of
the passage and divides it into two narrow channels, named 4.16 Lysefjorden (60°12'N., 5°19'E.) is a continuation of
Nordre Straumsund and Sore Straumsund. Korsfjorden from its junction with Langenuen and Fanafjord.
Flatskjaer, marked by an iron perch, is on the N side of the
4.14 The fjord is entered between Korsen, the SW point of Krossnes
fairway, about 0.2 mile N of the N extremity of Herdlevaer. and Fluaneset, the W point of Skorpo, 2.25 miles SE.
Senholme lies on the S side of the fairway within 0.25 mile NE The outer 2 miles of the fjord is deep and clear, except for is-
4.16
of the same extremity. Foul ground, marked by an iron perch, lets and rocks which lie within 0.6 mile offshore on both sides.
extends about 0.2 mile SE from Rotevaagoy, which lies on the Lysoya is the largest number of islets at the head of the fjord. A
N side of the fairway about 0.3 mile NE of Senholme. conspicuous tower stands on Lysoya.
A 4m rocky patch lies on the N side of the fairway, about
4.14 Caution.—Submarine cables lie E of Lysoya and close W of
4.16
183m SSW of the SW extremity of Rotevaagoy. There are oth- the mainland. Mariners are advised not to anchor or trawl in
er dangers near the fairway of Nordre and Sore Straumsund, the vicinity.
some of which are marked by iron perches. Good anchorage for small vessels is available in several
4.16
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Straumsundi set N in-

4.14 places along the shores of Lysefjorden, but local knowledge is
to Hjeltefjorden during the rising tide (beginning about 6 hours required for entering these anchorages. Two anchorages are
10 minutes after HW at Bergen) and seaward from available at the head of the fjord and are best seen on the chart.
Hjeltefjorden during the falling tide (beginning about HW at Fanafjorden is entered between Korsen and Leroy-Buaroy,
4.16
Bergen). The currents set strongly at times. 1.5 miles NW. The fjord trends NE for about 5 miles to the
town of Fana, at its head. With the exception of some islets and
4.15 Alvoyna (60°38'N., 4°50'E.) trends about 3 miles N dangers lying close to the shores and those at the head of the
between its S extremity, the NW entrance point of Nordre fjord, it is clear and deep.
Straumsund, and Aadneset (60°36'N., 4°48'E.), the N extremi- Iron perches and a buoy mark a narrow channel between Le-
4.16
ty of the island. roy and Bjelkaroy. Perches also mark some of the dangers
The W coast of Alvoyna is about 2 miles long and is fronted
4.15 along the shores of Fanafjorden.
by numerous islets and above-water rocks, all of which lie Small vessels can anchor in most of the bights on the SE side
4.16
within 1.3 miles of the larger island. The channel among the is- of Fanafjorden and also near the head of the fjord. There are
lands and islets can be used only by small vessels. quays with depths of 4 to 5m at the head of the fjord near
Hjartoyni (60°38'N., 4°50'E.) is reported as the largest is-
4.15 Stendaholmen.
land off the W coast of Alvoy. Alvheimsund, a very narrow
channel, especially in its S part, is marked by Iron perches and 4.17 Leroyosen (60°14'N., 5°10'E.) is entered from the S
lights. between Bornestangen and the islet of Leroy-Buaroy, about 10
A quay, with depths of 3 to 6m, is located at the village of
4.15 miles NNE. Leroyosen is the principal channel used by large
Alvheim on the NE shore of the sound. vessels approaching Bergen from the S. Both sides of the chan-
Small vessels can take good anchorage, in depths up to 18m,
4.15 nel are comparatively steep-to.
off Alvheim. A light is shown on Bornestangen and Tangaflu. A light is al-
4.17
Caution.—Numerous caution areas and a precautionary area

4.15 so shown from an islet close off the SW side of Leroy.
are located E of Hjartoyni. On the W side of the channel, good anchorage with mooring
4.17
Langoysund (60°37'N., 4°48'E.), between Alvoyna and

4.15 rings can be obtained by small vessels close W of Svinstangen.
Langoyna, provides good anchorage for small vessels, in 13 to Klokkarvik (60°13'N., 5°10'E.) lies about 1 mile NNW of
4.17
20m; mooring rings are used. The S entrance is the broader one Svinestangen and offers anchorage to small vessels, in 7.3m. A
and more clear of dangers than the N entrance. Care must be small quay is located in the port.
taken to avoid a 3m shoal near the middle of the sound. On the E side of Leroyosen there are several anchorages
4.17
The channel that passes the W side of the island of Forhjel-

4.15 which are suitable for vessels with local knowledge.
mo (60°40'N., 4°48'E.) and the S side of Store Lyngoy, and Temporary anchorage can be taken, in 14.6 to 16.4m, off the
4.17
leads into Hjeltefjorden, is entered from W between Mykle- W end of Leroy-Buaroy. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited
baen, on the S, and the dangers extending S from Store Lyngoy. in the area of Leroyosen that is best seen on the chart.
From Myklebaen, a 2.5m depth, the channel leads SE of Lam- Raunefjorden (60°16'N., 5°10'E.) lies just N of Leroy and
4.17
holmflu, a 3.5m depth. Bjelkaroy. The fairway through Raunefjorden leads W of a

Care must be taken to avoid both Lamholmflu and Siefluene,
4.15 group of islands and islets and has ample depths for large ves-
where the channel turns NE and leads between Tikje and the sels. Rauneskjaerene Light is shown on the SW end of a reef
SE islet of Skreiskjaerene. Care must be taken to avoid the foul which lies in the middle of Raunefjorden.
ground extending from both of these islets. A beacon lies about 0.1 mile E of the light. A light is shown
4.17
After passing these dangers, vessels may enter Hjeltefjorden,

4.15 on the NW side of Flatoy, which lies 0.5 mile E of the above
passing or rounding Robbeganstangen (60°41'N., 4°48'E.), light. Large vessels can anchor in the vicinity of Flatoy. Care
the N extremity of Forhjelmo, at a prudent distance. must be taken to avoid a shoal E of the islet.
Pub. 182
4.18 Vatlestraumen (60°19'N., 5°12'E.) trends N and

NNW on the E side of Bjoroy for about 4 miles and is the pre-
ferred passage from the N end of Raunefjorden to the channel
N of Bjoroy which continues farther N into Byfjorden.
The fairway through Vatlestraumen is deep and free from
4.18
dangers. A light marks a rock on the E side of the fairway near

its S entrance point. A light is shown on a small point about 2
miles N of the above light. A number of other navigational aids
can best be seen on the chart.
Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the bight
4.18
off Flesland, in depths of 7.3 to 26m. Larger vessels can anchor

in depths up to 46m in a bay N of Tangen, avoiding a 4m patch
close off this small point. A quay, with depths of from 4 to 6m
alongside, is located in this bay.
Grimstadfjorden (60°19'N., 5°14'E.) lies on the E side of
4.18
Vatlestraumen. The fjord extends 1.5 miles E and then divides

into two arms; one trends 1.25 miles NNW to Mathopen while
the other trends SSE to Dolvik. Tidal currents of up to 5 knots
have been reported (2008) in the N branch of the fjord. The 4.18 By Einherjer [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org)]
fairway through most of Grimstadfjorden has depths exceeding Norwegian frigate pier side at Haakonsvern
4.18
37m.
A light is shown on shore at the E extremity of the fjord and
4.18
N of its S entrance. Liholmane, a group of islets, lie on the E
also on the NW shore of Store Bogoy. side of the fairway about 0.5 mile NW of the N extremity of
Haakonsvern (Hakonsvern) (60°20'N., 5°14'E.) (World Port
4.18
Tosoy. A light is shown from the W side of the S islet of the
Index No. 23170) in the N part of Grimstadfjorden, contains a group. The dangers on the E side of the fairway are well
restricted area surrounding the Haakonsvern Naval Base. The marked by navigational aids and can best be seen on the chart.
base, which is the largest in Norway, is a comprehensive facili- There are no recommended anchorages in Kobbaleida.
ty containing all the necessary resources to support the Norwe- From the junction of Vatlestraumen and Kobbaleida, a deep,
4.19
gian navy in its day-to-day operations. The base is equipped clear channel trends N for about 2 miles to Stangsnes, a main-
with cranes. Two mooring buoys are available off the harbor, land projection at the SW end of Byfjord. Depths in the fair-
0.3 mile NW of Knappen Light. Repairs, fuel, and fresh water way are from 64 to 97m. A depth of 1.8m lies on the W side of
are available.The recommended route to Haakonsvern from sea the fairway, about 0.1 mile N of the beacon marking Fuglask-
through the fjords is via Korsfjorden, Leroyosen, Raun- jaer.
efjorden, and Grimstadfjorden. Alvoyvag (60°21'N., 5°11'E.) lies on the E side of the above
4.19
Stamneset lies on the S side of Grimstadfjorden. A quay at

4.18 channel, about 1 mile NNE of Fuglaskjaer. A 3.6m patch lies in
an oil tank installation on the E side of Stamneset has a depth the middle of the narrow entrance to Alvoyvag.
of 14m alongside. A small quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, is located at Al-
4.19
A mooring buoy lies close E of the quay. Nordasstraumen

4.18 voen, a small town on the NE side of Alvoyvag. Stongi Light
leads E from the S arm of Grimstadfjorden and connects the (60°22'N., 5°10'E.) marks a rock on the E side of the channel
fjord with the inner basin of Nordasvatn. The channel is very close W of Stangsnes. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of
narrow and can only be used by small vessels. The least depth 50m, crosses the channel close N of Stongi Light.
in the fairway is 3.4m. A cable with an overhead clearance of
25m spans Nordasstraumen at its narrowest part. 4.20 Brattholmen (60°21'N., 5°10'E.) (World Port Index
Anchorage.—A bight on the E side of Store Bogoy provides
4.18 No. 23180), a small settlement on the W side of the channel on
good anchorage for small vessels in 12.8m. Such vessels can Litlasotra, lies about 1 mile N of Fuglaskjaer. A pier close to
also anchor in 14.6 to 20.1m, in the N arm of Grimstadfjorden, the settlement has a depth of 4m alongside. Anchorage is avail-
about 1 mile NNE of the S end of Store Bogoy. Depths of 4 and able for small vessels, in a depth of 11.8m, off the settlement.
4.9m lie in mid-channel about 0.2 mile S of the anchorage. The W entrance to Byfjorden lies between Stongi Light and
Anchorage is found in the S arm off Dolvik; anchorage is al-
4.18
Hjelteskjaer Light, nearly 1 mile to the NNE. This SW reach
so available in a small cove on the S side of Grimstadfjorden separates the S side of Askoy from the mainland and trends NE
about 0.3 mile W of Stamneset. A 6.1m patch lies just N of the for 2.25 miles to Kvarven, which shows a light, and then con-
cove entrance. tinues E for about 1 mile to the W limits of the port area of
Bergen at Olderneset. Both sides of this reach are steep-to,
4.19 Kobbaleida (60°19'N., 5°09'E.) is an alternate pas- with a few existing dangers within 183m of the shores. Depths
sage leading N from Raunefjorden. The passage is bounded on in the fairway are ample and in most places exceed 183m. Sub-
the W by the island of Store Sotra and on the E by the islands marine cables cross the fjord at Storebuneset and about 0.5
of Tosoy and Bjoroy. Depths in the fairway through Kobbalei- mile farther NE.
da are ample for large vessels, but caution is necessary because The Askoy Bridge (60°23.7'N., 5°12.9'E.), with a vertical
4.20
of nearby dangers. clearance of 63m, extends SSE from Skardholmen to Brystene-

There is a submarine cable across Kobbaleida about 2 miles
4.19
set and crosses the SW arm of Byfjorden in the approach to
Pub. 182
4.20 By Michael Clarke [CC BY-SA 2.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa)], via Wikimedia Commons
4.20 Hellisoy Light
Bergen. proach to Bergen. It affords direct access from sea into the
Skardholmen (60°24'N., 5°13'E.) is located about 0.2 mile
4.20 channels of Indreleia, which continue S to Bergen for about 30
NE of Storebuneset. A tanker wharf, with depths of from 10 to miles. It is about 1 mile wide between the island of Fedje and
24m alongside, is located at Skardholmen. A cove close NE of the islets to the S.
Skardholmen affords good anchorage, with mooring rings for On the S side of the channel, Bolleflesi, a rock lying on foul
4.22
small vessels at its N end. ground which breaks, is located about 1 mile NW of Nordoyni.
A large oil tank installation in Klampevik has a quay, 76m
4.20 A racon is situated at the lighted beacon standing on the rock.
long, with depths from 11 to 16m alongside, and a shorter A light is shown from the NW end of Nordoy.
quay, with depths of up to 19m alongside. On the N side of the channel, Ostre Hellisoy is situated close
4.22
to the SW side of Fedje. Hellisoy Light (60°45'N., 4°43'E.)

4.21 Skalevik (60°24'N., 5°14'E.), about 0.2 mile SSW of with its prominent light tower, 32m high, stands on the island.
Kvarven, is marked by a cluster of oil tanks and has two quays, A racon is situated at the light tower.
the W and E, which are approximately 80 and 44m long. The In addition to the above, at night, the lights at Onglesundet
4.22
W quay, also known as the Skalevikveien Terminal is operated (60°43'N., 4°52'E.) and Vardholmen (60°46'N., 4°52'E.) may
by Esso Norge AS and can accommodate vessels up to 12m in be of aid to navigation in the channel.
draft. The E quay is a general cargo berth and has a least depth Hakeskallen, a 14m patch, lies about 1 mile NW of Bollefle-
4.22
of 6.4m alongside. A rock, marked by an iron perch, lies close si and reduces the navigable width of the channel to about 1
off the W entrance point of Skalevik. Storholmen, an islet, lies mile. Other dangers S and W of Hakeskallen may best be seen
about 0.5 mile N of Kvarven. A quay on the W side of the islet on the chart.
is 85m long, with depths of 14 to 17m alongside. There is a Vessels from the N proceeding to Bergen can pass through
4.22
small quay on the E side of the islet, with an alongside depth of the length of Hjeltefjorden and then through the SW reach of
9m. Byfjorden, the channels of which lead W and S of Askoy. An
Anchorage.—Marikoven has good anchorage in a nearby
4.21 alternative route leads from the N part of Hjeltefjorden into
cove, in a depth of 30m, sand. This is a good temporary an- Herdlefjorden, through that fjord, and then through the N reach
chorage for deep-draft vessels. There are mooring rings in the of Byfjorden. These two routes are the ones generally used.
outer part of the cove. Pilotage.—Pilots are transferred by helicopter at the Horda-
4.22
land-Fedje pilotage station. Pilotage rules and information are,

Approach to Bergen from North as follows:
1. Pilot boarding places are, as follows:
4.22 Fedjeosen (60°44'N., 4°44'E.) is the principal N ap- a. Fedje Vest (60°46.0'N., 4°27.9'E.).
Pub. 182
b. Holmengra Vest (60°51.0'N., 4°25.9'E.). booked in advance, giving 24 hours notice to Fedje Traffic
2. Pilot services for vessels that exceed 30,000 gt and are Control Center.
classified to carry hazardous or polluting cargo, will be pro-
vided exclusively from the pilot boarding places mentioned Norwegian Coastal Administration
in paragraph 1 above. The same applies when vessels carry Pilot Services
no cargo. Fedje Traffic Control Center may decide that other
vessels should also be serviced from the pilot boarding plac- https://www.kystverket.no
es mentioned in paragraph 1 above.
3. Vessels as mentioned in paragraph 2 above will be of- 4.23 Fedjefjorden (60°45'N., 4°47'E.) lies E of Fedjeosen
fered pilot transfer by helicopter. Such offer will be given to and the Holmengra group, and W of many islets and rocks ex-
the vessel or the agent when the initial pilot booking is made. tending 3 miles NW from Fosnoy. On the W side of Fed-
Vessels/agents that do not immediately accept pilot transfer jefjorden, there are no known dangers more than 183m off
by helicopter will have up to 12 hours prior to commence- Fedje.
ment of the pilotage assignment in which to make a decision. Hjeltefjorden (60°35'N., 4°55'E.) is the principal part of the
4. Vessels that receive a helicopter shall comply with the N inner approach to Bergen. The fairway through Hjeltefjorden
rules set out in “Guide to Helicopter/Ship Operations,” is- favors the W side of the fjord and passes within 0.5 mile of the
sued by the International Chamber of Shipping. outer islets and dangers on that side. Between Geitanger and
5. Vessels as mentioned in paragraph 2 above, which the entrance of Byfjorden the fairway width is considerably re-
cannot or do not wish to have a pilot transferred by helicop- duced. Buoys or iron perches mark some of the outer dangers,
ter, will have a pilot transferred by pilot boat when this can and there are some beacons and a few lights.
be done safely. The pilot will be transferred to the new pilot Toska (Toskoy), a narrow island, lies on the E side of
4.23
boarding places mentioned in paragraph 1 above. It should Hjeltefjorden abreast of Seloy. A small inlet which is entered
be noted that to decline use of a helicopter in cases where it from Hjeltefjorden nearly divides Toska into two parts.
is not safe to use a pilot boat will result in waiting time. The N part of Toska is known as Uttoska. Norde Flesi,
4.23
6. Fedje Traffic Control Center shall not clear vessels marked by a buoy, lies about 0.5 mile NW of the NW extremity
mentioned in paragraph 2 above for entry until the pilot has of Uttoska. Stureholmen, which shows a light, lies on the W
embarked. Such vessels shall not be cleared for departure side of Hjeltefjorden.
with a pilot on board until it is confirmed that the pilot can The direct Hjeltefjorden route is used by large vessels. Small
4.23
disembark as intended. vessels and vessels of moderate size usually prefer the route
7. If helicopters are available, other vessels than those through Herdlefjorden, which is almost free from dangers in
mentioned in paragraph 2 above may also be offered pilot the greater part of its length, but narrows at its N end.
transfer by helicopter provided the vessels in question satis- Regulations.—As seen on the chart, inbound vessels will
4.23
fies the requirements of paragraph 4 above. The vessels will cross a radio reporting line drawn between Blomoyna and the
in the event be provided with a pilot at the new pilot board- NW part of Askoy.
ing places.
8. The helicopter company will bill the agent for the par- 4.24 Sture Oil Terminal (60°37'N., 4°52'E.) is a major fa-
ticular vessel for all costs incurred in pilot transfer by heli- cility for the export of oil received by pipeline from the Ose-
copter. berg, Grane, Svalin, Edvard Grieg and Ivar Aasen oil fields.
9. The above measures will be implemented immediate- The terminal is located close N of Stureholmen Light and con-
ly and shall apply until further notice. sists of two jetties, with associated mooring dolphins, extend-
Vessels not encompassed by these measures will continue to
4.22 ing E from the shore 0.4 mile and 0.8 mile, respectively, NNW
be provided with a pilot by pilot boat at the pilot boarding plac- of the light tower. A short breakwater projects S from the shore
es in Fedjeosen and off Holmengra. State pilots shall be close S of the root of the N jetty to protect the tugs.
Sture Oil Terminal—Berth Information

Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Sture Terminal
Crude. Berthing length of 366m
(including dolphins). Crude vessels
See
Jetty No. 1 80m 26.0m 338.9m 23.0m 150,000 dwt under 50,000 dwt or over 150,000
Remarks
dwt are preferred to be loaded at the
jetty. Beam is unrestricted.
Crude and LPG. Berthing length of
Jetty No. 2 100m 26.0m 280m 23.0m — 300,00 dwt
Pub. 182
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 300,000 dwt, 338.9m

4.24 0.6 mile WNW of Skjeljanger Light. A beacon stands on Kver-
in length, and 23m in draft can be accommodated at the nane. Mefjordbaen Light lies about 1 mile WSW of Skjel-
terminal. For more berthing information see the table titled janger Light. An iron perch marks the NW end of
Sture Oil Terminal—Berth Information Mefjordbaen.
Aspect.—A conspicuous water tower, 64m in elevation, and
4.24 Herdla, an island enclosing the NW end of Herdelfjorden,
4.25
a conspicuous flare tower, 52m in elevation, stand in the lies on the E side of Hjeltefjorden, with its W extremity about 2
vicinity of the oil terminal and may be seen from a miles S of Skjeljanger. A white church on the W slope of the
considerable distance. island is a good landmark. A bank, with depths of less than
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 4,000
4.24 5.5m, extends about 0.3 mile N from the island.
gt carrying cargo to and from the terminal. Pilotage should be
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the 4.26 Herdlesund (60°34'N., 4°58'E.), between Herdla and
Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. the N end of Askoy, is a narrow channel leading from
Regulations.—Berthing and unberthing takes place during
4.24 Hjeltefjorden into the N end of Herdlefjorden. A light is shown
daylight hours only. on the NW point of Askoy. A bridge, with a vertical clearance
Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours in advance, includ-
4.24 of 16.2m, spans Herdlesund. Red fixed lights beneath the
ing the following information: bridge indicate the center of the fairway.
1. Vessel name and call sign. Herdlefluene, a group of shoals extending S from Herdla, are
4.26
2. Flag/nationality. marked by an iron perch at their E end, which dries, lying 0.2
3. Master’s name. mile SW of the bridge.
4. Owners. Between Krabbejoneset and the Byfjorden entrance, about
4.26
5. Shipper. 11 miles SE, the fairway of Hjeltefjorden continues to be deep

6. Cargo number. and clear, and for the most part favors the W side of the fjord.
7. Gross tans. Both shores are irregular, and most of the detached islets and
8. Summer dwt. dangers are on the E side, lying up to 1.5 miles off the W side
9. Draft fore and aft. of Askoy.
10. Last port of call. Store Jona lies on the W side of the fairway of Hjeltefjorden,
4.26
11. ETA (local time and date). about 1 mile E of Krabbejoneset. Store Jona consists of two
12. Technical information as required by the terminal. close-lying islets. A light is shown on the S islet.
Vessels should obtain permission from the terminal prior to
4.24 Rongsund (60°30'N., 4°56'E.), on the W side of
4.26
proceeding to the jetty. Hjeltefjorden, is entered between Rongoy and Toftoy, about 1
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sture Oil Ter-
4.24 mile S of Store Jona. Vikavag, on the E side of Toftoy, has
minal—Contact Information. mooring rings. The largest of several quays, situated on the E
side of Vikavag, has depths of up to 7m alongside.
Sture Oil Terminal—Contact Information Hanoy and Hauglandsoy, on the W side of Hjeltefjorden, are
4.26
the largest islets in an archipelago which extends about 2 miles

VHF VHF channel 9 from the W side of Askoy and forms the NW side of a basin
47-56-386000 named Hauglandsosen.
Lights and iron perches mark several intricate channels
4.26
47-56-386111 (main control

among the islets. A light is shown from a rock N of Hillesoy.
Telephone room)
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m, extends
4.26
47-56-386222 (shift supervisor) NE from Ramsoyni (60°26'N., 5°03'E.) to Hanoy. A causeway

47-56-386333 (emergency) and bridge have been constructed between Hanoy and Ramsoy.
Nordre Brattholme (60°24'N., 5°06'E.), which shows a light,
4.26
Facsimile 47-56-389420 lies on the W side of the fairway, 2 miles S of Hanoy. Store
E-mail skiftleder.sture@hydro.com Brattholme, marked by a beacon, lies close W of Norde Brat-
tholme. Faeroy, an island, lies about 1 mile E of Nordre Brat-
tholme Light. A small boat harbor, protected by a mole, is
Caution.—Helmferdflu, a rock with a depth of 3m, lies
4.24
located at Follese, which lies on the SW side of Askoy.

about 0.5 mile NNW of Stureholmen and close N of the S tank-
er berth; it is marked by a lighted beacon. Sandvikflu lies about 4.27 Agotnes (60°24'N., 5°01'E.) (World Port Index No.
1 mile NNW of Stureholmen and close SW of the S end of the 23195) is a supply and servicing base for offshore industry.
N tanker berth; it is marked by an iron perch. Depths—Limitations.— Vessel up to 13,000 dwt and 8m
draft can be accommodated. Berthing details are shown in the
4.25 Mangersfjorden (60°37'N., 5°00'E.) lies on the E accompanying table titled Agotnes—Berth Information.
side of Hjeltefjorden and is entered about 10 miles SE of the Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
4.27
seaward entrance of Fedjeosen. The fjord is deep and clear in dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
the fairway. All dangers lie within 300m of the shores. The soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Pilots are
fjord trends about 4 miles to the E and shows a light at its head. available at Korsfjorden or Fedje.
Skjeljanger Light (60°37'N., 4°57'E.) stands on the NW
4.25
Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF chan-

4.27
end of Holsenoy. Kvernane, two above-water rocks, lies about nel 16 at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does not re-
Pub. 182
spond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Station will A quay in the port has depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A lighted
4.27
reply and relay details to the pilot station. buoy marks a 6m patch 183m W of Tranneset. Vessels of con-
The pilot boards for the S entrance in position 60°08.6'N,
4.27 siderable size can anchor 0.3 mile N of Tranneset.
5°00.9'E, about 0.7 mile N of Store Marstein. Pilot boarding Vessels should use care when anchoring to avoid a subma-
4.27
for the N entrance is covered under Mongstad (see paragraph rine cable which exists between the shore W of this anchorage
5.7). and the head of Tranvagen. Near the anchorage, there is a quay,
with 3 to 7m alongside.
Agotnes—Contact Information There area number of anchorages between Krabbejoneset
4.27
and the entrance to Byfjord. These anchorages, except as not-

VHF VHF channel 10 ed, are suitable only for small vessels with local knowledge,
Telephone 47-56-323000 and can best be seen on the chart.
A protected area has been established around the oil termi-
4.27
nal. Berthing and unberthing are only permitted during day-
E-mail ccb@coastcenterbase.no light.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Agotnes—Con-

4.27
4.28 Herdlefjorden (60°32'N., 5°05'E.) is a deep clear
tact Information. fjord separating Holsnoy and Askoy. From the N entrance, it
Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained 0.25 mile N of
4.27
trends ESE for about 9 miles, where its joins with the N part of
Agotnes, in depths of 29 to 74m. Large vessels and semi- Byfjorden at Askeneset. The few islets and dangers in
submersible drilling platforms must anchor only in positions Herdlefjorden all lie within the several inlets on either side or
appointed by the Port Authority. close to the shores.
Tranvagen, a small port, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Agotnes.
4.27
Agotnes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depths Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Agotnes Terminal
No. 1 50m 7.0m — — — —
No. 2 52m 7.0m — — — —
cargo, bunkers, and breakbulk.
Chemicals, offshore vessels,
No. 3 169m 21.0m — — — — project/heavy cargo, bunkers,
and breakbulk.
No. 4 75m 21.0m — — — —
No. 10 30m 7.0m — — — —
No. 31 60m 8.0m — — — — project/heavy cargo, break-
bulk, and bunkers.
Cement, offshore vessels, proj-
No. 32 60m 8.0m — — — — ect/heavy cargo, breakbulk,
and bunkers.
Port Terminal
Offshore vessels, project/
No. 11 North 69m 30.0m — 8.0m — —
heavy, breakbulk, and bunkers.
No. 11 Middle 100m 20.0m — 8.0m — —
No. 11 South 89m 20.0m — 8.0m — —
Pub. 182
Agotnes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Berth Length Depths Remarks
LOA Draft Beam Size
Ro-Ro 151m 12.0m — 8.0m — — project/heavy cargo, break-
bulk, and bunkers.
LNG
Chemicals, LNG, and bun-
LNG — 8.0m — — — — kers. Berthing length of 43m
ANP
ANP 40m 7.0m — — — — Breakbulk.
Sorta Gruppen
Sorta 40m — 34m — 15.9m 6,258 dwt Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
An area in which anchoring and fishing is prohibited lies

4.28 Frekhaug, 1 mile NW of Salhus, there are quays. with depths
within the entrance to Herdlefjorden between Nesodden and of from 3 to 6m alongside.
Ypso. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain A bridge and racon, with a vertical clearance of 32m, crosses
4.29
anchorage in Herdlefjorden. Salhusfjorden from the SW extremity of Flatoy to Klauvneset,

The N entrance to Byfjorden is entered between Askenset
4.28 about 0.8 mile SE.
and Galteneset, 1 mile to the NNE. This entrance is at the junc-
tion of Byfjorden, Herdlefjorden, and Salhusfjorden. This 4.30 Lurefjorden (60°42'N., 5°07'E.) is approached from
reach is very deep and all known dangers lie close off its Fedjeosen and the S end of Fedjefjorden by passing N of Store
shores. Submarine cables cross the reach in two places and can Sandholme and the dangers E of this islet and then through
best be seen on the chart. Hoplandsosen and Fosnstraumen. The S approach is made
from Kvernafjorden by way of Alversund, Radsundet and Lu-
4.29 Radoyfjorden (60°35'N., 5°11'E.) lies between Hol- reosen. A light marks the N side of the NW entrance of Hop-
snoy and Radoy. The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway, landsosen. Taren, awash in places and marked by an iron perch,
except in the vicinity of Saeboholmane. A quay, with depths of lies on the S side of the Hoplandsosen entrance.
3 to 6m alongside, is situated about 1 mile NNW of Saebohol- Kraka is an above-water rock on the SW side of Hopland-
4.30
mane. sosen. Fosnstraumen is the narrow channel between the N side

Bongnestraumen, between the NE side of Bongno and Ra- of Radoy and the S end of Fosnoy and connects Hoplandsosen
doy, is a narrows connecting Radoyfjorden with Mangers- with the NW end of Lurefjorden. The fairway has a least chart-
fjorden. A light is shown on the N side of Bongno. A cable, ed depth of 20m. Two overhead cables, with a minimum verti-
with a vertical clearance of 37m, spans Bongnestraumen. This cal clearance of 15m, span the channel.
channel has a least depth in the fairway of 21.9m and, although Lurefjorden trends about 9 miles SE to the narrow Ryland-
4.30
narrow, is free from dangers. spollen. Seimsfjorden continues about 3 miles SSE from
From abreast the E extremity of Bongno, Radoyfjorden
4.29 Lurefjorden. Both of these fjords are clear and deep in their
trends in a general SE direction for about 5 miles and joins fairways. Numerous lights mark the channels leading N and S
Kvernafjorden in the vicinity of Tjuvholme. The fairway from Lurefjorden. The dangers in these channels are also
through the fjord is deep and clear, but there are some nearby marked by iron perches or beacons.
dangers. Alverstraumen (60°34'N., 5°14'E.), which leads 1.5 miles
4.30
Kvernafjorden trends SE for about 2 miles to the N end of

4.29 NNW from Kvernafjorden, is spanned near the S end by a
Hagelsund. Navigation is prohibited to all but local vessels be- bridge, with a vertical clearance of 27m. The fairway N of the
tween Flatoy and Holsnoy. A light marks a shoal on the SW bridge is well marked by navigational aids.
side of Kvernafjorden, about 0.3 mile SSE of Tjuvholme. There are quays, with least depths of 3m alongside, on the E
4.30
Three cables span the channel between Flatoy and Holsnoy

4.29 side of the channel at the village of Alversund, near the bridge.
and can best be seen on the chart. There is anchorage for small vessels in several places N of a
4.30
Salhusfjorden trends SSW from its junction with Hagelsund

4.29 submarine cable which lies across the channel 0.25 mile N of
for about 3 miles to its junction with Herdlefjorden and the N the bridge, care being taken to keep clear of the fairway. The S
reach of Byfjorden. Salhusfjorden is very deep and has a fair- part of the channel is spanned by an overhead cable with a ver-
way clear of dangers. Foul ground extends about 183m SW tical clearance of 28m; the N part of the channel is spanned by
from a projection on the E side of the S entrance of the fjord. A an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 36m.
submarine cable crosses the fjord 0.5 mile within its entrance. Radsundet has a length of about 5 miles from its S entrance
4.30
Salhus, on the E side of the fjord, has two small quays. At at Alverstraumen to its N entrance at Bruknappen. The W side
Pub. 182
and both ends of Radsundet is well marked by lights. from the NE side of Solheimsvik through a narrow passage
There are quays at Skardsvag and Notlevag. Quays at Sand-
4.30 spanned by a lift bridge.
vik, situated 1 mile SSW of Skardsvag, and Askeland have Aspect.—Puddefjorden is the outer roadstead. Vagen is an
depths of 7m alongside. inlet entered on the NE side of Puddefjorden; it is usually con-
gested with ships moving in the harbor. Sandvik, a harbor ba-
Bergen (60°24'N., 5°19'E.) sin, is entered about 0.5 mile N of the entrance to Vagen and is
used by seaplanes. Nyhaven and Breidvik are small harbor ba-
World Port Index No. 23160 sins close N of Sandvik.
4.31
4.31 Bergen is often called the capital of West Norway and dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
has been a city for over 900 years. It has a population of more soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
than 210,000. Known for shipping and fishing in the past, it is The pilot boards in the S entrance in position 60°08.6'N,
4.31
now identified as a servicing and supply base for the offshore 5°00.9'E, about 0.7 mile N of Store Marstein. Pilot boarding
oil and gas fields of the North Sea in the vicinity of SW Nor- for the N entrance is covered under Mongstad (see paragraph
way as well. 5.7).
Located on the NW side of the Bergen peninsula and on the See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
4.31
SE part of Byfjorden, the city’s harbor includes bights and in- Ocean for additional information.
lets which lie E of a line running N for about 3 miles from Old- Regulations.—A printed English translation of harbor
4.31
erneset to Hella. regulations may be obtained at the harbor office. Regulations

concerning explosives and lights are very stringent. Vessels
Port of Bergen Home Page arriving at Bergen without having been assigned an anchorage
or mooring shall anchor in Puddefjorden until a berth has been
https://bergenhavn.no/en/ designated by the harbor authorities.
Vessels should send their ETA to Port Control at least 1 hour
4.31
Passenger, ro-ro, tanker, bulk, and general cargo vessels can

4.31
prior to arrival. The ETA message should include the following
be handled. In addition, the port has drydocks and shipyard fa- information:
cilities for the offshore oil industry. 1. Vessel name and call sign.
Winds—Weather.—Generally, the wind direction is from S
4.31
2. Length overall, beam, and draft.
to SE during the winter and from N to NE during the summer. 3. Flag.
Weather conditions vary between the outer islands, the re-
4.31
4. Purpose of port call.
gion near Bergen, and in the fjords of this sector. The climate at 5. Name of agent.
Bergen is mild, humid, and rainy. 6. Last port-of-call and next port-of-call.
Bergen harbor freezes only during very severe winters. Fog
4.31
A speed limit of 5 knots is the maximum permissible speed
4.31
occurs during the summer. in the inner part of Eidsvagen.

Tides—Currents.—The mean HW interval at Bergen is 10
4.31 Contact Information.—See the table titled Bergen—Con-
4.31
hours 17 minutes. tact Information.

Tidal currents in the port are negligible, except in
4.31
Anchorage.—Vessels of considerable size may anchor in
4.31
Damsgardssund, where a slight set may be encountered during Puddefjorden, except W of a line extending 0.5 mile NW from
both the rising and falling tides. the W end of Dokkeskjaerskaien. A submarine pipeline is laid
Depths—Limitations.—Puddefjorden, the outer roadstead,
4.31
E of this line on the NE side of Dokkeskjaerskaien leading
has general depths of 9 to 37m. Vessel with drafts up to 12.2m about 0.5 mile N to Georgernes. The fjord is exposed to NW
can be handled in the port. Close offshore the depths are less. winds, but the holding ground is good. The prominent spire of
On the SE side, at the head of Puddefjorden, Damsgardssund a church, situated 0.25 mile NNE of the bridge at the entrance
leads into Solheimsvik. to Damsgardssund, is a useful mark for anchoring.
Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
4.31
Skutevik affords anchorage to vessels of moderate size, in
4.31
Bergen—Berth Information. depths of 27 to 36m, but stern mooring is necessary as the bot-
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans the en-
4.31 tom shelves steeply. The quarantine anchorage is in Florvag.
trance into Damsgardssund. Numerous mooring buoys are There is anchorage for small vessels in Nyhavn and Breidvik.
moored in Damsgardssund. Store Lungegaardsvn is entered
Bergen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Bontelabo Terminal
Bontelabo 130m — 340m 9.5m — 10,000 dwt Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
East 150m — 340m 9.5m — — Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
West 104m — 340m 9.5m — 14,601 dwt Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Bradbenken Terminal
Bradbenken 80m 6.0m 82m — — — Breakbulk.
Festningskaien Terminal
Festningskaien 300m 6.0m 300m 6.5m — 10,543 dwt Passengers.
Dreggekaien Terminal
Dreggekaien 98m 4.4m 46m — 15.0m 2,900 dwt Small vessels. Closed.
Bryggen Terminal
Fast ferry and small vessels.
Bryggen — 3.5m 76m — 13.8m 2,500 dwt Closed. Continuous berthing
length of 312m.
Austevoll Laksepakkeri Terminal
Austevoll 155m — 94m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt Fishing and breakbulk.
CEMEX Terminal
Cement 76m 10.0m 130m — 19.4m 11,541 dwt Cement.
Damsgardskaien Terminal
Fast ferries, ro-pax, contain-
Damsgardskaien 157m 4.0m 52m — — —
ers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
DC Eikefet Terminal
DC Eikefet 130m 10.0m 143m — 22.8m 17,451 dwt Aggregates and breakbulk.
Jekleviken Terminal
Cruise vessels, ro-ro/lo-lo, and
Container 500m 8.9-12.2m 500m — — 17,110 dwt
containers.
Ro-Ro 180m 8.9-12.2m 326m — 39.7m 14,601 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and containers.
Dokken Terminal
East 97m — 172m — 35.8m 21,250 dwt Ro-pax and breakbulk.
Inner 126m — 144m — 22.7m 10,508 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
Cruise, ro-pax, containers, and
Southwest 240m 10.5m 240m — — —
breakbulk.
Framo Berth
Ro/pax, containers, and break-
Framo 60m — 86m — 16.0m 3,931 dwt
bulk.
Frieleneskaien Terminal
Ro-pax, breakbulk, coastal ex-
Frieleneskaien 400m 9.2m 166m — 25.0m 18,464 dwt press vessels, bunkers, and
reefer.
Frydenbo Industri (Hanoytangen)
Transshipment, offshore ves-
Frydenbo Main 172m 7.0m 90m — 14.4m 4,550 dwt sels, project/heavy cargo, steel
products, and breakbulk.
Holbergskaien Terminal
East 44m 5.3m 43m — 10.6m — Ro-pax.
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Holbergskaien 63m 5.9m 43m — — — Ro-pax.
West 56m 5.2m 59m — 16.0m 3,850 dwt Ro-pax and fishing vessels.
Hordvikneset Terminal
Hordvikneset 40m — 117m — 22.8m 13,537 dwt Containers and breakbulk.
Horsoy Industrihavn
Horsoy 200m — 172m — 26.5m 21,250 dwt Containers and breakbulk.
Hurtigruten Terminal
Ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, fishing,
Hurtigruten 154m 9.0m 87m — — —
breakbulk, and bunkers.
Mohlenspriskaien Terminal
East 156m — — — — — Breakbulk and reefer.
West 130m 4.0-6.0m 102m — 17.0m 3,850 dwt Breakbulk and reefer.
Munkebryggen Terminal
East 76m 5.2m 74m — 16.0m 3,125 dwt Breakbulk and ro/pax.
West 88m 5.2m 56m — — — Breakbulk and ro/pax.
Norcem Terminal
Norcem 70m — 117m — 31m 48,041 dwt Cement and breakbulk.
NorStone Askoy- Mjolkevikarden
Aggregates, steel products,
fishing, and breakbulk. Berth-
NorStone — — 81m — 13.0m 2,900 dwt
ing length of 98 (incl. dol-
phins).
Northern Nostekai Terminal
Nostekai 92m 4.0m 77m — 23.6m 8,843 dwt Ro-pax.
Nykirkenkaien Terminal
East 60m — 70m — 15.2m 3,549 dwt Ro/pax and breakbulk.
Nykirkekaien 46m 17.0m 62m — 13.8m 1,725 dwt Ro/pax.
West 82m — 67m — 14.6m 2,900 dwt Ro/pax and breakbulk.
PGS Geophysical
PGS 113m — 107m — 18.2m 9,653m Closed. Breakbulk.
RadoyGryppen Terminal
RadoyGruppen 120m — 179m — 25.6m 18,972 dwt Steel products.
Saltimport Terminal
Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and
Saltimport 98m — 128m — 18.2m 9,700 dwt
reefer.
Semco Maritime (Hanoytangen)
Semco Outer 17.0- Transshipment, offshore ves-
100m 140m — 23.6m 6,672 dwt
(Hanoytangen) 20.0m sels, and breakbulk.
Simonsviken Terminal
East 72m — 58m — 20.7m 4,900 dwt Breakbulk.
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
West 64m — 95m — 16.0m 5,215 dwt Breakbulk.
Skaganeset Havneterminal-Skogsvag
Aggregates, ro-pax, steel prod-
Skaganeset 40m — 106m — 20.7m 5,750 dwt ucts, fishing, breakbulk, and
reefer.
SkoltenTerminal
Skolten N 150m 9.2m 333m 8.8m — 8,676 dwt Cruise and ro-pax.
Skolten S 330m 9.2m 253m 8.8m — 8,654 dwt Cruise and fast ferries.
SLP Terminal
SLP 58m — 102m — 17.0m 3,7278dwt Breakbulk.
Quay Head 32m — 99m — 17.0m 3,727 dwt Breakbulk.
Strandkaien Terminal
Strandkaien 145m 4.7m 39m — — — Fast ferries.
Straume Naeringspark Terminal
Straume 50m — 114m — 16.0m 6,053 dwt Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Tollboden Terminal
Tollboden 90m 6.8m 140m — 29.2m 4,661dwt Breakbulk.
Breiviken Terminal
North 37m 6.0-9.7m — — — — Breakbulk and multipurpose.
Southwest 60m — 111m — 17.5m 4,020 dwt Breakbulk and multipurpose.
CCBK Terminal
LNG, ro-ro freight, containers,
North 107m — 110m — 17.2m 7,569 dwt
and breakbulk.
South 20m — — — — — LNG and breakbulk.
Franzefoss Gjenvinning Eide
Breakbulk, multipurpose, and
FG 28m — 88m — 20.8m 4,9000 dwt bunkers. Berthing length of
65m (incl. dolphins).
Franzefoss Gjenvinning Terminal
Clean products, ro-ro passen-
ger/vehicles/rail, offshore ves-
No. 1 157m — 107m — 17.0m 6,706 dwt
sels, fishing vessels, breakbulk,
multipurpose, and bunkers.
Clean products, breakbulk,
No. 2 80m — — — — —
Breakbulk, multipurpose, bun-
No. 3 164m — 111m — 16.2m 6,063 dwt kers, and reefer. Used by bun-
ker tankers.
No. 4 46m — — — — — Breakbulk.
GC Rieber Salt Terminal
Chemicals, salt, ro-pax, fish-
GC Rieber Salt 120m — 114m — 20.7m 6,419 dwt
ing, breakbulk, and reefer.
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Kollsnes Industrial Processing Plant
LNG, breakbulk, and multipur-
North Dolphin — 8.6-24.0m 77m — 13.9m — pose. Berthing length of 111m
(incl. dolphins).
LNG, breakbulk, and multipur-
South 96m 8.0-14.0m 77m — 13.9m —
pose.
Skalevikveien Terminal
Ro-pax, breakbulk, and bun-
General Cargo 44m — — — — —
kers.
Chemicals and clean products.
Oil 80m — 228m 12.0m — 35,560 dwt
Displacement of 41,249 dwt.
Vaksdal Mill Terminal
Chemicals, animal feeds, flour,
Vaksdal 144m — 114m — 16.8m 6,412 dwt fish meal, macaroni products,
grain, and breakbulk.
Lille Florvaagoy
East 61m — 171m 8.0m — 19,304 dwt Closed.
Closed. Displacement of
West 85m — 203.9m 10.6m — —
47,000t.
Skarholmen Terminal
Clean products and bunkers.
No. 1 75m 12m 200m 11.5m — 35,560 dwt
47,000t.
No. 2 40m 11m 140m 9.3m — 32,000 dwt Clean products and bunkers.
Bergen—Contact Information
Port Authority Port Control
Call sign — Bergen Port Control
VHF — VHF channels 12 and 16
47-55-568980
47-55-568981
Facsimile 47-55-568986 47-55-321203
E-mail bergen.havn@bergen.kommune.no skolten.havnevakt@bergen.kommune.no
Anchorage is prohibited in Vagen and also W of the lighted

4.31 Sorfjorden (60°31'N., 5°22'E.), the southernmost of the in-
buoy in the entrance to Vagen. ner fjords, is entered between Hammersnes (60°33'N.,
5°20'E.) and Hordvikneset, about 2 miles to the SW. Depths in
Inner Fjords Northeast of Bergen the fairway exceed 183m, except for 1.25 miles in the NE part
where it narrows, the depth is 12.8 to 33m.
4.32 Osteroy, a large island, lies about 6 miles NE of Ber- The few shoal areas lie close offshore and the entire fjord is
4.32
gen. The island is completely shut in by the mainland and is well marked by lights. It has been reported an overhead cable,
encircled by Sorfjorden and Osterfjorden. Both of these fjords with a vertical clearance of 60m, spans the fjord about 5 miles
have deep fairways and have comparatively few dangers. within the entrance.
Sorfjordskallen (60°32'N., 5°19'E.), a shoal area with numer- Votloy (60°28'N., 5°28'E.), an islet, lies about 6 miles within
4.32
ous dangerous rocks, lies towards the mouth of both Sorfjorden the entrance near the middle of the fjord. A light is shown on
and Osterjorden, and may best be seen on the chart. the islet.
Pub. 182
4.31 By Jan’s fotoside, via Wikimedia Commons

4.31 Vagen in Bergen, Norway from Mount Floyen
4.31 By Bjoertvedt (own work), via Wikimedia Commons

4.31 Dokkeskjaerskaien (foreground) looking W toward Puddefjorden
Pub. 182
Arnavag, which branches S from Sorfjorden, is entered 0.5

4.32 connecting the N end of Sorfjorden with Romarheimsfjord.
mile SSW of Votloy. There are a number of quays for small The fairway through Mellesdalsund is deep and clear of dan-
4.33
vessels inside the entrance to Arnavag. gers. Romarheimsfjord, entered between Langeneset and the E
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 53m, crosses
4.32 side of Haukoy, leads 3 miles NE to Mofjorden, which continues
Sorfjorden about 3 miles SE of Votloy. NE for another 6.5 miles. Osterfjorden is entered between Ham-
Vaksdal (60°29'N., 5°44'E.) (World Port Index No. 23140),
4.32 mersnes and a mainland point, about 2 miles to the W. The fjord
an industrial center, is located on the E side of Sorfjorden, ENE trends in a general NE direction for about 13 miles and joins the S
of the light on the islet of Ulsnesoy. Large vessels can berth at end of Romereimsfjord. Fairway depths through the fjord are am-
the largest quay, which is 145m long, with depths of 7 to 21m ple and the fjord is clear. The only dangers are found within the
alongside. There are several small quays in the port. side inlets and coves or lie within 183m of the sides of the fjord.
Vessels bound for the port must first call at Bergen for cus-
4.32
toms clearance and a pilot. A conspicuous mill and silo stand 4.34 Lonevagen (60°33'N., 5°27'E.), on the SE side of Os-
in the vicinity of the quay. terfjorden, is entered 3 miles ENE of Hammersnes and extends
Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained by small
4.32 about 3 miles SE. The entrance is narrowed to a width of 183m
vessels in Veavik, on the W side of Sorfjorden, 4.5 miles N of by submerged rocks, marked on the NE side of the entrance by
the entrance to Dalevagen. Stamneshella, on the N side of an iron perch.
Vikafjorden close within the entrance, is an anchorage with On the SE side of Osterfjorden, small vessels can anchor in
4.34
mooring rings W and E of the main quay, which is 64m long Lonevagen between some islets and the W entrance point;
and has depths of up to 5m alongside. however, submarine cables are laid N and S of the anchor
Good anchorage can be obtained by small vessels in
4.32 berth, requiring local knowledge. The inlet has several quays,
Kallandsbukt close NE of Kallandsholmen, in depths of 10 to with depths of from 3 to 5m alongside.
18m, sand. At Ostereidet, on the NW side of Osterfjorden, there is an-
4.34
chorage for small vessels W of a quay, which has a depth of 3m

4.33 Eidsfjorden (60°43'N., 5°47'E.) trends NNE for alongside.
about 3.25 miles from the N end of Sorfjorden. It is narrow At Kleppsvag, on the S side of Osterfjorden, good anchorage
4.34
and, except for a shoal lying within 1 mile of its head, has fair- is available to small vessels at its head, in depths of 20 to 30m;
way depths of 30 to 106m. The depths close offshore are beit has mooring rings. There is a rock, awash, near the middle of
tween 12.8 and 20.1m. the entrance to this inlet.
Mellesdalsund is the winding channel leading in a general
4.33 There are a number of other anchorages for small vessels in
4.34
NW direction for about 3 miles on the N side of Osteroy and Osterfjorden that can best be seen on the chart.
Pub. 182
93
5.
Sector 5—Norway—Fedje to Alesund
5.0
Pub. 182
95
SECTOR 5
NORWAY—FEDJE TO ALESUND
5.0Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Fedjeosen topography, the amount of precipitation in one area may differ
N to the approaches to Alesund. The Indreleia, or Inner Route, considerably from another area within a short proximity.
from Fedje to Alesund, is also described, as are the various 5.1Snow usually begins in October. It is most frequent in March
fjords along this route. and infrequent in April and May. There is no snowfall from
June to August along the coast.
General Remarks 5.1Snowstorms at the approaches to fjords and around the off-
shore islands may cause hazards to coastal vessels due to poor
5.1 Winds—Weather.—The direction and strength of the visibility and to ice forming on the superstructure as wet snow
winds in any period in this sector are controlled by the prevail- freezes.
ing depression track. The average wind strength is 11 to 27 5.1Fog is most common with mild S to SW winds. The highest
knots, but about 10 per cent of observations reach 34 to 40 frequency of fog occurs over the sea in summer. Coastal areas
knots. exposed to those winds are often obscured, but visibility over
5.1Most of the strong gale force winds are from S and tend to water is normally improved when the wind veers.
follow the direction of the coastline. The frequency of gales in- 5.1Most fog in the approaches to the fjords occurs in summer,
creases in the N. with the penetration of sea fog varying according to the degree
5.1Winds are lighter from May to August. The direction is more of exposure to onshore winds. Sea fog offshore may drift over
variable at this time, with more frequent N winds tending to the coastline with the sea breeze as the land began to cool in
follow the coastline. the evening. Better visibility is found on the lee side of the land
5.1During gale force winds, a shift of the wind from S or SW to barriers.
NW or N is liable to raise a heavy sea. 5.1Radiation fog often forms over low-lying land at the head of
5.1The unusual irregularities of the coastal topography cause fjords, mostly during long clear winter nights.
large variations in the direction and strength of the wind. 5.1Arctic sea smoke or frost smoke may form temporarily over
5.1Deflection and funneling increase onshore winds above the the inner part of the fjord when extremely cold air drifts over
average strength. Severe katabatic squalls come down from relatively warmer water on winter nights.
steep mountain slopes and cause local hazards, with little 5.1Visibility is seriously restricted in snow, heavy rain, or thick
warning of their approach. drizzle. Good visibility prevails over the region for most of the
5.1There is a marked tendency for the wind to blow out of the time in all seasons. Mirages are reported along the coast at
fjords toward the open sea in winter and into the fjords in sum- times.
mer; however, the chain of offshore islands reduces the wind 5.1Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents may be very much
strength in some sections of the coast. influenced by the winds and floods; in turn they may influence
5.1South of Ytteroyane, the weather conditions on the coast are the general flow along the coast.
frequently unsettled and stormy during the autumn, winter, and 5.1In the narrower channels between the islands, the tidal cur-
spring. The least rainfall is in spring and summer, and the visi- rent often runs with considerable strength; because of strong
bility is generally good at that time. The heaviest fog occurs currents great caution must be exercised by vessels navigating
during the summer months. in Indreleia, the passage along the coast inside the off-lying is-
5.1The weather during autumn, winter and spring, on the coast lands and reefs.
between Ytteroyane and Alesund, is frequently unsettled and 5.1Due to the constant coastal current, the NE flood current is
stormy also. At sea, the prevailing wind during this period is usually stronger; during the rising tide there may be a set to-
SW; however, close to land SE and E winds prevail. During the ward the islands and reefs.
summer, the wind is most frequently from N to NE. The least 5.1The velocity and direction of tidal currents, including tempo-
rainfall and the clearest weather will be found during the spring rary wind influences, are described with specific fairways and
and the greatest amount of fog occurs during the summer. In ports, as required.
many of the fjords on this part of the coast, heavy squalls will 5.1During settled weather, the tidal currents on the coast be-
be experienced from off, and in the vicinity of hills. tween Ytteroyane and Alesund set NE with the rising tide and
5.1During the winter months, S winds prevail, changing to N in SW with the falling tide, attaining their greatest velocity at a
the summer. Most rain is generally accompanied with SW distance of 30 to 50 miles from the coast. During continuous W
winds. winds, the tidal currents set constantly NE with considerable
5.1The amount of rain along this coast varies. The wettest plac- velocity, especially during the rising tide.
es are those nearest to high mountains. Greater amounts occur 5.1On this part of the coast, the tidal currents set more strongly
at higher levels inland. and constantly NE than in the opposite direction, especially at
5.1The period from September to January is the wettest while the distance from land mentioned above.
the period from April to early June is the driest. There is no set 5.1Statthavet has long been known as an area with very severe
pattern of variations from normal in any particular month. The weather, and many have identified the area as dangerous. The
total amount of rainfall varies from year to year. Because of the depths vary from approximately 60 to 150m.
Pub. 182
96 Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund
5.1It is indicated that winds, especially from the SW to N, cre- The South Cormorant Oil Field lies 18 miles WNW of Brent
5.2
ate rough seas. In those circumstances, the waves go straight in Oil Field.
from the sea. The current in the waterway has been estimated at
between 2 and 4 knots and when the ocean waves meet it,
strong, steep waves develop and the swell becomes choppy.
5.1Pilotage.—Kvitsoy Pilot Center organizes and engages pi-
lots along the W coast of Norway from Egersund in the S lead-
ing N to the parallel of 65°08'N. Pilots should be requested 24
hours in advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior
to arrival at the pilot station.
5.1See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Ocean for further information.
5.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
mation, see paragraph 1.1.
5.1The Kinn VTS area, which is best seen on the chart, covers
mostly the inner fairways, however, it also extends out to the
Norwegian baseline from Krakenes in the N, and S along the
baseline to the SW of the island of Kinn. The VTS extends fur- By JanChr [CC BY-SA 2.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/b-sa/2.0)]
5.2
ther S from here all the way to where it merges with the Fedje 5.2 Gullfaks Alpha
VTS. Vessels must report to Kinn VTS on VHF channel 18 up-
on entering the VTS Area. 5.2North Cormorant Oil Field (61°15'N., 1°09'E.), with a pro-
duction platform, is situated about 19 miles NW of Brent Oil
Field and 64 miles NE of Muckle Flugga Light (Shetland Is-
Kinn VTS—Contact Information
lands).
Call sign Kinn VTS 5.2Tern Oil Field, Eide Oil Field, and Osprey Oil Field lie 7
VHF VHF channels 16 and 18 miles WNW, 7 miles N, and 6 miles NE, respectively, of North
Comorant Oil Field.
47-70-231123 5.2Statfjorden Oil Field (61°15'N., 1°51'E.) is situated about
Telephone 47-95-289332 78 miles WNW of Utvaer Light and 7 miles NNE of Brent Oil
Field. There are three production platforms and two SPM load-
8816-214-19004 (Iridium) ing platforms in the field. In addition, there is an offshore load-
E-mail vts.kinn@kystverket.no ing system (UKOLS), by which a tanker is moored to a
subsurface buoy. The largest drilling rig in the world, the Stat-
fjord C can be found in the vicinity of this oil field.
For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
Gullfaks Oil Field (61°12'N., 2°12'E.), with two platforms
5.1
5.2
(TSS) in Norwegian waters, including off Runde and Stadland-

and two loading systems, lies 10 miles ESE of Statfjorden Oil
et, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
Field. Dunlin Oil Field and Snorre Oil Field lie about 7 miles
Ocean.
W and 18 miles NNE, respectively, of Statfjorden Oil Field.
Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Magnus Oil Field (61°37'N., 1°20'E.) lies about 97 miles W
5.1
5.2
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

of Ytteroyane Light and 28 miles NW of Statfjorden Oil Field.
A very large production platform stands in the field.
Off-lying Dangers 5.2Don Oil Field lies 11 miles SE of Magnus Oil Field. Thistle
Oil Field and Deveron Oil Field, close W, lie 17 miles SSE of
5.2 Alwyn North Oil Field (60°48'N., 1°44'E.) is situated
Mangnus Oil Field.
86 miles W of Holmengra Light, about midway between the
5.2Gjoa Oil and Gas Field (61°20.8'N., 3°53.6'E.) is marked
coast of Norway and the Shetland Islands. A drilling and ac-
by a semi-submersible floating production platform located ap-
commodations platform and a production platform stand in the
proximately 31 miles NE of the Troll Field (see paragraph 4.2).
field.
Several obstruction areas, best seen on the chart, lie to the NE
Ninian Oil Field (60°51'N., 1°28'E.), with three production
at a distance of 4.5 and 6.2 miles. Mariners should always nav-
5.2
platforms, is located 8 miles NW of Alwyn Field. Lyell Oil

igate with and abundance of caution, when transiting approxi-
Field and Heather Oil Field lie about 8 and 15 miles, respec-
mate to any North Sea oil field, due to potential charted and
tively, NW of Ninian Oil Field. In 2018 the Ninian North Plat-
uncharted hazards.
form was undergoing decommissioning.
Brent Oil Field (61°05'N., 1°43'E.) is situated 82 miles W
Fedje to Utvaer
5.2
of Utvaer Light and about 15 miles N of Alwyn North Field.

The Brent Oil Field has reached the end of its life cycle with
5.3 From the island of Fedje (60°46'N., 4°43'E.), the N
decommissioning beginning in 2017.
Pub. 182
Sector 5. Norway—Fedje to Alesund 97
entrance point to Fedjeosen, the channel at the N approach to miles NW of Holmengra.

Bergen, the coast trends about 19 miles NNW to Utvaer Light. Fedjefjorden lies to the SE, and Fensfjorden lies to the E of
5.4
Utvaer Light is located on one of the larger islets of the NW Holmengra, and leads for a distance of about 25 miles.
group of Utvaer Islets. This part of the coast is indented by Sognesjoen, the approach to Sognefjorden from seaward,
5.4
Sognesjoen, a deep and unencumbered passage leading S of leads about 15 miles NE from the S end of Ytre Sula, an island
Utvaer and then E to Sognefjorden. about 9 miles N of Holmengra, and E of Utvaer. Small islets lie
Between Utvaer Light and Ytteroyane Light, about 33 miles off the entrance to Sognesjoen farther N.
NNE, the coast is fronted by islands and rocky islets; the conti- The approach to Indreleia or the fjords in this vicinity N of
5.4
nuity of the inner passage is interrupted, in places, by channels Holmengra is usually done by keeping in mid-channel between
leading directly in from the open sea to Indreleia. Holmengra Light and the light over Bergskallen.
The Ytteroyene group of islands lies within the vicinity of
Ytteroyan Light. Ytteroyan Light is abreast the port of Floro.
5.3Between Buelandet, a group of about 350 islands, islets, and
skerries about 15 miles N of Utvaer Light, and Ytteroyane,
there are many banks, with depths of 18.3 to 27m, which are
dangerous in bad weather. Under these conditions, there is a
confused sea within the 200m curve. In this area the off-lying
islets are thickly interspersed with rocks completely or nearly
awash. Unless a vessel is standing in to enter one of the fjords,
it is advisable to navigate at least 10 miles W of the larger is-
lands.
5.3North of Ytteroyan Light, the coast trends for about 40 miles
to the NW end of Stadttlandet, one of the most remarkable
promontories on the coast of Norway. This coast is also fronted
by islands, islets, and rocks. Indreleia is reached through a
number of channels within this area. Except when making one
of the fjords, it is advisable to keep an offing of at least 10
miles W of the larger islands.
5.3Between Buholmen Light at Stadttlandet and the approach
By Gunnar Buvik, via Wikimedia Commons
channels leading to Breisund and Alesund, the outer coast 5.4
trends about 25 miles in a NE direction. The coast is indented 5.4 Holmengra Light
by a number of fjords and again the mainland is fronted by ma-
ny islands, islets, and dangerous rocks. The islands are high At night, enter and keep in the white sector of Grimeskjaret
5.4
and steep on the seaward side, and the mainland backing them Light (60°51'N., 4°45'E.), bearing between 092° and 104°,
is also high. In places, the dangers extend a considerable dis- which leads between Holmengra and Bergskallen. A racon is
tance seaward from the islands. When Breisund is approached, located at the light tower.
it will appear as a conspicuous and fairly wide opening.
5.3The main channel of Indreleia, leading N between the N ap- 5.5 Pollatind (61°06'N., 4°52'E.), 542m high, situated on
proach to Bergen and the port of Floro, continues from Fedjeo- Sula about 11 miles ENE of Utvaer, is conspicuous. It rises
sen through Sognesjoen and then through Krakhellesund to gradually from a base which extends about 3 miles in a N-S di-
Atleoy and Vilnaesfjorden. rection.
5.3From Atleoy, there are alternative routes available to vessels 5.5On the island of Alden, about 13 miles NNW of Pollatind, a
of moderate size; the W route passes W of Atleoy, while the E conspicuous saddle-shaped hill stretching E and W rises to a
route continues through Granesund at the inner end of Vilnaes- height of 480m. This hill can be seen in clear weather at a dis-
fjorden. These routes unite to the N at Stavenes Light, and the tance of 32 to 40 miles. Alden will be immediately recognized
track then leads N to Floro. as an island.
5.5Fensfjorden is entered between Rongevaer (60°49'N.,
5.4 From offshore, between Fedje and Utvaer, Sognesjoen 4°47'E.), 1.75 miles SSE of Grimeskjeret Light, and Roytingja,
appears as a wide opening in the land. an island 2.25 miles NNE.
5.4Utvaer, 30m high, and the islets close E are low, but farther E 5.5Fensfjorden presents no difficulties to navigation, but vessels
the islands of Sula are high and conspicuous, and appear to be should give both shores a fair berth and the dangers near the
a promontory of the mainland. entrance must be avoided. This fjord extends E and SE for 15
Vessels approaching the coast, intending to enter Indreleia or miles, then becomes Austfjorden, which continues SE for 15
the fjords N of Fedjeosen, usually stand N of Holmengra miles; it forms the approach to Mongstad Oil Terminal. From
Light (60°51'N., 4°39'E.), about 4 miles N of Fedje. The island the outer part of the fjord, several passes lead N to Sognesjoen;
is small and relatively high. The light tower is 16m high and is from its inner part Masfjorden branches NE for 12 miles. Hind-
equipped with a radiobeacon and a racon. Rocks, above and nesfjorden and Vagane are arms which branch S from Aust-
below-water, extend about 1 mile W from the island. About 2 fjorden.
miles NNW is Bergskallen, a rock covered by 17m of water. 5.5Krakeflui, Mefjordbaen, and Boskallane are three shoals ly-
This sunken rock is the farthest S of a chain extending about 5 ing in the fairway of the entrance to Fensfjorden; they lie 0.8
Pub. 182
mile W, 1 mile WSW, and 1 mile SW, respectively, from When requesting sailing clearance for the VTS area, the
5.6
Grimeskjeret Light. message should include the following information:

Rongevaerskallen (60°50'N., 4°46'E.), 0.9 mile SSE of
5.5 1. Vessel name and call sign.
Grimeskjeret Light, has a least depth of 6m. 2. Sailing Plan and destination.
Fringing dangers, branch inlets, and the lights of Fensfjorden
5.5 3. ETA at the outer limit of the VTS area and the ETA at
can best be seen on the chart. the port, mooring, or anchorage—for vessels located outside
the operational area of the VTS.
Fedje Vessel Traffic Service 4. ETD from the VTS area—for vessels inside the area.
5. Any other information requested by the VTS, such as
5.6 The Fedje Vessel Traffic Service (VTS) is in opera- vessel type, nationality, and port of registration.
tion in the approaches to Mongstad and Sture Oil Terminals. Vessels should send position reports to Fedje VTS, as fol-
5.6
Participation is compulsory for the following vessels: lows:

1. Vessels with a length of 24m or greater (vessels push- 1. When passing the limits of the VTS area when head-
ing another vessel and vessels that are pushed are considered ing into the VTS area.
a single vessel). 2. When passing between VHF channel sectors.
2. Vessels towing an object that is longer or wider than 3. Before moving with the VTS area (leaving the wharf,
24m. berth, or mooring facility).
3. Vessels involved in towing operations where the total 4. When being towed.
length exceeds 35m. 5. When at anchor.
4. Vessels carrying dangerous and/or polluting liquid 6. When involved in an accident.
cargo in bulk, irrespective of length. 7. Immediately if the vessel is in difficulty and likely to
5.6The VTS area is bounded by lines joining the following posi- result in a change of voyage plan.
tions: All vessels must maintain a continuous listening watch on
5.6
a. 60°40'31.2''N, 4°47'42.6''E. (Rubbegamstana Light) the appropriate VHF channel for the area. All communication
b. 60°40'31.2''N, 4°26'00.0''E. with the VTS shall be in a Scandinavian language or, if not us-
c. 60°56'51.0''N, 4°18'00.0''E. ing a pilot, in English.
d. 60°56'51.0''N, 4°45'45.0''E. (Sogneoksen Light)
e. 60°56'45.0''N, 4°57'12.0''E. (Spafoten Light) Fedje VTS—Contact Information
f. 60°48'00.0''N, 5°11'18.0''E. (Terneskjaeret Light)
g. 60°46'24.0''N, 5°09'42.0''E. (Langoyna Light) Fedge VTS
h. 60°50'03.0''N, 4°48'24.0''E. (Northernmost Kjorhol- E-mail fedje.vts@kystverket.no
men)
Northern Sector
i. 60°47'09.6''N, 4°47'50.4''E. (Senuksen Light)
j. 60°30'00.0''N, 5°07'36.4''E. VHF VHF channels 16 and 80
k. 60°24'30.0''N, 5°15'05.0''E. (Oyarodden Light)
47-56-164432
l. 60°23'42.0''N, 5°15'55.0''E. (Gravdalsneset) Telephone
m. 60°21'00.0''N, 5°13'22.0''E. 47-56-676920
n. 60°17'31.0''N, 5°12'03.0''E. (Fleslandgrunnen Light) Southern Sector
o. 60°11'55.0''N, 5°15'01.0''E. (Blia Bank)
p. 60°09'58.0''N, 5°11'25.0''E. (Eldjarnet Light) VHF VHF channels 16 and 71
q. 60°08'08.0''N, 5°02'31.0''E. (Skjeljaboskaget Light) 47-56-164430
r. 60°05'41.0''N, 4°57'14.0''E. Telephone
s. 60°09'17.0''N, 4°56'07.0''E. 47-56-676920
t. 60°09'17.0''N, 5°00'23.0''E. (Tekslo Light)
u. 60°10'15.0''N, 5°06'40.0''E. (Ystaskjer Light) 5.7 Mongstad (60°49'N., 5°02'E.) (World Port Index No.
v. 60°12'15.0''N, 5°10'07.0''E. (Bornestangen Light) 23138) is a coastal port situated on the S shore of Fensfjorden,
w. 60°40'44.0''N, 4°47'38.0''E. (Rubbegarnstana Light) about 8 miles within its entrance. It is the site of a refinery and
5.6All vessels carrying dangerous cargoes or pollutant cargoes is designed to handle incoming crude and to load the finished
are required, as far as is possible, to navigate within the limits products. The port is approached through the channel N of
of the fairways. Such vessels should report their ETA at the Holmengra and from the channel SSE of Fedje.
limit of the operational area 6 hours in advance. 5.7Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Mongstad termi-
5.6The VTS area is divided into two sectors as follows: nal in Fensfjorden have, in general, a constant W set, but unset-
1. Northern Sector—North of Jona Light (latitude tled winds may cause them to set E.
60°31'12.6''N). 5.7Depths—Limitations.—Maximum vessels accommodated
2. Southern Sector—South of Jona Light. are up to 440,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 380m, a
5.6All vessels wishing to navigate within the VTS area must re- maximum draft of 25m,and a maximum beam of 60m, can be
quest sailing clearance from the Fedje VTS at least 1 hour be- accommodated. For more berthing details see the accompany-
fore their arrival at the limit of this area. This requirement ing table titled Mongstad—Berth Information.
includes vessels intending to leave a quay, berth, or mooring 5.7Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 4,000
within the VTS area. gross tons carrying dangerous cargo to and from the terminal.
Pub. 182
Pilots board, as follows: 5. Vessels over 30,000 gross tons carrying hazardous or
a. Fedjeosen No. 2—position 60°44.1'N, 4°44.0'E. polluting cargo to the terminal:
2. Fedjefjorden No. 3—position 60°45.7'N, 4°46.1'E (by a. West Fedje—in position 60°46.0'N, 4°27.9'E (Pi-
appointment only). lot transfer by helicopter, if required).
3. Holmengra No. 2—position 60°51.4'N, 4°39.0'E. h. West Holmengra—in position 60°51.0'N, 4°25.9'E
4. Fensfjorden No. 3—position 60°51.4'N, 4°45.2'E (by (Pilot transfer by helicopter, if required).
appointment only).
Mongstad—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Equinor Mongstad
Crude Oil
124m 26.6m 350m 23.0m 60.0m 380,000 dwt Clean products, crude, and bunkers.
Jetty No. 1
Berthing length: 210m (incl.
Jetty No. 7 100m 20.6m 285m 19.7m 53.0m 180,00 dwt Dolphins). Crude, dirty products, and
bunkers.
LPG, peatcoke, and multipurpose.
Jetty No. 4 50m 8.9m 119.2m 8.4m 18.2m 7,000 dwt Berthing length of 70m (including
Dolphins).
Breakbulk. Used for harbor service
Jetty No. 11 62m — — — — —
vessels.
Coal, peatcoke, breakbulk, and
Jetty No. 12 50m — 99.9m — 15.8m 5,000 dwt
bunkers.
Dedicated as STS transfer jetty.
Jetty No. 14 131m 28.0m 380m 25m 60.0m 440,000 dwt Capable of handing up to 127,000
dwt shuttle tanker for STS transfer.
Product Jet- Aviation fuel, petroleum products,
70m 17.5m 255m 14.5m 45.0m 119,456 dwt
ty No. 2 and bunkers.
Product Jet-
38m 7.4m 130m 6.5m 17.8m 7,000 dwt Petroleum products, and bunkers.
ty No. 3
Aviation fuel, petroleum products,
Product Jet-
80m 17.3m 235m 16.4m 40.0m 75,571 dwt and bunkers. Berthing length of
ty No. 8
Product Jet-
80m 17.3m 235m 16.4m 36.6m 50,000 dwt LPG, and bunkers. Berthing length
ty No. 9
of 260m (including dolphins).
No. 10 100m 6.8m 151.5m — 25.4m 10,000 dwt Breakbulk.
No. 10 Ro-
54m 10.3m 60m 10.3m — 10,000 dwt Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
Ro
Mongstad Base
Offshore vessels, steel products,
BOH Quay 82m 11.6m 159.8m — 24.0m 150,000 dwt breakbulk, and reefer. Used as lay
berth.
No. 1A 75m 10.4m 118.9m — 18.5m 8,363 dwt
Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore vessels,
No. 1B 75m 10.4m 103.6m — 16.6m 6,005 dwt breakbulk, and bunkers. Continuous
berthing length of 225m.
No. 1C 75m 10.4m 117.3m — 19.7m 8,388 dwt
Pub. 182
Mongstad—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
No. 2 140m 9.7m 88.1m — 12.4m 3,697 dwt Continuous berthing length of 338m.
No. 3 90m 10.6m 117.3m — 18.7m 8,051 dwt Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore vessels,
breakbulk, and bunkers. Loading and
No. 4 108m 10.1m 100.9m — 18.7m 5,850 dwt discharge ream at N end of Berth No.
2.
Ro-ro/lo-lo, offshore vessels, break-
No. 5 97m 13.1m 101.7m — 18.7m 5,850 dwt
bulk, and bunkers. Used as lay berth.
5.7 By Dag Erik Hagesaeter [CC BY-SA 3.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
Mongstad Base and Oil Refinery
5.7
5.7Pilots should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be or- lights, disposed vertically, at night, to indicate that other ves-
dered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an addition- sels must not impede their navigation.
al cost. 5.7In addition, tankers may use a sound signal of one long blast,
5.7Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA 72 hours in ad- followed by two short blasts at any time.
vance and confirm their arrival 48 hours and 24 hours prior to 5.7All vessels underway, anchored, or at a quay within the lim-
arrival. its of the operational area should maintain a continuous listen-
5.7The 72-hour ETA should contain the following information: ing watch on VHF channels 16 and 80.
1. Bunkers required. 5.7Contact Information.—See the table titled Mongstad—
2. Cash transactions. Contact Information.
3. Personnel.
4. Bonded stores. Mongstad—Contact Information
5. Any special requirements.
6. Information required for the refinery’s guidance. Call sign Mongstad Port Control
5.7Tankers of 40,000 tons or more, when within territorial wa- VHF VHF channels 11, 12, and 16
ters, display a black cylinder by day and exhibit three red
Pub. 182
Mongstad—Contact Information about 7 miles NNE of Holmengra. The fairway is deep and has
a least width of 1.75 miles.
47-56-344660
Facsimile
47-56-344729
Telex STATOIL MONGSTAD
Anchorage.—Anchorage for Mongstad is available in Fon-

5.7
nesflaket, W of Havarden. Permission should be requested via

the Fedje VTS Center; further instruction may be obtained
from the pilot.
5.8 Fedjefjorden, the continuation of Indreleia to the

NNW from Bergen, leads E of Fedje to Fensfjorden and is free
from dangers in the fairway. The NE side of the channel should
be avoided as rocks extend about 0.7 mile offshore.
5.8The E side of Fedje is free from dangers at a distance of
about 183m.
5.8Ytre Langoyflui (60°47'N., 4°49'E.), on the E side of the 5.9 By Per Olav Boyum, via Wikimedia Commons
fjord, about 2 miles ENE of the E extremity of Fedje, has a 5.9 Sognefjorden
depth of 3m or less, and is marked on its N end by an iron
perch. 5.9Storsvalene and Smasvalene are two groups of islets and
5.8The lights and dangers in the fjord may best be seen on the rocks lying off the SW entrance to Sognesjoen. The S end of
chart. Storsvalene lies about 6 miles N of Holmengra Light; the two
5.8Vetegjograskjaer Light (60°49'N., 4°45'E.), 2.5 miles NNE groups then extend about 2 miles N.
of Fedje Light, stands at the NE end of Fedjefjorden. 5.9An island, in position 60°56'N, 4°37'E, and marked by a bea-
5.8Directions.—When a vessel desires to pass through Indrelia con, lies near the S end of Storsvalene.
N of Fedjefjorden, vessels pass W of a 1.8m patch, marked by 5.9At the S end of the approach to Sognesjoen, on the E side,
an iron perch, situated 0.25 mile WNW of Vetegjo Graskjaer are numerous islands, islets, and rocks.
Light; W of the dangers lying W of Grimeskjeret Light; and 5.9Mebaen (60°54'N., 4°42'E.), an unmarked danger with
then into the W end of Fensfjorden. depths of less than 1.8m, is the farthest W of these dangers. It
5.8From the W end of Fensfjorden, the deep water track leads lies about 3 miles NNE of Holmengra Light. A similar un-
about 15 miles N to Sognesjoen, which leads to Sognefjorden. marked danger lies about 0.2 mile N of Mebaen. These dangers
5.8Vessels desiring to pass through Indrelia N of Fedjefjorden, are covered by the red sector of Sogneuksen Light.
pass W of the 1.8m patch, described above, and then into Fens- 5.9When approaching Sognesjoen from the WSW, the most
fjorden, continuing N at the outer end of that fjord. prominent visible feature is the 722m high mountain Brosvik-
5.8From the NW end of Fensfjorden, Indreleia passes W of sata (61°02'N., 5°10'E.). There is a conspicuous radio mast on
Roytingkalven (60°52'N., 4°47'E.), marked on its SW side by the mountain. The mast is over 50m in height.
a light, and E of a light about 0.2 mile W of Roytingkalven 5.9Kvaereknapp (60°59'N., 4°42'E.) is the S extremity of Ytre
Light. A rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, marked by an iron Sula. This extremity, on the N side of Sognesjoen, is marked by
perch, lies on the W side of the preferred channel, 0.3 mile NW a light.
of Roytingkalven Light. 5.9Storholmen (61°01'N., 4°47'E.) and some smaller islets and
5.8After passing the above rock, the track leads in a general N rocks lie within 0.5 mile S of Tungodden, the S extremity of
direction, passing W of the light on Sogneuksen (60°57'N., Steinsundoy, 2.75 miles NE of Kvaereknapp. These dangers
4°46'E.), into Sognesjoen, the broad deep channel forming the are covered by the green sector of Sogneuksen Light.
E continuation of Indreleia. 5.9Guleskjer, situated 1.75 miles NNE of Storholmen, is an
5.8An alternative track from Fensfjorden to Sognesjoen turns N above-water rock in the middle of the entrance to a fjord that is
at Vikingneset (60°51'N., 4°56'E.), the SE extremity of mostly foul.
Byrknesoy, and then passes between the island of Mjomna on 5.9Gronholmen (61°02'N., 4°53'E.) lies close off the SW end
the W and Sandoy on the E, about 2 miles NNE of the light on of Nesoy. A light is exhibited on Gronholmen.
Vikingneset. 5.9A light is exhibited on the SE point of Sula, 2 miles ENE of
5.8A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 30m, connects Mjomna Gronholmen.
and Sandoy, about 3.4 miles NNE of the light on Vikingneset.
5.8Caution.—Vessels crossing the cautionary area for VLCC, 5.10 Rossoy (60°59'N., 4°48'E.), situated on the S side of
from seaward of Holmengra into Fensfjorden, must not impede Sognesjoen, 2.5 miles NNE of Sogneuksen Light, is marked by
vessels displaying signals required of tankers of 40,000 tons a lighted beacon. The dangers S of Rossoy are covered by the
and larger. red sector of Sogneuksen Light bearing more than 197°.
Bunesholmane is situated 1 mile ENE of Rossoy Light and
5.10
5.9 Sognesjoen (60°52'N., 4°40'E.) extends about 17 Hamnesholmen is situated about 0.3 mile farther E. A rock,
miles NE to its junction with Sognefjorden, from a position marked by an iron perch, lies 183m N of Hamnesholmen.
Pub. 182
A beacon stands on the NE end of Nord Glavaer, 1 mile ENE

5.10
of Hamnesholmen; it marks the W side of the N entrance to

Rossosen.
Dingenes (61°02'N., 5°02'E.), reported to be 4.5 miles ENE
5.10
of Nord Glovaer, is marked by a light.

Islets and rocks lie within 1.25 miles to 1.5 miles W and NW
5.10
of Dingenes Light. Stabben, the farthest N of these dangers,

has a depth of 1.5m, and is marked by an iron perch. These
dangers are covered by the green sector of Dingenes Light.
Rutletangen Light (61°05'N., 5°10'E.) is exhibited from the
5.10
NE point of Fjaeroy, about 6 miles NE of Dingenes. A beacon

stands on a rock close NW of the point.
Torsholmane are a group of dangers situated on two shoals
5.10
on the N side of Sognesjoen, within 1 mile SW of Hansneset

(61°07'N., 5°06'E.), the SE extremity of Losna.
When about 1 mile SSW of Kvaereknapp Light, shape a
5.10
course to pass about midway between Storholmen and Rossoy.

From this position, steer to keep in the white sector of
5.10
Krakeneset Light, until in a position about 1 mile SW of that

light, then steer to pass midway between Krakeneset Light and 5.11 Utvaer Light
Stabben.
From this position, steer in the white sector of Rutletangen
5.10 (61°11'N., 4°42'E.), the largest and highest of the islands, is
Light bearing between 068° and 102° until N of Stabben and 18m high,
then steer a mid-channel course between the light and Torshol- The waterway extending from Gasvaerosen N via Bue-
5.11
mane, and then into Sognefjorden, passing N and then SE of fjorden to the Geita Light can be dangerous. Winds especially
Rutletangen Light. from W to NW cause heavy seas in the area. Rough seas and
Caution.—The area extending from Holmengra to Sognes-
5.10 large waves come mainly in from the W, and the outgoing tidal
joen and to Rossoy is foul with many shoals. current of between 1 and 2 knots causes choppy swell. High
With an ebb tide, the current runs W. The outward current in
5.10 steep waves have been observed in this waterway.
Sognefjorden will increase significantly during the snowmelt
period and during periods of heavy precipitation, which is 5.12 Ospa (61°13'N., 4°45'E.), an island which rises to a
strongest on the N side of the fjord. height of 110m near its center, is situated on the S side of Bue-
Interaction between waves and current, as well as refraction
5.10 fjorden.
of waves over shallow areas, causes choppy seas. High, steep A light is located close off its NW side. This island is foul on
5.12
waves have been observed in the area. all sides, and rocks and shoals extend about 1 mile N from the
When nearing the land to the S of Utvaer, in clear weather,
5.10 island. The islands of Drevoy and Faeroy lie E of Ospa; naviga-
Eldsfjell will be seen farthest S. This is a high rounded hill on tion through the numerous shoals N of them is possible only
the island of Holsnoy rising to 324m, in a position about 31 with local knowledge.
miles SSE of Utvaer Light. Bulandet consists of over approximately 350 islands, islets,
5.12
and skerries. The landscape is gentle, low, and rich in vegeta-

Utvaer to Ytteroyane (including Floro) tion. It is located about 6 miles NNW of Gasvaer.
Foul ground extends 0.75 mile S and W from the islets. The
5.12
5.11 The lighthouses on Utvaer and Ytteroyane are 31m group of islets should not be approached without local knowl-
high and form good landmarks. Utvaer Light is equipped with edge.
a radiobeacon. Loftsteingrunnen, SW of Bulandet, is a group of shoals, with
5.12
From Utvaer Light (61°02'N., 4°31'E.), 12.5 miles NNW of depths of 15 to 17m, which can be dangerous in rough weather.
Holmengra Light, to Ytteroyane Light, a distance of about 33 Vvryygrunnen is a group of shoals, with depths of 23 to
5.12
miles, three fjords indent the coast. From S to N, these three 34m, which lies about 4 miles W of Buesteinane.
fjords are Buefjorden, Stavfjorden, and Rekstafjorden. Buesteinane is conspicuous with its black color and ragged
5.12
Buefjorden (61°15'N., 4°40'E.) is the open fjord which sepa-

5.11 peaks.
rates Ospa and Buelandet. The middle waters of the fjord are clear,
but on both the N and S sides rocks and shoals extend well out into 5.13 Sandoy Light (61°18'N., 4°36'E.) is exhibited on
the fjord. North of Buefjorden, from W to E, lies Buelandet, 41m Sandoyna and is easily identified by its close settlement and
high; Vaeroy, 163m high; and Alden, 480m high. the light on its highest peak.
To the S, at the N end of Ytre Sula, are numerous islets and
5.11 Vaeroy (61°18'N., 4°44'E.), 2.75 miles E of Sandoy Light, is
5.13
rocks, some of which are above water. At its end is Krakestein the principal island on the N side of Buefjorden; it attains a
Light. height of 163m, and its two round knolls, of about equal size,
Gasvaer, and the groups of islands in its vicinity, are low-ly-
5.11 resemble haycocks.
ing islands, islets, and rocks situated about 7 miles NE of Nor- Islets and rocks extend about 1 mile S of Vaeroy and three is-
5.13
dholmene, the farthest N of the Utvaer Islets. Gasvaer lands are located in the fairway SE of that island. Geita, the far-
Pub. 182
thest SE of these three islands, is marked by a light. rocks and a 4m patch, 0.3 mile SSE, are covered by the red sec-
Directions.—The light on Geita leads from seaward into Bue-
5.13 tor of Kinnasund Light, situated on the NE side of Kinn, bear-
fjorden, clear of the dangers, to within about 2 miles of the light. ing more than 167°.
Using the chart as the guide, no difficulty should be experienced in For vessels entering Sverslingosen from seaward, the 387m
5.15
passing E of Vaeroy and S of the light on Raudoy (61°18'N., height on Skorpa in line with Ertreskjeret bearing 079° will
4°55'E.), about 4 miles E of Vaeroy, then into Vilnesfjorden. The lead to a position about 0.4 mile N of Ternehaug Light; then
main track of Indreleia continues N from this fjord. change course to the NE to pass 0.2 mile N of Ertreskjeret.
From Ertreskjeret steer E until the white sector of Kinnasund
5.15
5.14 Svineflu (61°20'N., 4°33'E.), with a depth of 14m, Light bears between 157° and 167°, which course will lead to
lies at the seaward end of numerous rocks and shoals 3 miles the W end of Skorpefjorden.
NNW of Sandoy Light. Hasteinosen separates these dangers Skorpefjorden, an E continuation of the entrance from Svers-
5.15
from the N side of Buelandet and the NW side of Vaeroy. An lingosen, is formed between Skorpa and Ytre Annoya on the N
extensive reef, which is awash, lies 1.5 miles E of Svineflu. and Reksta and Nordre Nekkoya on the S. It extends about 5
Hasteinen, situated 4 miles NNE of Sandoy Light, is a dense
5.14 miles ENE.
group of small islets with many off-lying rocks. Flategrunnane (61°35'N., 4°50'E.), awash, lies on the S side
5.15
Teinegrunnen (61°24'N., 4°29'E.), with a least depth of 13m,

5.14 of the fairway, 0.4 mile S of the S extremity of Skorpa. It lies at
lies about 4 miles NNW of Svineflu. This depth is covered by the the W end of Hestholmane, which has another rock awash, 0.3
red sector of Sandoy Light bearing more than 151.5°. mile ENE of Flategrunnane.
Temba is a fishing ground, with a least depth of 13m, situat-
5.14 Klungreskjeret lies on the S side of the channel, 0.3 mile SW
5.15
ed 4 miles N of Teinegrunnen. of the SE extremity of Skorpa. A light marks the E end of foul
Stavfjorden (61°27'N., 4°53'E.) lies E of these dangers; the
5.14 ground 0.4 mile ENE of the SE end of Skorpa.
main track of Indreleia leads across this fjord, then through Foul ground lies on the S side of the fairway, about 183m S
5.15
Brufjorden to Floro. of Ytre Annoya.

Rekstafjorden is entered on the S side of Kinn (61°34'N.,
5.14 Annoyskjeret Light (61°36'N., 4°56'E.) is situated close off
5.15
4°46'E.) and can be approached from the offing by passing on the S side of Indre Annoya and about 0.2 mile E of Ytre An-
either side of Jonsgrunnfalla, by keeping in the white sector of noya.
the light on Sandoya. The white sectors of the light bearing be- To navigate between the dangers in Skorpefjorden from W to
5.15
tween 056° and 059°, and between 066° and 068°, lead S and E, bring the white sector of Annoyskjeret Light ahead, between
N of Jonsgrunnfalla, respectively. the bearings of about 074° and 077°. Pass S of that light into
Indreleia continues N from the inner end of Rekstafjorden, into
5.14 Indreliea, which leads N from Nekkoyosen.
Nekkoyosen.
5.16 Floro (61°36'N., 5°02'E.) (World Port Index No.
5.15 Sverslingosen, the channel between Ytteroyane 23130) is an administrative town, with its principal industries
(61°35'N., 4°41'E.) and Sverslingane, 1.25 miles N, should al- primarily associated with fishing.
ways be used when approaching Skorperfjorden. Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Floro is about 1m.
Hoydalsnakken, a 13m patch, lies at the outer end of a chain
5.15 Depths—Limitations.—The general depths in the harbor
5.16
of shoals extending 2 miles WSW from Ytteroyane. are 29 to 50m, although a 7.7m patch lies 0.15 mile ESE of
Havfluene, lying at the outer end of many shoals which ex-
5.15 Floro Light and a 6.4m patch lies about 160m farther E; the lat-
tend up to 3 miles WSW from Sverslingane, has a least depth ter patch is marked by a buoy. Inside the mole there are two
of 11m. rocks, with a depth of 2.6m over them, which lie close off-
Ternehaug (61°35'N., 4°41'E.), on the S side of the fairway,
5.15 shore, 183m E of the mole.
lies 0.3 mile NE of Ytteroyane; it is marked by a light. The port can accommodate vessels up to 50,000 dwt, with a
5.16
Ertreskjert, 0.8 mile NE of Ternehaug, is easily identified; it

5.15 maximum length of 250m and a maximum beam of32m. Sev-
lies on the NW edge of a group of islets and rocks which ex- eral quays used by the oil and gas service industry are located
tend 0.7 mile SE. E at Fjord Base (Botnaneset).
Kvitingane, above-water, and Kvitingsfalla, awash, lie in a
5.15 Fjord Base (Botnaneset) (61°36.7'N., 5°04.6'E.), a growing
5.16
group of shoals on the N side of the fairway 1.5 miles NE of oil and gas services complex, has several quays just E of Floro.
the light on Ternehaug. Berthing details for Floro and Fjord Base are shown in the
5.16
Skallefluene (61°35'N., 4°46'E.), on the NE side of the fair-

5.15 accompanying table titled Floro—Berthing Information.
way, 1 mile SE of Kvitingane, has depths of 2m or less. These
Floro—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Norwegian Sandstone Export SA (NSE)
Aggregates and breakbulk.
Loading Jetty 30m 12.0m 175m — 26.0m 50,000 dwt Berthing length of 180m (in-
cluding dolphins).
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Westcon Yard- Floro
Berth used as ship mainte-
North Quay 80m 13.0m — — — —
nance and repair quay.
Berth used as ship mainte-
Outfitting Quay 170m 5.0-8.0m — — — —
nance and repair quay.
Fjord Base
Chemicals, crude products,
cement, mineral ore, ro-ro/lo-
lo, container, offshore ves-
Quay A 95m 8.5m 150m — 20.8m 10,585 dwt
sels, breakbulk, barite, ben-
tonite, multipurpose, and
bunkers.
Chemicals, dirt products, ro-
Quay B 50m 17.0m 120m — 18.7m 6,005 dwt ro/lo-lo, offshore, breakbulk,
Chemicals, dirty products,
mineral ore, ro-ro/lo-lo, off-
Quay C 58m 8.3m 120m — 19.0m 6,700 dwt shore, barite, steel products,
breakbulk, multipurpose, and
bunkers.
LNG, containers, offshore
vessels, steel products, break-
Quay D 40m 8.5m 120m — 11.8m 2,500 dwt bulk, multipurpose, and bun-
kers. Berthing length of 63m
Containers, offshore vessels,
Quay E 100m 10.0m 200m — 32.0m 40,481 dwt steel products, breakbulk, and
reefers.
Chemicals, dirty products,
containers, offshore vessels,
Quay F 90m 9.2m 120m — 18.9m 10,745 dwt
breakbulk, multipurpose, and
bunkers.
Chemicals, containers, off-
shore vessels, project/heavy
cargo, steel products, break-
Quay G 150m 12.3m 250m — 28.0m 37,152 dwt bulk, and multipurpose. Quay
owned by Flora Hamn KF
and operated by Saga Fjord-
base AS.
Ro-ro/lo-lo. Vessels along-
side either bow/stern and will
Quay H 26m 7.7m 150m — 19.0m 6,700 dwt take up perpendicular space
along side the extension of
Quay C.
Offshore vessels, steel prod-
Quay L 100m 10.0m 120m — 26.0m 9,000 dwt
ucts, and breakbulk.
Floro Hamn
Quay A 55m 9.0m 67.3m — 11.4m 1,218 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Quay B 20m 12.0m — — — — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Dirty products, cruise ves-
sels, containers, offshore ves-
Quay C 140m 11.3m 140m — 22.6m 11,846 dwt sels, fishing vessels,
breakbulk, multipurpose,
bunkers, and reefers.
Dirty products, cruise, ro-ro/
lo-lo, container,s offshore,
Quay D 140m 10.7m 140m — 22.5m 11,193 dwt fishing vessels, breakbulk,
multipurpose, bunkers, and
reefers.
Dirty products, cruise ves-
sels, offshore vessels, fishing
Quay E 185m 8.0m 185m — 15.2m 4,632 dwt
vessels, breakbulk, multipur-
pose, bunkers, and reefers.
Bunkers. Berth used as wait-
ing quay and leased to Nor-
Quay F 20m 4.5m — — — —
wegian Coastal
Administration.
Quay G 58m 4.7m 27m — 8.8m — Ro/pax and bunkers.
Quay H 35m 3.8m — — — — Ro/pax and bunkers.
Ro-ro/lo-lo and bunkers. Ves-
sels alongside either bow/
Ro-Ro 16m 10.7m 81.8m — 16.0m 2,500dwt
stern will take up perpendicu-
lar space alongside Quay D.
Gunhildvagen
Chemicals, LNG, fishing ves-
EWOS Quay A 116m 10.0m 119.1m — 17.0m 7,124 dwt sels, breakbulk, and multipur-
pose.
Chemicals, animal feed,
limestone, fishing vessels, ro-
EWOS Quay B 70m 10.0m 117.3m — 18.0m 6,488 dwt
ro/lo-lo, breakbulk, and mul-
tipurpose.
Animal feed fishing vessels,
EWOS Quay C 85m 4.0m 94.9m — 16.0m 5,065 dwt
breakbulk, and reefers.
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
and reefers. Vessel usually
EWOS Quay D 43m 4.0m 89.9m — 13.7m 3,704 dwt berth alongside Quay C and
overhang over space along-
side Quay D.
Chemicals, ro-ro/lo-lo, fish-
ing, breakbulk, multipur-
EWOS Quay E 65m 10.0m 119.8m — 20.7m 7,124 dwt pose, and reefer. Berthing
length of 75m (including dol-
phins).
Norway Pelag-
Fishing vessels, breakbulk,
ic- Gunhild- 70m 9.0m 80m — 16.3m 2,900 dwt
and reefers.
vagen
Pub. 182
5.16 By Karennilsen [CC BY-SA 4.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

5.16 Fjord Base facing ESE towards the Norwegian mainland

5.16
Floro—Contact Information
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Telephone 47-57-756740
Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF
5.16
channel 16 about 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot boarding
position. Vessels that call on VHF channel 16 will be E-mail hamn@flora.kommune.no
connected to the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center via Floro or
Rogaland Coast Radio Station if the station does not respond. Anchorage.—Anchorage in Floro is charted about 0.1 mile
5.16
All direct communications with the pilots and the pilot ves-
5.16
NE of the mole. Depths in the anchorage are about 50m. An-
sel will take place on VHF channel 13. chorage can be taken in Arebrotsfjorden just N of Rota island,
Pilots board, as follows:
5.16
in depths from 8.8 to 49m.
1. Vessels over 30,000 gt or vessels with a freeboard
greater than 8m—position 61°43.0'N, 4°23.5'E. (via helicop- Ytteroyane to Stadlandet
ter by appointment)
2. West of Kvannhovden Light—position 61°42.2'N, 5.17 From Ytteroyane Light (61°35'N., 4°41'E.), the
4°45.5'E. coastline extends for about 40 miles in a N direction to the NW
3. In bad weather, by appointment: end of Stadlandet, one of the most remarkable promontories on
a. Hellefjorden—position 61°39.1'N, 4°51.2'E. the Norwegian coast.
b. Froysjoen—position 61°45.0'N, 4°56.6'E. The mainland is fronted by islands, islets, and rocks, which
5.17
Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA is required 24 hours before

5.16
lie up to 12 miles offshore, and is frequently interrupted by
arrival. channels leading from the open sea to Indreleia. There are no
Contact Information.—See the table titled Floro—Con-
5.16
off-lying islands or islets in the vicinity of Stadlandet. Except
tact Information. when making for one of the fjords, it is advisable to keep an
offshore distance of at least 10 miles W of the larger off-lying
Floro—Contact Information islands.
The principal fjords along this section of coast are, from S to
5.17
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 N, Hellefjorden, Froysjoen, Nordfjorden, Fafjorden, and Vags-
Pub. 182
fjorden; the latter two connect with Nordfjorden S of Stadland- Several shoals, which reportedly break in a swell, lie S of
5.19
et. Brunebaen. Their positions may be seen on the chart.

The Kinn Vessel Traffic Service (VTS), located just W of
5.17 Harfluene, with a least depth of 19m, lies about 2 miles NW
5.19
Kinn, is best seen on the chart. The VTS includes inbound ra- of Klovningen. Between this patch and the islet is Norefluene,
dio reporting points, which use VHF channel 18, and follows a covered by a least depth of 8m. Klovningskjer, which covers
track to the NNE towards Krakenes. For further information, 1.5m, lies at the NNW end of the foul ground 0.3 mile from the
see paragraph 5.1. N end of Klovningen.
The most important lights for making a landfall between Yt-
5.17 Skoringane, a chain of small islets, lies 0.5 mile E of
5.19
teroyane and Stadlandet are Ytteroyane Light (61°34'N., Klovningen. Svarteskjera are above-water rocks 0.3 mile far-
4°41'E.), Kvanhovden Light (61°42'N., 4°50'E.), and Hen- ther E.
danes Light (61°58'N., 5°02'E.), on the W side of Vagsoy, and
Krakenes Light (Kraakenes) (62°02'N., 4°59'E.), on the NW 5.20 Basundskjera (61°56'N., 5°00'E.), a group of above-
extremity of Vagsoy. water rocks marked by a light, lies on the N side of the ap-
The most conspicuous island among the islands in the vicini-
5.17 proach to Vagsfjorden, in a position 0.75 mile NW of Hovde-
ty of Ytteroyane is Kinn (61°34'N., 4°46'E.). It is 316m high neset Light.
and lies 2 miles ESE of Ytteroyane Light. This dome-shaped Mehuken, in the NW part of Vagsoy, is 433m high and steep
5.20
island has two hills separated by a deep ravine with steep sides. on its N side.
On the N end of the island there is a church which is visible at Havfruskallen (62°03'N., 4°51'E.), a 4.5m shoal, lies 3.75
5.20
a distance of 8 miles. miles WNW of the NW extremity of Vagsoy.

During the winter months, with long nights and frequent bad
5.17 Vessels making for the open sea S of Kraka can alter course
5.20
visibility, when approaching the land during W winds, vessels when Krakenes Light is open N of Skongenes Light and bear-
should avoid being set N of the entrances to the channels. ing about 271°. The white sector of Skongenes Light, bearing
Skorpa, about 3 miles ENE of Ytteroyane Light, rises to a astern, leads between Torsflu and Noreskallen (62°03'N.,
height of 393m. The island of Batalden, 1.5 miles NNW of 4°52'E.), 2.75 miles WSW.
Skorpa, rises to a height of 491m. The white sector of this light, astern, leads between Kraka
5.20
From offshore, W of Floro, Alden (61°19'N., 4°48'E.)

5.17 and Melsfluene, and about 0.5 mile SW of Oddeskallane, a
should be visible to the SE and Kinn should be visible to the E. 12m depth, 2 miles NW of Kraka. When Svinoy, about 7 miles
Batal Den, a good landmark 4 miles N of Kinn, is 491m high
5.17 NNE of the N end of Stadlandet, is open W of the NW extrem-
and precipitous. ity of Statdandet bearing about 030°, course should be altered
NNE.
5.18 Sendingane (61°39'N., 4°34'E.), a group of above-
water rocks, and Loynefallet, a 4m shoal, 0.6 mile WSW, lie 5.21 Hellefjorden, a passage extending from seaward in a
5.75 miles NW of Ytteroyane, at the W end of a chain of rocks SE direction to Indreleia and Floro, leads SE from the ap-
extending W from Batalden. proach to Froysjoen. The islands of Aralden and Batalden lie
Bremangerlandet (Bremangerland), an island which rises to on the SW side of the seaward entrance to the fjord and Hov-
a height of 910m at Hornelen (61°51'N., 5°14'E.), appears to den lies on the NE side. Hellefjorden is about 7 miles in length
be part of the mainland. and 1.75 miles in width at its narrowest part.
Stadlandet projects NW from the mainland E of Vagsoy for a
5.18 On the N side of the approach to Froysjoen are many dan-
5.21
distance of about 14 miles. Kjerringa (62°11'N., 5°08'E.), at gers; some of them break. These dangers extend to a distance
the NW end of Statdandet, is 497m high. Radio masts, which of about 3 miles S, 8 miles W, and about 2.1 miles N of Froya.
are prominent, stand near the summit of Kjerringa. Shoals also extend about 8 miles W of the entrance to
The waterway near Haugsholmen and Stalrevet, a shoal with
5.18 Hellefjorden, on the S side of the approach to Froysjoen.
a depth of 20m, as well as several shoal areas between them, From Aralden (61°41'N., 4°46'E.), the NW entrance point of
5.21
have been mentioned as areas with particularly heavy seas. Hellefjorden, shoal water extends about 0.7 mile N; vessels
must keep well clear. A light, with a racon, is displayed from
5.19 Skorpefluene and Bataldfluene (61°54'N., 4°48'E.), the islet.
with a least depth of 10m, lie 5 and 4.5 mile SW, respectively, From the offing, vessels can stand in toward Frojsoen
5.21
from the N extremity of Bremangerlandet. These two dangers, through a deep channel clear of all dangers, with Skarekina, the
which break when a swell is running, are the farthest W in the 310m high hill on the NW end of Hovden, bearing 090°.
approach to Fafjorden and Vagsfjorden. Veststeinen, an islet The white sector of Kvanhovden Light, close W of Skarekin-
5.21
44m high, lies 2.75 miles W of the N extremity of Bremanger- na, leads from seaward through the fairway to within 1 mile of
landet. The islet is surrounded by foul ground to a distance of the light.
0.6 mile.
Toytemulen, awash and always marked by breakers, lies 1.25
5.19 5.22 The inner part of Hellefjorden is free from dangers in
miles NNW of Veststeinen. There is a 5m patch 0.3 mile NNE the fairway except for Risholmflua (61°38'N., 4°53'E.), awash,
of this rock. on the W side of the fairway about 3 miles NW of Stabben
Several dangers lie in the general area between Veststeinen
5.19 Light, and two shoals. The two shoals have least depths of 9.4
and Klovningen. Seiabaane, with a least depth of 4m, lies and 11m. They lie in the fairway about 1 and 2 miles SE, re-
about 2 miles NNE of Veststeinen, and Brunebaen, a rock, spectively, from Risholmflua. An anchor berth, with a depth of
awash, lies about 2 miles ENE of the same islet. 17m, lies 0.7 mile E of Risholmflua in position 61°38'N,
Pub. 182
4°54'E. sector of Hornelen Light bearing between 061° and 078°,

To enter the N end of Hellefjorden, steer in the white sector
5.22 ahead. When not less than 0.5 mile from Hornelen Light, alter
of Stabben Light. This course will lead close W of Dombesk- course to the E until in the white sector of Haukedalsholmen
jaerene Light, which is situated on the SW side of Hovden. Light (61°52'N., 5°16'E.), which leads between the E coast of
When near Stabben Light, steer S in the white sector of Nek-
5.22 Bremangerlandet and Maroy, 0.5 mile E, and into the E en-
koyosen Light and continue S into Indreleia or steer E in the trance of Skatestraumen.
white sector of Floro Light and proceed to Floro. Skorperauva (61°46'N., 4°40'E.), a 6.5m shoal, lies at the
5.23
Skarekinna (61°42'N., 4°51'E.) attains an elevation of 310m

5.22 W end of several rocks and dangers extending WSW from
on the NW part of Hovden. Hovden lies 1.25 miles NE of Bat- Froya. A 19m patch lies 1 mile W of this shoal; a depth of 24m
alden; they are separated by Hellefjorden. Froya rises to a is charted 2.5 miles farther WSW.
height of 379m, 5.5 miles N of Skarekinna. Skorpefluene (61°55'N., 4°46'E.), the W rocks off the NW
5.23
side of Bremangerlandet, have a least depth of 5m, and are

5.23 Froysjoen is a deep channel about 15 miles long and sometimes marked by breakers.
not less than 1 mile wide. The tidal currents usually set E and Vetrungane (61°56'N., 4°49'E.), a group of rocks partly
5.23
N with the rising tide and W and S with the falling tide. Froys- above water, lies 1 mile NNW of Toytemulen. Fallet, covered
joen may be entered from seaward or from the S through Indre- by a least depth of 2m, lies 0.6 mile N of Vetrungane.
leia. Klovningen (61°56'N., 4°57'E.), an islet, 84m high, sur-
5.23
The approach from the offing may be the same as that direct-
5.23 rounded by foul ground, lies just over 1 mile N of the N ex-
ed for Hellefjorden. When within 1 mile of Kvanhovden Light, tremity of Bremangerlandet. Both Veststeinen and Klovningen
steer in a NE direction in the white sector of Smorhavn Light. can be distinguished from a distance of 10 to 12 miles.
When within 1.5 miles of that light, steer a mid-channel course
in a NE direction. 5.24 Maloy (61°56'N., 5°07'E.) (World Port Index No.
The passage from Floro to Froysjoen through Hellefjorden is
5.23 23125) is situated on the SE side of Vagsoy. It is a center of the
the preferred track. However, a passage for vessels of moderate fishing industry. There are several quays in the harbor.
size leads N through Naeroyfjorden, then into Froysjoen. The Depths—Limitations.—The Inter-Comtermnalen is the
channel through Naeroyfjorden, though more protected, is main quay and includes two deep-sea berths, 159m long and
much obstructed by shoals. 127m long, with depths of 8.1 to 13.1m and 7 to 10m, respec-
Naeroyfjorden lies between Sore Naeroy and Nordre Naeroy,
5.23 tively, alongside. A local traffic quay is 40m long, with a depth
on the W side, and the mainland. The S entrance is about 2 of 8m alongside. There are facilities for ro-ro vessels. The fish-
miles NNE of Stabben Light. ing harbor has a pier, 110m long, with depths of 10 to 17m
Speed restrictions have been established in Naeroyfjorden.
5.23 along both sides, and a quay, 206m long, with depths of 10 to
Mariners are advised to contact the local authorities for details. 12m alongside.
Vessels running for Naeroyfjorden from Floro alter course
5.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
5.24
N, after passing S of Floro Light and enter the white sector of dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
Arebrotsneset Light (61°38'N., 5°00'E.). This track will lead soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
W of Sandvoeret, 1.25 miles NW of Floro and Naeroyflua, a Vessels should contact the Floro pilot station on VHF chan-
5.24
6m shoal 0.5 mile WNW. nel 16 at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does not re-
When NW of Sandvoeret, enter the white sector of Dragja-
5.23 spond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Station will
skjaerflu Light (61°39'N., 4°59'E.) ahead, which leads be- reply and relay details to the pilot station.
tween Nordre Naeroy and the dangers on the E side of the Contact Information.—See the table titled Maloy—Con-
5.24
fairway. A vessel may steer in the white sector of the light 1 tact Information.
mile N of Dragjas Kjaerflu Light. This also leads through the
channel and E of Dragjaskjaerflu Light. When NE of Dragjask- Maloy—Contact Information
jaerflu Light, alter course NW and bring that light astern show-
ing white. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
This track leads E of Hollendarane (61°41'N., 4°56'E.),
5.23
awash, and Rognane, 1.5 miles farther N, and into the white
sector of Smorhavn Light; the track then leads into Froysjoen.
An anchorage, best seen on the chart, lies 0.8 miles E of
5.23 E-mail post@nordfjord.havn.no
Rogname and 1.3 mile NE of Hollendarane, in depths from 11
to 52m. An anchor berth lies approximately 0.8 mile WNW of Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 30 to 40m, sand
5.24
Hollendarane in position 61°41.5'N, 4°54.6'E just off the E and mud or rock, about 0.1 mile off the quays. Anchorage is
coast of Hovden island. prohibited in the fairway E of a line joining Maloy North Light
Between Fiskholmen (61°46'N., 4°56'E.) and the entrance
5.23
and Goteberghamaren (61°57'N., 5°08'E.), a point 0.6 mile
to Berlepollen, 6.5 miles ENE, the fairway of Froysjoen is de- N, and W of a line joining the N light on the E side of
fined by the white sector of Smorhavn Light, situated on the Maloysundet to Trolleboflu Light.
SW extremity of Fiskholmen, bearing between 240° and 332°, Ulvesund, between Vagsoy and the mainland, leads N for 4
5.24
astern, which marks the N shore. The S edge is marked by Ola- miles to Sildegapet, and has few dangers. There is a speed limit
skjaer Light (61°44'N., 4°57'E.). of 10 knots in the central and N part of the channel.
When abeam the Berlepollen entrance, keep within the white
5.23
Pub. 182
5.25 Ulven Light (61°58'N., 5°09'E.) is exhibited from a Lights, in line astern, lead between the fringing dangers on ei-
pile of rocks in the center of Ulvesund, about 2 miles N of ther side of the fairway to the seaward channel N of Kraka.
Maloy. This course passes about midway between Toren and Ytste-
5.26
At Hagevik, 0.3 mile ESE of Ulven Light, there is a quay,

5.25 baan (62°09'N., 5°04'E.), with a depth of 5.5m, situated 1.25
with a depth of 6m alongside. On the opposite shore at miles off Stadlandet. Ytstebaan breaks in bad weather.
Barstadvik is a quay, 110m long, with depths of 5 to 8m along- When W of Ytstebaan, about 1 mile distant, steer a N course
5.26
side. to pass W of Bukketjuvane (62°11'N., 5°04'E.) about 0.5 mile

There are lights, in range, which lead to Olvesund from the
5.25 distant. Bukketjuvane is a partially submerged reef lying about
N. 1 mile SW of the NW extremity of Stadlandet.
The usual track of Indreleia is on either side of Trolleboflu,
5.25 Vessels can proceed N past Bukketjuvane until Dollstein, a
5.26
then into the white sector of Ulven Light, passing on either side hill at the W end of Sandsoy, about 7 miles ENE of Stadlandet,
of that light. When passing through Ulvesund, vessels keep bears about 067°, when course can be altered NE for the N end
about 91m from Trolleboflu and Ulven. North of Ulven the of Skorpa, to pass N of Stadlandet, then into Vanylvsgapet and
shore should not be approached nearer than 183m. The dangers Indreleia.
and lights in Ulvesund are best seen on the chart. Buholmen Light (62°10'N., 5°05'E.) is off the W side of
5.26
From Ulvesund, several channels lead through Sildegapet to

5.25 Stadlandet, on the SE islet.
the open sea.
Seaward bound vessels in Sildegapet can pass through the
5.25
Stadlandet to Alesund
southernmost channel between Breidflu, a 10m bank about 2
miles W of Skongenes Light (62°02'N., 5°08'E.), and Melsflu- 5.27 The coast from Stadlandet (62°12'N., 5°08'E.) to
ene, 0.25 mile NE. Skongsnes Light is situated on the NE ex- Alesund is indented by fjords and is fronted by many islands,
tremity of Vagsoy. islets, and dangerous rocks. This section is about 25 miles long
and runs in an ENE direction. The appearance of the coast is
rugged, bare, and gray. The two main openings are Vanylvsga-
pet, on the NE side of Stadtlandet, and Breisunddjupet, NE of
Runde.
Runde (62°25'N., 5°35'E.) is a bare gray island, with a
5.27
height of 331m at Rundesundet, in the E, and 293m at Bran-

den, in the W. On the seaward side it is steep-to, except on the
S where cultivated land is seen.
Rundesundet (Rundo Sund) lies between Runde and Ri-
5.27
moya, 0.5 mile S. The islands are connected by a causeway

leading to a bridge in the S with a vertical clearance of 24m. A
red light marks the N pillar of the bridge and a green light
marks the S pillar, with a 118m horizontal distance between
them; a white light marks the center of the bridge. Rundesund
Light stands on Saeviksteinen.
The summits of Sauehornet (62°14'N., 6°09'E.), 1,303m
5.27
5.25 Skongenes Light high, 28 miles E of Kjerringa, on Stadlandet, and Slogen,

1,564m high, 15 miles farther ESE, may be used in the ap-
Further N, vessels can pass through the channel between
5.25 proaches from seaward, and on the fishing grounds farther sea-
Melsfluene, which has a least charted depth of 11m, and Kra- ward.
ka, which is well above water. Statthavet (62°12'N., 5°06'E.) has long been known as an
5.27
It is reported that the channels S of Kraka should be used on-

5.25 area with very severe weather, and many have identified the ar-
ly in fine or moderate weather. A 16m bank, which breaks in ea as being dangerous.
heavy weather, lies NW of Kraka. It has been indicated that heavy sea is created particularly by
5.27
A broad channel leads N between Kraka and the shoals ex-

5.25 winds from SW to N. In these cases, the waves come straight in
tending SW from Stadlandet. Ramseflu, an 8.6m patch, lies at from the ocean. The current in the passage has been estimated
the S extremity of these shoals, about 2 miles SSW of the SW at between 2 and 4 knots, and when the ocean waves meet this
extremity of Stadlandet. current, strong precipitous breakers are developed.
The swell becomes choppy.
5.27
5.26 Torsflu (62°04'N., 4°57'E.), a small isolated bank The passage near Haugsholmen and the shoal of Stzlrevet, as
5.27
with a charted depth of 13m, lies 2 miles NNW of Krakenes well as several small shoal areas between these, have been
Light. This bank, which occasionally breaks in bad weather, mentioned as areas with particularly heavy seas.
should be avoided. Vessels intending to pass in the vicinity of Stadlandet may
5.27
In bad weather, northbound vessels should always stand out

5.26 request a 2-day wind/wave warning forecast.
to sea through the channel between Kraka and the dangers off Vessels should supply the following information when
5.27
Stadlandet. making the request:

From a position about 0.5 mile SW of Ulvesund Range
5.26 1. Vessel name.
Light, vessels can steer about 021° until Ulvesund Range 2. Vessel type.
Pub. 182
3. Area and time of passing. 5.29 Rundoy Light (62°25'N., 5°36'E.) is situated on the
4. Intended course (passing N or S, etc.). NW extremity of Runde (Rundoy), 2.5 miles NNE of Goldnes
5. Return address (complete with facsimile number). Light. Numerous dangers extend 1.75 miles ENE from a rock,
awash, 0.9 mile NW of Rundoy Light. Some of these dangers
Stadlandet—Contact Information for are above water.
Wind/Wave Warning Forecast Langenes Light stands on the NE extremity of Runde. A line
5.29
of rocks and islets extends from Treholmane, 0.6 mile E of

Vervarslinga Langenes Light, to Grasholmen, 3 miles NE. The sea some-
Telephone 47-55236600 times breaks over a spit, which extends 0.5 mile ENE from
Grasholmen and terminates in Breiflu, an 8m patch.
Facsimile 47-55236603
Grasoyane Light (62°26'N., 5°46'E.) stands on Grashol-
5.29
Maloy Harbor Office men.

Telephone 47-57851278 The channels through the dangers between Langenes Light
5.29
and Grasoyane Light are navigable only with local knowledge.

Facsimile 47-57850634 Florauden Light (62°26'N., 5°50'E.) is situated on the cen-
5.29
Svinoy Light tral islet of Florauden, a group of islets lying 2 miles E of Gra-
sholmen. A racon is located at the light tower.
47-70132544
Telephone 5.30 Breisundet (62°27'N., 6°00'E.), between Hareidland-
47-94662647 (mobile)
et on the S and Godoya, gives access from the sea to Alesund
Facsimile 47-70132544 and Indreleia. It is deep and clear of dangers except close in-
shore.
The currents on this part of the coast, irrespective of the tide,
5.27 Vessels entering Breisundet steer for a position 1.5 miles N
5.30
usually set in a NE direction and are known to have a velocity, of Florauden; a mid-channel course will then lead to a position
at times, of more than 1 knot. At a distance of 30 to 60 miles 0.7 mile NW of Eltraneset, the NW extremity of Sula.
from land, a vessel will be set to the NE. Heissafjorden leads E from this position to Alesund.
5.30
Pilots cruise NE of Runde; vessels enroute to Alesund or

5.27 Sulefjorden leads SE from the above position.
Bergen may embark a pilot here. During N gales, the pilot may Hogsteinen Light (62°28'N., 6°02'E.) is situated off the SE
5.30
be forced to seek shelter at Nerlandsoy. extremity of Godoya, on the NE side of Breisundet.
5.28 Sandsoy (62°15'N., 5°26'E.), lying 5.5 miles ENE of 5.31 Alesund (62°28'N., 6°10'E.) (World Port Index No.
Stadlandet, rises to a height of 370m. There is a height of 23120) is situated on the islands of Norvoya, Heissa, and As-
227m, shaped like a haystack, at the W end of the island. This poya. These islands are interconnected and are also connected
height is easily identified from SW or NW, but merges into the to the mainland by fixed bridges. The waters of Alesund Havn
background when viewed from the W. comprise the harbor at Alesund.
Numerous dangers extend up to 2 miles W of Sandsoy. The
5.28 Alesund is a major commercial and fishing port. Products in-
5.31
farthest NW of these dangers is Skjeggene (62°16'N., 5°20'E.), clude clothing and dairy products, as well as furniture and fish
a group of rocks with a least depth of 0.5m over its N end; they products.
are usually marked by breakers.
A group of shoals, with a least depth of 24m, lies about 3
5.28
Alesund Port Authority Home Page
miles W of Skjeggene.
Svinoy (62°20'N., 5°16'E.), 6 miles W of Skorpa, is easily
5.28
http://www.alesund.havn.no
identified by its remote position although it is comparatively
small. A light is shown from a tower 11m in height, standing Depths—Limitations.—Berthing details are shown in the
5.31
on the SE side of the island. Due to numerous dangers, the pas- accompanying table titled Alesund—Berthing Information.
sage between Svinoy and Skorpa should not be attempted with- The port area has mooring facilities for the lay-up of vessels
5.31
out local knowledge. of all sizes. Vessels up to 508,000 dwt have been accommodat-
Skorpa (62°20'N., 5°30'E.) and Nerlandsoy, close NE and 4
5.28
ed at lay-up. The port is open year round.
miles NE of Skorpa, respectively, stand out clearly from the Vessels may, draft permitting, transit the channel which lies
5.31
background. between Aspoya and Heissa. There is a least depth of 5m in the

Juklebaen (62°22'N., 5°24'E.), a 2m patch lying 4.25 miles
5.28
channel, but depths of 4.2m are charted near the range line.
ENE of Svinoy, usually breaks. A fixed bridge, with a navigable width of 50m and a vertical
5.31
Heroyfjorden lies between Sandoya and Gurskoya

5.28 clearance of 17m, spans the channel. The port is open all the
(62°15'N., 5°40'E.), on the S, and Skorpa, Nerlandsoy year.
(62°21'N., 5°33'E.), and Bergsoya (62°20'N., 6°38'E.). Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500 gt
5.31
Goldnes Light (62°22'N., 5°34'E.) is situated on the N ex-

5.28
and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Pilotage should be
tremity of Nerlandsoy, 4.25 miles ENE of Juklebaen. ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
Geitmaren, a 5m patch, lies 1.75 miles NNW of Goldnes
5.28 Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Light. The sea occasionally breaks over it in quiet weather, When entering into or departing from the pilot boarding po-
5.31
though seldom during calms or offshore winds. sition in Breidsundet, vessels are requested to navigate inside
Pub. 182
the Recommended Fairway, bounded, as follows: The pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 16.
5.31
a. 62°31.8'N, 5°44.4'E. Regulations.—Within the harbor area of Alesund, the fol-

5.31
b. 62°30.2'N, 5°45.8'E. lowing regulations are in effect:

c. 62°27.5'N, 5°55.1'E. 1. Within the harbor area, powered vessels are not to ex-
d. 62°27.5'N, 5°57.2'E. ceed the minimum speed required for good seamanship and
e. 62°26.5'N, 5°57.2'E. maneuverability, or to proceed at such a speed as to cause
f. 62°26.5'N, 5°53.5'E. damage or danger to vessels or harbor installations from
g. 62°29.5'N, 5°43.3'E. wash.
h. 62°29.5'N, 5°38.2'E. 2. When near the entrance to Indre Havn or Steinvagsun-
i. 62°31.8'N, 5°44.4'E. det, a risk of collision exists between inbound and outbound
Pilots board in Breidsundet, in position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E,
5.31 vessels, the inbound vessel must wait at a suitable distance
weather permitting; by request, the pilot can also board in Bre- off the entrance until the outbound vessel is well clear of the
idsunddjupet, in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. breakwater at Indre Havn or of the lights in Steinvagsundet.
Vessels should call the pilot station 2 hours prior to arrival on
5.31 3. In Indre Havn, Skutevika, or Steinvagsundet, vessels
VHF channel 16. If the station does not respond either the Ro- are not permitted to swing to their anchors, or to anchor in
galand or Floro Coastal Radio station will reply and relay de- such a way as to obstruct the harbor entrances or the ap-
tails to the pilot station. proaches to alongside berths.
Alesund—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Bulk and General Cargo Berths
Flatholmen 1 50m 7.0m — — — —
Flatholmen 2 50m 7.0m — — — —
Flatholmen 3 — 12.0m — — — Ro-ro.
Flatholmen 4/5 270m 12.0m — — — Containers and bulk cargo.
Skanse N 195m 10.0-13.0m — — — —
Skanse W 60m 4.0-8.0m — — — —
Skanse S 130m 4.0-5.0m — — — —
Brunholm 100m 4.0m — — —
Skansegata 200m 6.0m — — —
Sjogata 190m 8.0m — — —
Stornes E 85m 6.0-14.0m — — —
Stornes S 153m 10.0-13.0m — — Passengers.
Stornes W 85m 6.0-14.0m — — Ro-ro.
Prestebrugga S 220m 13.0-16.0m 373m 11.0m — Passengers.
Prestebrugga W 40m 5.0-13.0m — — —
Skutvitka 203m 10.0-16.0m — — Containers.
Gjosund-Vigra 110m 10.0-16.0m — — Offshore pier. Ro-ro and project cargo.
Tanker Berths
Eastern Jetty 65m — — 12.1m — —
Western Jetty 65m — — 12.1m — —
Bunker Jetty 65m — — 12.1m — —
Hessa CBM 75m — 180m 9.0m 30,000 dwt Used for bunkering vessels.
Norske Shell 200m — 200m 10.3m Located 3 miles ENE of Alesund.
Pub. 182
Alesund—Berth Signals
Quay 1 Quay 2 Quay 3
Skanskaien One green One green and one white (at W end) One green and one white (at E end)
Storneskaien One red Two red Three red
Prestebryggen One green Two green —
Skutevikkaien One white Two white Three white
5.31 By Markus Trienke [CC BY-SA 2.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0)], via Wikimedia Commons
5.31 Alesund Harbor
Vessels should advise Port Control of their ETA; the

5.31 arriving vessel’s berth. Such signals should be acknowledged
following information should also be included: by a blast on the whistle. The berth signals are given in the
1. Vessel name. accompanying table titled Alesund—Berth Signals.
2. Flag. By day a red flag is displayed at the berth allocated to the
5.31
3. Port of registry. vessel.

4. Call sign. The general night signals are, as follows:
5.31
5. IMO number. 1. Fixed red, green, and white—All berths occupied.

6. Gross tonnage, loa, actual draft, and maximum sum- 2. Flashing red—Continue into harbor.
mer draft. 3. Flashing green—Anchor and await orders.
7. Last port-of-call and next port-of-call. 4. Flashing white—Close to hailing distance.
8. Dangerous cargo information, if any.
For the requirements for non-military vessels entering Nor-
5.31
Alesund Harbor—Contact Information

wegian internal waters, see Pub. 180. Sailing Directions (Plan-
ning Guide) Arctic Ocean. Port Control
Signals.—Signals are exhibited at night, from signal masts
5.31
on Skanskaien and Storneskaien, using fixed red, green, and
white lights to give berthing instructions and to indicate an
Pub. 182
Alesund Harbor—Contact Information fjord. A marine farm is located in position 61°00.6'N, 5°28.4'E.
A bay at Vikum (61°10'N., 5°43'E.), on the N side of
5.33
47-70-163410 Sognefjorden about 22 miles E of Bofjorden, is one of the bet-

Telephone
47-99-853400 ter harbors for vessels of moderate size in this fjord.
Vessels anchor in the N part of the bay, in about 30 to 40m,
5.33
Port Authority clay. There is a quay in the bay, with depths of 4 to 5m along-
Telephone 47-70-163400 side.
Hoyanger (61°13'N., 6°04'E.), situated at the head of Hoy-
5.33
angsfjorden, 10.5 miles ENE of Vikum, is an industrial town
E-mail havnevesenet@alesund.havn.no and an administrative center. There is a mooring buoy off the
largest quay, which has a least depth of 8m alongside.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Alesund
5.31
5.33
Harbor—Contact Information. dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. For further
Indreleia and the Inner Fjords information, see paragraph 5.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Hoyanger—
5.33
5.32 Indreleia is a navigable inner route and is, to some ex- Contact Information.
tent, protected by offshore islands. The route is continuous
from Fedje to Alesund. At times it extends to near the coast. Hoyanger—Contact Information
Sognefjorden, the continuation of Sognesjoen E from Rutle-
VHF VHF channels 6, 9, and 16
tangen (61°05'N., 5°10'E.), is the longest and deepest fjord in
Norway. The inner recesses of the fjord are more than 100 Telephone 47-57-715287
miles from the open sea, but in few places is it as much as 2.5 Facsimile 47-57-715377
miles wide. The mountains rise almost vertically from the wa-
ter’s edge in many places, and exceed an elevation of 1,800m
near Aurlandsfjorden, where their summits are always covered 5.34 Ardal (61°14'N., 7°43'E.) (World Port Index No.
with snow. There are numerous waterfalls and cascades, and 23136) is a coastal harbor situated at the NE extremity of Ar-
the scenery is grand, but somber. dalsfjorden. This ice-free port is directed by the Bergen Cus-
The principal branches of Sognefjorden are Aurlandsfjorden
5.32
toms District.
and Naeroyfjorden, on the S side; Fjaerlandsfjorden, Sogndals- There are a number of quays in the port. Quay I is 220m long
fjorden, and Lustrafjorden, on the N side; and Ardalsfjorden, and has a depth of 9.25m alongside. Quay II is 100m long and
an extension of Songnefjorden, at the E end. has 11.5m alongside. The largest vessel that can be accommo-
The tidal currents in Sognefjorden usually set W and run
5.32
dated is 220m long with a 9.6m draft.
strongest along the N side; they are, however, irregular and Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
5.34
may be found setting W under one shore and E under the other. dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
In the middle of the entrance the current is rotary, counter-
5.32
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. For further
clockwise, and weak; the spring rate in all directions is 0.25 information, see paragraph 5.1.
knot. Contact Information.—See the table titled Ardal—Con-
5.34
There are few anchorages in Sognefjorden, but at the heads

5.32
tact Information.
of nearly all the branches there are banks formed by the deposit
from the various rivers that flow into it. These banks, consist- Ardal—Contact Information
ing generally of soft mud or sand, afford excellent holding VHF VHF channels 6, 9, and 16
ground, but they are continually changing in shape and increas-
ing in size. Telephone 47-57-715287
Sognefjorden is fringed with a number of towns, the most
5.32
important one being Ardal at the head of Ardalsfjorden.
Directions.—Vessels, when in transit of Rekstafjorden from
5.34
5.33 Bofjorden (61°07'N., 5°20'E.), situated on the N side

the WSW, may, when within 0.75 mile of Sandoya Light
of Sognefjorden, close within its W entrance, affords anchor-
(61°33'N., 4°46'E.), alter course to the E to pass 0.25 mile S of
age to vessels of moderate size. Vessels anchor 0.25 mile NNE
that light.
of the light, in 30 to 40m, good holding ground. An iron perch,
When E of Sandoya Light, steer in its white sector, astern,
5.34
reported 0.15 mile WNW of the light structure, marks a rock

and continue to the E end of Rekstafjorden and enter the white
off the E edge of a bank. A light is exhibited from a rock 0.2
sector of Nekkoyosen Light, as directed above, which leads in-
mile N of the anchorage.
to Nekkoyosen.
A marine farm is situated 0.7 mile WSW of Bofjord Light.
5.33
There are other marine farms situated 0.85 mile SSE and 2 5.35 The better Indrelia track for large vessels passes from
miles SSE of the same light.
the E end of Sognesjoen, and then turns abruptly N leading
Risnefjord provides good anchorage for moderate size ves-
5.33
through Krakhellesund between the islands of Sula, on the W,

sels off the W shore, 0.5 mile S of Ortneset. Vessels anchoring and Losna.
in Risnefjord should avoid a submarine cable crossing the
Pub. 182
Klauva Light (61°07'N., 5°02'E.) is situated on the SW ex-

5.35 Mokalasset (61°18'N., 5°01'E.), a reef, awash, is situated on
5.37
tremity of Losna and on the E side of the S entrance to Kra- the N side of the fairway, about 1 mile W of Vilnesfjorden
khellesund. Light. There is an 11m patch 0.25 mile SW of the beacon situ-
A light is situated on the W side of Losna, about 2 miles
5.35 ated on Mokalasset. Several rocks and shoals lie between
NNW of Klauva. A light is situated on a rock on the W side of Mokalasset and Atloy.
Krakhellesund, 0.5 mile farther NNW. Vilnesfjorden Light (61°18'N., 5°04'E.) is situated on the S
5.37
The channel of Krakhellesund, about 5 miles long, is free of

5.35 side of the E end of Vilnesfjorden.
dangers in the fairway, except for a rocky patch lying 183m Vessels in transit of Vilnesfjorden from W to E may steer in
5.37
SSE of the salient point on the W side of the S entrance and a the white sector of Vilnesfjorden Light to within 0.5 mile of the
reef lying close off the rock marked by a light about 2 miles N. light. Haskallen lies in this sector. The white sector of Lan-
The tidal currents in the channel nearly always set N. genes Light, 1.25 miles NNE of Vilnesfjorden Light, leads S of
Klauva Light, showing white, leads N from Sognesjoen into
5.35 Flatoyflu, then into the white sector of Vilnesfjorden Light,
the entrance of Krakhellesund. The white sector of the light sit- astern, which leads to the S entrance of Granesundet.
uated on the rock on the W side of the channel leads through Dalsfjorden continues ENE from Vilnesfjorden for 17 miles
5.37
the fairway of the S part of the channel. to the vicinity of Bogstad.

After passing E of this light, vessels can keep in the white
5.35
sector of the light, astern, which will lead W of the island Skor- 5.38 Granesundet, separating the E side of the island Atloy
pa then into Afjorden. from the mainland, is about 4 miles long and has a least width
Losneosen, between the E side of Losna and the mainland,
5.35 of 0.25 mile. It is nearly free of danger in the fairway.
connects Sognesjoen and Sognefjorden with Krakhellesund Flatoyflu (61°19'N., 5°03'E.), awash, lies 0.3 mile S of
5.38
through Tollesund, which separates Losna from Skorpa. Los- Flatoy in the SW approach to Granesundet. It is marked by two
neosen connects with Afjorden through Storakersundet E of iron perches.
Skorpa. Flatoy, an islet at the S end of Granesundet, lies on the W
5.38
These channels are deep and free of dangers. An overhead

5.35 side of the entrance 1 mile N of Vilnesfjorden Light. The islet
cable, with a vertical clearance of 70m, crosses the SE end of is surrounded by a shore reef to a distance of about 0.1 mile
Tollesund. Langenes Light is situated about 0.8 mile E of Flatoy; anoth-
5.38
Afjorden trends about 6 miles ESE from its confluence with

5.35 er light is situated on the SW side of Prestoy, 0.45 mile NNE of
Storakersundet, and branches into Hylestadfjorden and Flatoy. Both of these lights are on the E shore of Granesundet.
Sorfjorden, at its head. A depth of 9.5m lies nearly in mid-channel about 0.3 mile
5.38
WNW of Langenes Light. A 12m patch lies 0.15 mile WSW of

5.36 Sakrisskjer (61°14'N., 4°57'E.) is the NW entrance the light on Prestoy.
point of Afjorden. From the W end of Afjorden the track of In- Englandsflu is a 4m patch situated on the W side of the fair-
5.38
drelia takes a N direction past the W sides of the islands way, 0.8 mile NW of the light on Prestoy.
Sakrisoy and Lutelandet, and Lammetu. From the W end of Granebaen (61°23'N., 5°01'E.), a 3.5m shoal, lies on the W
5.38
Vilnesfjorden the direction is E through that channel to the W side of the fairway in the N entrance to Granesundet.
end of Dalsfjorden, then N into Granesundet. A light is situated A light is exhibited on Trettenes, on the E side of the N end
5.38
on Sakrisskjer. of Granesundet.
Midtfjordskjer (61°16'N., 4°54'E.), marked by a light, is
5.36 Vessels entering Granesundet should keep in the white sector
5.38
situated in the S entrance to Vilnesfjorden, 3 miles NNW of the of Vilnesfjorden Light, astern, until it intersects the white sec-
light on Sakrisskjer. Araldeflu is a 4m patch 0.25 mile N of tor of the light on the W side of Prestoy, which will lead be-
Midtfjordskjer. tween the dangers in the S entrance of Granesundet. Alter
Morpolsa, a rock, awash, is situated at the extremity of the
5.36 course to the NNW when the white sector of Langenes Light,
foul ground extending W from Lammetu. It lies about 0.7 mile astern, bears between 118° and 122°. Continue in this sector
ENE of the light on Midtfjordskjer. until the white sector of the light on Trettenes bears between
Ytste Taren (61°17'N., 4°55'E.), a 5m shoal, lies 0.3 mile N
5.36 350° and 356.5°. Alter course to the N to keep in this sector
of Morpolsa. which leads through the fairway of Granesundet, into the white
Vessels enroute from Krakhellesund to Vilnesfjorden can
5.36 sector of the light on Prestoy, bearing astern, which leads be-
keep in the white sector of the light on Sakrisskjer until about 1 tween Trettenes and Granebaen.
mile from the light. Vessels may then steer W to pass S of the The white sector of Trettenes Light, bearing astern, leads to-
5.38
light and then enter the white sector of the light on Raudoy. ward Stavfjorden.
This sector will lead W of Morpolsa and E of Midtfjordskjer, An alternate route from the W end of Vilnesfjorden to
into the SW entrance Vilnesfjorden. Stavenes Light, is to pass through Aldefjorden, W of the island
of Tvibyrgje and Tussen Light and then to the E on the S side
5.37 Vilnesfjorden is a broad channel which extends about of Heggoyane.
4 miles E from the light on Raudoy. Aldefjorden, the passage between Alden and Tvibyrgje, is
5.38
Haskallen (61°18'N., 4°57'E.), with a least depth of 14m,

5.37 situated on the E and S sides, respectively, of these islands.
lies in the fairway just over 1 mile ESE of Raudoy Light, and
close S of the dangers E of Raudoy. 5.39 Midfjordflu (61°19'N., 4°49'E.), a 10m patch, lies 0.8
Einingsflu, lying on the S side of the fairway 1 mile SSE of
5.37 mile SW of the SW point of Tvibyrgje. Senholmtaren, an un-
Haskallen, has a depth of 2.3m. marked 4m shoal, lies about 0.6 mile ESE of Midfjordflu and an
Pub. 182
8m patch marked by a buoy lies 0.5 mile N of Midfjordflu. through the fairway E of Baane. An 11.5m patch lies on the E
There are other dangers in Aldefjorden which may best be
5.39 limit of this sector 0.2 mile WSW of Trefotskjeret.
seen on the chart. When within 0.2 mile of the light, alter course NNE to pass
5.41
Alden is saddle-shaped and rises to a height of 480m in its E

5.39 between it and Leieskjera, and then into Brufjorden.
part. Tvibyrgje lies about 1 mile NE of Alden and about 0.5 Oddane (61°33'N., 5°00'E.) is marked on its E extremity by
5.41
mile W of Atloy. The island resembles two haycocks; the one a light. Andalsskjera, 1.25 miles NE of Oddane, is also marked
farthest W is 192m high. by a light.
Tussen (61°23'N., 4°50'E.) lies 1 mile N of Tvibyrgje. It is
5.39
marked by a light and a beacon. A reef projects about 183m 5.42 To continue across Brufjorden, from a position close
NW from Tussen; a 14m bank lies 0.3 mile W of the light. E of the light on Askrova, steer N with the white sector of this
Heggoyosen is the channel between Heggoyane on the N and
5.39 light bearing more than 179°, astern, and keep the light on An-
Atloy on the S.A light is shown from the S extremity of Heg- dalsskjera ahead, which leads E of Oddane.
goyane, in a position about 3 miles ENE of Tussen. When entering the white sector of Nekkoyosen Light
5.42
A light is shown from the NW extremity of Raudoy, an is-

5.39 (61°35'N., 4°57'E.), alter course NW to keep in this sector,
land lying 1 mile E of Heggoyane, and on the W side of the N which leads NE of Oddane and out of Brufjorden to the en-
entrance of Granesundet. trance of Nekkoyosen.
Nekkoyosen, a continuation of Indreleia, is entered between
5.42
5.40 Vessels from the S desiring to pass through the W part Sore Nekkoya and Nordre Nekkoya (61°35'N., 4°56'E.), on
of Vilnesfjorden then into Aldefjorden may do so by keeping in the W side, and Faeroya and Faeroykalven, on the E side.
the white sector of the light on Raudoy (61°18'N., 4°55'E.) as Mortingbaen, 1 mile NNE of Nekkoyosen Light, is marked
5.42
previously suggested, until within 0.5 mile of that light, when by a light. It lies on the E side of the channel. Annoyholmbaen,
course should be changed to the NW. with depths of 2m or less, lies on the W side of the fairway 0.3
With the white sector of the light on Raudoy, astern, proceed
5.40 mile SW of the light on Mortingbaen.
until within the white sector of the light on Geita. Navigate Stabben Light (61°36'N., 4°57'E.) is situated on the E end
5.42
with Geita Light, astern, which leads W of Midfjordflu and the of foul ground, in a position just over 1 mile NNE of Nekkoyo-
8m patch 0.5 mile N of it, until abeam of Tussen, about 1 mile sen Light. There is a least depth of 3.4m on the foul ground
distant. A 14m depth is charted 1.25 miles W of Tussen Light. WSW of the light.
To enter Heggoyosen from the white sector of Geita Light,
5.40 Grasskjeret Light is situated on the W part of a reef, about
5.42
steer in the white sector of the light on Raudoy, passing no less 0.3 mile ENE of Stabben Light.
than 0.25 mile N of Tussen Light. When the white sector of
Stavenes Light bears between 017° and 032°, steer in that sec- 5.43 Floro Light (61°36'N., 5°01'E.) is situated on the N
tor to clear the dangers N of Raudoy and E of Heggoyane. This side of the channel, 1.25 miles E of Grasskjeret Light. A 6m
course will join the track leading NNW from the N entrance of patch lies 183m W of the light.
Granesundet. Vessels en route through Nekkoyosen to Floro keep Stabben
5.43
Kjerringholmen (61°24'N., 4°58'E.), an islet 19m high, lies

5.40 light structure bearing about 005°, which leads between Nordre
W of the fairway leading NNW from Granesundet and E of the Nekkoya and Faeroya. Enter the white sector of Nekkoyosen
fairway leading NNE from Heggoyosen, in a position 0.45 Light, astern, which will lead W of Mortingbaen.
mile N of Raudoy. The islet is surrounded by shoal water to a When NW of the light on Mortingbaen, enter the white sec-
5.43
distance of 183m. Melsholmen, an islet 21m high, lies 0.6 mile tor of Floro Light. When within 0.35 mile of Floro Light, steer
NW of Kjerringholmen. a mid-channel course between the light and the shoal water
Stavenes Light (61°25'N., 4°59'E.) is situated on an islet on
5.40 about 183m to the S. This course will lead into Floro.
the E side of Indreleia, in a position 1.75 miles NNE of the An alternate track from Nekkoyosen for approaching Floro
5.43
light on Raudoy. is with the white sector of Nekkoyosen Light bearing astern. It
From Stavenes Light, the main track leads across
5.40 leads between Mortingbaen and Svartskjeret, marked by a bea-
Stavfjorden between Baane (61°29'N., 4°59'E.) and Trefotsk- con, which is situated 0.3 mile E of the light on Mortingbaen,
jeret, about 0.6 mile E; it then leads between Askrova Light, on into the white sector of Grasskjeret Light, then into the white
the E end of the island Askrova, and Leieskjera, about 0.1 mile sector of Floro Light as indicated above.
SSE.
This narrow passage has a least charted depth of 14m and
5.40
Froysjoen
should be navigated with caution.
5.44 Vessels may approach Fafjorden and Vagsfjorden by
5.41 Folvagfluene (61°25'N., 4°58'E.) is a group of rocks, keeping in the white sector of Hovdeneset Light (61°56'N.,
awash, which lies on the W side of Indreleia, 0.5 mile SW of 5°01'E.), which leads N of Skorpefluene, Bataldfluene, and
Stavenes Light. Faneskjera, above water, lies on the same side Veststeinen, and S of Toytemulen and Seiabaane to within
of the track, within 0.25 mile N of Folvagfluene. about 3 miles of the light.
Ryggene, reefs marked at their E end by a buoy, are situated
5.41 Vessels heading for Fafjorden then enter the white sector of
5.44
0.75 mile NNW of Stavenes Light. Kvitnes Light, which leads to the white sector of Fafjorden
The white sector of Stavenes Light, bearing astern, leads
5.41 Light. Enter the white sector of Fafjorden Light ahead, which
across Stavfjorden from a position E of Ryggene; the white leads into Fafjorden.
sector of Askrova Light (61°31'N., 5°00'E.) then leads Vessels approaching from the NW may keep the summit of
5.44
Pub. 182
Ronelden (61°55'N., 5°01'E.), a steep conical hill 321m high, Nordfjorden

in line with the summit of Klovningen, bearing 115°, which
passes NE of Fallet and SW of Harfluene and Norefluene. 5.47 Nordfjorden, entered N of Risoy, is approached from
When E of Fallet, steer in the white sector of Kvitnes Light
5.44 seaward through Fafjorden or Vagsfjorden. It extends E of
and proceed as directed above. Risoy for a distance of about 50 miles under various names.
Vessels approaching the entrance from the N should keep
5.44 The main fjord has several branches, most of them extending S,
Hornelen, the 889m hill on the E end of Bremangerlandet, that provide several anchorage areas.
bearing about 124°. When N of Klovningen, alter course S and At the seaward end of Nordfjorden, the shores are barren and
5.47
enter the white sector of Fafjorden Light. rugged, but farther inland there is often a narrow coastal ter-
Care must be taken to avoid Jokkulflu, an 11m depth, 0.7
5.44 race, with scattered farms and forest. The fjord is deep and
mile NNE of Klovningen. practically free from dangers.
Alternative routes lead, respectively, N and S of Jokkulflu
5.44 The first reach of Nordfjorden extends to the vicinity of As-
5.47
and then between Basundskjere and Svarteskjera. neset, situated 8 miles ENE of Risoy.
Allmenningsfluene (61°54'N., 5°16'E.), marked by a light,
5.47
5.45 Fafjorden, a narrow inlet, is the farthest S of two sea- is situated on the N side of the fairway in a position 2.5 miles
ward entrances to Nordfjorden. It leads between Bremanger- ENE of Risoy. These rocks are covered by less than 1.8m of
landet and Husevagoy and connects with Vagsfjorden by a water.
shallow channel at the E end of Husevagoy. Farther E is the Skorpeholmane, a chain of islets and rocks, lies on the S side
5.47
channel that leads N from Froysjoen. of the fairway, 1 mile ENE of Risoy. Etreskallen, with a least
Ribba (61°54'N., 5°00'E.), awash, lies on the W side of the
5.45 depth of 5.5m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 0.6 mile S of
fairway 0.6 mile WSW of Kvitnes Light; between this danger Allmenningsfluene.
and the shore to the S are some above and below-water rocks. A light is situated on Asneset (61°56'N., 5°28'E.). Good an-
5.47
Spenfluene, situated on the N side of the fairway 0.4 mile S

5.45 chorage with sand bottom can be obtained near the head of the
of Kvitnes Light, consists of a group of sunken rocks, awash, at bay at Maurstad, 0.7 mile N of Asneset. Care must be taken to
their E end. avoid a 6m shoal 0.8 mile NW of the light on Asneset.
To transit Fafjorden, keep the white sector of Fafjorden Light
5.45
ahead, which leads between the dangers of Ribba and Spenflu- 5.48 From Asneset, Nordfjorden continues ESE for 19
ene. When about 0.3 mile distant from Fafjorden Light, steer a miles to Anda (61°51'N., 6°05'E.).
mid-channel course in an ESE direction and pass on either side Davika, on the S side of the fjord, is entered 2.75 miles SE of
5.48
of Bjornoy, an island 2.5 miles ESE of Fafjorden Light. The Asneset. It affords good anchorage, in depths up to 26m, sand
white sector of Skaten Light (61°52'N., 5°13'E.) leads through and stones.
the fairway N of Bjornoy; another white sector of the light Eidsfjorden extends 7 miles E from Davikfjorden. Winds
5.48
leads S of Bjornoy. from W raise a considerable sea in this branch.

Anchorage, with sand bottom, can be obtained in a cove W
5.48
Approach to Vagsfjorden of the river mouth at Starheim, on the N side of Eidsfjorden, 2

miles within the entrance. At Starheim, there is a quay, with
5.46 When E of Bjornoy, a vessel may continue E and join depths of 4 to 6m alongside.
Indreleia and proceed through Skatestraumen or proceed N to Nordfjordeid (61°54'N., 5°59'E.), at the head of Eids-
5.48
Nordfjorden by passing between the islands of Gangsoy and fjorden, is an industrial and administrative town.
Risoy. When vessels pass between these two islands, they Anchorage, with a bottom of mud, can be obtained 0.3 miles
5.48
should keep in mid-channel, favoring the W side of Risoy, SW of the head of the mole. A submarine cable lies close N of
which is steep-to. the anchorage. There are depths of 5 to 7m alongside the quay
Vagsfjorden leads between Husevagoy and Vagsoy into the
5.46 situated inside the N end of the mole.
W end of Nordfjorden. It also is the S entrance to Maloy, a port Two sets of mooring buoys, best seen on the chart, lie in the
5.48
on the SE side of Vagsoy. anchorage area and closer to shore close NNW of the Nodre
Gasholmen (61°55'N., 5°06'E.), a reef-fringed islet, lies on
5.46 Terminal quay.
the S side of the fairway in a position about 3 miles ESE of Ho- Isefjorden, a continuation of Nordfjorden, is entered 7.5
5.48
vdeneset Light. An unmarked patch, with a least charted depth miles ESE of Asneset; it extends 3 miles SE.
of 6m, lies on the N side of the channel 0.5 mile NE of Gashol- Alfoten, entered S of Hjelteneset (61°51'N., 5°47'E.), ex-
5.48
men. tends 4.5 miles WSW from the main fjord; its head ices over.
Bergsholmane Light is situated on the N side of the channel,
5.46 Hundvikfjorden, the continuation E from Isefjorden, is en-
5.48
0.9 mile E of Hovdeneset. tered between Hjelteneset and Krokeneset, 0.8 mile ENE.
Vessels that have approached Vagsfjorden from the W with
5.46 At Yksenelvane, on the S side of this reach 1 mile S of Kro-
5.48
the white sector of Hovdeneset Light ahead steer in the white keneset, the larger of two quays has depths of 9 to 14m along-
sector of Bergsholmane Light, which leads to within 0.5 mile side.
of that light. Hyen, entered E of Hyenese (61°51'N., 5°59'E.), extends 7
5.48
The white sector of Hovdeneset Light, astern, and the white

5.46 miles SSW from Hundvikfjorden.
sector of Bergsholmane Light, astern, lead N of Gasholmen in- Gloppen, entered W of Anda, branches SE from Hundvik-
5.48
to Indreleia, which leads SE, passing E of Gangsoy, and con- fjorden for 6 miles. The head of Gloppen affords spacious an-
tinues N and, E of Vagsoy through Ulvesund. chorage, in depths of 20 to 50m. Care should be taken to not
Pub. 182
anchor near the submarine cables E of this berth. vertical clearance of 42m over a width of 23m, or of 40m over
Ufjorden, the continuation of Nordfjorden E from Hundvik-
5.48 a width of 76m. The E passage has a vertical clearance of 41m
fjorden, is entered N of Anda. over a width of 50m. The W channel has a least charted depth
Innvikefjorden, the next reach E of Utfjorden, affords an-
5.48 of 10.5m and the E channel has a least charted depth of 7m.
chorage off Innvik (61°51'N., 6°37'E.), in depths of 30 to 40m. Lights are exhibited on both sides of the bridge to indicate
5.50
A quay at this village has depths of 5 to 6m alongside. the center of each passage.
Faleidfjorden, the last reach of Nordfjorden, is entered about
5.48 The flow in Maloysundet usually sets N on both the flood
5.50
2 miles NW of Innvik, and extends 7 miles E to its head. and ebb. The strongest rate is about 1 hour before HW. During
Good anchorage can be obtained about 0.6 mile N of the
5.48 springs, with a S wind, the rate is reported to reach 3 knots.
church at Olden (61°50'N., 6°49'E.), in 50 to 60m, clay. Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards off Homengra
5.50
Off Loen, the village at the head of the bay, there is good an-
5.48 (60°51'N., 4°37'E.) or Breisundet (62°27'N., 5°59'E.)
chorage, in 15 to 20m, sand and clay. Between Maloysundet and Leistholmen, there is a speed lim-
5.50
it of 6 knots, but larger vessels may proceed at 8 knots to im-

5.49 Skatestraumen, the continuation of Indreleia from prove steering if wind and current conditions make this speed
Froysjoen, leads between the SW side of Rugsundoy and Bre- necessary. In Maloysundet itself, vessels may adjust speed as
mangerlandet to Fafjorden; it is about 3 miles in length in an E- necessary for safe steering.
W direction. Stalrevet, 0.6 mile N of the N extremity of Stadlandet has a
5.50
Hornelsflua (61°52'N., 5°16'E.), on the N side of the fair-

5.49 least charted depth of 29m. It breaks in heavy weather to a dis-
way 0.25 mile WSW of Haukedalsholmane, has a least charted tant of 1.25 miles ESE, which is an area of foul ground.
depth of 1m. Barskallen, about 1 mile WSW of Kvamsoy, has a least
5.50
Kalveholmen Light is situated on the N side of the fairway, 1

5.49 depth of 28m. Svarteskjaer (62°11'N., 5°21'E.), a reef above
mile WNW of Hornelsflua; Skaten Light is situated 0.3 mile and below water, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Haugsholmen
farther W. Shrukken, a rock, lies 183m SE of Skaten Light. Light, on the NE side of the channel.
A light is situated on the SW extremity of Risoy, a little over
5.49 When making Vanylvsgapet from W or NW, pass N of Stal-
5.50
1 mile WNW of Skaten. revet and enter the white sector of Haugsholmen Light ahead.
In Skatestraumen, the current is usually W during the falling
5.49 When about 0.3 mile NW of Svarteskjaer, steer S to pass about
tide, with a rate up to 3 or 4 knots, and Eduring the rising tide, midway between Haugsholmen Light and the islets off the NE
with a rate of 2 knots. Current conditions are irregular, as wind side of Stadlandet.
and weather can greatly influence both direction and rate. The white sector of Terneskjerflu Light (62°11'N., 5°24'E.)
5.50
Vessels may enter Skatestraumen from the S by steering in

5.49 leads into the channel between Storholmen and Haugsholmen.
the white sector of Kalveholmen Light, then steering in the When the two lights marking the W end of the channel are
white sector of Skaten Light until SW of Kalveholmen Light. abeam, course may be adjusted to pass clear N of Terneskjerflu
Then steer to pass N of Skaten in the white sector of Risoy Light, then into Haugsfjorden.
Light or in the white sector of Kalveholmen Light, astern; this Anchorage, in depths of 11 to 25m, is charted 0.35 mile
5.50
leads N of a 7.5m patch close ENE of Skaten. The white sector WNW of Terneskjerflu Light.
of Risoy Light leads over this patch.
After passing N of Skaten, bring the white sector of this light
5.49 5.51 Haugsfjorden is formed between Stadlandet, Storhol-
astern; this leads S of Bjornoy into Fafjorden. Another sector men, Kvamsoy, and Haugsholmen, on the W and NW sides,
of this light, bearing astern, leads into the white sector of the and by the mainland, on the E side.
light on the E end of Gangsoy. This light ahead leads to the Ytsteflu (62°12'N., 5°27'E.), awash, lies about 0.3 mile off-
5.51
fairway between Gangsoy and Risoy. shore, 1.75 miles NE of Terneskjerflu Light.
After passing Risoy, the track leads W into Vagsfjorden and
5.49 Aramsund Light (62°12'N., 5°29'E.) is situated 2.75 miles
5.51
then N through Maloysundet, the entrance to Ulvesund. The NE of Terneskjerflu Light, in the W entrance to Aramsundet.
channel of Indreleia lies on the E side of the island of Maloy. The white sector of this light leads from a position close N of
Terneskjerflu Light, across the N end of Haugsfjorden and N of
5.50 After passing between Risoy and Gangsoy, steer for Ytsteflu. Two 10m patches lie in this white sector.
Vemmelsvikholmen (61°54'N., 5°10'E.) until Gasholmen Aramsundet leads from Haugsfjorden E to Rovdefjorden.
5.51
bears 305°, when course may be altered toward that island to The channel is marked by Aramsund Light, at the W en-
5.51
bring the light on Gangsoy astern, which leads between trance; Stabbane Light, in the E entrance; and a third light
Gasholmen and the unmarked patch on the N side of the about midway between these two.
channel. Vessels then continue NW in the white sector of To enter Aramsundet, vessels, after passing Ytsteflu, should
5.51
Bergsholmane Light. steer to pass S of the 6.5m shoal lying about 0.4 mile WNW of
Kariskjer Light (61°55'N., 5°07'E.) is situated on a point
5.50 Aramsund Light, then between this light and the wreck and 9m
0.75 mile NNE of Gasholmen. depth 0.15 mile NE. Then course may be shaped to pass W and
A light is situated on the S extremity of Maloy, 0.45 mile
5.50 S of Stabbane Light. Larger vessels may pass N of the iron
NNW of Kariskjer Light. perch 183m NW of Stabbane Light and S of Raedene, a reef
Maloysundet is the channel between the island of Maloy and
5.50 awash, 0.15 mile N of the light. This track leads over a 7.5m
the mainland and is the approach, from S, to the port of Maloy. depth.
Maloysundet is spanned by a bridge, and is divided into two
5.50 Rovdefjorden extends about 3 miles SE from Stabbane Light
5.51
separate channels by the central pillar. The W passage has a to Saudeholmen Light (62°11'N., 5°36'E.), then ENE to the
Pub. 182
5.50 Vartdalsfjorden
entrance to Voldsfjorden. Vartdalsfjorden is the NE extension Vartdalsfjorden leads 10 miles NE toward Sulefjorden. It is
5.53
of Rovdefjorden. flanked by high, partly-wooded mountains. The fjord is deep,

and almost everywhere steep-to up to the shore. It is easy to
5.52 Rovdeskjeret Light (62°11'N., 5°45'E.) is situated on navigate by day.
the S side of Rovdefjorden, 3.75 miles E of Saudeholmen Vessels may enter Vartdalsfjorden with the white sector of
5.53
Light. There are a number of dangers in the vicinity of this Ysonya Light astern. After passing Skolten (62°16'N.,
light. 6°00'E.), a 2m patch, keep Ysonya Light bearing 222° astern.
There is anchorage available off Knarrdal, Little Rovde, and
5.52 This leads through the NE part of Vartdalsfjorden.
Sundnesbogen, which lie 0.4 mile E, 0.9 mile E, and 1.5 miles Orstafjorden (62°14'N., 6°00'E.) leads off the SE side of
5.53
ENE, respectively, from Rovdeskjeret Light, in depths up to Vartdalsfjorden and extends 5 miles SE. It is surrounded by
33m, sand. When approaching these anchorages from the W, it mountains and is almost free of dangers.
is advisable to keep well N of the dangers in the vicinity of Ro- Raudoy and Raudoyholmen, close E, lie in the entrance to
5.53
vdeskjeret Light. Orstafjorden. Raudoy Light (62°14'N., 5°59'E.) is situated on

Vessels may keep Stabbane Light astern, which leads into
5.52 Raudoyholmen. Vessels can anchor, in 25 to 40m, sand, 0.25
the W part of Rovdefjorden. Pass S of Saudeholmen Light, mile NW of Raudoy Light.
then steer ENE with the white sector of that light bearing Vessels may enter with the white sector of Ysonya Light
5.53
astern. Vessels may continue E, with the white sector of Ys- bearing astern, which leads S of Raudoy. The white sector of
noya Light bearing ahead. Raudoy Light bearing astern, leads to the vicinity of Lianes,
When about 2 miles WSW of Ysonya Light, alter course to
5.52 about 2 miles SSE.
the E, then steer NNE to pass between Ysonya Light and the Orsta (62°12'N., 6°08'E.) (World Port Index No. 23118) lies
5.53
dangers 1 mile E, and enter Vartdalsfjorden. at the head of Orstafjorden. It is the site of several industries.
Syvdsfjorden extends 6 miles SSE from Rovdefjorden in a
5.52 There are several quays, one being 61m in length. There are
position 1.5 miles SE of Saudeholmen Light. depths alongside the quays from 1.7 to 7m.
Anchorage is available SW of the quays, in 15 to 45m, sand
5.53
5.53 Voldsfjorden (62°12'N., 5°56'E.) extends 9.25 miles and mud.

SSE from its entrance at the E end of Rovdefjorden. Its two in-
ner arms, Dalsfjorden and Austefjorden, are deep and clear of 5.54 Indreleia continues through Sulefjorden, between Ha-
dangers. reidlandet and Sula, from the junction of Vartdalsfjorden and
An ammunition dump is situated close within the entrance to
5.53 Storfjorden, into Breisundet.
Voldsfjorden. For the requirements for non-military vessels entering Nor-
5.54
Pub. 182
wegian internal waters, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Plan- ous quays that range in depth from 1.4 to 7.7m.
ning Guide) Arctic Ocean. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500 gt
5.56
Hjorungneset Light (Hjoringnes Light) (62°21'N., 6°07'E.),

5.54 and all vessels carrying dangerous cargo. Pilotage should be
stands on the NE end of Hjorungneset. This light is situated on ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
the S side of the E entrance to Sulefjorden. A monument/cairn Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
is located a little over 1 mile WNW of Hjorungneset Light. Vessels should call the Alesund pilot station 2 hours prior to
5.56
Overaflu, a reef awash, lies 0.15 mile offshore, 1 mile NW of

5.54 arrival on VHF channel 16. If the station does not respond ei-
Hjorungneset. ther the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio station will reply and
Eltraneset (62°26'N., 6°03'E.), the W extremity of Sula, is
5.54 relay details to the pilot station.
fronted by a shore reef which extends about 0.2 mile SW. Eltra- Pilots board in the following positions:
5.56
flu, about 0.2 mile N of Eltraneset, has a least depth of 10m. a. 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E.
Hareid (62°22'N., 6°02'E.), situated on the SW side of
5.54 b. 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E. (by prior arrangement)
Sulefjorden, 2.25 miles WNW of Hjorungneset, is protected by Contact Information.—See the table titled Stranda—Con-
5.56
two moles. The dredged depth inside the harbor was 5m; the tact Information.
depths alongside the quays ranged up to 6m.
Brandal (62°24'N., 6°01'E.) is a small harbor about 2 miles
5.54
Stranda—Contact Information
NNW of Hareid. There is a ferry quay, 35m long, with depths
of 1.7 to 4.6m alongside; a fish oil quay, 108m long, with VHF VHF channels 13 and 16
depths of 4 to 7.8m alongside; and a disused factory quay, Telephone 47-46-411113
110m long, with depths of 2.9 to 4.2m alongside.
5.55 Storfjorden, with its continuations, extends about 55
miles SE from the junction of Vartdalsfjorden and Sulafjorden. 5.57 Sunnylvsfjorden extends 13 miles SSW from its junc-
The terrain alternates between wild mountain areas and pro-
5.55
tion with Storfjorden and Norddalsfjorden.
ductive lowlands and valleys. Geirangerfjorden leads about 7 miles E from the SE side of
5.57
Storfjorden extends ENE about 18 miles to Gausneset

5.55
Sunnylvsfjorden between Lundanes (62°07'N., 6°58'E.) and
(62°28'N., 6°46'E.), then in a general SSE direction about 14 Nokkeneset, 0.75 mile SW.
miles to its continuation as Norddalsfjorden. Both of these fjords are deep and clear of dangers, but navi-
5.57
Hjorundfjorden, with its two inner arms, Norangsfjorden and

5.55
gators are advised to keep well out into the center owing to the
Storfjorden, is entered from a position 7.25 miles ENE of Hjo- risk of rock falls from the precipitous mountains.
rungnes Light. These fjords extend 18 miles in a SSE direction. Hellesylt (62°05'N., 6°53'E.), at the head of Sunnylvs-
5.57
They are surrounded by high mountains which fall steeply to fjorden, has a quay 32m long, with depths of 5.6 to 8.0m along-
the water. side. Vessels may anchor, in 28 to 68m, sand, 0.2 mile NE of
the church.
5.56 Sykkylvfjorden (62°24'N., 6°33'E.) is entered 4 Geiranger (62°06'N., 7°12'E.) lies at the head of Geiranger-
5.57
miles E of Hjorundfjorden. Anchorage is available 2.5 miles fjorden, 8 miles E of Lundanes. The S side of the ferry quay is
within the entrance near the middle of the fjord, in depths of 28 available for berthing and is 50m long, with depths of 3.5 to
to 35m. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 16m, spans the 8.4m alongside.
fjord about 0.3 mile N of Vik. Anchorage is available, in depths of 30 to 40m, sand and
5.57
At Sykkylven, 1.5 miles within the fjord on the E side, there

5.56
clay, as seen on the chart.
are quays, exposed to W winds, with depths up to 7.5m along- Care is necessary to avoid submarine cables which are laid
5.57
side. along the SW shoreline and the cables which extend across the
At Ikornes, on the W side of the fjord SW of Sykkylven,
5.56
fjord in a N direction from the S shore in a position 0.85 mile
there are depths up to 7.2m alongside the quays. NW of the quay.
Stordalsvika (62°23'N., 6°58'E.) opens off the E side of
5.56
Storfjorden, 6.75 mile SSE of Gausneset. Stordal, at the head 5.58 Norddalsfjorden leads E from the SE end of
of the bay, has berths with 1.1 to 10.3m alongside. Anchorage Storfjorden and then in to Tafjorden. Both fjords are deep and
is available in the NE corner of Stordalsvika, in 16 to 27m, present no navigational difficulty.
mud. There is anchorage off Tafjorden (62°14'N., 7°25'E.), at the
5.58
Stranda (62°18'N., 6°57'E.), on the W side of Storfjorden,

5.56
head of the fjord, in 30 to 50m, sand and clay, clear of the
about 4 miles SSW of Stordalsvika, is the principal town in the banks at the river mouth.
inner part of the fjord. Sandsfjorden (62°15'N., 5°31'E.) is an alternate route from
5.58
the sea to Rovdefjorden and the inner route to Alesund. This

Stranda Home Page fjord lies between Sandsoy, and the islands extending S from
this island, on the W, and Gurskoy on the E.
http://www.stranda-hamnevesen.no From Sondre Flavaerleia, a S course in mid-channel avoids
5.58
all dangers and leads clear E of Kleveboen (62°16'N., 5°30'E.),

Winds—Weather.—Strong winds raise considerable seas
5.56
a 2.3m patch lying off the NE point of Sandsoy.
and make berthing difficult at the quays. The white sector of Stabbane Light, bearing ahead, leads to-
5.58
Depths—Limitations.—There are several berths at the vari-

5.56 ward the S end of Standsfjorden. The white sector of Sand-
Pub. 182
knowledge.
Heroyfjorden may be approached with the white sector of
5.59
Flavaer Light (62°19'N., 5°35'E.) bearing ahead, which leads

N of Stadlandet; however, this track leads over charted depths
of 30m. A racon is located at the light tower.
5.60 Sondre Flavaerlia leads between the N side of Sand-

soy and a group of islets, rocks, and shoals about 1 mile N.
Flesene (62°17'N., 5°27'E.), marked by an iron perch, lies
5.60
near the W end of this group.

Sandsfjorden, previously described in paragraph 5.58, may
5.60
be entered from Sondre Flavaerlia.

The white sector of Hidsneset Light (62°17'N., 5°33'E.), at
5.60
the W end of Gurskoy, leads S of Flesene and N of the foul

ground extending NW of Sandsoy.
Sondre Flavaerlia then passes NE. The white sector of Hids-
5.60
neset Light, bearing astern, leads W of Langflu, which lies 1

By Ximonic (Simo Rananen) (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons
5.57
mile NNE of that light, and W of Blomrokkene, which lies
5.57 Geiranger 0.45 mile NE of Langflu, and into the E end of Mellomste Fla-
vaerlia.
shamn Light (62°15'N., 5°30'E.), bearing astern, leads SSE The white sector of Klubben Light (62°19'N., 5°37'E.), situ-
5.60
into the W entrance of Rovdefjorden. ated at the SE end of the Flavaer Group, bearing ahead, leads S
Sandshamn, a harbor protected by a mole, is situated on the
5.58
of Langflu.
E side of Sandsoy. There is a berth on the inner side of the From E of Langflu, Sondre Flavaerlia leads ENE to pass be-
5.60
mole 25m long, with depths of 8.4 to 10.3m alongside. tween Klubben Light and an iron perch which marks Kvale-
Gursken, a narrow inlet, is entered with the white sector of
5.58
baen, a 3m patch, 0.2 mile S.
Sandshamn Light, bearing astern. Saltflu, awash, lies in this The white sector of Steinsholmskjer Light, 1.25 miles ESE
5.60
sector about 3 miles distant from the light. A mole lies on the N of Klubben Light, bearing ahead, leads between Klubben Light
side of the inlet, N of Saltflu, at Haugsbygda. and Kvalebaen.
Vagen (62°13'N., 5°39'E.) lies at the head of Gursken, where
5.58
Mellomste Flavaerlia leads ENE directly toward the Flavaer
5.60
there is a shipyard. There is a fitting out quay at the shipyard, Group. This channel is entered as directed for Heroyfjorden.
60m long, with depths of 3.5 to 7m alongside. The sea sometimes breaks over Hoven, the 30m patch lying
5.60
about 1 mile N of Sandsoy, near the entrance to Mellomste Fla-

5.59 Breisunddjupet, which has depths of over 200m, leads vaerlia.
8 miles SE from position 62°31'N, 5°40'E into Breisundet. After passing Penningflu (62°19'N., 5°33'E.), 0.8 mile
5.60
A number of shoals and patches lie between Runde and the S

5.59
WSW of Flavaer Light, course may be altered N to join Nordre
side of Breisunddjupet. Nyttarsskallane, with a depth of 24m, Flavaerlia, or E to join Sondre Flavaerlia, by steering in the
and Golla, three patches of 9m each, lie 3.5 miles NNW and 3 white sector of Steinsholmskjer Light. Nordre Flavaerlia leads
miles NNE, respectively, from Runde Light. ENE, passing S of Skorpa and Nerlandsoy.
Heavy seas have been observed in the Breisunddjupet and
5.59
The white sector of Kyrkjeholmen Light, leads between
5.60
Breisundet area with winds from the W and NW. The outgoing Langfallet, partly awash, and Store Godoyflu, at the W en-
current is approximately 1 knot from Storfjorden and causes trance of Nordre Flavaerlia. When within 0.5 mile of Kyrkje-
choppy waves and heavier seas. holmen Light, steer in an E direction to pass N of the Flavaer
Refraction centers will occur on the leeward side of the local
5.59
Group, then steer SE with the white sector of Kyrkjeholmen
shoal areas on both sides of Breidsunddjupet. Light as tern, which leads into the inner part of Heroyfjorden.
Vallabaane (62°28'N., 5°41'E.), with a least depth of 2.4m,
5.59
Tronden (62°19'N., 5°38'E.), above-water, lies in this white
5.60
and Keipbaane, with a least depth of 7m, lie 3.5 miles NNW sector, about 0.5 mile E of Klubben Light.
and 4 miles NNW, respectively, from Grasoyane Light. Other Well-sheltered anchorage is available in a bay off Moldtu
5.60
shoals lie in this area. An 18m depth is charted 1.25 miles ENE (62°18'N., 5°38'E.), on the N coast of Gurskoy, in 20 to 30m,
of Vallabaane. sand. The anchorage lies 0.9 mile SSE of Klubben Light, and is
Heroyfjorden lies between Sandsoy and Gurskoy on the S,
5.59
entered from the E end of Sondre Flavaerlia.
and Skorpa, Nerlandsoy, Bersoy, and Leinoy on the N. Moldtustranda (62°18'N., 5°39'E.) (World Port Index No.
5.60
In Heroyfjorden, there are many islets separated by rock-ob-

5.59
23115) is entered SSE of Steinsholmskjer Light, and lies E of
structed channels, which in places are narrow. The three princi- Moldtu. There are several quays in Moldtustranda, with
pal channels through these dangers are Sondre Flavaerlia, lengths from 10 to 130m and depths up to 10m alongside.
Mellomste Flavaerlia, and Nordre Flavaerlia, which are collec- There is a fish meal factory with a large quay installation.
5.60
tively known as Flavaerlia. Vessels approaching from seaward may embark pilots at the
5.60
These channels lead to the intricate passages which lead N of

5.59
pilot station NE of Runde. Customs officers from the port of
Gurskoy and NW of Hareidlandet into Breisundet. Some of Alesund meet inbound vessels at the above pilot station.
these channels can only be used by small vessels with local
Pub. 182
Breisundet long and has depths of 7.5 to 11.1m alongside.
5.61 Heissafjorden (62°27'N., 6°08'E.) leads 2.5 miles E 5.62 Hoggsteinen Light (62°28'N., 6°02'E.) is situated off
from Breisundet into Borgundfjorden; at its E end gives access the SE extremity of Godoya, on the NE side of Breisundet.
to Aspevagen, which is the principal entrance to Alesund Djupeflua, with a charted depth of 12m, lies 0.3 mile SSE of
5.62
Havn. the light. Skarvoyflua, a 5m patch which breaks in bad weath-

Alesund Havn (62°28'N., 6°09'E.) consists of Aspevagen, S
5.61 er, lies about 1 mile E of the light.
of Aspoya; Steinvagsundet and Steinvagen, W of Aspoya; and Nordtaren, with a least charted depth of 7.5m, lies about
5.62
Indre Havn, E of Aspoya. midway between Heissa and Godoya, 1 mile ENE of Hogg-
Aspevagen is entered E of Slinningen, the E extremity of
5.61 steinen Light.
Heissa; it is the principal entrance to Alesund Havn. To enter Valderhaugfjorden, which lies N of Alesund, steer
5.62
Submarine cables are laid from Slinningsodden, the NE ex-

5.61 in the junction of the red and green sectors of Havsteinen
tremity of Slinningen, NE to Norvoya. Light (62°29'N., 6°04'E.). This track leads over Djupeflua and
Aspa (62°28'N., 6°09'E.), a reef awash, lies in the middle of
5.61 W of Nordtaren.
Aspevagen. When W of Erkneflua, which lies close N of Nordtaren, steer
5.62
Vikanesflu Light (62°28'N., 6°07'E.) is situated in the SW

5.61 NE with the white sector of Hoggsteinen Light astern; this will
part of Aspevagen. The white sector of this light bearing be- lead to a position NW of Alesund.
tween 262° and 269° leads from N of Slinningen, S of Aspa to Foul ground extends about 0.2 mile N from the NE extremity
5.62
the anchorages in the S part of Aspevagen. A depth of 9.1m of Heissa. Steer a SE course from the white sector of Hogg-
lies in this white sector. steinen Light to pass E of this foul ground, to the berths on the
Anchorage may be taken, in 30m, 0.35 mile E of Vikanesflu
5.61 N side of Alesund.
Light and, in 36m, 0.7 mile ESE of the same light. Olsskjer, a partly submerged reef, lies on the N side of the
5.62
There is a quay at the tank installation on the S shore of As-

5.61 fairway, about 0.5 mile N of Aspoya Olsskjerboen, a 3m shoal,
pevagen, about 0.2 mile SE of Vikanesflu Light, which is 75m lies 0.15 mile ENE of this reef.
Pub. 182
6.
Sector 6—Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
Pub. 182
123
125
SECTOR 6
NORWAY—BREIDSUND-DJUPET TO TRONDHEIM
Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Bre-

6.0 Maritime Organization, establish a safe route for sea transport.
idsund-Djupet to Halten, including the seaward approaches to 6.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
Indreleia, the connecting fjords, and Trondheim. The inner (TSS) in Norwegian waters see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions
route N of Alesund is included in this sector. (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
6.1Vessel Traffic Service.—Norwegian Oceanic Region Vessel
General Remarks Traffic Service (NOR VTS) is in operation for vessels transit-
ing the Norwegian Economic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/
6.1 Winds—Weather.—Between Alesund and Trond- Sweden border in the S to the Norway/Russia border in the N.
heim, during autumn, winter and spring, the weather is fre- The NEZ also includes the areas around Svalbard and Jan
quently unsettled and stormy. During this period the prevailing Mayen Island. For further information, see paragraph 1.1.
wind is SW. In summer, the wind is most frequently between N 6.1Caution.—Due to continued damage to floating navigation
and NE. aids in the area, mariners are requested to give a wide berth
Tides—Currents.—During settled weather, the tidal cur- when passing them. Vessels are to report observance of any
rents set NE with the flood and SW with the ebb. They attain dysfunctional or irregular lights or damaged buoyage to the
their greatest strength at a distance of 30 to 50 miles offshore. nearest coast station.
At 30 to 50 miles offshore, on this part of the coast, the NE tid- 6.1Fishing is prohibited in the environmentally sensitive sea ar-
al current is generally the stronger and the most constant. ea, best seen on the chart, located in the vicinity of the Ak-
6.1When the wind is continuously E the tidal current is always tivneset (62°30'N., 3°36'E.) continental slope, approximately
SW. 140 miles W of Alesund.
6.1During the winter months, when the nights are long and the
visibility is frequently bad, vessels approaching land with a W Off-lying Dangers
wind should exercise caution to avoid being set N of the har-
bor, channel, or channel entrance. 6.2 Dangerous Waves Areas.—Coastal areas where re-
6.1Within the various channels of the fjords the tidal currents, peated marine casualties occur, due to heavy seas in rough
as a rule, flow NE with the rising tide. The tidal currents in weather, are frequently designated by the Norwegian authori-
some channels are negligible, while a rate of 3 to 4 knots have ties as Danger Areas.
been observed in others. Stattlandett (62°12'N., 5°00'E.) is exposed to SW to N winds
From Breidsund-Djupet, the outer coast trends in a general which raise heavy seas.
NE direction for about 39 miles to Buadjupet. From Buadjupet, 6.2Haugsholmen (62°11'N., 5°23'E.) and Stalrevet (62°13'N.,
the coast trends in a general ENE direction for about 27 miles 5°11'E.) are particularly known as rough sea areas.
to Kristiansund. This coast is fronted by islands, groups of is- 6.2Breidsunddjupet and Breidsundet (62°28'N., 5°50'E.) are
lets, and rocks which extend up to 8.5 miles off the mainland. areas where W and NW winds cause heavy seas.
6.1From Kristiansund, the islands and rocks lying off the coast 6.2Haustadvika (63°00'E., 7°00'E.), extensive offshore shoals,
extend about 75 miles NE to the islands of Halen. These is- completely exposed to SW to NW strong winds. These condi-
lands are located on the W side of the main N approach to tions are especially severe in the area of Buadjupet, Bjornsund
Trondheim. (62°54'N., 6°45'E.), and Kolbeinsflua,.
6.1For details and information concerning the color and bear- 6.2Ytrefjorden (63°12'N., 7°50'E.) is an area extending from
ings of the sector lights mentioned within this sector, see the SW of Gripholen to Ytrefjorden S of Smola, where depths are
Light List. 100 to 150m. Griptarane, the westernmost shallow area where
6.1Rain, fog, and storms usually occur during SW winds. The the sea breaks heavily, lies about 11 miles W of Smola.
least rainfall and the clearest weather are experienced during 6.2The Folla (63°55'N., 9°30'E.) area is known for rough seas
the spring. Summer is the season with the greatest number of with strong W or NW winds, especially in the winter. Many
foggy days; however, at Trondheim, fog is more prevalent in large and small ships have been lost in the area through the
autumn and winter. years. The coast line is steep-to, with depths of 300 to 500m
6.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning near offshore that also contributes to rough conditions, along
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. with the outflow of tidal current.
6.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. 6.3 Oil and Gas Fields.—Draugen Oil Field lies 45 miles
6.1A traffic separation scheme and recommended route is estab- WNW from Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.) A lighted con-
lished off Halten connects with the existing TSS and recom- crete platform LF3F (64°21.2'N., 7°47'.0E.) stands on in the oil
mended route lying off Runde in the S. The scheme can best be field. There are numerous underwater installations within 6.5
viewed on the chart. This section off Halten is part of the larger miles of the platform.
previously-existing offshore routing schemes connecting key 6.3The Njord Oil Field lies 16 miles W of Draugen and was
points off the coast. These routes, adopted by the International temporarily shut down in 2016. At that time, Njord A, the
Pub. 182
126 Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim
floating steel platform unit containing drilling and processing Alesundaksla (62°28.5'N., 6°11.0'E.) rises to an elevation of
facilities, was towed to shore for reinforcement and modifica- 197m, on the island of Norvoya, close E of Alesund. It is used
tions. Njord B, the associated floating storage unit, is also pres- as a mark in the approach to Giskesundet.
ently undergoing refurbishment. The field expects to resume 6.4Klovgrynna, an 18m patch; Dyngeskallen, a 26m patch; and
production in 2020. Stadsgrunnskallen, a 20m patch, lie about 5 miles WNW of the
6.3Caution.—An environmentally sensitive sea area and ma- NW extremity of Godoya.
rine reserve, best seen on the chart, lies due S of the Draugen 6.4Olsflua (62°30'N., 5°51'E.), an 11m patch, and Lyren, a 16m
Oil Field. Trawling is prohibited in this area. patch, lie 3 and 2 miles W, respectively, from the NW extremity of
6.3Asgard, Norway’s largest and most complex offshore devel- Godoya.
opment, is situated 87 miles NW of Halten Light and consists 6.4To enter Giskesundet (62°30'N., 6°01'E.) from the W, Alnes
of three permanent structures, as follows: Light, just open N of the highest point of Havsteinen, bearing
1. Asgard B (65°06.6'N., 6°47.5'E.), a floating semi-sub- 092° leads N of Keipbaane, but directly over Olsflua.
mersible facility for gas and condensate processing, is moored 6.4The NW extremity of Godoya, in line with the S point of
with 16 anchor lines, each extending a distance of 1,900m. Havsteinen bearing 098°, leads close S of Klovgrynna and Dy-
2. Asgard A, a floating production storage and offload- ngeskallen and N of Olsflua toward Giskesundet.
ing vessel (FPSO) located about 3.2 miles SSW of Asgard B, 6.4Vessels may approach Giskesundet at night with the white
is moored with 12 anchor lines. sector of Erkna Light.
3. Asgard C, a floating storage and offloading vessel 6.4A middle course steered through Giskesundet avoids the
(FSO) located about 2.5 miles ENE of Asgard B, is moored dangers and Valderhaugfjorden may be entered by passing N or
with nine anchor lines, each extending a length of 1,200m. S of Havsteinen.
6.3Gas is delivered via a submarine pipeline running 385 miles 6.4Vessels having entered Valderhaugfjorden whose destination
from Asgard B to Kallsto, located on the mainland 6 miles S of is Alesund, proceed as previously directed.
Haugesund (59°25'N., 5°16'E.).
6.3Kristin Oil Field (64°59'N., 6°33'E.), situated 6 miles SW 6.5 Fauskane (62°34'N., 5°45'E.), shoals with a least
of Asgard A, is a semi-submersible processing facility. Gas is depth of 8.8m, lie in the NW approach to Giskesundet, about 8
transported via the Asgard Transport System to the Karsto Ter- miles NW of Godoya. These are marked by breakers in any
minal. Light oil is transferred to the Asgard C facility for stor- swell and a lighted buoy moored close W. Onglegrunnen, a
age and export. 17m patch, and Kvalsbaen, a 2m patch, lie 6 and 4.75 miles, re-
6.3Numerous wells, structures, and other obstructions exist on spectively, NW of Godoya. Kvalsbaen is usually marked by
the sea bed within the boundaries of Kristin Oil Field and breakers.
Asgard Oil Field, which are best seen on the chart. Anchoring Langeskjeret (62°32'N., 5°52'E.), an islet marked by a bea-
6.5
and fishing are prohibited within 500m of the sea bed installa- con, lies 4 miles NW of Godoya. A chain of rocks extends 1
tions. A lighted buoy is moored close N of a well located 9.5 mile N to Leiafalla, a rock, awash. Oddebaen, a group of rocks,
miles N of Asgard B. awash, lie 0.85 mile NW of Langeskjeret.
6.3Statoil Marin VTS conducts radar surveillance from these Leiafallet, rocks, awash; Alnesbreidflua, awash; Bjornebaen,
6.5
offshore structures and can be contacted on VHF channel 6. awash; and Alnesraunen, marked by a beacon; lie 1.25 miles
Vessels are requested to pass at least 3 miles off all installa- NW, 2 miles NW, 2 miles NW and 2 miles NW, respectively, of
tions. Godoya.
6.3Caution.—Submerged obstructions, best seen on the chart, Vessels approaching Giskesundet from NW keep the SW
6.5
lie near Asgard, in position 65°09.8'N, 6°29.6'E and in position point of Godoya in line with the top of the SW slope of Sula
65°08.2'N, 6°28.6'E. Numerous obstructions lie W of Halden bearing 125°. This track will lead SW of Fauskane and Ongle-
Bank, including in the vicinity of Heidrun Platform. An ob- grunnen, but Olsflua lies close N of this track further inshore.
struction area with a radius of 1.3 miles lies SW of the Njord
Oil Field, at a distance of 19 miles, in position 64°01.8'N, 6.6 Giskesundet, between Godoya and Giske (62°30'N.,
6°45.0'E. 6°03'E.), 1 mile N, gives access to Indreleia from seaward and
is used by vessels leaving Alesund for the open sea. It is affect-
Breidsund-Djupet to Buadjupet (Buddjupet) ed by strong mountain squalls from Godoya, when winds are
strong between S and W.
6.4 The coast NNE of Breidsund-Djupet, the NW ap- 6.6When entering Giskesundet, the NW extremity of Godoya
proach to Alesund and the recommended fairway to Alesund, should be given a wide berth, owing to the banks which extend
is fringed with a number of islands which are fronted by foul up to 0.2 mile from it. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles NW from
ground to a distance of 6 miles in places. Vessels approaching Giske, and 0.3 mile SW.
the coast from seaward should maintain a considerable dis- 6.6Erkna Light (62°33'N., 5°56'E.), situated on the summit of
tance offshore until their position is positively determined. an island 1.75 miles W of Vigra, is a useful landfall light.
Vallabaane, with a charted depth of 2.4m, lies about 7 miles 6.6Synesfjellet (62°33'N., 6°02'E.), 87m high, is situated near
W of Godoya. Keipbaane lies 0.6 mile NNW of the 2.4m the SW extremity of Vigra. Blindheimsfjellet, 77m high, and
depth. Molnesfjellet, 128m high, are situated 1.25 miles and 2.5 miles
Alnes Light (62°29'N., 5°58'E.), situated on the NW extrem- NE, respectively, from Synesfjellet.
ity of Godoya, is a good mark for making Giskesundet, the pas- 6.6Storholmane (62°39'N., 5°56'E.), 5.5 miles NW of Vigra,
sage between the islands of Godoya and Giske. consists of three easily identified islands.
Pub. 182
Sector 6. Norway—Breidsund-Djupet to Trondheim 127
6.4 By Svema [CC BY-SA 4.0 (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

6.4 Draugen Platform
Storholmen (62°39'N., 5°56'E.) is the largest of the three is-

6.6 6.8 The island of Mia (62°40'N., 6°38'E.), 6 miles E of
lands which comprise the group. A light is situated on this is- Flemsoya, rises to a height of 533m. Several hummocks pro-
land. trude from its summit.
The waters N and E of Storholmen can be difficult to navi-
6.6 6.8Skjerdingen, on the mainland about 5 miles SSE of the sum-
gate without local knowledge, despite the ample provision of mit of Mia, has a saddle-shaped summit 1,062m high, and is
navigational lights. visible for a considerable distance at sea.
6.8Farther NE, on the coast about 30 miles from Flemsoya, will
6.7 Lepsoya (62°37'N., 6°11'E.), Haramsoya, and Flem- be seen Stemshesten, 667m high, and Maelen, 769m high.
soya are easily identified, especially when the mountains in the 6.8Jendemsfjellet (62°48'N., 7°03'E.), 633m high, is situated
background are visible. When viewed from the NW, these is- on the mainland, about 11 miles SSW of Maelen;. It may be
lands appear equal in width to the openings, about 2 miles, be- identified by its perfectly round form.
tween them. 6.8Gulberget, 160m high, about 7 miles NNW of Jendemsfjel-
6.7Godalde, the summit of Lepsoya, is 489m high. Mannen, at let. The hill rises from a level plain and is conspicuous because
the center of Haramsoya, is 347m high; Skulen, the summit of of its detached position. Its summit is almost flat and presents
Flemsoya, is 493m high. the same appearance when sighted from various bearings. A
6.7Lepsoyklovningen (62°38'N., 6°03'E.), an islet, lies 3.25 church 1 mile WSW of the hill is also visible from seaward.
miles E of Storholmen. Kloningsgrunnen, a 4.8m patch, lies
0.25 mile S of Lepsoyklovningen; Klovningsfallet, a 2m patch, 6.9 Vigrafjorden lies between Vigra and Lepsoya, which
lies 0.4 mile SE of the same islet. lies 1.75 miles NE. Vigrafjorden is entered from the vicinity of
6.7Knappen (62°38'N., 6°02'E.), an isolated above-water rock, Storholmen, about 7 miles WNW.
lies 0.7 mile S of Lepsoyklovningen. Nordreflua, a 3m patch, The recommended route into Vigrafjorden by day leads E
lies about 1 mile W of Knappen. Melingskjeret, above water, from a position 0.4 mile S of Storholmen, then passes between
lies 1.25 miles SW of Nordreflua. Knappen and Klovningsgrunnen, then turns SE, passing W of
6.7A light is situated on Rossholmen (62°36'N., 6°03'E.), an is- Flatskjeret or E of Flatskjergrunnen.
let 1.25 miles NW of Vigra. Rossholmbaen, a 1.5m patch, lies 6.9When E of Flatskjergrunnen, steer SSE with the white sector
0.45 mile N of the light. of Innholmen Light (62°38'N., 6°07'E.), astern, which leads
6.7Flatskjeret lies 1.5 miles ENE of Rossholmen; Flatskjergrun- to the S part of Vigrafjorden.
nen, a 1.7m patch, lies 0.2 mile farther ENE. 6.9When Rognodden, the E extremity of Vigra, bears 270°, en-
ter the white sector of Oksebasen Light (62°31'N., 6°09'E.)
Pub. 182
until about 0.5 mile distant from the light, then change course A mid-channel course through Nogvafjorden leads clear of
6.11
to pass midway between Oksebasen Light and the island of dangers; however, a 15m patch lies 0.9 mile ENE of Kjehol-
Valderoya, about 0.5 mile distant, W. men Light, and a 16m patch lies 0.25 mile farther E.
6.9Enter the white sector of Gildreneset Light (62°30'N., At night the white sector of Kjeholmen Light (62°42'N.,
6.11
6°11'E.) bearing between 116° and 120°, ahead, which leads 6°15'E.) leads between Grunnflua and Breidflua.
through a channel about 0.2 mile wide. The white sector of Fjortoftneset Light, 2 miles ENE of Kje-
6.11
6.9When clear of the channel, steer SW and enter Valderhaug- holmen Light, leads N of the dangers close off Flemsoya.
fjorden, then SE to Alesund or continue SW through Indreleia The white sector of Kjeholmen Light bearing astern, and the
6.11
as previously directed. white sector of Fjortoftneset Light bearing, astern, lead from
6.9Caution.—The glide path for aircraft landing at Alesund air- Nogvafjorden into Haroyfjorden.
port passes over Vigrafjorden 3 to 4 miles N of Hamnoya.
6.9At the E limit of the approach zone, the aircraft will be at an 6.12 Haroyfjorden (62°52'N., 6°55'E.) is bound on the
altitude of only about 60m when descending to the runway. NW by Flemsoya, Fjortoft, Haroya, Finnoya, and Sandoya, and
on the E by Dryna, Midoya, the NW end of Otteroya, and the
6.10 Lepsoyrevet (62°36'N., 6°15'E.), a shallow reef of islets and rocks SW of Gossa.
shingle, sand, and shells, with rocky heads, extends from Lep- The current through Haroyfjorden usually flows NE, with
6.12
soya to the mainland, about 2 miles SE. This is the shallowest the strongest flow during the rising tide.
part of Indreleia; a depth of little more than 5m can be carried
across it. A bridge, best seen on the chart, crosses over the reef. 6.13 Nyhamna (Nyhavna) (62°51'N., 6°57'E.) is a gas ter-
Two channels pass through the bridge, with vertical clearances minal situated on the N side of Gossa, about 4 miles SE of the
of 7m and 41m, respectively. entrance to Haroyfjorden.
Unexpected and unsteady winds are liable to blow off the
6.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is provided by
6.13
mainland and off Lepsoya. Mongstad (paragraph 5.7). Pilotage should be ordered using
The tidal currents flow NE and SW. The flow is strong and is
6.10 SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot
greatly influenced by wind. Booking Center at an additional cost.
A light is shown from the head of a breakwater extending
6.10 Pilots board in the following positions:
6.13
0.15 mile from the shore, on the SE side of Lepsoyrevet. 1. Vessels greater than 25,000 gross tons—Pilots board
The fairway across Lepsoyrevet is entered about 0.3 mile
6.10 by helicopter N of Ona (62°56'N., 6°27'E.).
SSW of Sore Kverna. The white sector of Lepsoyrevet Light 2. Vessels less than 25,000 gross tons—In Breisundet S
leads toward the entrance of the fairway. The fairway leads NE of Godoy (Godoya), in position 62°26'50.4''N, 5°58'51.0''E.
to Haramsfjorden, and is marked by buoys. Regulations.—A cautionary area has been established in the
6.13
When clear of Lepsoyrevet, course may be shaped to pass

6.10 water area bounded, as follows:
NW of Haugneset (62°37'N., 6°20'E.), or NW through Ha- 1. North boundary—latitude 62°56'52.8''N.
ramsfjorden, to the open sea. 2. West boundary—longitude 6°33'48.0''E.
The waters NW of Lepsoya are foul and should not be en-
6.10 3. South boundary—latitude 62°38'40.8''N.
tered without local knowledge. 4. East boundary—longitude 7°22'19.8''E.
Haramsfjorden is difficult to access and should not be at-
6.10 Vessels should use extreme caution when navigating in this
6.13
tempted without a pilot. area. In addition, vessels underway or at anchor in the waters
Pass S of Hella (62°41'N., 5°59'E.) and N of Utbaane, covered by the cautionary area must maintain a continuous lis-
awash, 2 miles ESE of Hella. tening watch on VHF channels 14 and 16.
A light is shown from Hellevik (62°38'N., 6°10'E.). Naggen,
6.10 Category 1 and Category 2 vessels calling at Nyhamna must
6.13
awash, lies about 2 miles WNW of Hellevik Light. notify the terminal on VHF channel 14 or 16 of the following
When S of Naggen, the white sector of Haugneset Light
6.10 information:
(62°37'N., 6°20'E.) leads into the NW entrance of Harams- 1. Vessel name.
fjorden. This track lies close N of a 1m depth just off the N side 2. Call sign.
of Lepsoya. When about 0.9 mile ESE of Hellevik Light, steer 3. Planned sailing route to and from the terminal.
SE as required, to join Indreleia. These broadcasts must be made, as follows:
6.13
1. Thirty (30) minutes prior to arrival at the cautionary

6.11 Nogvafjorden (62°41'N., 6°20'E.), entered between area.
Flemsoya and Fjortoft, about 1 mile NE, is the best entrance 2. Fifteen (15) minutes prior to arrival at or departure
from seaward to Indrelia between Lepsoya and Buadjupet. from the terminal.
Tides—Currents.—On the N side of the seaward approach
6.11 3. When leaving the cautionary area.
to Nogvafjorden, the NE flow, experienced during the rising 4. When arriving at or departing from the anchorages at
tide, sets markedly in toward the dangers W of Fjortoft and Karlsoyfjorden and Midfjorden, S of Tautra.
Haroya. Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must use escort vessels,
6.13
Directions.—To enter Nogvafjorden from seaward, steer for

6.11 as follows:
Skulen (62°41'N., 6°19'E.) bearing 126°, which leads NE of 1. From the pilot boarding position to Nyhamna.
Grunnflua, a 3.5m patch, lying 2.5 miles WNW of Kjeholmen 2. From Nyhamna to the pilot boarding position.
Light, and SW of Breidflua, a 5m patch lying 1.75 miles NW 3. When en route to the anchorage—from prior to de-
of the light. parting Nyhamna until anchored in the anchorage area.
Pub. 182
4. When departing the anchorage area—from prior to Light lead clear of Midoya.
raising the anchor until arriving at the quay at Nyhamna. The white sector of Arnesklubben Light, situated on the SW
6.16
Additional regulations for Category 1 and Category 2 vessels

6.13 extremity of Otteroya, bearing astern, leads clear of Otteroya
govern entry into Nyhamma. Consult local authorities for de- and Tautra.
tails. Moldefjorden, the continuation of Midfjorden, from the vi-
6.16
cinity of Arnesklubben Light (62°40'N., 6°41'E.), passes be-

6.14 Indreleia continues from Lepsoyrevet, NE, to pass W tween Tautra and the SE side of Otteroya, just over 1 mile to
of Haugneset and Raudholmane, about 2 miles farther NE. the N.
Grunnrevet, a spit extending 0.4 mile E from Rogneholmen,
6.14 Julsundet extends N from Moldefjorden, between Otteroya
6.16
lies 0.8 mile W of the light on Raudholmane. and the mainland.

The white sector of the light on Raudholmane leads to a po-
6.14 From Tautra to Molde, about 7 miles ENE the fairway is
6.16
sition 0.6 mile WSW of the light. The white sector of the light clear of dangers. South and SW of Molde, there are numerous
on Haugneset, astern, leads between Raudholmane and Grunn- islets and scattered rocks, making it advisable to keep on the N
revet, and then into Haroyfjorden. Nogvafjorden joins Indreleia side of the channel when entering the roadstead.
in this area. Mekgrunna (62°43'N., 7°06'E.), a 3.5m patch, lies 0.6 mile
6.16
From a position 0.75 mile N of Haugneset, Dronenholmen

6.14 offshore, about 2 miles WSW of Molde Light. The patch may
Light, 3 miles E of Raudholmane, bearing between 076° and be passed on either side.
084°, leads N of foul ground and S of Raudholmane to Mid- The white sector of Molde Light, bearing ahead, leads N of
6.16
fjorden. Mekgrunna, which is the preferred channel.

Anchorage.—There is anchorage available, in 29m, off the
6.14 Dangers lie 0.45 mile S of Molde Light. Their position may
6.16
SE extremity of Haramsoya. There is an 18m depth charted best be seen on the chart.
close E of the anchorage and a cable extends SE from the is-
land to the mainland. 6.17 Molde (62°44'N., 7°10'E.) (World Port Index 23110)
Anchorage is available for medium and small vessels S of
6.14 is a coastal natural harbor, which lies on the N side of Mold-
Hestoya, which lies 0.85 mile E of Lepsoya, in 14 to 15m, sand efjorden, about 5 miles E of Julsundet, and has a small ice-free
and shells. harbor.
6.15 Indreleia continues from Raudholmane (62°38'N., Port of Molde

6°24'E.) through Haroyfjorden, which is broad and deep, to the
vicinity of Sandoya (62°49'N., 6°36'E.), 12 miles NNE. https://www.molde-romsdalhavn.no
The white sector of the light on Raudholmane astern leads E
6.15
of the dangers off the SE side of Fjortoft. Tides—Currents.—The tide rises about 2m at springs and
6.17
Husevikflua (62°46'N., 6°32'E.), a 1.9m patch situated 1

6.15
1.6m at neaps.
mile ENE of the E extremity of Haroya, lies within these bear- The tidal current within the harbor is hardly noticeable.
6.17
ings. Winds between SE and SW can be troublesome, and raise a

Aersteinen Light (62°48'N., 6°36'E.) is situated 0.35 mile S
6.15
considerable sea.
of Sandoya. The white sector of this light leads E of Husevik- Depths—Limitations.—There are two berths in the harbor.
6.17
flua and W of the dangers W of Orta, an island 3 miles ENE of Moldegard is the commercial cargo handling berth and is 130m
Husevikflua. long with a depth alongside of 11.5m and handles general car-
Flatflesa Light (62°50'N., 6°41'E.) is situated 3.25 miles NE
6.15
go and containers. Moldegard includes a ro-ro pier 100m long.
of Aersteinen Light. The white sector of this light, ahead, leads with a depth alongside between 5.8 and 9m. The other berth is
E of Aersteinen Light and W of the foul ground and islets ex- Storkaia and is a passenger berth, 300m long with depths
tending 1.25 miles N of Orta. alongside between 8 and 11.5m. There is also a tanker berth
The white sector of Aersteinen Light bearing 220°, astern,
6.15 that can accommodate vessels up to 5,000 dwt.
leads E of the foul ground extending NE from Sandoya, and Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
6.17
farther NE to the S entrance to Saltsteinsleia. dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
6.16 Midfjorden (62°38'N., 6°40'E.) is approached from Vessels should contact the Alesund pilot station on VHF
6.17
Haroyfjorden, and extends 4.5 miles ENE from Dryna to its channel 16 at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does
junction with Moldefjorden, S of the SW extremity of Otte- not respond, either the Rogaland or Floro Coastal Radio Sta-
roya. tion will reply and relay details to the pilot station.
The main channel through Midfjorden and Moldefjorden
6.16
The pilot boards in position 62°27.0'N, 5°58.9'E or by ar-
6.17
from Dryna to Molde, 19 miles E, is deep and clear of dangers rangement in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E.
except close to shore and in the final approach to Molde. Regulations.—From Reknes Mole to the light at Aroy, 3.25
6.17
A mid-channel course in the fjords clears all dangers, but a

6.16 miles E, there is a speed limit of 6 knots, to be exceeded only
course adjustment may be needed to avoid Tautreflua with the harbormaster’s permission.
(62°41'N., 6°56'E.), a 16m patch lying in the fairway NE of Vessels in quarantine are required to anchor near Moldehol-
6.17
Tautra. men, which is situated 1 mile ESE of Reknes mole.

Dronenholmen Light (62°38'N., 6°31'E.), bearing between
6.16
Signals.—The quays are numbered 1 to 5 from W to E. Sig-
6.17
253° and 274°, astern, and the white sector of Arnesklubben nals consisting of flags by day and a combination of red and
Pub. 182
green lights at night are shown to indicate the allotted berth. By natural coastal port is a district capital.
day a red flag is shown at the assigned berth. By night, lights
are shown from a signal mast on the steamer quay, as follows: Port of Andalsnes
https://www.molde-romsdalhavn.no
Signal Meaning
One red light Berth 1 There is one large commercial berth, popular with cruise
6.19
Two red lights Berth 2 ships, that is 157m long with depths alongside between 8 and
14m.
Three red lights Berth 3 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots may be ordered
6.19
One green light Berth 4 via SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot
Booking Center at an additional cost. Vessels should call the
One green light and one red light Berth 5 pilot on VHF channel 16, at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the
One green light and two red lights Moldegard Havn station does not respond, either the Rogaland Coast Radio Sta-
tion or Floro Coast Radio Station will reply and relay details to
One green light and three red lights All berths occupied
the pilot station. The pilot boards in position 62°27.0'N,
5°58.9'E or by arrangement in position 62°31.0'N, 5°40.9'E.
When vessels arrive simultaneously from E and W, the first
6.17
Contact Information.—See the table titled Andalsnes—
6.19
signal shown refers to the vessel from the W. Contact Information.

When a signal is understood, the vessel concerned should ac-
6.17
knowledge it with a short blast on the whistle. Andalsnes—Contact Information

Contact Information.—See the table titled Molde—Con-
6.17
tact Information. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16

Molde—Contact Information Facsimile 47-71-191621
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 E-mail office@molde-romsdalhavn.no
Facsimile 47-71-191621 Anchorage is available over the whole of Isfjorden from An-
6.19
dalsnes to Stein, 2.5 miles E, in a depth of 35m, mud.

E-mail office@molde-romsdalhavn.no An obstruction was reported (1996) 2.5 miles NE of the end
6.19
of Andalsnes.
Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off Molde, in depths of 30
6.17
to 35m, sand and clay. 6.20 Julsundet is entered between Heggneset (62°43'N.,
6°56'E.), the SE extremity of Otteroya, and Julneset, a point on
6.18 Romsdalfjorden is entered E of Tuautra and extends the mainland 1.5 miles NE. Julsundet leads 10 miles N from
24 miles ESE to Andalsnes and then 3 miles E to its head at Is- Moldefjorden, E of Otteroya and Gossa to join Buadjupet. It is
fjorden. The fjord is deep and clear of dangers and is not diffi- deep and clear.
cult to navigate. The current in Julsundet is always N, but in unsettled weath-
6.20
A submarine cable lands close S of Furneset. Four subma-

6.18 er there may be a S flow during the rising tide.
rine pipelines extend up to 300m from the shore on the E side Vessels may enter Julsundet by steering in the white sector
6.20
of Tresfjorden. A discharge pipe extends 230m S from Vorpne- of Julholmen Light (62°44'N., 6°58'E.). When abeam of Jul-
set (62°38.5'N., 7°05.5'E.), another discharge pipe extends neset, steer a NNW mid-channel course, to pass W of Julhol-
about 0.3 mile W of the N point of Feoya. men Light.
Tresfjord Bridge (62°36.68'N., 7°06.78'E.), with a vertical
6.18 Vessels enter the white sector of Hogsnes Light (62°50'N.,
6.20
clearance of 32m and a navigational width of 60m, spans the N 6°58'E.).

end of Tresfjorden between Helland and Vikebukt. This track will lead E of Kua, a small reef marked by a light,
6.20
To enter Romsdalsfjorden steer in the white sector of Helge-

6.18 situated 2 miles NNW of Julholmen Light.
stones Light (62°36'N., 7°22'E.), which leads between Sekken Steer to pass E of Hogsnes Light and bring the white sector
6.20
and Skalhamnholmen, about 10 miles ESE of Tautra. of that light astern which will lead W of Herringen, situated
Steer to pass NE of Helgestones Light and enter the white
6.18 about 1 mile NNE of the light, and E of the NE extremity of
sector of Hovdenes Light (62°33'N., 7°31'E.), about 6 miles Gossa.
SE of Helgestones Light. The white sector of Indre Haroy Light (62°53'N., 6°56'E.)
6.20
When about 0.5 mile distant from Hovdenes Light, steer an

6.18 located at Degerhalsen, bearing 305°, leads NW towards Buad-
E course to bring the white sector of Hovdenes Light astern. jupet. The white sector of Indre Haroy Light, astern, leads clear
This course will lead to Andalsnes. of the dangers SW of Oddane (62°54'N., 6°53'E.) and NE of
Bjornsund (62°54'N., 6°50'E.).
6.19 Andalsnes (62°34'N., 7°41'E.) (World Port Index No. Oddane, a group of islets, lies about 2.25 miles NW of Indre
6.20
23111) stands on a point on the S side of Romdalsfjorden. This Haroy Light.
Pub. 182
6.21 Haroysund (62°54'N., 6°58'E.) (World Port Index Buadjupet is about 1 mile wide between Staflua (62°54'N.,
6.23
No. 23108) is a spacious coastal harbor, situated between Ytre 6°51'E.), a 6.4m shoal 0.75 mile E of Bjornsund Light, and the
Haroy, Indre Haroy, and the mainland. The harbor is normally outer island lying W of Bud.
entered W of Indre Haroy. Vessels approaching Buadjupet from N steer in the white
6.23
There are a number of berths in Haroysund. They range up to

6.21 sector of Bjornsund Light. which leads into the white sector of
220m in length and have depths up to 9m alongside. Indre Haroy Light.
Anchorage is available E of Ytre Haroy and NE of Indre
6.21 To enter Bud and Julsundet, follow a reciprocal course of di-
6.23
Haroy, in about 8m, sand. rections previously given.

Bud (62°54'N., 6°55'E.) is situated on a point of the main-
6.21
land, about 1 mile E of Oddane. The town is rather low but the Buadjupet to Kristiansund
church is visible from seaward. Vessels with a draft not exceed-
ing 5.5m can anchor in the outer harbor. 6.24 From Buadjupet, the coast trends in a general ENE di-
rection for about 27 miles to Kristiansund. The coast is fronted
Buadjupet by groups of islets, rocks, and shoals which extend up to 8.5
miles from the mainland.
6.22 From the seaward entrance to Nogvafjorden, the off- The coast is formed partly by the mainland and partly by the
6.24
lying dangers run for a distance of about 22 miles in a NE di- NW coast of Averoya and by the islands on which Kristiansund
rection to Buadjupet. stands. The coast is mainly low and sparsely vegetated, and the
Several channels lead in from seaward. The waters in this ar-
6.22 off-lying islands are bare and grey.
ea are foul and passage through them should not be attempted This is one of the most difficult parts of the Norwegian coast
6.24
without local knowledge. to navigate. From Buadjupet, Indreleia leads into the open sea,
From Storholmen Light (62°39'N., 5°56'E.), about 6 miles
6.22 continuing NE through Hustadvika, then through
WNW of Lepsoya, the off-lying dangers lie E of a line between Ramnefjorden into Kristiansundsleia (63°09'N., 7°42'E.).
the light and Rosok-Havflua, a 9m patch, 13 miles NE. Howev- Several channels lead from seaward into this part of Indre-
6.24
er, Hella, Skreia, and Seigrunnane lie close W of this line about leia. Local knowledge is required in some of the channels and
2.75, 3.5, and 5.5 miles NNE, respectively, of Storholmen pilots should always be employed. Large vessels proceeding to
Light. Kristiansund or Trondheim use Gripholen.
Rosok Havflua (62°49'N., 6°13'E.), marked by a lighted
6.22 Tides—Currents.—Between Buadjupet and Kristiansund,
6.24
buoy, is situated on the NW side of the foul ground which ex- in calm weather, the tidal current usually sets ENE with the ris-
tends 6.25 miles WNW from Haroya. ing tide and WSW with the falling tide. With strong long-con-
Ona Light (62°52'N., 6°33'E.), situated on an island, is
6.22 tinued winds, the set of the current follows the direction of the
shown at a height of 40m. wind.
Klakken (62°57'N., 6°43'E.), with a charted depth of 10m,
6.22 Hustadvika is the name used for the W part of the waters,
6.24
lies 15.5 miles ENE of Rosok-Havflua and 6 miles WNW of from Bud to Fugen. Hustadvika coastline is totally unprotected
Bud. Vessels approaching Buadjupet from the SW are advised against the sea, and the passage is foul with many shoals.
to keep well to the seaward to avoid the shoal water lying E of Waves from the SW to NW will be refracted over the Bua-
6.24
a line between Rosok-Havflua and Klakken. grunnen shoals, and refraction centers occur on the leeward
In gales, breakers form over shoals in this area, with depths
6.22 side. With waves from the N, Griptarane may cause a refrac-
as great as 20 to 30m. tion center in the N portion of Hustadvika.
When the waves meet the current, the seas turn even more
6.24
6.23 Bjornsund Light (62°54'N., 6°49'E.) is situated on turbulent. This is particularly noticeable in the passage be-
the E end of the islet of Mooya, at the N end of the Bjornsund tween Kolbeinsflu and Bjyrnsund. Falling water causes an out-
group, about 3 miles WSW of Bud. going current from Julsundet, and with wind and waves from
Karlmedhammaren and Turiskallen lie, respectively, 6 and
6.23 the NW, the seas become very turbulent.
6.25 miles NNW of Bjornsund Light. They have a least depth Precipitous breakers have been reported from the entire area.
6.24
of 26m, but vessels should avoid them in bad weather. Shemshesten (62°58'N., 7°11'E.), 665m high, rises 8.75
6.24
Jendemsfjellet, bearing between 134° and well open of

6.23 miles NE of Bud. Shemshesten is not only the name of the
Bjornsund Light, leads in from seaward NE of Klakken. above peak, but is also the name of a range of mountains, with
The white sector of Bjornsund Light, ahead, leads in from
6.23 two other summits. From N, this range resembles a large prom-
NW between Klakken and Karlmedhammaren to within 2.5 ontory with three rounded summits and a steep fall on the sea-
miles of the light, when course may be shaped either into Bu- ward side.
adjupet or Saltsteinsleia.
Saltsteinsleia, which leads SSW to Haroyfjorden, passes W
6.23 6.25 Reinsfjellet (62°56'N., 7°56'E.), 12 miles SSE of
of Krabben Light (62°52'N., 6°43'E.). The white sector of Kristiansund, is 994m high, and is surmounted by a television
Flatflesa Light, 1.75 miles SSW of Krabben Light, leads W of mast.
toward Haroyfjorden. Bremsneshatten, situated in the N part of Averoya 3 miles
6.25
For a continuation of Indreleia S, follow a reciprocal course

6.23 SW of Kristiansund, is 130m high. It resembles a hat with a flat
of directions previously given. crown.
Buadjupet and Julsundet comprise the usual N approach
6.23 Freikollen (63°03'N., 7°46'E.), 3.5 miles S of Kristiansund,
6.25
from seaward to Moldefjorden and Molde. is a prominent summit, 629m high.
Pub. 182
Kvernberget is a long light-colored mountain, 205m high,

6.25 6.27 From a position about 5 miles WNW of Fuglen, steer
with steep slopes on the NE and SW sides. It is situated in the toward Magnillen (63°08'N., 8°05'E.), bearing 085°, which
center of Nordlandet, 2 miles E of Kristiansund. leads N of Kroppen and the shoals in that vicinity.
Magnillen (63°06'N., 8°05'E.), on the mainland 10 miles E
6.25 When N of Kroppen, and Fuglen is in sight, steer in an ESE
6.27
of Kristiansund, is 486m high. Although it is lower than the direction to pass N of Fuglekrakken, a 4.4m patch lying 0.25
surrounding mountains, it stands out owing to the steep fall on mile N of Fuglen. When clear of Fuglekrakken, steer to pass
its E side and three jagged peaks at the summit, recognizable at about mid-way between Kvitholmen and Bjogna.
a considerable distance. When approaching Fugleleia from NW at night, the white
6.27
There are three peaks on the island of Tustna, which are

6.25 sector of Kvitholmen Light leads E of Spunset and W of Snap-
220m, 856m, and 892m high, located, respectively, 8, miles ane, a 6m patch, situated nearly 4 miles N of Fuglen.
10.5 miles, and 11.25 miles ENE of Kristiansund. When clear of Spunset and Snapane, the white sector of
6.27
Kristiansund has been reported to be a good radar target

6.25 Kraka Light (63°01'N., 7°18'E.), situated 1.75 miles ESE of
from a distance of 26 miles. Kvitholmen, leads NE of Fuglekrakken and W of Follingsflu, a
Kvitholmen Light (63°01'N., 7°14'E.) is situated on an is-
6.25 3.8m patch situated 0.7 mile WSW of Follingen.
land by the same name, which lies 1.25 miles offshore, about On reaching a position 2 miles NW of Kraka Light, course
6.27
11 miles NE of Bud. A racon is located at the light tower. Part may be altered ENE to join Indreleia.
of a former light tower stands close to the light as a daymark. Ramnegapet, 6 miles NE of Fugleleia, leads in from seaward
6.27
Hestskjer Light (63°05'N., 7°30'E.) is situated on the W is-

6.25 E of Orskjera to join Indreleia in the vicinity of Hestskjeret. It
let of the Hestskjer group, which lies 8 miles ENE of Kvithol- is comparatively free from dangers and offers an easier ap-
men. A racon is located at the light tower, which is a square proach than Fugleleia.
house built into a conical tower 20m in height.
Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.), situated at the N end of the
6.25 6.28 Stabben (63°08'N., 7°16'E.), a reef on the S side of
Grip group on the S side of the seaward entrance to Gripholen, Ramnegapet, on the NE side of Orskjera, is awash. Jonstaren,
is described in paragraph 6.30. with a charted depth of 11m, lies 0.5 mile NE of Stabben, and
Grunnkampen, with a charted depth of 14m, lies in the fairway
Approaches to Kristiansund 1.5 miles ENE of Stabben.
The Ramnane group of islets, on the NE side of Ramnegapet,
6.28
6.26 Hustadvika, the coastal waters between Buadjupet are small black rocks which are not visible from any great dis-
and Kvitholmen, 11 miles NE, is encumbered by rocks, shoals, tance.
and small islets. Indreleia leads through Hustadvika, at a dis- Sore Ramnen (63°08'N., 7°24'E.), 3.5 miles NW from Hest-
6.28
tance of about 3 miles from the shore. skjeret, is precipitous on its W side but slopes to the E; it is
An area of isolated shoal heads lies on the N side of Hustad-
6.26 marked by two beacons.
vika from Karlmedhammaren to the vicinity of Kroppen Boggrunnstaren, a 5.4m patch, lies on the S side of
6.28
(63°03'N., 6°59'E.), 7 miles ENE. Kroppen, a rock with a depth Ramnegapet, 1.5 miles SE of Stabben.
of 5m, breaks in bad weather and is marked close NW by a Store Sortna (63°05'N., 7°24'E.), 6m high, lies 2.75 miles
6.28
lighted buoy. WNW of Hestskjeret.

Kolbeinsflu (62°58'N., 6°53'E.), 4.5 miles NNE of
6.26 Store Sortna and Little Sortna, 0.8 mile SE, in range lead
6.28
Bjornsund Light, has a least charted depth of 5m. It is the NW through the fairway of Ramnegapet, passing S of Grunnkamp-
extremity of the dangers fronting the mainland N of Bud and is en and N of Jonstaren.
marked by a lighted buoy. Lyroddane Beacon, equipped with a After passing Sore Ramnen, course can be altered E through
6.28
racon, is situated about 5 miles NE of Bjornsund Light. Ramnefjorden until N of Hestskjeret, where the track to Kris-
Between Kolbeinsflu and Kvitholmen there are several chan-
6.26 tiansund joins the track leading E from Fugleleia.
nels, but local knowledge is required in them. The white sector of Hetskjer Light (63°05'N., 7°30'E.)
6.28
Fuglen (63°03'N., 7°09'E.), a small black islet marked by a

6.26 leads in from seaward N of Grunnkampen and SW of Sore
light and a racon, lies about 3 miles WNW of Kvitholmen. Ramnen, to within about 3 miles of the light, when course can
Foul ground extends E and SE of Fuglen to Stabbeflu, a
6.26 be altered E into Ramnefjorden.
1.4m patch lying 1 mile ESE; Midtflu, a 4.2m patch lies 0.35
mile SSW of Stabbeflu. 6.29 Ramnefjorden leads from the vicinity of Hestskjeret,
Ekneskjerfluene, with least depths of 10m, lies 1.75 miles
6.26 8 miles ENE, into Kristiansundleia.
SE of Fuglen. Stavenes Light (63°07'N., 7°40'E.) stands on Staveneset, the NE
6.29
Fugleleia leads from seaward, N of Fuglen, to join Indreleia

6.26 extremity of Averoya, about 5 miles ENE of Hetskjer Light.
N of Kvitholmen Fugleleia. It is about 3 miles wide between On the seaward side of Ramnefjorden, a line of rocks and is-
6.29
Fuglen and Follingen, an islet situated to the NE. lets extend from Sore Ramnen to Hilbaren (Hilbaane), 10 miles
Orskjera is an extensive area of low-lying islets and rocks
6.26 ENE. Shoals lie S of a line joining the two above points.
which extends about 3 miles N from Follingen. They cannot be Midfjordsfallet, awash, lies 3.25 miles NNE of Hestskjer
6.29
seen at any great distance and are awash in high seas. Light. Indre Skjellingen, a 4.5m patch, lies 0.6 mile E of Mid-
Freikollen, in line with Follingen bearing 097°, leads close S
6.26 fjordsfallet.
of Spunset, a 21m patch, which lies 3 miles NNW of Fuglen. Helklakken (63°09'N., 7°38'E.), an 11m patch, lies in the
6.29
Bjogna (63°03'N., 7°17'E.), a rock, awash, lies on the N side

6.26 fairway, 5.25 miles NE of Hestskjer Light. Fausken, a 0.8m
of the inner end of Fugleleia, 2 miles NE Kvitholmen. patch, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Helklakken.
Pub. 182
From the vicinity of Hestskjeret, a course shaped to pass SE

6.29 Vestkleppen (63°18'N., 7°21'E.) is the shallowest part of
6.30
of Helklakken avoids all danger and leads to Kristiansundleia, Griptarane and is usually marked by breakers. It lies 7.75 miles
which forms part of the approach to Kristiansund. NW of Grip Light.
Treflisleia leads into Ramnefjorden, about 5 miles NE of
6.29 Jorngrunna, a 24m patch, lies in the middle of Gripholen, 1.5
6.30
Ramnegapet, and is not difficult access if Stavenes Light and miles NNE of Grip Light.
the beacon on Litle Skjelbreida (63°10'N., 7°10'E.), 5 miles Nordre Godtaren, with a least charted depth of 9m, lies in the
6.30
NW of Stavenes Light, can be identified. middle of the fairway, 1.5 miles NNE of Hilbaren.
Treflisa, marked by a beacon, is situated on the N side of the
6.29 Kjefallet (63°16'N., 7°40'E.), a 2m patch, lies on the NE
6.30
fairway, about 1 mile NE of Litle Skjelbreida. side of Gripholen, 3 miles NNE of Grip Light. Lontaren, an
Gamle Jakob, a rock, awash, and Gardstaren, an 11m patch,
6.29 11m patch, lies 0.35 mile S of Kjefallet.
lie 0.9 mile and 2 miles SE, respectively, from the beacon on Gasskjera, above water in places, lies 3 miles NE of Grip
6.30
Litle Skjelbreida. Light. Gaseflua, with a charted depth of 10m, lies 0.6 mile SSE
Lontarane (63°11'N., 7°31'E.), with a least depth of 3.7m,
6.29 of Gasskjera.
lies 1.5 miles NW of Treflisa. Other shoals lie 1.5 miles NNW
of Lontarane. 6.31 Gjeslingskjer Light (63°15'N., 7°48'E.), situated on
Sydskjellingen, above water, lies on foul ground 0.9 mile SE
6.29 Gjeslingskjeret, stands 5 miles E of Grip Light. Islets and foul
of Treflisa. water extend 0.6 mile SSW from the light.
From the vicinity of Lontarane, the white sector of Stavenes
6.29 When approaching from the W, the white sector of Grip
6.31
Light, bearing between 126° and 131°, leads between the bea- Light leads S of Griptarane to within 5 miles of the light.
cons on Litle Skjelbreida and Treflisa, and N of Gardstaren. When Hestskjer Light changes from white to red, course
6.31
should be altered into the white sector of Gjeslingskjer Light,

6.30 Grip Light (63°14'N., 7°37'E.) is situated on the N which leads N of the dangers off Grip.
end of the Grip group, which is an extensive group of islets and From a position 1 mile NE of Grip Light, the white sector of
6.31
rocks from 5 to 9 miles NNW of Kristiansund. A racon is lo- Ytre Langholmen Light (63°11'N., 7°52'E.) leads S of Nodre
cated at the light tower, which is 44m in height and prominent. Godtaren into Ytrefjorden.
All the islands of the group are small and low, and afford little When approaching from the N the white sector of Grip Light
6.31
protection from wind and sea. They are not visible at any great leads between Griptarane and the dangers lying NW of Gjes-
distance. lingskjer Light.
From the vicinity of Grip Light proceed as indicated above.
6.31
Pilotage.—There is a pilot boarding station 1 mile NNW of

6.31
Grip Light.
Caution.—Heavy seas in the passage SW of Gripholen to
6.31
Ytrefjorden S of Smyla are created particularly by wind from

the NW. The waves will come straight in from the sea, turning
E, S of Smyla. With falling water, the current goes against the
waves and causes heavy and choppy sea.
When the waves come from between NW-SW, a refraction
6.31
center will be created leeward of Griptarane. The conditions

become even worse when the tidal current toward the W is
combined with falling water. Under such conditions, precipi-
tous breakers have been observed.
6.32 After proceeding from seaward through Gripholen,

vessels should pass SW in Indreleia, steering in the white sec-
tor of Stavenes Light. Sondre Godtaren, with a charted depth of
29m, lies within this light sector, about 0.8 mile S of Nordre
Godtaren.
6.30 By Alfred Diem, via Wikimedia Commons When the white sector of Raudsandnes Light (63°04'N.,
6.32
6.30 Grip Light 7°41'E.), situated 2.75 miles S of Stavenes Light, comes ahead,
steer on that light and enter Bremsnesfjorden.
Griptarane comprise shoal patches which lie in the approach
6.30 When approaching Bremsnesfjorden from the SW, the white
6.32
to Gripholen, 8 miles 2NW of Grip Light. sector of Baltserneset Light, 1.5 miles SE of Stavenes Light,
Nordre Fausken (63°14'N., 7°33'E.), a 1m patch, lies 1.5
6.30 leads through the entrance.
miles W of Grip Light; Ytre Langfallet, another 1m patch, lies Bremsnesfjorden (63°06'N., 7°41'E.) is entered from N be-
6.32
0.8 mile ESE of the light. tween Staveneset and Klubbeneset, 0.6 mile E. It is the princi-
Lonnfallet, a 1.5m patch, lie s about 2 miles ESE of Ytre
6.30 pal entrance to Kristiansund.
Langfallet. Kverven (63°07'N., 7°40'E.), a 4m patch, lies 0.2 mile NW
6.32
Hilbaren (Hilbaane) (63°12'N., 7°44'E.), with a charted

6.30 of Stavenes Light on the W side of Bremsnesfjorden. A 2m
depth of 2m, is marked by a light. It lies 1.25 miles SE of Lon- patch lies close off Klubbeneset on the E side of the fairway.
nfallet. Bremsnesflua, a 4m patch, lies about 1 mile SE of Stavenes
6.32
Pub. 182
Light, near the middle of the fairway. Close within the entrance, on the NE point of Husoya, there
6.35
are quays, totaling 110m in length, with depths of 13.6 to 3.3m

6.33 Sorsundet (63°06'N., 7°44'E.) is entered between alongside.
Baltserneset, the SW extremity of Innlandet, and Smorvikne-
set, 0.3 mile N. It is not more than 91m wide between the shoal 6.36 Omsundet extends E about 3 miles, from a position S
depths on either side, and has a least depth of 13m in the fair- of Vikaholmen Light, to its junction with Arsundfjorden. The
way. fairway is spanned with overhead cables about 1 mile and 1.25
A breakwater, marked at its outer end by a light, extends
6.33 miles E of Vikaholmen Light. A bridge, with a vertical clear-
91m N from Innlandet, 0.35 mile ENE of Baltserneset. A 3m ance of 18m over a width of 30m in mid-channel, also spans
patch lies 183m WNW of the breakwater head. the strait.
A bridge spans Sorsundet close E of the breakwater; it has
6.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with mooring rings, for medium and
6.36
vertical clearances of 38m in the center and 32m on the sides. small vessels, is available in the SW part of Bolgvagen, in 16m,
A rock, with a depth of 6.8m, lies on the S side of the fair-
6.33 mud. Care should be taken to avoid the shoal bank which fringes
way 0.15 mile ENE of the breakwater head. the S shore and a pipeline laid across the W part of the bay.
Vessels entering Sorsundet from Bremsnesfjorden steer in
6.33 A light is situated on the foul ground in the center of the fair-
6.36
the white sector of the light on the breakwater. When in the en- way, 0.7 mile E of the bridge. A beacon is situated on the foul
trance of Sorsundet, steer on the light in the center of the ground 160m ENE of the light. This area may be passed on ei-
bridge bearing 061°, which leads through the sound. ther side.
Omsundet is entered from Arsundfjorden N of Arholmen
6.36
6.34 Bolgsvaet (63°06'N., 7°44'E.) is entered from Brems- (63°06'N., 7°53'E.), about 1 mile E of the bridge which spans
nesforden S of Innlandet, and extends E to Talgsjoen. the fairway.
Skjerveskjeret, marked by a light, lies 0.3 mile SE of Balter-
6.34 Kristiansund may be entered from the E through Norsundet,
6.36
sneset, at the seaward edge of the foul ground which extends which is spanned by a bridge with vertical clearance of 28m.
0.2 mile S of Innlandet. Kristiansund has a depth of 5.8m at LW.
A 1m patch lies 160m NW of Skjerveskjeret; an isolated
6.34 Dalasundet extends ENE 1.75 miles from Norsundet and en-
6.36
7.9m patch lies the same distant SE. ters Talgsjoen N of Kvitnes Light (63°08'N., 7°48'E.).
Linflua (63°06'N., 7°44'E.), with a charted depth of 4m, lies
6.34 Tanker berths are situated in Dalasundet on NW side of Nor-
6.36
on the SE extremity of the foul ground, 0.25 mile E of Skjerve- sundet.

skjeret. Sjursvikgrunnen, a 7.5m patch, lies 0.4 mile ENE of A light stands on the NW edge of the spit which extends W
6.36
Linflua. from a point that lies just over 1 mile ENE of the bridge which
Bolgfallet, awash, lies near mid-channel, 0.8 mile S of Lin-
6.34 spans Norsundet. A rocky bank, with a depth of 7.5m, lies on
flua. A 4.2m patch lies 183m WSW of Bolgfallet and Vestre the N side of the fairway 183m N of the light.
Bolgfallet, a 5.2m patch, lies 91m farther WSW. The white sector of Kvitnes Light, astern, leads NNW to-
6.36
Kopparholmflua, awash, lies 0.25 mile S of Vestre Bolgfall-

6.34 ward Gripholen.
et. Talgsjoen is formed between Norlandet, on the SW side, and
6.36
Kopparholmane, 3 small islets, lie on the S side of Bolgs-

6.34 the islets W of Tustna, on the NE side. It leads to Arsund-
vaet, 0.5 mile S of Linflua. fjorden, Freifjorden, and to Dalasundet.
Talgsjoen is deep and free of dangers; however, Talsgrun-
6.36
6.35 Vikaholmen Light (63°06'N., 7°46'E.) stands on the nane (63°10'N., 7°46'E.), a bank with a depth of 36m, lies 2
S point of Vikaholmen, about 1.25 miles E of Baltersneset. miles NNW of Kvitnes Light, and Klakkane, with a depth of
Vikaholmen is connected to the land to the N by a breakwater. 30m, lies 0.7 mile E of Talsgrunnane.
Vikaholmflua, a 1.6m patch, lies 0.15 mile W of Vikaholmen
6.35
Light. A 7.4m patch lies 0.4 mile SE of the light. Kristiansund (63°07'N., 7°44'E.)
Anchorage may be taken on the E side of Vikaholmen, in
6.35
15m, sand, with patches of rocks. World Port Index No. 23100
Markussundet (63°06'N., 7°45'E.) lies between Innlandet,
6.35
on the W, and Nordlandet, on the E. Lights in line lead through 6.37 During WWII, Kristiansund sustained heavy damage,
the fairway to the inner harbor of Kristiansund. Markussundet especially by a German bombardment in April of 1944. Com-
it is deep and clear of dangers. pletely rebuilt, it is now the home port for a large Norwegian
Austre Fugloygrunnen (63°06'N., 7°47'E.), on the S side of
6.35 trawler fleet.
Bolgsvaet, lies about 0.1 mile ENE of Fugloya. It has a least Kristiansund is situated on three small islands facing the
charted depth of 2m. Vorpholmbaen, a 5m patch, lies about 0.1 Norwegian Sea. Its harbor is protected by an inlet in the adja-
mile SE of Austre Fugloygrunnen. cent island of Frei and by the island of Averoy, and is bound on
Vorpholmen lies in the entrance to Bolgvagen, about 0.1
6.35 the N by Kirkelandet and Gomalandet, on the S by Innlandet,
mile S of Vorpholmbaen. A cable, with a vertical clearance of and on the E by Nordlandet.
30m, spans the narrow channel E of Vorpholmen. The town of Kristiansund stands on all sides of the harbor.
6.37
Bolgvagen (63°05'N., 7°47'E.) is entered E of Vorpholmen.

6.35 Communications between the several parts are maintained by
Husoya forms its W side. ferries. When approached from seaward no houses can be seen
Pub. 182
6.37 Kristiansund Harbor
until close to the harbor entrance. Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
Port of Kristiansund Home Page Kristiansund—Berth Information

http://www.knhavn.no Depth
Berth Name Length
Alongside
Winds—Weather.—The predominant wind in Kristiansund
6.37
Vagekai
is from the S at a mean speed of 6 knots. However, in the
months of June, July, and August, in the afternoons, the winds No. 1 60m 4.5-5.0m
shift to the NW and N at about 4 knots. During the months De- No. 2 90m 4.5-5.0m
cember through March, there are an average of 2 days a month
No. 3 80m 4.5-5.0m
with gale force winds of 34 knots or more.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Kristiansund is from
6.37 Storkaia
about 1 to 2m. The currents in Sorsundet and Norsundet some-
No. 5 60m 10.5m
times reach a velocity of 3 knots.
The current in Sorsundet changes at HW and LW. The flow
6.37
No. 6/7 95m 10.5m
is greatly influenced by the wind. In Norsundet, the current oc- No. 8 104m 10.5m
casionally changes with the tide, but is usually E.
Depths—Limitations.—The port is a main service base for
6.37
No. 9 105m 9.5m
the coastal exploration and development of oil and gas fields. Nordmorskaia
There are facilities for mooring semi-submersible rigs. Berth-
ing details are shown in the accompanying table titled Kris- No. 10 90m 8.0m
tiansund—Berth Information. Devoldholmen
Pilotage.—Pilotage is available. Pilots should be ordered
6.37
through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy No. 11 60m 8.0m
Pub. 182
Kristiansund—Berth Information Signal Meaning

Depth Two white Berth No. 2
Berth Name Length
Alongside
Three white Berth No. 3
No. 12/13 205m 10.0m
One red Berth No. 4
Ro-ro 38m 17.0m Two red Berth No. 5
Storkaia Three red Berth No. 6
No. 11 80m 7.3m One green Berth No. 7
No. 12/13 205m 9.0-13.0m
Two green Berth No. 8
No. 13 B (ro-ro) 38m 15.0m Three green Berth No. 9
Vestbase and Vikaholmen One red and one green Berth No. 10
No. 1 12m 5.0m
One white and one red Berth No. 11
No. 2 60m 10.0m One white and one green Berth No. 12
No. 3 45m 8.0m Flashing green Anchor in the harbor
No. 4 80m —
Flashing white Close to hailing distance
No. 5 80m —
No. 6 E-W 160m 9.4m Contact Information.—See the table titled Kristiansund—
6.37
No. 7 40m 7.4m
No. 8 100m 21.0-40.0m Kristiansund—Contact Information
No. 9 40m 10.0m VHF VHF channel 12
Kristiansund Fry- Telephone 47-40-006504
80m 10.0m
seterminal
Tanker Berths
E-mail info@knhavn.no
Norske Shell 18m 12.9m
Exon 33m 5.7m Anchorage.—There is limited anchorage for medium size
6.37
ships in the main port area, but there is ample space in the close
CG Rieber Marine 120m 10.0m approaches to the harbor with well sheltered holding ground, in
depths of 13 to 49m.
Vessels should call the Kristiansund pilot station on VHF
6.37
channel 16, at least 2 hours prior to arrival. If the station does 6.38 In the vicinity of Kristiansund there are several fjords
not respond, the Floro or Rogaland Coastal Radio Station will collectively known as Nordmorsfjordene. These fjords lie in
reply and relay information to the pilot station. the N part of the district of More. They penetrate inland to po-
The pilot boards 1 mile NNW of Grip Light. Depending on
6.37
sitions about 12 miles S and 35 miles SE and E of the town.
weather conditions, vessels may be directed to proceed E of The islands of Averoya (63°00'N., 7°30'E.), Frei, Tustna, Stab-
6.38
Grip Light to make boarding easier. ben, and Ertvagoya, lie, in that order, from W to E and are separat-
Sea pilots are stationed at Kristiansund. They also act as har-
6.37
ed from the mainland by the outer fjords of Nordmorsfjordene.
bor pilots, however, harbor pilotage is not compulsory for mer- Lauvoyfjorden (Lovofjorden) (63°00'N., 7°20'E.) lies on
6.38
chant ships. the W side of Averoya, and is entered from seaward by passing
Regulations.—Within the harbor limits the speed of a vessel
6.37
through the chain of islets which extend ENE from the vicinity
is to be no more than good seamanship and maneuverability re- of Kraka Light.
quire. There are several passages between the islets, all of them
6.38
Speed is to be reduced to prevent wash in Norsundet W of

6.37
narrow and requiring local knowledge.
Teistholmen; Markussundet, N of the cold store at Sjursvika; Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run strongly in the
6.38
Sorsundet, E of the breakwater; Holmasundet; and Overvagen. entrance to Lauvoyfjorden, with reported rates of up to 4 knots
Signals.—Berthing signals are shown from a signal mast
6.37
at half tide. Strong NW winds raise heavy seas during ebb cur-
which stands on Storkaia. They consist of red, green, and white rents. In these circumstances, the entrance channels are diffi-
flags by day and red, green, and white lights by night. cult to navigate.
Tovikholmen Light (62°59'N., 7°21'E.) is situated close off
6.38
Signal Meaning the W extremity of Averoya. Trovikholmane lies in Lauvoy-

fjorden, 0.75 mile NNE of the light.
One white Berth No. 1
Lauvoyfjorden is practically free of dangers, with the excep-
6.38
Pub. 182
tion of Trovikholmane and Hjertvikholmane, which lies about The Inner Fjords
1 mile farther NE.
Kornstadfjorden (62°57'N., 7°25'E.) is entered from Lau-
6.38 6.41 The Tingvoll district occupies the greater part of a
voyfjorden SW of Tovikholmen Light, and leads 5 miles SE to peninsula, which has an average width of 4 miles and extends
its junction with Kvernesfjorden, off the S extremity of Ave- 30 miles NNW from the head of Sundalsfjorden. Tingvoll-
roya. fjorden and Sundalsfjorden lie on the W side of this peninsula,
Kvernesfjorden (62°57'N., 7°37'E.) trends NE from its
6.38 and are reached from Kvernesfjorden and Freifjorden through
junction with Kornstadfjorden for about 8 miles to the S end of Gjemnessundet or Bergsoysundet and Bergsoyfjorden.
Bremsnesfjorden. It is free of dangers in the fairway. Brems- Gjemnessundet (62°58'N., 7°48'E.) is entered between Kra-
6.41
nesfjorden is about 7 miles long from its seaward entrance. kholmen, which lies close off the SW extremity of Bergsoya,
and Ikkorneset, 1 mile WSW.
6.39 The S part of Bremsnesfjorden lies between Frei, on Seiholmane, situated on a shoal, awash, lies 0.4 mile WSW
6.41
the E side, and Averoya, on the W, and, apart from shoals of Krakholmen. Omolmane, on the W side of the fairway, lies
which are marked, is clear of dangers. 0.4 mile SSE of Seiholmane. A 7.3m rocky patch lies in the
Bremsnesfjorden is entered from S between Lundenes
6.39 fairway 0.7 mile ESE of Omolmane.
(63°00'N., 7°44'E.), the E extremity of Averoya, and Kvitneset, The Gjemnessund Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 42m
6.41
the S extremity of Flatsetoy, 1 mile NE. and a main span of 632m between two 108m high towers, ex-
Gullsetholmen, a small islet, lies on the W side of the fjord
6.39 tends SSW across Gjemnssundet from a position about 0.2
0.7 mile NNW of Lundenes. mile SE of Krakholmen Light (62°59'N., 7°47'E.).
Leitnes Light (63°02'N., 7°41'E.) stands on the W side of
6.39 Bergsoysundet is formed between Bergsoya, on the W, and
6.41
the fjord, 1.75 miles NW of Lundenes. The white sector of this Aspoya, on the E.
light leads into Bremsnesfjorden. Maloya, a small islet, is connected to the N extremity of
6.41
Steer to pass E of Leitnes Light, and bring the light, astern,

6.39 Bergsoya by a bridge.
which will lead N through the fjord and E of Raudsandnes Brusen (63°00'N., 7°52'E.) lies close NE of Maloya;
6.41
Light, situated 2.5 miles N. Skallen, a 7.3m patch, lies 0.4 mile NE of Brusen.
An overhead cable, with vertical clearance of 39m, spans
6.39 The tidal current in Bergsoysunde can be strong, especially
6.41
Bremsnesfjorden close N of Leitnes Light. when from the N.

Flatoya, Amundoya, Brattoya, Arholmen, and Tjuvholmen
6.39
(63°04'N., 7°42'E.) lie off the W coast of Frei, from 0.5 to 1 6.42 Bergsoyfjorden extends about 5 miles ENE from its
mile SE of Raudsandnes Light. W entrance, at the junction with Gjemnessundet. Except for the
Freifjorden (63°03'N., 7°55'E.) is entered between Flatsetoy
6.39 shoals, which are marked, the fjord is clear of dangers.
and Bergsoya, 2 miles SE. It leads 7 miles NE. Freifjorden is Bergsoyholmen (62°58'N., 7°53'E.) lies close offshore, 0.2
6.42
formed between Frei, on the W side, and Bergsoya, Aspoya, mile SE of the E extremity of Bergsoya. A shoal, awash, lies at
and the NW part of the Tingvoll peninsula, on the E. the extremity of the foul ground which extends 0.4 mile SW of
Freines Light (63°01'N., 7°49'E.) stands on the S extremity
6.39 Bergsoyholmen.
of Frei, 0.75 mile E of Flatsetoy. Refsholmtaren, a 2.4m shoal Kvalvagholmen Light (62°59'N., 8°00'E.), situated at the
6.42
patch, lies 0.8 mile SSW from the light. SE entrance point of Bergsoyfjorden, lies 3.5 miles SE of
Bergsholmen.
6.40 Steet (63°00'N., 7°48'E.), consisting of islets and Vessels may enter Bergsoyfjorden from Gjemnessundet as
6.42
rocks, awash, lies 0.5 mile S of Revsholmtaren. Jaholmen lies previously directed. When clear of that fairway, steer in the
0.7 mile E, and an 8.8m rocky patch, lies 0.6 mile ENE, respec- white sector of Kvalvagholmen Light. When S of Bergshol-
tively, from Steet. men, steer to pass about 0.3 mile N of that light.
Vessels may enter Freifjorden by steering in the white sector
6.40 Vessels entering Bergsoyfjorden from Bergsoysundet, when
6.42
of Freines Light, which leads between Revsholmtaren and clear of the SW extremity of Apsoya, steer in the white sector
Revsholmen (63°01'N., 7°47'E.), a small islet 0.85 mile WSW of Kvalvagholmen Light. Then steer to pass N of the light, then
of Freines Light. into Tingvollfjorden.
The white sector of Strandanes Light (62°59'N., 7°42'E.),
6.40 Batnfjorden (62°56'N., 7°45'E.) leads 5 miles SW from
6.42
astern, leads SE of Revsholmtaren and N of Steet into Gjemnessundet and Bergsoyfjorden. The fjord is clear of dan-
Freifjorden. Once clear of the shoals, the fjord is almost entire- gers but there are no anchorages.
ly clear of dangers in the fairway. Batnfjordsoren, at the head of the fjord, is the administrative
6.42
The white sector of Skarvbergnes Light (63°05'N., 7°58'E.)

6.40 center for the district. On the S side of the bay there is a quay,
leads NNE into Freifjorden. 10m long, with a depth of 3.1m alongside.
Kvisvikholmane (63°03'N., 7°57'E.), among which are Sto-
6.40 Tingvollfjorden is entered between Kvalvagholmen
6.42
rholmen and Klubbholmen, lie up to 1 mile N of Aspoya on the (62°59'N., 8°00'E.) and Strupneset, 1.5 miles N, and extends
E side of Freidfjorden. 19 miles SE. Sundalsfjorden continues 5 miles farther SE. The
Arsundoya (63°06'N., 7°59'E.), situated close off the
6.40 fjord is to a large extent clear of dangers and is not difficult to
Tingvoll Peninsula and about 2 miles E of Frei, lies at the junc- navigate.
tion of Freifjorden, Arsundfjorden, and Talgsjoen. Skarvberg-
nes Light is situated on the SW extremity of Arsundoya.
Pub. 182
Ekremsholmane (63°00'N., 8°02'E.) lie up to 0.45 mile off-

6.42 used this quay. For pilotage information, see paragraph 6.37.
shore, on the NE side of the fjord, 1.5 miles NNE of Kvalvag-
holmen. Sunndalsora—Contact Information
Sognskjer Light is situated on the W side of the fjord, 4.75
6.42
miles SSE of Kvalvagholmen. The white sector of Sognskjer VHF VHF channels 9 and 16
Light leads through the N part of Tingvollfjorden. Telephone 47-71-693453
Anchorage is available in Gagnat, 0.5 mile WNW of Sogn-
6.42
skjer Light, in depths of 35 to 45m, sand and clay, steeply
shelving. It is advisable to lay out hawsers to the shore.
A 1.2m patch lies in mid-channel, 0.75 mile SE of Sognskjer
6.42
Krokshavn (62°41'N., 8°32'E.), situated on the W shore of
6.44
Light. A 3.4m patch, marked by a beacon, lies 0.5 mile SSW of Sunndalsfjorden WSW of Sunndalsora, has two bunkering
the 1.2m patch. quays, each 9m long, with 2.8 to 10m alongside. A quay at the
The white sector of Sognskjer Light, astern, leads S in
6.42
power station is 55m long, with depths of 6.2 to 18m along-
Tingvollfjorden, W of the above dangers. side.
6.43 Tingvollvagen (62°54'N., 8°11'E.), an inlet on the E 6.45 From Arsundfjorden (63°07'N., 8°00'E.),
side of the fjord 1.5 miles SSE of Sognskjer Light, affords an- Halsefjorden and Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden), which lie E of
chorage at its head, in 15m, clay. the Tingvoll Peninsula, lead SSE and give access to a group of
Tingvoll, at the head of Tingvollvagen, is the administrative
6.43
fjords which include Bofjorden, Alvunfjorden, Stangvik-
center for the district. Near the church is a quay, 7m long, with fjorden, Todalsfjorden, Surnadalsfjorden, and Hamnesfjorden.
a depth of 4m alongside. There is also a quay near the ferry Arsundfjorden is entered between Arsundoya and Krakoya,
6.45
berth at the head of the inlet; it is 25m long, with depths of 0.6 1.75 miles N. The fjord leads 5 miles E from its junction with
to 5m alongside. Talgsjoen and Freifjorden, S of Tustna.
Angvik (62°53'N., 8°06'E.) lies on the W side of the fjord, 2
6.43
Arsundbaen (63°07'N., 8°02'E.) lies on the S side of the
6.45
miles SSW of Sognskjer Light. Anchorage may be taken off fjord, about 1.2 miles ENE of Arsundoya. Rocks, awash, lie
Angvik, in 18 to 40m, clay. Southwest winds can raise a con- close W.
siderable sea in the bay, and it is advisable to lay out hawsers to Hestholmen, with foul ground W and NW of it, lies 0.3 mile
6.45
the shore. offshore, 1.5 miles E of Arsundbaen. A 1.2m patch lies about
Berths are situated at an iron ore and gravel works situated
6.43
0.6 mile ESE.
on the W side of the fjord, 3 miles S of Angvik. There are Volongoya (63°08'N., 8°09'E.) lies on the S side of Arsund-
6.45
depths of 4 to 10.3m alongside the quays. fjorden, 2 miles ENE of Hestholmen. Langskjera, on which a
At Rausand, close S of the iron ore works, there is a quay,
6.43
beacon stands, lies 0.2 mile N of Volongoya; Hattholmen lies
12m long, with depths of 2.6 to 4.4m alongside. about 0.1 mile off its SW point.
The white sector of Haukomin Light (63°09'N., 8°16'E.)
6.45
6.44 Meloy Light (62°48'N., 8°18'E.) is situated on an is- leads through Arsundfjorden to the entrance of Halsefjorden
let in the middle of Tingvollfjorden, 5 miles SE of Rausand. and into Korsnesfjorden.
The white sector of the light leads ESE from the vicinity of
Rausand. 6.46 Halsefjorden (63°04'N., 8°12'E.) is entered between
Flaoya Light stands on the SW side of Flaoya, 5 miles ESE
6.44
Furuholmane, 0.4 mile SE of Hestholmen, and Volongoya. It
of Meloy Light. leads 9 miles SSE from Arsundfjorden into Trongfjorden
The fairway, either N or S of Meloy Light, is free of charted
6.44
(Trangfjorden).
dangers. Furunes Light stands on Furuneset, near the W entrance to
6.46
The white sector of Flaoya Light leads about 4 miles SE in

6.44
Halsefjorden. The white sector of this light leads from Kors-
Tingvollfjorden from the vicinity of Meloy. nesfjorden into Halsefjorden, keeping SE of Volongoya.
Oksendal (62°43'N., 8°26'E.) is situated at the head of a
6.44
Anchorage is available off Vikan, on the W shore, about 1
6.46
cove entered about 1 mile SSW of Flaoya. Good anchorage is mile SSE of Furuneset, in 9 to 22m.
available off the public jetty, in clay, where the depths change Saksnes Light (63°02'N., 8°14'E.), situated on the E side of
6.46
less rapidly than elsewhere. the fjord 5.5 miles SSE of Furuneset, bearing between 147°
Sunndalsfjorden leads 5 miles SSE from Flaoya to Sunndal-
6.44
and 157° leads through the N part of Halsefjorden; pass W of
sora. this light and bring it astern bearing between 312° and 320°,
6.44
which leads into Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden).
Sunndalsfjorden, about 2 miles SE of Flaoya. An ammunition dump is charted with its center situated
6.46
The white sector of Flaoya Light, astern, leads ESE in Sun-

6.44
about 0.9 mile SSE of Saksnes Light.
dalsfjorden, but patches of 7.3 and 9.1m, lie within this sector Bofjorden is entered on the E side of Halsefjorden, 3 miles
6.46
about 0.3 mile ESE of Flaoya. SE of Saksnes Light, and leads 2 miles E. Asskardfjorden con-
Sunndalsora (62°41'N., 8°33'E.) (World Port Index No.
6.44
tinues 3 miles farther E.
23105) lies on the E side of Sunndalsfjorden, near its head. Bosundet, the narrow channel leading from Bofjorden into
6.46
There is a quay at the aluminum works, 307m long, with Asskardfjorden, has a least depth of 6.7m. It is spanned by a
depths of 9.4 to 10m alongside. Vessels up to 27,000 tons have drawbridge with a vertical clearance of 2m when closed.
Pub. 182
By Carl S Bj (Own work), [CC-BY-SA-3.0 (http://crearivecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/)], via Wikimedia Commons

Sunndalsfjorden and the Sunndal Aluminum Works as viewed from Litjkalkinn summit
Staknes Light (63°01'N., 8°21'E.) is situated on the SE side

6.46 The white sector of the light on Aksneset, bearing astern,
6.47
of Bofjorden, about 0.8 mile within the entrance. Numerous leads into the N part of Alvunfjorden, keeping E of the dangers
dangers lie on the N side of the fairway, N and NE of the light. which lie SSE of the light.
Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden) continues 2 miles SE from the
6.46 Meisingsetvagen is entered on the S side of Alvunfjorden,
6.47
entrance to Bofjorden, to an exit between Aksneset (62°57'N., about 4 miles SSE of Aksneset. It extends about 2 miles SW.
8°20'E.) and Batvikneset, a promontory, 1.25 miles ENE. A Alvund lies at the head of Alvundfjorden. It is connected to
6.47
light is situated on Aksneset; a cable with a vertical clearance the national road network.
of 35m spans Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden), close N of Aksne- Stangvikfjorden is entered between Nesoya and Soloyet
6.47
set. (62°57'N., 8°26'E.), 2 miles NNE.

A bank, which dries in places and is marked by a beacon, ex-
6.47
6.47 Trongfjorden (Trangfjorden) exits into a basin from tends 0.2 mile offshore, 0.8 mile S of Soloyet.
which several fjords open; they are discussed in order from S to Rokkem Light (62°53'N., 8°30'E.), situated on the S side of
6.47
N. Stangvikfjorden, 3.75 miles within its entrance, is a good mark

Alvunfjorden (62°54'N., 8°22'E.) is entered between Aks-
6.47 for entering the fjord. This light bearing between 133° and
neset and Nesoya, 2.75 miles SSE. For the most part the fjord 151°, ahead, leads into the fjord, clear of the dangers. Pass on
is clear of dangers and is easy to navigate. the N side of the light, then bring it astern bearing between
Pub. 182
272° and 282°, which will lead into Todalsfjorden. lands for a distance of 4.5 miles, then 2 miles farther NNW into
Todalsfjord is entered E of Flesa (62°52'N., 8°35'E.), a low
6.47 Edoyfjorden.
islet lying close off a headland, 2.5 miles ESE of Rokkem The fairway of Imarsundet, off the N point of Stabben, is
6.49
Light, and extends 4.5 miles SSE. spanned by an overhead cable with a vertical clearance of 20m.
Todalsfjorden ices over every year; in severe winters the ice
6.47 Arasvikfjorden (63°09'N., 8°25'E.) is entered between Tak-
6.49
extends into Stangvikfjorden. neset (63°09'N., 8°20'E.), and the SW extremity of Ertvagoya,
A good anchorage is available in Svinvik, on the E side of
6.47 0.9 mile NNW, and leads 7 miles ENE to Aroya, an islet lying
the fjord 1.75 miles SSE of Flesa, in 17 to 19m, sand. The an- on the W side of the entrance to Auresundet.
chorage is exposed to mountain squalls. The fjord is, for the most part, clear of dangers and is steep-
6.49

6.47 to up to the shore.
Todalsfjorden close S of Svinvik. Risholmen Light (63°09'N., 8°32'E.) stands on an islet 5
6.49
Todalsfjorden Light (62°50'N., 8°38'E.) stands on the W

6.47 miles E of Takneset. A white sector of the light leads through
shore 2.25 miles SSE of Flesa. The white sector of the light the W part of Arasvikfjorden, clear of the dangers.
leads through the N part of Todalsfjorden. With the light bear- A white sector of Risholmen Light, bearing astern, leads
6.49
ing between 271° and 285°, astern, transit may be made toward through the E part of Arasvikfjorden, keeping NW of Aroya
the head of the bay. (63°11'N., 8°36'E.), and into Auresundet. Another white sector
A good anchorage is available on the W side of the head of
6.47 leads S of Aroya and into Vinjefjorden.
the fjord, in 16m, clay, close N of Todalen. Valsoyfjorden is entered between Otneset (63°08'N.,
6.49
8°31'E.) and Stokkneset, 1.75 miles NE, and leads 4.5 miles
6.48 Surnadalsfjorden extends 4.5 miles E from its en- SE.
trance between Torvikneset (62°57'N., 8°26'E.) and Kjer- Valsoya and Kjoloya lie on the S side of Korsnesfjorden, in
6.49
groneset, 0.7 mile NW. the entrance to Valsoyfjorden. Although the outer part of Val-
There are two quays, each 10m long, located at Arnes, a vil-
6.48 soyfjorden is foul, it is well marked. Channels leading E and W
lage on the N side of the fjord, situated 0.8 mile NE of Torvi- of Valsoya each have a least depth of 3.8m. A bridge, with a
kneset. There are depths of 7.5 to 8.5m and 3 to 7.5m, vertical clearance of 24m, spans the E channel.
respectively, alongside the quays. Valsoyfjorden is often frozen in winter.
6.49
Hamnesfjorden is entered W of Kjergroneset (62°58'N.,

6.48 An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 28m, spans
6.49
8°28'E.) and leads 5 miles NE. Vargoya, a small islet, lies 0.25 Valsoyfjorden 2.25 miles within its entrance.
mile W of Kjergroneset A shoal, awash, lies off the SW point Vessels should not enter Valsoyfjorden without local knowl-
6.49
of the islet. Hamnesfjorden affords shelter for small vessels. edge.

Korsnesfjorden is entered from Arsundfjorden N of Volon-
6.48
goya (63°08'N., 8°09'E.) and leads 5 miles E between Tunsta 6.50 Auresundet is entered at the E end of Arasvikfjorden
and Stabben on the N and the mainland on the S, into Arasvik- E of Rumpenneset (63°11'N., 8°35'E.), the SE extremity of
fjorden. Ertvagoya, and leads 7 miles NNW between Ertvagoya, Rot-
Haukomkin Light (63°09'N., 8°16'E.) is situated on the S
6.48 toya, and Ruoya on the W, and the mainland, on the E, into
shore of Korsnesfjorden, about 3 miles E of Volongoya. Gjerdesvika. It has been reported to be navigable by vessels up
The white sector of Haukomkin Light leads from Arsund-
6.48 to 90m in length, 13m beam, and 6m draft.
fjorden, N of Volongoya, toward the entrance to Skalvik- The tidal current in Auresundet is usually flowing N and
6.50
fjorden. Overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 40m, span strongest during the rising tide. There may, however, be a S
Korsnesfjorden, close E of Haukomkin Light. flow during the falling tide, which is considered to be a sign of
Skalvikfjorden, a relatively shallow fjord, extends 4.5 miles
6.48 bad weather at sea. The flow can be strong in the narrows at the
SSE from its entrance, close SW of Haukomkin Light. N end of Auresundet.
One mile within the entrance of the fjord, an islet lies in the
6.48 A light stands on the W extremity of Vikaneset (63°12'N.,
6.50
center of the fjord. An overhead cable spans the fjord at the is- 8°36'E.) just over 1 mile NNE of Rumpenneset. A white sector
let, with a vertical clearance of 26m over the W channel and of the light leads W of Aroya and E of a spit with 1m depth 0.5
30m over the E channel. mile NNW of Aroya. Another white sector of the light leads E
of Aroya and N into Auresundet.
6.49 Solemsundet (63°12'N., 8°11'E.) leads from the N There is anchorage, in 22m, in a cove W of the light on
6.50
side of Korsnesfjorden between Tustna and Stabben, 5.5 miles Vikaneset.

NNW to Edoyfjorden. It has been reported to be navigable by A cable spans Auresundet between Rottoya and the main-
6.50
vessels of 90m length, 13m beam and 6m draft. land. It has a vertical clearance of 30m.
Halsneset Light, situated on the SE extremity of Tustna, and
6.49 The white sector of the light on Vikaneset, bearing astern,
6.50
other lights in Solemsundet provide marks for vessels in tran- leads farther N into Auresundet. A shoal patch with a depth of
sit. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 18m, spans the chan- 2.7m, lies within these bearings close NE of the N point of Rot-
nel 3 miles within its S entrance. An overhead cable, with a toya. The light bearing 151° leads through the narrows between
vertical clearance of 20m, spans the channel close N of the Rottoya and the mainland.
bridge. Sveholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°29'E.) is situated on the SW
6.50
Imarsundet (63°12'N., 8°18'E.), a shallow passage, is en-

6.49 extremity of Sveholmen. The white sector of this light leads
tered from S between Oykan, the SE point of Stabben, and the NE of Ruoya. When NE of Ruoya steer a mid-channel course
SW point of Ertvagoya and leads NNW between these two is- and pass SW of Sveholmen Light and then into Gjerdesvika.
Pub. 182
Transit of Auresundet should not be attempted without local 6.53 Reimane (63°31'N., 7°50'E.) lies in the S part of a
knowledge. large area of low light-colored rocks which cannot be distin-
Vinjefjorden continues E from Arasvikfjorden, and leads 10
6.50 guished from afar. Storbaen lies on the NE edge of this group.
miles E from Aroya to Vinjeora, at its head. Small islets, surrounded by above and below water rocks, ex-
6.53
Hovedehammaren Light (63°12'N., 8°51'E.) is situated on

6.50 tend about 12 miles N from the W extremity of Froya, then
the S side of the fjord, 6.75 miles within its entrance. continue about 35 miles NE terminating in the Halten Islands.
A white sector of the light ahead, leads through the W part of
6.50 Below-water rocks and dangers extend from 6 to 8 miles out-
6.53
Vinjefjorden; another white sector, bearing astern, leads side this line of islets, and in general the islets are not easily
through the E part of the fjord to its head. identified. The entire area should be given a good berth as it is
Anchorage is available WNW of Vinjeora, in 16 to 20m,
6.50 dangerous. The 200m curve lies within a short distance of the
sand and clay. outer dangers and soundings afford little warning.
Caution.—A bridge, with a maximum clearance of 15m, has
6.50 The most important lights along this coast, from S to N, are
6.53
been constructed spanning the N part of Auresundet. Haugjegla Light, situated 4 miles N of Smola; Sletringen
Light (63°40'N., 8°16'E.), situated close off the W extremity of
The Outer Coast—Kristiansund to Trondheim Froya, about 11 miles NE of Haugjegla Light; and Sula Light
(63°51'N., 8°28'E.), situated on the N part of Store Sula, well
6.51 From Grip Light(63°14'N., 7°37'E.), at the seaward inside the dangers, about 12 miles NNE of Sletringen Light.
end of Gripholen, the islands and rocks off the coast extend Farther N are Vingleia Light (63°55'N., 8°41'E.), situated 7
6.53
about 75 miles NE to the island of Halten. miles NE of Sula Light; Finnvaer Light (64°04'N., 9°07'E.),
The Halten Islands are situated on the W side of the entrance
6.51 situated in an islet group about 22 miles NE of Sula Light; and
to Frohavet, the primary approach channel from N to Trond- Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.), situated on the W side of the
heim, a distance of about 75 miles, through the various chan- entrance to Frohavet about 10 miles NE of Finnvaer Light. A
nels. racon is located at Halten Light.
The three large islands of Smola, Hitra, and Froya front this
6.51 There are numerous lights and navigational aids charted
6.53
stretch of coast. Smola, the farthest S, is low-lying in compari- along this section of the coast.
son with the mainland and other islands in its vicinity. It rises
to a height of about 67m at the SE end. Hitra, situated NE, is 6.54 Gripholen is the principal S approach from seaward to
the highest, about 305m high, and the largest of the three. Trondheimsleia, but it may also be entered through Ramsoy-
Froya, the farthest N, lies close N of Hitra. fjorden, which is entered about 24 miles NNE of Grip Light.
Numerous small islands, islets, and dangers extend seaward
6.51 Ramsoyfjorden is formed between Smola, on the W side,
6.54
to a distance of about 8 miles from Smola and up to 12 miles N and Hitra, on the E. It leads about 8 miles SSE toward a junc-
and more than 30 miles. tion with Trondheimsleia.
The tidal currents usually set ENE with the rising tide and
6.51 A submarine gas pipeline extends from Heidrun (65°19.5N.,
6.54
WSW with the falling tide, following the trend of the coast. 7°19.1E.), a platform described in paragraph 7.1, to Tjeldber-
Caution.—Several environmentally sensitive sea areas, with
6.51 godden (63°25'N., 8°42'E.) and enters Ramsoyfjorden about
trawling restrictions and best seen on the chart, lie E and S of 0.5 miles W of Saebuodden Light (63°29.4N., 8°14.3E.). The
Storeneset (63°44.7'N., 5°20.2'E.). These areas lie approxi- pipeline then extends to a position 3 miles NNW of Rognannes
mately 40 miles W of Froya Bank (63°46.8'N., 7°21.3'E.). Light, where it extends SSE to a position about 0.2 mile SW of
Stangnesflua.
6.52 Morkedalstua (63°30'N., 8°31'E.), in the SW part of
Hitra, and Havikfjellet, 5 miles NE, are both conspicuous. 6.55 Tjeldbergodden (63°25'N., 8°42'E.) is the site of a
When approaching the coast, at a distance of 5 or 10 miles N
6.52 methanol terminal. The pipeline comes ashore on the E side of
of Halten, the land may be seen as far as Tonnelsfjell, 372m the terminal. A safety zone extends up to 0.3 mile seaward of
high, which rises about 24 miles SSE of Halten. the terminal. Concrete berths are located at a mole on the W
To the N, Oksbasheia, 228m high, is visible at a distance of
6.52 side of the terminal and at a quay on the E side of the terminal,
32 miles ENE of Halten. Berth information is, as follows:
Store Kopperen (63°48'N., 8°44'E.), 476m high, rises about
6.52 1. The E side of mole is 93m long, with alongside depths
3 miles ENE of Tonnelsfjell. It resembles a haystack. In clear of 5.6 to 9.5m.
weather, Store Kopperen may be seen from 40 miles distant. 2. The root of mole is 35m long, with alongside depths
On Linesoya, an island 14.5 miles SE of Halten, Linesfjell
6.52 of 5.9 to 8.8m.
(64°01'N., 9°54'E.), rises to a height of 229m. Linesfjell is sep- 3. The quay is 78m long, with alongside depths of 12.9
arated from a similar height by a steep cleft with a small round to 16.3m.
knot in it. Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be ordered using
6.55
Almeningskollen, situated on an island about 16 miles E of

6.52 SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot
Halten, can be seen from a distance of 15 to 20 miles. It ap- Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards about 1
pears rounded from W or N, and is easily identified. Tron- mile NNW of Grip Light.
ningsfjell, 297m high, rises about 5 miles SE of Vessels should contact the Kristainsund pilot station on VHF
6.55
Almeningskollen, can be seen from 15 to 17 miles seaward. It channel 16 about 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot boarding
is marked by a conspicuous slanting road. position. Vessels that call on VHF channel 16 will be connect-
ed to the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center via Floro Coast Radio
Pub. 182
6.55 Tjeldbergodden Methanol Terminal
Station or Rogaland Coast Radio Station if the station does not white sector of the light leads towards the cove from the vicini-
respond. ty of Store Kvaloya.
Product tankers should send their ETA via their agent 72
6.55 Dyrnesvagen is protected from NW by a breakwater that ex-
6.56
hours prior to arrival. Confirmations should be sent 48 hours, tends 160m SW from Kalvoya, about 0.15 mile NW of Dyrnes
24 hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival. Any changes to the ETA Light. The breakwater has several alongside berths on its NE
must be sent immediately. side; the berths have lengths of 12 to 40m, with alongside
Coaster and dry cargo vessels shall send their ETA via their
6.55 depths of 3 to 7m.
agent 24 hours prior to arrival. The terminal shall be contacted Sorgrunnen (63°33'N., 8°00'E.) and Nordgrunnen, patches
6.56
no later than 30 minutes prior to arrival on VHF channel 11 to with depths of 20 and 32m, lie in the NW approach to Ramsoy-
receive berthing instructions. fjorden, 1.25 and 1.75 miles, respectively, NE of Haugjegla
Light.
Main Control Room—Contact Information Gjesingboerne, awash in places, lies 2 miles NW of Steinsoy,
6.56
and Mefjordbaen, a drying patch, lies 1.25 miles ENE of that

Call sign Statoil Tjeldbergodden island.
VHF VHF channels 11 and 16 Austre Reiflua (63°27'N., 8°13'E.), a 6m patch, lies in the
6.56
fairway about 2 miles SE of Steinsoy. Ramsoybaen, drying and

marked by a beacon, lies on the E side of the fairway 2.75
Facsimile 47-71-649055 miles SSE of Austre Reiflua. Fosflua, a 6m patch, lies 1.5
miles SSE of Ramsoybaen. Ramsoygalten, marked by a bea-
6.56 Steinsoy, close off the NE coast of Smola, 5.75 miles con, lies 1.5 miles SE of Fosflua. Austklakkane, 10m patches,
SSE of Haugjegla Light, and Saebuoy (63°30'N., 8°15'E.), 3 lies 1.25 miles ENE of Ramsoygalten.
miles ENE are the N entrance points of Ramsoyfjorden. A light Shoal water extends about 2 miles into Ramsoyfjorden from
6.56
is situated on the SW end of Saebuoy. the E coast of Smola, and 1.75 miles W from Hitra.
Tides—Currents.—In Ramsoyfjorden, the tidal currents set
6.56
S with the rising tide and N with the falling tide. The N current 6.57 Vessels may approach Ramsoyfjorden from N or NW
is always stronger, and when it is opposed by N winds at by steering in the white sector of the light on the SW side of
springs, considerable turbulence occurs in the NW entrance to Saebuoy. Steer to a position 1.5 miles NW of the light and en-
the fjord. ter the white sector of Remmingskjer Light (63°22'N.,
Kvaloy Light (63°24.6'N., 7°50.8'E.) stands on the W end of
6.56
8°17'E.), which course leads into Ramsoyfjorden, between the
Kvaloya, close E of Maholmen. dangers off each coast of the fjord.
Dyrnes Light (63°26'N., 7°51'E.) stands at the N entrance
6.56
When the vessel is abeam of Fosflua, with the light about 2
6.57
point of Dyrnesvagen, a cove on the NW side of Smola; the miles distant, steer SE to pass about midway between Rem-
mingskjer Light and Ramsoygalten and enter Trondheimsleia,
Pub. 182
steering as required to destination. in Frohavet. In winter, an E and N flow is considered a sure in-
Froyfjorden (63°40'N., 8°40'E.) lies 9 miles N of the W en-
6.57 dication of an E gale.
trance to Ramsoyfjorden. The whole W side of Hitra from An unusually strong flood current is considered to be an in-
6.59
Saebuoy to the entrance of Froyfjorden is fronted by islets dication of W or NW gales. An unusually low tide is an indica-
which extend up to 4.5 miles offshore. tion of N winds.
Froyfjorden extends about 16 miles ENE from its W en-
6.57 The W side of Frohavet is comparatively free from dangers,
6.59
trance, S of Sletringen Light, and leads into Frohavet. but the E side is encumbered by numerous fringing islands and
The W half of the fjord is relatively free from danger, but the
6.57 shoals.
E half is narrow and encumbered with many dangers in or near Borklakken, a shoal with a least charted depth of 8.5m, lies
6.59
the fairway. Local knowledge is necessary to transit this fjord. on the E side of the entrance about 6 miles NNW of Almening-
Regulations.—A speed limit of 5 knots is in force along the
6.57 skollen (64°11'N., 10°01'E.), the summit of Almenningen, and
coastal waters of Ulvoya (63°40'N., 8°04'E.) and Fjellvaeroy, Ranen, with a least charted depth of 4.9m lies about 5 miles
Lille Helsoy (63°40'N., 8°04'E.), Store Helsoya, Kvaenvaer, NW of the summit.
and Kvernvaer. This speed limit applies to all vessels except Ravnfaldet, awash, 3.25 miles W of the S point of Almennin-
6.59
those engaged in operations for the Norwegian armed forces or gen, is the farthest W of the dangers off that island.
craft engaged in emergency police, custom, fire fighting, am- Flessa (64°06'N., 9°54'E.) is the largest and farthest N of a
6.59
bulance, or search and rescue missions. group of islets situated about 5 miles SW of Almenningen. The
islets and shoal water extend 3.5 miles farther SW.
6.58 Kya (63°46'N., 8°19'E.), marked by a light, is a small Borklakken and Ranen are considered the most dangerous of
6.59
islet situated 6 miles N of Sletringen Light. the shoals W of Almenningen.

Foul ground extends 2.5 miles SW from Kya, and the same
6.58
distance NNW. Synstflua, a 9m patch, lies 2.75 miles WSW 6.60 Melsteinen (63°58'N., 9°35'E.), comprised of a group
and Oreklakken, with a least charted depth of 13m, lies 3.25 of low flat islets and rocks lying between 8 and 15 miles SW of
miles WNW, respectively, from Kya. They are the farthest W Flessa, is separated from that island group by a deep wide
of these dangers. channel.
Sula Light (63°51'N., 8°27'E.) is located about 6 miles NE
6.58 In the Melsteinen group, the tidal currents are S on the rising
6.60
of Kya, at the S end of Froan. tide and N on the falling tide. The currents are strong and con-
Froan, the waters lying between Sula and Halten, 30 miles
6.58 siderable overfalls occur.
NE, are foul and large areas are not navigable. A few channels To the SSW of Melsteinen is the Tarva Group of islets and
6.60
lead between the islets and reefs, but local knowledge is essen- rocks. which lie from 7 to 12 miles distant from the light in
tial. Melsteinen. Husoya is the largest islet in the group. A light is
Vingleia, entered 7.5 miles NNE of Sula, affords the only
6.58 situated on a small islet off the N extremity of Husoya.
passage for large vessels, in the vicinity, from the sea to Fro- Krakvagfjorden (63°40'N., 9°15'E.) connects Frohavet and
6.60
havet, but as the entrance is difficult to distinguish, use of the Trondheimsleia, and leads on the E side of Ulvoya and Fjell-
channel is not recommended unless a local mariner is em- vaeroya, and W of Krakvagoya.
barked. Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Flesa, in the center of
6.60
Krakvagfjorden, the incoming current sets S during the rising

6.59 Frohavet, a deep arm of the sea, is entered between tide, continuing so as to pass on either side of Sore Leksa and
Halten Light (64°10'N., 9°25'E.) and Almenningen, an island Nordre Leksa, and join the E flood current in Trondheimsleia.
situated 16 miles E. The channel leads SSW to Krakvag- The outgoing currents set in the opposite directions.
fjorden, and is formed between Froan and Froya on the W side
and the islands lying off the mainland on the E. 6.61 Gronholmen Light (63°41'N., 9°09'E.) stands on
From a position 5 miles E of Halten, the distance to Trond-
6.59 Gronholmen, 9 miles SW of Husoya, in a position about 1 mile
heim is 75 miles. off the E coast of Ulvoya.
Vessels bound for Trondheim and entering Frohavet from the
6.59 Tarnet, above water in places, lies on the E side of the en-
6.61
offing W of Halten should keep at least 5 miles N of Halten trance to Krakvagfjorden, about 5 miles ENE of Gronholmen
Light. When the light bears not less than 236°, course may be Light. Ugsteinskjerane, with a least charted depth of 4.6m, lies
altered S, steering to pass from 4 to 5 miles E of the light and 2.25 miles SW and an 18.3m patch lies 2 miles WSW, respec-
then in about mid-channel. tively, from Tarnet.
Vessels proceeding from the N should approach Halten Light
6.59 Flesa Light (63°39'N., 9°14'E.) is situated on the W side of
6.61
on a bearing of about 183°, so as to pass well W of the dangers Krakvagfjorden, 3 miles SE of Gronholmen Light. A racon is
off the mainland; they should then pass E of the light and located at the light tower which stands on Flesa Islet.
through mid-channel as directed above. The dangers off Fjellvaeroya lie W of a line joining these
6.61
Tides—Currents.—Currents in Frohavet flow S on the ris-

6.59 two lights. A patch, with a depth of 20m, is charted 0.45 mile N
ing tide and N on the falling tide. These directions are opposite of Flesa Light. A pilot boarding station is located 0.75 mile NE
those at Halten and farther seaward. During the rising tide, the of the light.
current runs S to join the flood current in Trondheimsleia. Krakvagoya, 31m high, is situated 2.25 miles E of Flesa
6.61
The tidal current often runs strongly, notably on the W side

6.59 Light. Kommersoyflua, a 7.3m patch, lies 0.6 mile SSE.
of Frohavet. A vessel bound for Trondheim should pass in mid-channel E
6.61
When a S or SW gale is imminent, there is usually a W flow

6.59 of Flesa Light and then round the SW end of Krakvagoya at a
Pub. 182
distance of about 1 mile. It is marked by a beacon. A chain of islets extends ENE from
Course should then be altered to pass about midway between
6.61 Svartskjeret to Grisvagoya, about 2 miles distant.
Nordre Leksa, 3 miles SSE of Krakvagoya, and Smellingflua, Gjerdesvika is entered between Svartskjeret and Omoyflua,
6.63
awash, 3 miles NE of Nodre Leksa. The normal route into awash, 0.8 mile S.
Trondheimsleia leads E of Sore Leksa. Steinholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°20'E.) is situated on the S
6.63
The white sector of Rognan Light (63°34'N., 9°17'E.) leads

6.61 side of Gjerdesvika, just over 1 mile SE of Svartskjeret. The
from Krakvagfjorden, W of Ugsteinskjerane, and E of Sliskjer- white sector of this light bearing between 078° and 112° leads
taren and Sliskjeret, which lie just over 2 miles and 1.25 miles, from Edoyfjorden into Gjerdesvika.
respectively, NNW of the light. Charted depths of 5, 9, 12 and 11m lie in the white sector
6.63
When clear of Sliskjeret, alter course to pass W of Rognan

6.61 above, and are situated 0.35 mile S, 0.5 mile SSW, 0.9 mile SW
Light and W of Storaflua, a 1m patch lying 1.3 miles SSE of and 1.25 miles SW, respectively, from the beacon on Svartsk-
the light, then into Trondheimsleia, altering course toward the jeret.
ENE to Trondheim or WSW toward Kristiansund. When within 0.75 mile of Steinholmen Light, steer to pass N
6.63
of the light, then steer ENE on a midchannel course.

The Main Route—Kristiansund to Trondheim Auresundet, previously described in paragraph 6.50, may be
6.63
entered from Gjerdesvika by steering in the white sector of

6.62 The main route from Kristiansund to Trondheim leads Sveholmen Light (63°17'N., 8°29'E.). Sveholmen Light is sit-
through Ytrefjorden, Edoyfjorden, and Trondheimsleia, pass- uated about 4 miles ESE of Steinholmen Light.
ing S of Smola, Hitra, Sore Leksa, and Nordre Leksa to Agde- Torsetsundet is formed between Skarsoya and the mainland
6.63
neset, which is situated at the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden. on the S and extends 4.75 miles ENE. It is entered from
A route leading seaward of the Froan Archipelago, NE of
6.62 Gjerdesvika, S of Alfartangen, and terminates at its junction
Smola, branches NW through Ramsoyfjorden, between Smola with Arvagfjorden and Dromnessundet.
and Hitra. Alfartangen (63°19'N., 8°34'E.), the SW extremity of Skar-
6.63
A route leading N through Krakvagfjorden and Frohavet,

6.62 soya, lies 3 miles NE of Sveholmen Light. A 2.1m patch lies
branches N between Hitra and Sore Leksa. 0.5 mile WSW of Alfartangen.
Ytrefjorden, Edoyfjorden, and the greater part of Trondhe-
6.62 Torsetsundet is narrowest off Tua, 1.25 miles E of Alfartan-
6.63
imsleia form part of Indreleia, the N continuation of which, gen. The least depth in the fairway is 7.5m.
through Grandevika, is approached NNE of Nordre Leksa. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 16m, spans Torsetsun-
6.63
Ytrefjorden, from its junction with Gripholen, N of Ytre

6.62 det at Tua.
Langholmen Light (63°11'N., 7°52'E.), leads 7 miles ENE in-
to Edoyfjorden. Ytrefjorden is deep and in mid-channel, clear 6.64 Glomstadholmen Light (63°19'N., 8°38'E.) is situat-
of dangers, presents no navigational difficulty. ed on the S side of the fairway, 0.7 mile ENE of the bridge. The
Baeflua (63°14'N., 7°52'E.), a 3.5m patch, lies 2.25 miles
6.62 white sector of the light leads through the W part of Torsetsun-
NNE of Ytre Langholmen Light. Kutmannsflua, a 6m patch, det, N of foul ground which lies close E of Tua.
lies 3 miles ENE of Baeflua. Depths of 1m, 6m, and 3m lie, re- Glomstadholmen Light bearing between 246° and 250°,
6.64
spectively, 1 mile, 1.5 miles and 2.5 miles, ENE of Baeflua. astern, leads through the E part of Torsetsundet. A charted
Edoyfjorden is entered from Ytrefjorden and leads ENE into
6.62 depth of 11m lies within this white sector, about 1 mile ENE
Trondheimsleia. The channel is deep and free from dangers in from the light.
the fairway; from abreast Ytre Langholmen Light, vessels Lilleoya Light (63°20'N., 8°44'E.) stands on the N point of
6.64
should steer a mid-channel course, passing about 1 mile SE of an island, Lilleoya, at the E end of Torsetsundet. A 5.5m patch
Tyrhaugh Light. lies 183m NNW and Russen, a drying patch, lies about 0.1
Tyrhaug Light (63°19'N., 8°14'E.) is situated close off the
6.62 mile N. Storoya, an island, lies 0.2 mile NNW from the light.
NE end of Edoya, on the N side of Edoyfjorden, about 12 miles Three routes lead NE or E from the E end of Torsetsundet, as
6.64
NE of Ytre Langholmen Light. follows:

Trondheimsleia is considered to extend from Tyrhaug Light
6.62 1. A route W of Storoya.
to Beian Light and Agdenes Light, or to the mouth of Trondhe- 2. The channel E between Russen and Lilleoya Light.
imsfjorden, a distance of about 45 miles ENE; the channel, for 3. The channel S of Lilleoya Light.
the most part, is free from sunken dangers. It can be navigated Arvagfjorden is the continuation of Torsetsundet, leading 3.5
6.64
by the largest vessels. miles E from Lilleoya and is entered S of Hellandneset, a

Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Trondheimsleia set E
6.62 promontory standing 0.8 mile ENE of Lilleoya.
with the rising tide and W with the falling tide. At the narrows, Arvag lies at the head of the fjord.
6.64
about 25 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light, they run with considerable Dromnessundet leads 4 miles NNW along the E side of
6.64
velocity. Skarsoya into Trondheimsleia. It is foul in places, but well

Gjerdesvika leads 7 miles E from the junction of Edoy-
6.62 marked.
fjorden and Trondheimsleia. There is usually a N flow at all stages of the tide; a S flow
6.64
Tidal currents flow to the E on the rising tide and W on the

6.62 occurs only during strong NW winds.
ebb. The flow can be strong in the W entrance. Espenes Light (63°21'N., 8°43'E.) stands on a point on the E
6.64
side of Dromnessundet, 0.75 mile NW of Lilleoya Light. Rog-

6.63 Svartskjeret (63°18'N., 8°18'E.) lies near the center nannes Light is situated on the W side of the channel, 2.5 miles
of the E entrance to Gjerdesvika, 2 miles SE of Tyrhaug Light. NNW of Espenes Light.
Pub. 182
Vessels should enter Dromnessundet by passing E of Storoya

6.64 SW of Garten.
in the white sector of Espenes Light. When N of Storoya, alter Vessels after passing Terningen steer a mid-channel course
6.66
course to the W, then steer to pass W of the light and bring it between the mainland and the islands to the N. After passing
astern bearing between 173° and 187°, which course leads E of Smellingflua, the mainland coast should not be approached
a point 0.75 mile N of the light. within 0.25 mile as it is foul, and the dangers W of Agdenes
Rognannes Light (63°23'N., 8°39'E.), bearing between 313°
6.64 Light should be given a good berth. The light should be round-
and 316°, ahead, leads farther N through Dromnessundet, passed at a distance of 0.75 mile.
ing between dangers which lie off either coast. Stornafjorden extends about 6 miles NE from the E end of
6.66
The white sectors of Rognannes Light, astern, offer three al-

6.64 Trondheimsleia, at the entrance to Trondheimsfjorden. It termi-
ternative routes farther N into Trondheimsleia, depending on nates in two inlets which are frozen over in severe winters.
the destination. There is considerable traffic in the fjord during the herring fish-
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 15m, crosses Drom-
6.64 ing season.
nessundet at Ulvnestangen, about 0.7 mile NNW of Espenes
Light. Trondheimsfjorden
6.65 Remmingskjer Light (63°22'N., 8°17'E.) is situated 6.67 Trondheimsfjorden is entered E of Agdeneset
3.5 miles NNE of Tyrhaug Light at the junction of Trondhe- (63°39'N., 9°46'E.), and, with its branches, leads SE and NE
imsleia and Ramsoyfjorden. for a total distance of 70 miles to Steinkjer, which is situated 52
Klakksbroren Light (63°21'N., 8°25'E.) is on the S side of
6.65 miles ENE of Agdeneset.
Trondheimsleia, 5.5 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light. Trondheim lies 24 miles from Agdeneset.
6.67
A line of above-water rocks and shoals extends from

6.65 Ice.—The outer part of Trondheimsfjorden is ice-free all
6.67
Kvitholmen, 2.75 miles ENE of Tyrhaug Light, NE to Klakks- year round and Skarnsundet is normally ice-free.
broren Light. Friskjeret, marked by a beacon, lies 0.8 mile NE Beitstadfjorden is frozen over during January, February, and
6.67
of the light. March in some years, and some of the other branch fjords may
Vessels proceeding E through Trondheimsleia steer with the
6.65 be frozen over at times.
white sector of Tyrhaug Light, astern, which leads N of Tides—Currents.—A normal tidal current runs in Trondhe-
6.67
Klakksbroren Light. Austklakkane, 6.5 miles NE of the light, imsfjorden. Off Agdeneset and W of Tautra, the maximum rate
falls within the sector. is 1 knot, and the currents are reported to run strongly in
When reaching a position S of Austklakkane (63°23'N.,
6.65 Skarnsundet and in the entrance to Borgenfjorden and in Beit-
8°24'E.), vessels should steer E, keeping a mid-channel course. stadsundet. Elsewhere the rate does not exceed 0.5 knot.
The channel is broad and free from dangers in the fairway,
6.65 Pilotage.—Trondheim has a pilot office, which has a pilot
6.67
though a number of rocks lie close under the land on either boat station at Hetvika. A pilot boat station has been estab-
side. Terningen Light, bearing about 070° ahead, may be lished off Flesa Light. Pilots for ports in Trondheimsfjorden
steered for. The course will lead clear of the dangers. can be obtained at Kristiansund.
Terningen Light (63°30'N., 9°03'E.) stands on the S side of
6.65 Caution.—Gunnery firing practice takes place, in an area
6.67
Store Terningen, about 19 miles E of Klakksbroren Light. which includes the outer part of Trondheimsfjorden, within 3.5
Hevnefjorden is entered on the S side of Trondheimsleia, in a
6.65 miles of Agdeneset. For further information on gunnery firing
position 1.5 miles SSE of Terningen Light and leads 133 miles areas, see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
S. Astfjorden extends nearly 9 miles E, 4 miles within the en- Ocean.
trance; Snildfjorden extends 8 miles E, 8 miles within the en- An ammunition dumping ground is situated in Trondheims-
6.67
trance. fjorden and is centered about 2 miles SSE of Agdeneset.

Hevnefjorden is, to a large extent, deep and clear of dangers.
6.65
Anchorage is available at the head of Hevnefjorden, in 23 to

6.65 6.68 From Agdeneset, Trondheimsfjorden trends about 12
28m, sand and clay, but is not recommended in N winds to miles SSE to Rodberg (63°29'N., 10°00'E.). A light is situated
which the bay is exposed. on the mole at Rodberg.
Selvbukta (63°37'N., 9°43'E.), a cove on the W side of the
6.68
6.66 To pass through the narrows situated close E of fjord, 1.5 miles S of Agdeneset, affords anchorage to medium-
Terningen Light, vessels steering for the light, from W, should sized vessels, in 13 to 28m. The cove dries within 183m of its
alter course when within about 1.5 miles; the fairway then head. Larger vessels may anchor, in 37m, sand, 0.2 to 0.25 mile
leads S of the light and between Josnoya, on the N, and Hevn- offshore, in the vicinity of a cove 2.5 miles S of Selvbukta.
skjelova (63°29'N., 9°08'E.), on the S. These islands are nearly This anchorage is exposed, particularly in N and S winds.
steep-to, but attention must be paid to the strength of the tidal A light is situated on Gjetneset, a promontory situated 2.75
6.68
currents. miles S of Rodberg.

Between Terningen Light and the entrance to Trondheims-
6.66 Vessels may transit this part of Trondheimsfjorden by steer-
6.68
fjorden, the distance is about 20 miles. The channel is entered ing a mid-channel course to a position off Rodberg, which
by vessels proceeding from Frohavet and Kjrakvagfjorden, E leads clear of danger.
of Nordre Leskka, about 10 miles ENE of the light. Orkedalsfjorden and Gaulosen comprise a branch of Trond-
6.68
Garten (63°39'N., 9°32'E.), an island 72m high, lies on the

6.66 heimsfjorden which is entered between Gjetneset and Frosk-
N side of Trondheimsleia, 4 miles ENE of Nordre Leksa. jeret (63°25'N., 10°07'E.), 4 miles ESE.
Smellingflua, awash and marked by a light, lies about 0.8 mile A light is situated near the end of a spit extending 0.2 mile
6.68
Pub. 182
NW from Froskjeret. Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 9 to 28m, mud, N

6.69
The E part of the entrance to Orkedalsfjorden and Gaulosen

6.68 of the berths at Orkanger.
forms part of the harbor area of Trondheim. Gaulosen is entered between Lundsneset (63°20'N.,
6.69
The white sector of the light at Rodberg, bearing astern,

6.68 10°02'E.) and Vevikneset, 1.5 miles NE. It extends 4.5 miles
leads E of Gjetneset to the mouth of Orkedalsfjorden. SE. The E part forms part of the harbor area of Trondheim.
Orkedalsfjorden is entered W of a point 5.5 miles S of Gjet-
6.68 Borsa is situated on the S shore of Gaulosen 1.75 miles SSE
6.69
neset. The fjord is deep except at its head, where drying banks of Lundsneset. A quay, 15m long, with depths of 6.7 to 12m
lie at the mouth of the river flowing into it. alongside, is situated 1.25 miles E of the church at Borsa.
Anchorage, in 22 to 30m, clay, steeply shelving, is available
6.69
6.69 Thamshamn (Thamshavn) (63°19'N., 9°53'E.) about 1 mile SE of the quay.

(World Port Index No. 23095) is part of the harbor area named Buvika (63°18'N., 10°11'E.) is situated at the head of
6.69
Orkdalsora. It extends 1.5 miles along the SE side of the fjord Gaulosen, 3.25 miles ESE of Borsa. A narrow dredged chan-
near its head where the town of Orkanger is located. nel, with a least depth of 6.5m, leads into a basin at the mill. A
Depths—Limitations.—Information on berthing facilities quay on the W side of the basin is 103m long, with depths of
is given in the table titled Thamshamn—Berth Information. 8.5m alongside and a quay on the E side is 65m long, with 3 to
4m depths alongside.
Thamshamn—Berth Information Munkholmen Light (63°27'N., 10°23'E.) is situated on the
6.69
island of Munkholmen at Trondheim Road, off the city of

Depth Trondheim.
Berth Name Length
Alongside Trondheim Road is a nearly unobstructed basin affording an-
6.69
Thamshamn chorage to a large number of vessels. The limits of the harbor

area are as charted.
Timber Quay 95m 7.0-8.0m
The roadstead is open to the NW, N, and NE, which are the
6.69
Concrete Quay 77m 8.2-9.7m directions of prevailing winds, and a considerable sea is raised
Timber Quay 94m 9.0-9.7m by these winds at times.
Vessels may approach Trondheim Road by giving the light at
6.69
Orkanger Rodberg a berth of about 1 mile. They should then proceed E in

West side 48m 1.5-6.0m mid-channel until Munkholmen Light bears about 113°, when
course may be altered S into the roadstead, passing W of
North side 20m 5.2-6.0m Munkholmen.
East side 34m 1.2-5.2m Holmgrunnane, a shoal which extends about 0.8 mile NNE
6.69
from Munkholmen, is marked by a light on Tua, near its N ex-

No. II 82m 10.3m tremity. Depths of 1.5m are charted on Holmgrunnane.
No. III 32m 8.4m Caution.—Shallower depths than charted may be encoun-
6.69
tered between Munkholmen Light and the light on Tua.

Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels ar-
6.69
riving, departing, and shifting berths. Pilotage should be or- Trondheim (63°26'N., 10°24'E.)
dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the
Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot World Port Index No. 23090
boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E.
6.70 Trondheim is a coastal natural harbor, but the main
Contact Information.—See the table titled Thamshamn—
6.69
port facilities are sheltered by breakwaters which divide the

harbor into several protected basins. The Nidelva flows into
Trondheimsfjorden here and is crossed by several bridges.
Thamshamn—Contact Information The city is the junction for both land and sea traffic between
6.70
Port Control S and N Norway, and with rail service to Sweden.

Call sign Trondheim Port Control
Port Authority of Trondheim
https://trondheimhavn.no/en/front-page
47-73-991710
Telephone
47-91112600 (mobile) Winds—Weather.—The predominant winds in Trondheim
6.70
E-mail havnevakt@trondheimhavn.no are from the S throughout the year; however, during the months
of April through September, the afternoon winds will shift to
Port Authority the NW and N. The average winds are about 6 knots, with
Telephone 47-73-991700 some 13 days of the year when gale force winds of 34 knots or
more occur. Gales are rare from May through August.
Facsimile 47-73-991717 The harbor is always ice-free, and almost always free from
6.70
E-mail firmapost@trondheimhavn.no fog.

Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal range is 2m and the
6.70
Pub. 182
6.70 By Trondheim Havn, via Wikimedia Commons

6.70 Trondheim looking SW down the Nidelva Canal with Brattora Island on the right
6.70 By Trondheim Havn, via Wikimedia Commons

6.70 Trondheim looking N past Munkholmen Island into Trondheimsfjorden
Pub. 182
By Trondheim Havn, via Wikimedia Commons

6.70
6.70 Trondheim looking NE over Brattora Island
spring range is 2.7m. Trondheim—Berth Information

The ebb current from Nidelva sets out fairly strong, occa-
6.70
sionally attaining a maximum velocity of 5 to 6 knots during Depth

Berth Name Length
the thawing season. Alongside
Depths—Limitations.—Several berths are available at the
6.70
Quay No. 9 104m 9.0m
port. Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table ti-
tled Trondheim—Berth Information. Quay No. 10 60m 9.2m
Aspect.—The cathedral situated 1.5 miles SSE of Munkhol-
6.70
men Light has a green roof and a tall conspicuous green spire.
Stiftsgarden, a large wooden house 0.25 mile N of the cathe-
dral, is conspicuous. Quay No. 13 94m 9.2m
Quay No. 14 130m 6.5m
Trondheim—Berth Information
Depth
Berth Name Length Brattor Quay
Alongside
Pier I Quay No. 16 150m 6.5m
Quay No. 1 and No. 2 135m 8.0m Quay No. 17 90m 6.5m
Ro-Ro ramp 15m — Quay No. 67.1 30m 4.5m
Tavern Quay No. 67.2 40m 4.5m
Honour Quay 66m 6.4m West Canal Quay
Pier II Quay No. 19 105m 5.1m
Quay No. 4 58m 5.5m Quay No. 20 65m 5.1m
Pub. 182
Trondheim—Berth Information Trondheim—Berth Information

Depth Depth
Berth Name Length Berth Name Length
Alongside Alongside
Ila Pier Other Berths
Quay No. 26 191m 8.4m Fagervika—Statoil 57m 11.0m
Quay No. 27 100m 8.4m Haggdalen—Biologisk 10m 6.2m
Quay No. 28 132m 8.7m Haggdalen—Norske Shell 28m 6.0m
Quay No. 29 66m 8.4m Hovringen—Esso 50m 11.3m
Quay No. 30 90m 8.7m Cruise Ship Quay—Brattora 96m 13.0m
Quay No. 31 132m 10.6m
Pilotage.—A pilot station has been established off Flesa
6.70
Quay No. 32 155m 8.4m Light in position 63°39'N, 9°15'E.

Frostakaia 115m 3.6m Harbor pilotage is compulsory for foreign vessels arriving,
6.70
departing, or shifting berths. Pilotage should be ordered using

Ravnklokaia SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot
Quay No. 35 80m 3.6m Booking Center at an additional cost. They normally embark
on the landward side of Munkholmen, or, in bad weather, off
Kystenkaia the appropriate harbor entrance.
Quay No. 36 115m 3.6m The pilot for Krakvagfjorden boards in position 63°39.0'N,
6.70
Quay No. 37 155m 3.6m 9°14.9'E. Trondheim also provides pilotage for Stjordal and
Orkanger.
Gryta A pilot station, with State Pilots, who do outbound transit
6.70
Quay No. 38 240m 0.0-3.6m and coastal pilotage, is established at the public pilot office at
Trondheim on Pier 2.
Quay No. 39 250m 0.0-3.6m Vessels approaching from the S should contact the pilot
6.70
Fosenkaia when about 10 miles from Grip Light. The pilot station moni-
tors on VHF channel 16.
Quay No. 40 A-D 290m 5.1m Regulations.—An arrival message should be sent 72 hours
6.70
Transittkaia prior to arrival via Rogaland Radio and also 24 hours prior to
arrival via Kristiansund Radio. Any significant change in the
Quay No. 41 70m 8.0m 24 hours ETA must be advised to the Pilots.
Quay No. 42 42m 8.0m In addition, tankers radio the agent “Petroleum Trondheim”
6.70
at least 72 hours prior to arrival via Rogaland Radio giving

ETA at Grip in UTC and advising all requirements and other
Kullkranpiren information pertinent to the turnaround of the vessel. Confirm
the ETA via Kristiansund Radio 12 hours before arrival at Grip.
Quay No. 45 130m 1.5m
Contact Information.—See the table titled Trondheim—
Quay No. 46 95m 8.0m Contact Information.
Trondheim—Contact Information
Port Authority
Strandveikaia
E-mail firmapost@trondheim.havn.no
Quay No. 52 165m 6.0m
Port Control
Quay No. 53 105m 6.0m
Call sign Trondheim Port Control
Ladehammerkaia
Telephone 47-91112600 (mobile)
Quay No. 55 141m 6.0m
Quay No. 56 91m 6.0m Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in Trondheim Road-
6.70
Quay No. 57 50m 7.0m stead, in 22 to 42m, fine sand and mud, about 1 mile SW of
Munkholmen Light. There is also anchorage 0.5 mile SSE of
Pub. 182
Munkholmen, in 34m, 0.5 mile SE. ENE.

Steinviksholm, close offshore 2 miles NE of Vaberget, is the
6.72
6.71 The main part of Trondheimsfjord, with its continua- site of the ruins of a monastery. Anchorage for medium-size
tions, extends about 45 miles NE from Trondheim. It is irregu- vessels may be taken, in 20 to 30m, clay, close E of Steinvik-
lar in shape and varies greatly in width. sholm.
The fjord is deep and navigable throughout the year. The SE
6.71 Storgrunnen, an 11m patch, lies 0.8 mile NNE of Steinvik-
6.72
shore is indented by several large bays and toward its head is sholm. Storholmen and Smaskjera, which are partly awash, lie
less rugged than in the vicinity of Trondheim. 0.5 to 1 mile farther NNE.
Storegrunnen (63°30'N., 10°26'E.), a 7.3m patch, lies near
6.71 Skarvholmane and Furuholmen, with foul ground close NE,
6.72
the middle of Trondheimsfjorden, 2.75 miles NNW of the light lie in the entrance to the E arm of Asenfjorden, from 1.25 to
on Tua. Indregrunnen and Treungsgrunnen, two 14.6m patches, 1.75 miles ENE of Steinviksholm.
lie 1.75 and 2.5 miles, respectively, NE of Storegrund. Saltoya (63°33'N., 10°54'E.) lies in the S central part of the
6.72
Strindfjorden is the water area on the SE side of Trondhe-

6.71 E arm, 0.35 mile SSE of Furuholmen. A light stands on its W
imsfjorden, and is entered between Ostmarktangen (63°27'N., end. The white sector of the light on Saltoya leads clear of dan-
10°27'E.) and Tautra, an island situated about 8 miles NNE of gers into the E arm of Asenfjorden.
the point. From its entrance, the fjord trends about 6 miles E to Langstein (63°33'N., 10°54'E.) is situated in a cove on the S
6.72
Stjordalsfjorden, on the SE side, and Asenfjorden, on the NE shore, 73m SE of Saltoya. A quay, 36m long, with depths of 6
side. The fjord is free from dangers in its middle part. to 7.2m, is situated at the W entrance point of the cove.
Saksvikskjer, above water, lies 0.6 mile offshore, 3.75 miles
6.71 Korsnesodden Light (63°35'N., 10°50'E.) is situated on the
6.72
ESE of Ostmarktangen. N side of Asenfjorden, 5.25 miles NE of Slaegga. The white

A conspicuous tower, with a restaurant near the top, stands
6.71 sector of the light leads into the fjord, clear of the entrance
about 2 miles S of Ostmarktangen Light. A mast stands close E points.
of the tower. Lofjorden is entered between a point 1.5 miles ENE of Kors-
6.72
Litlegrunnen (63°28'N., 10°46'E.), a 6.7m patch, lies in the

6.71 nesodden Light and a point 0.3 mile NE. Vessels can anchor
E part of Strindfjorden, 4.75 miles ENE of Saksvikskjer. Fisk- anywhere in the fjord, clay, clear of the submarine cables.
vikgrunnen, a 12.8m patch about 2 miles N of Litlegrunnen,
lies 0.3 mile offshore. 6.73 Ambornes Light (63°34'N., 10°26'E.) is situated on
Stjordalsfjorden is entered between Haugberget (63°26'N.,
6.71 the W side of Trondheimsfjorden, 4.5 miles W of the S extrem-
10°41'E.), a point 6.25 miles ESE of Ostmarktangen, and Sk- ity of Tautra. From Ambornes Light, the NW coast of Trondhe-
jervauran, 4 miles NE. imsfjorden trends 18 miles NE to the S entrance of
Hommelvik (63°25'N., 10°48'E.) (World Port Index No.
6.71 Norviksundet. This coast is free of off-lying dangers.
23080) stands at the head of a small bay of the same name, On the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden, foul ground extends
6.73
which is entered SE of Rota Light. There are two quays at the 0.4 mile SSW from Tautra, with a depth of 1.5m charted near
head of the bay up to 165m long, with depths from 5.2 to 11m the edge of the foul area. An 18m depth is charted 0.7 mile
alongside. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but WSW of the SW end of Tautra.
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an Tautra Light (63°35'N., 10°37'E.) stands on the NW side of
6.73
additional cost. The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N, Tautra. A 1m patch lies 0.3 mile NE of the light; patches with
9°14.9'E. The port monitors VHF channels 9 and 16. depths of 12.8m, lie 0.35 mile W and 0.75 mile SW, from the
Anchorage may be taken, in 25 to 35m, sand, on the W side
6.71 light. The E side of Tautra is joined to the mainland by a cause-
of Hommelvik, near its head. way.
Fanes Light, situated on the SE side of Trondheimsfjorden,
6.73
6.72 Muruvik (63°26'N., 10°51'E.) (World Port Index No. stands on a point about 6 miles NE of Tautra Light. Vessels can
23075), 2 miles NE of Hommelvik, lies at the head of a small find anchorage SE of the light, in 20m.
bay between two drying coves. There are two berths. The ex- Flagrunnen, with depths of 6.5 to 7m, lies 0.5 mile NE of
6.73
port quay has depths of 5 to 6.5m alongside; the import quay Fanes Light. Nordrunnane, a group of shoal patches, lies up to
has depths of 7.5 to 9.5m alongside. Pilotage should be ordered 1.5 miles offshore, 2.25 miles NE of the light.
using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pi- Vesterholmen (63°43'N., 11°00'E.), a promontory, lies
6.73
lot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards in about 8 miles NE of Fanes Light.
position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port monitors VHF channel
9. 6.74 Head of Trondheimsfjorden.—At its head, Trondhe-
There is anchorage near the entrance to the bay, in 22 to
6.72 imsfjorden opens into a basin; and Ytteroy, an island, lies in
30m, clay. A submarine cable lies across the bay’s entrance. this basin. Skarnsundet leads from the NW side of the basin in-
In a cove close E of Muruvik, an oil transit installation has a
6.72 to Beitstadfjorden.
quay 80m long, with a depth of 11.5m alongside. Vessels berth Sandsora Light (63°45'N., 11°03'E.) is situated on the SE
6.74
either side. extremity of Ytteroy, 2.25 miles NNE of Vesterholmen.

The town of Stjordalshalsen, lies 2.5 miles NE of Muruvik,
6.72 The dangers off the SE side of Ytteroy lie W of a line drawn
6.74
at the head of Stjordalsfjorden. from Sandsora Light, to a point on the island, 5 miles NE.
Asenfjorden is entered between Vaberget (63°31'N.,
6.72 Hokstad, on the NE side of a bay 4.75 miles NE of Sandsora
6.74
10°46'E.) and Slaegga, 3 miles WNW. From its entrance on the Light, has a quay, 17m long, with depths of 4.4 to 7.8m along-
NE side of Strindfjorden, Asenfjorden trends about 8 miles side.
Pub. 182
Hestoyflua (63°43'N., 11°04'E.), marked by a light, lies

6.74 6.76 Skarnsundet is entered from S between Brasetham-
about 2 miles SSE of Sandsora Light. South of this danger are meren (63°50'N., 11°04'E.), a point about 4 miles NNE of
patches with depths of 8 and 8.5m. Saltvikhamn Light, and Vangsholmen, a point 0.8 mile E. It is
Hestoya, an island, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Hestoyflua. Sub-
6.74 formed between Inderoy on the E and the mainland on the W.
marine cables extend from the island in a SSE direction to a The fairway leads 2.75 miles N to the S end of Beitstadfjorden.
point of land. A 9.5m patch and a 1m patch lie 0.4 mile SSW A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 45m, crosses
6.76
and 0.8 mile SSE, respectively, from the S extremity of Hes- Skarnsundet.
toya. Though narrow, Skarnsundet has a deep channel free of dan-
6.76
Fiborgtangen (63°43'N., 11°09'E.), situated 1 mile SSE of

6.74 gers; however, some ice usually appears at the beginning of the
Hestoya, is a peninsula consisting of a former, island and re- year, but it seldom obstructs the fairway.
claimed land. The tidal currents in Skarnsundet are strong, reaching a max-
6.76
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to 15,000 dwt, 200m in

6.74 imum velocity at about half tide.
length, and 8.2m draft can be handled. For berthing informa- Vennesodden Light (63°53'N., 11°03'E.) stands on a low-
6.76
tion see the table titled Fiborgtangen—Berth Information. lying point, on the W side of the N entrance to Skarnsundet.
Levangerbukta is entered between Langneset, a point 4.25
6.74 A good anchorage is available in Venneshamn, a cove locat-
6.76
miles ENE of Hestoya, and Borgsoen 1.25 miles farther ENE. ed close SW of Vennesodden Light, in 20 to 40m, sand.
Beitstadfjorden and Steinkjerfjorden together form a land-
6.76
Fiborgtangen—Berthing Information locked basin in which all known dangers lie within about 0.6
mile offshore. On the N side of the junction of the two fjords,
Berth Length Remarks Beistadsundet trends about 7 miles NNW.
Fiborgtangen Terminal Giplingoya (63°54'N., 11°01'E.), a small island, lies on the
6.76
SW side of Beitstadfjorden, 1.5 miles NW of Vennesodden

East 140m Timber and general cargo.
Light. A 5m patch lies about 0.3 mile SE of the island.
North 100m Timber and general cargo. A good anchorage is available between Giplingoya and the
6.76
shore, in depths of 12 to 20m, sand and shingle.

Levanger (63°45'N., 11°18'E.) (World Port Index No.
6.74
Verrasundet is entered from the W extremity of Beitstad-
6.76
23060) is an ice-free harbor situated at the head of Levanger- fjorden, about 2 miles NW of Giplingoya. Foul ground, with a
bukta. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 100 gt. Pilotage charted depth of 5m at its outer end, extends 0.4 mile N from
should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered the E entrance point of Verrasundet.
through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. Verrasundet extends about 11 miles WSW from its entrance
6.76
The pilot boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port and is narrow about 8 miles within its entrance. A submarine
monitors VHF channels 12, 14, and 16. cable is laid close within its entrance. An overhead cable, with
The controlling depth is 4.2m. The berths are 16 to 81m long
6.74
a vertical clearance of 45m, crosses the channel 2.25 miles
and have depths of 3 to 6m alongside. within the entrance; another overhead cable, with a vertical
Vessels arriving without a reserved berth are required to an-
6.74
clearance of 47m, crosses at the narrows.
chor in Levangerbukta, in depths of 8 to 24m. A submarine ca-
ble extends about 0.3 mile NNE into the W part of the bay, 6.77 Hooya (63°54'N., 11°05'E.), on the E side of the en-
from a position on shore close S of Langneset. trance to Beitstadfjorden, lies 1.25 miles NE of Vennesodden
Light. A 7.3m patch lies close N of the island, with a 15m
6.75 Verdal Havn (63°47'N., 11°27'E.) (World Port Index patch lying 0.5 miles farther N.
No. 23058) is built on reclaimed land situated 3 miles ENE of A 2m patch lies at the end of a shoal spit extending NNE
6.77
Borgsoen. The basin is enclosed by breakwaters and is 212m from a point lying 1.5 miles NE of Hooya.
by 272m, with a dredged depth of 10m. Kirknestangen Light (63°55'N., 11°12'E.) stands on a point
6.77
The harbor can be approached in the white sector of the light

6.75
3 miles NE of Hooya.
situated on the outer end of the N breakwater. Kirknesvagen, a cove on the E side of the light, affords good
6.77
Fjordgrunnskjeret (63°48'N., 11°19'E.), awash, lies 2 miles

6.75
anchorage, in depths of 12 to 30m, sand and clay.
E of the E extremity of Ytteroy, in the middle of Trondheims- Stornesora Light (63°59'N., 11°18'E.) stands on a point at
6.77
fjorden. the NE end of Beitstadfjorden, about 4 miles NNE of Kirknes-

Fjordgrunntaren, a 0.3m patch, and Skallen a 0.7m patch, lie
6.75
tangen Light.
0.25 mile NE and 0.6 mile ENE, respectively, from Fjord- Follafoss (63°59'N., 11°07'E.), situated on the NW side of
6.77
grunnskjeret. Beitstadfjorden, about 5 miles NNW of Kirknestangen Light,

Norviksundet is entered from S between the SW extremity of
6.75
stands on the W bank of the Folla River.
Ytteroy and Rodberget, 1.25 miles W, and leads N between the A wood pulp factory situated close SW of the river mouth
6.77
island and the mainland. It is clear of dangers in the fairway. has an export quay, 116m long, with depths of 8 to 9.8m along-
Saltvikhamn Light (63°47'N., 11°00'E.) is situated on the
6.75
side.
W side of Norviksundet, 2 miles N of Rodberget. The white Beistadsundet is entered on the N side of the junction of Be-
6.77
sector of this light leads E of Rodberget into the fairway. Pass itstadfjorden and Steinkjerfjorden. The sound is narrow but
E of the light and bring it astern bearing between 210° and free from dangers in the fairway.
229° which will lead clear of the dangers and NNE to the S en- Tidal currents in Beitstadsundet can be strong, and are stron-
6.77
trance of Skarnsundet. gest at half tide.
Pub. 182
6.76 Steinkjer Harbor
Beitstadsundet is entered between Rambergholmen

6.77 In the approach to Steinkjer, at the head of the fjord, the
6.78
(64°02'N., 11°14'E.) and a point 0.25 mile E. white sector of Eggebogtangen Light, ahead, leads between the
A submarine cable is laid across the entrance and an over-
6.77 dangers off either shore.
head cable, with a vertical clearance of 45m, spans the sound Steinkjer may be approached by passing either N or S of
6.78
close N of Rambergholmen. Rodskjeret, however, the N side is preferred. Rodskjeret should

The white sector of the light on Rambergholmen, bearing
6.77 be given a wide berth.
astern, leads N to the anchorage off Malm, 2.5 miles distant N.
Malm (64°04'N., 11°14'E.) (World Port Index No. 23053) is
6.77 6.79 Steinkjer (64°01'N., 11°30'E.) (World Port Index No.
situated on the W side of Beitstadsundet and is the administra- 23055) lies at the head of Steinkjerfjorden; the harbor is bound
tive center for the district. on the W by a N-S line approximately 2 miles W of Eggebog-
There is a jetty at Malm, with a berth at its head, 11m long,
6.77 tangen Light and on the E by the highway and railroad bridges
with depths of 10 to 11.5m, and a berth on each side, 38m long, over the rivers.
with depths of 3 to 10m. It is reported that vessels up to 35,000 A noticeable current flows among the quays. There are six
6.79
dwt can be berthed at the jetty. quays, with alongside depths of 3.3 to 9.5m.
Pilotage is not compulsory for merchant vessels, but pilotage
6.77 The harbor is frozen up from January to March in some
6.79
and berthing are usually undertaken by the sea pilot. years.

Vessels can anchor off Malm, in 23m, clay, about 0.2 mile E
6.77 The depth in the approach to Steinkjer is 9.1m. The quays
6.79
of the church. are up to 452m in length, with depths of up to 8.2m alongside.

A 2m patch lies about 183m off the S shore opposite the jet-
6.77 There is a private wharf, 100m long, with alongside depths
6.79
ty. of 9.1m. The port will accommodate a vessel with a mean draft
Beitstadsundet continues about 5 miles ENE from Malm.
6.77 of 7.6m.
Harbor pilotage is not compulsory for merchant vessels, but
6.79
6.78 Steinkjerfjorden extends 6 miles E from Beitstad- harbor pilots are available if required. Pilotage should be or-
fjorden from its entrance between Stornesora Light and the E dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Kvit-
entrance to Beitstadsundet, 3 miles NNW. soy Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot
Ytre Logrunnen (64°01'N., 11°24'E.), a 2.5m patch, lies 0.5
6.78 boards in position 63°39.0'N, 9°14.9'E. The port monitors VHF
mile off the N shore, 3.5 miles NE of Stornesora Light. A 5m channels 12, 14, and 16.
patch lies 0.5 mile farther E.
Eggebogtangen Light stands on the S part of a peninsula in
6.78
Steinkjer—Contact Information
the E part of Steinkjerfjorden, 5.5 miles ENE of Stornesora
Light. Rodskjeret, above-water and marked by a beacon, lies VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16
0.5 mile S of Eggebogtangen Light. Telephone 47-74-161825
Pub. 182
Steinkjer—Contact Information Vessels can anchor, in 25 to 30m, clay, on a line joining

6.79
Eggebogtangen Light and the beacon on Rodskjeret. The an-

Facsimile 47-74-164606 chorage is unsafe in bad weather from SW to NW.
Pub. 182
155
7.
Sector 7—Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
7.0
Pub. 182
157
SECTOR 7
NORWAY—TRONDHEIM TO BODO
Plan.—This sector describes the outer coast from Trond-

7.0 gales the set is constantly SW, but with less velocity.
heim to the approaches to Bodo and Saltenfjorden. 7.1Within the fringing islands, the flood current always sets to
the NE and the ebb to the SW; here the NE current is also the
General Remarks stronger.
Aspect.—From Halten, a generally steep coast trends about
7.1 Winds—Weather.—Weather reports and forecasts 50 miles NE to Vikna, 3 conspicuous islands close N of the
are broadcast regularly from shore stations. Warnings of haz- seaward approach to the port of Namsos.
ardous conditions are also issued when appropriate. 7.1This stretch of coast is fringed with rocky islands, but there
7.1This is an area of frequent changes in barometric pressure are comparatively few off-lying dangers. It is heavily indented
which result in frequent change in the direction of the wind. by small fjords and inlets which penetrate in all directions, and
There are frequent depressions in this area. is remarkably barren except from some cultivation and forests
7.1Fairly large and rapid changes of pressure occur in this area. at the heads of the fjords.
A change of 24 millibars in 24 hours is relatively common, and 7.1This part of the coast can be approached with greater safety
a larger 24 hour change is not rare. Also, the actual pressure on than that farther N, but is fully exposed to the SW gales.
a particular day may differ from the average, and on occasions 7.1From Nordoerne Light (64°48'N., 10°33'E.) on the W side
by perhaps 50 millibars. of Vikna, the coast trends about 80 miles NNE to Ytreholmen
7.1Since most depressions approach from the Atlantic, and Light. Along this coast off-lying islands and reefs extend, gen-
cross N of the area, the most common sequence is that of back- erally, to a distance of 25 to 30 miles from the mainland.
ing and increasing, followed by veering and decreasing as a de- 7.1Along this part of the coast the outer rocks and islets are al-
pression moves away. The sequence can vary if a depression most without exception, low and without distinctive features,
moves further S over the area or if a polar low move S in a so a vessels position can be determined by bearings of distant
strong N air current in winter. objects. The mountains on the larger islands and the mainland
7.1Because of the rugged topography in this area, strong winds possess such striking characteristics and attain such elevations
may blow from different directions at places relatively close to that in fairly clear weather they may be identified at 40 to 65
each other. miles distant. These conspicuous landmarks may be selected to
7.1Strong winds outside a fjord may give way to calm weather fix the vessel’s position before the off-lying dangers are ap-
within, gales may be generated in the fjord or strait through proached.
funneling of wind on occasions when winds are light outside. 7.1The sea breaks over the outer shoals more readily with W
Accordingly, any generalizations made about winds around and NW winds, partly because the winds raise the heaviest sea,
these coasts must be regarded as subject to large local varia- and partly because the reefs are generally steep-to on their W
tions. and NW sides.
7.1In the area of this sector, the average number of days per 7.1Along the coast extending about 100 mile NNE from Ytre-
month with gales force winds of force 8 or above, for the holmen Light (66°01'N., 11°42'E.) to Bodo, the aspect is bleak
months of November, December, January, and February is 9.8. and precipitous. There is, however, some low land at the sea-
The average number of days per month with gales force winds ward ends of the promontories which separate the fjords.
of force 8 or above, for the months of May, June, July, and Au- 7.1The off-lying islets and reefs extend from 25 to 30 miles sea-
gust is 1.1. ward as far N as Traena, a group of islands about 35 miles N of
7.1Fog forms more often over the coast than over the open sea. Ytreholmen Light. It has been reported (2008) that an obstruc-
Coastal fog is more frequent in summer than in winter, and ear- tion lies 95 miles W of Ytterholmen Light near Traena Bank.
ly in the morning than later in the day. Frequency in the sum- 7.1North of this group, there is a gradual decrease in the off-
mer is more than 5 per cent about 2 days a month and from 2 to shore distance of the outer dangers until W of Kunna, a head-
5 per cent in winter, between 1 and 2 days monthly. land some 40 miles NE of Traena, where the distance is about
7.1The conditions which favor fog at sea and over exposed 10 or 11 miles from the mainland.
coast do not usually favor fog formations inland or in the shel- 7.1North of Kunna, the offshore distance again increases; W of
tered inner parts of the fjords. As a result, when there is a wide- Bodo the dangers lie about 20 miles offshore.
spread fog at sea the inner reaches of landlocked fjords are 7.1The principal fjords within this sector are Bindalsfjorden,
usually clear and when fog affects the inner reaches there is Velfjorden, Vefsnfjorden, Ranafjorden, Sjonafjorden,
usually clear weather in the offing. Melfjorden, Tjongsfjorden, Skarsfjorden, Sorfjorden, Nord-
7.1Tides—Currents.—During fine weather, the flood current fjorden, Saltfjorden, and Skjerstadfjorden.
sets to the NE and the ebb to the SW. In general the NE current, 7.1In general, the channels leading from seaward to Indreleia
increased by the prevailing ocean current, is the stronger, espe- are longer and more difficult to navigate than those to the S. In
cially at a distance of 20 to 30 miles offshore. the N part of the sector, the entrances are difficult to make out
7.1In periods of stormy weather the current runs strongly and and a vessel’s position must be determined by the peaks on the
constantly to the NE when the wind is S or W, and with N or E larger islands and on the mainland.
Pub. 182
158 Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo
7.1For details and information concerning the color and bear- mainland, is deep and free from dangers in the fairway; it leads
ings of the sector lights mentioned within this sector, see the 2.5 miles NW from Stokksundet to the junction with Asenleia.
Light List. 7.2Asenleia lies between Hosenoyan, on the W, and Linesoya,
7.1Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Stokkoya, and the mainland, on the E. Indreleia, N of the junc-
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. tion of Stokken and Asenleia, is deeper and wider than farther
7.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning S.
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
7.1A traffic separation scheme and recommended route is estab- 7.3 Marflessa Light (64°10'N., 10°08'E.), situated on an
lished off Traena and connects with the existing TSS scheme islet about 5 miles NE of the junction of Stokksundet and
and recommended route lying off Rost in the N.The scheme Asenleia, may be passed on either side. Kjeoya lies on the W
can best be viewed on the chart. This section off Traena is part side of the fairway, 2 miles NNE of Marflesa Light, and is
of the larger previously-existing offshore routing schemes con- passed on its E side. A light is situated on the SE extremity of
necting a key points off the coast. These routes, adopted by the Kjeoya. Northeast of Kjeoya, the track passes W of Terningen
International Maritime Organization, establish a safe route for Light (64°13'N., 10°15'E.) and then farther N toward Borova.
sea transport. 7.3Kaurleia leads into this part of Indreleia from seaward, pass-
7.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR ing N of Kaura (64°14'N., 10°08'E.); this entrance is difficult
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco- and local knowledge is necessary.
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to 7.3Boroya (64°16'N., 10°17'E.) lies with its S extremity about
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the 1.75 miles NE of Terningen Light. Indreleia leads between
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor- Boroya and the mainland, and then proceeds N passing E of the
mation, see paragraph 1.1. Skjervoyan group. From the Skjervoyan group, the track leads
7.1Caution.—Three patches with depths of 16.8m, 19.8m, and E of Ramsoya and then E of the Rodoya group, farther N.
24m, lie, respectively, 5, 6.25 and 7.5 miles, NNE of Kya
(64°28'N., 10°13'E.). A restricted area, with a radius of 500m 7.4 Saksa Light (64°24'N., 10°26'E.) lies on the W side
centered on position 64°58'13.8''N, 07°37'13.2''E is located of Indreleia, at the S entrance to Buholmrasa; a lighted buoy is
about 23 miles S of the Heidrun platform and 88 miles W of situated about 250m E of Saksa Light; a patch with a charted
Sklinna Light. depth of 7.9m lies in the fairway 90m NW of this light. Lights
7.1Heidrun (65°19.5'N., 7°19.1'E.), a platform equipped with a in range, situated on the W side of Sondre Rodoya, lead
racon, lies 92 miles W of Sklinna Light (65°12'N., 11°00'E.). through the S entrance to Bulholmrasa.
Awell lies 5 miles NNE. Gas is delivered to Trondheimsleia 7.4Bulholmrasa can be navigated by large vessels, but the chan-
(63°30'N., 9°00'E.) via a 130-mile long pipeline. nel is narrow and is considered to be one of the most difficult to
7.1Statoil Marin VTS conducts radar surveillance from the transit, in bad weather, on the Norwegian coast.
Heidrun platform and can be contacted on VHF channel 9. 7.4Buholmrasa Light (64°24'N., 10°27'E.) is shown from a
Vessels are requested to pass all installations at a distance of at tower, 23m in height, standing about 1 mile E of Saksa Light.
least 3 miles. A racon is located at the light.
7.1Numerous structures, both above-water and submerged, 7.4Langro Light (64°29'N., 10°30'E.) is shown from a tower
sometimes marked by buoys, as well as moored storage tank- standing about 5 miles NNE of Buholmrasa Light and 7.5
ers, all associated with oil and gas activity, are located off this miles ENE of Kya. The tower is equipped with a racon and is
section of the coast. located on the SE side of Grunnane, a group of dangerous
rocks and islets.
Trondheim to Buholmrasa
Grandevika to Folla
7.2 The portion of Indreleia leading N from Trondheim
and Grandevika (63°41'N., 9°29'E.) to Buholmrasa requires 7.5 Between Grandevika and Folla, about 65 miles N, nu-
exact knowledge to avoid the shoals close to the fairway, which merous small fjords lie E of Indreleia. In general, the fjords
in some places is reduced to a width of only 46m; because of have no significant ports.
this, only an outline of the routes is given. Bjugnfjorden, the fjord next N of Grandevika, leads E from
7.5
7.2Between Valsoya (63°52'N., 9°44'E.), an island, and Stok- Indreleia and extends about 7 miles from Bjugnskjaer Light
koya, an island about 13 miles NNE, the fairway is quite nar- (63°46'N., 9°33'E.), its N entrance point.
row in places, but from abreast the S end of Valsoya large An islet fringed on its S side by foul ground, lies 2.75 miles
7.5
vessels can take an outer, and broader, channel known as Asen- E of the light.
leia, which rejoins Indreleia in the fairway N of Stokkoya. Bjugnfjorden may be entered from the SE part of Frohavet.
7.5
7.2The inner channel passes W and N of Valsoya, through the Tarvfjorden (63°46'N., 9°25'E.) separates Tarva from the
7.5
narrow channel between Skjoroya and Lysoya, then E of Lei- mainland, and lies in a NE and SW direction. It is entered be-
kua, 1.5 miles N of Lysoya, and W of Lauvoy. tween Gyltingtarren, off the S extremity of Tarva, and Bjugn-
7.2Linesfjorden, entered NW of Lauvoy, may be navigated by skjaer Light, 5 miles E.
large vessels, and Stokksundet, between Stokkoya and the Torskjaer Light (63°46'N., 9°28'E.), is situated in the S part
7.5
mainland, may be used by vessels of about 6.1m draft; howev- of Tarvfjorden, 2.5 miles W of Bjugnskjaer Light. The fjord is
er, there is a sharp turn E of Stokkoya. divided by foul ground running in a SSW-NNE direction.
7.2Stokken, which separates the NE side of Stokkoya from the The W part of the fjord, between the foul ground and Tarva,
7.5
Pub. 182
Sector 7. Norway—Trondheim to Bodo 159
7.2 Buholmrasa Light
should not be entered without local knowledge. Indreleia leads about 10 miles NE of Valsholmskjaer Light, on the SE side of
through the E part of the fjord, between the foul ground and the Indreleia, leads into Afjorden E and Skrafjorden NE. Vessels
mainland. with local knowledge can enter the fjord from Indreleia when
NE of Skjelholmen (63°54'N., 9°51'E.). Afjorden extends 8
miles in a general NE direction from its junction with Lauvoy-
fjorden. It has depths of 80m but there are isolated shoal patch-
es in the fjord.
7.5Skrafjorden, entered from Lauvoyfjorden, extends about 5
miles NE from abreast the S end of Lauvoy (63°56'N.,
9°56'E.). It is foul and should only be entered by small vessels
with local knowledge.
7.6 Linesfjorden is formed between the dangers SSW of

Linesoya (64°01'N., 9°54'E.), and Linesoya on the NW and the
mainland on the E. Indreleia passes through this fjord from
SSW to NNE. The track passes over a charted depth of 7.9m in
the S part of Linesfjorden.
Skjorafjorden (64°06'N., 10°10'E.), about 6 miles NE of
7.6
Linesfjorden, is entered from Indreleia, and is deep and free of

dangers in the fairway, with the exception of a 3m shoal lying
7.5 Kjeungskjer Light about 2 miles within the entrance. A 10m patch lies 0.35 mile
SE of the shoal.
Kjeungskjer Light (63°43.6'N., 9°32.2'E.) stands on 20m
7.5
The fjord extends about 2 miles SE and then continues about
7.6
high red stone tower on Kjeungskeret, that lies on the W side of 2.5 miles NE.
Indreleia fairway at the N entrance of Grandevika. Anchorage is available, in depths of 20 to 23m, sand and
7.6
Valsfjorden extends 2.5 miles NE from its entrance between

7.5
clay, in a cove extending SSW from the S extremity of Skjo-
Valsholmskjaer Light (63°49'N., 9°36'E.) and the foul ground rafjorden. Foul ground lies in the vicinity of the anchorage.
about 0.5 mile S. It is reported that a racon is located at Brandsfjorden, situated 3 miles E of Kaura (64°14'N.,
7.6
Valsholmskjaer Light. 10°08'E.), is entered N of Terningen. The fjord extends 5 miles

The fjord is free from dangers in the fairway. Lauvoyfjorden,
7.5
SE and S and is deep and free from dangers.
Pub. 182
Kaurleia leads from seaward in a SSE direction toward Kau-

7.6 affords a good landmark when approaching Folla from the SW.
ra and joins Indreleia ESE of that islet. From abreast this islet course, should be shaped to pass about 2
Svefjorden (64°23'N., 10°30'E.) is entered from Indreleia
7.6 miles NW of the islets and dangers lying off the mainland in
close S of the S entrance to Buholmrasa. It extends 5 miles the approach to Namsfjorden.
ESE and is deep and fairly clear of dangers. A marine farm is 7.8When approaching Folla from N, a wide berth should be giv-
located about 2 miles S of Svefjorden and is best seen on the en to the dangers lying off the W side of Vikna; course should
chart. There is little traffic in the fjord. be shaped to pass S of Klakken (64°40'N., 10°27'E.).
7.8After clearing Klakken, course should be adjusted to pass 1
Folla—Namsfjorden mile NW of Bjoroyvaer (64°36'N., 10°48'E.), lying 18 miles
NE of Kya. Continue NE and pass S of Sorhunden, a small islet
7.7 Folla is the body of water extending between the S 3.75 miles NNE of Bjoroyvaer, then steer SE and enter Nams-
rocks of Vikna and the mainland S; it is entered between fjorden, W of Otteroya.
Buholmen (64°25'N., 10°26'E.) and Nylandskjeret, marked by
a light, 12 miles N. 7.9 On the S side of Folla is a large indentation in the
7.7Folla gives access at its E end to Namsfjorden and the port of mainland, in which are the islands of Otteroya, Joa, and Elva.
Namsos, to Foldfjorden, and to Naeroysundet and the port of 7.9The fjords which separate these islands have distinctive
Rorvik. names. They are collectively known as Namsfjorden, but the
7.7The passage outside Folla has particularly severe weather; fjord which leads W of Otteroya to Namsos is the one to which
the seas go straight towards the coast when the winds are from the name is specifically assigned.
the WNW. 7.9Namsfjorden is entered between Knapholmene (64°36'N.,
7.7The passage is very deep immediately outside the coastline 11°02'E.), an islet off the W end of Otteroya, and the mainland
and reflections against the steep continental shelf may be one 1 mile W.
of the reasons for the turbulent seas. In combination with out- 7.9The fjord, which is deep throughout, with an average width
going current, this may possibly be one of the reasons that the of 1 mile, leads 18 miles SE to the port of Namsos.
seas are particularly heavy W of the shoals. 7.9Tides—Currents.—From the entrance of Namsfjorden to
7.7The open sea passage across Folla, from Bulholmrasa to Finsneset, 3.5 miles SE, the tidal currents can be quite strong.
Naeroysundet, forms part of Indreleia. 7.9Pilotage.—The services of a State Pilot in the Namsos area
7.7Kya (64°28'N., 10°13'E.), an isolated islet marked by a light, can be arranged through the harbor authority at Trondheim. Pi-
is an excellent mark in the approach to Folla. lot boarding locations are located at Raudoyleia (64°24'N.,
7.7Some of the mountains are visible from the vicinity of Kya 10°14'E.) and 2 miles SW of Sorhunden islet.
for a distance of 45 miles SSW and as far as 60 miles NE.
7.7Halsfjell (64°19'N., 10°'37'E.), 13.5 miles SE of Kya and 7.10 Mefaldtaren (64°37'N., 11°00'E.), a 14.9m patch,
504m high, is seen as a prominent mountain with a deep cleft, lies about 1 mile NNW of the light on Knapholmene; Svarttar-
and a large round hummock S of the cleft. Helvikkeipen, 3.5 en, a 2.4m patch, lies 2.5 miles WNW. Foul ground extends
miles NNW of Halsfjell, is 347m high, it is identifiable by its 0.25 mile from the mainland, 0.8 mile WSW from the light.
prominent location on a peninsula, with a fjord on either side. Finsneset, marked by a light, is located on the W side of
7.10
7.7Oksbasheia (64°25'N., 10°31'E.), 8.5 miles ESE of Kya and Namsfjorden, 3 miles SSW of Knapholmene; it rises to a
228m high, is prominently situated on a peninsula. Nes- height of 151m, 0.25 mile inland.
vagklubben, consisting of two hummocks about 103m high, Anchorage is available, in 23 to 32m, sand, off Lovika on the
7.10
rises in the SW part of the same peninsula. W side of Namsfjorden, 1 mile SSW of Finsneset.
7.7The tidal current seaward of Namsfjorden sets W with the During bad weather from SW of Folla, large vessels seeking
7.10
falling tide and E with the rising tide. The direction, however, shelter anchor SE of Krokvik (64°31'N., 11°04'E.), in the SW
is greatly affected by the wind and at times the velocity is fairly part of Leirfjorden, 3 miles SSW of Finsneset, in depths of 40
strong. to 44m, clay.
7.7The islet of Kya lies in the S approach to Namsfjorden. On
the N side of the fairway, about 15 miles NNE of Kya, is 7.11 Hoddoya (64°28'N., 11°14'E.), an island which rises
Nylandskjeret (64°41'N., 10°33'E.), which consists of several to a height of 208m on its W side, is located on the W side of
rocks. Namsfjorden, about 9 miles within its entrance. Hoddoygrun-
7.7Hilleroen (64°46'N., 10°25'E.), covered by 2.7m, always nen, a 1.5m patch, lies 0.25 mile off the N side of Hoddoya.
breaks. It is the farthest W of the shoal patches off Vikna and Shoal water extends about 0.1 mile off the NE extremity of
7.11
lies 5 miles NW of Nylandskjeret. Hoddoya. Namsfjorden is about 0.7 mile wide in this area.
7.7Klakken, a 16.7m patch, lies about 2 miles W of Nylandsk- Bromsneset Light stands on a point in Otteroya, E of Hod-
7.11
jeret. doya. A series of islands lies on the S side of the fairway from
1 to 2.75 miles ESE of the light.
7.8 Sveskallen (64°33'N., 10°15'E.), with a least charted Ansneset (64°28'N., 11°24'E.), the S point of Otteroya, has a
7.11
depth of 16.8m, lies 5 miles N of Kya Light. Ostvikklakken, a drying spit extending about 0.2 mile S from it. A rocky shoal,
19.8m patch, lies 1.75 miles ENE of Sveskallen; Skillengen, a covered by less than 1.8m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 1
24m patch lies 1.25 miles farther NE. These three patches mile S of the point.
break and the area should be avoided. Maerranes, a promontory on the mainland, lies 1.5 miles SE
7.11
Kya, situated about 5 miles seaward of the dangers to the S,

7.8 of Ansneset. Namsos is situated 1.25 miles NE of Maerranes.
Pub. 182
Vessels in transit to Namsfjorden steer a mid-channel course

7.11 may be blocked; the port is kept open by icebreakers.
until abreast of Hoddoya. Shape a course to pass N of Hoddoy-
grunnen, then between Hoddoya and Otteroya. Port of Namsos
The white sector of Bromsneset Light bearing between 286°
7.11
and 293°, astern, leads clear of the dangers until SW of Ansne- http://www.namsos.kommune.no
set, when a course should be shaped to pass S of Maerranes,
then NE to Namsos. Tides—Currents.—The spring range of tide is 2.7m.
7.12
Strong tidal currents may be experienced in Namsos. The

7.12
Namsos (64°28'N., 11°30'E.) flow is affected by the outflow from Namsenelva, the shallow
water area E of Namsos, and can cause difficulty in berthing.
World Port Index No. 23050 Depths—Limitations.—The quays of Namsos are situated
7.12
around a small bay. The older part of the town, including the
7.12 The coastal port of Namsos is situated on the N side railway station and the church, occupies the E side.
of mouth of Namsen. The S part is called the Spillum harbor, Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
7.12
with berths on reclaimed land. Namsos—Berthing Information.

The port can accommodated vessels up to 100,000 dwt, with
7.12
a maximum length of 250m in and a maximum draft of 15.5m.

7.12

additional cost. Pilot boarding locations are located at
Raudoyleia (64°24'N., 10°14'E.) and 2 miles SW of Sorhund-
en islet. but if heavy swell is present, vessels may be directed
into smooth water by the pilot boat. Contact the pilot office by
VHF at Kristiansund.
Regulations.—A speed limit of 5 knots is in force. This
7.12
speed limit applies to all vessels except those engaged in oper-

ations for the Norwegian armed forces or craft engaged in
emergency police, custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search
and rescue missions along the Namsos coastal region.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Namsos—Con-
7.12
tact Information.
Namsos—Contact Information
7.12 By Sven McCullough (Svenhaus) via Wikimedia Commons VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Namsos
7.12
Ice.—The harbor is well sheltered and cargo operations are
7.12 Facsimile 47-74-272550
seldom interfered with. Navigation is seldom impeded by ice
E-mail havnekontoret@namsos.kommune.no
except during exceptionally severe winters, when entrances
Namsos—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Kiskaia-Tiendeholmen
Kiskai 56m 8.0m — — — Sand, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Moelvan Van Severen
Moelvan 120m 5.0m — — — Wood chips, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Spillum Nord
North 65m 10.0m — — — Sand, wood chips, breakbulk, and bunkers.
South 45m 10.0m — — — Sand, wood chips, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Namsen Depot
Shell Namsen Clean products. Berthing length of 138m (in-
60m 16.5m 250m 15.5m 100,000 dwt
Depot cluding dolphins).
Pub. 182
Anchorage.—There is a good, spacious anchorage available

7.12 of Lauvoyfjorden, in 44m, clay.
in the harbor, in depths of 50 to 60m. Anchorage is available Rodsunda (64°38'N., 11°10'E.) is formed between Otteroya,
7.15
closer in, in depths of 18 to 42m. on the S and W, and by Joa on the E; it is about 6 miles from its
junction with Lauvoyfjorden to its NW entrance. The fairway
7.13 Lygnenfjorden is entered from Namsfjorden and ex- is mostly clear of dangers.
tends about 9 miles SSE from its entrance between Skjerpoya Holviktaren (64°36'N., 11°18'E.), a 1m patch marked by a
7.15
on the W and Kvarvodden, 1.5 miles E. light, lies 0.15 mile offshore, 0.6 mile NW of Holvikneset, the
Bangsund Light (64°25'N., 11°21'E.) is situated on an islet
7.13 S extremity of Joa.
on the E side of the fjord 1.5 miles S of Skjerpoya. Stonga, drying, lies at the extremity of a spit extending 0.5
7.15
On each side of the entrance to the fjord are several dangers,

7.13 mile from Joa, at the NW entrance to Rodsunda.
whose positions may be seen on the chart. The white sectors of Vessels which have entered Rodsunda from Lauvoyfjorden
7.15
Bangsund Light lead clear of the dangers lying 0.25 mile E of steer a mid-channel course and pass E of Jervika Light
Skjerpoya. (64°38'N., 11°09'E.), close within the NW entrance point. The
Anchorage, in 10 to 19m, mud, with mooring rings, is avail-
7.13 white sector of Jervika Light, astern, leads W of Gauvene into
able off Bangsund, 1 mile SE of the light. Folla.
Lokkaren, Surviksundet, Lauvoyfjorden, and 7.16 Gyltefjorden (64°39'N., 11°22'E.) is entered between
Rodsunda Skreddarneset, the NE point of Joa and Storhovedet, 2.5 miles
NE, and leads 3.5 miles S to the entrance to Seirstadfjorden
7.14 Lokkaren, Surviksundet, Lauvoyfjorden, and Rodsun- and Nordsunda. A marine farm is situated on the E side of Joa.
da lead N from Namsfjorden, along the E and NE sides of Otte- The fjord is deep and clear of dangers.
roya, to join Folla N of Otteroya. A mid-channel course will lead SSW to the entrance to
7.16
Lokkaren (64°30'N., 11°26'E.) is entered E of Ansneset and

7.14 Seirstadfjorden.
extends 3.5 miles N, along the E side of Otteroya, to its junc- Anchorage may be taken, in 20 to 24m, clay, in Movika,
7.16
tion with Surviksundet, in the vicinity of Levra. close within the N entrance to Gyltefjorden, on the E side.
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 30m, spans the fairway
7.14 Seirstadfjorden (64°37'N., 11°22'E.) is entered W of Ol-
7.16
2 miles within the entrance. A depth of 4.9m is charted close S hammeren, the N point of Elva, and leads 2.5 miles S into Lau-
of the bridge. Lokkaren may be entered within the white sec- voyfjorden. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of
tors of the light situated on the W side of the fairway 0.75 mile 45m, spans the fjord in the vicinity of the light on Olham-
NNE of its S entrance. Another white sector of this light, meren.
astern, leads farther NNE. Shoal water extends up to about 0.2 mile off the E side of
7.16
Levra Light (64°32'N., 11°28'E.) changing from red to

7.14 Joa, which reduces the fairway to about 0.2 mile in places.
green leads W of the 4.9m patch S of the bridge. Nordsunda and Arbustraumen, which separate Elva from the
7.16
Surviksundet (64°33'N., 11°24'E.), a narrow sound lying

7.14 mainland, lead SSE from Gyltefjorden and connect with the
between Otteroya on the SW and Elva and Hooya on the NE, various fjords E of Elva.
connects Lokkaren with Lauvoyfjorden. The sound is spanned Nordsund and Arbustraumen, especially the latter, are fre-
7.16
by several overhead cables, the lowest having a vertical clear- quently difficult and even dangerous to navigate, due to the
ance of 30m. strong tidal currents and to the squalls which come off the high
An 8.8m patch lies in the NW entrance of Surviksundet; oth-
7.14 land E. These channels, which can be used only by small ves-
erwise it is clear of dangers. sels, are not recommended in the absence of good local knowl-
Levra Light, bearing 124° astern, changing from red to
7.14 edge.
green, leads through the middle of the sound, to Kraka, foul
ground extending 160m NE from Otteroya, 2.75 miles NW of Foldfjorden
the light. From Kraka, the white sector of the light situated on
Lauvoy leads into Lauvoyfjorden; however, the 8.8m patch lies 7.17 Follfjorden is entered at the inner end of Folla and ex-
within this sector. tends 25 miles ENE towards the entrances to Opployfjorden,
and Indre Foldjorden.
7.15 Lauvoyfjorden (64°35'N., 11°20'E.) lies between Ot- Flottra (64°40'N., 11°04'E.), an island marked by a light, is
7.17
teroya and Joa on the W and Elva on the E; it is mostly clear of situated at the E end of Folla, just over 1 mile N of Otteroya.
dangers and is well marked. Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile W and 0.3 mile N and E
7.17
Lauvoytaren (64°33'N., 11°20'E.), a 3m patch, lies 0.5 mile

7.15 from the island.
SW of the SW point of Elva. Lauvoy, a small islet, is located Stokkgrunnen (64°39'N., 11°00'E.), a dangerous drying
7.17
0.3 mile W of the SW point of Elva. Foul ground extends 0.2 reef, lies in the middle of the fairway, 2 miles SW of Flottra.
mile N from the islet; a 4m patch lies 0.6 mile N. Smatarene, a patch with a depth of 11.9m, lies 0.5 mile NE
7.17
Lyngholmen (64°35'N., 11°24'E.) lies in the middle of the

7.15 of Flottra; isolated patches, with depths of 9.8m and 9.1m, lie,
fjord, 0.8 mile N of Lauvoy; a drying patch lies 183m N. respectively, 0.3 and 0.75 mile, N of Flottra.
Vessels which have entered Lauvoyfjorden from Surviksun-
7.15 Tarnfallene, islets and rocks which usually break, lies on the
7.17
det, pass W of Lauvoy, and steer with the white sector of that S side of the approach to Foldfjorden, 2 miles E of Flottra.
light, astern, which leads into the SW part of Rodsunda. Vessels approaching Foldfjorden from Folla can pass on ei-
7.17
Anchorage may be taken off Fosslandsosen, in the SW part

7.15 ther side of Stokkgrunnen and then SE of Flottra. Then shape a
Pub. 182
course to enter the white sector of Abelvaer Light (64°43'N., leads from the vicinity of the overhead cables above to within
11°10'E.), 4 miles NE of Flottra. about 1 mile of the light. Steer a mid-channel course to pass S
When N of Tarnfallene, shape an ENE course to pass about
7.17 of Skaftenes Light; then steer in the white sector of that light,
midway between Mefallstaren (64°46'N., 11°29'E.), awash, astern, which leads N of Ahamaren, a point 2.5 miles ENE of
and Kvalholmen, 1.25 miles SE. When clear of Mefallstaren, the light.
steer E toward Opployfjorden. A 5m patch lies on the S side of the fairway 0.75 mile ENE
7.19
Opployfjorden (64°48'N., 11°45'E.), the E continuation of

7.17 of Ahamaren. There is a light situated on shore N of Ahamar-
Foldfjorden, is entered between Digermulen (64°47'N., en; the white sector of this light, astern, leads N of the 5m
11°43'E.) and Galtnesodden, 0.75 mile NE and extends 3.5 patch.From this area SE to the head of the fjord, passage
miles E to Salsbruket. should not be attempted without local knowledge.
Galtnesskjaer Light is situated on a rock which lies in the en-
7.17 Kongsmoen (64°53'N., 12°26'E.), situated at the head of the
7.19
trance to Opployfjorden. fjord, 9.75 miles SE of Ahamaren, is the site of a quay, 50m
Several overhead cables, with a vertical clearance of 30m,
7.17 long, with depths of 9.2 to 10.3m alongside.
cross the entrance to the fjord approximately 0.3 miles E of Anchorage can be obtained, in charted depths of 49m, off
7.19
Galtnesskjeret. Overhead cables with a vertical clearance of Kongsmoen.

10m cross from the S side of Krokoya to Monsoya. Arnoyfjorden (64°46'N., 11°15'E.) lies ENE of Tviberg and
7.19
The fjord may be entered by passing N or S of Galtnesskjaer

7.17 may be entered by passing either N or SE of the island; the SE
Light, then E with the white sector of that light astern, passing side, however, is preferred. A 4m rocky shoal lies on the SE
S of the island about 1 mile E. side of the fairway, about 1 mile ENE of the S point of Tviberg.
Steer to pass N of Garsoya, just over 1 mile farther E, then N
7.17
of Opployskjeret, 0.2 mile E of Garsoya, then directly to Sals- Naeroysundet

bruket.
7.20 Indreleia crosses Folla in open sea for a distance of 20
7.18 Salsbruket (64°48'N., 11°52'E.) stands on the N side miles, then leads through Naeroysundet (64°50'N., 11°11'E.)
of the head of Opployfjorden, 0.5 mile ENE of Opployskjeret. between Indre Vikan on the NW and Naeroya, Maroya, and the
Salsbruket Church, situated 0.5 mile W of Salsbruket is floodlit mainland on the SE.
and makes a good landmark. The harbor is good, but winds can Tidal currents in Naeroysundet are NE on the flood current
7.20
be troublesome. and SW on the ebb current. The spring rate in each direction is
7.18The export quay is 70m long and has depths of 7.5 to 9.2m 3 knots off the W side of Maroya and 4 knots off the E side of
alongside. Vessels of 1,000 to 3,000 gt regularly use the quay; Stromoya.
vessels of 10,000 gt have berthed there but have only been part- The group of shoals which separates the NW side of the en-
7.20
ly loaded. trance to Foldfjorden from the SE side of the approach to Nae-

7.18Anchorage is available off the quays, in 25 to 30m, sand and roysundet includes the following significant dangers; the
clay. positions are given from the islet Sorhunden (64°39'N.,
7.18Indre Foldfjorden (64°53'N., 11°44'E.) is connected to the 10°53'E.):
NE end of Foldfjorden through Korsnesstraumen, a narrow 1. Bondfallet, a 4.6m patch, lying 1.5 miles NW.
sound. From the N end of Korsnesstraumen, Indre Foldfjorden 2. A 2m patch lying 1.75 miles NNW.
extends ENE 13 miles, then SE for 10 miles. 3. A 5.8m patch lying 2 miles NNW.
7.18Korsnesstraumen and Indre Foldfjorden are mostly clear of Gjeslingene Light (64°44'N., 10°51'E.) is situated on the
7.20
dangers but are narrow in places. Korsnesstraumen is navigable NW side of the approach to Naeroysundet, 4.75 miles N of So-
without difficulty, even though the tidal currents run strongly in hunden. A racon is located at the light tower, which is 24m in
it. height.
7.18Indre Foldfjorden is narrowest at Foldereidstraumen, about Grinna Light is situated about 3.75 miles ENE of Gjesling-
7.20
16 miles ENE of the S entrance to Korsnesstraumen; large ves- ene Light.

sels should not pass it without a pilot or a local mariner on Finskjerane, a group of rocks partly awash, extends NE from
7.20
board. Grinna Light. Spygrunnsfallet, awash, lies on the E side of the

7.18Korsnesstraumen is entered between Falskeneset (64°50'N., fairway, 1.5 miles ESE of the light.
11°39'E.), a headland, and a point 0.35 mile WNW. Naeroysundet is entered between Finskjerslua (64°46'N.,
7.20
7.18The white sector of Kjeoy Light (64°48'N., 11°35'E.), 11°00'E.), at the E extremity of Finskjerane, and
astern, leads into the fairway of Korsnesstraumen. A mid-chan- Spygrunsfallet.
nel course leads N through Korsnesstraumen to Indre Fold- Naeroysund Light stands on the NW side of Naeroysundet,
7.20
fjorden; the sound is spanned by an overhead cable, with a 7.75 miles NE of Grinna Light. A bridge, with a vertical clear-
vertical clearance of 45m. ance of 41m, stands 0.8 mile NE of Naeroysund Light.
Vessels approaching Naeroysundet should adjust course to
7.20
7.19 Kvalbakskjer Light (64°52'N., 11°41'E.) is situated pass about 1 mile SE of Gjeslingene Light, then pass 0.7 mile
at the extremity of a spit which extends 0.15 mile W from the SE of Grinna and continue NE into Naeroysundet, and in mid-
mainland, at the entrance to Indre Foldfjorden; the fairway channel to Rorvik.
passes W and N of this light. The fjord is spanned by overhead
cables, with a vertical clearance of 43m, 1 mile NE of the light. 7.21 Rorvik (64°52'N., 11°14'E.) (World Port Index No.
The white sector of Skaftenes Light (64°57'N., 12°01'E.)
7.19 23040) is a resort and fishing harbor protected by moles. The
Pub. 182
entrance is about 50m wide. The harbor is separated into two miles NE, between Indre Vikna, Stromoya (64°52'N.,
parts by a peninsula situated in Indre Vikna at the NE end of 11°16'E.), Krakoya, Lauvoya, Gjerdingen, and Risvaer
Naeroysundet. (64°55'N., 11°32'E.) a group of islets, on the NW, and Kvingla
Winds—Weather.—Strong SW winds raise a considerable
7.21 and the mainland on the SE, passing either side of Svinoya.
sea, sometimes making the quays untenable. Southeast winds A light is situated on the SE point of Stromoya; a 4m patch,
7.22
can bind vessels to many of the quays. marked on its W side by a lighted buoy, lies 0.25 mile NE of
Depths—Limitations.—Vessels with a maximum draft of
7.21 the light.
6m can be accommodated. See the table titled Rorvik—Berth The tidal flow off the 4m patch above is 4 knots at springs
7.22
Information. tide. It is 3 knots off Krakoya, 1.25 miles NNE.

7.21 Humulrasa Light (64°55'N., 11°22'E.) stands on the SW
7.22
may be ordered through the Kvitsoy Pilot Booking Center at an point of Svinoya. The following features positions are given
additional cost. The pilot boards in position 64°44.0'N, from this light:
10°58.0'E by arrangement. 1. Krigsborgene Islets, lying about 1 mile SW, on the
Regulations.—The harbor area of Rorvik extends from Naer-
7.21 NW side of the fairway.
oysund Light, 1.5 miles SW of Rorvik, to Haganes Light, 1.5 2. Krigsborntaren, a rock marked by a light, lying 0.8
miles NE of Rorvik, including the waters on the N side of Maroya. mile SW.
Within the harbor area, powered vessels must not proceed at
7.21 3. A light standing on the E coast of Svinoya, 0.7 mile
a greater speed than necessary for good seamanship and ma- NE.
neuverability. Cautionary notice boards are placed at the SW 4. A light standing on Valhaugen, on the NW coast of
and NE limits of the harbor area. Kvingla, 0.7 mile ENE.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Rorvik—Con-
7.21 A light is situated on Gjerdinggalten (64°56'N., 11°28'E.),
7.22
tact Information. on the NW side of the fairway, SE of Gjerdingen. A light is sit-

uated on Stangholmgalten, on the SE side of the fairway, 0.4
Rorvik—Contact Information mile E of Gjerdinggalten.
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 Vessels proceeding N from Rorvik and vicinity, pass E of
7.22
Stromoya and W of the 4m patch, and then in mid-channel,

Telephone 47-74-390081 passing E of Krakoya about 1 mile NNE of Stromoya. The
Facsimile 47-74-391470 white sectors of the charted lights lead clear of the dangers.
The main fairway E of Stromoya has been used by vessels of
7.22
E-mail havnekontoret@namsos.kommune.no 20,000 gt with a draft of 10m. Larger vessels can pass if assist-
ed by tugs. Large vessels should only use this channel during
Rorvik to Risvaerjorden the period of slack water.
The narrow channel W of Stromoya, in which the least
7.22
7.22 Indreleia continues from Rorvik to Risvaerfjorden, 12 charted depth is 7m, can be used by vessels up to 1,200 gt.
Rorvik—Berth Information
Maximum
Vessel Draft
Refa Terminals
General 44m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Nord-Trondelag Terminal
Chemicals, ro/pax, ro-ro freight, containers, breakbulk, multipurpose,
Main 253m 6.0m
bunkers, and reefer.
Ottersoya Terminal
Bunker 34m 6.0m Dirty products and bunkers.
Naeroysund 30m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Purkholmen 20m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Skansen 27m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Esso Terminal
Bunker 28m — Dirty products and bunkers.
Shell Terminal
Bunker 72m — Dirty products and bunkers.
Pub. 182
Powered vessels should observe the speed as required for

7.22
Folla to Yetterholmen
Rorvik. When the vessel has cleared Krakoya and
Krigsborntaren (64°54'N., 11°20'E.), 1 mile NE, course may 7.25 Sklinna Banken (65°16'N., 10°10'E.), an extensive
be shaped to pass either E or W of Svinoya. bank with general depths of less than 183m, and a least charted
Svinestien, the passage between Svinoya and Kvingla, may
7.22 depth of 121m, lies with its center about 21 miles WNW of Sk-
be entered with the light on the NW coast of Kvingla, bearing linna.
between 051° and 059°; steer to clear the light, then bring it Sklinna (65°12'N., 11°00'E.), a small group of isolated is-
7.25
astern to bear between 227° and 231°, which will lead NE be- lands, lies 26.75 miles NNE of Nordoyan.
tween Gjerdinggalten and Stangholmgalten. Sklinna Light is shown from a tower, 14m in height, standing
7.25
on Heimoya, the principal island of the group. Several rocky

7.23 Humulrasa (64°57'N., 11°23'E.) is entered off the patches, which sometimes break, lie N of the W shoals off Vik-
NW side of Indreleia, N of Svinoya, and leads N between Lau- na.
voya and Gjerdingen into the open sea. Galttaren (65°09'N., 10°41'E.) has a least charted depth of
7.25
Indre Haugoytaren (64°56'N., 11°22'E.), a 6.3m patch, lies

7.23 11m and lies 8 miles WSW of Sklinna. Breigrund, 2.75 miles S
1 mile N of the SW point of Svinoya. A 6m patch lies 0.3 mile of Galttaren, has a charted depth of 14.6m. A shoal, with a
W of Indre Haugoytaren. depth of 2.7m, lies 2.75 miles NNE of Galttaren.
Range lights are situated on Lamholmen, off the NW coast
7.23 Hogbraken (65°24'N., 11°02'E.), an isolated islet located
7.25
of Gjerdingen. 11.5 miles N of Sklinna, is visible for a distance of about 4

The recommended route through Humulrasa passes close E
7.23 miles. Two above water rocks lie about 2.5 miles S of the islet;
of Indre Haugoytaren, with the white sector of Humulrasa in moderate weather these two rocks are marked by heavy
Light astern. When clear of Lamholmen, vessels may proceed breakers. Shoals, which always break, extend about 1 mile W
to the open sea or NE toward Lekafjorden and Indreleia. of these two rocks.
Risvaersundet (64°58'N., 11°31'E.) is a much-used passage
7.23 Steinan (65°36'N., 11°17'E.), a group of islets and rocks,
7.25
which extends NNE from Oteren (64°58'N., 11°31'E.), located lies 14 miles NNE of Hogbraken. They lie at the SW end of a
1.75 miles NE of Gjerdinggalten, and leads between Blikoya, larger group of islets known as Bremsteinan, which lies 9 miles
Kalvoya, Skarvholmen, Hamneholmen, and Leroya on the W W of Vega.
and Risvaer, Risvaeroya, and Stensoya on the E. Skjaervaergrunnan, located 9 miles N of Bremsteinan, has
7.25
Oterholmflakket, a 3m patch, lies 0.25 mile WSW of Oteren.

7.23 depths of 16.4 to 18.3m and is rocky; this area should be avoid-
Patches of 6 and 8m lie between Oterholmflakket and Oteren. ed in heavy weather, when the flow in the vicinity is strong and
Risvaersundet may be entered either between Oterholmflak-
7.23 the sea troublesome. Nordvaer, Skjaevaer, and Hysvaer are
ket and Oteren, where the least depth is 6m, or E of Oteren in three groups of islets which lie 4.5 miles NE, 4 miles E, and
deeper water. The white sector of the light on Risvaer will lead 7.5 miles ESE, respectively, from Skjaervaergrunnan; these ar-
in the fairway NNE, E of Blikoya. eas are foul and should be avoided.
Steer to pass W of the light, then bring it astern bearing be-
7.23 The area 14 miles NE of Nordvaer is a mass of islets and
7.25
tween 209° and 215°. After passing clear of Leroya, course reefs which are unapproachable from seaward.
may be altered WNW into Risvaerfjorden or NE into Dolm- Ytreholmen (Ytterholmen) (66°01'N., 11°42'E.), 13 miles
7.25
sundet. NNE of Nordvaer, lies about 15 miles W of the SW point of

Donna; the island is marked by a light. Skalsveskolten,
7.24 From Stangholmgalten (64°56'N., 11°28'E.), Indre- Skalsveet, and Baksveet, covered by depths of 24 to 29m, lie
leia leads close off the mainland, passing SE of Oteren and 4.5 to 6.25 miles W and WSW of Ytreholmen (Ytterholmen)
Store Oterholmen, 0.3 mile NE, and then 183m W of Eiternes- and are the farthest patches W in the approach to Ytreholmen.
tangen which is situated 4 miles ENE of Stangholmgalten, then The sea breaks over these rocky patches in bad weather.
7.25
NNE into the E end of Risvaerfjorden. Meloya (66°04'N., 11°37'E.), a rock, awash, with surround-
7.25
Risvaergalten, with rocks partly awash, lies 1 mile NE of

7.24 ing shoals, lies about 2 miles NW of Ytterholmen. In bad
Oteren. A 2m patch lies 0.2 mile farther NNE. weather, these dangers form a large breaker which extends in a
Ivarholmen, marked by a light, Lamholmen, Drenken, and
7.24 NE to SW direction.
Bardskjeret lie across the passage between Risvaer and Eit- Caution.—From the vicinity of Hogbraken to Ytterholmen,
7.25
ernestangen. a wide berth should be given to the 183m contour; this is little
From the vicinity of Stangholmgalten, the white sector of
7.24 more than 1 mile seaward of the outer line of islets and shoals
that light, bearing between 230° and 238°, astern, leads SE of in some places.
Store Oterholmen (64°58'N., 11°32'E.). From a position 0.2
mile SE of Oteren the fairway leads NE between Eiternes- Vikna to Donna
tangen and Bardskjeret, taking care to avoid the 7m patch, 0.15
mile NE of Bardskjeret and Hornbaen (64°59'N., 11°35'E.), 7.26 Vikna (64°55'N., 11°00'E.) consists of three large is-
rocks, partly awash, about 0.6 mile NNE of Bardskjeret. lands, Indre Vikna, Mellem Vikna, and Ytre Vikna. These are
When the vessel has cleared the passage E of Bardskjeret,
7.24 surrounded by a number of islets, rocks, and shoals.
steer NW into Risvaerfjorden, passing SW of Hornbaen, or Among the several shoal areas S and W of Vikna, the tidal
7.26
midway between Hornbaen and the mainland, then NE into currents set towards the land.
Dolmsundet. In the vicinity of Vikna, mariners bound for Indreleia or the
7.26
inner fjords are strongly advised to enter through Folla or Ma-
Pub. 182
holmrasa. 7.28 Stortaren (65°08'N., 11°01'E.), a rocky patch with a

Maholmrasa (65°00'N., 10°55'E.) is a good and deep chan-
7.26 least depth of 4.8m, lies 1 mile NE of Sklinnaflesan. Lilletaren,
nel leading ESE, from seaward, between the coastal reefs off a patch with a depth of about 10m, lies 1.25 miles ESE of Stor-
the NW side of Vikna, then S of the islets Maholmen taren. Both of these patches are passed on the N side.
(65°00'N., 10°58'E.), Rauoya, and Kvaloya, lying off the N From a position in Storgrunden (65°09'N., 11°07'E.), 3.25
7.28
side of Vikna. Indreleia can be reached through Humulrasa or miles ENE of Sklinnaflesan, the range lights on Gjerdingen
Risvaerfjorden. bear 147°, 15 miles distant; however, they will not be visible.
Maholmrasa is approached from W by passing N of the Ars-
7.26 This alignment leads toward Humulrasa passing about 2 miles
grunnane patches, which lie 2 miles NW of Arsflesa SW of Mefjordbaen (65°08'N., 11°12'E.), which breaks and is
(65°01'N., 10°41'E.); these shoal patches, with a least charted reported to always be visible.
depth of 12.8m, break in bad weather. The track continues SE. passing NE of Gjuvtaren, a rocky
7.28
The range lights on Maholmen, in line bearing 105°, ahead,

7.26 patch with a least charted depth of 4.9m, lying 3.25 miles SSW
lead 0.15 mile N of Djupbaen, awash, lying 0.75 miles ENE of of Mefjordbaen. The track also passes NE of Sporsluene, a
Arsflesa, then S of Brosjetarene, patches with a depth of 10m, 4.9m patch lying 1 mile SE of Gjuvtaren; an isolated 8.5m
lying 0.5 mile farther ENE. patch lies 0.5 mile NE of Sporsluene.
Oksrevltaren (65°01'N., 10°51'E.), a 16.5m patch, which
7.26 Brunflesan Light (65°03'N., 11°17'E.), which stands among
7.28
breaks in heavy weather, lies close N of the range line, 2.5 drying patches about 2 miles ESE of Sporsluene, is passed to
miles WNW of the front range light. the SW, then SW of Vevlan 2.75 miles SSE of Brunflesan
It is advisable to keep the rear light open of the front range
7.26 Light. It is advisable to keep on the SW side of the range light
light in order to pass safely S of Oksrevltaren and the 1 and 2m in the vicinity of Vevlan which lies almost on the line; a 7m
patches which lie close N of the track, 1.5 miles ESE of Oks- patch lies 0.2 mile SE of Vevlan.
revltaren. When the vessel is clear of Vevlan. the front range light on
7.28
The fairway of Maholmrasa S and E of Maholmen is flanked

7.26 Gjerdingen. bearing between 143° and 200°. leads NE of
by numerous dangers, which are charted. The white sector of Djuptarskjeret (64°58'N., 11°22'E.), a 7m patch marked by a
Ternholmen Light (65°00'N., 11°07'E.), standing on an islet beacon, situated 3.25 miles SE of Vevlan. From Djuptarskjeret.
off the S side of Kvaloya, leads clear of the dangers; however, proceed to pass W of Lamholmen and then S as previously di-
Maholmtaren, a 1m patch, situated 0.5 mile WSW of the rear rected into Humulrasa.
range light, lies within these bearings.
In the E approach to Maholmrasa, a drying reef lies 0.7 mile
7.26 7.29 From the vicinity of Vevlan (65°01'N., 11°19'E.). the
E of Ternholmen Light. A 10m patch lies 1 mile ESE of the route passes W of Vevlan, then W and S of a 7m patch lying
light, and Ytre Ragnildtaren, a 3m patch, lies about 2 miles 0.3 mile SSE.
ESE of the same light. When the N tangent of Store Kvitholme (65°01'N.,
7.29
Mefjordsbaen, with a least charted depth of 3.9m, lies 1 mile

7.26 11°36'E.), 7 miles E of Vevlan, bears 080°, steer on that course,
SE of Ternholmen Light. until clear of Skjeribaen, 3 miles E of Vevlan.
The white sector of Ternholmen Light bearing leads clear of
7.26 When the vessel is S of Skjeribaen, about 0.5 mile distant, a
7.29
the above danger. mid-channel route ENE passing about 0.4 mile N of Store
The range lights on Gjerdingen bearing 147° leads SE to-
7.26 Kvitholme and the same distance S of Madsoygalten
ward Indreleia; it may be reached alternatively, by continuing (65°02'N., 11°41'E.), 2.5 miles NE of Store Kvitholme, leads
E and entering Risvaerfjorden. into the S entrance of Lekafjorden and joins Indreleia.
A 2.4m patch lies 0.5 mile WSW of Madsoygalten.
7.29
7.27 Helmoya (65°12'N., 11°00'E.), 35m high, is the larg- From the vicinity of Mefjordbaen (65°08'N., 11°12'E.), 7
7.29
est and highest of the Sklinna group; it is marked by Sklinna miles SE of Sklinna, a branch of the entrance channel leads NE
Light. A vessel proceeding to Indreleia may pass either N or S through Hortafjorden, passing about 3 miles NW of Leka to
of the group, but only the N approach will be described. join Indreleia in Melsteinfjorden by one of two alternative
From positions NW of Sklinna, the approach to a position
7.27 routes.
about 4 miles W of Sklinna Light (65°12'N., 11°00'E.) is clear From a position clear S and E of Mefjordbaen, Hor-
7.29
of dangers in the fairway. With the light bearing not less than tafjorden (65°10'N., 11°30'E.) may be entered on an E course.
087°, a vessel will pass N of Horsgrunnskoltane, which has a The alignment of Sorflesa, the S islet of Steinsflesan, and the
7.29
least depth of 6.7m, and Horsgrunnen, with a least depth of summit of Gutvikfjellet (65°08'N., 11°56'E.), 11 miles farther
2.7m, situated about 5 miles WSW of the light; these patches E, bearing 091.5°, leads toward a position about 2 miles W of
sometimes break. Sorflesa. Storslua, a large shoal area with a least charted depth
The light on Sklinnaflesan (65°08'N., 10°59'E.), 4.5 miles S
7.27 of 3.3m, lies 0.4 mile N of this track about 4 miles W of Sorfle-
of Helmoya, bearing between 125.5° and 142°, leads NE of sa.
Horsgrunnskoltane, and SW of Sawgrunnen, an 11.9m patch From a position about 2 miles W of Sorflesa, a mid-channel
7.29
lying 2.25 miles NNW of the light. route will lead into Hortafjorden, passing N of Steinsflesa
From a position 4 miles W of Sklinna Light, the route leads
7.27 (65°09'N., 11°31'E.) and SE of Breigrunnen, a shoal patch 2.25
ESE, passing N of Sawgrunnen (65°09'N., 10°56'E.) and S of miles WNW.
Breidgrunnen, a 2.7m patch which breaks, 1.25 miles SSW of When N of Steinsflesa, a vessel may steer E and enter the
7.29
the light. Flotran, 0.5 mile SSE of Breidgrunnen, a patch with a white sector of the light on that island. This sector, astern, will
depth of 8.5m, is passed on its S side. lead into the white sector of Helgelandsflesa Light (65°13'N.,
Pub. 182
11°53'E.), which has a racon. way, 1 mile S of Traetholmen.

The S of two alternative routes into Melsteinfjorden leads
7.29 Two marine farms are situated on the E side of the fairway
7.30
ENE, E, and NE from the vicinity of Steinsflesa, passing N of between Tennvalen and Seisholmtaren.
the dangers lying off Leka. There are numerous less than chart- A submarine pipeline and submarine cable are laid across
7.30
ed depths exist in the W approaches to Leka. Husvaersundet between Brasoya and Tennvalen.
When N of Steinsflesa, the S end of Melsteinen (65°11'N.,
7.29 Tennsundet (65°57'N., 12°14'E.) lies between Heroya and
7.30
11°51'E.), in range 078° with the N extremity of a headland 10 Tenna; a track leads 2 miles ENE from Husvaerfjorden to the S
miles farther E, leads 183m N of Kriskjaertaren, 3.75 miles entrance for Heroysundet. The controlling depth at the E end of
ENE of Steinsflesa, and 0.25 mile N of Storgrunnen, 2 miles the fairway at Tennsundet is 3m.
farther ENE. A submarine pipeline is extends SW from Lendingen, at the
7.30
Melsteinfjorden may be entered by passing either W or E of

7.29 head of Tennsundet.
Melsteinen. Care is necessary to avoid shoal water extending Altfjorden (65°56'N., 12°19'E.) is entered from the S end of
7.30
0.2 mile SSW of Melsteinen, and Lilletaren (65°10'N., Husvaersundet; the fairway passes S of Seisholmtaren and NW
11°50'E.), 0.5 mile farther SSW. of Springen Light (65°55'N., 12°13'E.). Buoy Light, 2.75
The white sector of the light on Helgelandsflesa leads into
7.29 miles ENE of Springen Light, bearing 069°, passes between
Melsteinfjorden passing between Steinstaren on the W and Seisholmtaren and Springen Light.
Melsteinen on the E. From Springen, the white sector of Springen Light leads into
7.30
Lekafjorden may be entered from N by rounding the dangers

7.29 the fairway, passing clear of the islets on each side.
NE of Leka and passing SW of Stortaren (65°09'N., Indreleia continues NNE through Alstfjorden to Ulvangen.
7.30
11°50'E.), 2 miles S of Melsteinen, and then SSW into the fair-

way of the fjord. Risvaerfjorden to Ulvangen
7.30 Ytreholmen (66°01'N., 11°42'E.), previously de- 7.31 Indreleia continues N from Risvaerfjorden to Ulvan-
scribed in paragraph 7.25, may be approached from the SW, gen, about 70 miles distant. At position 65°08'N, 11°51'E,
avoiding Baksveet, Skalsveskolten, and Skalsveet, which lie 6 there is a choice of three different routes. The W route through
miles WSW, 6 miles W and 5.5 miles W, respectively, from Vegafjorden is the preferred route. Caution is advised in the W
that islet. The sea breaks over these shoals in heavy weather. approaches to Leka (65°02'N, 11°26'E.) where many depths
From a position SW of Ytterholmen, the SW summit of
7.30 less than charted are known to exist.
Store Steinen (66°00'N., 12°01'E.) is the only part of the Dolmsundet (65°00'N., 11°37'E.) leads ENE from Risvaer-
7.31
Steinan group that can be seen. Vessels approaching Husvaet- fjorden, passing between Dolma and the mainland SE, and
fjorden should keep this summit bearing between 072° and forms the principal channel of Indreleia.
080°, which will lead S of Langskolten and Storgrunnsveet, 1.5 The white sector of the light close NNE of Eiternestangen,
7.31
miles S and 1.75 miles SSE, respectively, from Ytterholmen, bearing between 199° and 203°, astern, leads toward Dolmsun-
and N of Kastsveet, which is reported to break in heavy weath- det, leading E of Hornbaen, then E of an 11.9m patch, 0.35
er, 3.5 miles S of Ytterholmen. mile NE of Hornbaen, and E of Abregtaren, 0.4 mile farther
Langfallet, a 2m rocky patch, lies about 2 miles, ESE of Yt-
7.30 NE.
terholmen, on the N side of the fairway. From a position E of Abregtaren, Dolmsund Light
7.31
The white sector of the light on Store Steinen leads over the
7.30 (65°00'N., 11°39'E.) ahead, leads clear of danger into Dolm-
same area described above. sundet. This sector also leads from seaward passing N of Horn-
From a position about 2 miles WSW of Store Steinen, the
7.30 baen and the 11.9m patch NE of it; however, Abregtaren lies
white sector of the auxiliary light on Ytterholmen, astern, leads within the light sector. With Dolmsund Light astern, this leads
S of all dangers in Steinan and N of Kvanflessveet (65°58'N., clear N of Tenfjordsluen, a 5.8m patch, lying 0.8 mile NE of
12°03'E.), an 11m patch 9 miles ESE of the light. the light. The 245.5° line of bearing should be favored.
Husvaerfjorden (65°58'N., 12°05'E.) extends SE from the
7.30 Madsoygalten Light (65°03'N., 11°41'E.) ahead, leads into
7.31
vicinity of Steinan to Husvaersundet, which is entered between the center of the fairway of Lekafjorden.
Traetholmen (65°56'N., 12°12'E.), and Dragan, an islet 0.2 Indreleia leads from the NE end of Dolmsundet through
7.31
mile WSW. From a position about 2 miles SE, the white sector Lekafjorden, between Madsoya and Leka on the NW and Aus-
of the light on Store Steinen, bearing between 308° and 326°, tra on the SE. Lekafjorden is joined at its SW end by one of the
astern, leads toward Traetholmen, passing SW of Langodbaen channels leading inwards from Sklinna.
(65°58'N., 12°07'E.), which lies 1.75 miles ENE of Kvanf- Lekafjorden (65°05'N., 11°47'E.) may be entered from a
7.31
lessveet. Indre Flesa, an extensive area of foul ground, lies S of mid-channel position SE of Magsoygalten Light, with the
Kvanflessveet. white sector of Sore Gutvik Light (65°05'N., 11°49'E.) ahead.
Langobaen, 1.25 miles N of Traetholmen, should be passed
7.30 When E of Magsoygalten Light, steer a mid-channel course to
on its SW side; then steer toward the light on Traetholmen clear off-lying dangers on either side.
passing SW of Stappen, which is marked by a beacon. A 6.4m From the N end of Lekafjorden, the track of Indreleia passes
7.31
patch lies 183m S of Stappen. between Melsteinen and Sorflesene, a group of partly sub-
Husvaersundet (65°56'N., 12°12'E.) lies in a N-S direction;
7.30 merged rocks about 0.4 mile E of the island, then between Hel-
the white sector of the light on Traetholmen, astern, leads gelandsflesa (65°13'N., 11°54'E.), 2 miles NNE of Melsteinen,
through the fairway for a distance of 1 mile. and Uertaren, a reef which dries, 0.7 mile SSE of Helgelands-
Seisholmtaren, a 1.5m patch, lies on the E side of the fair-
7.30 flesa. Several shoals lie between Sorflesene and Uertaren on
Pub. 182
the E side of the fairway. Helbergotaren (65°20'N., 12°03'E.) lies on the E side of the
7.32
Vessels in the vicinity of Melsteinen may expect a SW tidal

7.31 fairway, 1.25 miles NNE of the light on Gloven; it has a least
current out of Royningen, except during strong W winds, when depth of 1.8m.
a weak tidal current may set to the E. Helbergsoya, marked by a light, lies on the W side of the
7.32
Vessels approaching Melsteinenfjorden from the S should

7.31 fairway, 0.7 mile NNE of Biskoptaren; foul ground extends 0.1
pass E of Lilletaren, 0.75 mile SSW of Melsteinen. The white mile SSW and 0.8 mile NNE from the island. The many shoal
sector of the light on Helgelandsflesa leads E of Lilletaren and patches in this area may be seen on the chart.
then between Melsteinen (65°11'N., 11°51'E.) and the shoals Torgfjorden extends NE from the vicinity of Sandvaerod-
7.32
to the E and NE of the island. taren (65°22'N., 12°03'E.), situated at the extremity of the foul
With the light on Melsteinen, astern, and showing green, this
7.31 ground NNE of Helbergsoya.
leads through the fairway between Helgelandsflesa and the Vessels proceeding N pass E of Helgelandsflesa; then a mid-
7.32
NW side of Uertaren. channel course NNE will pass about 0.2 mile E of the light on
Langsundet (65°14'N., 11°58'E.) is formed between Lan-
7.31 Gronstabben. When abreast of Gronstabben, steer in the white
goya on the W, and Kvaloya on the E, and lies 2.25 miles NE sector of the light on Helbergsoya, which leads in the fairway
of Melsteinen. passing W of Gloven and E of Biskoptaren.
Good anchorage may be taken in Langsundet, in 10 to 17m,
7.31 When SE of Biskoptaren, steer a mid-channel course to pass
7.32
sand and clay, abreast the summit of Langoya. about 0.2 mile E of Helbergsoya and the same distance E of
Sandvaerodtaren, and then into the SW entrance of Torg-
7.32 After passing SE of Helgelandsflesa in Melstein- fjorden.
fjorden, Indreleia continues NNE on the W sides of the islands
of Langoya and Kvaloya. 7.33 Lyngvaerfjorden (65°15'N., 12°05'E.) is enclosed by
Lyngvaer (65°16'N., 11°58'E.) is a group of islets and rocks
7.32 Kvaloya and Lyngvaer, on the W, and the mainland, on the E.
extending about 3 miles N from Kvaloya. Tyven, lying about 1 Vessels entering Lyngvaerfjorden should proceed to a posi-
7.33
mile NW of Kvaloya, and Vagoytaren, a 7m patch a little over tion about 1 mile NNE from the entrance, then steer E passing
1 mile NNE of Tyven, are the farthest W of the dangers off N of Lyngvaertaren, at the N end of Lyngvaer.
Lyngvaer. When in the white sector of Lyngvaergalten Light
7.33
Gronstabben (65°16'N., 11°56'E.), a reef, lies on the W side

7.32 (65°16'N., 12°03'E.) steer a course mid-channel to pass 0.5
of the fairway, 0.85 mile NW of Vagoytaren. mile NE of the light.
From Gronstabben, Indreleia passes between Gloven, 3.5
7.32 The white sector of Lyngvaergalten Light, astern, will lead
7.33
miles NE of Gronstabben, on the E side of the fairway, and into Vikvagen, where anchorage may be taken, in 19m, hard
Biskoptaren, a 1.8m patch on the W side of the fairway, 0.9 sand.
mile NW of Gloven.
7.33 By DXR (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

7.33 Bronnoysund
Pub. 182
Vikvagen (65°18'N., 12°07'E.) is encumbered with shoal

7.33
Bronnoysund—Berth Information
patches and small islets; the approach to the anchorage passes
close SE of a 1m patch and a 7m patch lies close off the S side Berth Length Depth Remarks
of the fairway. These and other dangers may be seen on the 7.7- Passengers and
chart. North 70m
10.0m general cargo.
Somnesvagen (65°23'N., 12°10'E.) is entered off the SE side
7.33
of Torgfjorden, 2.25 miles from its S entrance. Somnesvagen is Passengers and

Felix 46m 6.8-8.8m
approached between Somnesoya, an islet, on the S side, and general cargo.
the S extremity of Sylskjaerene, 0.75 mile N. Concrete 102m 6.3-7.3m —
Anchorage may be taken SE of Jarholme, an islet 0.75 mile
7.33
within the entrance to Somnesvagen, in 18.3m, sand and clay. South Stone 45m 6.8m —
Berg (65°22'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index No. 23020)
7.33 North Quay 75m 6.5-8.3m —
close NE of Jarholme, has two quays. One quay is 62m long, Algia Tangmell-
with depths of 9.3 to 12m alongside; the other quay is 55m 14m 3.7m —
fabrik
long, with depths of 7.6 to 10.8m alongside.
Multipurpose Berths
7.34 Bronnoysundet (65°27'N., 12°10'E.), on which the Shell Bunkering 15m 3.8-4.3m Bunkering.
port of Bronnoysund is situated, is entered between Ormoya
(65°26'N., 12°09'E.), situated on the W side of Torgfjorden 5 Esso Bunkering 47m 6.9-8.2m Bunkering.
miles NE of its S entrance, and Stokholmen close E; it leads 3
miles NNE into Tilremfjorden. Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered using the SafeSeaNet
7.35
The passage through Bronnoysundet is narrow and local

7.34 but may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Cen-
knowledge is required; however, it is well-marked. ter at an additional cost. The pilot boards in the following posi-
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Bronnoysundet are
7.34 tions:
strong, making navigation difficult. a. 66°15.2'N, 12°35.9E for Asvaer.
b. 64°44.0'N, 10°58.0'E for Grinna.
7.35 Bronnoysund (65°28'N., 12°12'E.) (World Port Index Regulations.—Within the harbor area power-driven vessels
7.35
No. 22990) is a coastal natural harbor situated on the E side of are required to proceed at no greater speed than good seaman-
Bronnoysundet, 2 miles NNE of Ormoya. The harbor area cov- ship and maneuverability demand to avoid creating a damaging
ers most of Bronnoysundet. wash.
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
7.35
Port of Bronnoysund Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
1.1.
http://www.bronnoyhavn.no/en/ Contact Information.—See the table titled Bron-
7.35
noysund—Contact Information.
Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.7m at springs and
7.35
2.1m at neaps. Bronnoysund—Contact Information

Depths—Linitations.—Bronnoysund may be approached
7.35
from N or S. The least depth in the S approach from Torg- VHF VHF channels 12, 13, 14, and 16
fjorden is 6m and in the N exit to Tilremfjorden the least depth Telephone 47-75-012070
is 6.5m. A bridge with a vertical clearance of 30m spans the
fairway in a position about 0.4 mile SW of the church in Bron- Facsimile 47-75-012071
noysund. Vessels up to 4,500 dwt with a maximum draft of 6m E-mail bronnoy.havn@bronnoy.kommune.no
can be accommodated. See the table titled Bronnoysund—
Berth Information. Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 12 to 16m, 1.25
7.35
miles SSW of the church in Bronnoysund, and in depths of 20

Bronnoysund—Berth Information to 24m, sand, 1.5 miles NNE of the church.
Berth Length Depth Remarks Anchorage is prohibited close N of the quays to permit ma-
7.35
neuvering for vessels berthing and unberthing at the packet

Northern Port Gardsoya boat quays.
Passengers and
Outer 100m — 7.36 The W route of Indrelia leads from the S entrance of
general cargo.
Torgfjorden, WNW, N of Sandvaer (65°21'N., 11°58'E.), and
Passengers and Klubholmen Light, then NNW passing close E of Blabakflua
Inner 81m —
general cargo. Light, then the track passes S and W of Uttorgvaer, an island
Central Point Town Center group 6 miles NNW of Helbergoya.
From the S entrance to Torgfjorden, vessels proceed WNW
7.36
Passengers and on a mid-channel course which will lead S of Sandoytaren

South 74m 5.3-7.3m
general cargo.
(65°23'N., 12°00'E.), a reef with a charted depth of 4.9m, situ-
ated about 1 mile ENE of Klubholmen Light.
Pub. 182
From E of Klubholmen Light, a vessel should alter course to

7.36 The entrance to Storfjorden is encumbered with dangers,
7.38
pass E of Hokstaren (65°24'N., 11°58'E.), a 2.4m patch whose positions may best be seen on the chart.
marked by a light, 1.5 miles N of Klubholmen Light,. Ice.—Sorfjorden, Heggefjorden, Stor Borja, and most of
7.38
On the E side of the fairway, 0.35 mile E of Hokstaren, lies a

7.36 Storfjorden are usually frozen over in winter. Ice forms first
14.9m patch; a 5.5m patch lies 0.25 mile farther NE. and lasts longest in Langfjorden. Obstruction by ice is greatest
Fleina, marked by a light, is situated 0.75 mile NE of Hok-
7.36 after the New Year.
staren. Blabakflua Light lies 0.6 mile WNW of Fleina; the fair- Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents usually set into
7.38
way passes between these two lights. Velfjorden with the rising tide and out with the falling tide.
After passing between Fleina and Blabakflua, Indreleia leads
7.36 Currents usually set out of the branch fjords but they are affect-
NNW to pass between Knutstaren (65°26'N., 11°55'E.), a ed by the tide and wind.
1.8m patch marked by a light, 2 miles NW of Blabakflua. on From the entrance N of Hornsneset, the W extremity of
7.38
the W side, and Flestaren, a 4.9m patch, 0.55 mile E, on the E Bjornholmen (65°37'N., 12°18'E.) in range 329°, astern, with
side. The white sector of Blabakflua Light, astern, leads be- the E extremity of Kvitjerta, an islet 1 mile NNW of Bjornhol-
tween these two dangers. Tvertaren, a 7m shoal patch, lies on men, leads NE of Jenssluin, awash, and the shoal patches E.
the SW side of the fairway 0.5 mile NW of Blabakflua Light. A white sector of Manddauen Light, astern, leads through
7.38
When the vessel is clear of Knutstaren, a NNE course may

7.36 the fairway of Velfjorden to within about 2 miles of Nevernes
be set, passing about 0.5 mile WNW of Uttorgflessa Light Light; a white sector of that light ahead, leads through the fair-
(65°26'N., 11°57'E.) and W of the Uttorgvaer group. way from abreast Okfjorden to within a short distance of the
This part of Indreleia crosses the E end of Vegafjorden in a
7.36 light.
SSW to NNE direction. All the branch fjords of Velfjorden afford suitable depths for
7.38
anchorage during the ice-free season.

7.37 After passing into Vegafjorden, vessels should steer
for the W edge of the 67m summit of Ylvingen, which lies 10.5 7.39 Vevelstadsundet is entered about 3.5 miles NNE of
miles NNE of Uttorgflessa Light. Hornsneset and lies between the mainland and the E side of
Halholmen Light (65°32'N., 12°05'E.) is located on the SE
7.37 Hamnoya. A 5.5m rocky shoal lies about 2 miles within the en-
side of Indreleia, about 7 miles NNE of Uttorgflesa. Klabben trance. This danger lies within the white sector of Snerthol-
Light is situated 2.75 miles NW of Halholmen Light. men Light (65°43'N., 12°28'E.).
The white sector of Ylvingen Light, about 4 miles NNE of
7.37 Forvik, located on the mainland about 0.5 mile S of Sner-
7.39
Halholmen Light, leads through the fairway of Vegafjorden, tholmen Light, has a timber quay, 36m long, with depths of 4.2
passing between the dangers in the vicinity of Halholmen Light to 6.5m alongside.
and the dangers off the SE side of Vega. Between the S end of Ylvingen (65°36'N., 12°10'E.) and Ul-
7.39
From Halholmen Light, vessels should alter course NE and

7.37 vangen, about 30 miles NNE, Indreleia is comparatively free
pass S of Ylvingen (65°36'N., 12°10'E.) and N of the shoals ly- from dangers.
ing about 0.5 to 1 mile N and NNE of the light. Tides—Currents.—In this section of Indreleia, the tidal
7.39
Indreleia leads about 7 miles N through Tilremfjorden from

7.37 current sets N from about half rising tide to half falling tide; the
Bronnoysundet to a junction between Hornsneset (65°35'N., period of the S current is the reverse of this. Their strength is
12°18'E.) and Ylvingen, 3.5 miles WNW, with the W route of variable and may be affected by the prevailing wind. The tidal
Indreleia through Vegafjorden. currents set out of the adjacent fjords, and when the direction
Nordtaren (65°34'N., 12°11'E.), a 1.8m shoal patch, lies on
7.37 of the set coincides with that of the main tidal current the latter
the W side of Tilremfjorden, 3.25 miles SW of Hornsneset. may run with great strength, particularly in the narrow chan-
Anchorage, in 14m, sand and clay, may be taken in a cove,
7.37 nels.
near Tilrem, 3.5 miles NNE of Bronnoysund Church. In position 65°36' N, 12°13' E, off the SE side of Ylvingen,
7.39
the W and E routes of Indreleia unite and continue 7.5 miles N

7.38 Velfjorden (65°35'N., 12°21'E.) is entered N of Horn- to Skjelva (65°43'N., 12°19'E.), then 23 miles NNE through
sneset, the W entrance point. The fjord penetrates the coast Tjottafjorden and Alstfjorden to Ulvangen.
about 11 miles SE to Nevernes Light (65°26'N., 12°35'E.);
from the light, Langfjorden continues about 6 miles farther in 7.40 Tjottafjorden consists of the waters around the junc-
the same direction. Okfjorden, Storfjorden, Litle Borja, and tion of Indreleia and the entrance to Vefsnfjorden off the SW
Stor Borja, all opening off the E side of Velfjorden, are deep side of the island Tjotta. Mindvaeret, the foul ground NE of
and clear, but are unmarked. Skjelva, and Mindlandet, the 159m high island 2 miles NE of
Sorfjorden and Heggefjorden, branching off the S side of the
7.38 Skjelva, form the SE side of Tjottafjorden.
fjord and the extension of Langfjorden, are neither so deep nor Breigtaren (65°45'N., 12°21'E.), awash, lies 2.25 miles NNE
7.40
so free from dangers as the fjords on the E side; the land in of Skjelva and Nordtaren, with a charted depth of 0.9m, lies 0.3
their vicinity is less mountainous. mile farther NNE; these dangers lie off the NW side of Mind-
Hornstaren (65°35'N., 12°19'E.), a shoal patch with a chart-
7.38 vaeret.
ed depth of 1.8m, lies in the entrance of Velfjorden, 0.4 mile Foul ground extends 1.25 miles into Tjottafjorden from the S
7.40
ENE of Hornsneset. Jenssluin, an 8.8m patch, lies 0.25 mile extremity of Tjotta.
farther NE. Tjotta (65°50'N., 12°26'E.), a small port, is located on the S
7.40
Manddauen Light is situated on a reef, 0.75 miles SE of

7.38 side of the island Tjotta. Local knowledge is required to enter
Hornsneset. the harbor, which has depths of 3.6 to 5.1m alongside the
Pub. 182
steamer quay. those shown on the chart. The head of the fjord is shallow for a
Tjotta Church, with a square tower and a dark gray roof, is
7.40 distance of 0.75 miles N of Mosjoen.
prominent. The fairway of Vefsnfjorden is about 0.4 mile wide between
7.41
Sornes (65°58'N., 12°52'E.), on the W side, and Nubben, on

7.41 On the NW side of Mindlandet, a well-situated quay the E side, about 11 miles NW of Mosjoen.
is located about 2.25 miles SSE of Tjotta Church. The quay has Anchorage may be taken, in 17 to 20m, in the cove on the W
7.41
a length of 26m, with alongside depths of 8.3 to 13m. side of Sornes; it shelves quickly to the N.
Vefsnfjorden is entered from Indreleia through Tjottafjorden,
7.41
between Langholmen (65°49'N., 12°27'E.), off the SE coast of Mosjoen (65°51'N., 13°11'E.)
Tjotta, and the NW coast of Mindlandet, 1 mile SE. The W arm
of the fjord extends 14 miles NE, between the mainland and World Port Index No. 22920
Alsten; the SE arm of the fjord extends 12 miles SE to the port
of Mosjoen. 7.42 Mosjoen is a small natural harbor situated at the head
The outer part of the fjord is sparsely vegetated and the land-
7.41 of Vefsnfjorden, about 26 miles from Indreleia. It consists of
scape is dominated by De Syv Sostre, in the SE part of Alsten. the quays and the city of Mosjoen, which is situated 0.75 mile
The inner part of the fjord is wooded and most of the villages S of the quays.
are situated there. Winds—Weather.—Mosjoen is well sheltered and port car-
7.42
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run into Velsnfjorden

7.41 go handling is seldom interrupted. The port is usually ice-free,
with the rising tide and out of the fjord with the falling tide. At except for some shallow bays which may freeze over in severe
the entrance, when the ebb coincides in direction with the cur- winters; shipping is rarely hampered by ice.
rent in the channel off the entrance, the resultant flow may have Tides—Currents.—Mean High Water Spring tides in Mos-
7.42
considerable strength. joen are 2.7m and MLWS is 0.4m; the greatest spring range ob-
The fairway of Vefsnfjorden is free of dangers other than
7.41 served was 4m.
Mosjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Mosjoen Havn KF
Halsoy 45m 6.5m 142.9m — 21.5m 17,294 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
New 170m 8.0m 145.6m 8.0m 21.4m 12,264 dwt Containers breakbulk, and bunkers.
Railway 210m 5.0m 98.7m — 16.0m 4,418 dwt Containers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Aggregates, breakbulk, and bunkers. Not
Skjaerflesen 20m — — — — —
ISPS compliant.
Dirty products, LNG, limestone, multi-
Veidekke 16m 6.0m 134.6m — 23.0m 14,968 dwt
purpose, and bunkers.
Breakbulk and bunkers. Vessels mostly
moored alongside adjacent new quay and
Western 70m 5.5m — — — — take up space at the W quay area. No
commercial activity in recent years. Con-
tinuous berthing length of 144m. Closed.
Holandsvika
Holandsvika 60m 5.5m 98.7m — 16.0m 4,418 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
Alcoa Mosjoen Terminal
Chemical propane delivered by tanker,
chemicals, alumina, containers, prebaked
Alcoa 275m 12.0m 199.9m 11.5m 30.0m 37,153 dwt anode, coal tar pitch, aluminum products,
steel products, breakbulk, multipurpose,
and bunkers.
Equinor Holandsvika
Closed. Berth is now disused. Berthing
Bunkering 7m — — — — — length of 33m (including dolphins). Tank
facilities has been demolished (2022).
Pub. 182
By Rune Lund (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

7.42
7.42 Mosjoen
Depths—Limitations.—The channel leading to the port is

7.42 Tjotta, on the E side.
narrow. Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table Juledagene Light (65°51'N., 12°23'E.) is situated near the
7.43
titled Mosjoen—Berth Information. Vessels over 10.1m draft edge of the foul ground extending W from Tjotta, about 8
are berthed only at HW. miles N of Skjelva. A patch, with a depth of 8.5m, lies on the
It was reported that a vessel up to 37,153 dwt, with a maxi-
7.42 W side of the fairway, 0.45 mile W of Juledagene Light.
mum length of 199.9m, a maximum beam of 30m, and a maxi- Rosoytaren (65°52'N., 12°22'E.), with a charted depth of
7.43
mum draft of 11.5m, can be accommodated in the port. 5.8m, lies 0.25 mile off the NE extremity of Nordre Rosoya; it
Pilotage.—Pilotage should be ordered through SafeSeaNet
7.42 may be passed on either side.
but may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Cen- Hamnesleira, a large open anchorage, is entered between
7.43
ter at an additional cost. Faksholmen, off the NW part of Tjotta and Haugsneset
The pilot boards in position 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7E (1.5 miles
7.42 (65°53'N., 12°24'E.), 1.25 miles N. Large vessels anchor, in 25
N of Donna) or position 66°17.0'N, 12°12.6'E (2.4 miles to 30m, sand and shells, 0.75 mile ENE of Haugsneset; a rock
WNW of Asvaer Light). is charted about 0.3 mile ENE of the anchorage.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Mosjoen—
7.42 From the vicinity of Rosoytaren, Indreleia continues NNW,
7.43
Contact Information. passing between the SW end of Alsten and Skarvoya

(65°53'N., 12°20'E.), which lies 1.5 miles NW of Haugsneset.
Mosjoen—Contact Information A rock, awash, lies on the foul ground extending NNE from
7.43
Valoya, about 1 mile WNW of Haugsneset.

VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 When E of Skarvoya, the fairway continues N about 1 mile, and
7.43
Telephone 47-75-390081 passes between Karholmen (65°55'N., 12°23'E.) on the E side, and
an 11m patch 0.4 mile W. Then a mid-channel course leads NNE
passing E of Sondre Soroyholme, 0.45 mile NNW of Karholmen.
The NE extremity of Alteren is situated on the W side of In-
7.43
Anchorage.—Large vessels may anchor off Halsoy, 0.9

7.42
dreleia, 0.85 mile N of Sondre Soroyholme; Valloygalten
mile N of Mosjoen, in 30m, sand and clay, and off the alumi- (65°57'N., 12°24'E.), with a least depth of 4.9m, lies 0.8 mile
num works, in 40m, sand and clay. NNE of Alteren.
7.43 The track of Indreleia, N of Tjottafjorden, leads be- 7.44 Alstfjorden extends from the vicinity of Sondre So-
tween Sondre Rosoya and Norde Rosoya, on the W side, and
Pub. 182
royholme (65°55'N., 12°22'E.) along the NW side of Alsten, to by the island of Holmen, lies on the NW side of Alsten, at the
the vicinity of Sandnessjoen 9 miles NE, where it leads into junction of Alstfjorden and Ulvangen. The entrance to the har-
Ulvangen. bor is from the E.
A channel from seaward entered off Ytreholmen joins Alst-
7.44 During strong W winds, an unpleasant short sea is raised off
7.45
fjorden, at its SW end, from Alterfjorden. Sandnessjoen; at times strong squalls come down from the
Vikholmen (65°57'N., 12°26'E.), a small islet, lies on the E
7.44 mountains situated about 5 miles S.
side of the fairway through Alstfjorden, 1.5 miles ENE of Al- Depths—Limitations.—The port can accommodate vessels
7.45
teren. Foul ground extends 0.7 mile NNE from the islet. up to 12,000 dwt with a maximum draft of 8m. The harbor au-
Valloya and Svinoya lie in a NNE direction from 0.3 to 0.7
7.44 thority has numerous quays. Some of the berths and installa-
mile, respectively, NNE of Valloygalten; Svartskjaer lies 0.15 tions are situated in Sandnesvagen, on the SE side of town, and
mile off the NE extremity of Svinoya. in Botnfjorden, 1.5 miles SE; these are accessible from Leir-
From abreast Sondre Soroyholme, vessels can steer for the
7.44 fjorden.
summit of Skorpa (66°02'N., 12°33'E.), which rises about 8 See the table tittled Sandnessjoen—Berth Information.
7.45
miles NNE. This course leads through the fairway of Indreleia Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
7.45
into Alstfjorden. When well into the fjord, a mid-channel may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Center at
course will lead NE to the S entrance of Ulvangen. an additional cost.
The pilot boards in position 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7E (1.5 miles
7.45
7.45 Sandnessjoen (66°01'N., 12°38'E.) (World Port Index N of Donna) or position 66°17.0'N, 12°12.6'E (2.4 miles
No. 22750), protected from the S by a road embankment and WNW of Asvaer Light).
Sandnessjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Draft Size
Coastbase (Sandnessjoen Botnfjorden)
Aggregates, containers, transshipment, offshore vessels,
Aqua Rock Quarry 130m — —
project/heavy cargo, and steel products.
Berthing length of 100m (incl. dolphins).Offshore vessels,
Service 50m — —
project/heavy cargo, steel products, and breakbulk.
Sandnessjoen-Donna Ferry Terminal
North 55m — — Fast ferries.
South 73m — — Fast ferries.
Terminal Vagen
Vagen 105m — — Containers, offshore vessels, fishing vessels, breakbulk.
Helgeland Logistikksenter Horvnes
Chemicals, transshipment, offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 1 80m 8.0m 12,000 dwt
cargo, steel products, and breakbulk.
Chemicals, transshipment, offshore vessels, project/heavy
No. 2 80m — —
cargo, steel products, and breakbulk.
Transshipment, offshore vessels, project/heavy cargo, steel
No. 3 80m — —
products, and breakbulk.
Sandnessjoen Harbor(North)
Containers, fishing vessels, and breakbulk. Quay at SW
East (North Quay) 50m — — end with dolphins structure to NE. Berthing length of
Chemicals, ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, coastal
Minol Holmen Multi-
40m — — vessels, fishing vessels, and breakbulk. Berthing length of
purpose (North Quay)
Ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, transshipment,
Passenger and Vehicle
25m — — coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and breakbulk. Mooring
Ro-Ro (Inner)
bollards on shore 75m apart.
Pub. 182
Sandnessjoen—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Draft Size
Passenger and Vehicle Ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, transshipment,
— — —
Ro-Ro (Outer) coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and breakbulk.
Ro/pax, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, transshipment,
Ulvanger 40m — — coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and breakbulk. Mooring
bollards on shore 120m apart.
Sandnessjoen Harbor (South)
Cruise, ro-ro passengers/vehicles/rail, offshore vessels,
East (South Quay) 210m — —
and fishing.
Transshipment, coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and break-
Eastern Approaches 21m — —
bulk. Berthing length of 36m (including dolphins).
Middle 85m — — Smaller cruise vessels/passenger vessels.
Ro/pax, ro-ro passenger/vehicles/rail, transshipment,
West 260m — — coastal vessels, fishing vessels, and breakbulk. Small ro-ro
passenger/vehicles/rail vessels.
Local knowledge is required for vessels to take up berthing

7.45 Luroy, an island lying about 11 miles ENE of Lovunden, is
7.46
space, as the tidal currents are strong. 689m high. It is more rounded and has less abrupt declivities
7.45 than other islands in the vicinity. Hestmannoy lies with its S
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph end about 4 miles N of Luroy and has a pointed peak 568m
1.1. high.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sandnessjo-
7.45 Telnestind, on the mainland, rises to a height of 967m, 0.75
7.46
en—Contact Information. mile inland, in a position 8.75 miles ENE of Hestmannoy.

Between Hestmannoy and Kunna, about 28 miles NNE, the
7.46
Sandnessjoen—Contact Information coast line is rather indistinct, but Kunna, which appears as an
island, is easily identified.
Telephone 47-75-075700 Fugloya (67°04'N., 13°50'E.), an island about 8 miles NE of
7.46
Facsimile 47-75-075701 Kunna, is steep and rises to a height of 765m. Sandhornet, a

conspicuous mountain on the island of Sandhornoya, 5.5 miles
E-mail post@ath-havnevesen.no
NE of Fugloya, is 996m high; its W face is precipitous.
From this part of the coast, Svartisen, a range of glacier-
7.46
Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 16.5 to 24m, 0.15

7.45
bearing mountains, may be seen. It is one of the most remark-
mile W of the S end of Holmen. able features of this part of Norway. As there is no glacier so
near the sea on any other part of the coast, it can be identified
Donna to Bodo with certainty from a considerable distance seaward.
Svartisen stands out well from dark mountains in the back-
7.46
7.46 The high peaks of the mainland and larger islands of- ground. In spring and cold summers, it appears white; in warm
ten rise to several thousand feet and at times are visible over 50 summers when surface snow melts, it becomes bluish-green. In
miles. winter, when all mountains are covered with snow, Svartisen,
Sanna (66°30'N., 12°03'E.), the principal island of Traena,
7.46
seen from NW and N, appears to run parallel with the horizon,
lies 30 miles NNE of Ytterholmen; it is by far the most import- with hardly any depression between peaks; the highest part on-
ant landmark on this coast. Its principal peak, Traenstaven, ris- ly shows some dark patches of bare rock among the snow.
es to about 331m, and may be seen at a distance of more than Landegode (67°24'N., 14°20'E.), 803m high, lies 6 miles
7.46
40 miles; it is unmistakable. NNW of Bodo; in clear weather the S part of the Lofoten Is-
Kunna, a headland on the mainland 44 miles NE of Sanna,
7.46
lands will be visible about 55 miles to the WSW.
can be made out when in the vicinity of Traena.
Three high peaks rise on the island of Tomma, about 21
7.46
7.47 A bank, with a depth of 12.8m, was reported to lie
miles SE of Sanna. The peak farthest N rises to a height of about 110 miles W of Sanna. A depth of 14.6m, the position of
916m and resembles Traenstaven. which is doubtful, was reported about 85 miles WNW of San-
Lovunden (66°22'N., 12°20'E.), 619m high, lies about 10
7.46
na. A depth of 10m was reported to lie about 0.2 mile NW of
miles SE of Sanna. The island appears isolated but is easily the 14.6m patch.
identified by its nearly perpendicular W side and the gradual
slope on its E side.
Pub. 182
group, about 13 miles farther SSW.

A principal channel leads in through Nordre Asvaerfjorden,
7.48
off the N side of Asvaer, through Stifjorden, 12 miles ESE of

Tomfjorden, then 11 miles E to join Indreleia off the SE or NE
side of Tomma.
The approach to Asvaer in not difficult in favorable weather.
7.48
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Nordre Asvaer-

7.48
fjorden flow NE on the flood and SW on the ebb.

Pilotage.—A pilot station is situated on Andersbakken
7.48
(66°16'N., 12°18'E.), the NE island of Asvaer. The pilots em-

bark 2.5 miles WNW of the station.
The pilot radio calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the
7.48
working frequencies are VHF channels 12 and 13.

Nordre Asvaerfjorden is not difficult to approach in daylight
7.48
with clear weather. The peaks on Tomma are especially useful

By “trolvag” via Wikimedia Commons
7.47
in making the entrance.
Donna
7.47
7.49 Breifind (66°15'N., 12°48'E.), 821m high, in the S

The area for about 20 miles W of Donna (66°06'N.,
7.47 part of Tomma, bearing about 098° leads in N of Asvaer.
12°33'E.) is foul. Ytreholmen lies about 15 miles W of the SW After passing N of the light on Andersbakken, course should
7.49
point of the island. be altered to pass S of Syntholmbaen, a drying reef about 3.5
Lillesveet (66°06'N., 11°31'E.) and Skolton, rocky banks
7.47 miles ESE of the light, and N of Utoybaen (66°14'N.,
situated about 7 miles NW of Ytterholmen, have least depths of 12°36'E.), about 4 miles ESE of Synstholmbaen. Utoybaen lies
27m and 26m, respectively. Between these banks and about 0.7 mile off the NE extremity of Donna.
Ytreholmen, there are other shoals and banks which break. Stifjorden, between the S side of Tomma and the N side of
7.49
Floholman (66°10'N., 11°42'E.) lies 4 miles NE of Skolton;

7.47 Lokta, is free from dangers, except for a small area of foul
Floholm is the middle islet of the group. Lunboen the farthest ground extending about 0.5 mile N from the NE end of Lokta;
SW of the group, lies 1.5 miles NE of Skolton. It dries at very it joins Indreleia off the NE coast of Lokta.
LW and the breakers are visible from the offing for a consider- Skifjorden, leading S from Stifjorden between the E side of
7.49
able distance. Foul ground extends about 2 miles NW from Donna and the W side of Lokta, is part of the W route of Indre-
Floholm. leia between Ulvangen and Gjeroya. The channel passes either
Moholmssve, an isolated bank with a depth of 29m, lies 5
7.47 side of Svensskjeret (66°06'N., 12°41'E.), an above-water rock
miles NNE of Floholm and Samskallen, also an isolated bank lying 0.45 mile E of Donna. Dangers in the fairway may best
with a depth of 33m, lies 9 miles farther NNE. be seen on the chart.
Myken (66°45'N., 12°25'E.), the group of islands next N of
7.47 In Skifjorden, the tidal currents nearly always set N along
7.49
Traena, lies with its S end about 15 miles NE of Sanna. The the coast of Donna; northbound vessels should keep to the W
water surrounding Myken is deep almost to its outermost islets. side of the channel and southbound vessels should keep to the
This can cause the sea to break over the islets with strength. E side.
Tennholmen, marked at its SW end by a light, lies 17 miles
7.47
NE of Myken. Below-water rocks extend about 1 mile W from Ulvangen to Meloyfjorden

the light and 5.75 miles NE. Sveboen, a rocky shoal with a
charted depth of 4.8m, lies 5.75 miles WSW of the light; a 7.50 Between Ulvangen and Gjeroya, about 25 miles NNE
rocky 5.8m shoal lies 2.5 miles S of Sveboen. of Donna, there are two channels of Indreleia. The W channel
Gronna (67°01'N., 13°11'E.), a dangerous group of islets
7.47 leads NW of Tomma through Tomfjorden. The E channel,
and rocks, lies 2.5 miles N of Tennholmen, and is the outer- passing E of Tomma, is the preferred route. It is less intricate
most danger WNW of Kunna (66°57'N., 13°31'E.). In stormy and has a relatively wide fairway which is practically free from
weather and with high tides, the sea breaks over the entire dangers.
Gronna group. From the N end of Ulvangen the fairway of Indreleia leads E
7.50
of Finnkona (Finkonna) (66°07'N., 12°44'E.), Lokta and Tom-

Asvaer to Indreleia ma, passing W of Hugla and Handnesoy.
Rana, the approach to the port of Mo I Rana is entered from
7.50
7.48 Asvaer (66°14'N., 12°12'E.), an island group situated Indreleia, on the SE side of Lokta and NE of Finnkona. Brune-
19 miles NE of Ytterholmen, consists of a group of rocks and set (66°08'N., 12°50'E.), 2.25 miles ENE of Finnkona, is the S
islets; some of them are of a moderate height. entrance point of Rana and Huglneset, 2.5 miles NNE of
Asvaer Light is shown from a prominent tower, 18m in
7.48 Bruneset, is the N entrance point.
height, standing near the NE extremity of the group. A racon is Rana extends 24 miles ENE to Stromholmen where Nordana
7.50
located at the light tower. leads 11 miles farther ENE to Mo I Rana and the mouth of
There are no dangers in the seaward approach to Asvaer,
7.48 Ranelva.
which leads between Ovskallen (66°25'N., 11°58'E.), an 11m Branch fjords include Utskarpen, Elsfjorden, and Sorfjorden.
7.50
depth lying about 5 miles SSW of Sanna, and the Floholman Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Lokta are vari-
7.50
Pub. 182
7.50 Mo I Rana
able. In Rana, they usually set out with the falling tide and into N side of town. Berthing details are shown in the table titled
the fjord with the rising tide. In the outer part of the fjord, the Nesna—Berth Information.
ebb current is strongest on the S side. Hemnesberget (66°13'N., 13°36'E.) is a small natural
7.51
During thaws, accompanied by prevailing E winds, the set in

7.50 coastal port situated on the E entrance point of Elsfjorden,
the fjord may be continuously outward and the velocity may be about 2 miles SSE of the entrance to Utskarpen. A mooring
2 to 3 knots; in the vicinity of the head of the fjord there is usu- buoy is moored off the quays, which are up to 60m long and
ally a constant outward set. have depths from 3.9 to 14.5m alongside.
7.51 Ranskjeret (66°09'N., 12°52'E.), an above-water Mo I Rana (66°19'N., 14°08'E.)

rock, lies 1.5 miles NE of Bruneset in the entrance to Rana.
From Ranskjeret, the fairway is free of dangers to Bardalsoya, World Port Index No. 22760
a distance of about 13 miles.
Storgrunnen, a rocky 14m patch, lies 0.5 mile WSW of Bar-
7.51
Port of Mo I Rana
dalsoya. Mud flats extend S from Bardalsoya to the mainland.
At the head of the fjord, for about 1 mile SW of Mo I Rana,
7.51
http://www.moshipping.no/port-i-rana/
the coastal reef dries and extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in
places. 7.52 Mo I Rana, also known as Mo, is situated at the head
An anchorage is charted on the SE side of Bardalsoya, in
7.51
of Nordrana, near the mouth of Ranelv, and is approached
25m. A 6m line is formed 183m S, W, and N of the anchorage. through Rana. It consists of the city, with an inner harbor with
Anchorage can be obtained in Utskarpen (66°15'N.,
7.51
berthing facilities for small vessels and an outer harbor that can
13°35'E.), 5 miles ENE of Bardalsoya, in 33m, clay, at the dis- accommodate large vessels alongside and at anchor.
cretion of the pilot. Winds—Weather.—The port is well sheltered and normal
7.52
operations are seldom interfered with by weather conditions.

Nesna—Berth Information The harbor is ice free.
Tides—Currents.—The range of spring tides is 2.7m, a
7.52
Berth Length Depth Remarks range of 3.6m was observed during 1951-53.
Nesna Terminal Depths—Limitations.—The port can accommodate vessels
7.52
up to 83,353 dwt, with a maximum length of 260m and a

Breakbulk. Maximum maximum beam of 32.2. See the table titled Mo I Rana—
West 115m 6.5m
draft of 4.7m. Berth Information.
North 66m 3.9m Breakbulk. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
7.52
dered through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the

Nesna (66°12'N., 13°01'E.) is a small town with several light
7.51
Londingen Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. The pi-
industries. Located at the end of a peninsula extending from lots are provided by the Aesvaer pilot station.
the mainland, it is E of the island of Hugla and S of the island The pilot boards in position 66°17.0'N, 12°12.5'E (2 miles
7.52
of Handnesoya. Nesna has a concrete jetty with a NNE-SSW WNW of Asvaer Light) or position 66°15.3'N, 12°36.7'E
orientation. Vessels with a draft of 4.7m can be accommodated. (smaller vessels after agreement with the pilot station).
Both the jetty and berth protect a ferry and boat harbor on the
Pub. 182
The pilot calling frequency is VHF channel 16; the pilot

7.52 of the fairway about 2 miles NE of Mefjordsholman. Foul
working frequencies are VHF channels 12 and 14. ground extends about 0.3 mile NNE from the islet.
Tugs are recommended for vessels of more than 10,000 dwt
7.52 A white sector of the light on Handnesholmen will lead
7.53
and are available with 24 hours notice. through the fairway from a position 0.3 mile W of Huglneset,
Regulations.—Vessels operating within the seaplane harbor,
7.52 to within about 1 mile of the light.
N of the harbormaster’s office, are required to maneuver with Tomfjorden, which leads NE from the inner end of Nordre
7.53
care and comply with the regulations governing the transit of Asvaerfjorden, passes N of Tomma and joins Indreleia NE of
seaplane operating areas. A patrol boat displaying a yellow and Kjerringskjeret (66°20'N., 12°53'E.), a foul area marked by a
black flag patrols the seaplane harbor when seaplanes are oper- light, situated 1.75 miles NNE of Tomma.
ating. Odoyflua (66°21'N., 12°55'E.), a drying rock, lies at the SW
7.53
Contact Information.—See the table titled Mo I Rana—

7.52 entrance point of Stigfjorden, 1.5 miles NNE of
Contact Information. Kjerringskjeret.
Stigfjorden, formed between Stigen on the W and Aldra on
7.53
Mo I Rana—Contact Information the E, is the N continuation of Indreleia to Bonetskjeret, 9

miles N, and is free from dangers in the fairway.
Port Authority
Teisten (66°22'N., 12°56'E.), a small islet on the W side of
7.53
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 the fairway, lies 1.25 miles NNE of Odoyflua.
Telephone 47-75-101870 Aldersundet is entered E of Teisten; it is clear of dangers in
7.53
the fairway. Aldra forms the W side of the passage; the E side
Facsimile 47-75-101871 of the passage is formed by the mainland. Three overhead ca-
E-mail havna@rana.kommune.no bles span Aldersundet between Aldra and the mainland.
At the N end of Stigfjorden, the track of Indreleia passes W
7.53
Harbormaster of three small islands, Brusoya, Rundvedoya and Langvedoya;

Telephone 47-75-134703 it then leads E of Bonetskjeret (66°29'N., 12°58'E.), 1.5 miles
NW of Langvedoya.
Anchorage.—Anchorage in the harbor is to be advised by
7.52
Kvina, an inlet entered off the E side of Indreleia, ENE of
7.53
the harbor pilot. Rundvedoya, is free from dangers in the fairway.

Caution.—A dumping ground was established 0.7 mile
7.52
Kvina (66°28'N., 13°10'E.), a village at the head of the inlet,
7.53
NNE of Hauknesbukta Light. has a jetty, with a berth 18m long, at its head; there are depths
of 4.5 to 5.8m alongside.
7.53 Indreleia continues N of Rana passing W of Huglne-
set (66°10'N., 12°51'E.), the SW extremity of Hugla, an island 7.54 From Bonetskjeret, Indreleia passes through Kvaroy-
which rises to a height of 623m, in its S part. fjorden, in a NNW direction; then it turns E passing N of Vi-
Mefjordsholman (66°12'N., 12°50'E.), consisting of two
7.53
kingen Light (66°32'N., 12°58'E.), and S of Rangsundoya. A
small islets fringed by reefs, lies on the W side of the fairway, 14.9m patch lies in the SW entrance to Kvaroyfjorden, 0.35
off the SE end of Tomma, about 24 miles N of Huglneset. mile NE of Bonetskjeret.
Handnesholmen, an islet marked by a light, lies on the E side
7.53
Mo I Rana—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Container and Ro-Ro Terminal
Cement, ro-ro/lo-lo, containers, and
Toraneskaia 305m 8.0m 123m — 16.5m 8,3354 dwt
breakbulk.
Bukterminalen
North 129m 7.3-11.0m 199.9m — 32.2m 60,402 dwt Petroleum products and breakbulk.
South 105m 7.3m 90.8m — 15.2m 4,550 dwt Breakbulk.
Iron Ore Terminal
Iron ore. Berthing length of 272m
Iron Ore — 11.4m 260m — 32.2m 83,353 dwt
Rana Industrial Terminal
Scrap metal, containers, and break-
Dry Cargo 410m 8.0m 143m — 22.5m 17,356 dwt
bulk.
Pub. 182
There is a 4.3m shoal patch on the E side of the fairway, 1.25

7.54 Svinvaer (66°45'N., 13°10'E.) is situated on the W side of
7.55
miles ENE of Bonetskjeret. A 10m patch lies 0.2 mile NW of Indreleia, 2.75 miles NNE of Rodoya. In the fairway between
the 4.3m depth. Svinvaer and Amnoya, 2.25 miles E, are two 14m shoals locat-
After passing SE of Rangsundoya, 3 miles NE of Vikingen
7.54 ed, respectively, 0.8 mile E, and 1.25 miles E of the NE ex-
Light, a vessel should steer N to pass between Rangsundoya tremity of Svinvaer. A small islet lies 0.25 mile E of Svinvaer.
and Gjeroya on the W and the island of Renga located about 1 Meloyfjorden is entered between Svinvaer and Amnoya.
7.55
mile E.
Lamannskjeret (66°36'N., 13°05'E.), a reef, lies on the E
7.54
Meloyfjorden to Saltfjorden
side of the fairway, about 2 miles NNW of the S extremity of
Renga. Other dangers, which may be seen on the chart, lie off 7.56 Indreleia continues from the junction of Rodoy-
the W side of Renga. fjorden, Otervaerfjorden, and Skarsfjorden for 11 miles NNE
From abreast the N extremity of Renga, vessels should steer
7.54 and ENE through Meloyfjorden, then turning NE through
N through Rodoyfjorden, passing between Rodoya and the Meloysundet. When clear of Meloysundet, Indreleia continues
mainland. 7 miles NNW across Gasvaerfjorden and Stottfjorden to
Rodoy (66°39'N., 13°05'E.) is a small coastal harbor situated
7.54 Stottsundet. This route is suitable for large vessels.
at the SE extremity of Rodoya. It may be entered from the S An entrance from seaward through Tennholmfjorden gives
7.56
through Rodoysundet. The timber quay is 31m long and has access to Indreleia through Gasvaerfjorden and Stottfjorden.
depths of 6.3 to 8.5m alongside; however, local knowledge is Angersholmen Light (66°46'N., 13°16'E.) is situated on the
7.56
required. E side of the fairway, 0.35 mile off Amnoya.

Mefjordholmen, a group of islets and rocks, lies on the W
7.56
side of the fairway, about 1 mile WNW of Angersholmen

Light. A shoal, with a depth of 8m, is situated 1.25 miles NE of
the light, on the SE side of the fairway.
Hatboen (66°48'N., 13°21'E.), marked by a beacon, is about
7.56
3 miles NE of Angersholmen Light on the N side of the fair-

way.
A mid-channel course will lead through Meloyfjorden, pass-
7.56
ing between the N extremity of Amnoya and Hatboen. Be-

tween Hatboen and Meloysund Light, 5 miles ENE, the
fairway is free from dangers.
Glomfjorden, the E continuation of Meloyfjorden, extends
7.56
Rodoy
10.5 miles E from its entrance S of the Meloysund Light; the
7.54
fairway is deep and free of dangers.

7.55 Sandverken (66°39'N., 13°06'E.) lies on the W side
7.56
of the fairway, 0.6 mile SE of Rodoy. Sorskallen, a 0.9m isolat-

Glomfjorden, about 6 miles within its entrance.
ed patch, lies 0.2 mile SSW of Sandverken.
Glomfjord (66°49'N., 13°59'E.) (World Port Index No.
7.56
Ronvikskjerane (66°40'N., 13°11'E.), a group of above-wa-

22540) is situated on the N shore at the head of Glomfjorden.
7.55
ter rocks on the E side of Indreleia, lies about 3 miles NE of

Depths—Limitations.—A private bulk quay will accommo-
7.56
Sandverken. Klauskjeret, an above-water rock, is about 1 mile

date a vessel up to 39,773 dwt, with a maximum length of
NNE of Ronvikskjerane, in about mid-channel of the entrance
200m, a maximum beam of 29.4m, and a maximum draft of
to Tjonsfjorden.
10.5m. See the table titled Glomfjord—Berth Information.
A mid-channel course through Rodoyfjorden leads clear of
7.55
the dangers.
Glomfjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Yara Terminal
Chemicals and gases. Berthing
Ammonia 30m 10.5m 181.7m 10.5m 29.4m 38,427 dwt
length of 80m (including dolphins).
Containers, breakbulk, bunkers, and
Container 25m — 134.4m — 22.5m 11,193 dwt reefer. Berthing length of 80m (in-
cluding dolphins).
Pub. 182
Glomfjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Fertilizer, limestone, phosphates,
breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer. No
Main 350m 9.0m 200m 8.0m — 39,773 dwt beam restrictions. More than one
vessel can be moored alongside si-
multaneously.
Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but

7.56 From Kunna NE to Fugloyfjorden, a distance of about 5
7.57
may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Center at miles, Indreleia is open sea sheltered by the low-lying Gronna
an additional cost. The pilot boards, as follows: (67°01'N., 13°10'E.) group of islets and rocks.
1. North approach—2 miles N of Fleinvaer. After entering Fugloyfjorden, the track continues in a gener-
7.57
2. South approach—2 miles WNW of Asvaer Light. al NE direction and passes SE of Fugloya; then the trend is N
7.56 past the W side of Sandhornoya Island into Saltfjorden.
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph Caution.—During N gales, a heavy sea is raised on the bank
7.57
1.1. N of Kunna. This part of Indreleia is considered to be one of

Contact Information.—See the table titled Glomfjord—
7.56 the most difficult to navigate in bad weather and under such
Contact Information. conditions the area should be avoided by vessels without local
knowledge.
Glomfjord—Contact Information
7.58 Gasvaer (66°53'N., 13°29'E.) is a group of islands ly-
Hydrom Glomfjord ing 3.25 miles NW of Meloysund Light. Teksmona, an island,
Caal sign
Glomfjord Port Radio lies on the E side of Indreleia, about 1 mile E of Gasvaer. The
fairway in this area is free of danger; however, a 7.6m patch
lies about 0.3 mile W of the W extremity of Teksmona.
Telephone 47-75-719100 Ostholmen (66°53'N., 13°31'E.) is the farthest E of the Gas-
7.58
vaer group. A reef, with some above-water rocks, extends

about 0.3 mile SW from a point on the mainland 1.75 miles
E-mail hydro.glomfjord@hydro.com NNE of Ostholmen.
Stott (66°55'N., 13°28'E.) is the name for the general vicini-
7.58
7.57 Meloysundet, the continuation of Indreleia, is formed ty of Stottsundet and the island group Stottvaer.
between Meloya on the W side and Skjaerpa on the E side. Skarvskjer Light is situated close off the E side of Stott, 2.75
7.58
Meloyneset Light (66°50'N., 13°35'E.) is situated on the E

7.57
miles NNW of Ostholmen.
extremity of Meloya, 0.75 mile NE of Meloysund Light. Stottsundet, formed between Stott and the mainland, is free
7.58

7.57
of dangers except for Litlegrunnen, a 10m patch 0.9 mile N of
the S end of Meloysundet. Skarvskjer Light, and Bonetskjergrunnen, a 7m patch lying
A white sector of Meloysund Light bearing astern, leads
7.57
0.35 mile farther NNW.
through the fairway of Meloysundet to the E end of Gasvaer- Tides—Currents.—Though much influenced by the wind,
7.58
fjorden. the tidal currents in Stottsundet have a tendency to set N with

Mesoya (66°51'N., 13°40'E.), an island 318m high, lies with
7.57
the rising tide and S with the falling tide. During or after fresh
its SW part 1 mile E of Meloya. It forms the E side of Mesoy- S or SW winds, the tidal currents may set continuously N.
fjorden; Eiet, formed on its E side leads NNE from Glom- A white sector of Skarvskjer Light, astern, leads N through
7.58
fjorden. the fairway of Stottsundet.

Ornes (66°52'N., 13°42'E.) is situated on the mainland about
7.57
When clear of Stottsundet, vessels bound for Fugloyfjorden
7.58
0.5 mile E of the NE end of Mesoya. It is the administrative can alter course E, taking care to avoid the foul ground extend-
center for the Meloy district. ing about 0.4 mile N from the N face of Kunna.
Ornes may be approached from the N by rounding the N end
7.57
On the W side of the channel, from about 0.5 mile to 1.25
7.58
of Mesoya from Mesoyfjorden, or from the S through Glom- miles N of Stott Light (66°57'N., 13°28'E.), is a rocky shoal
fjorden then NNE through Eiet. The quays at the fish factories with a least depth of 7.6m. An 18.3m rocky patch lies in the
have a total length of 152m; the main quay has a depth of 5.2m channel about 0.7 mile NE of the light; on the N side of the
alongside. The packet boat quay is 92m long, with depths of 4 fairway, about 2 miles NE of the light is Meloygrunnen, a 2.5m
to 9.7m alongside. shoal. A 14.6m patch lies S of Meloygrunnen, in about mid-
Indreleia route leads across Gasvaerfjorden, then passes
7.57
channel, between the shoal and Kunna.
through Stottsundet, between the Stottvaer group of islands and A white sector of Digerflesa Light (66°58'N., 13°38'E.),
7.58
the mainland. Kunna, the conspicuous headland at the NE end leads between the coastal reef N of Kunna and the S end of
of this stretch, lies with its seaward end about 7 miles NNW of Meloygrunnen, but it should be noted that the 14.6m patch lies
Meloysundet. in this sector. A white sector of Finneset Light, located 2.5
Pub. 182
miles E of Digerflesa Light, ahead, leads through the same Saltfjorden is entered between Skarneset (67°12'N., 14°17'E.),
channel and S of Digerflesa. the N point of Sandhornoya, and Kvannoya, 3.25 miles NNE.
It gives access to Nordfjorden and through Saltstraumen to
7.59 From the vicinity of Meloygrunnen and Digerflesa, Skjerstadfjorden and other inner fjords.
the track leads NE through Fugloyfjorden, passing SE of Flo- This part of Saltfjorden is deep and wide and is free of dan-
7.60
holman (67°01'N., 13°42'E.), and then passing between the E gers, though coastal reefs fringe each side; it is exposed to sea-
side of Fugloya and Rossoya, 1.75 miles E. ward.
In Fugloyfjorden, the tidal currents are usually strong, set-
7.59 The tidal currents in the E part of Saltfjorden are strong; they
7.60
ting N on the flood and S on the ebb; heavy overfalls occur are usually E along the S shore and W along the N shore.
during W and NW winds. A mid-channel course in a NE direction will lead through
7.60
Fuglesangen (66°59'N., 13°38'E.), lying about 0.9 mile

7.59 Saltfjorden to the entrance of Saltstraumen.
WNW of Digerflesa Light, consists of some above and below-
water rocks which break in bad weather. 7.61 Saltstraumen, a narrow channel on the S side of the inner
Above-water rocks lie on the E side of the fairway, about 0.4
7.59 end of Saltfjorden, is entered between Kvitberget (67°14'N.,
mile off the W side of Rossoya. 14°36'E.), the NE extremity of Straumoya, and the NW point of
Fugloya Light (67°04'N., 13°52'E.) is situated at the E end
7.59 Knaplundoya, 0.45 mile NE. This channel leads to the fjords E,
of Fugloya. A rock, with a depth of 5.2m, lies 1 mile N of the which are collectively known as Indre Saltfjorden.
light. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m over a navigable
7.61
From NE of Fugloya Light, Indreleia passes SE of Fleina, an

7.59 width of 80m, spans Saltstaumen.
island lying 1.25 miles N of Fugloya, and E of Sor-Arnoya and Overhead cables span Saltstaumen; the least vertical clear-
7.61
Nord-Arnoya and W of Veoya and Sandhornoya to the vicinity ance is 32m.

of Marnesskagen (67°10'N., 14°05'E.), at the junction with Winds—Weather.—With W winds, the flow is irregular,
7.61
Saltfjorden. and slack water may occur up to 1 hour earlier or later than
A shore reef extends about 1 mile SE from Sor-Arnoya; the
7.59 usual.
fairway narrows to about 0.4 mile in this area. In springtime, with E winds and with the rivers in flood, the
7.61
beginning of the N current is advanced,; that current may run

7.60 Sorfjorden, on the E side of Fugloyfjorden, is ap- for 7 hours, and the S current for only 5 hours.
proached from its N end from Indreleia between Fugloya and Tides—Currents.—Skjerstadfjorden and its branch fjords
7.61
Sandhornoya, 3.5 miles ENE. The fjord extends S for 7.75 are filled and emptied by semidiurnal tides through two narrow
miles and is formed between Rossoya and Femris and a penin- openings. These openings so restrict the volume of water that
sula of the mainland on the W and by a peninsula of the main- can pass, as to cause:
land on the E. It is free of danger in the fairway, but its inner 1. A substantial difference between the outer and inner
part is icebound in the winter. levels.
Stavsundet (67°01'N., 13°56'E.), formed between Femris
7.60 2. Very strong tidal currents, especially in Saltstraumen.
and the mainland to the S, leads into Sorfjorden; it can be used 3. A delay of about 1 hour 45 minutes in the times of
by vessels up to 1,500 gt and 5.2m draft. HW and LW within.
Rosoysundet, formed between Rosoya and Femris, connects
7.60 In Saltstraumen generally, the spring rate of the tidal current
7.61
Fugloyfjorden and Sorfjorden. This narrow passage has no is at least 3 knots, but attains 7.5 to 8.5 knots, and considerably
known dangers in the fairway and can be used by vessels up to more in extreme conditions, in the narrows abreast Storhol-
11,000 gt and 7.9m draft. men.
Anchorage may be taken by vessels of moderate size, with
7.60 Tidal intervals in Saltstraumen are shown below:
7.61
local knowledge, in 20 to 40m, on the E side of Sorfjorden, 2.5

miles SE of the N extremity of Femris. Care must be taken to HW at Narvik Remarks
anchor close inshore as the depths increase rapidly to the W.
The W approach to Morsdalsfjorden from Indreleia is at the
7.60
-5 hours, 50 minutes LW at N entrance
N end of Sorfjorden; the fjord proper lies between the main- -4 hours, 10 minutes LW at S entrance
land peninsula on the E side of Sorfjorden and the SW side of
-3 hours, 55 minutes Slack water
Sandhornoya. It extends about 6 miles SSE to the S end of
Sandhornoya, and then Holmsundfjorden continues E and N to -0 hour, 10 minutes HW at N entrance
the S end of Nordfjorden.
+1 hour, 25 minutes HW at S entrance
Morsdalsfjorden is free from dangers, except for two rocky
7.60
shoals, with depths of 5.5m and 8.5m, which lie 0.5 mile W +2 hours, 00 minutes Slack water
and 0.4 mile N, respectively, of Sundsodden Light (67°05'N.,
14°04'E.). Vigorous eddies, several meters wide and with markedly
7.61
There is anchorage for moderate-size vessels, in a depth of

7.60
deep vortices, form when the flow is strong.
18.3m, on the W side of Morsdalsfjorden, about 0.4 mile SSE During the S current, eddies form between the S point of
7.61
of Sundsodden Light. Vessels should get close under the land, Storholmen and Tuv, 0.7 mile SE; on the S shore of
as the depths increase rapidly offshore. Svefjorden; and beyond. They are strongest in the basin formed
Saltfjorden, extending from Fleinvaer (67°10'N., 13°45'E.)
7.60
by Storholmen and the cove 0.2 mile E.
to Hopen, 23 miles ENE is crossed by Indreleia. The E part of In that basin, the S current sets strongly towards the S point
7.61
Pub. 182
By Clemensfranz (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons

7.61
7.61 Very strong tidal currents under the Saltstraumen Bridge
of Storholmen, then ESE towards Ripnespynten 0.2 mile ESE. watch is maintained on VHF channels 14 and 16.
During the S current, eddies do not form along the coast of Information on times of transit through the Saltstraumen pas-
7.61
Knaplundoya, SE and E of Ripnespynten. sage can be obtained through a 24-hour information service
During the N current, eddies form between the N point of
7.61 contacted by telephone (08-18-77-00).
Storholmen and the N entrance to Saltstraumen; the strongest Mariners are held responsible for meeting the passage sched-
7.61
eddies are off Storholmen. The currents which set on to the ule and any other required conditions. Local regulations state
projecting points of Storholmen and Knaplundoya, beneath the that to avoid passing situations in the narrows, vessels with the
bridge, cause an easily-visible ridge to form in the water, this current running against them should wait.
extending 0.5 mile NNW to Kvitberget, the NW entrance point Anchorage.—Vessels proceeding to Saltstraumen can ob-
7.61
of Saltstraumen. tain anchorage, in depths of 20 to 29m, N of the W entrance

In Svefjorden, the incoming tidal current at the surface is the
7.61 point of Saltstraumen, but care must be taken to avoid the reef
stronger, and can set up unpleasant overfalls in opposition to a fringing Straumoya.
strong E wind.
The strength of the tidal current and the powerful eddies in
7.61 7.62 Svefjorden continues ESE from the S entrance of
their wake cause Saltstaumen to be navigable only at brief peri- Saltstraumen; it is free of dangers in mid-channel. An overhead
ods of slack water and then only with local knowledge. cable spans Svefjorden 1 mile E of its entrance.
Signals.—Saltstraumen Signal Stations, which inform ves-
7.61 Skjerstadfjorden is entered from Svefjorden abreast Buneset
7.62
sels when the passage of Saltstraumen may be made, are situat- (67°13'N., 14°42'E.) and extends to Gjelbuneset (67°11'N.,
ed, as follows: 15°24'E.) 16 miles E, on the S side of the fjord. From this point
1. For inbound vessels—on the E shore, by the King Os- Saltdalsfjorden extends 5 miles farther SSE.
car II statue 0.3 mile N of the bridge. As in Svefjorden, the incoming tidal current at the surface is
7.62
2. For outbound vessels—at Ytre Tuv, 0.7 mile SSE of the stronger, and can set up unpleasant overfalls in opposition
the bridge, on the S shore of Svefjorden. to strong E winds. These conditions are particularly dangerous
Signals are shown from masts (yellow and white) and consist
7.61 in Skjerstadfjorden, which is liable to squalls. Squalls often de-
of red balls by day and red lights by night. velop suddenly and are generally followed by periods of calm.
Saltstraumen Signal Stations are manned 1 hour before and
7.61 The white sector of the light on Buneset, bearing astern,
7.62
after each current change within the period 0800 to 1900. A leads in the fairway towards position about 3 miles NE of the
Pub. 182
light. The white sector of Alvnestangen Light (67°16'N., the chart.

15°02'E.) leads E in the fairway, passing N of Oygrunnane, an Although there are several different ways through and across
7.63
area of foul ground which extends about 1 mile N of the S Traenfjorden, care should be taken to avoid Stokholmen
shore. (66°29'N., 12°21'E.), 4.75 miles NNW of Kvalholmen Light,
From a position about 1 mile W of Alvnestangen Light a SE
7.62 and the shoals which are charted within 1.75 miles.
course will lead through the E part of Skjerstadfjorden to Gjel- Vessels may proceed N from a position N of Kvalholmen
7.63
buneset. Light, passing in mid-channel between Skjaerflesa Light and

Fauske (67°16'N., 15°24'E.) lies at the head of Fauskevika,
7.62 Stokholmen, steering to pass W of Asbraken (66°30'N.,
which is entered 7 miles SE of Alvnestangen Light; this is the 12°32'E.), a foul area 3 miles E of Stokholmen.
administrative center for the surrounding district. From a mid-channel position E of Dorvaer, 4 miles NNW of
7.63
The port can accommodated vessels with a maximum draft

7.62 Stokholmen, a deep fairway leads N toward the W end of Lyn-
of 6.8m in. See the table tittled Fauske—Berth Information. gvaerfjorden passing between the many dangers charted off
Traena and Nesoya.
Fauske—Berthing Information
7.64 Lyngvaerfjorden, N of Traenfjorden, is broad and
Maximum deep and separates Traena from Myken (66°46'N., 12°29'E.).
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks Valvaerfjorden lies E of Valvaer, the island group close NE
7.64
Draft of Myken. This fjord is encumbered by a large number of

No. 1 39m 4.0m — — rocky shoals; navigation is dangerous without local knowl-
edge.
General
125m — 6.8m Breakbulk. Tennholmfjorden, 16 miles NE of Lyngvaerfjorden, is en-
7.64
Cargo
tered S of Kalsholmen Light (66°55'N., 13°06'E.). The fjord is
free from dangers but Lyjosboen, a reef with less than 1.8m lies
Rognan (67°06'N., 15°25'E.) lies at the head of Saltdals-
7.62
in the W approach 6 miles SW of Kalsholmen Light, and Sve-
fjorden, which extends 5 miles S from its entrance abreast boen, a reef with a least depth of 4.6m, lies 5.5 miles WSW of
Gjelbuneset; it is the administrative center for Saltdal district. the light.
Berths are available in Rognan, at quays up to 130m long,
7.62
Stapfjorden leads N from the inner end of Tennholmfjorden,
7.64
with depths of 3.4 to 10m alongside. Anchorage is available, in along the W side of the Stottvaer (66°56'N., 13°20'E.). The
21m, clay and sand, in a position about 0.3 mile WNW of Rog- fairway of this fjord is free from dangers.
nan Church.
7.65 Fleinvaerfjorden, leading NE into Saltenfjorden, is
Donna to Saltfjorden deep and free from dangers in the fairway. Fleinvaer, a group of
low islands, lies on the NW side of Fleinvaerfjorden. Fuglo-
7.63 Indreleia may be reached from seaward by passing S vaer, Fleina, Sor Arnoya, and Nord Arnoya lie on the SW and
of the S end of Traena (66°25'N., 12°00'E.), then proceeding SE side of the fjord.
across the S part of Traenfjorden, into the W arm of Sjona, then Nupen (67°08'N., 13°43'E.) is the farthest S of the Fleinvaer
7.65
toward the S end of Stigfjorden. Traenfjorden is the fjord next group. The most dangerous shoals in the approach to Flein-
N of Nordre Asvaerfjorden. vaerfjorden extend 4 miles W of Nupen. Other shoals lie off
Traenfjorden, which lies in a NNE to SSW direction, is
7.63
Fleinvaer; their positions may be seen on the chart.
bound on the W by the Traena group and on the E by Mavaer The outer dangers in the approach are usually indicated by
7.65
and Nesoya. The navigable channel is about 4 miles wide at its the great number of sea birds seen in their vicinity.
entrance and about 3 miles wide between Selvaer (66°36'N., A vessel approaching Fleinvaerfjorden, when in the vicinity
7.65
12°18'E.) and the dangers W of Nesoya. of Gronna (67°01'N., 13°11'E.), should steer well N of that
Tides—Currents.—In Traenfjorden the tidal currents set N
7.63
group. When clear N of Gronna, steer ENE, passing S of Nu-
and NE with the rising tide and S and SW with the falling tide. pen, then in mid-channel to join Saltfjorden NE of Nord Ar-
When bound from the S end of Traenfjorden to Indreleia, a
7.63
noya
vessel should steer ENE passing between Samskallen The principal channel to Bodo, is the one which leads S of
7.65
(66°22'N., 11°58'E.) and Ovskallen, 2.25 miles N, and pass N Tennholmen (67°18'N., 13°30'E.), then N of Fleinvaer into
of Kvalholmen Light (66°25'N., 12°28'E.); from this position Saltfjorden in approximate position 67°12'N, 14°08'E; this is
the track leads about 0.5 mile N of Kvitingan, which lies 3.25 specified for entrance into the Restricted Sea Area.
miles ESE of the light. Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents around Tennholmen are
7.65
Indre Solvaerrevet (66°24'N., 12°41'E.), an isolated patch

7.63
rotary. At local LW, the current begins to run SW, changing
with a charted depth of 5.8m, lies about 2 miles E of the light gradually through W, NW, and N as the tide rises.; at local HW,
on Kvitingan. Other dangers in this area may best be seen on the current begins to run NE, changing gradually through E,
the chart. SE, and S as the tide falls.
From the vicinity of Kvitingan, steer toward Eggelosa, pass-
7.63
ing S of Indre Solvaerrevet. A vessel can steer from Eggelosa 7.66 Tennholmen lies about 20 miles W of Bodo and about
SE between Onoya and Kvitaer into Sjona and then into Indre- 9 miles NW of Fleinvaer.
leia. Seioskallen (67°17'N., 13°31'E.), a shoal with a least charted
7.66
The dangers in Sjona and the vicinity may best be seen on

7.63
depth of 7m, lies about 2 miles SSE of the light on Tennhol-
Pub. 182
men. A shoal, with a depth of 15.9m, lies 0.25 mile SW of Sei- 7.68 Bodo is the administrative center for the county of Nordland.
oskallen. This is the farthest S of the dangers off Tennholmen.
For dangers E of Tennholmen and the dangers in the vicinity
7.66
Port of Bodo
of Givaer, 5 miles E of Tennholmen, refer to the chart.
From a position clear of Seioskallen, the entrance channel
7.66
http://www.bodohavn.no
passes midway between Fleinvaer and Kjaervaer, 3 miles NE,
then into the W end of Saltfjorden. Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind at Bodo is from the
7.68
Mesjoygrunnen (67°12'N., 13°59'E.), with a least charted

7.66 E, except in summer, when winds are mainly from N and E or
depth of 4.6m, lies about 1.0 mile SE of the light in Kjaervaer. between SW and W. Calms often occur from July to September.
Gales and strong winds blow mostly from SW and W.
7.67 Indreleia crosses Saltfjorden from Marnesskagen to The inner harbor is well sheltered from most directions, but
7.68
the vicinity of Store Svartoksen (67°16'N., 14°14'E.), 7 miles it is reported that bad weather from SW or W can cause occa-
NE, where the route divides. sional delays in berthing or unberthing in the absence of tug as-
Svartoksleia, the principal channel into Bodo, leads N of
7.67 sistance. The harbor is always ice free.
Store Svartoksen and S of Store Hjartoy and Lille Hjartoy. The outer harbor consists of the water area between the town
7.68
A line of shoals extend ENE from Store Svartoksen.

7.67 and the SW part of Lille Hjartoy, SW of the mole; it is exposed
Kirkgrunnen (67°15'N., 14°14'E.), a small patch with a
7.67 to SW and W.
depth of 1.5m, lies about 0.4 mile SW of the light on Store Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at MHWS is 2.8m; the
7.68
Svartoksen. tidal rise at MLWS is 0.4m.

Lille Svartoksen, a drying reef, lies on the N side of Svartok-
7.67 Depths—Limitations.—The port handles fishing vessels,
7.68
sleia, 1 mile NE of Store Svartoksen. fish oil, containers, passengers, and general cargo. The port can
In Saltfjorden, vessels should steer in the white sector of
7.67 accommodate vessels up to 16,000 dwt, with a maximum
Store Svartoksen Light bearing between 036° and 062°, ahead, length of 180m and a maximum draft of 8.3m. See the table ti-
to within about 1 mile of the light, when the vessel should steer tled Bodo—Berth Information.
to pass W and N of the light. Aspect.—The framework radio masts, E of the root of the
7.68
When N of Store Svartoksen, steer to pass between Lille

7.67 mole, are conspicuous. Bodo Church is a prominent yellow
Svartoksen and Langdragan, 0.45 mile ESE, then into the en- building, with a separate bell tower surmounted by a spire at its
trance of Bodo. W end.
Care should be exercised to avoid the shoal spit extending
7.67 Pilotage.—Pilotage from the sea to Bodo is reported to be
7.68
91m SW from the SW extremity of Nyholmen and a shoal spit compulsory. Pilotage should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but
extending 137m E from the mole head, in the entrance to Bodo. may be ordered through the Londingen Pilot Booking Center at
an additional cost.
7.67 Bodo (67°17'N., 14°23'E.) The pilot boards, as follows:
7.68
1. About 2 miles N of Fleinvaer in position 67°13.5'N,

World Port Index No. 22290 13°46.2'E.
2. About 3 miles N of Landegode Light in position
7.68 Bodo, a coastal natural harbor, is formed between Ny- 67°30.0'N, 14°22.5'E.
holmen and the Buroya peninsula on the NW side, and the 3. About 4 miles NW of Oterholmen Light in position
mainland on the NE and SE side. A mole extends about 0.2 67°13.9'N, 14°07.2'E.
mile NNW from the mainland toward the SW extremity of Ny- The pilot boat and pilot office are equipped with VHF chan-
7.68
holmen. Nyholmen and Buroya are connected by a causeway nel 16.

and by the Bodo Bridge.
Bodo—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Lillebrekken
Fast ferries, ro-pax, and bun-
Lillebrekken 55m 6.0-7.2m 220m — — —
kers. No beam restrictions.
Ostbrekken
Cruise vessels, ro-pax, and
Ostbrekken Quay 150m 5.8-7.8m 220m — — —
bunkers. No beam restrictions.
Dampskipskaia
Cruise vessels and bunkers.
Dampskipskaia 180m 5.07.2m 130m — — —
No beam restrictions.
Pub. 182
Bodo—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
D/S Concrete
70m 4.0m — — — — Cruise vessels. Closed.
North
D/S Concrete West 70m 2.0-3.8m — — — — Cruise vessels. Closed.
D/S Sheet Piling
70m 2.0-3.8m — — — — Cruise vessels. Closed.
West
Hansen Terminal
Containers, fishing vessels,
Dahl Kaia 125m 8.0m 110m — — — breakbulk, and bunkers. No
beam restrictions.
Steel products, fishing vessels,
Domsteinkaia 80m 8.0m 110m — — — breakbulk, and bunkers. No
beam restrictions.
Terminal Kai
Cruise vessels, fast ferries,
Cruise 350m 11.5m 330m — — — containers, breakbulk, and
bunkers. No beam restrictions.
Fast ferry, breakbulk, and bun-
North 47m 9.2m — — — —
kers.
Fast ferries, ro-ro/lo-lo, break-
Klossen 35m 9.8m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Terminal South
Fast ferries, ro-pax, breakbulk,
New Hutigruten 180m 8.4m 230m — — —
and bunkers.
Rapp Bomek Terminal
Coastal vessels, fishing ves-
Bomek 1 80m 6.6m — — — —
sels, breakbulk, and bunkers.
Bodo Ferry Terminal
Ferry 40m 6.2m — — — — Fast ferries and bunkers.
Railway Terminal
Fast ferry, ro-ro freight, break-
Railway 100m 6.2m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Fast ferry, ro-ro freight, break-
Railway West 60m 7.3m — — — —
bulk, and bunkers.
Bodo Sildoljefabrikk AS Terminal
Fishing vessels, fish meal, fish
Bodo Sildoljefab-
165m 8.0-10.0m — — — — oil, breakbulk, multipurpose,
rikk
and bunkers.
Vestervika
Aviation fuel, bio fuels, clean
Shell Vestervika 60m 9.2-10.2m 180m 8.3m 26.2m 32,000 dwt products, and bunkers. Dis-
placement 37,000t.
Anchoring is usually advised by the sea pilot or the harbor

7.68 Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
pilot. 1.1.
7.68 Contact Information.—See the table titled Bodo—Contact
7.68
Pub. 182
7.68 By Roed (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons

7.68 Bodo, Norway with the Nyholmen peninsula in the foreground
Information. Caution.—Bodo Seaplane Harbor comprises the area E of

7.68
Store Hjartoy, between a line joining the N extremity of that

Bodo—Contact Information island and a point on the mainland about 1.0 mile ESE, and a
line joining Hjartoydragan, off the SW coast of Store Hjartoy,
and a point on the mainland about 1 mile SSE.
Telephone 47-75-551080 When flying is in progress and the area is closed to water
7.68
Facsimile 47-75-551090 traffic, a ball painted in yellow and black checks is hoisted at a
signal mast on a tower near Breidvikholmen, close SW of the
E-mail firmapost@bodohavn.no head of the mole.
Pub. 182
8.
Sector 8—Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
Pub. 182
8.0
187
189
SECTOR 8
NORWAY—SALTFJORDEN TO TROMSO
Plan.—This sector describes the NW coast of Norway start-

8.0 ten, but it is uncertain as to when or on which coast the currents
ing from the area near Vestfjorden, in the vicinity of Bodo to will make. Vestfjorden and all major straits are free of ice.
Tromso including Malangen. A description of the mainland, Aspect.—Vestfjorden is a broad and deep body of water that
Lofoten, Vesterlan, and the approaches to Narvik, Harstad and separates the mainland from the islands of Lofoten and Vester-
Tromso is included. Indreleia and the inner fjords are also de- alen. Its principal outlying islands are Hadseloy, Langoya, and
scribed. Andoya. Vestfjorden is the seaward approach from Saltfjorden
and Bodo to Ofotfjorden and Narvik. Both Ofotfjorden and
General Remarks Narvik lie about 100 miles NE of Saltfjorden, at the head of the
fjord.
8.1 Tides—Currents.—The tides on the NW coast of 8.1In general, the W and NW coasts of Lofoten are almost inac-
Norway are always semi-diurnal, with relatively little inequali- cessible and should be avoided. This is also true of the Vester-
ty between heights of the two tides. They are small to moderate alen group, comprised of four large islands and several small
in size with a gradual increase in range toward the N. The mean islands, which are dangerous to approach.
range is about 1m at Bergen and about 2.1m at Tromso. 8.1The coast of the mainland of Vestfjorden is broken by a num-
8.1Weather conditions, both locally and in the ocean off the ber of large fjords. Generally, it rises abruptly to over 900m,
coast, may considerably influence the tides. and consists of bare rock with a forested lower slopes.
8.1The currents on the W side of Lofoten sets constantly N re- 8.1The mountains of Lofoten and Vesteralen are steep and lofty,
gardless of the tide, but this may not be the case close inshore. often covered with snow, and are, most often, easily identified.
8.1Along the coast of Vesteralen, the tidal currents nearly al- They may be seen from a distance of 40 to 50 miles in clear
ways set N with an appreciable velocity. It is strongest with the weather.
approach of bad weather and increases in strength near the 8.1The coast continues to the island of Senja and then to
land. Occasionally the tidal currents set S for about 1 hour, the Kvaloy. The entrance to Tromso lies between the two islands.
change occurring at the time of HW and LW. Malangen, the direct passage to Tromso, lies between the two
8.1Off Senja, the tidal currents usually set N following the di- islands as well.
rection of the land, and often attain a considerable velocity, es- 8.1Senja, with its granite peaks, presents a rugged and imposing
pecially near the time of HW. appearance from seaward. A ridge, from 610 to 914m high,
8.1Along Kvalo, the tidal currents usually set NE with the rising runs along the whole island in a NE and opposite direction.
tide and SW with the falling tide, but they are likely to follow Kvaloy, to the NE, is mountainous and attains an elevation of
the contour of the coast and the principal reefs. The Kvaloy tid- 1,045m.
al currents attain their strength at about half tide, and often run 8.1Pilotage.—Lodingen Pilot Center organizes and engages pi-
with a velocity of about 3 knots. lots for vessels in Nordland and the Troms, from Rorvik in the
8.1Along the coast of Vesteralen, the tidal currents nearly al- S to Kirkenes in the N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours in
ways set N with an appreciable velocity. It is strongest with the advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior to arrival
approach of bad weather and increases in strength near the at the pilot station.
land. Occasionally the tidal currents set S for about 1 hour, the 8.1See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic
change occurring at the times of high or LW. Ocean for further information.
8.1Certain reports published from 1835 to 1848 indicate the 8.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
current 10 to 12 miles SW of Andersboskallen (68°46'N., Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
13°33'E.) ran N, NE, and E, with a rate dependent upon the 8.1Trawling is prohibited off the Vesteralen archipelago be-
wind, but occasionally reaching 4 knots over the shallow tween mid September and mid May in the designated Trawler-
banks. These reports must be considered, for where depths Free Zone best seen on the chart.
change suddenly, as in the vicinity of Andersboskallen, and 8.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
about 23 and 32 miles farther NE, there may be a strong flow VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
and violent turbulence. In the areas referred to, the NE or E nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
flow is probably strongest on the rising tide with strong S to W the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
winds. Turbulence is probably most violent during the rising areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
tide with strong N to E winds. mation, see paragraph 1.1.
8.1In the whole of Vestfjorden the movements of the tidal cur- 8.1Ship Reporting System.—The Barents Ship Reporting Sys-
rents are substantially influenced by the winds. At times when tem operates in the Barents Sea off the coasts of Norway and
there is little or no current in mid-channel, there is a regular the Russian Federation beginning at latitude 67°10'N off the
current along the land on either side, invariably setting in con- coast of Norway and continuing N, NE, and E to longitude
trary direction on the opposite sides of the fjord. 33°20'E off the coast of the Russian Federation. For further in-
8.1The tidal currents set NE with the rising tide and SW with formation, see Arctic Ocean—Ship Reporting System in
the falling tide, along either the mainland or SE coast of Lofo- Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
Pub. 182
190 Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso
Caution.—An IMO-adopted TSS is located off the N coast

8.1 Storboen, a drying shoal, lies on the SW side of Helligvaer
8.3
of Norway; it lies about 60 miles W of Rost (67°31'N., and Nordboen, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 7.9m, is situ-
12°07'E.) and leads to about 37 miles NNE of Vardo (70°22'N., ated off the N side of Helligvaer, 5 miles NE of Storboen.
31°07'E.). See paragraph 9.1 for further information. Kjengbaen (67°29'N., 14°01'E.), a rock with a depth of
8.3
Andersboskallen (68°46'N., 13°33'E.), with a least charted

8.1 0.3m, lies 2.75 miles NE of Nordboen.
depth of 37m, lies about 18 miles W of Langoya off the Vester- Husoyvaer, situated 18 miles NNE of Kjengbaen, consists of
8.3
alen group. There are two other patches within 3 miles N of the a group of islets and rocks which extends about 11 miles W of
37m spot, with depths of 40m and 57m. the mainland.
It would be by no means safe to pass over Andersboskallen
8.1 Utgrunnen (67°42'N., 14°17'E.), the outer patch of Husoy-
8.3
during a heavy W swell, as this would cause a high topping vaer, has a least depth of 18.2m. Utgrunnsflesa, a reef which
sea, even if it did not break; rollers set in toward them from a breaks, lies 1.25 miles ESE of Utgrunnen.
long distance W. Kjolibaen (67°45'N., 14°23'E.), with a depth of 1.8m,
8.3
breaks except in calm weather. It is situated 4.25 miles NNE of

Saltfjorden to Skrova Utgrunnen, off the SW side of Maloyvaer. Dorholmskjaeran,
another danger, lies on the NW side of Maloyvaer, 2.5 miles
8.2 Vestfjorden, the fjord lying between Lofoten, Vester- NNE of Kjolibaen.
alen, and the mainland, is entered from seaward between Maloy Skarholmen, an islet marked by a light, lies 1 mile
8.3
Muken (66°45'N., 12°29'E.) and Skomvaer Light, 40 miles NNE of Kjolibaen.

NNW. Maloy Skarholmen (67°46'N., 14°24'E.) is a light shown
8.3
8.2Vestfjorden is deepest at Tranoy, with a depth of about from a prominent tower, 34m in height, standing on the islet. A
640m. At this point, it is also the narrowest, and the depth de- racon is located at the light tower.
creases farther S. Engelvaer (67°53'N., 14°34'E.) is a group of islands and
8.3
8.2Between Rost and Fleinvaer, the maximum depth is about rocks which lie close NE of Maloyvaer, about 6 miles offshore.
300m. The fjord is deepest along the mainland. Here the bot- Tverskallen, with a charted depth of 15m, lies 3.5 miles NE of
tom slopes steeply at a short distance from land so that the rel- Dorholmskjaeran, at the SW edge of the group.
atively shallow parts close to land are narrow. Several foul patches lie on the NW side of the group, 3 to 4
8.3
8.2Vessels approaching Vestfjorden from SW in clear weather miles NE of Tverskallen.

will be able to identify Rost, Vaeroy, and Moskenesoy, which Flatoy (67°55'N., 14°46'E.), an island, lies 2 miles NE of the
8.3
form the SW end of Lofoten. Rost, the S island, can be seen Engelvaer group. A light is situated on the SW part of the is-
from a distance of 30 miles. The latter two islands appear as two land.
steep cliffs. From a distance of 20 miles, one can see the high To the NE of Flatoyare are the islands and rocks of Valsvaer,
8.3
and pointed small islands of Ellefsnyken, Trenyken, and which extend about 3 miles W of Engeloya, a large island ris-
Hernyken, which are located to the S of Storfjellet. The charac- ing to a height of 648m.
teristic formations of these islands make it easy to identify Rost. Off the N end of Engeloya is Brunvaer, another dangerous
8.3
8.2When entering Vestfjorden in thick weather, vessels can ver- group. From Brunvaer NE to Ofotfjorden, the salient features
ify their distance offshore near Lofoten by soundings. There of the coast are apparently free from off-lying dangers.
are depths of 100m from about 1 to 4 miles offshore from the S
end of Moskenesoy to Skrova, about 47 miles ENE. Soundings 8.4 The islands of Lofoten and Hinnoya form a chain ex-
give little warning E of Skrova; depths of 200m are found with- tending NE to the mainland near Ofotfjorden.
in 1 mile of some of the rocks off the S coast of Hinnoya. 8.4Rost is the farthest SW group of islands on the NW side of
8.2In general, it is recommended that vessels keep close to Lo- Vestfjorden.
foten, where there are large flat sea areas with lesser depths, 8.4Rost (67°31'N., 12°07'E.), the principal island of the group,
rather than the mainland, which is foul offshore. When E of is a flat low-lying island surrounded by islets and rocks, none
Skrova, the dangers are all on the N side of the fjord and it is of them visible beyond 7 or 8 miles. Masts equipped with ob-
necessary to keep on the mainland side. struction lights are situated in the N part of Rost.
8.4Rostnesvagen (Rossnesvagen) is entered close to the W side
8.3 Among the islands lying off the mainland coast are of Vaeroy Light (67°39.1'N., 12°43.5'E.). Iron perches mark
Landegode, 791m high, about 8 miles N of the Saltfjorden en- the E side of the entrance.
trance, and Engeloya, 648m high, about 45 miles NNE of the 8.4Skomvaer Light (67°25'N., 11°52'E.) is shown from a tower
same entrance. These islands are conspicuous because of their 34m in height, standing near the S end of the Rost group. A
size and contour. racon is located at the light tower.
8.3There are several conspicuous mountains, which rise to a 8.4Storfjellet (67°28'N., 11°56'E.), 267m high; Vedoy 209m
height of 947m, in the vicinity of Ofotfjorden. high; and Stavoy, 148m high, lie, respectively, 3.75 miles SW,
8.3The fringing islands and dangers extend about 20 miles W 2 miles SSW, and 1 mile SE of Rost. These three islets form
from the mainland in the vicinity of Bodo; north of Bodo the excellent landmarks.
obstructions gradually decrease in distance from the coast. 8.4Tides—Currents.—The general flow pattern in Vestfjorden
8.3Helligvaer (67°25'N., 13°55'E.) and Lyngvaer, W of Lande- flows inward along the W. In winds from the SW, the current is
gode, comprise the next mass of islets NE of Tennholmen. This partially turned. Most straits on the W and N sides of Vest-
group of islets lies with their S end about 10 miles NE of Ten- fjorden have strong currents. High water and LW are occur
holmen. about simultaneous in all of Vestfjorden. The differences in
Pub. 182
Sector 8. Norway—Saltfjorden to Tromso 191
Skomvaer Light
8.4
and weaken it with falling water.

8.4With waves from NE to NW, the interaction between current
and waves will create choppy waves. Refraction centers may
occur SW of Rost when the waves come from the SW. Close to
Lofoten, the waves may also be reflected due to the steep conti-
nental slope.
8.4Vaeroy (67°40'N., 12°40'E.), about 10 miles NE of Rost, is
separated from that island by Rosthavet. Mosken, a conspicu-
ous two pointed summit lies on the same shoal bank, 3 miles
NNE of Vaeroy.
8.4The S, W and N sides of Vaeroy and Mosken are unap-
proachable and a vessel wishing to enter Vestfjorden from W
must do so through Rosthavet, or through Moskenstraumen, 3
miles NNE of Mosken; Rosthavet is preferred. The shoals on
either side of these channels are best seen on the chart.
8.4Lofotodden (67°50'N., 12°51'E.), the S extremity of Moske-
nesoya, forms the N side of Moskenstraumen.
8.4Yttertuven (67°50'N., 12°52'E.), the E extremity of Lofo-
todden, is marked by a light. From this point, the coast of
Moskenesoya extends 8 miles NE to Reine. Rodliskallen, an
Vedoy 11.9m patch, lies 1 mile offshore, 2.75 miles NE of Yttertuven.
8.4A (67°53'N., 12°59'E.), at the mouth of the Avanndet River,
tidewater levels are among the greatest along the entire Norwe- 4 miles NE of Yttertuven, Tind, and Bogen, are three fishing
gian coast. In a storm from the SW, the water level may be sig- villages with a common entrance. They are suitable only for
nificantly above the anticipated values in the Tide Table. small vessels and local knowledge is required.
8.4The passage W and SW of Lofoten, the continental shelf 8.4Reine (67°56'N., 13°06'E.), one of the principal fishing sta-
generally has depths of less than 200m with some shoals close tions in Lofoten, is situated 3.5 miles NNE of Bogen. Local
to land. The slope in the W is very steep. knowledge is necessary for entering the harbor, which has a
8.4The coastal current, running N to NE, dominates the current channel dredged to 4.9m. The deepest berths are 3.9 to 5.9m.
conditions. Tidal currents reinforce this effect with rising water There is secure anchorage in the harbor, in depths of 20 to
Pub. 182
By Kent Wang, via Wikimedia Commons

8.4
8.4 Vaeroy
24m. constricted to a width of about 183m between the light and a

danger NE.
Reine—Contact Information 8.5Nappstrommen (Nappstraumen), the passage between Flak-
stadoya and Vestvagoya, is entered from Vestfjorden in approx-
Telephone 47-76-053100 imate position 68°02'N, 13°25'E, and leads N to the vicinity of
E-mail hydro.glomfjord@hydro.com Nappholmen (68°08'N., 13°28'E.).
Web site http://www.reinehavn.no 8.5Gapet, a narrow channel about 1 mile long, gives access to
the open sea from Nappholmen. Nappstrommen and Gapet can
be navigated by large vessels.
8.5 From Reine, the coast of Moskenesoya trends NNE 8.5The dangers in the S entrance of Nappstrommen may best be
for 4.25 miles to Kunna (68°00'N., 13°14'E.), a narrow island, seen on the chart. Most of the dangers within the passage lie on
96m high; then the S coast of Flakstadoya and the S end of the E side of the fairway, leaving a deep and clear channel up
Vestvagoya trend NE 8.5 miles to Ballstad. The coast in this ar- the W side.
ea is much indented with fjords and there are numerous off-ly- 8.5Gapet (68°09'N., 13°28'E.) is entered close E of Napphol-
ing dangers. men. The white sector of the light on Hudholmen bearing be-
8.5The entrance to Kirkefjorden, about 1 mile N of Reine, is en- tween 326° and 336°, ahead, leads through the fairway.
cumbered with islets and rocks. Strong winds blow out of the 8.5Northbound vessels from Gapet pass E of Hudholmen.
fjord. 8.5Anchorage may be taken in Haugbukten, in 25 to 30m, clay
8.5A channel, spanned by a bridge 1.75 miles within its en- and sand, in a position about 1 mile ENE of the light at Nap-
trance, separates the E side of Moskenesoya from Flakstadoya. pholmen. It is inadvisable to anchor off the N shore of the bay
The bridge has a vertical clearance of 15.9m. owing to heavy squalls which blow down from Offersoham-
8.5Kunna lies in the entrance to Skjelfjorden, which penetrates men, 1 mile N of the center of the bay. Vessels are cautioned of
the S side of Flakstadoya to a distance of about 4 miles N. the submarine cables located in the vicinity of Napp Light.
8.5Skjelfjorden is navigable by deep-draft vessels as far as St- 8.5Buksnesfjorden indents Vestvagoya to a distance of about 4
jerndalen (68°02'N., 13°14'E.), 1.5 miles within the entrance; miles. It is entered NE of Svinoya (68°03'N., 13°33'E.), which
however, a shoal spot, with a depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.3 mile is about 3 miles ENE of the entrance to Nappstrommen. A light
ENE of the NE side of Kunna. is situated on Svinoya.
8.5Nusfjorden, entered about 3 miles NE of Skjelfjorden, pene- 8.5Ballstad (68°04'N., 13°42'E.) is an important fishing port,
trates Flakstadoya for about 1 mile. The entrance to the fjord is
Pub. 182
By Nanosmile (Own work), via Wikimedia Commons

8.4
8.4 Reine
protected by moles, situated on the W side of Buksnesfjorden, 8.6Stamsund (68°07'N., 13°51'E.) is situated on the SE side of
1.5 miles N of Svinoya. There are depths of 7m in the approach Vestvagoya, close E of Steinetind. Stamsund is a large fishing
and 4m in the inner harbor. The deepest berths are 4.3 to 5.1m. district with an advantageous location with respect to the fish-
The harbor is suitable for small vessels. ing fields. Good approaches to these fields are easily recog-
nized due to the many characteristic peaks which can be used
8.6 Brandsholmen (68°05'N., 13°39'E.) is situated on the for alignment purposes.
E side of the entrance to Buksnesfjorden. The island is 100m 8.6Depths—Limitations.—Stamsund is protected by breakwa-
high and is the highest in the area. It is impossible to mistake ters. The harbor handles passengers and bulk cargo.
because of its precipitous W side. 8.6Hurtigruten Quay can accommodate vessels up to 188m in
8.6From Brandsholmen, the coast of Vestvagoya trends 3 miles length with a maximum draft of 6.1m draft. Cargo handled at
ENE; the SE side of the island extends about 14 miles NE to this quay is ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, breakbulk, and bunkers.
the island of Gimsoya, on the W side of Austvagoya. 8.6The W entrance from Rokkiva has a controlling depth of 9m.
8.6Urberget (68°04'N., 13°43'E.), 335m high, rises in the SE Langsundet, the E entrance, with a controlling depth of 5m and
part of Vestvagoya, 1.25 miles ENE of Brandsholmen. It is eas- a power line with an overhead clearance of 23m at its N end, is
ily identified by its darker appearance and though its summit is used by vessels with a maximum draft of 3.7m,
always snow-capped, its precipitous slopes hold little snow. 8.6Pilotage.—Local pilots are available for mooring and warp-
Steinetind, 517m high, and pointed in shape, is situated about 3 ing large vessels.
miles NNE of Urberget. Dalstind, 461m high, and Horntind, 8.6Anchorage.—Anchorage is available in Rakvika, SW of the
361m high, lie 6.5 and 8.5 miles NE, respectively, from harbor area, in 17-29m, good holding ground, but it is uncom-
Steinetind. They are the most conspicuous hills on a dark ridge fortable in S and SW gales and in squalls from NW.
of hills that extend NNE from Dalstind.
8.6Henningsvaerstraumen (Henningsvaer Strommen) is a broad 8.7 Henningsvaer (68°09'N., 14°13'E.) is a large offshore
and deep opening between the SE side of Vestvagoya and the fishing station, situated in an island group of the same name,
SW end of Austvagoya. This sea area extends 10 miles to the off the SW end of Austvagoya. The harbor is centered on Hel-
NNE, which in turn leads to the open sea. landsoya.
8.6The area is difficult to navigate due to the many dangers, 8.7It was reported that the main island of the group was joined
which may be seen on the chart. The area is one of the princi- to the small island NNE by a bridge, which in turn is joined to
pal fishing grounds in Lofoten. Engoya by a further bridge which extends to the mainland. It is
Pub. 182
The Gimsoystraumen Bridge

8.7
8.7 Henningsvaer
reported that a conspicuous lattice mast stands at the S end of miles W of Henningsvaer, a channel, obstructed by islets and
Henningsvaer. rocks, leads about 6 miles NNE between Vestvagoya and Aust-
8.7The principal channels in the harbor approach have depths of vagoya to the vicinity of Gimsoya.
17m. A steamship quay has a length of 45m and alongside Gimsoystraumen (68°16'N., 14°15'E.), between Gimsoya
8.7
depths of 8 to 11.3m. There is about 1 mile of quayage which and Austvagoya, connects Henningsvaerstraumen with the
is provided with a large number of small cranes. open sea. It can be used by moderate size vessels and is easy to
8.7Local pilots are available on request to the harbor assistant. navigate.
8.7From an approximate position of 68°09'N, 14°08'E, 1.75 Gimsoystraumen is spanned by a bridge, with a vertical
8.7
Pub. 182
clearance of 30m and a horizontal clearance of 90m. tion is required due to the reported presence of fish farms in the
8.7From Henningsvaerstraumen, the coast of Austvagoya trends harbor.
about 11 miles ENE to the entrance of Ostnesfjorden (Austnes- 8.8Pilots may be arranged through the pilot station at Svolvaer
fjorden). when a 24-hour advance notice is given.
8.7Off Henningsvaer, at the W end of this coast, patches of 14.6 8.8Orsvag (68°12'N., 14°25'E.), situated 2.5 miles NNE of the
to 27m lie up to 5 miles offshore. Moholmen, marked by a light light on Moholmen, is the best and roomiest anchorage in the
situated, is located 2 miles offshore. The dangers that comprise area for vessels of moderate draft, and is easily approached in
this group may best be seen on the chart. all weather. The anchorage is in depths of 7 to 8m, sand and
8.7During onshore gales, the waters around Moholmen and the clay. Orsvag Hamn Light is a perch marking a below-water
islets 1 to 2 miles NW are noted for the strength of flow. In rock.
such conditions, a violent race occurs in this area and passage
becomes difficult. 8.9 Svolvaer (68°14'N., 14°35'E.) (World Port Index No.
21900), the largest and best protected harbor along the Lofoten
8.8 Skrova (68°10'N., 14°41'E.), an isolated island, coast, lies on the SE coast of Austvagoya, 4 miles NE of
stands out because of its distinctive color and lower elevation. Orsvag.
The largest island of the group rises to a height of 313m; it ap- 8.9Svolvaer, the capital of the Lofoten Islands, is situated on a
pears as a haystack against Store Mola and Lille Mola (Litle peninsula and on several adjoining islets. Some of these islets
Molla) behind. are connected with the peninsula and each other by jetties and
8.8Skrova Light (Skraven Light) is shown from a prominent bridges.
tower 24m in height. A radiobeacon is situated at the tower. 8.9Depths—Limitations.—The port has three harbors. Vessels
8.8Skrova Havn (68°10'N., 14°40'E.) (World Port Index No. up to 158m in length with a maximum draft of 9.1m draft can
21910) is situated in the island group of Skrova. Some of the be accommodated in the harbor. See the table titled Svolvaer—
islands are connected by moles. Berth Information.
8.8The harbor is spacious, with several good quays on both 8.9Submarine cables are laid in many parts of the harbors, as
sides of the strait. The quays, which are up to 90m long, have shown on the chart.
depths of 1.7 to 4.9m alongside. Mooring rings are installed 8.9Pilotage.—Pilotage is available. Pilots should be ordered via
around the harbor. SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot
8.8There are several good anchorages within the harbor area. Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards in posi-
The best anchorage is located in the roadstead N of St. Ram- tion 68°11.0'N, 14°33.0'E (on request) or position 68°13.0'N,
noya, where there are depths of 16 to 30m, sand bottom. Cau- 14°53.3'E (Molldora).
Svolvaer—Berthing Information
Osanpollen
Skarvik A/S Concrete Jetty 50m 3.7-5.9m —
Skarvik A/S Concrete 80m 6.5-11.5m —
Municipal Concert 80m 9.9-10.5m —
Ferry Terminal 80m — —
Concrete 36m 5.0-5.9m Disused tank facility.
Main Harbor
Industrial Concrete 80m 6.9-8.2m —
Wood and Concrete 95m 3.0-4.4m —
Bekkholmen 75m 3.3-7.8m —
District Boat 214m 4.9-10.2m —
Norde Concrete 1 30m 1.9-5.0m —
Norde Concrete 2 90m 0.9m —
Fish Factory 10m 3.8-4.8m —
Bergs Sonner 68m 3.9-6.2m —
Lofoten Not og Tral 102m 3.9-6.2m —
Norslid A/S 60m 3.0-4.5m —
Pub. 182
8.9 The Raftsundet Bridge from S
Sveleia (Sveleden) (68°11'N., 14°42'E.) is a passage be-

8.9 rocks lying about 1 mile SE of Hinnoya, and 3 miles W of the
tween the islets lying N of Skrova and those of Lille Molla; it entrance to Ofotfjorden.
connects Holen with Vestfjorden.The channels through Sveleia Several fjords indent this coast; the entire area is fronted by
8.10
are well-marked and easily navigated. dangers which are best seen on the chart. Vessels enroute from
Vessels of moderate size which are unable to enter Svolvaer
8.9 Skrova to Ofotfjorden should steer along the SE side of Vest-
may anchor in Sveleia, as indicated on the chart, in 16 to 30m, fjorden in this area.
sand. Flovika (68°15'N., 14°57'E.), a deep body of water clear of
8.10
Molldoren leads between Lille Molla (68°12'N., 14°46'E.)

8.9 dangers in the fairway, is formed between Store Molla, on the
and Store Molla, about 0.5 mile NNE. W side, and Arstein and Hinnoya, on the E. This passage leads
Brettesnes (68°14'N., 14°51'E.), a fishery harbor in a cove at
8.9 from Vestfjorden to Rafsundet, about 7 miles NNW. The dan-
the S end of Store Molla, is approached from Molldora (Mol- gers off Arstein may best be seen on the chart.
dora) or from Vestfjorden. The harbor is exposed to mountain Raftsundet (68°23'N., 15°05'E.) extends about 11 miles
8.10
squalls, and a considerable sea is raised by S gales. NNE from its junction with Oyhellesundet and Flovika, close
N of Store Molla.
8.10 Holen (Hola) (68°14'N., 14°39'E.) is formed between Raftsundet is formed between Austvagoya and Hinnoya. It is
8.10
Austvagoya, on the W, and Lille Molla, on the E. Skjoldvaer, narrow and comparatively deep and clear. The channel, which
on the SE side of the passage and NW of Lille Molla, is a is used by coastal steamers and tourist vessels, is not difficult
group of islets and rocks lying up to 1.5 miles off Lille Molla, to navigate and is well-marked by aids. The channel will ac-
N of Skrova. This group should be avoided. commodate vessels drawing 7.3m and about 116m in length.
Kvalbaken, a danger on the NW side of Holen, is marked by
8.10 The Raftsundet Bridge, a fixed bridge with a vertical clear-
8.10
a light and lies about 2 miles ENE of Rodholmane. ance of 45m, spans Raftsundet about 0.7 mile SSW of the N
Austnesfjorden (68°17'N., 14°43'E.) extends about 6 miles
8.10 entrance to the passage.
N from the inner end of Holen and is free from dangers for Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Raftsundet set S be-
8.10
about 4 miles. Farther N there are several shoals, which are tween half tides at fall and rise. In Trangstraumen, the narrows
best seen on the chart. Heavy squalls are experienced in the between 3.5 and 5 miles S of the N entrance, the current has a
fjord. velocity of 4 to 5 knots, but with a S gale the N current may at-
Oyhellesundet, the passage NE of Holen, separates Store
8.10 tain a velocity of 6 or 7 knots. It should be noted that in Trang-
Molla from Austvagoya; it is connected at its NE end with straumen, the S current sets toward the E shore and the N
Raftsundet. current sets toward the W shore. A light stands about 0.15 mile
From Skrova, the NW side of Vestfjorden trends 16 miles
8.10 ESE of the bridge; a submarine cable crosses Raftsundet in the
ENE to Rotvaer (68°22'N., 15°56'E.), a group of islets and vicinity of the bridge.
Pub. 182
There is anchorage for large vessels with local knowledge, in

8.10 sen (67°17'N., 14°12'E.), an isolated patch with depths of less
the SE part of Raftsundet, in 20 to 42m, about 1 mile ENE of than 5.5m, situated 1.5 miles NNW of Store Svartoksen.
the N extremity of Store Molla. An overhead cable, with a ver- The white sector of the light on Store Svartoksen, bearing
8.12
tical clearance of 55m, spans Raftsundet near its N entrance. astern, leads NW of Store Hjartoy and W of Lopsholmen
(67°20'N., 14°24'E.), 2 miles NE of Store Hjartoy.
8.11 Oksfjorden, the next fjord E of Flovika, penetrates Vessels proceeding from Bodo to Landegodefjorden may
8.12
about 11 miles N into Hinnoya. Between its entrance and Vest- proceed through Hjartoysundet, formed between Store Hjartoy
fjorden lies an extensive area of islets and shoals, including the and Lille Hjartoy, or around Hjartoydragan and proceed in the
islet group Risvaer (68°15'N., 15°09'E.) and Svellingen white sector of the light on Store Svartoksen.
(68°18'N., 15°18'E.). Within that area are channels and anchor- After the vessel has cleared Lopsholmen, they may steer in
8.12
ages suitable only for those with local knowledge. the white sector of Bjornoy Light (67°25'N., 14°26'E.).
Oksfjorden is connected to Vestfjorden by a channel from
8.11 In heavy weather, it may be preferable to pass 0.4 mile off
8.12
Flovika, which passes close along the E side of Arstein, and by Bjornoy then between Steinsgrunnen, a 20m patch 0.6 mile N
Smitskjaerleien (68°20'N., 15°25'E.), which passes S of the of Bjornoy, and Mistgrunnen, a 19.8m patch, 0.75 mile NE.
SE part of Hinnoya. From the vicinity of Bjornoy, the route continues NNW to-
8.12
Oksfjorden can be navigated by large vessels for a distance

8.11 ward a position W of Utgrunnen (67°42'N., 14°17'E.), then N
of about 8 miles to the islet of Husjordoy. or NNE into Vestfjorden.
Kanstadfjorden is entered between Offersoy (68°19'N.,
8.11 The white sector of the light on Bjornoy, bearing astern,
8.12
15°37'E.), a small low-lying peninsula 4.5 miles E of Smitsk- leads W of Ytre Skallen (67°28'N., 14°25'E.), a 4.9m patch 3
jaerleien, and Rotvaer, 7 miles NE. It indents Hinnoya for a miles NNW of the light, and E of Oyensve, 10.5 miles NNW,
distance of about 10 miles. which usually breaks.
Hokfjorden extends 2.5 miles N from the inner end of Kan-
8.11 From the vicinity of Oyensve, the summit of Lopsfellet
8.12
stadfjorden; Indrefjorden is the continuation of Kanstadfjorden (67°19'N., 14°29'E.) in range with an isthmus on Landegode,
on the NE side. Erikstadfjorden, suitable only for small boats, 0.4 mile WNW of Bjornoy Light, bearing 167.5°, passes 0.4
extends NW from Kanstadfjorden NNE of its junction with mile W of Utgrunnen, and then into Vestfjorden.
Hokfjorden.
Rinnoyvag (68°22'N., 15°46'E.), situated on the W side of
8.11
Inner Fjords—Saltfjorden to Ofotfjorden
Kanstadfjorden, 4.5 miles NNE of Offersoy, has a berth at the
timber quay, 23m long, with depths of 5.5 to 7.7m alongside. 8.13 The fjords on the SE side of Vestfjorden, known as the
Anchorage has been taken in Kanstadfjorden, with good pro-
8.11 coast of Salten, run in all directions and are frequently connect-
tection from N and W winds, in 48m, with the light on Aspe- ed by low-lying marshy or lake filled depressions, so that the
neset (68°25'N., 15°47'E.) bearing 345°, 1.4 miles distant. entire coast is a maze of intricate channels between islands and
peninsulas.
Landegodefjorden and Vestfjorden In places, steep ranges of mountains, separated by valleys,
8.13
lead away from the shores of the fjords, which are broken and
8.12 Because of the shallow channel in Grotoysundet, for have several large, low, boggy peninsulas.
about 40 miles N of Bodo, Indreleia is of little use to large ves- Some of the fjords penetrate so deeply they almost reach the
8.13
sels. This part of Indreleia merges into Vestfjorden through Swedish border.
Breisundet; Indreleia proper does not resume until the vicinity Indreleia diverges from the main route from Bodo to Vest-
8.13
of Lodingen, at the entrance to Tjeldsundet, is reached. fjorden off Lopsholmen, keeping to the E side of Landegode-
Landegodefjorden is formed between Landegode (67°25'N.,
8.12 fjorden and continuing NE through Karlsoyfjorden. There are
14°20'E.) and the mainland about 4 miles SE. It is encumbered many below-water rocks and dangers which exist in Landego-
by islets, reefs, and shoal areas, whose positions are best seen defjorden and must be avoided. Karlsoyfjorden is deep and free
on the chart. from dangers in the fairway.
Winds—Weather.—The area between Bodo and Landegode
8.12 Mistfjorden lies E of Indreleia, about 6 miles ENE of Bjor-
8.13
is exposed to violent squalls, especially in winter. East winds, noy. The fjord is surrounded by high, massive, and bare moun-
with strong and frequent gusts, are liable to blow off the main- tains.
land; NW winds are variable in strength with heavy squalls off Kvanholmen (67°27'N., 14°40'E.), marked by a light, is sit-
8.13
the high peaks of Landegode. uated on the S side of the entrance to Mistfjorden. From its en-
Tides—Currents.—The tidal current in Landegodefjorden
8.12 trance, the fjord extends about 10 miles E, terminating in
sets NE with the rising tide and SW with the falling tide. Nordfjorden.
Aspect.—Landegode Light (67°27'N., 14°23'E.) is shown
8.12 Several shoal spots lie up to 0.5 mile W of Kvanholmen and
8.13
from a tower, 29m in height, standing on the islet of Eggeloysa, a rock, awash, lies on the N side of Mistfjorden, 0.75 mile E of
close N of the N end of Landegode. the island.
Tennholmen Light (67°18'N., 13°30'E.) is shown from a
8.12 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor at the head of
8.13
low tower on a building, 14m in height, standing on the largest Nordfjorden, in a depth of 29m, sand.
islet of the group. There is a helicopter landing platform at the Karlsoyfjorden (67°31'N., 14°40'E.) is formed between
8.13
light. Karlsoyvaer, on the NW, and the mainland, on the SE. The fair-
Vessels proceeding from Saltfjorden to Landegodefjorden
8.12 way leads NE to Folla.
should steer to pass NW of Store Svartoksen and SE of Hau- Indreleia leads NNE from position 67°29'N, 14°35'E, pass-
8.13
Pub. 182
ing through Karlsoyfjorden towards Helloyskjeret. Nordfolla may be entered by keeping the white sector of the
8.14
The white sector of the light on Bjornoy, bearing astern,

8.13 light on Helloyskjaer (67°37'N., 14°47'E.), astern, which will
leads into Karlsoyfjorden NW of the islets and dangers off the lead between the dangers off Hjartoy and the NW shore. A
mainland; the white sector of the light on Helloyskjeret then mid-channel course may be steered to the head of the fjord.
leads toward the N entrance of the fjord. It is advisable to keep
to the E side of this sector as the W sector passes close to Karl- 8.15 Sorfolla (67°32'N., 15°16'E.) extends SE from the E
soyvaer. end of Folla. Several smaller fjords extend SW, S, and NE from
Kjerringoy (67°31'N., 14°46'E.) (World Port Index No.
8.13 Sorfolla.
22270) is located on the SE shore of Karlsoyfjorden. There is a Eidekjosen and Navelsfjorden have a common entrance off
8.15
wooden quay, 38m long, with depths of 3.2 to 5.2m, located at the W side of the fjord, 4 miles within its entrance. Nordre
the port. A light beacon is shown on Kjerringoy. Oygardskjeret (67°32'N., 15°08'E.) lies in the entrance.
Anchorage is available 137m SE of the beacon, in depths of
8.13 Sjunkfjorden extends 5.25 miles SSW from its entrance, 3.5
8.15
5 to 10m, sand and clay bottom. miles SE of Nordre Oygardskjeret.

There are anchorages in Sjunkfjorden, sand and clay, 3 miles
8.15
8.14 Folla, a large fjord complex, is entered in the vicinity WSW and 4.5 miles SW from the light on the E entrance point
of Helloyskjeret, and is approached through Karlsoyfjorden or Leirfjorden (67°32'N., 15°37'E.) extends about 11 miles NE
8.15
from W by passing N of Slovaer (67°36'N., 14°39'E.). from Sorfolla, 6.25 miles E of Sjunkfjorden. It appears to be
Abreast of Hjartoya (67°39'N., 15°05'E.), about 6 miles
8.14 free of charted dangers in the fairway.
ENE of Helloyskjeret, Folda divides into two branches, each Storvika (67°31'N., 15°36'E.) affords good anchorage, in
8.15
having several arms; Sorfolla extends about 20 miles SE and clay and sand, on the S side of Leirfjorden, 2 miles within the
Nordfolla extends about 15 miles NE. entrance.
The W approach to Folda from Vestfjorden can be made by
8.14 Lakselv (67°22'N., 15°36'E.) (World Port Index No. 22295)
8.15
steering in the white sector of the light on Helloyskjeret, pass- situated on the W side of Sorfolla, near its head, 8.5 miles S of
ing S of Skarholman (67°39'N., 14°28'E.), 7.5 miles WNW of the entrance to Leirfjorden, has a smelting works. To accom-
the light, then S of Breifallet, a 7.9m patch 3 miles ESE of modate cruise ships a hydro pier 3extends 300m to an offshore
Skarholman. This course will lead close N of Ytre Raholmen anchorage for cruise ship passengers.
1.75 miles SE of Breifallet. Then steer E into Folla to pass N of Sorfolla is well marked by lights. The white sectors of these
8.15
Helloyskjeret. lights lead through the various channels clear of charted dan-
Oyensve (67°35'N., 14°17'E.), which breaks, are the farthest
8.14 gers. See the table titled Lakselv—Berth Information.
W of the dangers off-lying Karlsoyvaer, about 12 miles W of Sagfjorden (67°38'N., 15°16'E.) is entered from Folla
8.15
Helloyskjeret. through Refsfjorden N of the island of Prestmasoy, and from

Nordfolla (67°45'N., 15°17'E.) leads NE from Folla. Its E
8.14 Sorfolla through Masoysundet, E of the island.
continuations are known as Reinvikfjorden and Morsvik- Anchorage may be taken off the NE side of Prestmasoy, in
8.15
fjorden. Store Belgkjosen and Lille Belgkjosen have a common 18 to 23m, sand, 1.5 miles SE of Mulneset, the N entrance
entrance off the N side of the fjord, 10.5 miles NE of Hjartoy. point to Sagfjorden. There is also anchorage 2.5 miles E of the
They are icebound in the winter. Vinkfjorden leads from the SE point, in 40m, sand.
side of Nordfolla 6.5 miles NE of Hjartoy; Stavfjorden extends There is an anchorage 6 miles E of Mulneset, off Sagfjorden,
8.15
from its inner end. in 22 to 30m, sand and shingle.

The fjord is open toward the SW, with winds from the W and
8.14
SW. East gales are most frequent in the winter. 8.16 Indreleia leads from the vicinity of Helloyskjeret, 3
In Nordfolla, the tidal currents usually flow outward, but in
8.14 miles NW across the outer part of Folla, then about 10 miles N
calm weather, if the tributary rivers are low, the current may set across Brennvika and Andholmsfjorden, to the vicinity of Sild-
into the branches with the rising tide. skjeret (67°48'N., 14°44'E.), in the SW approach to Gro-
Anchorage may be taken off Nordfold (67°46'N., 15°14'E.),
8.14 toysundet.
in depths of 14 to 18m, clay and sand. Anchorage is also avail- Vessels may proceed from the vicinity of Helloyskjeret by
8.16
able off Stavnes, 5 miles E of Nordfold, between two charted keeping the white sector of that light, which will lead SW of
6m patches. It is a well-used anchorage, but is exposed to SW Kjopmannen (67°39'N., 14°43'E.) and into the white sector of
winds. Ola-Persoya Light (67°40'N., 14°43'E.).
Lakselv—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Lakselv Seakwalk
Concrete Wharf 20m — — 12.0m — Cruise vessels.
Cruise vessels. No beam restrictions. Cruise ves-
Seawalk Pier — 15.0m 300m 12.0m 150,000 dwt sels tie up to two mooring buoys and passengers
disembark via an extending floating pier.
Pub. 182
During W gales, breakers extend some distance W from

8.16 and is entered from Indreleia or from the W through Breisun-
Kjopmannen and should be given a wide berth. det. Skitenfjorden is its E continuation.
From Kjopmannen, steer in the white sector of Ola-Persoya
8.16 A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 25m and a navigable
8.18
Light and enter Ytre Vettoysundet passing, E of the light. width of 40m, spans the narrows between Alstadoya
When entering Ytre Vettoysundet, care is necessary to pass W (67°54'N., 15°11'E.) and Bogoya, 183m S.
of the rocks, awash, lying from about 0.1 mile SSE to 0.2 mile The E end of Skitenfjorden opens into Sagfjorden.
8.18
ESE of the light. Care must be used to pass E of the danger 0.3 Tides—Currents.—In Flagsundet, the tidal current flows in
8.18
mile N of Ola-Persoya Light. the direction of the channel. Strong squalls sometimes blow
Brennvika indents the coast about 4 miles from a position
8.16 down from the mountains and are particularly severe about 5
about 2 miles NNE of Ola-Persoya Light. miles within the W entrance and near Bogoya. The current is
Leinesfjorden, next N of Brennvika, is an E continuation of
8.16 strongest at Vikskjer. Flagsundet is limited to vessels with local
Andholmfjorden. It terminates in two branches, Saursfjorden, knowledge.
on the N, and Botnfjorden, on the S. An entrance channel off
Leines is well marked, but is suitable for use only with good lo- 8.19 Skagstadsundet (67°58'N., 15°10'E.) is entered from
cal knowledge. The many encumbrances may best be seen on Vestfjorden between Foroya (68°01'N., 15°07'E.) and Orneset,
the chart. 1.25 miles ESE, and leads 8 miles S and E between Engeloya
From the vicinity of Ola-Persoya Light, the route of Indre-
8.16 and Lundoya to the junction with Skitenfjorden, Okssundet,
leia leads across Brennvika to a position W of Skjaholmen and Sagfjorden.
(67°43'N., 14°43'E.). The green sector of the light, bearing be- Dangers are charted in the entrance E of Foroya and near the
8.19
tween 167° and 178°, astern, leads W of this islet. center of the fairway about 5 miles within the entrance.
When W of Skjaholmen, steer toward the rear range light on
8.16 Okssundet (68°00'N., 15°18'E.) is entered from Vestfjorden
8.19
Steinsholmen, 1.5 miles N of Skjalholmen, passing E of the between Oksnesodden (68°03'N., 15°14'E.) and Dalshamaren,
foul ground 0.5 mile SSW of the range light, then W of the a point 1.5 miles NE. It leads 7 miles SSE between Lundoya
danger which extends 183m SSW from Steinsholmen and Hamaroy to the junction with Skagstadsundet and Sag-
(67°44'N., 14°43'E.). fjorden.
From Steinsholmen, the range lights in line 186°, astern, in-
8.16 There is usually a N flow of current on the E side of the
8.19
dicate the fairway of Indreleia as it crosses the inner part of sound and a S flow on the W side of the sound.
Andholmfjorden. This track leads between the light marking Squalls from the mountains can occur during S winds.
8.19
Leiskjer, 1.75 miles N, and foul ground marked by a perch The white sector of the light on Oksnessodden through N in-
8.19
183m W of the light, then NNE to pass E of Sildskjeret, 2.5 dicates clear water in the approach from Vestfjorden.
miles farther N. There are many dangers in this area which are Okssundet is deep; however, a mid-channel course will lead
8.19
best seen on the chart. clear of any coastal dangers.
8.17 Grotoysundet (67°50'N., 14°46'E.) lies between Gro-

toya and the mainland E. The narrow shallow channel through
it connects the inner part of Andholmfjorden with Breisundet
3.5 miles NNW, and Vestfjorden.
Local knowledge is necessary in Grotoysundet and the use of
8.17
a local pilot is recommended for the largest vessels that can use
the channel. The channel is 30m wide, with a dredged to a
depth of 4.9m.
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Grotoysundet are
8.17
strong. The tide levels at Grotoy (67°50'N., 14°46'E.) on the

NE end of Grotoya are 3m at MHWS and 0.5m at MLWS.
Depth gauges are placed at Hartvikgrunnen Light
8.17
(67°49.2'N., 14°44.2'E.), for northbound vessels and at Kat-

tlorten Light (67°50.6'N., 14°47.4'E.), for southbound vessels.
From Kattlorten Light, three channels lead NW into Breis-
8.17
undet (67°54'N., 14°43'E.). Helligholmleia, the W channel, is

the safest and deepest, but it is tortuous. Breisundet is about 3
miles distant from Kattlorten Light. Vestfjorden is entered By Karin Beate Nosterund/norden.org via Wikimedia Commons
8.19
from this pass. Tranoy Light

8.19
Skotsfjorden is entered about 1 mile NE of Kattlorten Light

8.17
through a rock-encumbered entrance, with a channel about 8.20 Sagfjorden (67°58'N., 15°36'E.) is entered between
46m wide between the reefs on either side. This fjord should be Bolsoygalten (67°57'N., 15°24'E.), at the S extremity of Hu-
entered only by vessels with local knowledge. soyvaer, and Skranstad, 2 miles SE. It extends about 13 miles E
Anchorage is available at the head of the fjord, in depths of 9
8.17 and SE along the S side of Husoya and Finnoya. The fjord is
to 22m, and in the bay close W, in depths of 11 to 17m. deep with a marine farm and submarine cables best seen on a
chart.
8.18 Flagsundet (67°55'N., 15°00'E.) leads S of Engeloya Anchorage at Store Lagmansvika (67°55'N., 15°53'E.), at
8.20
Pub. 182
the head of Sagfjorden on the E side, may be taken, in 15 to 16°07'E.) and Klubben, 0.4 mile SSW.
17m, sand. There is anchorage, in 12.8 to 14.6m, clay, 0.9 mile SW of
8.21
From Dalshamaren, the N entrance point of Okssundet, the

8.20 Bessfjordneset, and, in 20 to 22m, 1 mile SSW of the point, for
NW coast of Hamaroy trends 7.5 miles NNE to Selsoya vessels with local knowledge.
(68°09'N., 15°29'E.), then 3.75 miles ENE to Eggloya Drag (68°03'N., 16°05'E.) (World Port Index No. 22120) is a
8.21
(68°11'N., 15°38'E.), which lies close off the Tranoya peninsu- natural coastal harbor which opens off the W side of Tys-
la, the N extremity of Hamaroy. fjorden, 8.25 miles S of Bessfjordneset. There is an angled tim-
Tranoy (68°11'N., 15°40'E.) (World Port Index No. 22160)
8.20 ber quay in Drag, with a berth 23m long, with depths of 4.6 to
consists of a cove on the E side of the peninsula. The timber 4.9m alongside. The timber quays at the feldspar quarry has
quay is 74m long, with depths of 2 to 9m, and is situated in the depths of up to 6.5m alongside.
NW corner of the cove. There is an anchorage W of the light, with mooring rings, in
8.21
A foul bay, 0.75 miles SSE of Tranoy, provides a good an-

8.20 clay and sand. A slight swell sets in with N winds.
chorage, in 18 to 40m, sand, sheltered from W, but is open to N
and NE winds. 8.22 Hellemofjorden is entered from Tysfjorden and ex-
There is a pilot station located at Tranoy. Mariners are ad-
8.20 tends about 13 miles SSE from its entrance between Helland-
vised when approaching the pilot boarding place to pass well S neset (68°02'N., 16°09'E.), 2.25 miles SE of Drag and
of the lighted buoy located at position 68°14'N, 15°36'E, which Hestneset 1 mile ESE. An overhead cable, with a vertical clear-
marks a shoal area. ance of 38m, spans the fjord at Hestneset.
The pilot boarding areas are located in position 68°12.7'N,
8.20 A similar cable, with a vertical clearance of 240m, spans the
8.22
15°35.7'E and position 68°18.4'N, 15°55.7'E. Contact should fjord 9 miles within the entrance.
be made on VHF channel 13 for boarding arrangements. The fjord is deep throughout, but on its E side, about 2 miles
8.22
A channel leads W of Tannoya (68°09'N., 15°48'E.) into a

8.20 within Hestneset, foul ground, with a charted depth of 1.8m,
long inlet between Tranoya and the mainland 3 miles E. extends 0.4 mile offshore. An islet lies about 0.3 mile off the E
Tannoysundet, W of Tannoya, leads S between Tannoya and
8.20 shore 6 miles farther S, reducing the fairway to a width of 0.45
Hamaroy. A 10m patch lies in the fairway off the W extremity mile.
of Tannoya. Local knowledge is required in the channel. Skrovkjosen (68°15'N., 16°19'E.), a bay on the NE side of
8.22
Presteid (68°05'N., 15°40'E.) lies on the W side of Presteid-

8.20 Tysfjorden, is deep and free from dangers. Its N entrance point,
fjorden 3.5 miles SSW of Tannoysundet. This harbor is the calling Solvneset, lies about 4 miles SE of the E entrance point of Tys-
place for Hamaroy, the principal village on the island. There is a fjorden. Brennsoyklubben, the S entrance point of the bay, lies
timber quay, 26m long, with depths of 5.8 to 7.8m alongside. An- 0.9 mile SSE of Solvneset.
chorage may be taken, in 30 to 50m, clay, NW of Presteid. Anchorage.—Anchorage with mooring rings, may be taken,
8.22
in 40m, clay and sand, off Ulvik (68°34'N., 16°20'E.) (World

8.21 Tysfjorden (68°06'N., 16°15'E.) is the name for a Port Index No. 21970) in the SE part of Skrovkjosen.
group of fjords which extends for about 30 miles SSE from a Anchorage may be taken, in 20m, off Eidbukta, in the N part
8.22
position 10.5 miles NE of Eggloysa. The fjords are deep and of Skrovkjosen, 1.5 miles N of Ulvik. Local knowledge is re-
several rivers discharge into them. quired.
The tidal currents usually set out of Tysfjorden, attaining a
8.21 Haukoyfjorden opens off the E side of Tysfjorden, about 3
8.22
maximum velocity of about 3 knots. miles SE of Skrovkjosen. It is entered between Indre Skar-
An extensive reef lies between Bremneset (68°17'N.,
8.21 bergneset (68°13'N., 16°12'E.) and Skjerneset, 4 miles SSE.
16°09'E.), the NE entrance point to Tysfjorden, and Bavoya an The fjord is deep and clear of dangers, however, Haukoygrun-
island 2.75 miles NNW. Storboen lies at the W end of this reef. nen, with a charted depth of 2.5m, lies in the entrance 1.25
Bremnesskjaer (68°17'N., 16°08'E.), a drying shoal, lies on
8.21 miles NNW of Skjerneset.
the NE side of the entrance, 0.75 mile S of Bremneset. The inner end of the fjord divides into the N and S arms,
8.22
Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile offshore off the SW en-
8.21 namely, Stefjorden and Tommerasfjorden. From the latter arm,
trance to Tysfjorden. Sandvikskallen, with a charted depth of Fuglefjorden extends 2.25 miles SSE.
4.9m, lies 1.75 miles NW of the light at Korsnes. Stefjorden extends E and SE from the NE end of Haukoy-
8.22
The white sector of various lights lead from Vestfjorden to-

8.21 fjorden. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway, and the
ward and into Tysfjorden. shores nearly everywhere are steep-to.
Korsnes (68°15'N., 16°04'E.) (World Port Index No. 22140)
8.21 At Haukoya (68°12'N., 16°24'E.), on the S side of the en-
8.22
lies close within the entrance of Tysfjorden, on the SW side. It trance to Stefjorden, there is a berth at a stone and concrete
is protected from the N but a sea is raised in it by a SE gale quay 26m long, with depths of 9.4 to 9.7m alongside.
which is known locally as a Tysfjorden Wind. Anchorage is available off Haukoya as shown on the chart.
8.22
There is an angled timber quay, with two berths 25 and 20m

8.21
long, with depths of 3.9 to 7.6m and 2.3 to 3.9m, respectively, 8.23 Indre Tysfjorden is entered off Kjopsvik (68°06'N.,
alongside. 16°21'E.), 3.5 miles SSE of Skjerneset, and extends about 8
Bogvika (68°14'N., 16°05'E.) opens off the W side of Tys-
8.21 miles E. It is deep and free from dangers to a position about 1
fjorden, 1.75 miles S of Korsnes. There is good anchorage, in mile from its head. An overhead cable, with a vertical clear-
depths of 14 to 21m, clay, in Bogvika. ance of 35m, spans the fjord 3 miles NE of Kjopsvik.
Bessfjorden is entered off the W side of Tysfjorden, 1.5
8.21 Kjopsvik has a cement berth that can accommodate vessels
8.23
miles SSE of Bogvika, between Bessfjordneset (68°12'N., 10m in length and handles cement and breakbulk. The berthing
Pub. 182
length is 170m, including dolphins. Lilandsgrunnen, with a least charted depth of 2m, lies near
8.25
Hulloya, which rises to a height of 676m, lies on the S side

8.23 mid-channel about 1 miles off the N shore.
of the entrance to Indre Tysfjorden, 1 mile from Kjopsvik. An Skjomgrunnen (68°25'N., 17°13'E.), a rocky shoal with a
8.25
overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 38m, spans the depth of 5m, lies on the S side of the fairway, 9 miles ESE of
channel from Hulloya to a point on shore close W of Kjopsvik. Lilandsgrunnen. From a position 0.3 mile SE of Skjomgrun-
Hulloysundet, off the S side of Hulloya, is deep and free
8.23 nen, a bank extends SE to the shore, 1 mile distant.
from dangers, except for the chain of rocks extending from An ammunition dump is charted in the fjord; it is centered
8.25
Hulloyneset (68°03'N., 16°11'E.), the SW point of Hulloya, to about 1 mile SSE of the beacon on Lilandsgrunnen.
Hulloynesgrunnen, 1 mile WNW. An overhead cable, with a
vertical clearance of 24m, spans the sound. 8.26 Kjeldebotn (68°25'N., 16°41'E.), a cove, opens off
Grunnfjorden, entered from Hulloysundet, W of Kjerrklub-
8.23 the S side of Ofotfjorden 2 miles ESE of the light on Hamnesh-
ben (68°02'N., 16°19'E.), is free from dangers in the fairway. It olmen.
extends 8 miles SSE. Anchorage, in a depth of 19m, clay and sand, may be taken
8.26
Kjerrvika (68°01'N., 16°20'E.), a cove situated on the E

8.23 in the SE part of the cove. There is a timber quay on the E
side of Grunnfjorden, 1.5 miles S of Kjerrklubben, is the site of shore with a berth, 28m long, with depths of 6.2 to 7m along-
a concrete quay 16m long, with depths of 5.5 to 8.5m alongside.
side. The fjord is generally free from ice. Ballangen (68°22'N., 16°55'E.), an inlet, opens off the S side
8.26
Mannfjorden lies E of Grunnfjorden, from which it is sepa-

8.23 of Ofotfjorden, 6 miles ESE of Kjeldebotn. The inlet extends
rated by a peninsula 2 miles wide. There are no dangers in the 4.5 miles SW. Litle Ballangen lies near its head.
fairway of the fjord which penetrates 5.5 miles SE. Three over- Dangers lie on both sides of the entrance to Ballangen, but it
8.26
head cables, with a vertical clearance of 48m, span the fjord 4 may be entered in the white sectors of the lights, and by using
miles within the entrance. the lights, in range 236°, at Litle Ballangen.
Multind (68°00'N., 16°30'E.) is a conspicuous dome-shaped
8.23 Litle Ballangen (68°20'N., 16°51'E.) (World Port Index No.
8.26
summit, 853m high, situated on the E side of Mannfjorden 4.5 22050) has two quays, 29 and 13m long, with depths of 3.5 to
miles SE of Kjerrklubben. 6.2m and from 4.5 to 6m alongside, respectively. Anchorage
There is anchorage at the head of Mannfjorden in a cove on
8.23 may be taken off the quays, in about 10 to 22m, clay.
the N side, clear of a cable. Bogen, an inlet, opens off the N side of Ofotfjorden, 3 miles
8.26
ENE of Lilandsgrunnen. Skogoya lies on the W side of Bogen;

Ofotfjorden two smaller inlets lie off its SE and S extremities. Liland lies
near the W entrance of Bogen, off the S end of Skogoya; Bo-
8.24 Ofotfjorden Sis, entered between Baroya and Tjel- gen, a village, lies at the head of the inlet.
dodden (68°23'N., 16°08'E.), 1.75 miles N. Its branches ex- The white sector of Liland Light (68°28'N., 16°55'E.) leads
8.26
tend about 40 miles E to within 5 miles of the Swedish border. from Ofotfjorden into the entrance to Bogen. The port has a
Narvik, the most important port on the fjord, is situated 30
8.24 timber quay, 100m long, with 11.6m alongside. There is a total
miles within the entrance. The prevailing winds are NE in the length of 77m of quay at the industrial works, with depths of
winter and W in the summer. 4.3 to 6.6m alongside.
The current in Ofotfjorden nearly always flows out, and it
8.24 Bogen Nato Jetty is located below Slettebakken Light
8.26
may be strong during gales, especially along the land. (68°31'N., 16°58'E.). The jetty also has a concrete vehicle
There is usually an outflow of current from the branch fjords
8.24 ramp.
into Ofotfjorden, which can be strong and dangerous, particu- Caution.—A submarine cable crosses Ballangen from a po-
8.26
larly at the mouths of the fjords during the melting of ice in the sition close E of the quays.
spring. The dangers in Bogen are numerous and may best be seen on
8.26
A mid-channel course will lead from the vicinity of Baroya

8.24 the chart.
to Hamnesholmen (68°25'N., 16°35'E.), 11.5 miles ENE. The
white sector of the light on Baroya, astern, will lead clear of the 8.27 Liland (68°29'N., 16°53'E.) (World Port Index No.
dangers. 22010) is situated near the W entrance point of Bogen. The en-
Efjorden is entered from Ofotfjorden by a narrow channel E
8.24 trance leads N of Lilandsgrunnen and W of the islet lying off
of Baroya (68°21'N., 16°07'E.) and extends 17 miles SE. The the S extremity of Skogoya. Foul ground extends about 0.3
fjord may also be entered from Vestfjorden by boat channels S mile ESE from a position on shore S of Liland.
of Baroya. The entrance channels are encumbered with shoals There is a berth at the end of a timber jetty, 30m long, with
8.27
and are difficult to enter. No attempt to enter should be made depths of 4.6 to 6.7m on the E side and depths of 2.6 to 6.7m
without good local knowledge. on the inside.
Skjomen is entered from Ofotfjorden between Rosaneset
8.27
8.25 Ramsundet (68°29'N., 16°31'E.) is entered through (68°24'N., 17°12'E.) and Einbaerneset, 1.25 miles E, about 7
Breivika, off the N side of Ofotfjorden, 8.25 miles ENE of miles SE of Bogen.
Tjeldodden. This channel leads about 6 miles N to join Indre- The fjord, about 13 miles long, is deep and surrounded by
8.27
leia in Tjeldsundet. high steep mountains. The innermost part of the fjord is mag-
From Hamnesholmen, the fairway of Ofotfjorden trends ENE
8.25 nificent, with high peaks covered a good distance upward with
about 6 miles to the vicinity of Lilandsgrunnen (68°27'N., a lush deciduous forest.
16°50'E.). It then continues E for about 11 miles to Narvik. During some winters, the ice conditions may obstruct traffic
8.27
Pub. 182
severely. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. Pilotage

8.28
An overhead cable and a bridge span Skjomen 1.5 miles

8.27 should be ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered
within the entrance. Each has a vertical clearance of 35m. The through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an additional
navigable width under the bridge is 150m. cost. The pilots can be contacted by telephone (47-76-98-68-
Sorskjomen (68°12'N., 17°19'E.) is situated at the head of
8.27 10) and by e-mail (pilot.lodingen@kystverket.no).
the fjord. There is a quay at Hallarvika, close NW, 20m long,
with 5m alongside. Care is necessary to avoid the extensive Pilots board in the following positions:
8.28
drying bank at the head of the fjord. a. 68°12'42''N, 15°35'42''E (1.6 miles N of Tranoy
Light).
Narvik (68°26'N., 17°25'E.) b. 68°18'27''N, 15°55'42''E (2.8 miles SW of Baroya).
c. 68°22'54''N, 16°01'42''E (2 miles SSE of Lodingen).
World Port Index No. 22030 Regulations.—Anchored and berthed vessels should main-
8.28
tain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 14.

8.28 Narvik is situated on the E side of Narvikbukten, at Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic
8.28
the entrance to Beisfjorden, 3.75 miles ENE of Skjomen. The Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph
harbor is a natural landlocked basin, almost completely sur- 1.1.
rounded, and sheltered by high ground. Contact Information.—See the table titled Narvik—Con-
8.28
The port lies about 150 miles from the open sea. Commercial
8.28 tact Information.
shipping traffic is heavy in winter, when the Gulf of Bothnia is
ice-bound. Swedish ore is exported through the port.
Narvik—Contact Information
Port of Narvik Port Control
http://www.portofnarvik.no VHF VHF channels 14 and 16
47-76-950375
Winds—Weather.—The “Beisfjorden Wind,” which occa-
8.28
Telephone
47-91-550375 (mobile)
sionally blows from SE, can raise a considerable sea; otherwise
the wind is usually light. The harbor is always ice-free. Facsimile 47-76-950385
Tides—Currents.—Mean tides rise 3.2m at springs and
E-mail hvakt@narvikhavn.no
8.28
2.4m at neaps. During May and June, there is a constant NW

set out of Beisfjorden, which is estimated to reach 4 to 5 knots Port Authority
during the ebb current. The direction of the current in the har- Telephone 47-76-950370
bor is variable and may cause vessels at anchor to swing in dif-
ferent directions. Facsimile 47-76-950384
Depths—Limitations.—Berthing details are shown in the
8.28
E-mail firmapost@narvikhavn.no
accompanying table titled Narvik—Berth Information.
Narvik—Berth Information
Berth Name Length Depth Alongside Remarks
LKAB Bulk Terminal
No. 3 202m 13.0m Bulk.
No. 4 202m 11.0m Bulk.
Iron ore. Can accommodate vessels up to
No. 5 205m 26.0m 350,000 dwt. Modifications to the pier at
Berth No. 5 were reported in 2019.
General Cargo Terminal
Nordkaia 84m 5.0m General cargo.
Pier No. 1 143m 6.0-8.0m Passengers.
Pier No. 2 82m 3.0-5.0m —
Ro-Ro/Railway Terminal
Fagermeskaia 237m 14.0m Ro-ro and containers.
Northland Terminal
Iron ore. Can accommodate vessels up to
Bulk Berth 280m —
18,000 dwt.
Pub. 182
Narvik—Berth Information
Berth Name Length Depth Alongside Remarks
Fish Terminal
Fish Berth 89m 4.0-6.0m —
Other Berths
Torgkaia 60m 4.0m —
Tug Pier 1 30m 6.0m Ro-ro ramp available.
Tug Pier 2 87m 5.0m —
Service Launch Pier 30m — —
Oil Jetty 35m 7.5-8.1m Esso.
Private Quays 50m 5.0m Timber.
Narvik—Anchorages
Anchorage Depth Location
Vidrek (VICTOR) 50-70m 68°24'24.0''N, 17°09'54.0'E
Framnes North (FOXTROT) — 68°26'31.2''N, 17°21'30.0'E
Framnes South (GOLF) — 68°26'03.6''N, 17°21'36.0'E
Ytre Straumen (ALPHA) — 68°25'31.2''N, 17°23'48.6'E
Kleiva (BRAVO) — 68°25'16.2''N, 17°24'57.0'E
Herjangen One — 68°29'30.0''N, 17°25'51.0''E
Herjangen Two — 68°28'55.2''N, 17°25'41.4''E
Herjangen Three — 68°28'12.0''N, 17°25'06.0''E
Narvik Harbor
8.28
Anchorage.—Narvikbukten affords excellent anchorage in

8.28 vise on the selection of berths. For further information, see the
any part of the bay, in depths of 18 to 29m. The pilot will ad- table titled Narvik—Anchorages.
Pub. 182
8.28 Narvik—Iron Ore Terminal
Caution.—Several wrecks lie in Narvikbukten and may best

8.28 the vessel stemming the current. Passage speed must be no
be seen on the chart. greater than steerageway.
A seaplane operating area lies in Narvikbukten and may best
8.28 Signals for the bridge are, as follows:
8.29
be seen on the chart. 1. Green light—bridge open.

2. Red light—bridge closed.
8.29 Beisfjorden (68°24'N., 17°30'E.) is entered off Fa- A water pipeline has been laid across the approach to Beis-
8.29
gernes. It is spanned by a movable bridge, with a vertical clear- fjorden. Warning signs are posted on both sides of the passage.
ance of 6m and a navigable width of 11m. The bridge can only Ships must anchor to stay clear of the line between the two
be opened for passage at HW slack and LW slack. Passage un- warning signs.
der the closed bridge at other times must always be made with
8.29 Tjeldsundet
Pub. 182
Herjangsfjorden (68°30'N., 17°27'E.) is the NE continua-

8.29
Lodingen—Berth Information
tion of Ofotfjorden N of Narvik. The fjord is deep and clear of
dangers except on the SE shore, which is fringed by a reef that Berth Length Depth Remarks
extends 0.5 mile offshore in places. Skolten, a rocky patch with South 84m — Passengers.
a depth of 14.9m, lies in mid-channel.
Hamnvik (68°32'N., 17°34'E.), situated near the head of
8.29
Rodholmen Terminal
Herjangsfjorden, on its E side, has a quay 60m long, with General cargo and con-
depths from 7.4 to 10.6m alongside. North 70m 10.0m
tainers.
Anchorage is available for small boats close S of the quay,
8.29
East 130m 8.5m Ro-ro and general cargo.

clay bottom, with mooring rings.
Rombaken (68°28'N., 17°36'E.) extends 5 miles E from its
8.29
entrance S of Oydjordneset. Rombaksbotn, the inner part of the Vessels should provide updates on their ETA 5 hours and 2
8.31
fjord, extends 4.5 miles farther in an ESE direction. hours prior to arrival at the pilot station.
Halogalands Bro, a suspension bridge with a vertical clear-
8.29
Pilots board in the following positions:
8.31
ance of 40m, crosses the entrance to Rombaken in the vicinity a. 68°12'42''N, 15°35'42''E (1.6 miles N of Tranoy
of Oyjordneset. Light).
Straumen (68°26'N., 17°42'E.), the narrows between Rom-
8.29
b. 68°18'27''N, 15°55'42''E (2.8 miles SW of Baroya).
baken and Rombaksbotn, is spanned by a bridge with a vertical c. 68°22'54''N, 16°01'42''E (2 miles SSE of Lodingen).
clearance of 40.5m. Three overhead cables, the lowest of Lodingen Pilot Booking Center arranges all pilotage in Nor-
8.31
which has a safe vertical clearance of 32m, also span the nar- dland and Troms og Finnmar, from Norivk in the S to Kirkenes
rows. The passage is restricted to a width of 183m by a reef in the N. The Booking Center can be contacted as listed in the
which extends from its N side. table titled Pilot Booking Center—Contact Information,
Rotvaer to Harstad Pilot Booking Center—Contact Information

8.30 From Vestfjorden, the S approach to Harstad lead, in a
general N direction, through Tjeldsundet and Vagsfjorden, Telephone 47-76-986810
about 33 miles distant. Sandtorgstraumen, 16 miles NE of Rot- Facsimile 47-76-986820
vaer, has a least charted depth of 7.9m in the fairway.
The winds in Tjeldsundet, to a large degree, follow the direc-
8.30
E-mail pilot.lodingen@kystverket.no
tion of the sound, but are often unsteady and unreliable. Winds
which set S in the sound, will, in the W part of Sandtorgstrau- Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic Ser-
8.31
men, slack and back around. South winds are usually the most vice, see the section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.
troublesome. Contact Information.—See the table titled Lodingen Port
8.31
In Vagsfjorden, there can be E storms in the fjord on the

8.30 Authority—Contact Information.
mainland, whereas there are W winds in the entrances from the
sea. Lodingen Port Authority—Contact Information
8.31 Lodingen (68°25'N., 16°00'E.) (World Port Index No. Telephone 47-76-986618
21950), 3 miles NNE of the light on Rotvaer, lies on the W side Facsimile 47-76-986641
of the S entrance to Tjeldsundet.
lodingen.havnevesen@lodingen.k
E-mail
ommune.no
Lodingen Port Authority
http://www.lodingen.kommune.no Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in the harbor, in
8.31
depths of 11.9 to 14.6m, good holding ground.

Depths—Limitations.—This is a sheltered harbor that can
8.31
Caution.—Care must be taken to anchor clear of the fairway
8.31
handle vessels up to 3,000 dwt, with a maximum length leading to the quay. A sea may set into the anchorage when the
of120m and a maximum draft of 6m. See the table titled wind is E of N.
Lodingen—Berth Information.
8.31
8.32 Tjeldsundet (68°31'N., 16°10'E.), between Hinnoya
ordered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the on the W and Tjeldoya and the mainland on the E, is the con-
Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. tinuation of Indreleia from Vestfjorden to the N ports. It is nar-
row in several places and the channel is rendered intricate by
Lodingen—Berth Information below-water rocks and shoals. The currents are strong and the
numerous whirls and eddies necessitate care.
Berth Length Depth Remarks Kongsviktind (68°35'N., 16°16'E.), a mountain, 988m high,
8.32
Lodingen Ferry Terminal 10 miles NNE of Lodingen, provides a good mark in the S en-
trance to the sound.
North 84m — Passengers. The dangers in Tjeldsundet may best be seen on the chart. A
8.32
Pub. 182
2.1m, lies on the W side of Indreleia, 2 miles N of the light on

Grashdmen. A reef, with a charted depth of 2.2m, lies 0.25
mile E of Langgrunnen.
Store Rogla (68°44'N., 16°39'E.), 95m high, lies on the W
8.33
side of the fairway, 3 miles N of Grasholmen. Lille Rogla lies

0.5 mile farther NNE.
Storholmen (68°43'N., 16°46'E.), marked by a light, lies on
8.33
the E side of Indreleia, about 1 mile off the SW extremity of

Rolla and 2.25 miles E of Store Rogla. Foul ground extends 0.5
mile E of Storholmen and just over 0.5 mile SW from Rolla.
In the S approach to Harstad, which lies 3.75 miles NW of
8.33
Lille Rogla, are Arnoya (68°46'N., 16°37'E.), 1.75 miles NW

of Lille Rogla, Laukholmen, and Tjuvholmen.
Smaholmgrunn, a rocky shoal with a depth of 5.8m, and Ly-
8.33
sbotn, with a depth of 0.3m, lie 0.6 mile and 1.0 mile NNW, re-
spectively, from Lille Rogla.
The many dangers which front Harstadhamn from Tjuvhol-
8.33
8.32 The Tjeldsundet Bridge men N to Roykenesboen (68°51'N., 16°39'E.), 2.25 miles
NNE, may best be seen on the chart.
bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m and a horizontal clear- Vessels approaching Harstad from the S, after passing Lille
8.33
ance of 90m, spans the fairway near Langkvitneset (68°38'N., Rogla, should shape a course toward Stangnesodden
16°35'E.), 7.75 miles NE of Kongsviktind. (68°48'N., 16°37'E.), steering in the white sector of the light on
It is reported that in the narrows N of Tjeldoya, the channel
8.32 that point to within 0.3 mile of the light. A depth of 15m is
will only accommodate one large vessel at a time between the charted in this area. The track then leads E of the light struc-
buoys on either side. ture, where course can be steered W into Harstadhamn.
Tjeldsundet is well marked by lights and other navigational
8.32 Vessels approaching Harstad from the E should steer on the
8.33
aids. The white sectors of the various lights will lead through church at Trondenes bearing 265°, passing S of Magoya Light.
the fairway, but caution must be exercised to alter course to This track leads over a least charted depth of 10m. When the
8.33
pass the lights at a safe distance. It must be noted that some of vessel is about 0.3 mile WSW from the light, steer a course in-
the white sectors will lead into shoal water. to the harbor to the assigned berth.
Anchorage may be taken, in 14.6 to 22m, in the W side of
8.32
Vessels from the N approaching Harstad, after having
8.33
Tjeldsundet, about 1 mile NW of Nordstandskjaer (68°30'N., cleared the dangers at the SE end of Toppsundet, should steer
16°09'E.). Local knowledge is necessary. in the white sector of Magoya Light to a distance of about 0.3
Kongsvika, 1.5 miles SSW of Kongsviktind, affords anchor-
8.32
mile from the light; course of 212° will then lead into the har-
age, in 18.3m, to vessels with local knowledge. bor.
Vessels waiting for the tide before proceeding through Sand-
8.32
torgstraumen, may anchor, as indicated on the chart, in 18.3m Harstad (68°48'N., 16°33'E.)
or in 14.6m, 0.4 or about 0.6 mile NE, respectively, from Hol
(68°33'N., 16°24'E.). World Port Index No. 21610
The N entrance to Ramsundet lies S of Kalvoya (68°33'N.,
8.32
16°27'E.), which lies S of the W entrance to Sandtorgstraumen. 8.34 Harstad is a coastal natural harbor situated on the NE
Vagsfjorden, the continuation N of Indreleia from the N end coast of Hinnoya. It is the second-largest town in N Norway. It
of Tjeldsundet, is a large, almost landlocked basin. The W offers anchorage and piers for large vessels. The port is also a
shore of the fjord is formed by the NE side of Hinnoya and the base for oil exploration support.
E side of Grytoya. The N shore of the fjord is formed by Senja;
the SE shore is formed by the islands of Rolla and Andorja, ly- Harstad Port Authority
ing off the mainland.
Caution.—A firing area has been established in Vagfjorden, http://www.harstadhavn.no
extending from the SW entrance to a line between Klubben and
Engenes. Winds—Weather.—The harbor is well-sheltered and is
8.34
A submarine cable runs NE across the entrance to Harstad

8.32 generally unaffected by winds, except those from the NE,
and may best be seen on the chart. which give rise to considerable swell in Gangsasbotn. It is ice
free. The prevailing wind is S. There is no darkness from May
8.33 Harstad lies on the E coast of Hinnoya, which is 3 to August 11 and the sun does not rise from December 2 to
fringed with islets and shoals to a distance of 2.5 miles. These January 11.
dangers must be passed to the E. Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Harstad is from 2.2m
8.34
The tidal currents in Vagsfjorden usually set N with the fall-

8.33 MHWS to 0.3m MLWS.
ing tide and S with the rising tide. They may attain a velocity Depths—Limitations.—The harbor can handle vessels with
8.34
of 1 knot at springs. a maximum draft of 9.3m. FOr more berthing see tabled titled
Langgrunnen (68°42'N., 16°38'E.), with a charted depth of
8.33 Harstad—Berth Information.
Pub. 182
Aspect.— Trondenes Church, on the NW side of the harbor,

8.34 Anchorage.—There is anchorage in Gangsasbotn, an inlet
8.34
1.75 miles NNW of Stangnesodden, and the school 0.3 mile which extends about 1 mile S from Harstad. The depths in the
SSW of the church, are conspicuous. The church, with a tall anchorage are from 5 to 40m, sand and mud. There is an
gray spire, 0.2 mile WSW of the Harbor Office, is a useful anchorage in Samabukta, in 30m, mud and shells.
mark for entering the harbor. 8.34 Lofoten—Northwest and North Sides
8.34 8.35 From Lofotodden (67°50'N., 12°50'E.), the W coast
may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at of Moskenesoya trends about 18 miles NNE to Fuglehuk, a
an additional cost. conspicuous hill, 562m high.
The pilot boards in the following positions:
8.34 Bergsneset (68°07'N., 13°04'E.), the NW extremity of
8.35
a. 68°22.9'N, 16°01.7'E. (for Lodingen). Moskenesoya, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of Fuglehuk.
b. 69°19.5'N, 16°13.5'E. (for Andenes). This stretch of coast is fringed with an almost unbroken line
8.35
Regulations.—If the vessel is entering via Andenes, the ves-

8.34 of precipitous cliffs. It is fronted by a sand bank, with rocks
sel’s ETA should be sent 12 hours in advance. If entering via and shoals extending up to 4 miles offshore. Beyond this bank,
Lodinge, the vessel’s ETA should be sent 2 hours in advance; the depths increase rapidly.
VHF channel 16 is used at Lodingen and Andenes. From Bergsneset to Eggum, about 18 miles NE, the coast is
8.35

8.34 formed by the islands of Flakstadoya and Vestvagoya. The
Service, see the section titled Vessel Traffic Service in para- coast of Moskenesoya, Flakstadoya, and Vestvagoya are heavi-
graph 1.1. ly indented by bays, fjords, and straits. This stretch is fronted
Contact Information.—See the table titled Harstad—Con-
8.34 by a sand bank to a distance of 4 miles, with detached rocks
tact Information. and shoals. The NW coast of Vestvagoya, from Skolneset
(68°15'N., 13°31'E.) to Eggum, 5.5 miles NE, presents a line of
Harstad—Contact Information precipitous cliffs. The sea breaks along the entire coast during
gales from between W and N.
Harbormaster Skiven (67°58'N., 12°56'E.), a mountain 850m high, is situ-
8.35
47-77-001212 ated 0.5 mile inland, 9 miles NNE of Lofotodden. It is one of

Telephone the principal landmarks on the coast. Other prominent land-
47-90-126201 (mobile)
marks are Napptind, on Flakstadoya, 8 miles ENE of Fugle-
E-mail havnevakta@harstad.kommune.no huk; Horntind lying 2.25 miles NW of Napptind; and
Himmeltind, lying 5.25 miles NE of Horntind. Himmeltind is
Port Authority
easily identified from the W, appearing as two peaks; from N
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 three peaks are seen, with the one in the middle being the low-
47-77-001210 est and sharpest.
Telephone Vaggen, close inland, 2 miles SW of Himmeltind, is precipi-
8.35
47-77-001212 tous on its W side. From a position W of Eggum, the 430m

E-mail harstadhavn@harstad.kommune.no peak close S will be distinctly seen.
Hardstad—Berth Information
Stangnes Termainal
No. 1 32m 8.0-10.0m General cargo and fishing vessels.
No. 2 120m 10.0-12.0m General cargo, offshore vessels, and fishing vessels.
No. 3 60m 8.0-10.0m General cargo, offshore vessels, and fishing vessels.
Salijestad Terminal
Salijestad 270m 6.0m General cargo and fishing vessels.
Larsneset Terminal
Larsneset 215m 7.0-10.0m Passengers and offshore vessels.
Sentrum Terminal
No. 1 123m 5.0-11.5m Passengers.
Pub. 182
8.36 Langeskallen (67°57'N., 12°43'E.), an isolated depth It is practically the only place of refuge between Lofotodden
of 18.9m, lies 4 miles offshore, 7 miles NNW of Lofotodden. and Andenes, the N extremity of Vesteralen. The W part of the
Haraldskallen, with a charted depth of 27m, lies 3.5 miles fjord is deep, with no dangers in the fairway.
NNW of Bergsneset. These two dangers are the farthest
seaward along this coast. The coast should be avoided. 8.38 Hadselfjorden is approached between the coastal reef
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the vicinity of
8.36 N of Gimsoya and the numerous dangers extending W from
Bergsneset usually set NE on the flood and SW on the ebb. Hadseloya (68°33'N., 14°49'E.). A rocky shoal, with a depth
From Lofotodden to Bergsneset, there are no reported safe
8.36 of 6.7m, lies near mid-channel, 6 miles NNE of Hoven. The
harbors. fairway passes S of this shoal.
Hornneset (68°10'N., 13°20'E.), the NW extremity of Flak-
8.36 Havboen (68°30'N., 14°28'E.), with a least depth of 0.6m,
8.38
stadoya, lies 6.5 miles NE of Bergsneset. Skarvholman, lies on the N side of the fairway, 5 miles SW of the W extremi-
marked by a light, lies about 5 miles WNW of the point. It is ty of Hadseloya.
surrounded by foul ground to a distance of 0.25 mile. Vessels proceeding through Hadselfjorden should keep in
8.38
An isolated rock is charted 0.5 mile N of the light. The many

8.36 mid-channel. When SE of Hadseloya, a vessel should steer NE,
shoal patches in this area are best seen on the chart. passing E of Jaeva (68°32'N., 15°04'E.), a small islet, then into
The harbor of Ramberg lies between the NE side of Moske-
8.36 the S entrance to Sortlandsundet.
nesoya and the W side of Flakstadoya. It is the principal village Raftsundet, formed between Austvagoya and Hinnoya, is en-
8.38
in Flakstadoya. A dredged channel, with a depth of 4m, leads tered from the SE part of Hadselfjorden, via Ingelsfjorden
to the harbor area, which has a depth of 3.4m. The public quay (68°29'N., 15°14'E.).
is 42m long and has depths of 2.5 to 3.5m alongside. Brottoya, a low island, lies in the entrance to Ingelsfjorden. It
8.38
During onshore gales and heavy seas, breakers form N and

8.36 may be passed on the S side or on its NE side by steering in the
NW of Busholmen (68°07'N., 13°14'E.). Hornneset lies 4.25 white sectors of the appropriate lights.
miles NNE of Jusholmen. Anchorage.—Secure anchorage may be taken off the E side
8.38
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken off the harbor of

8.36 of Holdoya (68°27'N., 14°54'E.), an islet 2.25 miles S of the
Ramberg (68°05'N., 13°14'E.), in 10m, hard mud. SE extremity of Hadseloya. The anchorage is in 18.3m, mud,
and may be approached from the N by passing between the
8.37 Eggum (68°19'N., 13°41'E.), the N extremity of Vest- reefs off Holdoya and off the islets to the E. There is a least
vagoya, lies 11.75 miles NNE of Hornneset. charted depth of 11m over a width of 0.15 mile. The anchorage
The N entrance to Nappstraumen lies between Hornneset
8.37 may also be approached from the NE. A submarine cable lies
and Skolmneset, 6.25 miles NNE. Steinfjorden indents the close E of the anchorage.
coast between these two points.
Haesholman (68°14'N., 13°26'E.), a group of islets marked
8.37 8.39 Sortlandsundet (68°42'N., 15°26'E.) lies between
by a light, lies in Steinfjorden, 4.25 miles NNE of Hornneset. Langoya and Hinnoya. It is about 19 miles long from its junc-
A bank with a least charted depth of 0.9m lies between the tion with Hadselfjorden and the S end of Gavlfjorden, which
point and the islets. leads N into the open sea. The channel is deep and clear of dan-
Faldet (68°12'N., 13°15'E.), an isolated patch with a charted
8.37 gers in mid-channel. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of
depth of 0.9m, lies 3 miles NW of Hornneset, in the W ap- 30m, spans the channel in the narrows at Sortland.
proach to Nappstraumen. There are other shoal patches charted
in this area, which may best be seen on the chart.
Gapet (68°09'N., 13°28'E.), which leads S into Nappstrau-
8.37
men, is approached through the area of shoals and islets in

Steinfjorden.
From seaward, the white sectors of the lights on Hundhol-
8.37
men (68°10'N., 13°27'E.) and Haesholman, lead to Gapet.

In bad weather, with heavy seas, it is inadvisable for those
8.37
without local knowledge to attempt to enter Gapet.

From Eggum, the coast trends in a general ENE direction to
8.37
the NE end of Austvagoya, about 35 miles distant. The entire

coastal area is much indented by small bays and coves.
A considerable amount of foul ground lies off the N coasts of
8.37
Vestvagoya, Gimsoya, and Austvagoya. This stretch of coast is

one of the most dangerous parts of Lofoten.
From Eggum to Hoven (68°21'N., 14°06'E.), the NW ex-
8.37
tremity of Gimsoya, 8 miles ENE, there is a continuous line of

breakers during gales from between W and N. Sortland
8.39
Gimsoystraumen (68°20'N., 14°19'E.) is formed between

8.37
Gimsoya and the W side of Austvagoya. It gives access to Vest- Local knowledge is required in all the harbors and anchorag-
8.39
fjorden. es off Sortlandsundet.

Hadselfjorden, separating the NE end of Lofoten from the S
8.37 There is an isolated unmarked depth of 7.6m, 5 miles NE of
8.39
end of Vesteralen, is important for vessels seeking anchorage. Jaeva and a rock, awash, lies 1 mile farther NE.
Pub. 182
Vessels entering the fairway have only to keep in mid-chan-

8.39 of the bridge; a shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, lies on the W side
nel when passing up the sound and should pass E of a 7.9m of the fairway, just over 1 mile NW of the light. From this
patch lying near mid-channel about 3 miles SSW of Sortland. shoal, the fairway N to the junction with Gavlfjorden is free of
charted dangers.
8.40 Sortland (68°42'N., 15°25'E.) (World Port Index No.
21670) is the administrative center for the Sortland District. It Gavlfjorden (68°56'N., 15°22'E.), between Langoya and
8.40
is situated in Langoya. Andoya, connects with the open sea off Anda, which lies 14.5
miles NNW of its S entrance. The fjord is exposed N, and in
Sortland Havn KF (Port Authority) bad weather the sea breaks over the whole area of shoals N of
Gisloya (68°57'N., 15°16'E.).
http://www.sortland-havn.no The fairway of Gavlfjorden, which is clear of dangers in
8.40
mid-channel, is about 1 mile wide between the shore banks 3

Depths—Limitations.— The port can accommodate vessels
8.40
miles SE of Gisloya, and 1.25 miles wide in a position 3 miles
with a draft up to 7.5m. See the table titled Sortland—Berth NNE of the same islet. The fairway is well marked.
Information
8.40 Vesteralen
may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at
an additional cost. For further information, see paragraph 8.1. 8.41 Vesteralen, the island group NE of Lofoten, comprises
8.40
Hadseloya, Langoya, Andoya, Hinnoya, and several smaller is-
a. 68°12.7'N, 15°35.8'E (Tranoy). lands.
b. 68°12.5'N, 14°53.5'E (Moldora). The waters off the W coast of Langoya from Litloya
8.41
c. 68°35.0'N, 14°40.0'E (Dragnesodden). (68°35'N., 14°19'E.), at the entrance to Vesteralsfjorden, to

8.40
Frugga, 15.5 miles NNE, are foul and difficult, to distances up
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph to 4.5 miles from the shore. A shoal, with a charted depth of
1.1. 1.8m lying 3 miles NW of the light on Litloya, is the farthest W
Contact Information.—See the table titled Sortland
8.40
of these dangers.
Havn—Contact Information. The coast of Langoya NNE of Frugga is indented by numer-
8.41
ous fjords. The entrance to the various fjords are obstructed by

Sortland Havn—Contact Information islets, rocks, and shoals, and it is dangerous to pass over them
even in moderately fine weather. Mariners are advised to avoid
Port Authority this coast.
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 Andoya (69°05'N., 15°45'E.) is the farthest N of the Vester-
8.41
alen group. From a position on shore E of Anda to Andenes, a

Telephone 47-76-108260 distance of 20 miles, the almost inaccessible coast of the island
Facsimile 47-76-108261 is fronted by a bank of white sand on which there are numerous
rocks. The various mountain formations are separated by vast
E-mail havnekontoret@sortland-kommune.no
flat marsh areas; for this reason the mountain peaks will look
like islands when seen from the sea.
The fairway of Sortlandsundet continues N from Sortland,
8.40
The N part of Andoya is low and flat. From E and W,
8.41
and narrows to about 0.4 mile between the shore banks about 1 Andoya Light will become visible before the rest of the
mile N of the bridge. landscape.
A light marks a reef on the E side of the fairway, 2 miles N
8.40
Sortland—Berth Information
Maximum
Vessel Draft
Holmen Industrial Area
No. 1 126m 10.0m — Ro/pax, ro-ro/lo-lo, fishing vessels, and reefer.
Terminalkaia
T01 136m 7.5-10.0m 7.5m
T02 70m 7.5-10.0m 7.5m
Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk. Continuous berth-
T03 70m 7.5-10.0m 7.5m
ing length of 436m.
T04 70m 7.5-10.0m 7.5m
T05 90m 7.5-10.0m 7.5m
Pub. 182
Caution.—The Andoya Test Center conducts maritime

8.41 Stokkmarknes.
weapons testing. Details regarding the current firing practice
times and danger areas are published on the center’s web site. 8.43 Stokkmarknes (68°34'N., 14°55'E.) (World Port In-
dex No. 21690) is a natural coastal harbor situated on Hadsel-
Andoya Test Center oya abreast the W end of Boroya. The channels leading into the
harbor are well marked.
https://www.testcenter.no
Stokkmarknes Port Authority
Gaukvaeroy (68°37'N., 14°21'E.), an island off the S end of
8.41
Langoya, close N of Litloya, has sharp hills which are good http://www.hadselhavn.no
landmarks in clear weather. The hills on Langenes, at the N tip
of Langoya, stand out distinctly against Andoya. Depths—Limitations.—The controlling depth is 5m in the
8.43
The hills on the island nearest the coast are generally high
8.41 W entrance and 5.5m in the E entrance. Vessels up to 8,000
and conical; it is difficult to distinguish them from those E until dwt with a maximum draft of 7.2m can be accommodated. See
quite near the coast. the table titled Stokkmarknes—Berth Information.
The mountains of Andoya are easily identified as they rise
8.41 Boroysundet, E of Stokkmarknes, is spanned by a bridge
8.43
abruptly from low, marshy lands of considerable extent and with a vertical clearance of 15m.
from a distance appear as detached rocky islets. They are visi- Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
8.43
ble up to 50 miles in clear weather. may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at
Caution.—An environmentally sensitive sea area, best seen
8.41 an additional cost. further information, see paragraph 8.1.
on the chart, lies offshore of Vesteralen and is centered approx- Pilots board in the following positions:
8.43
imately 7.5 miles NW of Frugga Light. Trawling is prohibited a. 68°12.7'N, 15°35.8'E (Tranoy).
in the vicinity of this coral reef. b. 68°12.5'N, 14°53.5'E (Moldora).
c. 68°35.0'N, 14°40.0'E (Dragnesodden).
8.42 Vesteralsfjorden (68°35'N., 14°32'E.), between Had- Contact Information.—See the table titled Stokk-
8.43
seloya and the W point of Langoya, is continued NE by Eids- marknes—Contact Information.

fjorden and E by Langoysundet.
Eidsfjorden (68°40'N., 14°53'E.) indents Langoya to a dis-
8.42
Stokkmarknes—Contact Information
tance of 14 miles, and is mostly deep and clear in the fairway.
A depth of 3.4m lies at the W end of a shoal about 1 mile from VHF VHF channel 12
the head of the fjord. The innermost 2 miles of the fjord freezes 47-75-719100
in winter and all the side fjords are frozen up. Telephone
Langoysundet (68°35'N., 14°55'E.), between Hadseloya
8.42
47-41218506 (mobile)
and Langoya, connects the inner end of Vesteralsfjorden with Facsimile 47-76-164651
the SW end of Sortlandsundet.
Langoya is connected to Hadseloya through Boroya
8.42
8.44 Anda (69°04'N., 15°11'E.) lies 2.5 miles N of the N

(68°34'N., 14°57'E.) by bridges. The vertical clearance across
end of Langoya. The islet is marked by a light equipped with a
the E end of Langoysundet is 30m over a navigable width of racon. Flesan, a rocky patch with a least charted depth of 1.8m,
80m. lies 2 miles N of Anda and Brakan, an isolated patch with a
There is anchorage in Langoysundet for vessels of moderate
least charted depth of 2.7m, lies 2.25 miles NNE of the islet.
8.42
size, in 44m, sand, SE of Dragneset, the N extremity of Hadsel-

Vessels approaching Gavlfjorden from the N should steer to
8.44
oya. A 6m rocky patch lies 0.2 mile E of Dragneset.

pass E of Brakan.
Boroysundet, off the W and S sides of Boroya, give access to
8.42
Stokkmarknes—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Draft Size
North Terminals (Nordnesterminalen)
Main 120m 8.0m 7.2m 8,000 dwt Cruise vessels, containers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
North 53m 8.0m 7.2m 8,000 dwt Cruise vessels, containers, breakbulk, and bunkers.
South 60m — — — Breakbulk and bunkers.
Nord-Trondelag Terminal
No. 1 50m 4.5m — — Chemicals and breakbulk.
No. 2 50m 4.8m — — Breakbulk.
Pub. 182
8.44 By Ovuigner (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

8.44 Andenes
Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N from the N end of Andoya,

8.44 Aspect.—Andenes Light is shown from a prominent tower,
8.45
about 26 miles NNE of Anda. 40m in height.

Bjerka (69°24'N., 16°08'E.), an isolated patch with a depth
8.44 It is reported that a church spire and a microwave tower, both
8.45
of 8.5m, lies 4.25 miles NNE of Andoya. It is the farthest N of conspicuous, stand about 1 and 2 miles, respectively, SE of An-
the dangers lying off the island. Nordhavboan, an isolated denes Light.
shoal patch with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 1 mile ESE of Pilotage.—Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but
8.45
Bjerka. There are other patches with similar depths charted in may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at
the area. an additional cost. For further information, see paragraph 8.1.
Pilots board in position 69°19.5'N, 16°13.5'E.
8.45
8.45 Andenes (69°20'N., 16°08'E.) (World Port Index No. Vessel Traffic Service.—For details on the Vessel Traffic Ser-
8.45
21660), a town situated at the N extremity of Andoya, is the vice, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.
district administrative center. The harbor, which is on the NE Contact Information.—See that table titled Andenes—
8.45
side of the town and protected by four large mole installations, Contact Information.
is filled with shoals and skerries.
Andenes—Contact Information
Andenes Port Authority
Port Authority
http://www.andoy.kommune.no
Depths—Limitations.—Anenes is a large fishing station

8.45
that handles passengers and other general cargo.Vessels with a Harbormaster
maximum draft of 6m drafts can be accommodated.There are a
number of berths inside the harbor, for more berthing informa- VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
tion see table titled Andenes—Berth Information. 47-76-141113
Telephone
47-76-867933 (mobile)
Andenes—Berthing Information
Maximum Anchorage.—Moderate-size vessels may anchor about 0.15
8.45
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks mile ESE of the E head of the NE detached mole or in the en-
Draft trance to the inner harbor. A prohibited anchorage area lies ad-
Andenes Harbor Terminal jacent to the coast close SE of the harbor and may best be seen
on the chart.
Ro/pax Bleik (69°16'N., 15°58'E.) is a small fishing harbor, protect-
8.45
Ferry 16m 5.2m — and ro-ro/ ed by moles, lying about 5 miles SW of Andenes. A range
lo-lo. marks the entrance. It is reported that a conspicuous radio tow-
Fishing er stands about 2 miles ESE of Bleik.
Industrial 275m 6.1m 6.0m vessels and
breakbulk. 8.46 Andfjorden (69°00'N., 16°03'E.), a large inlet en-
Pub. 182
tered between the E side of Andoya and the W side of Senja, Mariners are cautioned that ice movement may be strong when
15.5 miles E, leads in a S direction for about 22 miles to the melting occurs in the spring.
NW end of the island Grytoya; its continuations farther S are Toppsundet (68°53'N., 16°23'E.), formed between Grytoya
8.48
known as Kvaefjorden and Gullesfjorden. and Hinnoya, is the farthest S of the channels which lead be-
At Grytoya, Toppsundet, formed between Grytoya and Hin-
8.46 tween Andfjorden and Vagsfjorden. It is easy to navigate but
noya, leads SE into Vagsfjorden and Indreleia. heavy squalls may be expected.
Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Andfjorden are not
8.46 Hestebaen (68°56'N., 16°16'E.), 0.35 mile N of Ytre
8.48
very strong and are usually governed by the wind, but occa- Elgsnes, the SW entrance point at the W end of Toppsundet, is
sionally the N current sets toward the E side of the fjord and awash. Store Sandskjaer lies on the shore bank 0.45 mile off-
the S sets toward the W side. shore, 1.75 miles SSE of Hestebaen.
In Toppsundet, the tidal currents usually set E with the rising
8.46 Vaskinnkviga (68°53'N., 16°26'E.), an above-water rock,
8.48
tide and W with the falling tide, but with E and S winds they lies 0.25 mile off Grytoya, about 3 miles ESE of Store Sandsk-
often set constantly W, and with W and N winds they set con- jaer. The other dangers in Toppsundet are marked and are best
stantly E. seen on the chart.
Caution.—Firing and bombing practice areas are es-
8.46 Kjeoya (68°52'N., 16°34'E.), an islet marked by a light, lies
8.48
tablished in the N entrance to Andfjorden. Firing areas are also in the SE entrance to Toppsundet. Shoals, with a depth of 7m at
established in Andfjorden between Leikneset and Meloyvaer, their outer end, extend 0.5 mile SW from the islet.
extending seaward from Steinvaer, and between Saurabogen Krakeneset, a peninsula, lies 1 mile S of Kjeoya. A shoal,
8.48
and Meloyvaer, extending S to the N entrances of Risoy Sund which partly dries, extends 0.2 mile N from the peninsula.
and Topsundet. The island of Magoya, with a light at its SW end, lies close E
8.48
of Krakeneset. Roykenesbaen, a drying shoal, lies 0.75 mile

8.47 On the E side of the fjord are several groups of low is- NNE of Magoya.
lands surrounded by rocks and shoals. Holmenvaer (69°18'N., Vessels may transit Toppsundet by steering in the white sec-
8.48
16°45'E.), 14 miles ESE of Andenes, is the farthest N of these tor of the various lights that mark the fairway.
groups. The Steinavaer group lies 8 miles SSW of Holmenvaer
and the Meloyvaer group lies 6 miles farther SSW. Harstad to Malangen
Myrboen (69°12'N., 16°30'E.), an isolated rocky shoal with
8.47
a least charted depth of 6.7m, lies at the W end of Steinavaer. 8.49 Astafjorden (68°44'N., 17°00'E.), with its continua-
Froholman (69°04'N., 16°19'E.), a group of rocks and islets,
8.47 tions of Salangen and Loksefjorden, extends in a general NE
lies 4 miles NNE of Grytoya. A rock at the S end of the group direction for a distance of about 25 miles. The fjord is entered
dries. from the SE side of Vagsfjorden and is formed on the NW side
Grotavaer, a group of islets and rocks with a depth of 4.9m at
8.47 by the islands of Rolla and Andorja and by the mainland on the
its outer edge, lies close off the NW side of Grytoya. SE. It is deep and free from dangers in the fairway.
Skarvhausbaen (68°57'N., 16°10'E.), a shoal patch with a
8.47 Several fjords branch from the SE side of Astafjorden. On
8.49
depth of 4.9m, lies about 1.25 miles SSW of the 4.9m depth at the NW side are Bygden and Mjosundet, which are channels
Grotavaer. leading to Vagsfjorden. Mjosundet is narrow and there is usual-
The W side of Andfjorden is relatively free of dangers out-
8.47 ly a N setting, strong, tidal current, but it can be navigated by
side the shore bank. large vessels.
Myrflesan (69°06'N., 16°04'E.), marked by a light, lies 2.25
8.47 A spit, with a charted depth of 1.8m, extends 0.6 mile SW
8.49
miles E of Andoya, 14 miles SSW of Andenes. It dries in plac- from the N side of the entrance to Astafjorden, and a reef, with
es. A 4m isolated depth lies 0.4 mile E of the light. charted depths of 3m, extends 0.3 mile off the S side of the en-
Kinnholmen, an island marked by a light, lies 1.5 miles E of
8.47 trance.
Andoya, about 10 miles SSW of Myrflesan. Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in about 29m, clay,
8.49
Risoysundet, formed between Andoya and Hinnoya, con-

8.47 off the village of Tovik (68°41'N., 16°53'E.), 2 miles within the
nects Gavlfjorden with Andfjorden. The NE end of the chan- S entrance point of Astafjorden.
nel, which is much narrowed by shallow banks, is entered 4
miles NNW of Kinnholmen. A bridge, with a vertical clear- 8.50 Grovfjorden (68°42'N., 17°05'E.) lies about 5 miles
ance, of 32m spans Risoysundet. ENE of Tovik. This arm of Astafjorden is encumbered by rocks
about 2 miles within the entrance. A bridge, with a vertical
8.48 Kvaefjorden (68°50'N., 16°00'E.), the S extension of clearance of 4.9m, spans the fairway at the narrows about 3
Andfjorden, is relatively free of dangers in the fairway. miles within the entrance.
Mefjordingen (68°55'N., 16°05'E.), an isolated 12.8m
8.48 Gratangen (68°45'N., 17°18'E.), a winding arm which ex-
8.50
shoal, lies in mid-channel 2.25 miles ESE of the light on Kinn- tends about 11 miles ESE from Astafjorden, is entered about 4
holmen. Jabaen, with a charted depth of 8.8m, lies 2 miles ESE miles ENE of Grovfjorden. Its shores are steep and inaccessi-
of Mefjordingen. ble, except at its inner end, and it is free from dangers in the
Kasfjorden opens off the E side of Kvaefjorden. Bygdesun-
8.48 fairway. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 17m, spans the
det opens E 5 miles farther SW. Godfjorden extends SSW from narrows about 8 miles within the entrance. Gratangsbotn is
Kvaefjorden; Gullesfjorden is the S continuation of the main formed E of the bridge.
fjord. The inlets are free from dangers in mid-channel. Bygden (68°50'N., 17°08'E.), formed between Rolla and
8.50
Ice will form at the heads of the branch fjords in the winter.
8.48 Andorja, extends NNW from Astafjorden to Vagsfjorden, a
Pub. 182
distance of about 7 miles. The S entrance, 2.5 miles NNW of 34.7m, crosses Mjopsundet.
Gratangen, is encumbered with islets and rocks, which can best From a position E of Harstad (68°48'N., 16°33'E.), Vags-
8.52
be seen on the chart. fjorden leads about 18 miles NE to the S entrance to Tranoy-
There are several anchorages charted in Bygden, but they are
8.50 fjorden.
for small vessels with local knowledge. Vessels in transit of this part of Vagsfjorden should steer to
8.52
pass about 1 mile W of Engenes (68°56'N., 17°07'E.), the NW

8.51 Lavangen (68°47'N., 17°37'E.) opens off the E side point of Andorja, then steer for the N edge of Bergsheia
of Astafjorden, about 9 miles ENE of Bygden. The fjord ex- (69°03'N., 17°24'E.) situated on the island of Dyroya, about 9
tends about 9 miles SE and is free of dangers in the fairway. miles NE of Engenes.
The shores of the outer part of this inlet are precipitous, but
8.51 Tranoyfjorden (69°04'N., 17°19'E.) is entered between Ha-
8.52
are less bold toward the inner end, where alluvial banks of con- geneset, the S extremity of Dyroya, and Stonglandet, a penin-
siderable extent have been deposited by a river, which flows insula extending SE from Senja.
to the head of the inlet. Indreleia, continued from the NE end of Vagsfjorden, has
8.52
In Lavangen, drift ice is sometimes encountered towards the

8.51 two alternative routes leading into Solbergfjorden, known as
head of the inlet. Tranoyfjorden and Dyroysunde. Tranoyfjorden is the principal
Salangen (68°53'N., 17°34'E.), the continuation of As-
8.51 channel. Dyroysundet, formed between Dyroya and the main-
tafjorden is about 8 miles in length. Loksefjorden is the NE end land, can be used by large vessels.
of Salangen. The Dyroy Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 17.6m, cross-
8.52
Sagfjorden, on the SE side of Salangen near its head, extends

8.51 es Dyroysundet.
4 miles in a SE direction. It is entered E of Foroya (68°54'N.,
17°41'E.). 8.53 Tranoyfjorden, deep and free from dangers in the fair-
For the most part these fjords are clear and deep. The shoals,
8.51 way, leads NNE to Solbergfjorden.
which may be dangerous to shipping, are marked. An isolated From Solbergfjorden, the fairway leads ENE to the junction
8.53
rock, with a depth of 5m, lies 0.6 mile SW of Foroya. with Finnfjorden, then NW to Finnsnes, a distance of about 24
miles.
8.52 Salangsverket (68°55'N., 17°44'E.) (World Port In- Bispeflua (69°01'N., 17°14'E.), which dries and is marked
8.53
dex No. 21495) is a natural coastal harbor situated on the E by a light, lies at the S end of Tranoyfjorden on the W side of
side of the N entrance point to Sagfjorden, 0.75 mile ENE of the fairway, 0.75 mile off Stonglandet. Foul ground with sever-
Foroya. There is a concrete quay, 72m long, with depths of 7.7 al islets, including Leikangsoy, extends N about 2 miles from a
to 9.2m alongside. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 10m, position 0.3 mile NE of Bispeflua. A reef fringes Hoyholmen,
stones, between the quay and an islet 0.25 mile E. an islet 2 miles N of Leikangsoy.
In hard winters, ice can lie in Sagfjorden from Salangsverket
8.52 Solbergfjorden (69°08'N., 17°38'E.), formed between the
8.53
to Sjovegan, where the quays are blocked. SE side of Senja and on the E by the mainland, is the continua-
Sjovegan (68°53'N., 17°50'E.) (World Port Index No.
8.52 tion of Indreleia from Tranoyfjorden. The fjord is broad and
21510) is the administrative center for the Salangen district. It free from dangers in the fairway.
is a coastal harbor protected by breakwaters, situated on the The tidal currents in Solbergfjorden set N with the rising tide
8.53
NE shore of Sagfjorden, 2.75 miles SE of Salangsverket. There and S with the falling tide.
are several quays up to 48m in length, with depths of up to 8m. During W winds, heavy squalls, which may blow from any
8.53
Mjosundet (68°54'N., 17°27'E.), formed between Andorja

8.52 direction, are experienced near Klauva Light (69°11'N.,
on the SW side and the mainland on the NE side, is entered 17°58'E.). These squalls decrease as Finnsnes is approached
from Astafjorden in a position about 3 miles N of the entrance and it becomes nearly calm in Gisundet. If it is blowing hard
to Lavangen. from S or SE, irregular winds may be expected, and violent
Mjosundholmen (68°53'N., 17°28'E.), an islet marked by a
8.52 squalls may strike down from Kistefjell, a peak 5 miles NE of
light, lies in the SE entrance to the sound. The islet may be Finnsnes.
passed on either side. A shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m, From Solbergfjorden, the fairway of Indreleia leads NE be-
8.53
lies 0.3 mile ENE of the islet. tween Klauva Light and Grunnreisaskjaer (69°11'N.,
In Mjosundet, there is nearly always a strong W and N flow,
8.52 18°02'E.), a rocky 4.9m shoal, about 2 miles E. From this shoal
but after N winds of long duration it is weaker, and may occa- the track turns NW toward Finnsnes, the S entrance to Finns-
sionally run S and E. A bridge, with a vertical clearance of nesrenna.
Finnsnes—Berth Information
Finnsnes Main Quay
Coastal 169m 3.0-7.2m Fast ferries, ro-ro/lo-lo, containers, breakbulk, and reefer.
North Quays
Building Materials 56m 5.7-8.0m Breakbulk.
Mack’s 67m 5.3-8.3m Breakbulk.
Pub. 182
Finnsnes—Berth Information
Multi Use 78m 5.6-6.5m Breakbulk.
South Quays
Timber Merchant 39m 3.9-4.8m Breakbulk.
The approach to Finnsnesrenna, which is entered W of Finn-

8.53 trance, losing strength toward a point 5 miles N of Finnsnes,
snes, leads between Storvikgrunn, on the W side, and Millom- where it meets the S flood current from Malangen.
grunn on the E side of the fairway. They have least depths of
7.9m and 12.8m, respectively. 8.56 Gibostad (69°21'N., 18°05'E.) (World Port Index No.
The E part of the channel connecting Solbergfjorden and
8.53 21380) is situated on the W side of Gisundet. It is a natural
Finnsnesrenna is Finnfjorden, and the W part is Laksfjorden. coastal natural with a packet boat quay, 59m long, with depths
At Storvik, in Finnfjordbotn, the NE part of Finnfjorden,
8.53 of 5.5 to 7.5m alongside.
there is a poorly fendered quay 25m long with 6.5 to 7.5m An area prohibited to diving, fishing, and anchoring is chart-
8.56
alongside. At Storneset, close SSW of Storvik, there is a quay ed N of Gibostad.

associated with the smelting works, 42m long with 13m Gisundet extends about 8 miles N from Gibostad to Malan-
8.56
alongside. gen, the approach to Tromso.

Hemmingfjorden (69°12'N., 18°04'E.), about 1 mile NNE
8.53 Sandholmen (69°25'N., 18°06'E.), an islet surrounded by
8.56
of Grunnreisaskjaer, has a timber quay 31m long, with depths shoal water, lies on the W side of the fairway, 3.75 miles N of
of 4.5 to 7.5m alongside. The quay is in poor repair. Gibostad. The shoal water is marked on its E edge, about 0.3
mile off the islet. Other foul ground lies on the W side of the
8.54 Finnsnes (69°14'N., 17°58'E.) (World Port Index No. fairway NNW of Sandholmen.
21490) is the administrative center for the Lenvik district. It is The white sector of the light on Slettneset (69°23'N.,
8.56
a natural coastal harbor situated at the SE entrance to 18°06'E.), 1.5 miles NNE of Gibostad, leads E of the dangers
Finnsnesrenna. off the W side of Gisundet and into the white sector of the light
Depths—Limitations.—See table titled Finnsnes—Berth
8.54 on Lille Rodbergsodden (69°27'N., 18°08'E.), 4.75 miles
Information NNE. A bight, about 1 mile NE of Lille Rodbergsodden, is
The main channel through Finnsnesrenna and Gisundet has
8.54 foul.
been reported (2014) to be dredged to a depth of 10m. A sec- Prohibited Military Areas are located in the vicinity of
8.56
ondary channel has been reported (2014) to have a minimum Rodbergsodden and Skorliodden, and at the NW entrance point
dredged depth of 8m over a navigable width of 120m. to Gisundet.
The W channel is entered W of Finnsnesskjaer (69°14'N.,
8.54 Aglapsbaen, a group of rocks partly awash, lies 0.5 mile off-
8.56
17°58'E.), a shoal which dries, situated about 0.4 mile NNW shore 1.5 miles NE of the light.
from the light on Finnsnes. Indreleia leads into Malangen through the broad entrance of
8.56
A bridge, with a vertical clearance of 41m, spans Finnsnes-

8.54 Gisundet, N of Lille Rodbergsodden.
renna, about 1 mile N of Finnsnes. The white sector of the
lights on the bridge leads through the channel. Andenes to Tromso
Regulations.—Traffic is controlled from a signal station sit-
8.54
uated about 0.5 mile N of Finnsnes. 8.57 From abreast of Andenes, the W side of Senja trends
Southbound traffic has right of passage over northbound traf-
8.54 about 29 miles NE to the seaward entrance to Malangen, the
fic. Vessels with a draft of less than 6.1m use the E channel. passage leading to Tromso. Kvaloy is on the N side of Malan-
Signals.—The following signals, shown at the signal station,
8.54 gen and W of Tromso.
indicate that passage is closed to northbound traffic: Both islands have abrupt declivities toward the sea, and are
8.57
1. By day—Flag N of the International Code of Signals fronted by banks, with islets and below-water rocks extending
over a black ball. up to 11 miles off the NW side of Kvaloy.
2. By night—A white light over a red light. Two large banks, Sveinsgrunn and Malangsgrunden, with
8.57
depths of less than 183m, extend, respectively, to a distance of

8.55 Finnsnesrenna (69°14'N., 17°58'E.), formed in the 25 miles W of Senja, and 35 miles W of the N part of Kvaloy.
narrows between Senja and the mainland, is entered abreast of Between the two banks, a fissure, with depths over 280m,
8.57
Finnsnes and leads N into Gisundet. Gisundet extends in a gen- extends into Malangen and to a short distance from the outer
eral N direction for about 16 miles to its junction with Malan- dangers extending W from Kvaloy. The approach to Malangen
gen, off the NE extremity of Senja. is made with considerable danger in thick weather, even with
Gisundet (69°18'N., 17°58'E.) is well marked; the dangers
8.55 careful attention to soundings.
and navigational aids may best be seen on the chart. A vessel, having made the W coast of Senja between An-
8.57
Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set through Gisundet

8.55 denes and Kvaloy, with the island of Andoya bearing 180°, can
with considerable strength, attaining their greatest velocity in obtain a fix by means of the mountains on Senja. Vessels run-
the vicinity of Gibostad, about 8 miles N of the bridge. ning the W side of Senja should not close to within a distance
With the rising tide the tidal current sets N from the S en-
8.55 of 6 miles.
Pub. 182
Strangers will have difficulty in identifying this part of the

8.57 (69°31'N., 18°13'E.) about 3 miles NNE of the entrance to Gis-
coast from the offing. When seen from a distance, the larger is- undet. With a N wind out of Straumsbukta, 9 miles E of
lands appear to diminish those in the background, and on clos- Greipstad, and S through Malangen, it is often calm in Rystrau-
er view, to hide them altogether. At a distance, the islands men.
themselves lose their height and peculiarity of outline and ap- During E winds out of Malangen, it is often calm in Stonnes-
8.58
pear to form a continuous mass, which is capped by so many botn, on the SW side of the passage, 4 miles SE of Hekkingen.
sharp peaks that considerable local knowledge is required to It is also often calm under these conditions from Asnes, 5 miles
identify with certainty any one in particular. ESE of Greipstad, to a position about 2 miles farther ENE.
The most conspicuous points are Aldenes (69°20'N.,
8.57 During SE winds in Malangen, strong squalls are experi-
8.58
16°0'E.), the N extremity of Andoya, and the N point of enced from S of Straumsbukta to a position about 3 miles SW;
Kvaloy, about 30 miles NE of the NW extremity of Senja. As a these squalls are especially frequent at the SW position.
rule the openings of the numerous fjords and channels will be During SW winds in Malangen, irregular winds will be expe-
8.58
the most useful guides. rienced from the NW entrance point of Gisundet, seaward.
Aspect.—Kjerringneset (69°19'N., 16°55'E.), a point on
8.57 During W winds, it is often calm in the neighborhood of the
Senja 16.5 miles E of Andenes, is a good landmark when ap- NW entrance to Gisundet.
proaching the coast from W of Andenes. Maneset, Teistneset, Tides—Currents.—During the spring season the, tidal cur-
8.58
and Traelen, 3.75 miles N, 5.75 miles NNE and 8 miles NNE, rents set very strongly out of Malangen, independently of the
respectively, from Kjerringneset, are good marks. tidal currents close inshore on both sides of the fjord, where
At the N extremity of Senja is Kjolva (69°36'N., 17°30'E.),
8.57 they turn at the times of HW and LW.
416m high, which is especially prominent and can hardly be During the summer and autumn months, the ebb currents
8.58
mistaken from a position NW of Andenes. have the stronger set, whereas during the winter months the set
Snefjell, a rounded snowy summit 653m high, about 13
8.57 is more strongly into the fjord. The tidal currents set strongly
miles S of Kjolva, and Kvennan, 967m high with pointed through the channel SE of Hekkingen, taking a W direction
peaks, about 15 miles SW of Snefjell, are also good marks with the falling tide.
from NW of Andenes. Numerous whirlpools occur in Rystraumen when the tidal
8.58
When nearing the coast NW of Kjolva, the opening of Oy-

8.57 currents are running at their maximum strength; when passing
fjorden, on the E side of Kjolva, will be visible. About 8 miles through them great attention must be paid to the steering.
SE and 7.5 miles ESE of Kjolva are Skinnkollen and Astria, The tidal currents in Rystraumen set SW with the falling tide
8.58
731m and 742m high, respectively, which are the most import- and NE with the rising tide, the turn occurring at the times of
ant marks for the entrance to Malangen. HW and LW. They set strongly through the passage, attaining a
In the vicinity of Kvaloy at Malangen, the island of Haja
8.57 maximum velocity of 6 to 7 knots.
(69°44'N., 18°05'E.), 486m high, lies about 12 miles NNE of According to the latest observations in Tromsoysundet, the
8.58
Astria. It can be distinguished from the neighboring islands tidal currents set S from about 1 hour 45 minutes before HW un-
and hills, by its precipitous fall to seaward. til about 1 hour 45 minutes before LW, when they turn and set N
About 3 miles E of the summit of Haja is the summit of Ses-
8.57 until about 1 hour before HW. At springs the velocity is up to 6
soya, 657m high. About 8 miles NE of Sessoya are the pointed knots at the narrowest part, being strongest midway between the
peaks of Vengsoya, up to 765m high. turns of the currents. The average velocity is from 4 to 5 knots in
From a position W of Auvaer (69°52'N., 18°00'E.), a group
8.57 the narrowest part and from 2 to 3 knots N and S of this part.
of islets on the foul bank extending from the N end of Kvaloy, During N gales the tidal currents set S almost continuously, the
the Alp-like mountains of that island will be seen behind the is- slack lasting only for about 0.2 hour, when they continue to set S
lands in the foreground. The mountains bordering Ersfjorden, with S winds there may be slack water for 0.25 hour, otherwise
together with Tromtind, 3 miles NE of Sessoya, and Blaman- the currents turn with no period of slack water.
nen, 5.5 miles SE of Tromtind, are the most conspicuous. Owing to the formation of the bottom, the tidal currents do
8.58
Pilotage.—There is a pilot station at Andenes; 12 hours ad-

8.57 not run truly in the direction of Tromsoysundet. The N current,
vance ETA is required. If entering by Lodingen, 2 hours notice for example, often sets in toward the mainland in the vicinity of
is required. The pilot boats guard VHF channel 16. Krokelva, the mouth of which is about 3 miles NE of Stor-
steinnes Light; therefore when visibility is bad especially care-
8.58 Malangen is entered between Hekkingen (69°36'N., ful navigation is necessary.
17°50'E.) and Edoya, 1.5 miles NE. A light is situated on each When proceeding S against the N current a vessel will al-
8.58
entrance point. This channel is the best approach from the SW ways have the current on the starboard bow, and is therefore li-
to Tromso. able to go ashore on Tomasjordnes, about 1.25 miles NE of
Hekkingen Light is shown from a low tower on a wooden
8.58 Storsteinnes Light.
house, 10m in height. A racon is located at the light tower. Caution.—Firing areas are established in Malangen from
8.58
Malangen extends about 13 miles in a SE direction to its

8.58 Hekkingen to the junctions with Gisundet and Straums Fjord.
junction with Straumsfjorden. An arm of Malangen continues Dangers in the entrance to Malangen may best be seen on the
8.58
SE for about 12 miles to Nordfjorden, which lies at its head. chart.

Indreleia enters Malangen from Gisundet about 10 miles
8.58
from its W entrance. 8.59 Kvaltyvan (69°39'N., 17°45'E.), a group of below-

Winds—Weather.—During N winds over Malangen, it will
8.58 water rocks with a least depth of 5.8m, lies on the SW side of
often be calm, or there may be a light breeze off Greipstad the approach to Malangen, in a position 3.25 miles NW of
Pub. 182
Hekkingen. tends about 8 miles S from its entrance. The S half of the fjord
On the NE side of the fairway, shoals, with a depth of 4.9m
8.59 is shoal.
at its outer end, extend 0.8 mile NNW from Edoya. Nordfjorden, the SE continuation of Malangen, is entered E
8.60
Within the entrance there are no dangers in the fairway, ex-

8.59 of Malsnes (69°21'N., 18°34'E.), which lies 4 miles SSE of
cept for a narrow coastal reef off Kvaloy. Spilderoya. Aursfjorden, which branches S from Nordfjorden,
Caution.—An ammunition dumping ground lies in Malan-
8.59 is entered about 3 miles SSE of Malsnes. A reef extends about
gen, with its N end situated about 2 miles SE of Hekkingen. 0.5 mile N from the E entrance point of the fjord.
From Greipstad, the S extremity of Kvaloy, the continuation
8.59 A cable, with a vertical clearance of 26m, spans Nordfjorden
8.60
of Indreleia from the E end of Malangen is known as Straums- 6.75 miles within its entrance.
fjorden, with the narrows between Kvaloy and the island
Ryoya, known as Rystraumen (69°33'N., 18°43'E.), where the 8.61 Ballsfjorden (Balsfjorden) (69°32'N., 18°55'E.) is en-
channel has a least width of 0.2 mile between the shore banks. tered between Balsnesodden, 1.75 miles ENE of Ryoya, and
It has been reported (2008) that tidal currents of up to 7 knots Bergholmen, an islet 2.25 miles E. The fjord indents the main-
occur at maximum flood and ebb. It is recommended that ves- land about 25 miles, in a SE direction.
sels transit this area at slack water or at a speed of 15 knots at Winds—Weather.—It has been reported that it is dangerous
8.61
other times. for small craft to approach Malangen from the NW during a
Skallen, a shoal patch with a least depth of 7.9m, lies in the
8.59 NW gale, as strong opposing currents may be encountered
W entrance to Rystraumen, 0.15 mile NW of Ryoya. A rock NNE of Hekkingen.
NE of the light N of Ryoya is especially dangerous, as the SW Ice.—During the ice season, Ballsfjorden is usually
8.61
tidal current sets toward it. obstructed for about 8 miles from its head; occasionally the ice
The coastal reef extends about 0.3 mile SSE from Tisnes
8.59 may extend N to within a few miles of the entrance.
(69°36'N., 18°50'E.), 3 miles NNE of Ryoya; a drying reef lies Depths—Limitations.—Ramfjorden branches E about 3
8.61
E of Tisnes. miles within the entrance to Ballsfjorden. A pier, with a length

A shoal, with a least charted depth of 3.4m, lies 1.25 miles
8.59 of 95m, is reported (2008) to be located at Ramfjorden
NE of Tisnes. (Olavsvern). An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of
The coastal reef which fringes the mainland on the SE side
8.59 45m, spans the fjord close within its entrance.
of Tromsoysundet dries in places. A rock, awash, lies on the Vessels up to 24,783 dwt, with a maximum length of 177m, a
8.61
reef 0.5 mile S of the bridge which spans the channel. maximum draft of 8.3m, and a maximum beam of 26m, can be
accommodated in the port. See the table titled Ballsfjorden—
8.60 Tennskjerholmen (69°29'N., 18°19'E.) lies close off Berth Information
the W side of Malangen, 3.5 miles SSE of Greipstad; from this The shorn.reef fringing the W side of Ballsfjorden extends to
8.61
position Malangen continues SSE. a distance of 0.5 mile in places; an 8.8m patch lies near mid-
Foroya lies on the E side of the channel, 2.5 miles E of Tenn-
8.60 channel, about 8 miles within the entrance.
skjerholmen. A shoal, with a charted depth of 1.8m, extends A measured mile is situated on the E shore of Ballsfjorden,
8.61
0.4 mile from the mainland, from a position about 2 miles S of with the N limit at Bergholmen. The N outer mark stands on a
Foroya. skerry near Ytre Berg; the S outer mark stands near Holmeslet-
Tromsoya (69°40'N., 18°57'E.), 5.75 miles NNE of Ryoy, is
8.60 ta. The course to be made good is 162°/342° at a distance of
fringed by a coastal reef, which extends up to 0.2 mile from the about 0.5 mile from the outer marks.
SE and SW sides. Caution.—Vessels approaching Malangen from W should
8.61
Spilderoya (69°25'N., 18°29'E.) lies on the E side of the

8.60 stand sufficiently far N to clear Kvaltyvan (69°39'N.,
fairway, 2.5 miles S of Foroya, and is surrounded by a flat 17°45'E.) before altering course for the entrance to the fjord.
which extends 0.35 mile NNW from the N end and 0.7 mile When the dangers NW of Edoya are abeam, alter course into
8.61
SSE from the S end. There is a 1.8m depth charted on the N Malangen, keeping in mid-channel, and then into Indreleia.
flat, and 4.9m charted at the extremity of the S flat. The SW coast of Kvaloy should not be approached closer
8.61
It has been reported there is good anchorage, in 27m, 2 miles

8.60 than 0.3 mile, as many large boulders lie at some distance from
SE of Spilderoya. It is protected from SE weather. the shore.
Malselvfjorden, entered 3.75 miles SSE of Spilderoya, ex-
8.60
Ballsfjorden—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Bergneset Harbor
Clean products, fishing vessels, breakbulk,
East 130m 8.4m — — — —
and reefer.
West 70m 10.8m 177m 8.3m 26.0m 24,783 dwt Clean products.
Pub. 182
8.61 Tromso
Tromso (69°39'N., 18°57'E.) 3. The new port of Breivika stands about 1.75 miles N of
the city center and has container, ro-ro, and fishing industry
World Port Index No. 21310 facilities.
8.62 The city of Tromso is located on the islands of Trom- Port of Tromso
soya and Kvaloya, and on the neighboring mainland. It is about
30 miles from the open sea. Tromso’s municipality, which is, in https://www.tromso.havn.no/en
area, Norway’s largest, extends to additional islands and over a
large area of the mainland. The highest mountain in the munic- Winds—Weather.—Weather conditions seldom seriously
8.62
ipality is Jiekkevarre, which is 1,833m high. Tromsdalstind, interfere with port working conditions. The harbor and ap-
which is visible from the town center, rises to 1,238m. proaches are ice-free.
Tromso experiences 2 months of midnight sun from May 21
8.62
Tides—Currents.—Strong and somewhat complex tidal
8.62
until July 23. The sun does not rise in Tromso from November currents are liable to be experienced in the whole area around
25 until January 21. Tromsoya, reaching a velocity of 4 to 5 knots in the narrowest
Tromso’s harbor has several installations:
8.62
part of Tromsoysundet abreast the N mole.
1. Prostnesset, the old port, stands near the W end of the A marked, irregular countercurrent is experienced close to
8.62
Tromso Bridge.close to the center of the city, and is com- the shore alongside the moles. In the vicinity of the bridge, the
posed of three sections: current starts flowing in a S direction 1 hour 30 minutes prior
a. Sondre Havn, located about 0.5 mile SSW of the to HW and reverses direction 1 hour 30 minutes prior to LW.
bridge, is protected by the S breakwater. The mean tidal range is 1.8m and the spring range is 2.4m.
8.62
b. Indre Havn, which is close to and SSW of the Depths—Limitations.—There are numerous berths in the
8.62
bridge, is protected by the N breakwater. port located on both sides of the Tromso channel. Vessels up to
c. Polsehamna, the third section of the old harbor, is N 40,000 dwt with a maximum draft of 10.4m can be accommo-
of the bridge. dated.
2. The Grotsund Industrial Port stands on the mainland Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
8.62
side of Tromsoysundet, near the channel’s northern mouth, Tromso—Berth Information.

where it meets Grotsundet.
Tromso—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Breivika Area
No. 20 200m 6.5-7.5m 86.5m — — Ro-ro/lo-lo and breakbulk.
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Breivika Terminal
21 103m 10.4-11m 98.9m — —
22 103m 10.4-11m 120.5m — — Cruise vessels and breakbulk. Contin-
23 103m 10.4-11m 236.7m — — uous berthing length of 412m.
24 103m 11.0m 293.6m — —
25 150m 11.5m 134.4m — — Cruise vessels and breakbulk.
Ferdigbetong Terminal
Center 27m — 116.7m — — Cement.
East 25m — 124.5m — — Cement.
West 23m — 81.3m — — Cement.
Grotsund Industrial Port
Ro-ro/lo-lo, project/heavy, bunkers,
Cargo 130m 2.2m — — —
and breakbulk.
Prostnset Area
No. 1 90m 3.3-5.4m 58.7m — — —
No. 1 S 97m 2.3-4.6m 37m — — —
No. 2 50m 4.3-4.9m 58.6m — — —
No. 3 64m 3.0m 58m — — —
Cruise vessels, containers, and break-
No. 6 80m 3.1-5.7m 58.6m — —
bulk.
Cruise vessels, containers, and break-
No. 7 190m 9.9m 193.3m — —
bulk.
Cruise vessels and breakbulk. Contin-
No. 8 — 7.5-9.5m 228.3m — —
uous berthing length of 300m.
No. 9 62m 2.2-5.3m 40.6m — — —
No. 9 Brekken 25m 5.8-6.1m 81.8m — — —
No. 10 and 11 85m 3.2m — — — —
No. 12 64m 3.0-3.4m 35m — — —
Tromso
A/S Pellerin Jetty 12m 4.1-5.2m — — — —
Cruise vessels, ro-ro/lo-lo, break-
Barets Shipping 95m 7.1m 119.9m — —
bulk, and reefer.
Mack’s Bryggeri 90m 4.6m 99.8m — — Fishing vessels and breakbulk.
Solstrand A/S 190m 5.9m 119.9m — — Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Troms Fryseterminal 100m 7.7-10.2m 119.9m — — Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Tromsdalen 65m — 123m — — Fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Multipurpose and bunkers. Continu-
Tromso Bunkerdepot — 3.7-7.0m 150m 7.0m —
ous berthing length of 245m.
Bunker Oil AS-Tromso Tankanlegg
Nordolje (E-Side) 110m 6.8m 120m 6.5m 7,112 dwt Petroleum products and bunkers.
Pub. 182
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Size
Shell Terminal
Shell 45m 12.8m 200m 11.5m 40,641 dwt
and bunkers.
The Tromso Bridge, spanning Tromsoysundet, has a

8.62
Tromso—Contact Information
horizontal navigational width of 60m and a vertical clearance
of 36m. The centerline of the channel is indicated by lights and Facsimile 47-75-719400
a racon and has a charted depth of 6.9m. E-mail havnevakta@tromso.havn.no
Pilotage.—Harbor pilotage is compulsory for all vessels
8.62
over 300 gt. Regular route vessels with a fixed pilot on board Port Authority
are not obliged to take a harbor pilot. Entry and exit pilots can VHF VHF channel 12
be obtained at Tromso Pilot Station.
Pilot requests are required 12 hours before arrival and ves-
8.62
sels may be berthed 24 hours. Facsimile 47-77-661856

Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but may be or-
E-mail adm@tromso.havn.no
8.62
dered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-

tional cost. For further information, see paragraph 8.1. Port Captain
8.62
a. 0.8 mile ENE of Hekkingen Light in position
69°38.5'N, 17°51.9'E. Harbor Authority
b. On request only, in position 69°31.7'N, 18° 01.9'E. VHF VHF channels 8, 12, and 16
c. 2 miles E of Fakkekjeila Light in position 70°06.0'N,
20°12.9E.
Anchorage.—Polsehavn affords anchorage in 11 to 12.8m.
8.62
d. On request only, 2 miles NE of Grotnes Light in posi-

Large vessels can anchor on the W side of the fairway, in a
tion 69°52.4'N, 19°47.6E.
depth of 31m, from 0.5 to 1.5 miles N of the bridge.
Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine ca-
8.62
8.62
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph

bles which cross Tromsoysundet close S of the S mole.
1.1.
Regulations.—Vessels navigating within the port area are
8.62
8.63 Sandnessundet (69°41'N., 18°54'E.), between the E

forbidden to proceed at a greater speed than required for their
side of Kvaloy and Tromsoya, is the principal channel leading
safe maneuvering. Vessels of more than 500 tons must not ex- past Tromsoya. Vessels exceeding 7,000 tons displacement are
ceed 5 knots between the S mole and Storsteinnes; however, required to use it.
when passing under the bridge it may be necessary to use
The narrowest part, between Langneset (69°41'N., 18°54'E.)
8.63
speeds of 10 to 12 knots at times other than slack water.

and Sandneset, 1.5 miles NNE, has been dredged to a depth of
Vessels arriving at Tromso and not having an allotted berth
8.62
16.5m, with a navigable width of 100m.

must anchor in Polsehavn, about 0.2 mile NE of the W end of
The Sandressundet Bridge spans the channel 0.75 mile N of
8.63
the bridge.
Langneset. It has a vertical clearance of 41m over a navigable
Contact Information.—See the table titled Tromso—Con-
8.62
width of 140m. The centerline is marked by lights and a racon.

tact Information.
Store Grindoy (69°38'N., 18°51'E.) lies on the W side of the
8.63
S entrance to Sandnessundet. A bank, with patches of 3m, ex-

Tromso—Contact Information tends about 1 mile N and S from the island. A bank, with a
depth of 1.8m at its extremity, extends 1 mile SSW from Lang-
Port Control neset.
VHF VHF channels 12, 13, 14, and 16 9.The dangers, which may best be seen on the chart, are
marked by navigational aids. The white sectors of the various
Telephone 47-77-661852 lights lead through the dredged channel and to Indreleia.
Pub. 182
Sector 9—Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
Pub. 182
221
223
SECTOR 9
NORWAY—MALANGEN TO VARANGERFJORDEN
Plan.—This section describes the N coast of Norway from

9.0 Sea region.
Malangen to Varangerfjorden. It describes the outer route, and 9.1The route applies to oil, gas, and chemical tankers of all siz-
inner route or Indreleia, and the inner fjords between Tromso es, including all cargo vessels of 5,000 gross ton and above on
and Porsangerfjorden. The fjords and ports in the vicinity of international voyages.
Varangerfjorden are also described. 9.1Ships on international voyages off the coast to and from Rost
(67°31'N., 12°07'E.) to Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.) should
General Remarks strictly follow the new routing systems; however, ships making
ports-of-call in Norway for supplies or services are recom-
9.1 Winds—Weather.—Weather reports for this area are mended to follow the intermediary routes to ports as portrayed
frequently broadcast. The area is often affected by travelling N on the chart or as advised by the pilot or the VTS of the ports
Atlantic depressions and associated fronts. It is, therefore, a concerned.
stormy area, especially during the winter months. 9.1Eastbound traffic should use the traffic lane on the S side of
9.1 The climate in the landlocked places of the inner reaches of each TSS; westbound traffic should use the traffic lane on the
the fjords and Indrelia is extreme and differs from the relatively N side of each TSS.
equable climate on the outlying islands. Therefore, during most 9.1For a listing of all routing and traffic separation schemes
of the year, rapid decreases or increases in air temperature (TSS) in Norwegian waters, included the off Andenes,
when entering or leaving the fjords and Indreleia may be expe- Torsvag, Soroya, North Cape, Slettnes, and Vardo; see Pub.
rienced. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
9.1At Tromso, the wind is frequently from the S to SW from 9.1Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
October through April, and from the N to NE from June VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
through August. The mean force is between 2 and 3 in mid- nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
winter and below force 2 from July through September. the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
9.1At Elvebakken, near Alta, there is little seasonal variation in areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
wind force, and it is, most often, a force 2. From October mation, see paragraph 1.1.
through March in this area, the wind is mostly from the S to 9.1Ship Reporting System.—The Barents Ship Reporting Sys-
SE; during June, July, and August, it is mostly from the W to tem operates in the Barents Sea off the coasts of Norway and
NW. Gales (force 8) are infrequent. The highest frequency the Russian Federation beginning at latitude 67°10'N off the
during winter is one per month. Gale winds are practically un- coast of Norway and continuing N, NE, and E to longitude
known during the summer months. 33°20'E off the coast of the Russian Federation. For further in-
9.1At Vardo, from October through March, the wind is mostly formation, see Arctic Ocean—Ship Reporting System in
from the S to W; from May through August, it is usually from Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
the S to SE. The wind is strongest in January and February, 9.1Dangerous Wave Areas.—Dangerous waves may be en-
when the average force is between 4 and 5 and is lightest in countered in the following areas:
August, when the average is about a force 3. Gales (force 8) are 1. Dangerous Wave Area No. 1.—A very exposed area
frequent in January and February. They occur during these covering the NE coast of Finnmark extending from position
months on an average of about 6 days per month, and occur 70°45.0'N, 30°00.0'E, off Batsfjorden, past Makkaur Light
during the months of May through August on an average of and Vardo, to position 70°00.0'N, 30°30.0'E in the entrance
less than one day per month. to Varangerfjorden. There is no protection from winds from
9.1Fog at sea is not particularly frequent; however, visibility any N direction, resulting in heavy seas running close in-
may be severely reduced during periods of heavy snowfall. The shore with full energy. Currents are very variable in the ap-
lack of daylight in winter adds to the problem of poor visibility. proaches to Varangerfjorden and the increase in wind
9.1Pilotage.—Lodingen Pilot Center organizes and engages pi- strength often found around the Vardo headland adds to the
lots for vessels in Nordland and the Troms, from Rorvik in the chaotic character of the sea conditions in this area.
S to Kirkenes in the N. Pilots should be requested 24 hours in 2. Dangerous Wave Area No. 2.—In the vicinity of the
advance. The ETA should be confirmed 2 hours prior to arrival entrance to Tanafjorden, the sea bottom topography around
at the pilot station. position 71°00.0'N, 28°50.0'E can give rise to very danger-
9.1See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic ous sea conditions. A deep trench extends from Tanafjorden
Ocean for further information. to seaward, with shallow waters on either side, causing un-
9.1Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning usually rough seas and tumbling breakers in this area. The
Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information. confused sea conditions may extend as far as 6 to 10 miles
9.1Several IMO-adopted Traffic Separation Schemes, best seen out to sea from the entrance to the fjord.
on the chart, are located off the N coast of Norway. These 3. Dangerous Wave Area No. 3.—A very exposed coast-
schemes have been established to maintain a safe sea route for al area extends from Nordkinn (71°08.0'N, 27°39.4'E) to
all vessels, especially for the transport of oil from the Barents Slettnes (71°05.4'N, 28°13.1'E), with relatively shallow wa-
Pub. 182
224 Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden
ter with depths ranging from 27 to 70m. These conditions al- 9.2A chain of outlying islets and rocks, forming one of the most
low tumbling breakers to form and the sea is especially distinctive features on the Norwegian coast, terminates about 5
rough when the wind and waves are from the NW and in op- miles N of the N extremity of the N island of Kvaloy.
position to the current. 9.2To the E, unmarked dangers extend as far as 20 miles N of
4. Dangerous Wave Area No. 4.—This area around posi- Vannoy, Fugloy, and Arnoy.
tion 71°00.0'N, 24°25.0'E extends from Garpholmen 9.2Nordvestbanken, the area and position of which can best be
(71°00.3'N, 24°43.1'E) through Breisundet, then W of seen on chart, lies about 39 miles NW of the NW side of
Havøygavlen Light (71°01.2'N, 24°33.4'E) to Rolvsøyhamn Ringvassoy. Between the SW side of this bank and Malangs-
Light (70°56.8'N, 24°12.8'E). Depths are up to 150m but grunnen (69°58'N., 17°30'E.), the bank E of Ringvassoy, there
with several shoals of 30 to 75m. In Breisundet, N to NW is a deep fissure, which has depths of over 183m at a distance
winds cause rough seas. When these seas meet a W current, of about 0.5 to 2 miles from the outer dangers W of Ribbene-
tumbling breakers can be caused. Currents, mainly tidal, soy and Grotoy. This section of the coast, as in the case farther
may reach 1.5 to 2,0 knots. Near Rolvsøyhamn seas are es- S, is extremely dangerous to approach in foggy weather, even
pecially rough with N to NE winds. In both cases, there is no when giving careful attention to the soundings.
protection from wind or seas, which reach the coast with full 9.2There are numerous navigational aids, both on the islands
energy. About 2 to 3 miles NW of Havogavlen Light and on the coast in this region, to assist the navigator mark his
(71°01.2'N, 24°33.4'E) are shoals with depths of about 30 to position. Openings to fjords and channels proves to be a useful
50m, one of which is known as Gavlgrunnen (71°02.1'N, means of identification. However, mariners new to this part of
24°27.6'E). Deflection of waves around the shoals and local the Norwegian coast may have difficulty identifying landmarks
strong winds around headlands can cause particularly rough and visually locating separations between land masses from
seas in this area extending inshore towards Havogavlen. The offshore. When seen from a distance, a group of islands may
tidal range is large and sea conditions are at their roughest appear as one continuous land mass that is capped by many
during the ebb tide. sharp peaks.
5. Dangerous Wave Area No. 5.—This area lies NW and
W of Soroya (70°38.0'N, 22°53.0'E) over an extensive shal- 9.3 Ringvassoy (69°55'N., 19°10'E.), the largest of the is-
low area with several smaller shoals and a steep slope into lands fronting the mainland, lies with its W end about 25 miles
deeper water. The current can be quite strong on the slopes NE of Malangen. To the N of Ringvassoy are the islands of
across the entire area. Several refraction centers are created Ribbenesoy, Grotoy, and Kvaloy. To the E of Kvaloy are Van-
on the leeward side of the shallow areas with waves running noy, Fugloy, and Arnoy. Southeast of Arnoy is Kvaenangen,
from NE to SW. The interaction between the waves and the which indents the coast to the SE. The large peninsula on the
current can lead to breaking waves in the area. NE side of Kvaenangen is a mass of mountains, with Svartfjell-
6. Dangerous Wave Area No. 6.—This area N and NW jokelen attaining a height of 1,218m.
of Senja (69°20.0'N, 17°30.0'E) and Kvaloya (69°41.0'N, 9.3This mountain exposes flat snow-covered surfaces from
18°37.0'E) consists of large shallow banks. Between the which glaciers extend down on almost every side to nearly the
banks the depths are greater than 400m while outside the level of the sea. The peninsula itself is indented by fjords on all
banks the slope is very steep. The current is dominated by sides.
the NE coastal current and the ordinary tidal current, which 9.3Sandoya (70°02'N., 18°32'E.) lies about 2 miles W of Rib-
moves NE with the flood tide. Several refraction centers are benesoy. The N end of the island makes a steep descent toward
created in the area with waves from NE to SW. The interac- the sea. A beacon stands on its summit.
tion between the waves from NE to NW and the NE current 9.3Sorfugloya lies about 3 miles NNW of Sandoya and on an E
can lead to breaking waves. bearing appears as an almost perfect pyramid.
9.1Caution.—An environmentally sensitive sea area, centered 9.3Ribbenesoy lies close NW of Ringvassoy and is separated
approximately 35 miles NW of Torsvag Light (71°15.0'N, from it by Skagoys channel. The S part of Ribbenesoy is undu-
19°30.0'E), lies just inshore of the northbound TSS. Trawling lating, and a white sandy beach about 2 miles from the N end
is prohibited within this area. of the island is conspicuous. Mulen, the N extremity of the is-
land, stands out from the background because of its high,
Outer Route—Malangen to Hammerfest black, and precipitous sides.
9.3Andammen, an island, lies close N of Ribbenesoy. A light is
9.2 Between Malangen, the approach to Tromso, and shown from the NW extremity of Andammen.
Hammerfest, about 100 miles NE, the outside track along the
islands leads to Soroysund. Soroysund is deep and unencum- 9.4 Grotoya (70°10'N., 18°52'E.) lies about 1 mile N of
bered, and is the best approach to Hammerfest from seaward. Andammen. The island has hills almost equal in elevation and
Because off-lying dangers extend well off the coast, and be- a somewhat precipitous descent on its N side. A light is shown
cause during the summer months there is the likelihood of fog from its NE extremity. The island of Maasvaer lies 1 mile E of
and strong NW winds, it is recommended that vessels from the Grotoy. A light is shown close off the SE coast of Maasvaer.
S, bound for Hammerfest, or vessels that intend rounding Nor- Kvaloy is about 9 miles in length with a least width of 3 miles,
dkapp should navigate well offshore, and give the coast N of and lies about 2 miles N of Ringvassoy.
Malangen a wide berth. Vessels should make landfall in the vi- 9.4A conspicuous mountain stands on the N and S ends of the
cinity of the island of Soroya (70°35'N., 22°40'E.), located islands. Helgoy, a smaller island which has a flat-topped
about 85 miles WSW of Nordkapp (71°10'N., 25°47'E.). mountainous ridge, lies about 3 miles SE of Kvaloy. A light is
Pub. 182
Sector 9. Norway—Malangen to Varangerfjorden 225
shown close off the SW coast of Helgoy. low islets extending about 2 miles N of Kvaloy.
9.4Vannoy, a large island which is flat-topped and precipitous 9.5Lopphavet (70°30'N., 21°00'E.), an area N of Fugloya, Ar-
towards the sea, lies 3 miles E of Helgoy. Tvinaren, 759m high, noy and W of Soroya. The depths vary between 0 and 400m. N
is a conspicuous peak on the N side of the island. The S part of of Fugloya to about 18 miles offshore; there are three shoal ar-
the island is mountainous, with heights of more than 914m. A eas. East and W of the shoals, the depth is more than 300m.
number of islets lie off the E and NE sides of the island. 9.5Northwest and W of Soroya, there is a major shoal area, with
9.4A marine farm is located in position 70°14'N, 19°56'E. several lesser shoals. The slope outside of these is very steep.
9.4Torsvag Light (70°15'N., 19°30'E.) is shown from a low 9.5The current may be strong at the slopes in the entire area.
tower attached to a building, 10m in height, standing on Koja 9.5With the waves coming from NE to SW, several refraction
Islet off the NW side of Vannoy. A Decca radio mast, 140m in centers occur on the leeward side of the shoal area. Interaction
height, stands about 201m N of the light. between waves and current may cause breakers in the area.
9.4Fugloya (70°16'N., 20°15'E.) lies about 4 miles NE of Van- 9.5Soroysund is entered between the SW end of Soroya and the
noy. When Fugloysveet, the channel W of Fugloy, is open, Fu- NW end of Stjernoy. The entrance has a width of about 8 miles.
gloya will appear quite detached and is then a very The fairway is deep and free of dangers. Lights are shown on
conspicuous landmark, identifiable by its pointed summit both sides of Soroysund and can best be seen on the chart. The
which is precipitous on its S and W sides. Fugloya Kalven, narrowest part of Soroysund is marked by an islet which shows
which shows a light, lies close off the NW extremity of Fugloy. a light and is known as Vatnholmen, and lies close off the SE
9.4Caution.—A firing area lies N of Vannoy in the seaward ap- coast of Soroya.
proaches to Fugloysveet. An environmentally sensitive sea ar- 9.5After passing SE of Vatnholmen, vessels should steer for Ha-
ea, best seen on the chart, where trawling is prohibited, lies just ja, 13 miles NE, giving the NW end of Seiland a fair berth. Af-
E of Fugloya. ter passing between Haja and the N end of Seiland, course may
be steered for Hammerfest harbor. The S extremity of Hjelmen,
Arnoy (Arnoya) (70°08'N., 20°36'E.) lies with its N end 9
9.4 bearing about 262° astern, and just open S of Haja, is an excel-
miles E of the summit of Fugloy. The island is very steep on its lent mark for making Hammerfest, which is not very easily dis-
N and W sides, and the cliffs of the N part of its W side are tinguished.
dark red. A large and conspicuous radio tower is situated on a
summit in the SW part of Arnoy. Navigational aids are shown 9.6 Hammerfest (70°40'N., 23°40'E.) (World Port Index
on all sides of the island and can best be seen on the chart. Lau- No. 20920), the world’s N town, is located on the W coast of
koya, an island, lies close off the E coast of Arnoy. A number the island of Kvaloy. The harbor is situated close NW of the
of islands and islets lie to the SE and S of Arnoy. Loppa lies town.
about 15 miles NE of Arnoy and on the S side of the immediate
approach to Soroysund. The island appears dark and low with a Hammerfest Port Authority Home Page
gradual slope on its N side.
http://www.hammerfesthavn.no
9.5 Silda (70°20'N., 21°45'E.) lies 5 miles E of Loppa
and shows a light from its N extremity. A light is also shown Winds—Weather.—This ice-free harbor is about 0.5 mile in
from the S end of Silda. Maroy, an islet, lies close off the S ex- extent and is surrounded by mountains except in the SW to W
tremity of Silda. section. Winds may send heavy sea into this section.
9.5Tides—Currents.—From abreast the S end of Ribbenesoy, Depth—Limitations.—The harbor is open year round and
the tidal currents set NE and into the various fjords with the ris- can accommodate vessels up to 95,785 dwt, with a maximum
ing tides and SW and out of the fjords with the falling tides. length of 300m, a maximum draft of 11m, and a maximum
The NE current may attain a velocity of 4 knots. West of Sor beam of 49m.
Fugloya, the SW current is only occasionally discernible. Charted depths in the harbor are from 18.3 to 37m a short
9.6
9.5At Kvaloy, the tidal currents set E with the rising tide and W distance offshore.
with the falling tide. The tidal current may attain a velocity of 1 Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
9.6
knot E of Kvaloy and about 4 knots at Flatvoer, the group of Hammerfest—Berth Information.
Hammerfest—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Sentrumshavna
Containers, cruise vessels,
No. 1 170m 8.0m 220m — 20.8m 40,000 dwt
breakbulk, and bunkers.
No. 2 75m 8.0m 119.9m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt Fast ferries and bunkers.
No. 3 50m 4.0-8.0m 32.5m — 10.6m — Fast ferries and bunkers.
No. 4 75m 0.0-3.1m 35.3m — 10.6m — Fast ferries and bunkers.
Pub. 182
Hammerfest—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Fast ferries, fishing vessels,
No. 5 E 35m 4.0m 51.6m — 11.6m 750 dwt
and bunkers.
No. 5 W 38m 4.0m 32.3m — 6.9m —
and bunkers.
No. 6 50m 4.0-5.0m 40m — 11.6m —
and bunkers.
Fuglenes
No. 8 70m 5.0-10.0m 90m — 12.8m 1,626 dwt Bunkers.
Chemicals, clean products,
cruise vessels, offshore ves-
No. 9 145m — 220m 11.0m — 60,000 dwt
sels, fishing vessels, multi-
purpose, and bunkers.
Offshore vessels, fishing ves-
No. 10 130m 11.0m 50m — 12.0m 1,050 dwt
sels, and bunkers.
No. 11 65m 6.0-8.0m 58.6m — 11.0m 1,066 dwt Fishing vessels.
No. 12 140m 5.0m 55m — — — Fishing vessels and bunkers.
No. 20 40m 5.0m 55m — — — Fishing vessels and bunkers.
No. 21 70m 5.7m 120m — 20.8m 7,102 dwt Salt, breakbulk, and bunkers.
No. 22 N 75m 5.9m 32.3m — 6.9m — Breakbulk and bunkers.
No. 22 S 30m 5.9m 32.3m — 6.9m — Bunkers.
Bulk, ro-ro, breakbulk, and
No. 23 60m 6.0m 119.9m — 20.8m 4,900 dwt
bunkers.
Polarbase
Cement, breakbulk, and bun-
No. 71 290m 10.0m 200m — 22.0m 60,000 dwt
kers.
No. 75 90m 12.0m 109.6m — 14.9m 7,569 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
No. 91 65m 4.5m 39.4m — 9.9m 400 dwt Breakbulk and bunkers.
Snohvit LNG Terminal (Melkoya Island)
Snohvit Condensates, LNG, and LPG.
123m 16.2m 300m — 49.0m 95,785 dwt
No. 50 Gas capacity of 140,000m3.
Stornes
Equinor — 10.0m 213m — — 33,000 dwt Bunkers. Closed.
9.6Larger vessels with deeper drafts may enter the harbor and The harbor pilot boards at the harbor entrance.
9.6
use the anchorage. Vessel Traffic Service.—The Hammerfest VTS Area is a

9.6
9.6Aspect—Landmarks.—A light is shown from the head of a sub-system of the NOR VTS Area. Participation is mandatory
breakwater which extends SE from the end of Fuglenes. A light for all Category 1 and Category 2 vessels carrying liquid haz-
is shown on the mole on the SE side of the harbor entrance. ardous and/or polluting bulk cargo).
9.6Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must submit a Notice of
9.6
through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen ETA and obtain permission from NOR VTS, as follows:
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost. 1. At least 6 hours prior to entering the VTS area (24
9.6The pilot boards off Akkarfjordnaeringen in position hours for vessels which require extraordinary safety mea-
70°47.0'N, 23°32.2'E. Due to weather conditions, vessels are sures or planning).
allowed to continue to pick up the pilot in position 70°40.5'N, 2. When/if the vessel wishes to change its route in rela-
23°30.0'E; this is the most-used position. tion to what has been decided or agreed to with the VTS
Pub. 182
9.6 By Clemensfranz (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

9.6 Hammerfest
Center. This also applies to stops en route. Sailing Plan or what has been previously agreed with the
3. Before a vessel departs from a quay or anchorage. VTS center.
9.6The Notice of ETA should contain the following informa- 3. Immediately after mooring or anchoring the vessel.
tion: 4. As soon as possible if the vessel suffers an accident.
1. Vessel’s name and call sign. 5. At least 1 hour before leaving a berth or anchorage.
2. Vessel’s position at time of sending the Notice of For details on NOR VTS, see the section titled Vessel Traffic
9.6
ETA. Service in paragraph 1.1.

3. Planned route and port of destination. Contact Information.—See the table titled Hammerfest—
9.6
4. The ETA at the VTS Area and the ETA at the port, Contact Information.
mooring, or anchorage in the VTS Area.
5. The ETD from a port, mooring, or anchorage for ves- Hammerfest—Contact Information
sels already within the VTS Area.
6. Name, address, and telephone number of the vessel’s Port Authority
shipbroker or agent in Norway, if applicable. Telephone 47-78-407400
9.6The Notice of ETA should be submitted in writing, but will
also be accepted by VHF.
9.6Category 1 and Category 2 vessels must report to NOR VTS, E-mail post@hammerfest.havn.no
via VHF, as follows:
Harbormaster
1. At least 1 hour before entering the VTS Area.
2. As soon as possible if a vessel makes a change to its VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Pub. 182
Hammerfest—Contact Information maximum capacity of 38,000m3.

3. Condensate vessels—up to 50,000 dwt, with a maxi-
Telephone 47-78-407402 mum length of 180m.
Berthing Restrictions and Tug Requirements
E-mail harbour@hammerfest.havn.no
Vardo VTS Center Vessel size Maximum Maximum Number of
(up to) wind speed wave height tugs
VHF VHF channels 16 and 71 (NOR VTS)
15,000m3 35 knots 1.0m 1
Facsimile 47-78-989899 30,000m3 31 knots 1.0m 2
E-mail nor.vts@kystverket.no 60,000m3 29 knots 1.5m 3

No restric-
9.6Anchorage.—Large vessels may ride securely, in depths of 160,000m3 24 knots
tions
3
27.4 to 45.7m, off the SE side of Fuglenes, which is the best
anchorage in the harbor. Five mooring buoys for securing the Construction Jetty, at the S end of the island, is used for the
9.7
stern lines of vessels at anchor, are located in well-sheltered handling of dry cargo. It has a safe berthing depth of 10m. Ves-
positions on both sides of the harbor. Anchoring is appointed sels over 120m long will not be allowed to remain alongside
by a state pilot or a harbor pilot. the pier while LNG is being loaded at Product Jetty.
9.6The smaller inner harbor can accommodate a number of All vessels are required to have a minimum under-keel clear-
9.7
moderate-sized vessels. Although it is exposed to W winds, the ance of 1.5m.

harbor is secure. Depths of 9.1 to 31m are found in this anchor- Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilotage should be or-
9.7
age. Vessels making a long stay should anchor off the SE side dered using SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodin-
of Fuglenes where it is more protected and clear of harbor traf- gen Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
fic. Pilots board, as follows:
9.7
1. Vessels greater than 20,000 gross tons—about 20

9.7 Melkoya LNG Terminal (Hammerfest LNG Termi- miles W of Fruholmen Light in position 71°05.0'N,
nal) (70°41'N., 23°35'E.) is located on Melkoya, about 1.75 23°27.0'E (by helicopter) or in position 70°38.0'N, 21°13.3'E
miles NW of Hammerfest. Berthing facilities are on the SE (Lopphavet, by helicopter).
side of the island. 2. Other vessels—about 1.5 miles NE of the entrance to
Depths—Limitations.—Product Jetty is 125m long, with a
9.7
Akkarfjorden in position 70°47.0'N, 23°32.0'E. (by pilot ves-

least depth alongside of 16.2m. Vessel limitations are, as fol- sel).
lows: Regulations.—Vessels are required to notify the terminal of
9.7
1. LNG vessels—a maximum length of 300m, with a their ETA, via their agent, as listed in the table titled
maximum capacity of 160,000m3. Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements.
2. LPG vessels—a maximum length of 300m, with a
Melkoya—ETA Reporting Requirements

LNG Vessels Condensate Vessels (oil tankers) LPG Vessels
Not less than 8 days in advance or
upon departure from the last dis-
— —
charge port if less than 8 days dis-
tant.
Ninety-six (96) hours prior to arriv-
al. If the ETA changes by more than Not less than 96 hours prior to ar- Not less than 96 hours prior to ar-
9 hours, the terminal must be ad- rival. rival.
vised immediately.
Forty-eight (48) hours prior to ar- Forty-eight (48) hours prior to ar- Forty-eight (48) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more rival. If the ETA changes by more rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 6 hours, the terminal must be than 6 hours, the terminal must be than 6 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately. advised immediately. advised immediately.
Twenty-four (24) hours prior to ar- Twenty-four (24) hours prior to ar- Twenty-four (24) hours prior to ar-
rival. If the ETA changes by more rival. If the ETA changes by more rival. If the ETA changes by more
than 3 hours, the terminal must be than 3 hours, the terminal must be than 3 hours, the terminal must be
advised immediately. advised immediately. advised immediately.
Five (5) hours prior to arrival. Five (5) hours prior to arrival. Five (5) hours prior to arrival.
Pub. 182
9.7The ETA messages should contain the following informa- are required to remain at least 12 miles from the terminal.
tion: Vessels are not allowed to approach the terminal if the visi-
9.7
1. Vessel name. bility is less than 1 mile.

2. Call sign. Vessels will not be permitted to sail if the winds speeds are
9.7
3. Nationality. in excess of 29 knots.

4. Beam, gross tonnage, and loa.
5. Draft. Melkoya—Contact Information
6. Type of cargo.
7. Destination. Call sign Hammerfest LNG
8. Purpose of call. VHF VHF channel 11
9. ETA at pilot boarding position or ETD from harbor.
10. Whether one or two pilots required. 47-78-404209
Telephone
11. IMO number (if any). 47-78-404100 (switchboard)
12. Crew and passengers (including master’s name and
Web site https://www.equinor.com/en
nationality, crew size, etc.).
13. Cargo and bunker fuel (UN number, quality of haz-
ardous and polluting cargo, type, quantity of bunker fuel, Contact Information.—See the table titled Melkoya—
9.7
etc.). Contact Information.

14. Details of passage (last port-of-call, next port-of-call, Directions.—From a position about 1.25 miles NE of Haja
9.7
etc.). Light (70°39.3'N., 23°27.8”E.), the track leads 2 miles ENE to

15. Details related to pilotage requests and Pilotage Ex- the vicinity of the berths.
emption Certificate. Caution.—A safety zone, into which only authorized ves-
9.7
16. Agent or operator (Norwegian contact). sels may enter, surrounds the terminal and is bounded by lines
17. Shipping company (name and address). joining the following positions:
9.7All vessels shall request clearance from the terminal upon ar- a. 70°41'55.8''N, 23°37'22.8''E. (shore)
rival using VHF channel 11, via the Port Operator Duty Tele- b. 70°41'52.2''N, 23°35'49.8''E.
phone (47-47-659957) or via the agent. c. 70°40'53.4''N, 23°34'21.0''E.
9.7Only two large LNG/Condensate vessels can anchor simulta- d. 70°40'37.2''N, 23°35'23.4''E.
neously in the anchorage area. If there is a vessel already at the e. 70°40'51.0''N, 23°38'11.4''E. (shore)
terminal, only one vessel is permitted in the anchorage area. A precautionary area obligates traffic crossing the main
9.7
All vessels en route to the terminal in excess of these vessels route to Melkoya to navigate with care.
9.7 Altafjorden
Pub. 182
Indreleia—Tromso to Hammerfest 9.9Ytre Simavik and Indre Simavik lie in the central part of St-
jernsund and on its N shore. Vessels can anchor in both places,
9.8 From Tromso, the fairway of Indreleia continues NE in about 25m, clay bottom.
to the W approach to Soroysund, and then leads E and NE 9.9Oksfjorden (70°12'N., 22°18'E.) lies on the S side of the W
through Soroysund to Hammerfest. Immediately N of Tromso, end of Stjernsund. It trends S for about 8 miles, then ESE for 5
the channel is sheltered by the large islands of Kvaloy and miles. The fjord is deep and free of dangers in the fairway.
Ringvassoy. Tromsoysund, between the island of Tromsoy and
the mainland, is shoal on both sides of the channel. However,
the fairway is free of dangers, and can be navigated by large
vessels at HW. Indreleia leads E from Tromsoysund through
Grotsund to Ullsfjorden. Grotsund is also free of dangers in
mid-channel.
9.8This route is well-covered by navigational aids, which can be
best seen on the chart. Tidal currents are weak in Grotsund, al-
though during bad weather a considerable sea may be raised.
9.8From the E end of Grotsund, the track of Indreleia leads
through the N part of Ullsfjorden. The channel is broad and
deep and extends in a general SSW direction from abreast the
SE end of Karlsoy. After rounding Lyngstuva, the N extremity
of the rugged promontory separating Ullsfjorden from Lyngs-
fjorden to the E, Indreleia passes through Kagsund, between
the SE end of Arnoy and the N end of Kagen, where smooth
water will be experienced.
9.8The main track of Indreleia leads from Kagsund NNE across 9.9 By MeRyan (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons
Kvaenangenfjorden and then rounds Brynilen, an islet close to 9.9 Oksfjord
the coast, about 14 miles NE of the N extremity of Kagen is-
land. From Brynilen, the track passes SE of Loppakalven, the The shores are sparsely populated, except for the port of
9.9
small island close SW of the S end of Loppa Island, then leads Oksfjorden on its NE shore. The fjord is a place of refuge to
SE of Loppa into the W approach to Soroysund. vessels during bad weather, as the fjord can be calm when a
gale wind is blowing outside.
Indreleia—Stiernsund to Hammerfest Anchorage is afforded near the village of Vassdalsbotn,
9.9
about 0.3 mile S of the port of Oksfjorden. The anchorage has a

9.9 An inner channel leads from the SW end of So- depth of about 20m, good holding ground.
roysund through Stjernsund, Vargsund, Kvalsund, and Sam- Oksfjord (70°14'N., 22°21'E.) (World Port Index No.
9.9
melsund, uniting with the main track of Indreleia N of Kvaloy. 21120) lies 1 mile S of the E entrance point to the fjord.
This channel is smoother, though longer than the main channel Depths—Limitations.—There are several quays in the port.
9.9
in Soroysund, and is often used in bad weather. There is also a boat harbor in the port. Coastal vessels call here
9.9Vessels bound for Hammerfest can pass W of Kvaloy regularly. A vessel with a maximum draft of 6.1m. can be ac-
through Straumen, the narrows between Kvaloy and the NE commodated.Berthing details are shown in the accompanying
end of Seiland. table titled Oksfjord—Berth Information
9.9Stjernsund (70°14'N., 22°44'E.) is very deep and there are A light is shown from a breakwater at the harbor entrance.
9.9
no known dangers more than 0.2 mile offshore on both sides. There are a number of anchorages S of the port.
The wind in Stjernsund is very unpredictable. Usually it blows
either in or out of the sound. At times, violent gale winds blow 9.10 Ullsfjorden (69°50'N., 19°52'E.) is a deep fjord; with
through Stjernsund. Vessels proceeding through the sound may its continuation, Sorfjorden, it extends for a distance of about
expect a deflection of the magnetic compass. 40 miles in a SSW direction from abeam the S end of Karlsoy.
9.9Kvalsund (70°30'N., 23°59'E.) and Sammelsund are deep The fjord is open to the sea, and N and NW winds send in a
and free of dangers. Kvalsund is narrow but it may be used by very heavy sea during autumn and winter. The inner part of
large vessels with drafts of 6m. Several submarine cables are Sorfjorden, for a distance of about 6 miles from its head, is fre-
laid across both sounds. quently icebound during the winter months.
Oksfjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Draft
Oksfjord
North 150m — — Ro/pax, fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
South 135m — — Ro/pax, fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
Pub. 182
Oksfjord—Berth Information
Maximum Vessel
Draft
Polarfeed Sales AS
Cargo 130m 9.0m 6.1m Clean products, fishing vessels, breakbulk, and reefer.
An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 25m, crosses

9.10 following reporting points:
the entrance to Sorfjorden. The only shoal in the fairway of a. 70°02'04.8''N, 23°14'52.8''E.
Ullsfjorden is Nisegrunn, which lies 9.25 miles S of Grotsund b. 69°59'50.4''N, 23°19'36.6''E.
Light. Several dangers encumber Sorfjorden and can best be
seen on chart. Alta—Berth Information
Lyngsfjorden (69°40'N., 20°25'E.) lies E of Ullsfjorden, the
9.10
two being separated by a high and rugged promontory. Maximum

Lyngsfjorden is steep on both sides and is very deep. The
9.10
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks
fjord extends about 50 miles in a SW direction; its end is Draft
known as Storfjorden. There are two anchorages on the W side Alta Port Terminal
of Storfjorden near its end. The fjord is well marked by naviga-
tional aids on both sides. The island of Uloy lies on the E side General car-
of the fjord near its entrance. Kafjorden is located on the E side go, dry bulk,
Cargo 170m 10.0m —
container, and
of the fjord and extends 10 miles in a SE direction. Anchorage
can be taken on the S side of Kafjorden, 3.5 miles within the cruise vessels.
entrance. Marinekaia
General car-
9.11 Altafjorden (70°05'N., 23°06'E.), is a large deep
go, dry bulk,
fjord which indents the mainland for about 20 miles and lies S Cargo 60m — 9.2m
and fishing
of the islands of Stjernoy and Seiland. The shores of the fjord
vessels.
are irregular. There are several large bays and small inlets.
Langfjorden, on the W side of the fjord, is the only branch of Alta Skipsekspedisjon
any extent. Altafjorden is accessible to large vessels. Cargo 72m 5.0m — General cargo.
The weather in the fjord is usually calm. Kafjorden and
9.11
Rafsbotn lie at the head of the fjord. Aroy, a rocky island, lies Felleskaia
on the E side of Altafjorden. General cargo
Alta (69°58'N., 23°15'E.) (World Port Index No. 21130) is a Cargo 38m 5.0m —
9.11
and stone.
district, which consists of three close settlements of Bossekop,
Bukta, and Elvebakken. The depth in the harbor is 45m and Skiferterminalen
there is a turning basin 250m wide. Anchorage is determined General cargo,
on arrival but is generally in 30m of water in sand. The harbor Cargo 52m 6.0m — stone, sand,
is sheltered against N and E winds. Strong W and SW winds and asphalt.
make it unsafe.
Ferry Terminal
Alta Port Authority Ferry 70m — — Passengers.
http://www.altahavn.no
9.11
Service, see section titled Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph

Depths—Limitations.—Alta can accommodate vessels
1.1.
9.11
with a maximum length of 250m and a maximum draft of 92m.

Contact Information.—See the table titled Alta—Contact
9.11
Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled Al-

Information.
ta—Berth Information.
An overhead cable, with a clearance of 7m, crosses the entrance
9.11
to Elvebakken. Alta—Contact Information

Pilotage.—Pilots are ordered through SafeSeaNet but may
9.11
Port Authority
be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an
additional cost. For further information, see paragraph 9.1.
The pilot boards 2 miles E of Fakkekjeila Light in position
9.11 47-78-446910 (0800-1530)
70°06.0'N, 20°12.9'E. Telephone
47-90-634518 (mobile)
Regulations.—All vessels with a height greater than 12m
9.11
planning to enter the cautionary area near Alta Airport must re- Facsimile 47-78-436990
port to the control tower on VHF channel 12 when passing the
Pub. 182
Alta—Contact Information port NW of Breivik Light, in depths of 7 to 12m, loose sand.

Vessels may obtain fairly good anchorage off the N shore of
E-mail post@altahavn.no the fjord, about 3 miles E of Breivik Light, in depths of 27.4 to
Port Captain 31m, sand. The port has a quay on the N side of a mole, with a
depth of 2.4m alongside.
Telephone 47-90-634518 Sorvaer (70°38'N., 21°59'E.) (World Port Index No. 20930)
9.13
is a large fishing port on the N side of the entrance to Markjei-

Anchorage.—Bukta is the best anchorage in Alta. Vessels
9.11
la. The approach from the SSW on the range lights to Sorvear
lie at anchor in all weather, good holding ground. Elvebakken is encumbered with islets and shoals, some of which are
affords anchorage for smaller vessels. These are only fair marked, and the position of which can best be seen on the
anchorages and they are not recommended. chart. Breakwaters built between islets extend SW, where a
light stands on the W breakwater head.
9.12 Talvik (70°03'N., 22°58'E.) lies on the W side of The port has a number of quays with depths of up to 4m. The
9.13
Altafjorden, in a sheltered bay. It affords anchorage to small port is used mainly by coastal vessels. Small vessels may an-
vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 18m, about chor off the port, in depths of 6 to 20m.
0.2 mile W of the N entrance point of the bay. Mooring rings Rolvsoya (70°58'N., 24°00'E.) lies about 14 miles NE of So-
9.13
are available, and vessels can secure to dolphins on the N side roya. The island is indented on all sides. Kallneringen, at the NW
of the cove. end of the island, attains a height of 334m. Revsholmen and Skip-
There are two quays, with depths of 4.9 to 5.8m alongside.
9.12
sholmen, two islets, lie near the middle of the broad channel be-
Coastal vessels mainly call at the port. tween Soroya and Rolvsoya. The islets are very prominent.
Rafsbotn lies on the E side of Altafjorden, near its head.
9.12
Ingoya (71°04'N., 24°04'E.) lies N of Rolvsoya. It is indent-
9.13
From its head for a distance of about 2 miles W, the bay is fre- ed on all sides and quite mountainous. The harbor is reached
quently icebound during the winter months. This large bay af- by passing between Avloysninga and a rock, awash, about 0.1
fords anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge, off the mile N and marked by an iron perch, off the W end of Langhol-
NW side of Rafsholmen, in depths of 18.3 to 42m. Coastal ves- men.
sels call here regularly. Fruholmen Light (71°06'N., 24°00'E.) is shown from a tow-
9.13
Langfjorden is situated on the NW coast of Altafjorden, near

9.12
er, 18m in height, standing off the NW coast of the island. A
the W entrance point. The fjord extends about 16 miles in a racon is located at the light tower. There is an anchorage for
WSW direction and is free of dangers in the fairway. Ytre small vessels with local knowledge off the N side of Ingoya.
Koven, an inlet on the NW side of the fjord, affords anchorage
to small vessels with local knowledge. 9.14 Hjelmsoya (71°04'N., 24°43'E.) is located about 9
Storsandnes, a village on the E side of the fjord, has a quay,
9.12
miles E of Ingoya. The island is mountainous and conspicuous
with a depth of 7.3m alongside. There is anchorage close N of from a considerable distance. The N coast of Hjelmsoya is very
the quay; mooring rings are available. steep. About 3 miles NE of the summit is a rocky pinnacle
Coastal vessels call here. Vessels with local knowledge may
9.12
which rises perpendicularly from the sea and is easily identi-
anchor in Langfjordbotn, the head of Langfjorden, in depths of fied from the NE. Akkarfjorden lies on the NW side of the is-
12.8 to 20.1m. Langfjorden is well marked by navigational aids land and extends about 2 miles SE. A reef extends up to 183m
on both its shores. from the shore of this fjord. A light is shown on the NE side of
Vargsund (70°22'N., 23°30'E.) lies NE of the E entrance
9.12
the fjord.
point to Altafjorden. The sound is deep in the fairway and free Good anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 10.1m, off
9.14
of dangers. From its entrance the sound runs NE for about 14 Sandvik, a village on the W side of the fjord, about 1 mile
miles and then turns N for 9 miles where the sound narrows to SSW of the light.
about 0.5 mile at its N entrance, 4 miles SSW of Hammerfest. Masoya (71°01'N., 25°00'E.) is located about 4 miles SE of
9.14
The sound affords anchorage on both sides to vessels with

9.12
Hjelmsoya. The island is indented on all sides. Kalven, an islet
local knowledge. The sound is well marked by navigational which shows a light, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of the NW ex-
aids. tremity of Masoya. Ostervag, on the SE side of the island, af-
fords anchorage to small vessels near its head, in a depth of
Outer Route—Soroya to Nordkapp 3.7m, good holding ground. Coastal vessels call here.
Mageroya (71°03'N., 25°40'E.) is located about 4 miles E of
9.14
9.13 From the conspicuous headland surmounted by Fu- the NE extremity of Masoya. The island is large and indented
glen at the NW end of Soroya, the coast of this island trends in on all sides. The coastline is fringed by a reef close offshore.
an ENE direction and is not clearly distinguishable until a ves- The NW coast of the island is penetrated for about 6 miles by
sel is N of the island. The N coast of Soroya is high and pres- Tufjorden, which is desolate and affords no anchorage. Nord-
ents a broken appearance of bold and steep headlands kapp is the highest and most prominent headland on the N
separated by inlets which deeply indent the coast. Close off the coast of Mageroya.
NW extremity of the island, the coast is indented by Breivik- The cape is a bold headland which rises in sheer walls of
9.14
fjorden and Markjeila, a smaller inlet. dark rock to a flat barren plateau. Knivskjerodden, which
Breivik (70°35'N., 22°08'E.) (World Port Index No. 20940) shows a light, lies 2.25 miles NNW of Nordkapp and forms the
lies on the NW side of Breivikfjorden, on the NW coast of the N extremity of Mageroya. The point is low and much less con-
island of Soroya. Vessels of moderate size can anchor off the spicuous then Nordkapp.
Pub. 182
Kamoyfjorden (71°04'N., 26°04'E.) lies on the NE side of

9.14 ated), Kobbhola (on the W shore of the inlet), Storbukta (at the
Mageroy. The fjord is indented near its head by three small head of the inlet), and the outer harbor areas (including tanker
fjords. Vessels of moderate size can anchor in sand, with moor- transshipment anchor berths located in Sarnesfjorden and Mag-
ing rings available, between Kamoyvaer and the SW side of eroysundet).
Store Kamoy, in depths of 9.0 to 23.8m, about 0.2 mile ESE of Depths—Limitations.—The harbor can accommodate ves-
9.15
Kamoyfjorden Light. A power cable lying about 0.1 mile off- sel with a maximum draft of 12m. See the table titled Hon-
shore parallels the coast in the vicinity of the anchorage. ningsvag—Berth Information.
Aspect.—A gray church and a large building close by the
9.15 Honningsvag (70°59'N., 26°00'E.) (World Port Index church are very prominent landmarks from seaward.
No. 20800) is a large fishing station located on the SE side of The approach and entrance to the harbor are well-marked by
9.15
Mageroya. It also serves as the administrative center for the navigational aids. A number of rocks and foul ground are
Nordkapp district of Norway. The harbor extends about a mile marked by iron perches and spar buoys. The harbor is
past the mole at Klubben and includes the following bays and excellent, though small.
berthing areas: the inner harbor (around which the town is situ-
Honningsvag—Berth Information
Inner Harbor (Indre Havn)
NOFI 67m 4.5-10.0m General cargo.
Berth on Breakwater 20-125m 1.5-6.5m General cargo.
Fishery and Warehouse Jetties 13-58m 0.9-4.9m General cargo.
Engineering Workshop 19m 3.8-4.3m General cargo.
Packet Boat Quay
East 53m 3.3-5.1m General cargo.
Southeast 30m 5.0-9.0m General cargo.
South 65m 5.4-10.0m General cargo.
West 117m 2.4-10.0m Dry bulk and passengers.
Bolgerbryter 140m — General cargo.
Fiskerihavn Terminal
North (New 2022) — — General cargo and passengers.
No. 1 116m 2.6-9.2m Dry bulk.
No. 2 70m 8.8-11.0m General cargo.
No. 3 125m 7.0-13.0m General cargo and passenger.
Mobile Tank Installation on Borveneset 45m 6.0m —
Storbukta
FI-NO-TRO Fish Factory 93m 6.0-7.0m General cargo.
SIFI Fish Factory 69m 5.6-7.1m General cargo.
Shell Bunkering Installation at Floers 88m 6.0-7.0m —
Kobbholet
NOFI Fish Oil Factory 50m 11.0-15.0m (W-E) General cargo.
Esso Bunkering 63m 11.0-18.0m —
BP Bunkering 99m 7.4-8.4m General cargo and petroleum products.
Honningsvag Outer
Honningsvag Transhipment N Area 1 — — STS and crude oil
Honningsvag Transhipment N Area 2 — — STS.
Honningsvag Transhipment S Area — — STS and crude oil
Pub. 182
9.15 Courtesy of Bill Fry

9.15 Nordkapp (on Mageroya)
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 30,000 gt

9.15
and over and is optional for vessels under 30,000 gt. Pilots
board in the following positions:
a. 70°58'00.0'N, 26°17'00.0''N (vessels of 30,000 gt and
over).
b. 70°57'30.0'N, 25°57'56.4'N.
Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but can be or-
9.15
dered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-

tional coast.
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details, see the section titled
9.15
Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.

Contact Information.—The port can be contacted on VHF
9.15
channels 12, 14, and 16.
Honningsvag—Contact Information
Port
VHF VHF channels 12, 14 and 16
9.15 By Harvey Barrison via Wikimedia Commons
Telephone 47-91-733143 Honningsvag
9.15
E-mail havna@nordkapp.kommune.no
Anchorage.—Vessels should anchor W of a straight line be-
9.15
Web site http://www.nordkapphavn.no tween Klubskjeret Light and the spar buoy on Holmegrunnen,
Harbormaster and N of a straight line extending E from Rosmaalneset, a
point about 0.5 mile NW of Klubskjeret Light, in depths of
Telephone 47-78-476450 29.3 to 49.4m.
Pub. 182
9.16 Sarnesfjorden (70°58'N., 25°45'E.) lies on the S side Breisund, and Masoysund.
of Mageroya, about 4 miles W of Honningsvag. Altesula, an is-
land, lies in the entrance to the fjord. The island is fringed by a 9.18 Masoysund (70°59'N., 25°01'E.) lies between the
reef, which extends about 183m N from its NW end. mainland and the S side of Masoya. The sound is about 1 mile
A light is shown from the SE extremity of Altesula. Litle Al-
9.16 wide and is free from dangers in the fairway.
tesula, an islet, lies about 0.5 mile N from the N extremity of The tidal currents in mid-channel set E from half rising tide
9.18
Altesula. Kobbholet, an inlet on the W side of Sarnesfjorden, is to half falling tide, the turn of the current usually occurs at the
well sheltered and affords anchorage to vessels with local times of HW and LW, setting E with the rising tide and W with
knowledge, in depths of 25.6 to 42.1m, good holding ground, the falling tide. The currents may attain a velocity of from 3 to
about 0.2 mile W of the S entrance point of the inlet. A bridge, 4 knots. A light is shown on the S extremity of Masoya.
with a vertical clearance of 10m, crosses the entrance of the in- Mageroysund, the continuation of Indreleia from
9.18
let. Masoysund, leads SE and then E. The channel, though narrow,

Anchorage is available between Altesula and Litle Altesula,
9.16 is free from dangers, and it can be navigated by larger vessels.
in depths of 12.8 to 29.3m. A submarine cable crosses the sound about 2 miles from the
9.18
Helnes Light (71°04'N., 26°14'E.) is shown from a low tow-

9.16 entrance. The tidal currents set with strength through Mage-
er at the E end of Mageroy. A racon and a radiobeacon are lo- roysund; at HW they may attain a velocity of 5 to 6 knots. A
cated at the light tower. light is shown on the S side of the NW entrance to Mage-
Caution.—The inshore TSS off Nordkapp is not IMO ap-
9.16 roysund. A light is also shown on the E entrance point of the
proved. sound.
Indreleia—Hammerfest to Varangerfjorden 9.19 Porsangen (70°30'N., 25°30'E.), a long fjord, is en-

tered between Helnes Light and Svaerholtklubben, about 10
9.17 From the NE end of Soroysund to Mageroya, about 36 miles ESE, and extends about 65 miles in a SSW direction. The
miles ENE, Indreleia is mostly unsheltered. The route is ex- outer part of the fjord is fringed with precipitous and barren ta-
posed off the N ends of Kvaloy and Havoy, which lies about 22 bleland but toward the inner end the heights are more irregular,
miles NE of the N end of Kvaloy; the currents and heavy sea with some trees and pasture land.
may render it difficult for small vessels to weather these condi- Though not as deep as many fjords, it is fairly clear of dan-
9.19
tions. Indreleia terminates at the N end of Porsangerfjorden, gers except near its head, where there are scattered shoals and
where vessels can proceed to the open sea or Honningsvag. numerous islands. The fjord is usually frozen over in winter as
From Hammerfest, a northbound vessel in Indreleia should
9.17 far N as Borselvenes, a point about 16 miles from its head. Por-
shape course to pass about 0.5 mile S and W of the small island sangen is well-marked by navigational aids, which can best be
of Melkoya, on which a light is shown, and then proceed N in seen on the chart.
mid-channel through Soroysund, which is free of dangers in Store Tamsoy, an island, is located about 25 miles from the
9.19
the fairway. entrance of the fjord, and is encumbered by a rocky shoal

From the NE end of Soroysund, Indreleia passes across an
9.17 which extends up to 1.5 miles S of the island. Two spar buoys
open arm of the sea for about 12 miles and then continues NE mark the shoal on the E. A beacon is shown on the SE side of
through the exposed Rolvsoysund, between the SE side of the island.
Rolvsoya and the small islands off the mainland. A light is Strandbukt, a bay, lies on the W side of the outer part of Por-
9.19
shown from the SE side of Rolvsoya. sangen and is entered between Homnneset (70°45'N.,
From abeam of Havoygavlen Light, located on the NW ex-
9.17 25°42'E.) and Nakken. The bay affords good anchorage to ves-
tremity of Havoy, Indreleia leads SE through Breisund. The sels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 23m, good hold-
sound is about 2 miles wide. The depth in the channel is being ground, about 2 miles WSW of Repvag Light.
tween 30 and 150m. There are several shoals in the area with Vessels with local knowledge may obtain anchorage off the
9.19
depths from 30 to 70m. SW side of Litle Tamsoy, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, about 3

In Breidsund, there are special wave directions from N to
9.17 miles E of Repvag Light.
NW which create rough sea; with W currents broken surf has There are a number of anchorages on both sides of Porsan-
9.19
been observed in the channel. The current is due primarily to gen and also at the head of this fjord. All of these anchorages
the tidal current and is estimated to reach between 1 and 2 require local knowledge and are best seen on the chart. The an-
knots. By Rolvsoyh, the sea becomes especially rough when chorages are used mainly by coastal vessels. A marine farm is
the wind blows from the N to NE. In both cases the wind and located about 2 miles N of Lite Tamsoya.
the waves drive straight in from the open sea. Laksefjorden lies E of Porsangen and is entered between
9.19
Northwest of Havoygavlen there are three shoals with depths

9.17 Svaerholtklubben and Finnkjerka, 8.5 miles to the E. The fjord
between about 30 and 50m. It is noted that from the shoals and indents the coast for about 40 miles and for the most part is
in toward Havoygavlen, the sea is particularly rough, which ap- from 7 to 12 miles wide. The shores of the fjord are indented
pears to be associated with the shoals and the “corner effect” of by a succession of small bays and inlets.
the headland. In Laksefjorden, the tidal current sets N with the falling tide
9.19
There is a big difference between the flood and the ebb in the
9.17 and S with the rising tide. The maximum velocity is attained at
area and it is noticed that the sea is roughest on the ebb. the entrance to the fjord.
After passing through Breisund, Indreleia leads into
9.17
Masoysund. Submarine cables are laid across Rolvsoysund, 9.20 Kjollefjorden (70°57'N., 27°20'E.) (World Port Index
Pub. 182
No. 20740), on the E side of the entrance to Laksefjorden, is Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths up to 13.7m,
9.21
entered through a width of about 3 miles and extends about 4 loose clay, about 0.4 mile SSE of Mehamn Light. There are
miles SE. The head of the fjord forms a sheltered bay, where mooring rings around the harbor.
there is a settlement. Coastal vessels call here regularly. Slettnes Light (71°05'N., 28°14'E.) is shown from a promi-
9.21
Depths—Limitations.— The port has a number of quays.

9.20 nent tower, 39m in height, standing on a headland about 8
Vessels with maximum draft of 6.2m can be accommodated in miles NE of Mehamn. A racon is located at the light.
the port. A shoal bank extends seaward up to about 2 miles from the
9.21
Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain an-

9.20 light and breaks in places during heavy weather. Gamvik, a
chorage, in depths of 20 to 23.8m, in the middle of the harbor, fishing harbor suitable only for small vessels, lies close SE of
about 0.2 mile E of Kjollefjorden Light. The anchorage is not the light tower. The harbor mole is undergoing expansion
safe during strong E winds, when violent squalls occur. (2020).
Oksefjorden is entered N of Kjollefjorden and indents the
9.20 Regulations.—Gamvic Harbor District enforces a maxi-
9.21
coast for a distance of about 7 miles. The fjord is deep and mum speed limit of 5 knots for all vessels. This speed limit ap-
clear of dangers, except for scattered shoals, which are best plies to all vessels except those engaged in operations for the
seen on the chart. Norwegian armed forces or craft engaged in emergency police,
Small vessels can find good anchorage, in 7.3 to 14.6m, off
9.20 custom, fire fighting, ambulance, or search and rescue missions
the village of Oksevag at the head of the fjord. The fjord is well along the coast of Nordkynhalvoya.
marked by navigational aids. Coastal vessels call here regular- Harbor limits are positioned from close N at Nordkyn, then
9.21
ly. ESE to close N of Slettnes, then SE past Omgang to the middle

Friarfjorden (70°28'N., 26°57'E.), located at the SE end of
9.20 of Tanafjordon, and continue SW to close N at Digermulen.
Laksefjorden, affords good anchorage for vessels with local
knowledge, in depths of 22 to 33m, good holding ground, on 9.22 Tanafjorden (70°45'N., 28°25'E.), which is entered
the W side of the fjord. between Omgang and Tanahorn, about 9 miles SE, extends
A number of anchorages are located on both sides of Lak-
9.20 SSW for about 34 miles on the W side of Varangerhalvoya.
sefjorden, most of which require local knowledge, and can best The shores of this fjord are mountainous declivities, indented,
be seen on the chart. The anchorages are used regularly by and made up of small inlets, especially on the W side.
coastal vessels. The principal branches of Tanafjorden are Hopsfjorden,
9.22
Langfjorden, and Vestertana, which extend in a W and S direc-

9.21 Mehamnfjorden (71°04'N., 27°52'E.) is located on tion from the main fjord.
the mainland and lies between Laksefjorden and Tanafjorden. In the area outside the entrance to Tanafjorden, the depths
9.22
Mehamn, on the E side of the head of Mehamnfjorden, is one decrease sharply on both sides of a deep channel, which is an
of the best harbors in this area, and is accessible in almost all extension of the fjord. During fair weather conditions, the cur-
conditions. rent goes inward with the flood tide and out along the E side of
Depths—Limitations.—The E shore of Mehamn is lined
9.21 the fjord with the ebb. Wind and the outflow of water from
with quays and handles mainly fishing and passenger activity. Tanaelven (Tana River) can also have a big influence on cur-
Vessel with drafts up to 6m can be accommodated. For more rent conditions.
information see the table titled Mehamn—Berth Informa- Due to the situation mentioned above, it is difficult to predict
9.22
tion. wave conditions. However, with waves from the NW and an

ebb current along the E side of the fjord, there is a possibility
Mehamn—Berth Information of breaking waves. These are seen as areas of broken surf and it
is estimated that vessels must be 6 to 10 miles outside the fjord
Maximum mouth to avoid them.
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks Hopsfjorden lies on the W side of Tanafjorden. The fjord is
9.22
Draft deep and free of dangers in the fairway. Large vessels can an-
Industrial Terminal chor near the head of the fjord. Langfjorden lies S of Hops-
fjorden and also affords anchorage for large vessels near its
Fishing head. Small vessels lie best in the bay at Boksjok, where there
Industrial 65m 7.0m — vessels and
is good holding ground, in a depth of about 20m.
breakbulk.
A submarine cable crosses the fjord about 2 miles from the
9.22
Nordkyn Terminal entrance.

Gulgofjorden (70°41'N., 28°36'E.) lies on the E side of
Ro/pax,
9.22
Tanafjorden, about 5 miles ESE of the E entrance point of

fishing
Langfjorden. This small fjord indents the coast for a distance
Nordkyn 92m 7.0m 6.0m vessels,
of about 2 miles. Anchorage can be taken off the N shore of the
breakbulk,
fjord, in depths of 10 to 18.3m, sand and mud.
and reefer.
The head of Tanafjorden consist of a number of small fjords
9.22
Polar Terminal and inlets, which are marked by lights. There is anchorage in
Fishing these fjords, which can best be seen on the chart.
Polar 65m 5.0m — Between Tanahorn and Vardo, about 53 miles SE, the coast
vessels. 9.22
presents the appearance of a nearly horizontal ridge about 122
Pub. 182
to 152m high. Between these two points there are no land-

marks; neither does the aspect of any particular tract serve as a
guide. The general appearance of the countryside is barren;
hardly a trace of soil or vegetation is visible on the tablelands,
and fresh green grass is only found in the clefts of the hills fac-
ing the sea. In summer, patches of snow may often be seen on
the hills. Vessels are advised to give this part of the coast a
wide berth in bad weather.
9.23 Berlevag (70°52'N., 29°06'E.) (World Port Index No.

20710) lies about 6 miles E of Tanahorn and is one of the larg-
est fishing stations on this part of the coast. The entrance to the
harbor is protected by a mole. The port consists of an outer har-
bor and an inner harbor.
Depths—Limitations.— The port is mainly used for fishing
9.23
vessels and coastal ferries and is protected by numerous break-

waters on the inner and outer harbors. A number of quays in
the harbor and can accommodate vessels with drafts up to 5m.
Hurtigruten Terminal, which can accommodate vessels up to
118m in length with a maximum draft of 4.9m, is used for pas-
sengers, ro-ro, and cruise vessels.
Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the outer harbor, in
depths of 9.1 to 12.2m; the inner harbor anchorage has depths
Kjolnes Light
up to 4.6m.
9.23
Kjolnes Light (70°51'N., 29°14'E.) is shown from a tower,

9.23
fjorden Light.
22m in height, standing 2.5 miles E of Berlevag. There are 13 berths at Maritbukt, with lengths of 32 to 273m
9.24
Kongsfjorden (70°45'N., 29°24'E.) is situated about 9 miles

9.23
and depths of 3 to 10m alongside. A number of lights, which
SE of Berlevag. The fjord is divided into two arms by a penin- are best seen on the chart, are located in the fjord.
sula. The fjord affords anchorage for small vessels, in depths of Pilotage.—Pilotage is optional and should be ordered
9.24
12 to 16.5m, good holding ground. through SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen
A number of dangers lie in the fjord and can best be seen on
9.23
Pilot Booking Center at an additional cost.
the chart. The harbor is protected by a mole; however, swells The pilot boards in the following positions:
9.24
comes in during NE winds. Vessels are cautioned to be well se- a. 70°38'30.0''N, 29°47'00.0''E (about 2 miles within the
cured. harbor entrance).
b. 70°39'26.4'''N, 29°48'51.6''E.
9.24 Batsfjorden (70°41'N., 29°51'E.) (World Port Index The pilot vessel can be contacted on VHF channels 12 and
9.24
No. 20695) also known as Batsfjord, lies about 7 miles E of 16. For further information, see paragraph 9.1.
Kongsfjorden. The fjord extends about 7 miles SW and is deep 1. Vessel name.
and free from dangers. 2. Call sign.
Depths—Limitations.—The harbor in the cove can accom-
9.24
3. Nationality.
modate vessels with a maximum draft of 8.3m. For more infor- 4. Length.
mation see the table titled Batsfjorden—Berth Information. 5. Draft.
Maritbukt is the most spacious anchorage, with depths of
9.24
6. Gross tonnage.
11.9 to 14.0m, good holding ground, about 1 mile SW of Bats-
Batsfjorden—Berth Information
Maximum
Berth Length Vessel Remarks
Draft
Batsfjord Terminal
General 200m — General cargo.
West 180m — General cargo, passengers, and refrigerated cargo.
East 150m 8.3m Liquid cargo, passengers, ro-ro cargo, general, and refrigerated cargo.
Tanker 60m — Bunker gas oil, bunker diesel oil, and mobile lubricants.
Oil 40m — Vegetable oil.
Pub. 182
Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA, along with

9.24 posed to bad weather. With the wind mainly from the N, waves
their pilot request, 24 hours in advance, and confirmed 3 hours drive in from seaward. In Varangerfjorden, the currents are er-
in advance, along with the following information: ratic and with the “corner effect” at Vardo, the sea becomes
Vessel Traffic Service.—For details, see the section titled
9.24 more chaotic.
Vessel Traffic Service in paragraph 1.1.
Contact Information.—See the table titled Batsfjorden—
9.24
Vardo
9.26 Vardo (70°22'N., 31°07'E.) (World Port Index No.
Batsfjorden—Contact Information 20700) is composed of a group of islands lying close off the E
extremity of Varangerhalvoy, about 7 miles SE of Persfjorden.
Port Authority Vardoya, the W and largest island, consists of two parts joined
VHF VHF channel 12 by a narrow isthmus.
Reinoya and Horwoya lie close to the E of Vardoya. Busse-
9.26
47-78-985510
Telephone sundet, to the W of the islands, separates them from the main-
47-95-983860 (mobile) land and can be navigated by large vessels.
Vardo
E-mail havnevakt@batsfjord.havn.no
http://www.vardoport.no
Harbormaster
47-78-985512 Depths—Limitations.—Vardo can accommodate vessels up
9.26
Telephone to 150m in length with a maximum draft of m. See the table ti-
47-78-892790 (mobile)
tled Vardo—Berth Information.
Anchorage.—A cove at the head of the fjord affords
anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of Vardo—Berth Information
18.3 to 23.8m, good holding ground, about 183m W of the N Berth Length Depth Remarks
entrance point of the cove.
Vardo Harbor
Caution.—A fishing marina exists.
9.24
Vardo 180m 7.5m —

9.25 Makkaur Light (70°42'N., 30°05'E.) is shown from a Svartnes Harbor
low tower on a building standing about 4 miles E of the en-
trance to Batsfjorden. Ferry service to Engels-
Svartnes 194m 9.0m
Syltefjorden lies 12 miles SE of Batsfjorden. It extends
9.25
vik, Vardoya.
about 8 miles SW and is free from dangers in the fairway. The Kiberg Harbor
head of the fjord is frozen over in winter. Syltefjordvaer, on the
NW side of the fjord, affords anchorage close inshore to small Mainly used by fishing
Kiberg — —
vessels, in depths of from 4.6 to 6.1m, about 3 miles NE of vessels.
Sylefjorden Light.
Small vessels can also anchor near the head of Syltefjorden,
9.25 Aspect.—Vardo church, conspicuous from the N, is white
9.26
in depths of 14.6 to 20m. Nordfjorden, lies 3 miles SW of with a gray roof and white spire. A radar dome stands about
Syltefjordvaer, on the W side of the fjord and is protected by 183m E of the church. Two radio masts stand on the island of
two moles. A light stands on the W mole head. Small vessels Vardoya, about 0.25 mile W of the church.
can anchor W of a spar buoy, located at the head of Nord- Protection is afforded to the harbor by a breakwater on each
9.26
fjorden, in 19m. side of the entrance. A light is shown from the seaward end of
Caution.—Dangerous wrecks, best seen on the chart, lie up
9.25 each breakwater.
to 9 miles NE of Syltefjordklubben, the NW entrance point of Vardo Light is shown from a tower, 20m in height, standing
9.26
Syltefjord. Another dangerous wreck lies about 6.5 miles ESE on Hornoya.
of Hardbaken, the SE entrance point of Syltefjord. Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 100 tons
9.26
Persfjorden (70°26'N., 30°48'E.) is located about 10 miles

9.25 and more. Pilots should be ordered via SafeSeaNet but may be
SE of Syltefjorden. The fjord is free from dangers in the fair- ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-
way, and depths decrease gradually toward its head. Anchorage tional cost. The pilot boards by arrangement. Vessels at sea re-
can be obtained in the fjord in fine weather, but vessels cannot quiring a pilot should give at least 24 hours notice, notifying
remain there during winds from NW, through N, to E. confirmation or alteration at least 2 hours before the original
Caution.—In the stretch between Batsfjorden, from Mak-
9.25 time stipulated.
kaur Light to Vardo and Varangerfjorden, lies an area very ex- Contact Information.—See the table titled Vardo—Con-
9.26
Pub. 182
9.26 By magnethy via Wikimedia Commons

Vardo
9.26
tact Information. of the way until a berth is assign by the harbor authority. Under
no circumstances may vessels anchor in the channels or near
Vardo—Contact Information the piers, so as to impede traffic.
Vessels arriving at the harbors under quarantine flag, or
9.27
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 which are ordered to lay in quarantine, must anchor in Basse-
47-78-987276 sundet, where they must remain until the health authority gives
Telephone them orders to go to another anchorage or mooring berth in or
47-78-987275
outside the harbor.
E-mail vardhavn@online.no Varangerfjorden
9.28 Varangerfjorden (70°00'N., 30°00'E.), a large and
Anchorage.—Nordvagen, the principal and best harbor at
9.26
deep fjord lies with Kibergneset, its N entrance point, about 5
Vardo, lies on the N side of the town. The anchorage is good miles S of Vardo. The fjord extends about 50 miles W, and is
but constricted being available only to small vessels with local free from dangers in mid-channel to a distance of about 7 miles
knowledge. During N gales, there is considerable swell in the from its head. The best harbors will be found in the inlets on
bay N of the moles, and entering the harbor may be difficult. the S side of the fjord, which is characterized by steep hills
Caution.—An Explosives Dumping Area lies close E of the
9.26
with sparse growths of trees. In contrast, the N side of the fjord
Vardo Light and may best be seen on the chart slopes gently inland, with steep cliffs of irregular heights in
places.
9.27 Bussesundet (70°22'N., 31°02'E.), somewhat ex- The tidal currents in the fjord are very irregular. Their direc-
9.28
posed to swell from both N and S, affords good anchorage to tion is largely influenced by the prevailing winds, rather than
small vessels off the S end of Tjuvholem, in depths of 7 to by the tides. The more usual characteristic is a W set on the N
10m, about 183m N of a line of buoys marking a pipeline. side of the fjord and an E set on the S side, on change in direc-
Two moles form a harbor in the S part of Bussesundet. A
9.27
tion occurring at HW or LW. The E set will usually be stronger
light is shown from the seaward end of each mole. The en- than the W and may attain a velocity of about 2 knots, with
trance to the harbor has a least depth of 6.7m, decreasing heavy overfalls occurring particularly during strong E winds.
shoreward into drying flats. Several piers are situated in the S The N shore of Varangerfjorden is formed by the SE and S
9.28
part of the harbor. coast of Varangerhalvoy and is better protected against N gales
There is a prohibited anchorage in the S part of Bussesundet,
9.27
than the E and N coast of the peninsula. Between Kibergneset
best seen on the chart. Vessels arriving at the harbors without and Vadso, 30 miles WSW, the coast is generally low and flat,
an anchoring or mooring berth allocated must anchor well out
Pub. 182
Ytre Kiberg
9.26
forming open shallow bays bounded by white sand hills. shown on the seaward end of a mole on the SW side of Store
Ytre Kiberg (70°17'N., 31°00'E.), a small harbor about 2
9.28 Ekkeroya.
miles W of Kibergneset, is available to small vessels with local
knowledge. It is exposed to E winds, during which anchorage 9.30 Vadso (70°04'N., 29°44'E.) (World Port Index No.
is not recommended, though there is good holding ground of 20690) is located on the N side of Varangerfjorden, about 15
sand and mud. A light is shown from the head of the harbor, miles NW of Kirkenes pilot station.
and range lights in line lead into the inner harbor.
Coastal vessels call at the port, which is a fishing station.
9.28
Storskjer, an above-water rock showing a light, lies about 3

miles SW of Ytre Kiberg Light. Shoal water, marked by bea-
cons and iron posts, lies from Storskjer NE to Ytre Kiberg.
Komagneset, terminating in a point about 13 miles WSW of
9.28
Kibergneset, is a high plateau with three prominent ridges be-

tween its summit and the sea; about 5 miles SW of these ridges
is Skallneset, another prominent point.
Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in good
9.28
weather off Komagneset, in depths up to 6.1m.
9.29 Litle Ekkeroya (Lille Ekkeroya) (70°05'N.,

30°14'E.), a small island fringed with reefs, lies about 4 miles
SW of Skallneset. Vessels entering Varangerfjorden in foggy
weather must be careful to identify Skallneset, as its long flat
projecting point may easily be mistaken for either Litle Ekke-
roya or Store Ekkeroy. Litle Ekkeroya shows a light on the SE 9.30 By Felix Maschek via Wikimedia Commons
point of the island. 9.30 Vadso
It has been reported (1994) that numerous shoals and wrecks
9.29
exist in close proximity, NW to SW of Litle Ekkeroya Light. Winds—Weather.—The harbor is seldom icebound; how-
9.30
Store Ekkeroya lies about 3 miles SW of Litle Ekkeroy and

9.29 ever it is not recommended to enter the harbor during strong N
is connected to the mainland by a narrow, low isthmus. Store or S winds. Navigational aids can best be seen on the chart.
Ekkeroya is higher than the mainland and when seen from a Depths—Limitations.—The channel leads along the N side
9.30
distance appears as an island. On its summit is a tall black bea- of Store Vadsoya and has a least depth of 6.2m. A bridge, with
con; a second black beacon stands on its E extremity. A light is a vertical clearance of 3m, extends N from Vadso to the main-
Pub. 182
land. of the head of Varangerfjorden, has a narrow entrance which is

It has been reported (1995) that a 475m long channel, with a
9.30 encumbered with dangers and has very strong tidal currents. The
width of 180m and a dredged depth of 6.5m, leads from the N and deeper channel leading into the inlet has a least depth of
outer harbor to the inner harbor. 4.9m. The fjord is icebound from October to May. Range lights
to the fjord stand on the N shore, close W of the entrance.
Vadso—Berth Information Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage off
9.31
the N shore of the fjord, 1 mile W of the rear range light, in a

Berth Length Depth depth of about 15.2m.
Lakselv Seakwalk Karlebotn (70°07'N., 28°45'E.) lies on the S side of two in-
9.31
ner fjords of the head of Varangerfjorden. Anchorage can be

Main 250m 7.5m
obtained on the NW side of Karlebotn, about 0.5 mile ENE of
North 70m 6.5m Rabbedalen, in depths up to 27.4m.
South 72m 5.5m Small vessels anchor off Bigganes (70°07'N., 28°36'E.), a
9.31
village on the NW side of the head of Karlebotn, in a depth of

about 12.8m, about 2 miles WSW of Rabbenes Light.
The main pier extends W from a point S of the town. The
9.30
pier accommodates vessels up to 70m in length with a maxi- Varangerfjorden—South Side

mum draft of 7.5m. Between this pier and the town are numer-
ous quays and jetties. Coastal vessels call regularly at the port. 9.32 Veinesbotn (70°05'N., 28°47'E.) is an inlet on the S
See the table titled Vadso—Berth Information. side of Veidnes, a peninsula which separates it from Karlebotn.
Aspect.—The port is protected on its S side by the W part of A light is shown on the N entrance point of the inlet. There is a
Store Vadsoya, a low barren island lying on a coastal reef, and small, but very good harbor for small vessels off Grasbakken, a
on its W side by a two breakwaters, one extending about 0.2 village on the S side of the entrance to Veinesbotn. The anchor-
mile NNW from the W extremity of the island and the other age has depths of up to 15.2m; the holding ground is good. A
extending about 91m S from the mainland. quay at the village has a depth of 6.4m alongside. A light is
Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots should be ordered
9.30
shown from a rock off the village.
via SafeSeaNet but may be ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Latnaeringen, a promontory, lies about 6 miles E of Grasbak-
9.32
Booking Center at an additional cost. The pilot boards about ken. There is anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge
0.5 mile W of the harbor entrance. on the W side of the promontory, in depths of 10.1 to 15.8m.
Vessels desiring a pilot should give 24 hours notice; confir-
9.30
Vessels approaching this anchorage should be careful to avoid
mation should be made 2 hours prior to arrival at the pilot sta- the foul ground, marked by a light, on the outer end of which is
tion. Storskjaer. The anchorage is sheltered from E winds, but is not
Contact Information.—See the table titled Vadso—Con-
9.30
recommended during N and W winds.
tact Information. Bugoyfjorden (69°56'N., 29°36'E.) lies about 14 miles SE
9.32
of Latnaeringen. In winter, the fjord is icebound up to about 1

Vadso—Contact Information mile from its head, but it freezes farther out in hard winters.
VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 The SE side of the fjord consists of steep hills and is unin-
9.32
habited; the NW side is lower and has some settlements and

Telephone 47-92-695888 harbors. On the S side of the entrance, a group of islets and
Facsimile 47-78-954310 rocks lies close offshore. At the N end of this group an above-
water rock is marked by a lighted beacon. The tidal currents in
the fjord are weak and usually set outward.
Anchorage.—Anchorage for vessels up to 400 tons is avail-
Between the W side of Bugoya and the mainland, there is a
9.30
9.32
able in the basin, in depths of 4 to 6m. Larger vessels can an-

harbor where small vessels can anchor in depths of up to 3.7m.
chor W of the mole, in depths of 16 to 21m, sand and clay.
The harbor is protected from the N by two short moles. A
9.32
Anchorage is also available in the outer harbor inside the

light is shown on the head of the W mole. The sea breaks in the
breakwater, in depths of 5 to 9m.
N entrance to the harbor if there is a swell.
Small vessels can obtain anchorage E of the town, in depths
9.30
of 4 to 5m, about 1.0 mile ENE of Vadsoya Light; it is ap- 9.33 Kjofjorden (69°50'N., 29°47'E.), a long fjord on the
proached E of Store Vadsoya. W side of the island of Skogeroy, can be navigated by large
vessels. The shores of the fjord are high, rocky, and barren for
9.31 Sandskjer (70°05'N., 29°33'E.), about 2 miles WNW some distance inland, but have a less rugged character near
of Lille Vadsoya and about 0.5 mile offshore, is a skerry Neidenfjorden, which continues from Kjofjorden to the S.
fringed by a drying reef. It is marked by a black beacon tower.
In hard winters, the fjord may be icebound; however ice-
9.33
Vestre Jakobsely, about 5 miles WNW of Sandskjer, is a fish-

breakers usually keep a channel open from Kirkenes to Neiden,
ing harbor, with two short moles, at the mouth of a river. A
a town on the W side of Neidenfjorden. The tidal current runs
light is shown at the head of the W mole.
very strong between Korstjorden, a fjord on the SE side of Sk-
Mortensnes, a village, lies 6.5 miles WNW of Veste Jakob-
ogeroy and Neidenfjorden.
selv. A light is shown from a point close SE of the village.
The fairway in Korsfjorden is nearly free from dangers with-
9.33
Meskfjorden (70°10'N., 28°40'E.), an inlet lies on the N side

9.31
in the entrance, but strong squalls occur in the N part of
Pub. 182
Kjofjorden during W winds. The fjord is well marked by navi- maximum beam of 48m, can berth at the harbor. See the table
gational aids. Neidenfjorden extends about 4 miles SSW from titled Kirkenes—Berthing Information.
the S end of Korsfjorden; Munkefjorden continues SSW for 3 Berthing details are shown in the accompanying table titled
9.35
miles. Kirkenes—Berth Information.

Anchorage.—Brashamn, a small landlocked harbor, lies
9.33 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 70m
9.35
about 1 mile within the W side of the entrance to Korsfjorden loa. Pilots should be ordered through SafeSeaNet but may be
and is suitable to small vessels with local knowledge. Vessels ordered through the Lodingen Pilot Booking Center at an addi-
with local knowledge can anchor on the W side of Neiden- tional cost.
fjorden in a position about 1 mile SW of Skogeroypynten There is a coastal pilot station at Kirkenes. The lookout sta-
9.35
Light. Vessels should not anchor in depths of less than 24m in tion for the pilots is off Oksebaasen (69°51'N., 30°07'E.).
order to swing clear of the drying shore reef. Contact can be made via VHF channel 16.
There are a number of other anchorages in the fjords, which
9.33 Vessels at sea requiring a pilot should give at least 24 hours
9.35
can best be seen on the chart. notice, notifying confirmation or any alteration at least 2 hours
before the original time stipulated.
9.34 Bokfjorden (69°50'N., 30°07'E.) is entered between Vessel Traffic Service.—For details, see Vardo in paragraph
9.35
Bokfjorden Light and the NE point of the island of Kjelmoy, 2 9.26.

miles to the W. The fjord extends about 9 miles S to a promon- Contact Information.—See the table titled Kirkenes—
9.35
tory on which stands the town of Kirkenes, where it divides in- Contact Information.
to Elvenefjorden and Langfjorden.
About 4 miles within the entrance to the fjord lies Kors-
9.34
Kirkenes—Contact Information
fjorden, which branches WSW for about 9 miles on the S side
of Skogeroy to a junction with Kjofjorden and Neidenfjorden. Port Director
The above fjords are well marked by navigational aids, which Telephone 47-78-974744
can best be seen on the chart.
Bokfjorden Light (69°53'N., 30°11'E.) is shown from a
9.34
tower, 10m in height, standing on Hungerneset. A racon is lo- Traffic Office

cated at the light. VHF VHF channels 12 and 16
Anchorage.—Good anchorage for large vessels is obtain-
9.34
able at the entrance to Langfjorden, SW of Kirkenes. Depths Telephone 47-41-454992

up to 37m are found in this anchorage. Small vessels can an- E-mail havnevakt@svk.no
chor in Soldaterbukt, in depths of 9.1 to 14.6m. This small bay
lies between the SW side of Prestoy and the mainland to the W. Port Authority
9.35 Kirkenes (69°44'N., 30°03'E.) (World Port Index No.
20650) lies at the head of a promontory separating Elvenes- E-mail havnevesenet@svk.no
fjorden and Langfjorden. The harbor is used mainly for the
loading of iron ore. Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to load ore can anchor in the
Depths—Limitations.— Vessels up to 63,581 dwt, with a
9.35
entrance to Langfjorden, about 0.5 mile W of Kirkenes
maximum length of 210m, a maximum draft of 10.7m, and a Church, in a depth of about 33m.
Kirkenes—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Kirkenes Port
Fishing, breakbulk, bunkers, and reef-
Jakobsnes 40m 6.5m 85.9m — 16.0m 2,979 dwt
er.
Container, project/heavy cargo, fishing
Industrikaia 120m 6.3-7.5m 7.5m 7.0m 26.0m 24,783 dwt vessels, breakbulk, bunkers, and reefer.
336 TEU.
Aggregates, cruise vessels, containers,
offshore vessels, project/heavy cargo,
Dypvannskaia 92m 11.2m 210m 10.7m 48.0m 63,581 dwt
steel products, fishing vessels, break-
bulk, bunkers, and reefer. 912 TEU
Ro/pax, fast ferries, offshore vessels,
Hutigrutekaia 104m 5.3m 150m 4.8m 23.6m 2,979 dwt fishing vessels, breakbulk, bunkers,
and reefer.
Pub. 182
Kirkenes—Berthing Information
Maximum Vessel
LOA Draft Beam Size
Chemicals, clean products, offshore
Inportkaia 138m 8.2m 147m — 22.0m 14,878 dwt vessels, fishing vessels, breakbulk,
By Are G Nilsen via Wikimedia Commons

9.35
Kirkenes
9.35
Range lights, in line bearing 208°, lead to this anchorage.

9.35 good holding ground.
There is also anchorage 0.15 mile NE of a mud pipeline, in a The fjord trends S for about 9 miles to Kjerrisneset, then
9.36
depth of 27m, close off the harbor. WSW for 3 miles. In winter, ice usually lies from the head of
Caution.—It is necessary that vessels lying in the harbor at
9.35 the fjord to Kjerrisneset. Jarfjorden Light is shown from a ped-
Kirkenes should pay attention to the breaking up of ice at the end estal on the E side of the fjord, about 0.5 mile SSW of the E en-
of the winter. Spring tides and a S wind clear ice from the harbor, trance point. A vessel entering Jarfjorden should keep nearer
but it is considerably later before the main ice from the head of El- the W side of the fjord to avoid the dangers on the E side of the
venesfjorden drifts seaward. If at anchor, drifting ice may cause a entrance.
vessel to drag anchor. A vessel moored to a quay should be The best anchorage in Jarfjorden is in Lanabukt, the inlet E
9.36
moored flush against the berth to prevent ice from lodging be- of Hinnoy, where there are depths of 20 to 24m. The inlet is
tween the ship and the quay, which could carry away her hawsers. free of ice and is a port of call for coastal steamers. Small ves-
sels with local knowledge can anchor near the head of the
9.36 Holmengrafjorden (69°51'N., 30°19'E.), the en- fjord, off Jarfjordenbotn, in depths of up to 22m.
trance of which lies about 4 miles ESE of Bokfjorden, is en- Sagfjorden (69°49'N., 30°32'E.) lies about 3 miles E of
9.36
tered between Jarfjordennes and Trifannes, about 1 mile NNW. Jarfjorden and is entered between Sagfjordenneset and Kolje-
A shoal, which dries, lies about 0.2 mile N of Trifannes and is neset. An unmarked rock, with a depth of about 1m, lies in this
marked by an iron perch. Holmengraholmen lies in the fairway narrow channel 0.5 mile WSW of the entrance.
of the fjord about 2 miles W of Jarfjordnes. Anchorage is available for small vessels with local knowl-
9.36
Anchorage is available in mid-channel 0.2 mile from the

9.36 edge in summer near its head, about 1 mile within the entrance,
head of the fjord, in 29 to 37m, good holding ground. The best but is seldom used.
anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge is in Inner- Pasvikhamn (69°49'N., 30°35'E.) lies about 1 mile E of
9.36
hamn, on the SE side of the fjord, in a depth of about 20m, Sagfjorden, and is entered between Dodesneset and Vardene-
Pub. 182
set. The harbor is good at all times of the year for vessels with Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in Storbukt,
9.37
local knowledge. Anchorage is available, in depths of up to on the W side of the fjord, in depths of up to 45.7m, about
33m, about 1 mile within the entrance. A swell occurs within 183m offshore. Vessels are advised to secure to the shore due
the inlet during NW winds. There is an islet and rocks, awash, to rapidly increasing depths.
on the SW side of the entrance. A vessel entering the inlet Anchorage is also available on the SE of the fjord in Fabrik-
9.37
should pass E of the islet and rocks. A black beacon stands on bukt, in depths up to 44m, about 2 miles SE of Storbukt.
Vardeneset. Jakobselv (69°47'N., 30°50'E.), a river, the mouth of which
9.37
lies 8.5 miles E of Jarfjorden, flows from lakes and marshes 40

9.37 Ytre Smastraumneset (69°48'N., 30°41'E.) lies miles inland. Grense Jakobselv is a village on the left bank of
about 2 miles E of Pasvikhamn and affords anchorage in sum- the river near its mouth. The alignment of two lighted beacons,
mer to small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 11 to bearing 208° and situated on the W bank of the river, indicates
15m, clay. There are mooring rings on both sides of Ytre Smas- the seaward section of the boundary between Norway and Rus-
traumneset. sia. A white stone building with a tower stands on the W side
Kobbholmfjorden (69°47'N., 30°44'E.) lies about 2 miles
9.37 of the mouth of the river and is conspicuous from seaward for a
SE of Ytre Smastraumneset and is entered by passing between considerable distance.
Heikeneset (69°48'N., 30°44'E.), and Ytre Kobbholmen Light. There is a black buoy moored about 0.2 mile N of the mouth
9.37
A number of islets and rocks lie on the NE side of the fjord

9.37 of Jakobselv. It also marks the frontier of Norway.
and can best be seen on the chart.
Pub. 182
10.
Sector 10—Jan Mayen
Pub. 182
245
247
SECTOR 10
JAN MAYEN
Plan.—This sector describes the island of Jan Mayen from

10.0 land in the world.
Sorkapp, the SW extremity, to Nordkapp, the island’s north- Beerenberg dominates the island from all directions and is
10.1
easternmost point. The sector also describes the numerous bays visible from a great distance in clear weather. In fog, the sum-
of Jan Mayen. mit is sometimes suddenly revealed
The low central region consists of many lava flows and vol-
10.1
General Remarks canic sand deserts, with almost no vegetation. There are a num-
ber of long beaches of dark volcanic sand, mixed with shining
10.1 Jan Mayen lies about 250 miles E of the E coast of olive green crystals and strewn with driftwood, probably from
Greenland and about 300 miles NE of the NE extremity of Ice- the great rivers of N Siberia. In the NE part of this region are
land. The island is about 30 miles long and lies in a SW to NE two lagoons, or fresh water lakes, separated from the sea by
direction. Its narrowest part, which is less than 2 miles wide, is narrow sand bars.
in the central region. The island is important chiefly because of The SW region consists of scattered peaks, which rise to an
10.1
its strategic position for weather forecasting. elevation of 768m, and then, in most places, fall steeply to the
The island, which apparently originated entirely by volcanic
10.1 sea. In some of the valleys, there are numerous small volcanic
processes, is divided into three distinct portions. The NE part is cones which interrupt the natural drainage from the hillsides to
almost entirely occupied by Beerenberg, an active volcano over form small lakes. Mist is common in this area.
30 miles around the base. Beerenberg is one of the largest The vicinity of land may be indicated by sea birds, which
10.1
known volcanic cones. The crater, over 1 mile in diameter, is swoop down in great numbers around a vessel. The cries of
filled with a glacier which escapes by a break in the N wall and these birds on land is like the distant roaring of a cascade and
cascades down to the sea. The highest peak in the crater is may be of assistance in warning vessels of the proximity of the
2,277m high. Beerenberg is the northernmost active volcano on cliffs they inhabit.
By Hagman (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

10.1
10.1 Beerenberg volcano lies on the NE part of Jan Mayen
Pub. 182
248 Sector 10. Jan Mayen
Winds—Weather.—The prevailing wind direction is E. In the N, the great depths run right into the island from
10.1
Gale winds and storms are usually from a NE to NW direction, Soraustkapp to Nordvestkapp.
although NE winds are not very common. From June through Lvndquistflaket stretches NW about 15 miles from the center
10.1
August, frequently the wind is out of the S to SW. Calm weath- of the island toward Marobanken, with a depth of 133m in the
er is rare, but occurs mostly from May to August. shallowest part.
Fog occurs most frequently in calm weather or with E to SE
10.1 Stimen, a shoal ridge about 2 mile WNW of the W extremity
10.1
winds. Frequently, there is fog during most of the summer. The of Sorjan, runs about 4 miles in a NE to SW direction. There is
island can be wrapped in fog for weeks. When fog hovers close a series of shoal heads here, with a least depth of 123m.
over the sea around the island in calm weather, the wind will Hoybergrenna, between the shoal ridge and land, has in-
10.1
hold it back against the weather side of the island, while the lee creasing depths from 350 to 700m to the S. There are also
side remains clear. With N or S winds, however, the fog can be peaks that reach up to 200m above the surrounding bottom.
piled over the low central part of the island, whereas the moun- From Sorjan, Jan Mayenbanken stretches S out to sea with
10.1
tains on Nordjan and Sorjan force it high aloft so that it drifts increasing depths. The depth is thus about 500m at a distance
in the lee as light clouds. This means that one side of the island of about 40 miles S of the island.
can have extremely poor visibility, while there is clear weather Straumflaket stretches from about 4 miles S of Sorjan for 10
10.1
with sunshine on the opposite side. miles S. The shallowest part of the bank is Bouwensonbaen,
Precipitation occurs very frequently, although not in large
10.1 with a depth of 6m, which lies about 9 miles SSE of Sorkapp.
quantities. September and October are the wettest months, A 6m shoal, whose position is doubtful, was reported to lie
whereas May and June are the driest. Precipitation mostly falls about 1 mile S of Bouwensonbaen. There are also other shoals
as snow. However, it is rare for a precipitation to fall exclusive- on this bank which reach up to depths of as little as 12m.
ly as snow during a month’s interval, even during the winter Sarsbanken extends about 20 miles E from Jan Mayen, with
10.1
months. depths of 250 to 300m. The bottom then falls away to great
Ice.—The island is usually affected by sea ice from mid-No-
10.1 depths on the N side of Sarabanken.
vember to mid-April. In severe seasons, the island may be af- Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
10.1
fected as early as late October and as late as early August, and Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
in a warm year, the island may be affected by ice perhaps for Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
10.1
only several weeks during winter months VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco-
Encountering mist is very common around Jan Mayen and
10.1 nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to
visibility is often poor. The temperature of the surface water the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the
should be taken frequently, perhaps hourly. Extreme caution areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor-
should be taken of encountering the ice barrier, especially mation, see paragraph 1.1.
when the seawater temperature falls to or below 3°C. Regulations.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
10.1
From mid-July to mid-August is the best time for finding an

10.1 Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
opening in the ice around the island and for making a landing.
During this time of year, the sea around the island is often calm Southeast Coast
or there exists a light breeze off the land. Making a landing is
extremely difficult or impossible with a swell or any waves that 10.2 For about 6 miles between Sorvestkapp and Kapp Wi-
break along the shore. er, there is a continuous undulating cliff about 150 to 300m
Tides—Currents.—Jan Mayen lies in the boundary water
10.1 high, falling vertically down to the sea or a rather narrow
between the East Greenland Current and an eddy from the Gulf beach. Small landslides into the sea often occur along this
Current and the North Atlantic Current, both running in the coast.
same direction, and causing a SW main current. The W point of Sorvestkapp, 214m high, ends in a sharp bill
10.2
The tidal range varies between 0.5 and 1.2m and causes a N
10.1 as a kind of portal over a remarkable 20m high hole right
current with rising water and a S current with falling water. through the rock.
With the addition of the variable depth conditions, irregular
10.1 Sjuskjera stretches about 0.5 mile W from Sorvestkapp. This
10.2
current conditions are thereby produced around the island. skerry lies 0.2 mile from land and is a 27m high inaccessible
Generally, there is a SW flow of 0.5 to 1 knot, sometimes rising rock with a profile like a goose. A couple of the other skerries
to 1.5 knots, although accurate observations have not been are about 3m high and are almost like large stones to look at,
made. while the others are rocks, awash.
During spring tides, inshore along the NW coast, the flow
10.1
may become N. Because of bottom conditions, irregular flows 10.3 Sorkapp (70°50'N., 8°59'W.) is the S extremity of the
or eddies occur, particularly S of the island in the vicinity of island. It is foul within 0.3 mile from land. Due S of the point,
Sorkapp and Strumflakect, a small body of water close to and S the 20m bank runs out to about 1 mile from land, with a 13m
of Sorkapp. depth at its extremity. Sorkappgrunnen, a 10m shoal, is located
Depths—Limitations.—Except when in the vicinity of
10.1 about 0.2 to 0.3 mile outside the 20m curve, slightly more than
Sorkapp, and Losbaten, a small islet on the SE coast, a vessel, 1 mile S of Sorkapp.
by keeping a distance of about 1 mile offshore, will be outside From Sorkapp, the coast continues 1 mile ENE toward Hjel-
10.3
the 20m danger curve off Jan Mayen. It is recommended that men, 341m hugh, with the easily-recognized points and skerry
vessel navigate at least 2 miles offshore when in the vicinity of of Kjeglene lying off.
Sorkapp or Losbaten. Northeast from there is Fugleodden, which forms the W lim-
10.3
Pub. 182
Sector 10. Jan Mayen 249
its of Hornbaekbukta. To the E, the bay is bounded by Kapp

Wien and is about 2 miles wide. Vessels find a good lee in
Hornbaekbukta against winds from the NW quarter, anchoring
in depths of 10 to 20m.
The N part of the bay has an uneven bottom, with somewhat
10.3
shallower, sharp peaks. In the E part of the bay, about 0.5 mile
S of Kapp Wien, there is Fyrtarnet, a 47m high rock that is nar-
rower at the base than on top. It is perhaps the most remarkable
natural landmark on the coast.
The conical Flykollen, 419m high, standing inside Kapp
10.3
Wien, is also easy to recognize where it runs in an even curve

down to the cape itself, which in turn is comparatively low and
divided at its end.
There is a stretch of about 3 miles, from Kapp Wien to Kapp
10.3
Traill in the NE, that is very foul to about 0.7 mile from land in
Brotvika, just on the NE side of Kapp Wien. There are also a
several high basalt rocks in the sea.
Schiertzegga, 378m high, lies just S of Kapp Traill, with a
10.3
stairway-shaped and splintered profile to the NE, and with a

hat on the highest point.
As a rule, the lower ledge will be visible beneath the fog and
10.3 10.4 By https://snl.no/Jan_Mayen (Store Norske Leksiken via Wikimedia Commons
is easily recognizable by a point which is separated from the Olonkinbyen Weather Station
10.4
rest of the land by a deep hollow.

anchor throughout the bay in W to N weather. With such condi-
10.4 Rekvedbukta (70°57'N., 8°34'W.) is a bay entered tions, fog usually comes rolling across the low, central part of
between Kapp Traill and Eggoya, 217m high. Along the first 2 the island.
miles NE from Kapp Traill, the coast consists of a low, heavily With W winds, vessels anchor best between Losbaten and
10.5
splintered cliff edge. In the middle of this stretch is Batvika, a Batvika, while with N winds the best lee is to the E of Eggoy-
comparatively good boat harbor with a sandy beach on the N bukta. Smaller vessels can lie here with the wind due NE if
side, which provides room for hauling up boats. Batvika is the they go far into the bay. With particularly strong winds, large
first landing place possible when proceeding on the NE stretch clouds of sand swirl up from the plain and are driven outward.
from Sorkapp, and serves as the nearest harbor for Olonkin-
byen. 10.6 Eggoya (70°58'N., 8°24'W.), 217m high, is the re-
Olonkinbyen is the only inhabited place on Jan Mayer. It
10.4
mains of an old crater, and is really a peninsula. The outer part
serves as the base for the staff of the LORAN station and the is so cut away by the sea that it forms a bay between two steep
Jan Mayen radio station. A road runs from Olonkinbyen across points. From Eggoya, the coast runs 8 miles ENE to Soraust-
to Kvalrossbukta, on the opposite side of the island. kapp. This stretch is fairly straight. The large, sandy plain be-
With E wind conditions, landing is difficult in Batvika.
10.4
hind Eggoya opens to the 1 mile wide Jamesonbukta.
Under such conditions, Kvalrossbukta is an excellent harbor. Gouwernaerbaen is a 10m shoal that is about 1 mile S of
10.6
There are masts for the radio and navigation systems erected in Jamesonbukta. From Jamesonbukta E, there is a 1 mile wide
the shore area NE along Rekvedbskta, with the radio station belt of lava rocks. Turnbukta cuts in a little way in the N part of
itself right in the S part. There is an air strip just E of the radio this. Some projecting points, together with several skerries,
station; S of this is an old, renovated hunting hut. provide a considerable lee against swell, and the bay is there-
The shoreline along Rekvedbukta consists of a low sandy
10.4
fore well-suited for hauling up boats.
plain. Inside the beach, there is the large Sorlaguna. To the ENE of this lava belt there is a new sand plain, Ull-
10.6
On the N side of the lagoon is Soyla, a large basalt rock,

10.4
ringsanden, with a lagoon beneath Kreklinghogda, red crater
114m high, which is a conspicuous landmark. wall, 61m high. The sand plain then stretches to Kapp Hap as a
narrow strip along the foot of the mountain.
10.5 Losbaten (70°56'N., 8°40'W.) is a small islet lying S Presidentsteinen, 12m high, is an easily-identifiable offshore
10.6
of the radio station. about 0.7 mile from land. islet about 1 mile WSW of Kapp Hap.
Losbatrevet is a shoal, about 3m deep, that extends 0.5 mile
10.5
ESE. East Coast

Nansenflua, a 2m shoal, lies 1 mile offshore and 4 miles NE
10.5
from Losbatrevet. Abnormal magnetic variations, to the extent 10.7 Along a stretch of about 3 miles around Soraustkapp
of 20°, were experienced in the area about 5 miles E of Losbat- (71°01'N., 8°00'W.), the mountainsides plunge down into the
en. Nansenflua is an underwater rock with a small top surface sea from heights of up to 200m. Soraustkapp itself appears as a
and about 20m high vertical sides. break in the cliff edge in about the middle of this area. The
Rekvedbukta is otherwise clear, with an evenly rising bot-
10.5
coast continues as steeply N to Austbukta.
tom, except for a 13m shoal about 1 mile NE of Losbaten. Several glacier arms push down on this stretch; two of them
10.7
When vessels keep away from the shoals described, they can have their fronts in the sea. The N front is really two parallel
Pub. 182
250 Sector 10. Jan Mayen
glaciers, Prince Haralds Bre and Frielebreen, which come to- West Coast
gether at the lower end.
On the stretch from these glacier fronts and further N to Aus-
10.7 10.9 South of Kapp Muyen, the coastal plain gradually
tkapp, the coastline is new as a result of the lava masses which widens. There are some steep cliffs that meet the sea. Further
burst out during a volcanic eruption. Due to the effects of the down the coast, the buildings of the a former radio station stand
sea and the steep sea bed, one cannot assume the shoreline is at Libergsletta. S of Libergsletta, there is Nordlaguna which is
stable. separated from the sea by a low shore bank.
North of this new land, there is a low cliff edge between
10.7 The coastal waters on this stretch are clear except, for a 10m
10.9
Austkapp and Nordkapp, which rises up to a height of about shoal 0.3 mile offshore just S of Kapp Muyen; a rock, awash,
70m midway between the capes. about 183m off Fugleberget near Nordlaguna; and a 5m shoal
The coast here forms the end of the ridge of Breerenberg to the
10.7 about 0.1 mile from land N of Danielsenkrateret.
NE with several craters. The two most conspicuous are Sarsk- Fugleberget forms the separation between Stasjonsbukta and
10.9
rateret, 264m high, and Hohenlohekrateret, 121m high, nearest Maria Myschbukta, both of which are excellent anchorages
the cliff. when the weather allows.
In no place off the E coast does the 20m bank reach further
10.7
out than 0.5 mile. Southwest Coast

Austbuka and Clandeboyebukta were formerly the only plac-
10.7
es around the island where vessels lay well in SW weather. 10.10 Brielletarnet (70°58'N., 8°42'W.) 91m high, has the
Volcanic eruptions, however, may have changed the bottom same formation as Fyrtarnet on the SE coast. It is connected to
conditions, which were previously steep outside the danger land by Kvalrossen, 157m high; together they form the most
line. Strong katabatic winds can occur off the coast here. remarkable place on the W side of the island.
Kvalrossbukta lies on the S side of Kvalrossen and is the best
10.10
North Coast harbor on the coast during favorable weather conditions.

The bays further S were used by whalers. Apart from Tom-
10.10
10.8 Nordkapp (71°10'N., 7°57'W.) lies 1 mile NNW of merbukta, the N bay, and Guineabukta, the S bay, they are not
Austkapp and is moderately high, with a rugged background. particularly suited as harbors. In many places, landing is inac-
From Nordkapp, the flat Kokssletta extends with a width of cessible because of an almost continuous cliff edge, which is
600 to 1200m across to Krossbutkta, about 2.5 miles W. formed by the distinctively gray and wide Lavastraumen in the
Kokssletta is made up of coke like lava. N. This comes from the mountains in the interior of Sorjan and
With S winds, Nordbukta, W of Nordkapp, provides good
10.8 ends at the edge of the sea at Kapp Rudsen (70°56'N.,
anchorage for smaller vessels, but the bottom falls off steeply 8°53'W.).
outside the danger line. From Kapp Rudsen, the waters SW are relatively foul, with
10.10
Krossbukta, a better harbor, has sandy beaches. The bottom

10.8 many skerries near land and with shoals out to about 0.1 mile
here rises evenly up from 50m and most often the wind is ei- from shore. Fuglesoyla, 14m high, is a rock about 183m off the
ther out of the S or E. coast, 1.75 miles SW from Kapp Rudsen, which provides a
Kapp Muyen, on the NW coast, is 7 miles SW of Krossbuk-
10.8 good landmark.
ta. Kapp Muyen is not recommended as a landing area, espe- Between Guineabukta and Sorbukta, there is Kraterflya, with
10.10
cially in the N part, where the mountain falls almost vertically Richterkrateret, 108m high; Hoyberg, 68m high; and Arneth-
400m. Three glacier arms emerge with fronts in the sea on this krateret, 111m high. The plain between the last two and Sor-
stretch. Weyprechtbreen is the largest. bukta has an over boiled surface, with upright figures in places.
Sorbukta is a much-used harbor, which provides excellent
10.10
shelter against winds between the NNE and E.
Pub. 182
251
11.
Sector 11—Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
Pub. 182
253
SECTOR 11
SVALBARD ARCHIPELAGO (SPITSBERGEN)
Plan.—This sector describes the Svalbard Archipelago, the

11.0 rial waters (12 miles) of Svalbard, including all islands, islets,
name given to all territory between the parallels of 74°N and and reefs between latitude 74°00'N, latitude 81°00'N, longitude
81°N, and between the meridians of 10°E and 35°E. It com- 10°00'E, and longitude 5°00'E. For further information, see
prises the main group of islands consisting of Spitsbergen Norway—Ship Reporting System in Pub. 180, Sailing Direc-
(Vestpitsbergen), Nordaustlandet, Barentsoya, Edgeoya, Prins tions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.
Karls Forland, and numerous smaller islets, and the outlying is-
lands of Kvitoya, Kong Karls Land, Hopen, and Bjornoya. Bjornoya
General Remarks 11.2 Bjornoya (74°27'N., 19°04'E.), the S island of Sval-
bard, lies with its S extremity about 250 miles NNW of Nord-
11.1 Winds—Weather.—Data on wind direction and ve- kapp, the N point of Norway and about 140 miles SSE of
locity show that gales tend to be somewhat less frequent from Vestspitsbergen. The island is triangular in shape, with the
N of latitude 70°N. Winds in Bjornoya are very variable; there apex pointing S; its length from N to S is about 10 miles and its
is little diurnal variation. greatest width is about 8 miles.
The ground W of Bjornoya is less foggy than Bjornoya it-
11.1 The S and E part of the island are mountainous; the N part is
11.2
self, and in the area around the island there is a rapid increase a stony and barren plateau. The coasts of the island are charac-
in fog frequency from W to E. In July, 40 per cent of observa- terized by high and almost vertical cliffs. Many of the steep
tions report fog to the NE of the island. cliffs are fringed with beaches on which landing can be effect-
Fog can be expected when the wind changes to E after a spell
11.1 ed in fine weather, but few of the beaches afford access to the
of SW winds while pressure remains high. Fog has been known interior of the island.
to persist over the island for as long as 19 days. Bjornoya is often entirely or partly obscured by mist, but
11.2
The coasts of Svalbard are subject to squalls which develop

11.1 Miseryfjellet, a mountain on the E coast, is frequently visible
suddenly, even from a calm, and falling snow may rapidly when the lower parts of the island are hidden. In fine weather,
obliterate landmarks. Downslope winds from the glacier are a the mountain may be seen for a distance of up to 40 miles.
common feature. A Norwegian government meteorological and radio station
11.2
Fog is rather frequent at Edgeoya and Nordaustlandet and is

11.1 is situated at the N end of the island and is marked by three
more frequent on the E coast of the island than on the W coast high radio masts. A radiobeacon is located near the meteoro-
of Spitsbergen. logical station. A consol beacon transmits about 2 miles SSE of
The light conditions on Svalbard are very special, as in polar
11.1 the radiobeacon.
regions in general, and are rather different from those we are Ice.—Bjornoya is usually affected by ice from late Decem-
11.2
used to in lower latitudes. The further N one moves to the polar ber to late March. In a heavy ice year, however, it may be af-
circle, the longer the periods when the sun stays above the hori- fected as early as late October and as late as early May. In a
zon day and night in summer (midnight sun), and below the light season, it is effected by ice for at least a few weeks in
horizon in winter (polar night) winter. Small icebergs are sometimes found in the vicinity of
The table shows when the “perpetual day” and “perpetual
11.1 Bjornoya from May to October.
night” begin and end for the latitudes covered by Svalbard. Tides—Currents.—The current runs around Bjornoya at an
11.2
These periods increase by about 6 weeks from 74° to 81°N, unusual rate and in certain places raises a tremendous sea,
corresponding to 6 days for each degree of latitude one travels which is quite dangerous to small craft. The sea is especially
N, which again means about 2 hours, 26 minutes for every nau- heavy around the S end of the island, between Sylen and the
tical mile. entrance to Sorhamn, where the current attains a rate of about 3
Vessel Traffic Service.—NOR Vessel Traffic Service (NOR
11.1 knots. Tide rip around the island are experienced far out to sea.
VTS) is in operation for vessels transiting the Norwegian Eco- On the rising tide, the current runs N on the E and W coasts
11.2
nomic Zone (NEZ) from the Norway/Sweden border in the S to and W on the N coast. After the occurrence of HW, the rate of
the Norway/Russia border in the N. The NEZ also includes the the current decreases, and there may be slack water for as long
areas around Svalbard and Jan Mayen Island. For further infor- as 0.5 hour. On the falling tide, the current runs S on the E and
mation, see paragraph 1.1. W coasts and E on the N coast.
Ship Reporting System.—The Svalbard Reporting System
11.1 Pilotage.—See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning
11.2
requires vessels to report to NOR VTS when within the territo- Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.
Midnight Sun Polar Night

Latitude Latitude
From To No. of Days From To No. of Days
74°N May 3 Aug. 9 99 Nov. 10 Feb. 1 84 74°N
Pub. 182
254 Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen)
Midnight Sun Polar Night

Latitude Latitude
From To No. of Days From To No. of Days
75°N Apr. 30 Aug. 12 105 Nov. 6 Feb. 5 92 75°N
76°N Apr. 27 Aug. 15 111 Nov. 3 Feb. 8 98 76°N
77°N Apr. 24 Aug. 18 117 Oct. 31 Feb. 11 92 77°N
78°N Apr. 21 Aug. 21 123 Oct. 28 Feb. 14 110 78°N
79°N Apr. 21 Aug. 21 123 Oct. 28 Feb. 14 110 79°N
80°N Apr. 15 Aug. 27 135 Oct. 22 Feb. 20 122 80°N
81°N Apr. 12 Aug. 30 141 Oct. 19 Feb. 23 128 81°N
11.2
11.2 Bjornoya from S
Anchorage.—There are no sheltered harbors in Bjornoya

11.2 have been reported on the bank in the vicinity of Bjornoya.
and vessels surprised by the weather are forced to find shelter
on the lee side of the island and to anchor close in under the Bjornoya—East Coast
cliffs, behind the points, or in the bays.
In good weather, anchorage may be obtained anywhere
11.2 11.3 Kapp Bull (74°21'N., 19°05'E.), the S extremity of
around the island. Anchorage within a distance of 2 miles off- Bjornoya, is a steep headland, 373m high, close off which lie
shore may be obtained, in depths of 15 to 36m, most places be- three islets. The coast on either side of Kapp Bull is steep-to;
ing sand bottom. however, there are no harbor or landing places and strong
Spitsbergen Bank (75°00'N., 21°00'E.), defined by the
11.2 squalls frequently occur close inshore. Small boats are cau-
183m curve, lies with its outer edges at least 25 miles S and W tioned when proceeding along the coast during spring and early
of Bjornoya; then the bank extends N, NE, and E of the island. summer, when ice is melting, for landslides and falling rocks
Though the bank is not completely surveyed except in the vi- are almost continuous. Kapp Kolthoff, lies 0.75 mile ENE of
cinity of the island, depths of 22m and 18m have been obtained Kapp Bull and Alkeholmen, an islet, lies between them.
43 miles N of the island. Depths of less than 37m are frequent Sorhamna, a small bay, lies 1.5 miles NNE of Kapp Kolthoff.
11.3
around these two soundings. Abnormal magnetic variations The E side of the bay is protected by a steep and narrow islet.
Pub. 182
Sector 11. Svalbard Archipelago (Spitsbergen) 255
The depths in the middle of the bay are about 14.6m and great- about 2 miles to Kapp Duner (74°29'N., 18°46'E.), which is
er, shoaling to less than 9.1m at its head. Anchorage in the bay the NW point of a forked promontory forming the W extremity
may be obtained as convenient, but the holding ground is not of Bjornoya. Grytvika, on the NE side of Kapp Duner, affords
good. At the head of the bay is a small beach where landing is anchorage to small craft with local knowledge during E or S
possible; however, it was reported that the height of the cliffs winds. Teltvika, close SE of Kapp Duner, is a small cove from
prevented access to the interior. which landing and access to the interior are possible.
Roedvika (74°24'N., 19°13'E.), a small open bay, lies 2
11.3 Lunekevika (74°28'N., 18°47'E.), a bay about 0.5 mile wide
11.5
miles NNE of Sorhamna. During W winds, this bay affords the at its entrance, lies on the S side of the Kapp Duner promonto-
most secure anchorage on the E side of Bjornoya. A depth of ry; landing can be effected on a short sandy beach, which af-
11m is found in the middle of the bay. fords access to the interior of the island. The bay affords
Miserygrunnen, a dangerous rocky shoal which is often hard
11.3 anchorage for vessels with local knowledge.
to distinguish, lies close offshore SE of the S summit of Mis- Vernevagen, a bay, lies with Kapp Elizabeth, its S entrance
11.5
eryfjellet. Great care should be taken when approaching Roed- point, about 2 miles SSE of Kapp Duner. The entrance to the
vika from the N. Evensenbukta, a small bay, lies 3.5 miles bay is obstructed on its N and S sides by extensive shoals.
NNE of Roedvika. There is a landing place in the bay, but there Close N of Kapp Elizabeth is a landing place. A cairn of stones
is no suitable anchorage due to rocks and strong tidal currents. stands about 0.3 mile ESE of Kapp Elizabeth.
Austervag (74°30'N., 19°12'E.), a small cove, lies about 2
11.3 Kapp Ruth projects from the coast about 3 miles SSE of
11.5
miles NNW of Evensenbukta. Two beacons stand close within Kapp Elizabeth; midway between the two is Kapp Hanna, near
the head of the cove; when in line, bearing 218°, they indicates which a beacon stands. Kapp Maria lies about 1 mile SE of
the approach to Austervag. Small vessels with local knowledge Kapp Ruth; on its N side a group of islets lies close inshore.
can obtain anchorage during S or W winds. Vessels are cau- Caution.—A depth of 2.7m was reported (1994) to lie 1.8
11.5
tioned, should the wind change to NW, a heavy sea soon sets in miles WSW of Kapp Ruth.
and vessels must leave. Two radio masts stand 0.5 mile SE of
the range beacons. 11.6 Landnordingsvika is a bay entered between Kapp
Kare and Kapp Harry, about 1 mile to the SE. Shelter is afford-
Bjornoya—North Coast ed in this bay during E and NE gales, but winds from other di-
rections may raise a heavy sea. Vessels should approach with
11.4 The N coast of Bjornoya affords the best landing plac- the middle of the bay bearing about 045°, and then can anchor,
es and is comparatively free from off-lying dangers. Nord- in depths greater than 9.1m, with Kapp Harry in range about
kapp (74°31'N., 19°07'E.) forms the N extremity of the island. 133°, and in line with the outermost large rock on Skredneset, a
Herwighamn is an indentation in the coast and lies about 2 point 0.3 mile farther SE.
miles WSW of Nordkapp. A small stone pier, with a depth of Sylen (74°22'N., 19°02'E.), an awl-shaped pillar of rock,
11.6
4m alongside, is located at Herwighamn. Gravodden, a prom- 80m high, lies about 2 miles SSE of Kapp Kare. Hornvika, an
ontory, lies 0.75 mile W of Herwighamn. A meteorological and indentation on the S side of Hambergfjellet, lies close SE of
radio station stands 0.3 mile SSE of Gravodden. A number of Sylen. Stappen (74°20'N., 19°04'E.), lying NW of Sylen, is a
lighted radio and consol masts stand near the station and up to conspicuous pillar-shaped rock about 186m high.
2 miles E of the station. Herwighamn affords anchorage to The coast on either side of the S extremity of Bjornoya is
11.6
small vessels, in a depth of 10.9m. steep-to and there are no landing places. Small craft should ex-
Nordhamn (74°31'N., 18°59'E.) is an open bay entered be-
11.4 ercise great care along this coast, especially during spring and
tween Gravodden and Kapp Kjellstrom, the extremity of a early summer, when the melting ice causes continuous land-
small promontory 1 mile W. Emmaholmane, a chain of islets, slides of rock. The sea raised by tidal currents is especially
extends 0.3 mile N from a position close W of Kapp Kjell- heavy at the S end of the island, between Sylen and the en-
storm. The islets are very prominent and cannot be mistaken trance to Sorhamna on the E coast.
for other islets on the N coast.
The shore at the head of Nordhamn is low and flat, with a
11.4
Spitsbergen
small projection which divides the head into two bays. Anchor-
age, during offshore winds, is obtainable off these bays accord- 11.7 Spitsbergen, the largest island in the main group
ing to draft. A vessel anchored, in 15m, nearly 0.5 mile NW of forming Svalbard, is situated about 400 miles N of Norway. A
Gravodden Kobbebukta (74°31'N., 18°54'E.), an open bay, thick sheet of ice covers a large portion of the interior of the is-
lies between Kapp Kjellstorm and Taggodden, a point about 2 land, through it projects numerous sharp peaks. The whole of
miles WSW. the W coast of the island is mountainous. The valleys opening
Anchorage may be obtained in offshore winds 0.25 mile off
11.4 towards the coast, at the heads of which is a chain of moun-
the head of the bay, in a charted depth of 9m. In the E part of tains, are in most cases filled with permanent ice.
the bay, the shores slope evenly down to the sea; landing with Regulations.—Vessels may not possess or use heavy fuel
11.7
access to the interior is possible, but in the W part the cliffs are oils in the following protected areas in Svalbard:
unscalable. 1. Northwest Spitzbergen National Park.
2. Forlandet National Park.
Bjornoya—West Coast 3. Northeast Svalbard Nature Reserve.
4. Southeast Svalbard Nature Reserve.
11.5 From Taggodden, the coast curves SW and S for Further information about protected areas in Svalbard can be
11.7
Pub. 182
11.6 Courtesy of Olav Haugen, Norwegian Mapping Authority

11.6 Stappen from SE
from the formation of fast ice in fjords, this coast may remain
practically ice-free throughout the winter.
There are several polar research station on Spitbergen. On
11.7
the NW coast just S of Ny-Alesund is a station owned and

manned by the Nicolaus Copernicus University of Poland. The
Institute of Geophysics of the Polish Academy of Science op-
erates another station located on the SW coast in Hornsund.
Governor of Svalbard Home Page

https://www.sysselmannen.no/en/laws-and-
regulations
Sorkapp Land
11.8 Sorkapp Land (76°50'N., 16°25'E.) is a peninsula, 27
miles long in a N-S direction, at the S end of Spitsbergen. The
11.6 Courtesy of Marek Szymocka coast of Sorkapp Land is one of the most exposed in Spitsbergen,
11.6 Polish Polar Station in NW Spitsbergen and drift ice may be encountered off it at any time. Sorkappoya, a
narrow island, lies off the S coast of Sorkapp Land. Sorkapp, the S
found in the web site of the Governor of Svalbard. extremity of the island, is surmounted by a beacon. A large lagoon
When approaching the W coast of the island, considerable
11.7
is entered from the W side of the island. Flakskjeret is a low islet
reliance may be placed on soundings. Deep submarine valleys lying near the outer end of a chain of islets and rocks extending 3.5
penetrate into the fjords, while the coast between them is front- miles ESE from the E extremity of Sorkappoya.
ed by banks on which the depths in most cases increase regu- Sommerfeldbukta indents the S coast of Spitsbergen for
11.8
larly close inshore from 45 to 90m. about 4 miles, and lies about 3 miles N of the N extremity of
Due to the effect of the warm West Spitsbergen Current,
11.7
Sorkappoya. Oyrlandet is a narrow and level tongue of land ex-
most parts of the W coast are usually accessible from late May tending 5 miles SSW and forming the W side of Sommerfeld-
to early November. However, in a bad ice year, this coast may bukta. A hunter’s hut stands on each entrance point to
be affected from mid-October to late July. In a light year, apart Sommerfeldbukta.
Pub. 182
By Adam Nawrot (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

11.8
11.8 The Stanislaw Siedilecki Polish Polar Station in Hornsund
Anchorage is obtainable off the entrance to Sommerfeldbuk-

11.8 off the entrance to Hornsund.
ta, in a depth of about 8m. The depths within the entrance are
less than 3m; the inner part of the bay dries. Hornsund to Bellsund
Stormbukta (76°41'N., 16°18'E.), a small bay, lies close N of
11.8
the W coast of Oyrlandet. Open anchorage is obtainable in the 11.9 The coastal area between Hornsund and Bellsund is
entrance to Stormbukta, but this berth is exposed to heavy E backed by sharp-pointed and crevassed peaks, a feature of the
squalls which descend from the mountains, and caution is nec- W coast of Spitsbergen N of Hornsund. Depths of less than
essary owing to the dangers on the N side of the approach. 91m will be found from about 6 to 10 miles offshore at Torb-
Brimingen is a dangerous rock lying 6 miles W of the head of jornsenfjellet as far N as 77°30'N, so that soundings will give
Stormbukta and 2.25 miles offshore. The coast between Storm- warning of the proximity of danger.
bukta and Suffolkpynten (76°52'N., 15°34'E.) is very foul and The coast for 2.5 miles NW of Torbjornsenfjellet consists of
11.9
should not be approached within 2.5 miles. a high mountain ridge. Werenskioldbreen lies N of this ridge,
Hornsund, lying 19 miles NW of Stormbukta and entered be-
11.8 and a low swampy tract of land extends for 3 miles at the foot
tween Suffolkpynten and a point 7.5 miles NNW, extends 10 of its front. Tonefjellet, on the W side of Werenskioldbreen, is
miles ENE, with two short branches at its head. A bank, with a easily identified from seaward.
depth of 29m, has been reported to lie about 6 miles NW of Dunoyane (77°04'N., 15°00'E.), a group of three islets sur-
11.9
Suffolkpynten. Horsund is ice-free from July to October and rounded by several rocks, lies on the outer part of a shallow
the sound is usually navigable in June and November. The bank which forms the coast for 5 miles. The inner part of this
sound of Horsund is exposed to very severe E squalls which bank dries. Anchorage, in depths of 5 to 10m, may be obtained
descend from the mountains. 0.3 mile NE of the NW islet. The anchorage is approached
Vessels entering Hornsund should keep in mid-channel, tak-
11.8 from the N; local knowledge is necessary because of the many
ing care to avoid the dangerous shoal lying about 3 miles W of dangers in the vicinity.
Suffolkpynten. A rock, which does not cover, lies close E of Olsholmen, an islet 5 miles NNW of Kapp Borthen, provides
11.9
this shoal. Anchorage may be taken off the SW side of Gasha- anchorage during E winds between it and the coast, 0.75 mile
ma, a bight on the S side of Hornsund. When entering the bight E, but local knowledge is necessary and care must be taken to
care is taken to avoid two below-water rocks in its E part. avoid several dangers in the vicinity.
Han’s Glacier (Hansbreen) is a large glacier which descends
11.8 From Kapp Borthen, the coast trends in a general N direction
11.9
to the N shore of Hornsund, close E of a small inlet. It is to Kapp Lyell, a distance of about 25 miles. A mountain range
bounded on the E by a sharp ridge, 889m high, extending N runs parallel to the coast, about 2 miles inland. The coast in this
from the W entrance of Burgerbukta, with a very steep fall on vicinity is fringed with rocks which extend as far as 1.5 miles
its E side. Both Han’s Glacier and the ridge are prominent from offshore. A 13m patch lies 4.5 miles WSW of Kapp Borthen.
Pub. 182
11.8 By Michael Hambrey (with permission) http://www.glaciers-online.net

Han’s Glacier
11.8
Bellsund
11.10 Bellsund (77°39'N., 14°00'E.), an important inlet, is
entered between Kapp Lyell and Kapp Martin, which shows a
light. It extends about 12 miles E of Midterhuken, the W ex-
tremity of a mountainous peninsula known as Midterhukhal-
voy. This peninsula divides the inlet into two E branches, Van
Mijenfjorden and Van Keulenfjorden. A small S branch of
Bellsund, lies on the E side of the peninsula and is known as
Recherchefjorden.
The mountains in the vicinity of Bellsund are barren and
11.10
have many crevasses, particularly the peaks farthest W. On the

N side of the sound a plain extends to the foot of Ingeborgfel-
let, a peak about 7 miles E of Kapp Martin.
Ice.—Bellsund is not navigable from December to May. In
11.10
June and November, the ice is generally navigable; from July

to October, the inlet is ice-free.
Recherchefjorden, the S branch of Bellsund, was formerly
11.10
the chief place of assembly for the whaling fleet. The fjord is 11.10 Bellsund Light
well sheltered, though NW winds may send in some sea. Rein-
odden, a flat projection on the E side of the fjord, has a danger- the W extremity of Midterhukhalvoy. A cove which lies close
ous spit, on which there are several rocks that extend 0.75 SE of Midterkuhen affords shelter from N winds. The depths in
miles NNW offshore. Recherchefjorden is not usually clear of the cove appear to decrease regularly toward the head, from
ice until June or July and it freezes early, sometimes in Sep- about 33m at the entrance. Anchorage may be obtained, in a
tember. depth of about 15m, with the S extremity of the outer islet,
Good anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 33 to 37m,
11.10
which forms the W entrance point, bearing 292°, distant 0.175
good holding ground, in the SW corner of the fjord. Do not an- mile, or in a depth of about 9m, about 183m farther inshore.
chor anywhere near the two glaciers in the fjord, as they are Van Keulen Fjorden lies on the SE side of Bellsund and is
11.10
fringed with large quantities of floating ice. entered between Ahlstrandodden and Forsbladodden, 2.75
Midterkuken (77°39'N., 14°46'E.) is a promontory forming
11.10
miles NNW. The fjord penetrates about 15 miles inland, and is
Pub. 182
surrounded by flat-topped mountains. Nathorstbreen, a glacier should pass through Akselsundet at or near slack water. An ae-
at the head of the fjord, has an extensive moraine on either side ro light is shown from the N extremity of Akseloya.
of its front. Anchorages in the fjord are found close within the
entrance and are indicated on the chart. 11.12 Fridtjovhamna (Frithjofhamn) (77°46'N., 14°39'E.),
a cove on the N side of Akseljundet, is entered W of Kapp
Van Mijenfjorden Schollin, from which a spit extends 0.3 mile SSW. When enter-
ing the cove, caution is necessary to avoid a bank, with depths
11.11 This fjord is entered by Mariasundet and Akselsundet, of less than 1.5m, which extends 0.2 mile NE and N from the
two narrow channels at either end of the island Akseloya. On W entrance point. Anchorage is obtainable in the middle of the
either side and at the head of the fjord are flat-topped moun- cove or off its E side, in a charted depth of 16.5m. Local
tains, separated by broad flat valleys which are mostly ice-free. knowledge is necessary when anchoring in this cove.
Strong winds often blow out of the fjord. Between Maseneset and Blixodden, 16 miles ENE, the S
11.12
Mariasundet (77°41'N., 14°51'E.), the S entrance to the

11.11 shore of Van Mijenfjorden is steep-to, with the exception of a
fjord, is about 0.25 mile wide between Maseneset and the is- small bank. On this bank, there is a depth of 2m, which extends
land of Mariaoya, off the S end of Akseloya. The least charted 0.5 mile offshore abreast Bromelldalen, a valley 1.5 miles W of
depth in the fairway is about 11m. The tidal currents in this Blixodden. Conwentzodden, 5 miles ENE of Blixodden, is the
passage are very strong, and several dangers, the positions of extremity of a large projection forming part of an old moraine.
which are best seen on the chart, lie in the W approach and in A spit, on which the depths are less than 9m, extends nearly 1.5
the entrance channel close SW of Maseneset. miles NW from Conwentzodden.
Akselsundet (77°45'N., 14°36'E.), the N entrance to the
11.11 Between Kapp Schollin and Svartodden, which shows a light
11.12
fjord, is the usually used and is nearly 0.6 mile wide at its nar- and lies 5.5 miles ENE, the N coast of Van Mijenfjorden rises
rowest part. The N side of the passage should not be ap- steeply to the summit of Kolfjellet. A camp lies at the foot of
proached within about 0.2 mile; the S side should not be this mountain. Dom Miguelodden, a cape, shows a light and
approached within 183m. lies 10 miles ENE of Svartodden. Svensksundhamna, entered
The depths are from 16.5 to 51m in mid-channel. Though the
11.11 between Dom Miguelodden and Langneset, 2 miles ENE, of-
tidal currents are weaker than those in Mariasundet, they may fers anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge. Kapp
attain a velocity of 5 to 6 knots at springs, causing considerable Amsterdam, which shows a light, lies 7.5 miles ENE of Lang-
eddies and rip tides. Large vessels or those with low power neset.

11.12 Akseloya Light from NW
Pub. 182

11.12 Sveagruva
Sveabukta (77°52'N., 16°45'E.), an inlet at the NE corner of

11.12 Kapp Linne, has an anchorage available in depths of 12 to 13m
the fjord, is entered between Kapp Amsterdam and Ottoneset during S and SE winds located ENE of Kapp Linne. Two bea-
and extends 2.5 miles N to Barryneset. Sveagruva, a former cons at the head of the cove in line bearing about 150° and
coal mining settlement with a jetty, is situated close NW of Kapp Linne Light bearing 260°. Large vessels may anchor far-
Barryneset. The channel from Van Mijenfjorden to an anchor- ther offshore, in a depth of about 15m, 137m E of the line of
age close S of Sveagruva carries a least depth of 4m. The first the anchorage beacons, with Kapp Linne bearing about 233°.
leg is marked by leading beacons, which in line bear about Festningen, which shows a light, lies 5 miles NE of Kapp
11.13
016°. Local knowledge is required for the remainder of the Linne. Festningen is fringed by shoals extending 0.5 mile off-
channel. The channel continues N along two more legs, which shore; the outer edge is marked by a buoy.
are marked by lighted beacons. Although facilities at the settle-
ment had been improved, including the construction of an ex- Isfjorden
port quay and storage area at Kapp Amsterdam; no mining is
presently taking place. 11.14 Isfjorden (78°18'N., 15°00'E.), the largest fjord in
Spitsbergen, is entered between Kapp Linne and Daudmann-
Bellsund to Isfjorden sodden, 12 miles NW. From its entrance, it stretches 55 miles
NE to the head of Billefjorden, and numerous bays and fjords
11.13 Between Kapp Martin and Kapp Linne, 21 miles N, lead off each side. From June to November, the approach to the
the coast is fronted with dangers. Lights are shown from these fjord is ice-free, with the exception that the tidal currents may
inlets. Kapp Bjorset, which lies 6.5 miles N of Lagneset, and sometimes cause the entrance to be barred by loose pack ice.
Stabbane, 6 miles farther N, are inlets which show lights. This is most likely in early June, but in bad years it may hap-
There are no reported harbors of refuge in this section of the
11.13 pen in July or even later.
coast. From a position off the entrance to Bellsund, a mountain The fjord is ice-free from July through October inclusive. In
11.14
range may be seen stretching N from Ingeborgfjellet until hid- June and November, the W part of the fjord is also ice-free, the
den by another range extending NNW from Ytterdalssata. The inner part containing ice that is generally navigable. From De-
coastal plain is widest abreast Ytterdalssata. cember through May, it is unnavigable.
Kapp Linne (78°04'N., 13°37'E.), which shows a light,
11.13
forms the S entrance point of Isfjorden. A radio station, located Isfjorden—Southeast Side
about 0.2 mile SE of the light, is also a Norwegian government
meteorological station. An obstruction, with 30m over it, lies 1 11.15 Gronfjorden (78°03'N., 14°11'E.) is entered between
mile due W of Kapp Linne. Randvika, a cove on the E side of Festningen and Heerodden, which shows a light, and is marked
Pub. 182
11.14 By Bjoertvedt (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons

Barentsburg
11.14
by a buoy on its edge. There are two small glaciers at the head line is laid across the fjord from a position 0.5 mile S of Bar-
of the fjord and mountains stand on both sides of the fjord. entsburg in a WSW direction. The landing place of the pipeline
Caution.—Anchoring, fishing, diving, and salvaging are
11.15 on the W side is marked by lights.
prohibited in the N part of the fjord in two circular restricted Finneset is a small projection 3.5 miles S of Heerodden, on
11.16
areas, each with a radius of 150m, protecting historic wrecks. which are some buildings and two conspicuous radio masts. A
These areas are centered on the following positions: light is shown at the SW point of Finneset. Three range lights
a. 78°04'17.4''N, 14°09'20.4''E. are shown from a position 0.75 mile NNE of the light at Finne-
b. 78°04'24.0''N, 14°08'40.2''E. set; in line bearing 146° they lead through the middle of the en-
trance to Gronfjorden to a position 0.25 mile W of
11.16 Barentsburg (78°04'N., 14°14'E.) (World Port Index Barentsburg. Small vessels with local knowledge may anchor
No. 20560) is an extensive Russian coal mine settlement locat- on either side of Finneset. There is also a possible anchorage,
ed on the E shore of Gronfjorden, about 2 miles S of Heerod- in a depth of about 46m, at the head of the fjord.
den. A pipeline is laid across the fjord from a position 0.5 mile Between Heerodden and Kapp Laila, 8 miles E, the low
11.16
S of Barentsburg in a WSW direction. The landing place of the coast is fringed by a shore bank. It has been reported that 2
pipeline on the W side is marked by lights. miles E of Heerodden the bank extends farther N than charted.
Depths—Limitations.—There are two piers abreast the set-
11.16 Hollendardalen, a wide ice-free valley, breaks the coast 3 miles
tlement, and is capable of accommodating vessels up to 6.5m E of Heerodden and extends S and SE. An obstruction, with
draft. For more information see the table titled Barentsburg— 30m over it, lies approximately 1.7 miles off the coast between
Berth Information. Heerodden and Kapp Laila and may best be seen on the chart.
Barentsburg—Berth Information 11.17 Colesbukta (78°08'N., 14°57'E.), is entered between

Kapp Laila and a point 2.5 miles NE. The bay extends 2.5
Maximum miles in a SE direction. Both entrance points, the SW side of
Vessel Draft the bay, and its head are fringed with shoals. It was reported
Port of Barentsburg that the shoal fringing Kapp Laila extends farther N than chart-
ed. The depths in the bay are suitable for anchorage, but it is
Cruise 75m — Passengers and ro-ro.
open to the NW.
Coal 22m 6.5m Coal. Grumantbyen, a former coal mining settlement, lies at the
11.17
mouth of Grumantdalen, a valley about 4 miles NE of the en-

11.16 One of the piers is used exclusively for loading coal. A pipe- trance to Colesbukta. The valley contains one of the most im-
Pub. 182
11.17 (copyright) Mateusz War. / Wikimedia Commons via Wikimedia Commons

Longyearbyen
11.17
portant coal mines in Spitsbergen. Abreast Grumantbyen, the Vestpynten, on the SW side of the fjord is Adventpynten, a sa-
depths increase so rapidly offshore that vessels can only obtain lient point which is low, sandy, and inconspicuous. The point
anchorage very close inshore. There is a pier for loading coal shows a light. A low tract of land lies between the two above
by conveyor. Two mooring buoys are located close inshore in points; about 2 miles farther SE is Longyearbyen.
the vicinity of the coal pier. The wide valley of Adventdalen extends SE from the head of
11.18
Vestpynten (78°15'N., 15°27'E.), the SW entrance point of

11.17 the fjord, with Adventelva flowing through it. The area off the
Adventfjorden, lies about 9 miles NE of Colesbukta. A light is mouth of the river is gradually silting up, but the edge of the
shown from the point. shoal water is very steep-to and anchorage is afforded only in
great depths. Moskushamn, a former mining camp, stands 3
Adventfjorden miles SE of Revneset. Anchorage off the pier is exposed except
during E winds.
11.18 Adventfjorden (78°15'N., 15°37'E.) is entered be- Caution.—Anchoring, fishing, diving, and salvaging are
11.18
tween Vestpynten and Revneset, a point 3 miles to the NE. A prohibited in the head of the fjord in a circular restricted area,
shoal bank fringes Revneset for about 0.5 mile offshore, its with a radius of 150m, protecting a historic wreck, in position
outer edge being marked by a buoy. About 1.75 miles within 78°14'30.6''N, 15°41'49.2''E.
Longyearbyen—Berth Information
Maximum
LOA Draft
Cruise vessels, containers, and breakbulk. Pontoons
Bykaia
84m 9.0m 333m — for tenders and sailing boats close by berth. Fresh wa-
(Cruise)
ter is available. The berth area is ISPS compliant.
Pub. 182
Longyearbyen—Berth Information
Maximum
LOA Draft
Coastal vessels, breakbulk, multipurpose, and
Gamlekaia
54m 4.8m 90m — bunkers. A wooden pillar quay for coastal vessels and
(Old Quay)
bunker supplies for small to medium-sized vessels.
Coal and containers. Also used as a lay-by quay for
Kullkaia
65m 8.2m 170m 7.1m smaller vessels. A buoy off the berth assists in moor-
(Coal)
ing. Bollards onshore are up to 215m apart.
11.19 Longyearbyen (78°14'N., 15°39'E.) (World Port odden. The passage between the islets and Gasodden is foul
Index No. 20570), a coal-mining settlement, lies near the head and should not be attempted without local knowledge. A light
of Adventfjorden, on its SW shore. A coast radio station, from is shown from the NW end of the islet. Gipsvika, an open bay
which a radiobeacon transmits, is located at Longyearbyen. 2.25 miles wide, is entered 2 miles SE of Gasodden. Minister-
grunnen, with a depth of 5m, lies 3.75 miles SE of Gasodden
Governor of Svalbard Home Page and Medfjordgrunnen, with a depth of 15m, lies 1 mile farther
SSE. Two other patches, with depths of 13m and 16m, lie 0.8
https://www.portlongyear.no mile NW and 0.6 mile S, respectively of Ministergrunnen.
Templefjella (Temple Range) is flat-topped and rises precip-
11.20
Depths—Limitations.—Longyearbyen is a major logistic

11.19
itously from the sea in cliffs resembling tiers of cones arranged
port for cargo to Spitsbergen and the cruise industry. There are one upon another, a peculiar formation which is common in
three berths for larger vessels with a maximum length up to Svalbad. Templet, at the NW end, rises to an elevation of
250m and a maximum draft of 7.1m. There are pontoons 667m. Sindballefjellet, at the NE end, 737m high, is covered
available for tourist boars, yachts and tenders. by an ice cap, which appears permanent, as there are no signs
For more information see the table titled Longyearbyen—
11.19
of avalanches.
Berth Information. Templefjorden (78°24'N., 17°00'E.), the NE continuation of
11.20
Contact Information.—See the table titled Longyear-

11.19
Sassenfjorden, extends for about 8 miles from Bjonapynten. Its
byen—Contact Information. shores are comparatively steep. There are no outlying dangers.
The head of the fjord is fringed by glaciers.
Longyearbyen—Contact Information Bjonahamna, a cove on the NE side of Bjonapynten, affords
11.20
VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 anchorage, in about 31m, in its middle part, but the cove should
not be used when broken ice may block its entrance. Care must
47-91-122300 be taken to avoid the shoal patches in the N part of the cove.
Telephone
47-79-022150
Billefjorden
E-mail bykaia@lokalstyre.no 11.21 Billefjorden (78°34'N., 16°28'E.) forms the NNE
continuation of Isfjorden and extends inland for more than 15
miles. It is entered between Gasodden and Rundodden. Lights
Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor 0.25 mile N of the
11.19
are shown from Kapp Ekholm, on the E side of the fjord, and
piers, in a depth of 47m, thick mud. The depths are
Rudmosepynten, at the head of the fjord. The fjord is free from
considerable until close off the head of the larger pier.
offlying dangers on its W side, but toward the E side, a 6m
patch lies about 3 miles N of the Gasoyane islets. Rocks, with
Revneset to Gasodden depths of 5m and 7m, lie 0.6 mile NW and W, respectively, and
an isolated 11m patch lies 1.25 miles NW, of Skvalpeskjer, a
11.20 Between Revneset and Deltaneset, 5 miles NE, the
patch which lies about 4 miles NE of the Gasoyane islets.
coast is formed by a plateau, similar to that SW of Advent-
fjorden, above which can be seen the summit of Konussen. Skansbukta, a bay close within the W entrance point of
11.21
Billefjorden, is about 1 mile wide at its entrance and extends

Hatten, a rocky mound, which resembles a hat, lies 2.5 miles
ENE of Deltaneset. An aero light is shown from the NW side about 1 mile NNW. The general depths in the bay decrease
of Deltaneset. regularly, over a muddy bottom, from 42 to 18m. Small vessels
may anchor close to the head of the bay, in depths of 15 to
Sassenfjorden (78°23'N., 16°30'E.) is entered between Dia-
11.20
18m. The bay affords excellent anchorage, the best in

basodden and Gasodden, 6 miles NNE, and extends 8 miles
Isfjorden; it may be obtained anywhere in the bay. When
ESE to Bjonapynten. Sassendalen, a wide ice-free valley, ex-
entering the bay, vessels are requested to keep to the middle
tends over 16 miles SE from the head of Sassenfjorden, with
until depths of about 29m are reached.
numerous valleys on its SW side.
Gasoyane, a group of four islets, lies about 1 mile W of Gas-
11.20
Pub. 182

11.21 Pyramiden Havn
Mimerbukta (78°39'N., 16°25'E.) lies about 9 miles NNE

11.21 miles WSW of Rundodden. It is 9.5 miles wide at its entrance
of Skansbukta. The bay is 1.5 miles wide at its entrance and and extends 11 miles N to Kapp Waern, with general depths of
extends 1.5 miles W. A mud flat fills the inner part of the bay, 73 to over 183m. Kapp Waern is the extremity of a peninsula
extending 1 mile from the shore. A shallow spit extends 0.2 separating Ekmanfjorden and Dicksonfjorden.
mile S from the NE entrance point and usually excludes ice Ekmanfjorden is entered between Kapp Waern and Sveane-
11.22
from the bay. set, a point about 5 miles WSW. The fjord extends about 10
Pyramiden, a Russian coal mining settlement, lies at the had
11.21 miles in a N direction. The entrance is free of dangers, except
of the bay. A small wooden jetty, close within the entrance for banks extending about 0.5 mile off the two points. Flinthol-
point, is suitable only for lighters. A depth of about 20m is re- men, a small island, lies close off the W side of the fjord. Cora-
ported about 0.1 mile off its head. Good anchorage for small hulmen, another small island, lies on the E side near the head
craft is obtainable, with local knowledge, close off the settle- of the fjord.
ment. There is a good harbor for small craft on the W side of
11.22
Petuniabukta lies close NNE of Mimerbukta and forms part

11.21 Flintholmen. To reach this anchorage, a vessel must pass N and
of the head of Billefjorden. The bay is about 2 miles wide at W of a drying rock which lies in the N entrance near the W
the entrance and extends about 3 miles to the N. Though the side of Flintholmen. Good anchorage may be obtained, accord-
depths in the bay are suitable for anchorage, conditions are ing to draft, E of Coraholmen. Small craft may anchor in the
dependent on the movement of local ice. basin on the bank SE of the island, approaching from SW, but
Adolfbukta, a bay, is entered between Rudmosepyten, which
11.21 caution is necessary.
shows a light, and Kapp Napier. It lies close SE of Petuniabuk- Dicksonfjorden (78°42'N., 15°20'E.) is entered between
11.22
ta. The shores of the bay are steep-to and depths are deep. Kapp Woern (Kapp Waern) and Kapp Wyk (Kapp Wijk), 2.5
Small vessels can anchor between Kapp Napier and the reef E miles ENE. The fjord trends about 4 miles NE and 12 miles N,
of it, but this position may be dangerous because of ice from where the head is filled by drying mud flats for about 2 miles
the large glacier at the head of the bay. offshore.
Caution.—Anchoring, fishing, diving, and salvaging are
11.21 The entrance to the fjord and the channel N are constricted
11.22
prohibited in the fjord in a circular restricted area, with a radius by shoals, the positions of which can best be seen on the chart.
of 150m, protecting a historic wreck, in position 78°14'37.2''N, Accumulations of drift ice in the narrow entrance may make it
13°50'52.2''E. impossible to leave the fjord for weeks at a time.
Kapp Nathorst (78°47'N., 15°25'E.) projects from the E
11.22
11.22 Nordfjorden (78°30'N., 15°00'E.) is entered between side of Dicksonfjorden, 4.5 miles from the head of the fjord. A
Bohemanneset, which shows a light, and Kapp Thordsen, 6.5 shoal spit extends nearly 1 mile W and NW from the cape,
Pub. 182
leaving a narrow channel between its edge and the bank fring- mainland is free of dangers on the S side.
ing the W shore. This channel leads to a large basin in which Sarstangen (78°44'N., 11°29'E.), two narrow banks of sand
11.24
good anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 20 to 40m, good enclosing a lagoon, extends 2.5 miles WSW from the general
holding ground. The head of the fjord is filled by drying mud line of the coast of Spitsbergen. A beacon stands near the ex-
flats which extend about 2 miles offshore. tremity of Murraypynten. A light, with a racon and a radar
reflector, stands on the point of Sarstangen. Sarstangen tower
Isfjorden to Smeerenbergfjorden beacon stands about 183m E of the light.
Forlandsrevet, a sandy bar connecting Sarstangen and Mur-
11.24
11.23 Prins Karls Forland (78°30'N., 11°06'E.) lies off the raypynten, is about 13 miles within the N entrance to the
W coast of Spitsbergen between Daudmannsodden and Kvade- sound. The chart should be consulted for details regarding the
huken, 50 miles NNW, and is separated from it by Forlandsun- narrow and shallow channel.
det, a strait navigable only by vessels drawing 3.5m or less.
There are no sheltered anchorages on the W coast of Prins Forlandsundet—North End
Karls Forland, but N of Forlandsundet anchorage is obtainable
in Kongsfjorden. Anchorages can also be found in Kross- 11.25 Forlandsundet is entered from the N between Fugle-
fjorden, Magdalenefjorden, and Smeerenburgfjorden. huken and Kvadehuken, a low and salient point about 11 miles
Salfjellet (78°14'N., 12°03'E.), located at the S end of Prins
11.23 ENE. From Fuglehuken, which shows a light, the W coast of
Karls Forland, is saddle-shaped and very distinctive. It lies at Forlandsundet curves SE for about 8 miles to the point of
the S end of a mountain range, which extends 3 miles NNW. Heemskerckneset. For about 4 miles S of Heemskerckneset,
The mountains of Prins Karls Forland are frequently envel-
11.23 the coast is indented by Ferskvassbukta, a bay, which affords
oped in a dense canopy of clouds, which often descend to an anchorage, in depths of 8 to 15m.
elevation as low as 30m and sometimes to sea level. From Kvadehuken, which shows an aero light, the steep-to E
11.25
Fuglehuken (78°53'N., 10°30'E.) is the N extremity of Prins

11.23 shore of Forlandsundet trends SE for about 9 miles to the N en-
Karls Forland. A lighted beacon located on a knoll on the point trance point of Engelsbukta, which is about 2 miles wide at its
is reported difficult to see on certain bearings against the back- entrance and extends about 2 miles SE to a glacier at its head.
ground of mountains. Engelsbukta has been reported to be one of the best anchorages
Magnetic disturbances amounting to 4° have been experi-
11.23 on the W coast of Spitsbergen, being completely landlocked
enced in places off the W coast of Prins Karls Forland. An 8°E and free from incursions of polar ice. Within the bay, in its
disturbance was observed in a position about 12 miles W of middle, are charted depths of about 61m.
Kaldneset, a point near the middle of the W coast. Disturbanc- Between the S entrance point of Engelsbukta and Sarstan-
11.25
es of greater amounts, up to 11°W in places, have been experi- gen, about 7 miles SW, the entire coast is fringed with a shoal
enced N of the island. bank which, in places, extends about 3 miles offshore. Rocks.
with depths between 4 and 7m. lie near the outer edge of this
11.24 Forlandsundet (78°30'N., 12°40'E.), with a maxi- bank.
mum width of about 10 miles, separates the W coast of Spits-
bergen from Prins Karls Forland. Vessels are advised not to use Kongsfjorden
this passage before the middle of May because of ice.
Poolepynten, a steep-to point, is marked by a beacon and lies
11.24 11.26 Kongsfjorden (78°57'N., 12°00'E.) is entered be-
on the E side of Prins Karls Forland, about 12 miles N of tween Kvadehuken and Kapp Guissez, 7 miles NNE. The fjord
Salfjellet. Between Poolepynten and Dawespynten, a point extends 13 miles ESE, terminating in a large bay of which the
about 8 miles NW, the coast recedes to form a bight, the S part NW side is formed by a peninsula 6 miles SE of Kapp Guissez.
being known as Brucebukta and the N part as Peterbukta. The shores of the fjord are free from off-lying dangers, and in
Brucebukta is free of dangers and affords anchorage, in a depth most places are steep-to. The fjord is usually ice-free, or almost
of about 8m, 2.5 miles NW of Poolepynten. so, from late May to late November. Kongsbreen, one of the
Murraypynten, a sandy tongue extending 0.5 mile E, lies 11
11.24 largest glaciers in Svalbard, has a front 6 miles long, which
miles NNW of Dawespynten. forms the head of Kongsfjorden.
Eidembukta (78°21'N., 12°45'E.), a bight with a glacier at
11.24 Brandalpynten (78°57'N., 11°53'E.), which shows an aero
11.26
its head, lies on the E side of Forlandsundet, about 9 miles light, lies about 7 miles ESE of Kvadehuken. Kolhamna, the
NNW of Daudmannsodden. Anchorage may be obtained in the shallow bay between the promontory of Ny-Alesund and Bran-
N part of the bight; however mariners are cautioned to avoid a dalpynten, has depths of less than 5.5m. A rocky patch, with a
4m shoal located approximately 0.5 mile S of the anchorage. depth of 2.3m, lies 0.75 mile SSE of Brandalpynten.
A chain of islets, rocks, and reefs, about 2 miles offshore, W
11.24 Ny-Alesund (78°55'N., 11°57'E.) (World Port Index No.
11.26
of the NW entrance point, extends in a SW direction. 20580), situated on the promontory on the SE side of Kolham-
St. Jonsfjorden, a fjord with a glacier at its head, lies about
11.24 na, serves as a fishing station.
10 miles N of Eidembukta. Other glaciers enter the fjord on ei- Depths—Limitations.—The harbor can handle vessels up
11.26
ther side. The shores of the fjord are steep-to and free from to 70m in length with a 7.6m draft. There are two piers in the
dangers, but in the entrance on the N side is a dangerous de- harbor. A mooring buoy is situated between the heads of the
tached shoal. Hermansenoya, an island, lies on the N side of piers. For more berthing information see table titled Ny Ale-
the outer entrance. The passage between the island and the
Pub. 182
sund—Berth Information. Krossfjorden

Ny Alesund—Berth Information 11.28 Krossfjorden (79°09'N., 11°46'E.), entered between
Kapp Guissez and Kapp Mitra, 6 miles WNW, extends 8.5
Maximum miles NNE to Cadiopynten, the S extremity of Kong Haakons
Berth Length Depth Vessel Remarks Halvoy, where the fjord divides into Mollerfjorden and Lillie-
Draft hookfjorden. Mountains enclose the fjord on either side and
Ny Alesund Harbor landing is difficult in most places.
Lilliehookbreen, an immense glacier at the head of Lillie-
11.28
Cruise ves-
No. 1 73m 8.3m 7.6m hookfjorden, is a remarkable feature of Krossfjorden.
sels and coal.
The large bergs which are frequently calved, many with
11.28
No. 2 42m 6.0m — Coal. heights of 12 to 15m, are the only real icebergs calved on the
W coast of Spitsbergen. None of these bergs reach the open
Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by large vessels, sea, having such a deep draft they ground on the shore of the
in a depth of 27m, good holding ground, 0.25 mile NNW of the fjord, or on the shoals near the entrance.
E pier. Take care to avoid a rock, with a depth of 6.4m, lying Mollerfjorden, entered between Kapp Thoulet and the SE
11.28
0.15 mile NNE of this pier, at the seaward end of a bank ex- extremity of Kong Haakons Halvoy, extends 3.5 miles N,
tending NW from the shore. Small craft can anchor near the where it divides into Kollerfjorden and Mollerhamna. Two
head of Kolhamna. During N and W winds, vessels at anchor dangerous shoals lie close off the W shore N of the W entrance
may be bothered by drift ice, in which case anchoring in Blom- point. With the exception of these dangers, the outer part of
strandhamna is preferable. Mollerfjorden is free from shoals, but obstructions lie in the
approach to Kollerfjorden and Mollerhamna, where the depths
are very irregular. Kollerfjorden has not been thoroughly exam-
ined and should be entered with caution.
Mollerhamna, entered between Regnardneset and Kong
11.28
Haakens Halvoy, to the W, is fringed on its NE side by a shore

bank which extends from about 0.2 to 0.3 mile offshore. An-
chorage is obtainable, in depths of 18 to 27m, 0.1 to 0.2 mile
off its NE shore, with good holding ground. It is reported that
the depths N of the anchorage are less than those charted. A
conspicuous boulder on the shore 0.5 mile NW of Regnard-
neset may be useful as a mark when anchoring.
A hut stands on the shore between the boulder and Regnard-
11.28
neset. Due to the background, it is not easily seen from sea.
11.29 Ebeltofhamna (79°09'N., 11°39'E.), on the NW side

of Krossfjorden, is a shallow inlet about 4 miles within the en-
trance to the fjord. Anchorage may be obtained off Ebeltof-
hamna, in depths of about 15m, good holding ground, 0.25
By Superchilum (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons mile ENE of Enjalbalstranda, a sand spit.
Ny-Alesund Caution is necessary as the sand spit may have altered con-
11.29
siderably in shape and extent. Anchorage is recommended for

11.27 Blomstrandhamna (78°59'N., 12°06'E.), an inlet on use in only early summer, before drift ice sets in from Lillie-
the NW side of the peninsula of Blomstrandhalvoya, is entered hookbreen.
between Tonsneset and Hansneset, about 1 mile S. Lights are Lilliehookfjorden (79°15'N., 11°40'E.) is entered between
shown from the W side of this inlet. Vessels should keep in the S end of Kong Haakons Halvoy and the shore abreast
mid-channel when entering the inlet. On the N side of the inlet Schottfjellet, a peak about 2 miles to the W. The fjord extends
is a small bight, in which vessels may obtain anchorage during 6 miles NNW to Lilliehookbreen and is 1.5 miles wide
N and E winds, in a depth of about 33m, good holding ground. throughout its length. It is usually ice-free in July, but towards
Peirsonhamna, a small inlet at the S extremity of Blom-
11.27 the end of the summer, the ice from Lilliehookbreen may ren-
strandhalvoya, is 0.15 mile wide at its entrance, from which it der navigation of the fjord impossible. The shores of the fjord
extends 0.15 mile NE. At its head is London, a former settle- are steep-to and free from dangers.
ment used in the marble trade. Anchorage may be obtained 1 Signehamna (79°16'N., 11°35'E.) is a cove entered between
11.29
mile E of Peirsonhamna, in a depth of 35m, mud, about 0.4 Nilspynten, a point about 4 miles N of Schottfjellet, and Fridt-
mile offshore, and also 0.75 mile farther NE, in a depth of 30m, jovneset, about 0.65 mile farther N. The head of the cove is di-
0.3 mile offshore. A 9m patch lies about 1.25 miles ENE of vided by Gunnarpynten, a point about 0.3 mile WNW of
Peirsonhamna. Nilspynten.
Pub. 182
Anchorage may be obtained midway between Gunnarpynten

11.29 sterdamoya, on the W. It may be entered by Sorgattet, the
and Fridtjovneset, in depths of 15 to 18m, but this anchorage sound between Danskoya and the mainland; or by Danskegat-
should only be used when Lilliehookbreen is not calving. tet, the strait between Danskoya and Amsterdamoya; or by
Nordgattet, the N entrance between Amsterdamoya and the
Krossfjorden to Smeerenburgfjorden mainland. Anchorage is afforded on the E side of the fjord,
about 3 miles from the entrance. This anchorage is best seen on
11.30 From Kapp Mitra, the N entrance point to Kross- the chart.
fjorden, the coast trends 28 miles N to Magdalenhuken, the S Danskoya (79°41'N., 10°55'E.) lies with Kapp Gurnerd, its
11.31
entrance point of Magdalenefjorden. This part of the coast is SW extremity, about 3 miles N of Knattodden. The above cape
characterized by a series of glaciers, the deep valleys of which and the coast N of it are fronted by many islets and rocks; the
are backed by high mountains. The coastline is fringed with outermost danger is two rocks, awash, about 2 miles WNW of
rocks, below-water and awash, which in places extend about 2 the cape. With the exception of Kobbefjorden, this stretch of
miles offshore; it should therefore be given a berth of at least 3 coast has not been completely surveyed and should be given a
miles where the depths are 28m or greater. wide berth.
Kvedfjordbukta (79°25'N., 10°55'E.) and Rekvedbukta are
11.30 Kobbefjorden lies about 3 miles N of Kapp Gurnerd; it is
11.31
small indentations in the coast lying, respectively, about 19 and about 1 mile wide at its entrance and recedes E for about 2
23.5 miles N of Kapp Mitra. Nothing further is recorded of miles. An islet lies off the S shore of the fjord, close within the
them and in the approaches below-water rocks make caution entrance.
necessary. Anchorage.—Anchorage is afforded N of the islet, in depths
11.31
Hamburgerbukta, a cove about 2 miles S of Magdalenehu-

11.30 of 6.5 to 9.1m, outside the sand bar off the islet. Small vessels
ken (79°34'N., 10°44'E.), extends about 0.5 mile E to the gla- able to cross the bar may anchor at the head of the fjord.
cier at its head. The entrance is obstructed by a bar, over which
the depths vary from 1.8 to 5.5m. The middle of the cove has 11.32 Amsterdamoya (79°46'N., 10°49'E.) lies 1 mile N of
general depths of 7.3 to 18.3m. Danskoya and is separated from it by Danskegattet. Most of the
Magdalenefjorden (79°34'N., 10°54'E.) entrance lies be-
11.30 island is mountainous and two high peaks form the summit.
tween Magdalenehuken and Knattodden, about 3 miles NE. Ytterholmane consists of one large and several smaller islets
The fjord extends about 5 miles E to Waggonwaybreen, the ex- lying between 0.75 mile and 1.5 miles NW of Bikuben, the W
tensive glacier at its head. Surrounding the fjord are high, rug- extremity of Amsterdamoya. There is a passage between these
ged mountains which rise precipitously, the valleys between islets and the coast of Amsterdamoya. Hakluytodden, the NW
the ranges being filled either with snow or glaciers. Calvings extremity of Amsterdamoya, is a bold granite headland.
are frequent during the summer months. Tidal currents at times Danskegattet is entered from the W between Kapp de Geer
11.32
attain a rate of 1.5 knots along the S shore of the fjord. and Bikuben, which is prominent from seaward. A conspicu-
Magdaleneboen, a 6m rocky patch, lies 2.5 miles WSW of
11.30 ous tower-shaped hill rises close SE of Kapp de Geer. This W
Knattodden, in the W approach to Magdalenefjorden. The N entrance, which is partly blocked by shoal spits, has depths of
extremity of Gravneset, bearing 101° and in line with the mid- 10 to 11m in its middle part. In the E entrance channel, about
dle of Waggonwaybreen, leads into deep water S of Magdalen- 0.1 mile wide, the depths are only about 6.9m. Virgohamna, a
eboen. small bay on the SE side of Danskegattet, affords anchorage, in
Gravneset, a small peninsula, is fringed on its N side by a
11.30 depths of 22m and 11m, about 0.15 mile E and SE of Ek-
group of islets and rocks extending 0.2 mile offshore. Trinity- holmpynten.
hamna, on the E side of Gravneset, affords anchorage when
clear of ice. A stone cairn stands near the head of Trinityham- 11.33 Nordgattet (79°45'N., 11°05'E.), the N end of
na. Smeerenburgfjorden, forms the principal approach to the inner
Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of about 20 to 27m,
11.30 part of the fjord. The passage is bound on the W by the NE side
about 0.5 mile from the S shore in a position off Adambreen. of Amsterdamoya and on the E by the coast of the mainland
Adambreen lies more than 2 miles W of Gravneset and is the between Fuglepynten and the front of Frambreen, a glacier
outermost of the three glaciers on that side of the fjord. about 3 miles S. About 1.25 miles S of Fuglepynten, a bay
Shannonboen (79°34'N., 10°56'E.), a rock with a depth of
11.30 known as Kennedybukta recedes to the front of a glacier which
less than 2.0m, lies about 2 miles SE of Knattodden. Fuglehol- lies between mountain peaks and Frambreen glacier.
men, about 2m high, lies about 0.2 mile N of Shannonboen, on Sorgattet (79°39'N., 11°00'E.), the S approach to Smeeren-
11.33
a shoal with depths of less than 5.5m, on which lie several dan- burgfjorden is entered between Knattodden and Kapp Gurnerd,
gerous rocks. Another dangerous patch lies 0.4 mile E of Shan- 3 miles N, and extends for 3.5 miles NE; with a least width of
nonboen, having a rock, awash, close off its SE end, and a about 1 mile; it is much encumbered with islets and shoals.
rock, with a depth of less than 2m, off its NE end. Mesteinane, two islets, lie 1 mile N of Knattodden, in the en-
trance of Sorgattet. They are steep-to on their S and E sides. A
Smeerenburgfjorden beacon marks the E islet. The tidal currents run with great
strength through the narrow part of Sorgattet.
11.31 Smeerenburgfjorden (79°43'N., 11°06'E.) is an ex- Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile NE of Moseoya, 0.2
11.33
tensive fjord lying between the NW corner of the mainland of mile offshore, in a depth of about 18m. Anchorage is also ob-
Spitsbergen on the E and two large islands, Danskoya and Am- tainable 0.75 mile WSW of Danskeneset.
Pub. 182
Smeerenburgfjorden—Inner Part Raudfjorden

11.34 From abreast Smeerenburgodden, the fjord extends 11.36 Raudfjorden (79°50'N., 12°00'E.) is entered between
about 8 miles SSE to Smeerenburgbreen, a glacier at the E side Flathukenand Jermaktangen, 4 miles E. The fjord extends 10.5
of its head. South of Danskegattet, the middle approach to the miles to the S and divides into two branches near its head. The
fjord from seaward, foul ground lies off the W shore to a dis- fjord has deep water for the most part and the general depths
tance of about 0.6 mile. The islet of Albertoya is about 0.4 mile off the entrance are 15.3m and greater. A shoal spot, with a
SE of Kapp Pike, the S point at the E end of Danskegattet. depth of 3.4m, and a rock, with a depth of 4m, lies about 1 mile
Slaadbukta (79°42'N., 11°15'E.), an indentation on the E
11.34 WNW and 1.25 miles NNW, respectively, of Jermaktangen. A
shore about 1 mile S of Frambreen, recedes to the front of a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies approximately 1.5
glacier. About 2 miles SSE of Slaadbukta is a small bay named miles W of Jermaktangen.
Marbukta. Anchorage may be obtained 0.4 mile SSE of Between Jermaktangen and Velkomstpynten, the W entrance
11.36
Smeerenburgodden, in depths of 24 to 33m. point of Woodfjorden, a bend on the coast forms a wide bay
known as Breibogen, which recedes about 5 miles to its head at
Spitsbergen—North Coast the W end. The NE shore of the bay is covered by deep-red
limestone. Patches, with depths of 13.8m and 16m, lie within 2
11.35 Fuglefjorden (79°47'N., 11°28'E.) is entered between miles seaward of the N extremity of Velkomstpynten. A shoal
Fuglepynten and Drottenneset, 3.25 miles ENE, and extends 3 patch, with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 3 miles NNW of Vel-
miles SSE to two glaciers at its head. Fugloya, an island, lies komstpynten.
about midway between the entrance points. The depths in Moffen (80°02'N., 14°30'E.), an island, lies 12 miles NE of
11.36
Fuglefjorden are very irregular in places and it should be en- Velkomstpynten. It has an extensive bank, with depths from
tered with caution. 17m to 102m, which extends more than 20 miles N. Two outly-
ing shoals, with depths of 7m and 9m, lie, respectively, 15
miles NW and 12 miles N of Moffen; however, their exact po-
sitions are not known. A beacon stands at the S extremity of the
island. The tidal currents off the island set NW and SE at a rate
of about 1 knot. Anchorage may be taken about 0.5 mile SW of
the beacon.
Woodfjorden and Liefdefjorden

11.37 Woodfjorden (79°40'N., 13°58'E.) is entered be-
tween Velkomstpynten and Grahuken, a point about 8 miles
ESE. The fjord indents the coast for about 34 miles to the S.
Grahuken, the E entrance point of Woodfjorden, is the N ex-
tremity of a mountainous promontory between Woodfjorden
and Wijdefjorden. A beacon stands on a rock close N of Gra-
huken. From Velkomstpynten the W side of Woodfjorden
trends about 11 miles S to a small peninsula which forms the N
entrance point of Liefdefjorden.
11.35 By Lkarsten (Own work) via Wikimedia Commons Liefdfjorden is entered between Stasjonsoyane and Roosene-
11.37
11.35 Fugloya as seen from Novika set, 6.5 miles SSW, and extends 13 miles WSW to Monaco-
breen at its head. The fjord contains numerous groups of islets
Fair Haven (79°49'N., 11°29'E.) a sound lying N of
11.35 and rocks, which can best be seen on the chart. Bockfjorden,
Fuglefjorden, is partly sheltered by cliff islets and shoals. The entered between Roosneset and Kapp Kjeldsen, 6 miles S, ex-
depths in the sound are irregular and include a number of shoal tends 3 miles S of the latter point. A shoal, with a depth of 7m,
patches. Cummingoya lies in the E part of the sound, on a de- lies 4 miles S; a dangerous shoal, with a depth of 1m, lies 6
tached shoal with depths of less than 5.5m up to 183m off- miles SSE of Roosneset.
shore. Steggholmen, 0.5 mile SSE of Cummingoya, lies close
within the S edge of an extensive bank, having depth of less Wijdefjorden
than 5.5m, and with several rocky patches. Holmiabukta, an in-
let, is entered from the SE corner of Fair Haven, 1 mile E of 11.38 Wijdefjorden (79°22'N., 15°37'E.) is entered be-
Drottenneset. tween Grahuken and Bangenhuk, 14 miles ENE and extends 58
Suitable anchorage is reported in the channel between Fugle-
11.35 miles SSE to a glacier at its head. The depths in the fjord are
sangen and Klovingen, close N of Fair Haven. The depths are deep; however a shoal, the exact position of which is not
from 16.5 to 46m, mud, free from hidden dangers, except for a known, with a depth of 3m, lies about 17 miles SSE of Gra-
7m shoal spot that lies about 0.3 mile SW of Klovingen. Drift huken. The W side of the fjord is backed by mountain ranges
ice and bergs may be carried in from the N by the wind or the separated by valleys running in a WSW direction. Some of
tidal current. these valleys are long and flat, others short and steep, but most
have glaciers at their sides or heads and all are desolate.
Pub. 182

11.38 Waldenoya from S
Vestfjorden, about 6 miles long, branches SSW from the W

11.38 latter being large and salient and in places the offing is encum-
shore of Wijdefjorden, about 35 miles within the entrance. It is, bered by islands and dangers.
in reality, a side valley which is depressed below sea level and Langgrunnodden (80°09'N., 17°46'E.), the NW extremity
11.39
appears to be silting up rapidly. The depths in the fjord are of Nordaustlandet and the NE entrance point of Hinlopen-
somewhat shallow and its head dries for 2 miles offshore. stretet, lies at the NW end of Storsteinhalvoya. From Lang-
Anchorage in Wijdefjorden can be obtained on either side of
11.38 grunnodden to Marmorpynten, 11 miles ENE, the coast
Bratthuken, a small sandy projection on the E side of the fjord, consists almost entirely of narrow strips of beach within which
about 11 miles S of Bangenhuk, in depths of 9.1m on the N are extensive lagoons, most of the water near them being
side of the point and 7.3m on the S side. Anchorage is also re- brackish. Lagoya, meaning low island, is separated from the N
ported on the W side of the fjord close N of Krosspynten, and coast of Storsteinhalvoya by Franklinsundet, known to be foul
also 14 miles SSE of Kapp Petermann. and having a 10m patch in mid-channel, 3.5 miles WNW of
Mosselbukta (79°53'N., 15°55'E.) is entered between Ban-
11.38 Marmorpynten. Franklinsundet’s narrowest width is 3 miles;
genhuk and the coast 3.5 miles NNE, and extends 3 miles SE. however, it should be entered with great caution.
The bay apparently was used as an anchorage during former Lady Franklinfjorden (80°09'N., 19°11'E.) is entered be-
11.39
whaling times, but vessels experienced severe difficulties when tween Marmorpynten and the coast of Botniahalvoya, which
they were beset by ice in the bay. projects 13 miles NNW to form the E side of the fjord. From its
Verlegenhuken, about 13 miles NNE of Bangenhuk, forms
11.38 entrance, the fjord penetrates about 9 miles SSE to a glacier at
the N extremity of Mosselhalvoya, the latter being the seaward its head. There appear to be several shoals in the fjord and sev-
end of the great peninsula Ny Friesland which terminates eral above-water rocks are visible. At times, the fjord is unap-
Spitsbergen to the NE and separates Wijdefjorden from Hinlo- proachable due to ice.
penstretet. A beacon stands on Verlegenhuken; a dangerous 5m Brennevinsfjorden is entered between Kapp Hansteen and
11.39
patch lies about 3 miles ENE of the beacon. Depotodden, 5 miles ENE, and extends 11 miles SSE. Two
shoal patches, with depths of 3m and 7m, lie about 5 miles
Nordaustlandet—North Coast NNW of Kapp Hansteen. Mariners approaching Brennevins-
fjorden are advised to proceed with extreme caution.
11.39 Nordaustlandet (79°50'N., 23°00'E.), the largest is- Close within Depotodden are steep cliffs, on top of which is
11.39
land NE of Spitsbergen, is separated from the latter by Hinlo- an almost snow-free plateau, from which rises Snotoppen, a
penstretet. The very irregular N coast of the island is broken by mountain with a small ice cap on its summit.
interspersed fjords, bays, and rugged peninsulas. Some of the The best anchorage in the fjord is reported to be in an inlet at
11.39
Pub. 182
the E corner of the head, which is said to be one of the best Kapp Platen, and extends 12 miles S from the latter point. The
sheltered harbors in Nordaustlandet. In normal years, the fjord head of the fjord is shoal and submerged rocks are reported to
is reported to be ice-free between the end of July and early Oc- lie in the entrance. The fjord should not be used as a refuge and
tober. great caution is necessary in entering it. The entrance can be
blocked very quickly by ice; the fjord frequently remains full
11.40 Laponiahalvoya (80°25'N., 19°50'E.) is a large pen- of ice long after the surrounding waters are open.
insula which projects about 18 miles N and separates Breenev- Duvefjorden (80°17'N., 23°30'E.) is entered between the
11.42
insfjorden from the large body of water to the E, known as coast under Goodenoughtjellet, 6 miles SE of Kapp Platen, and
Nordenskioldbukta. Kapp Rubin, the N extremity of the penin- the N extremity of Glenhalvoya, a peninsula 11 miles farther
sula, lies about 12 miles NNE of Kapp Hansteen. The NW part SE, and extends 18 miles S from its entrance. The W side of
of the peninsula is composed of gray granite. the fjord consists of steep headlands which form the E side of
Chermsideoya, a relatively large island, lies off the N end of
11.40 Prins Oscars Land. The E shore is lower and more undulating
Laponiahalvoya. The passage between the island and the main- then the W.
land is narrow and its depths are moderate. About 1 mile E of A rock, with a depth of 8m, is reported to lie in position
11.42
Chermsideoya are the smaller islands of Castrenoya. In the 80°21.3'N, 23°14.0'E.

channel between Chermsideoya and Castrenoya, the depths are Adlersparrefjorden, on the E side of Duvefjorden, extends
11.42
greater than 146m, but a vessel has anchored, in about 9.1m, about 4 miles SE and has three inlets at its head. The N inlet af-
between the E and SE points of Chermsideoya, in a position fords refuge to small vessels, but if blocked by ice, the inlet
about 0.5 mile offshore. A 3m shoal patch, the position of may remain closed for a year. Conwayfjellet, a mountain, rises
which is doubtful, was reported (1989) to lie 1.5 miles SE of steeply between the middle and S inlets. Close SW of Adler-
South Castrenoya Island. sparrefjorden is an unnamed bight, about 2 miles wide at the
Beverlysundet (80°29'N., 19°52'E.) is entered between
11.40 entrance; the E side of Duvefjorden trends about 10 miles S to
Kapp Rubin and a point on the NW side of Chermsideoya, 2 the head of the fjord. Near the outer end of the E and longer of
miles ENE. The sound extends 3 miles SSE, then 1.5 miles NE, two promontories which project from the head is the dark and
with a least width of 0.4 mile. A small point, projecting 0.1 prominent Louise Richardfjellet, with a cairn on its flat sum-
mile S from the middle of the S side of Chermsideoya, is mit. Duvebreen, a glacier, enters the fjord about 4 miles E of
fringed with foul ground, which extends nearly 183m offshore. Louise Richardfjellet.
A shoal, located 0.4 mile ESE of this point, with a depth of
1.8m, has passages on either side. Anchorage may be obtained 11.43 Finn Malmgrenfjorden (80°17'N., 24°31'E.) is en-
0.15 mile WNW of the above point. tered between Glenhalvoya and Bergstromodden, the N ex-
tremity of a narrow whale-backed peninsula 6 miles in length.
11.41 Waldenoya (80°37'N., 19°46'E.), an island, lies 5.5 The fjord, 4 miles wide at the entrance, extends 7 miles SW.
miles NNW of Nordkapp, the N extremity of Chermsideoya. No soundings have been taken in the fjord or in its approaches
The island consists of coarse-grain granite, most of which is and great care is necessary when entering. Sealing vessels re-
flesh color, giving the rock a red hue. The depths around the is- port that a safe channel passes W of Alpinioya, the islet close
land are considerable. Heclaskjeret, a dangerous rock, lies 1.5 NW of Bergstromodden. An islet, whose position is doubtful,
miles S of the summit of Waldenoya. The rock at times is lies about 2 miles W of Alpinioya.
awash when a heavy sea is running. Karl XII Oyane (80°39'N., 25°03'E.) lies 18 miles N of
11.43
Sjuoyane consists of three large islands and four smaller is-

11.41 Bergstromodden. The island has steep sides and a truncated
lands, which lie NE of Nordkapp. Rossoya, one of the smaller top. In clear weather, the island appears as a large black sail of
islands, is the northernmost island in Svalbard. a boat. Norde Repoya, an island, lies 7 miles N of Glenhalvoya
Nordenskioldbukta (80°25'N., 21°10'E.) is entered between
11.41 and is 3 miles long in an E-W direction. Sore Repoya lies 2
Nordkapp and Kapp Platen, 28 miles E. The bay consists of nu- miles S of Norde Repoya and is about 4 miles long in a N-S di-
merous inlets, some of which may be entered without danger rection. No attempt should be made to pass between the latter
and are suitable only for temporary anchorage. They are open island and the mainland, as both channels are foul.
to the N and may be filled with heavy ice without warning. Brochoya (80°27'N., 26°03'E.), which with Foynoya and
11.43
Comparatively few soundings have been taken in the bay, but Schubeleroya forms a triangular group, lies 14 miles ENE of
several shoals are known to exist. Fowl ground with many Bergstromodden and is about 150m high. Foynoya lies about 2
rocks, both below-water and awash, lies S of Scoresbyoya, an miles E of Brochoya; Schubeleroya lies 1.5 miles S of Bro-
island about 15 miles SW of Kapp Platen. choya.
Rijpfjorden, the longest inlet on the N coast of Nordaustlan-
11.41 Albertinibukta (80°16'N., 25°00'E.), a bay, is entered be-
11.43
det, is entered between Kapp Loven and Kapp Wrede, 10.5 tween Bergstromodden and Kapp Bruun, the extremity of a
miles NE, and extends 25 miles S from the latter point. Vind- small projection 6.5 miles SE, and extends 6 miles S to a gla-
bukta, on the E shore of the fjord, lies 7 miles S of Kapp Wre- cier at its head. Between Kapp Bruun and the W end of Leigh-
de. Wordiebukta, entered N of a small projection 20 miles S of breen are a large number of islets lying between 0.5 and 2
Kapp Wrede, is considered to be the safest harbor in Rijp- miles offshore. Shoals and submerged rocks surround these is-
fjorden. No soundings are available. lets and a berth of at least 3 miles should be given to the coast
in their vicinity.
11.42 Zorgdragerfjorden (80°23'N., 22°40'E.), on the NW The ice cliffs of Leighbreen extend 10 miles to Kapp Leigh
11.43
side of Prins Oscars Land, is entered between Kapp Wrede and Smith, and then 4 miles S to Kapp Laura, an outcrop of bare rock
Pub. 182
extending 2 miles E and 3 miles S, forming the E extremity of Hinlopenstretet—East Side

Nordaustlandet. Storoya, an island, lies 5 miles ENE of Kapp Lau-
ra. Foul ground with submerged rocks is charted extending 2 miles 11.46 Murchisonfjorden (80°00'N., 18°20'E.), an indenta-
S from the E extremity of the island. The tidal currents between tion on the E side of the strait, is entered between Tvillingneset
Kapp Laura and Storoya are reported to attain a velocity of about 4 and Sparreneset, 8 miles S, and extends 8 miles E. It is encum-
knots; this is probably a very conservative estimate. bered with islets and its shores are considerably indented. A
detached shoal, with a depth of 9m, lies 3 miles WSW of Tvil-
Hinlopenstretet lingneset. When the inner part of the bay is icebound, vessels
can anchor, in 9m, sand, close within the middle islet of the
11.44 Hinlopenstretet (79°30'N., 19°20'E.) is entered from three outermost ones at the entrance. Otherwise anchorage is
the N between Verlegenhuken, and Langgrunnodden afforded close W of Kvalrosshalvoya, a peninsula at the inner
(80°09'N., 17°46'E.). Lagunepynten, 3 miles ESE of Verlegen- end of the S side, or in a cove at the NE end of the bay.
huken, is a low point from which the coast extends 6.5 miles Wahlenbergfjorden (79°40'N., 20°00'E.) is the largest fjord
11.46
SSE to Eolusneset. The strait extends about 95 miles SE to Ko- in Hinlopenstretet, lying about 35 miles within the N entrance,
ristkabreen and Kapp Mohn. The narrowest part of the strait and extends about 25 miles ENE from the E side of the strait. A
lies from 15 to 25 miles within the N entrance where the shores shoal, with a depth of 4.5m, was reported (1988) to lie 2.5
are only 5 miles apart. The strait in many places is encumbered miles ESE of the SE extremity of Wahlenbergfjorden. Further
by islands and islets, especially in its S entrance. In October, shoal patches have been reported (1989) up to 4 miles N of this
the whole strait is covered with ice. In July and August, the position. The fjord has a width of about 6 miles at the entrance,
strait is navigable by most type vessels during normal years. with the least width being about 5 miles. Gyldenoyane, an is-
The N part of the strait is affected by strong winds from adja- land with an islet close SW, lies in the middle of the entrance.
cent ice-covered highlands in summer. Palanderbukta indents the S shore of Wahlengberfjorden, 9
11.46
Sorgfjorden (79°54'N., 16°50'E.) is entered between Eolus-

11.44 miles within its entrance. The inlet is about 5 miles wide at its
neset and a small projection 1.5 miles ESE. The fjord extends 5 entrance and extends about 11 miles SE to its head. Anchorage
miles S to a glacier at its head. The fjord has not been com- is available at the head of the inlet, close off the NE shore, in a
pletely sounded, but in most places both shores may apparently depth of about 13m.
be approached in safety to within 183m.
Heclahamma, a landlocked cove, lies on the S side of Cro-
11.44 11.47 Vaigattoyane (79°20'N., 20°00'E.) is an extensive
zierpyten, a narrow promontory on the E shore about 1 mile group of islands and islets which encumber the middle of Hin-
within the entrance of Sorgfjorden. Anchorage may be ob- lopenstretet for a distance of about 15 miles, from 9 miles S of
tained in Heclahamna, in depths of 5.5 to 13m, good holding Selanderneset to 4 miles N of Kapp Freeden. Wahlbergoya, the
ground. Anchorage is also obtainable under Eolusneset, in largest island of the group, is 7 miles long, with its NW ex-
depths of 5.5 to 9m. tremity 13 miles S of Selanderneset. Von Otteroya, the next
Lomfjorden (79°36'N., 17°54'E.) lies on the W side of Hin-
11.44 largest island, lies about 2 miles S of Wahlbergoya.
lopenstretet and is entered between Isrundingen and Kapp Fan- Ulvebukta, an open bay, lies on the S side of Nordaustlandet,
11.47
shawe, 6 miles SSE. The fjord extends 17 miles SSW to a 13 miles E of Wahlbergoya. The bay is entered between Torell-
glacier at its head. It has been reported anchorage may be taken neset and Giaeverneset, 11 miles E. Anchorage may be ob-
in a depth of 14m, clay, off the W shore, close S of Valhallfon- tained close S of Torellnesfjellet, in a depth of 11m, or in the
na. same depth, close off Giaeverneset.
Kapp Mohn, a glacier point which forms the SE entrance
11.47
11.45 Tommelpynten (79°33'N., 18°42'E.) lies 7 miles SE point of Hinlopenstretet, lies 36 miles E of Giaeverneset. The
of Kapp Fanshawe. Tommeloyane, a group of islets, lies be- point is subject to change due to the movement of the ice cliffs.
tween 1 and 2.5 miles offshore abreast of Tommelpynten. A
detached islet is charted 3.5 miles N of Tommelpynten; a dan- Spitsbergen—East Coast
gerous rock lies 5 miles E of the point.
Vaigattbogen, a wide open bay, lies between Tommelpynten
11.45 11.48 Kikutodden (76°35'N., 17°00'E.), the SE extremity
and Kapp Freeden, which projects 2.5 miles NE from the coast of Sorkapp Land, is a projection on the coast and lies 6 miles
27 miles SSE of Tommelpynten. Numerous glaciers, some of ENE of Sommerfeldbukta. Bettybukta is a slight indentation
them separated by mountains, form the coast for 19 miles S of with low land at its head. It lies 4 miles NNE of Kikutodden.
Tommelpynten. Between Kapp Freeden and Kapp Weyprecht, Isbukta, a bay, lies 7 miles NNW of Bettybukta.
26 miles SE, many glaciers discharge into the strait; there are Hedgehogfjellet, a steep mountain, rises close to the coast
11.48
numerous off-lying islands and islets. about 10 miles NNE of Isbukta. From abreast this mountain,
Wilhelmoya (79°03'N., 20°24'E.), a large island, lies 3.5
11.45 the E coast of Spitsbergen, trends about 32 miles N to Kval-
miles SE of Kapp Freeden. The island is high with a round vagen. A number of glaciers discharge into the sea between
snow top. The island is separated from the mainland by Hedgehogfjellet and Kvalvagen. It has been reported Kval-
Bjornsundet. Bastianoyane and Ronnbeckoyane, two groups of vagen affords good anchorage, but is unreachable at times be-
islets SW of Wilhelmoya, obstruct the S approach to Bjornsun- cause of drift ice.
det. Koristkabreen, 5 miles S of Kapp Weyprecht forms the SW Storfjorden (78°00'N., 20°00'E.), entered between Kvalho-
11.48
entrance point of Hinlopenstretet, and the E extremity of Spits- vden and Kvalpynten, 35 miles E, extends 63 miles N to the
bergen. entrance of Ginevrabotnen at its head. The whole of
Pub. 182

Negerpynten from SE
11.48
Storfjorden is filled with ice from January to May inclusive, in indented by Diskobukta, a wide bay with a valley at its head.
an average year, but in exceptional years there may be large Barkhamodden (78°14'N., 20°41'E.), the SW point of Bar-
11.49
openings in May. Vessels can usually navigate from July to entsoya, lies 7 miles NNW of Kapp Lee, with the entrance of
September. Strong winds and currents may cause rapid chang- Freemansundet being between them. The mountainous coast of
es in the ice in this region. Barentsoya continues in a N direction for about 16 miles to
From Kvalhovden, the coast trends N for nearly 30 miles to
11.48 Mistakodden, the NW point of the island. Anchorage is avail-
Kapp Dufferin; this stretch is broken by the fronts of three gla- able close N of Mistakodden in the position indicated on the
ciers between the coastal peaks. The glaciers are separated by chart. A dangerous rock lies about 2 miles WNW of Mistakod-
coastal mountains. Agardhbukta, is entered between Kapp den. Anderssonbukta indents the coast between Barkhamodden
Dufferin and Revnosa, 6 miles NE, and extends 4.5 miles NW. and Duckwitzbreen, a glacier about 5 miles to the N. Vosse-
This bay has the reputation of being very foul, though the
11.48 bukta, a slight indentation in the coast, lies 5 miles SE of Mis-
latest surveys indicate that its middle part is unencumbered. It takodden. A rock lies 3 miles SW of Anderssonoyane. Another
has been stated that the bay is exposed to drift ice because of dangerous rock has been reported to exist in position
violent currents in the vicinity. (77°25.9'N., 20°48.5'E.) Mariners are advised to navigate with
The coast continues N for about 25 miles from Revnosa;
11.48 caution in this area.
then for about 8 miles E it is formed by the S side of Ne- A small unnamed islet and Sylen, a 3.5m patch, lie 3 miles
11.49
gribreen Glacier. Kapp Antinori, the SE extremity of the gla- and 5 miles NW, respectively, of Hassensteinbukta. Storflosk-
cier, is the W entrance point of Ginevrabotnen, which lies at jeret, a rock which covers and uncovers, lies 12 miles WNW of
the head of Storfjorden. Anchorage has been reported in Du- this cove. Sletvoldgrunnen, a 5m patch, lies about 9 miles
nerbukta and Mohnbukta, two coves on the coast between Rev- WSW of Kapp Lee, but its exact position is doubtful. Other
nosa and Negribreen. dangers in Storfjorden are best seen on the charts.
Ginevrabotnen (78°37'N., 20°20'E.), at the head of
11.49
Storfjorden—East Side Storfjorden, is entered between Mistakodden and Kapp An-

tinori. The bay extends about 15 miles NE to Heleysundet, the
11.49 North of Kvalpynten, the E coast of Storfjorden has narrow passage connecting it with Olgastretet, and is encum-
been described as a continuous rocky wall, rising almost direct- bered by several off-lying islets. The ice in Ginevrabotnen re-
ly from the sea to a high plateau. Kapp Lee, the NW point of mains throughout almost the entire year. At times it is clear of
Edgeoya and the S entrance point of Freemansundet, lies about ice by the end of August, but new ice begins to form almost at
40 miles N of Kvalpynten. Between the two points the coast is once and the bay is quickly blocked again.
Pub. 182
Edgeoya and Barentsoya—East Coasts from Kapp Heuglin and it has been reported that the area
around Kapp Waldburg is foul.
11.50 Edgeoya (77°45'N., 22°30'E.), the third largest island Barentsoya (78°26'N., 21°20'E.) lies close N of Edgeoya and is
11.51
in Svalbard, lies E of the S part of Spitsbergen. The E coast of separated from it by Freemansundet. Heleysundet, another narrow
the island forms the W side of Olgastrete. The island is about passage, leads between Barentsoya and the mainland to the N. The
60 miles long between Negerpynten, the SW extremity of the island is about 25 miles in extent and has glaciers which empty in-
island, and Kapp Heuglin, its N extremity. The approach to the to the sea from each of its four sides.
SW coast of Edgeoya is one of the most dangerous parts of
Svalbard, as the outermost known dangers lie a long way off- Off-lying Islands
shore, the tidal currents in this vicinity are very strong, and a
number of uncharted dangers are reported to lie off the coast. 11.52 Hopen (76°35'N., 25°10'E.), an isolated island, is nar-
Tunsenoyane consists of several groups of islets some dis-
11.50 row and 17 miles long in a NNE-SSW direction; it lies about
tance apart and as yet not accurately charted covering a large 54 miles SE of Negerpynten, the S extremity of Edgeoya. The
area S of the SW coast of Edgeoya. The outermost known dan- island has been described as a tableland, the sides of which are
gers are the isolated drying rocks Brotskjer and Rumpetrollet, cut up with gullies and which attain an elevation of 365m at
lying approximately 32 miles SW of Negerpynten. Breakers Kapp Thor, the S point. Landing is at all times difficult because
have been reported in this area. A 10m depth has been reported of the steep coasts and the shallow water close-in. There is usu-
to lie about 12 miles W of this danger. Other dangerous sub- ally a heavy swell on all sides of the island.
merged rocks lie between 10 and 12 miles WNW of the islet of Hopen Radio station is located 5 miles NNE of Kapp Thor.
11.52
Haoya. In an average year, Hopen is clear of ice from July to Octo-

11.52
Kong Luovigoyane and Menkeoyane are the principal

11.50 ber. In a severe season, the island may be ice-free only from
groups of islets in the N part of Tusenoyane. The former, the mid-August to mid-September. The current sets SW past
farthest NW, lies 13 miles W of Negerpynten and has danger- Hopen at about 2 knots.
ous reefs rising out of deep water close S; the latter, the farthest Anchorage.—The island has no sheltered bays which can
11.52
NE, is situated 5 miles SSE of that point and is surrounded by serve as harbors. It is so shallow inshore around the entire is-
rocky patches. land, that even at 200m from the shore, very little sea is re-
A below-water reef extends 1 mile S of Menkeoyane and a
11.50 quired to form breakers, thus making landing difficult for a
rock, with a depth of less than 2m, lies 2.5 miles SW of the boat. On the E side of the island, in places, the shallow area can
group. A channel leads NW between these dangers towards extend up to 0.7 mile or more out from land.
Buolscheoya, a detached islet midway between Menkeoyane Today, both sides of the island are used as anchorages to
11.52
and Kong Ludvigoyane. avoid storms, or for reloading from fishing vessels to mother
About 6 miles S of Kong Ludvigoyane lies Utsira, a low-lying
11.50 ships of up to 20,000 gt.
rocky islet; the same distance S of Buolscheoya stands Meinicke- For those wishing to land, a boat channel should be found in-
11.52
oyane, a pair of islands steep-to except on their W side. to the shore where it appears to be deepest and calmest without
Halvmaneoya (77°16'N., 23°10'E.), an island, lies with its W
11.50 breakers over a long period. From experience, it appears to be
extremity about 8 miles E of Negerpynten. The S point of the is- best to go ashore is on the E side of the island, when vessels go
land is foul to a distance of about 2 miles offshore. Dianahamna, in carefully and anchor, in 10 to 15m.
an indentation on the N side of the island, affords anchorage. Vessels have anchored, in a depth of 11m, at a distance of 0.5
11.52
Ryk Yseoyane (77°47'N., 25°12'E.), a group of islets, lie

11.50 mile from land off the radio station.
about 10 miles E of the E extremity of Edgeoya. Seen from a
position 10 miles to the E, the group has the appearance of one 11.53 Kong Karls Land (78°50'N., 28°10'E.) consists of a
long low island, with the S extremity sloping gradually into the group of three main islands, Svenskoya, Kongsoya, and Abe-
sea and the N end finishing in an abrupt cliff. loya, together with a number of islets. Olgastretet, a channel
Blafjorden, a large open bay, lies between Kapp Metchers
11.50 about 50 miles in width, separates the group from Edgeoya and
and Kapp Pechuel Losche, 20 miles NW, and extends 7 miles Barentsoya. Erik Eriksenstretet, a channel entered from the
SW of a line joining the entrance points. The NW part of the NE, is 35 miles wide and separates the group from Nordaust-
bay is shallow, with depths of 9m being found about 4 miles landet.
offshore. Submerged rocks, the exact position of which are Svenskoya, the W island of Kong Karls Land, lies 50 miles
11.53
doubtful, are reported to exist between 1 mile and 2 miles E of ENE of Barentsoya. In August and September, the coast may,
Kapp Pechuel Losche. for the most part, be approached by most vessels through navi-
gable ice. Kapp Hammerfest forms the S extremity of the is-
11.51 Freemansundet (78°14'N., 21°37'E.), 22 miles in land and is a tapering basalt ridge. The island is moderately
length, has an E to SW direction and a least width of 2.5 miles. It free from snow, but N of Kukenthafjaellet, between it and the
separates Edgeoyn from Barentsoya. The sound was surveyed in ridge, there exist a permanent cap of snow and ice. Patches of
1987; depths of 15m were found in the center but is reported to be snow cling constantly to the upper edges of the plateau and the
too shallow and rocky to admit passage of anything but small higher slopes of the hills. The lowlands of the island consist
craft. The sound is entered from the E between Kapp Heuglin and mainly of sand and clay washed down by melting snow.
Kapp Waldburg, 9.5 miles W. A high flat-topped cliff extends NE from Kapp Hammerfest
11.53
Two islets lie in the middle of the E entrance, 4 miles WNW

11.51 and is connected by a yellow sandy beach to Kapp Weissenfels,
of Kapp Heuglin. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N and NW the E extremity of Svenskoya. This point, projecting about 1
Pub. 182
mile ENE, consists of a mass of columnar basalt, with sand 11.55 Antarcticbukta (78°49'N., 28°03'E.) lies between
dunes in its vicinity. Anchorage has been obtained in a bight on Kapp Altmann and Kapp Andreassen, 4 miles W. Anchorage is
the S side of Kapp Weissenfels, in a depth of 14m, poor hold- obtainable here, in a depth of 11m, sand, but holding ground is
ing ground, with some shelter from N winds. poor. Anchorage has been reported in Andreebukta, the bight
between Tommerneset and Nordaustpynten. The depth close
11.54 Kongsoya (78°54'N., 28°13'E.), about 21 miles long inshore in the SW part of the bight is 61m, clay.
in an E-W direction, is the middle island of Kong Karls Land. Abeloya (79°00'N., 30°10'E.) is the smallest and farthest E
11.55
The island is separated from Svenskoya by Rivalensundet. The island of the Kong Karls Land group. The island is reported to
island is comparatively narrow, its greatest width being about 5 be barren and of basaltic formation and is located 6 miles ENE
miles, and consists of three main parts. The three parts are the of Kongsoya. The island is 3 miles long by 2.5 miles wide.
W plateau, the high land near the E end, and the low land con-
necting the two. From the offing SE, it appears as three sepa- 11.56 Kvitoya (80°09'N., 32°38'E.) is about 23 miles long
rate islands; at a greater distance it resembles a group of four in an E-W direction. The island is located at the E extremity of
islands, because of the dip in the W plateau. Nordaustlandet; about 45 miles E of Kapp Laura. Kvitoya is al-
Kapp Altmann is the extremity of a narrow tongue of land
11.54 most completely covered by ice; the only ice-free areas are An-
which projects about 2 miles S from the S coast of Kongsoya, dreeneset, its SW point, and Kraemerpynten, near the NE end
in a position about 3 miles E of Kapp Andreassen, the W ex- of the island.
tremity of the island. A dangerous reef extends about 1 mile S The ice cap covering the island is divided into three domes
11.56
from the cape; about 1 mile farther in the same direction is a which reflect the topography of the underlying rocks. The is-
rock, awash. A shoal, with a depth of 2.7m, has been reported land has been described as being glittering white from its sum-
about 5 miles SE of the cape. It has been reported that anchor- mit down to the water’s edge, from which it rises in a steep icy
age may be obtained close inshore on the E side of Kapp Alt- wall.
mann, in a depth of 12m, fine sand. A rock, awash, lies 6 miles SSE of Andreeneset. Another
11.56
Some shelter from N and W winds was obtained, but the

11.54 rock, awash, lies 1.5 miles WSW of Andreeneset. A shoal spit
holding ground is poor. At times, squalls from the N swept extends 2 miles S from a point on the S coast, 9 miles E of An-
down from the hills with great violence. dreeneset.
Pub. 182
Glossaries 275
Glossaries
Norwegian
NORWEGIAN English NORWEGIAN English
A drikkevand...........................................................fresh water
a ..................................................................... rivulet, stream dumpefelt ................................................... dumping ground
aker ................................................................................ field dyb, dyp......................................................................... deep
aksel, aksla ............................shoulder of a hill or mountain dybde............................................................................depth
alltid synlig........................................................ above water dykdalb..................................................................... dolphin
ankerplass .............................................................anchorage E
as ...........................................................................hill, ridge ebbe ..........................................................................ebb tide
atte ................................................................................ eight egg................................ edge (of a bank or mountain range)
aust ................................................................................. east eid............................................................................. isthmus
austre .........................................................................eastern elv, elva ......................................................................... river
avfallsplass ....................................................... spoil ground elvmunning ........................................................river mouth
avlopsledning ..........................................outfall pipe, sewer en.....................................................................................one
B etterretninger for sjofarende................... notices to mariners
babord.........................................................port (side, hand) F
bae i vannflaten .............................rock, awash at low water fabrikk ....................................................................... factory
bae ............................................... rock (usually submerged) fall ..................................................... fall (of a rock of cliff)
bak ...............................................................................astern famn .......................................................................... fathom
bake ...........................................................................beacon farled, farlei................................................channel, fairway
bakke ...............................................................................hill fartoy, fartyg................................................................vessel
ballast plass ...................................................... spoil ground farvann ..................................................waters, sea, fairway
banke ............................................................................ bank fastland ...................................................................mainland
basseng .........................................................................basin favn............................................................................ fathom
bathavn ...............................................................boat harbor fem ................................................................................. five
beholderskap ........................................................... pedestal ferje ...............................................................................ferry
bekk ................................................................... stream beck festning..............................................................fort, fortress
berg, bierg, bjerg .................................................mount, hill fire ..................................................................................four
betong ......................................................................concrete fiskevaer .........................................................fishing station
bla .................................................................................. blue fjaere ........................................................................ebb tide
bo...................................................................................farm fjell ..........................................hill, mountain, rocky bottom
boe ............................................... rock (usually submerged) fjellplata .................................................................... plateau
borg...............................................................castle, mansion fjellrygg........................................................ mountain ridge
botn................................................................head (of fjord) fjellvegg .........................................................mountain wall
boye .............................................................................. buoy fjord....................................................... firth, arm of the sea
boyestake...............................................................spar buoy flae, flak, flat ...................................................... flat or bank
brat......................................rock, (usually a group of rocks) flesa ........................................ rock (generally above-water)
bratt ....................................................... steep, cliffy, abrupt flo .......................................................................... flood tide
bre.............................................................................. glacier flu, flua..................................................... rock (submerged)
bred............................................................................... wide flyplasser ....................................................................airport
brott ........................................rock (usually group of rocks) flytedokk ......................................................... floating dock
bru, bro ....................................................................... bridge foran, forud ................................................................. ahead
brudd ..........................................................................quarry forberg................................................................promontory
brukar ............................................................................. pier forbudt.................................................................. prohibited
brygga, brygge...........wharf, (boat landing, dock, jetty, pier forbudt sjoomrade ....................................restricted sea area
bukt, bukta ................................................. bay, bight (cove) fortoyningsboye ............................................. mooring buoy
bunn...........................................................................bottom foss ...........................................................cascade, waterfall
bunnkjetting..............................................bottom chain, trot fot .......................................................................... foot, base
by..................................................................... town, village fylke ......................................................................... country
bygd............................................................... district, parish fyr.................................................................................. light
bygning......................................framework structure, pylon fyrhus, fyrtarn .................................. lighthouse, light-tower
D fyrlampe ................................................... light (unwatched)
dag .................................................................................. day G
dal ................................................................................valley gamle, gammel ................................................................ old
dalfore ......................................................... extended valley gap, gat ............................................... mouth, channel, deep
djup................................................................................deep gard ....................................................... farm, village, estate
dor, dora.................................................. door, gate, passage gjennom.................................................................... through
Pub. 182
276 Glossaries
godt synlig ........................................................ conspicuous kapell.......................................................................... chapel

gra.................................................................................. gray kapp............................................................................... cape
grend.......................................................................... hamlet kil ........................................................................creek, inlet
grense ...........................................................limit, boundary kirke ...........................................................................church
gron, gront, grun.......................................................... green kjegle, kjegleformede...................................... cone; conical
grube.................................................................mine, quarry klar ................................................................................clear
grunn ............................................................. shoal, shallow klett ...................................................................... bluff, cliff
grunnen......................................................................ground klippe...............................................................reef, pinnacle
gul.............................................................................. yellow kloakkledning.......................................... outfall pipe, sewer
H klokkeboye ............................................................ bell-buoy
hake ...............................................strip or hook of low lang klova, kloft .................................................................... cleft
hals ................................................................. isthmus, neck klubb ...................................................................... headland
halvoy ....................................................................peninsula klump ......................................................................... clump
hamn ................................................................harbor, haven knaus .................................................................... crag, rock
haug ........................................................................... hillock knop............................................................................... knot
haus ........................................................................headland koll ................................................... knoll, rounded summit
hav ................................................................................... sea kort ............................................................................... short
havn .................................................................harbor, haven kraftstasjon......................................................power station
havnedistrikt ...................................... (civil) harbour district kran ..............................................................................crane
havnekontor ......................................................harbor office kreppa, kreppen........................................................narrows
hei, heia ..........................................hill or height, hummock krigshavn...........................................................naval harbor
heim, hejm........................................................... homestead kulp ....................................................................... deep hole
heller.................................................................... rocky cave kyst ............................................................................... coast
hode ...............................................................................head L
hol..........................................................................deep hole ladested ........................................................... loading place
hole .............................................................................cavern lagerhus ............................................................... warehouse
holm, holme....................................................................islet land...................................................................... land, shore
hop....................................................................... small cove lang................................................................................ long
horn ....................................................................... hill, peak langgrunn ....................................................shelving bottom
hovde, hoved ................................................... head (height) lanterne...........................................................................post
hoy, hogd ........................................hill or height, hummock lav, lave, lavt....................................................................low
hoyere ......................................................................... higher lavvann ..................................................................low water
hoyvann ............................................................... high water led, leia................................................... channel, lead track
huk.................................................strip or hook of low land leir (-bunn) .................................................... clay (-bottom)
hule .............................................................................cavern li ..................................................................... mountain side
hump..................................................................... hummock lille, lite, litla, litle......................................................... little
hundre...................................................................... hundred livbat......................................................................... lifeboat
hus ...............................................................................house lodret .........................................................................vertical
hvit, hvitt ..................................................................... white lop ..............................................................channel, passage
hytte................................................................................. hut los.................................................................................. pilot
I loskontor ............................................................. pilot office
i land...........................................................................ashore lufspann, luftspenn....................................... overhead cable
indre, inre, inste............................................................ inner lykt, lys.......................................................................... light
innlop, innseiling.....................................................entrance lysboye .................................................................light-buoy
innpa .........................................................................close to M
innsjo ..............................................................................lake mellom .................................................................... between
is .......................................................................................ice merke............................................................................ mark
isbre ............................................................ glacier, ice-field midt ........................................................................... middle
J mindre .......................................................................smaller
jern..................................................................................iron molle .............................................................................. mill
jernbane .................................................................... railway molo ..........................................................mole, breakwater
jokel............................................................ glacier, ice-field mork ..................................................... obscured (of a light)
jord ...................................................................... earth, land munn, munning .......................................................... mouth
K mur, murverk..............................................brick, brickwork
kabel ........................................................... submarine cable myr ..............................................................................marsh
kai ................................................................................. quay N
kalv ..................... calf (small rock or islet near a larger one) nakke ............................................................................. neck
kanal .............................................................. canal, channel natt................................................................................ night
Pub. 182
Glossaries 277
naust ............................................................. hut, fishing hut rev.................................................................................. reef

navn ..............................................................................name rod, rodt........................................................................... red
nearing................................... high entrance point of a fjord rorledning................................................................ pipeline
mederst .....................................................................beneath ros, roys........................................ stone heap, rocky ground
nedre ...................................................................lower, front rund ............................................................................ round
nes ................................................................................. ness rygg .....................................................................back, ridge
ni.................................................................................... nine S
nip........................................................................ neap (tide) sadel .......................................................................... saddle
nodhavn ......................................... distress or refuge harbor sagbruk.................................................................... sawmill
nord ..............................................................................north sand (-bunn) ..................................................sand (-bottom)
nordenom..............................................................northward sata, sate ..................................................... haycock, hillock
nordre, nordotre.......................................................northern seater .......................................................................hill farm
norske los, den...................norway pilot (sailing directions) seks.................................................................................. six
nut.......................................................... mountain top, peak singel (-bunn) ............................................shingle (-bottom)
ny; nytt............................................................................new sjo................................................................................... sea
O sjoflyhavn.................................................... seaplane harbor
o...................................................................................island sjohus ................................................................. warehouse
odde .............................................................................. point sjomerke .....................................................beacon, seamark
odre................................................................................. rear sju................................................................................ seven
olje.............................................................................fuel oil skalle ......................................................................head, hill
opphalings rampe ...........................................slipway, ramp skar, skar .......................... crevice, rocky outcrop, gap, glen
oppmudret ............................................................... dredged skip................................................................................ ship
orgelboye ......................................................... whistle-buoy skipsverft................................................................ shipyard
orlogshavn .............................................. (naval) harbor area skjaer, skjer ...................................above-water rock, skerry
skjaergard ............................................ archipelago, skerries
os ....river mouth, basin or area of between islands or fjords
skjell (-bunn) .................................................shell (-bottom)
ovenfor ............................................................above, higher skog ...................................................................wood, forest
overettlinjen....................................................... leading-line skolt.............................................. headland; head (of shoal)
oversvommet .......................................................submerged skorstein ................................................................. chimney
ost ................................................................................... east skra......................................................................... diagonal
ostenom .................................................................. eastward skvalpeskjaer..................................................... rock, awash
ostre ...........................................................................eastern slaggrunn........................................................ see langgrunn
ovyvelsefelt, ovelsesomrade...........exercise or practice area slam (-bunn) .................................................. mud (-bottom)
overst ...........................................................................above slepebat .......................................................................... tug
ovre.................................................................... upper (rear) slette ...................................................................... flat, plain
oy, oya .........................................................................island slik................................................................................ ooze
oygard, oygruppe................................................archipelago slipp...................................................................... patent slip
oyr, oyra, ora ............................................... delta, sandbank slott............................................................................. castle
P slua ............................................................................... rock
pa ................................................................................. at, on slukket ............................................................. extinguished
pa grunn................................................................... aground slus, sluse ........................................................... lock, sluice
pakhus ................................................................ storehouse sma .............................................................................. small
peiling...................................................................... bearing smal .......................................................................... narrow
pele ................................................................................ post sole (-bunn) ................................................... mud (-bottom)
pelebukk .................................................................. dolphin sondre..................................................................... southern
peleverk ..........................................................piling, groyne sonnenom ............................................................ southward
pir .................................................................................. pier sor, sore ....................................................................... south
platta ......................................................................... plateau sorte............................................................................. black
poll............................................................. cove, inlet, basin sorvest ................................................................. southwest
pynt.............................................................................. point soyle .............................................................. column, pillar
R spiss...................................................................... point, spit
rabbe ..................................................... rocky or stony ridge stad ........................................................................city, town
radiofyr ............................................................. radiobeacon stake ............................................................. pole, spar buoy
ras ............................................................................ landslip stakk ....................................................................heap, stack
rasa .................................................................................race stang ...................................................... perch, post, column
red......................................................................... roadstead stativ ................................................................ pile structure
redning....................................................................... rescue staur.................................................................pinnacle rock
renna, renne ............................................................. channel stein, sten............................................................. rock, stone
Pub. 182
278 Glossaries
sund, sundet............................... channel, inlet, sound, strait U

sva.....................................................................ridge of rock uklar .............................................................................. foul
svart ............................................................................. black undervanns ......................................................... submerged
syd ............................................................................... south ur .............................................rock-strewn slope; rock-falls
sykchus .................................................................... hospital utlop ................................................................ mouth, outlet
T utstikker................................................ projecting pier, jetty
tang .....................................................................tongue, spit V
tare..........submerged rock (usually large and flat); seaweed vaer......................................... place, village; fishing station
takesignal.............................................................. fog signal vag......................................................bay, cove, creek, inlet
tarn.............................................................................. tower vaker.......................................................beacon; buoy; vane
ti...................................................................................... ten val.................................................. coast, very shallow cove
tind...................................................................summit, peak vandret................................................................. horizontal
to.................................................................................... two vann, vatn ............................................................ water, lake
toll-bod, -bu-stasjon, -kammer, -sted ............. custom house vannfall.....................................................cascade, waterfall
office, etc. varde...............................................beacon-tower, cairn, hill
tonne ......................................................... buoy, cask, barrel vassdrag...................................................river, water-course
topp.......................................................................... summit vat................................................................................... wet
torr .................................................................................. dry ved..................................................................................near
torrdokk .................................................................. dry dock vegg....................................................................... wall, cliff
torrfall, torrflu............................... drying bank, drying rock vei...................................................................road (on land)
trafikkregulertomrade................... traffic separation scheme verft ........................................................ dockyard, shipyard
trang, trange.............................................................. narrow vest ............................................................................... west
tre................................................................................. three vestenom .............................................................. westward
tre............................................................................. wooden vestre ....................................................................... western
trebeining.................................................. framework tower vik, vika, viki .....................................bay, cove, creek, inlet
trekant...................................................................... triangle vindmolle .............................................................. windmill
tue, tuva ............................................ hillrock, knoll, mound vogn......................................................................... slipway
tung................................................................ tongue of land voll ........................... mound; dike; grassy plain; cove, inlet
tusen ...................................................................... thousand vrak ............................................................................ wreck
tvers ........................................................................... abeam Y
tydelig.............................................................. conspicuous ytre, ytste, yttre ........................................................... outer
Pub. 182
279
How to use the Index—Gazetteer
Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed
alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign
languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.
Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States
Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.
To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the
Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.
To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best
scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above.
Index—Gazetteer
Position Sec. Position Sec.

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
A ARNOYFJORDEN 64 46 N 11 15 E 7.19
AROYA 63 11 N 8 36 E 6.49
A 67 53 N 12 59 E 8.4 ARSFLESA 65 01 N 10 41 E 7.26
AADNESET 60 38 N 4 50 E 4.15 ARSGRUNN 59 08 N 5 26 E 2.9
ABELOYA 79 00 N 30 10 E 11.55 ARSUNDBAEN 63 07 N 8 02 E 6.45
ABELVAER LIGHT 64 43 N 11 10 E 7.17 ARSUNDOYA 63 06 N 7 59 E 6.40
ADLANDSFJORDEN 60 15 N 5 38 E 3.58 ARVIKSUNDET 59 16 N 5 33 E 2.22
ADVENTFJORDEN 78 15 N 15 37 E 11.18 ASBRAKEN 66 30 N 12 32 E 7.63
AERSTEINEN LIGHT 62 48 N 6 36 E 6.15 ASKROVA LIGHT 61 31 N 5 00 E 5.41
AGDENESET 63 39 N 9 46 E 6.67 ASNESET 61 56 N 5 28 E 5.47
AGNHOLMEN 58 16 N 6 50 E 1.25 ASPA 62 28 N 6 09 E 5.61
AGOTNES 60 24 N 5 01 E 4.27 ASPENESET 68 25 N 15 47 E 8.11
AKREHAMN 59 16 N 5 11 E 3.6 ASTAFJORDEN 68 44 N 17 00 E 8.49
AKSELSUNDET 77 45 N 14 36 E 11.11 ASVAER 66 14 N 12 12 E 7.48
AKSNESET 62 57 N 8 20 E 6.46 AUSTBAEN 59 08 N 5 17 E 2.9
AKTIVNESET 62 30 N 3 36 E 6.1 AUSTDJUPET 59 16 N 5 24 E 2.21
ALBERTINIBUKTA 80 16 N 25 00 E 11.43 AUSTEROY 59 17 N 5 27 E 2.21
ALDEN 61 19 N 4 48 E 5.17 AUSTERVAG, 74 30 N 19 12 E 11.3
ALESUND 62 28 N 6 10 E 5.31 AUSTKLAKKANE 63 23 N 8 24 E 6.65
ALESUND HAVN 62 28 N 6 09 E 5.61 AUSTNESFJORDEN 68 17 N 14 43 E 8.10
ALESUNDAKSLA 62 28 N 6 11 E 6.4 AUSTRE FUGLOYGRUNNEN 63 06 N 7 47 E 6.35
ALFARTANGEN 63 19 N 8 34 E 6.63 AUSTRE REIFLUA 63 27 N 8 13 E 6.56
ALLMENNINGSFLUENE 61 54 N 5 16 E 5.47 AUSTRE VAGHOLMFLUA 59 13 N 5 31 E 2.22
ALMENINGSKOLLEN 64 11 N 10 01 E 6.59 AUVAER 69 52 N 18 00 E 8.57
ALNES LIGHT 62 29 N 5 58 E 6.4 AVEROYA 63 00 N 7 30 E 6.38
ALSTADOYA 67 54 N 15 11 E 8.18
ALTA 69 58 N 23 15 E 9.11
ALTAFJORDEN 70 05 N 23 06 E 9.11 B
ALTFJORDEN 65 56 N 12 19 E 7.30
ALVERSTRAUMEN 60 34 N 5 14 E 4.30 BAANE 61 29 N 4 59 E 5.40
ALVNESTANGEN LIGHT 67 16 N 15 02 E 7.62 BAEFLUA 63 14 N 7 52 E 6.62
ALVOYVAG 60 21 N 5 11 E 4.19 BALLANGEN 68 22 N 16 55 E 8.26
ALVUNFJORDEN 62 54 N 8 22 E 6.47 BALLSFJORDEN 69 32 N 18 55 E 8.61
ALWYN NORTH OIL FIELD 60 48 N 1 44 E 5.2 BALLSTAD 68 04 N 13 42 E 8.5
AMBORNES LIGHT 63 34 N 10 26 E 6.73 BANGSUND LIGHT 64 25 N 11 21 E 7.13
AMSTERDAMOYA 79 46 N 10 49 E 11.32 BARENTSBURG 78 04 N 14 14 E 11.16
ANASIRA 58 17 N 6 26 E 1.33 BARENTSOYA 78 26 N 21 20 E 11.51
ANDA 61 51 N 6 05 E 5.48 BARKHAMODDEN 78 14 N 20 41 E 11.49
ANDA 69 04 N 15 11 E 8.44 BAROYA 68 21 N 16 07 E 8.24
ANDALSNES 62 34 N 7 41 E 6.19 BASUNDSKJERA 61 56 N 5 00 E 5.20
ANDENES 69 20 N 16 08 E 8.45 BATALDFLUENE 61 54 N 4 48 E 5.19
ANDERSBAKKEN 66 16 N 12 18 E 7.48 BATNFJORDEN 62 56 N 7 45 E 6.42
ANDERSBOSKALLEN 68 46 N 13 33 E 8.1 BATSFJORDEN 70 41 N 29 51 E 9.24
ANDFJORDEN 69 00 N 16 03 E 8.46 BEISFJORDEN 68 24 N 17 30 E 8.29
ANDOYA 69 05 N 15 45 E 8.41 BELLSUND 77 39 N 14 00 E 11.10
ANGERSHOLMEN LIGHT 66 46 N 13 16 E 7.56 BEREFJORDEN 58 16 N 6 28 E 1.33
ANGVIK 62 53 N 8 06 E 6.43 BERG 65 22 N 12 12 E 7.33
ANNOYSKJERET LIGHT 61 36 N 4 56 E 5.15 BERGEN 60 24 N 5 19 E 4.31
ANSNESET 64 28 N 11 24 E 7.11 BERGSHEIA 69 03 N 17 24 E 8.52
ANTARCTICBUKTA 78 49 N 28 03 E 11.55 BERGSNESET 68 07 N 13 04 E 8.35
ARALDEN 61 41 N 4 46 E 5.21 BERGSOYA 62 20 N 6 38 E 5.28
ARAMSUND LIGHT 62 12 N 5 29 E 5.51 BERGSOYHOLMEN 62 58 N 7 53 E 6.42
ARASVIKFJORDEN 63 09 N 8 25 E 6.49 BERLEVAG 70 52 N 29 06 E 9.23
ARDAL 61 14 N 7 43 E 5.34 BERYL OIL FIELD 59 33 N 1 32 E 3.3
AREBROTSNESET LIGHT 61 38 N 5 00 E 5.23 BESSFJORDNESET 68 12 N 16 07 E 8.21
ARHOLMEN 63 06 N 7 53 E 6.36 BEVERLYSUNDET 80 29 N 19 52 E 11.40
ARNESKLUBBEN LIGHT 62 40 N 6 41 E 6.16 BIGGANES 70 07 N 28 36 E 9.31
ARNOY 70 08 N 20 36 E 9.4 BILLEFJORDEN 78 34 N 16 28 E 11.21
ARNOYA 68 46 N 16 37 E 8.33 BISPEFLUA 69 01 N 17 14 E 8.53
Pub. 182
280 Index—Gazetteer
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
BJERKA 69 24 N 16 08 E 8.44 C
BJOGNA 63 03 N 7 17 E 6.26
BJORNAFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 25 E 3.53 COLESBUKTA 78 08 N 14 57 E 11.17
BJORNHOLMEN 65 37 N 12 18 E 7.38 CRAWFORD OIL FIELD 59 07 N 1 30 E 2.2
BJORNOY LIGHT 67 25 N 14 26 E 8.12
BJORNOYA 74 27 N 19 04 E 11.2
BJORNOYNI 60 29 N 4 56 E 4.11 D
BJORNSUND 62 54 N 6 50 E 6.20
BJORNSUND LIGHT 62 54 N 6 49 E 6.23 DANSKOYA 79 41 N 10 55 E 11.31
BJOROYVAER 64 36 N 10 48 E 7.8 DICKSONFJORDEN 78 42 N 15 20 E 11.22
BJUGNSKJAER LIGHT 63 46 N 9 33 E 7.5 DIGERFLESA LIGHT 66 58 N 13 38 E 7.58
BLEIK 69 16 N 15 58 E 8.45 DIGERMULEN 64 47 N 11 43 E 7.17
BLEIKJE 59 15 N 5 27 E 2.20 DINGENES 61 02 N 5 02 E 5.10
BLOMSTRANDHAMNA 78 59 N 12 06 E 11.27 DJONNO 60 28 N 6 45 E 3.47
BODO 67 17 N 14 23 E 7.68 DJUPTARSKJERET 64 58 N 11 22 E 7.28
BOFJORDEN 61 07 N 5 20 E 5.33 DOLMSUND LIGHT 65 00 N 11 39 E 7.31
BOGAVIK 60 16 N 5 35 E 3.59 DOLMSUNDET 65 00 N 11 37 E 7.31
BOGVIKA 68 14 N 16 05 E 8.21 DONNA 66 06 N 12 33 E 7.47
BOKFJORDEN 69 50 N 30 07 E 9.34 DRAG 68 03 N 16 05 E 8.21
BOKFJORDEN LIGHT 69 53 N 30 11 E 9.34 DRAGJASKJAERFLU LIGHT 61 39 N 4 59 E 5.23
BOKNAFJORDEN 59 12 N 5 38 E 2.19 DRIVSUND 59 10 N 5 25 E 2.9
BOKNAFLAEET 59 16 N 5 26 E 2.21 DRONENHOLMEN LIGHT 62 38 N 6 31 E 6.16
BOKNASUNDET 59 14 N 5 27 E 2.19 DUNOYANE 77 04 N 15 00 E 11.9
BOLGSVAET 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.34 DUSAVIK 59 00 N 5 40 E 2.11
BOLGVAGEN 63 05 N 7 47 E 6.35 DUVEFJORDEN 80 17 N 23 30 E 11.42
BOLSOYGALTEN 67 57 N 15 24 E 8.20 DYRNESET 59 37 N 5 10 E 3.13
BOMLAFJORDEN 59 34 N 5 14 E 3.11 DYROY 58 28 N 5 52 E 1.47
BOMLO 59 40 N 5 12 E 3.13 DYROY 59 45 N 5 11 E 3.16
BONETSKJERET 66 29 N 12 58 E 7.53 DYSJALANDSVAG 59 05 N 5 40 E 2.10
BOROYA 64 16 N 10 17 E 7.3
BOROYA 68 34 N 14 57 E 8.42
BOROYFJORDEN 59 40 N 5 17 E 3.20 E
BOVIKI 59 22 N 5 18 E 3.31
BRANDAL 62 24 N 6 01 E 5.54 EBELTOFHAMNA 79 09 N 11 39 E 11.29
BRANDALPYNTEN 78 57 N 11 53 E 11.26 EDGEOYA 77 45 N 22 30 E 11.50
BRANDSHOLMEN 68 05 N 13 39 E 8.6 EGDEHOLMEN 58 17 N 6 23 E 1.34
BRASETHAMMEREN 63 50 N 11 04 E 6.76 EGERSUND 58 27 N 6 00 E 1.44
BRATTHOLMEN 60 21 N 5 10 E 4.20 EGGLOYA 68 11 N 15 38 E 8.20
BREIDLIA 58 13 N 6 34 E 1.31 EGGOYA 70 58 N 8 24 W 10.6
BREIDVIK 59 13 N 6 03 E 2.27 EGGUM 68 19 N 13 41 E 8.37
BREIFIND 66 15 N 12 48 E 7.49 EIDEMBUKTA 78 21 N 12 45 E 11.24
BREIGTAREN 65 45 N 12 21 E 7.40 EIDFJORD 60 28 N 7 04 E 3.48
BREILIEN 58 13 N 6 34 E 1.31 EIDFJORDEN 60 25 N 6 43 E 3.47
BREISUNDET 62 27 N 5 59 E 5.50 EIDSFJORDEN 60 43 N 5 47 E 4.33
BREISUNDET 62 27 N 6 00 E 5.30 EIDSFJORDEN 68 40 N 14 53 E 8.42
BREISUNDET 67 54 N 14 43 E 8.17 EIGEROY 58 27 N 5 58 E 1.41
BREIVIK 70 35 N 22 08 E 9.13 EIGEROY LIGHT 58 26 N 5 52 E 1.46
BREKKE 59 17 N 5 16 E 3.7 EINARSNESET 58 03 N 6 47 E 1.12
BREKNEHOLME 58 06 N 6 35 E 1.22 EITLANDSKJAERA 58 03 N 6 59 E 1.9
BREKNEHOLMEN LIGHT 58 05 N 6 36 E 1.24 EKREMSHOLMANE 63 00 N 8 02 E 6.42
BREMNESET 68 17 N 16 09 E 8.21 ELDOYANE 59 45 N 5 30 E 3.18
BREMNESSKJAER 68 17 N 16 08 E 8.21 ELTRANESET 62 26 N 6 03 E 5.54
BREMSNESFJORDEN 63 06 N 7 41 E 6.32 ENGELVAER 67 53 N 14 34 E 8.3
BRENT OIL FIELD 61 05 N 1 43 E 5.2 ENGENES 68 56 N 17 07 E 8.52
BRETTESNES 68 14 N 14 51 E 8.9 ENGESUNDSLEID 59 52 N 5 17 E 3.20
BRIELLETARNET 70 58 N 8 42 W 10.10 ERKNA LIGHT 62 33 N 5 56 E 6.6
BROCHOYA 80 27 N 26 03 E 11.43 ERSFJORDEN 59 19 N 6 08 E 2.37
BRONNOYSUND 65 28 N 12 12 E 7.35 ESPE 60 12 N 6 36 E 3.51
BRONNOYSUNDET 65 27 N 12 10 E 7.34 ESPENES LIGHT 63 21 N 8 43 E 6.64
BROSVIKSATA 61 02 N 5 10 E 5.9 ESPEVAER 59 35 N 5 09 E 3.13
BRUKJEOY 59 02 N 5 40 E 2.10
BRUNESET 66 08 N 12 50 E 7.50
BRUNFLESAN LIGHT 65 03 N 11 17 E 7.28 F
BRUNTVEIT 60 02 N 5 26 E 3.54
BRUSEN 63 00 N 7 52 E 6.41 FAIR HAVEN, 79 49 N 11 29 E 11.35
BUD 62 54 N 6 55 E 6.21 FALDET 68 12 N 13 15 E 8.37
BUEFJORDEN 61 15 N 4 40 E 5.11 FALKEIDFLAEET 59 14 N 5 31 E 2.33
BUGOYFJORDEN 69 56 N 29 36 E 9.32 FALSKENESET 64 50 N 11 39 E 7.18
BUHOLMEN 64 25 N 10 26 E 7.7 FAUSKANE 62 34 N 5 45 E 6.5
BUHOLMEN LIGHT 62 10 N 5 05 E 5.26 FAUSKE 67 16 N 15 24 E 7.62
BUHOLMRASA LIGHT 64 24 N 10 27 E 7.4 FEDJE 60 46 N 4 43 E 5.3
BUKKEGRUNNANE 58 04 N 6 51 E 1.15 FEDJEFJORDEN 60 45 N 4 47 E 4.23
BUKKEGRUNNANE 58 06 N 6 49 E 1.16 FEDJEOSEN 60 44 N 4 44 E 4.22
BUKKETJUVANE 62 11 N 5 04 E 5.26 FEISTEIN 58 50 N 5 30 E 2.4
BUNESET 67 13 N 14 42 E 7.62 FEOY 59 23 N 5 10 E 3.8
BUSHOLMEN 68 07 N 13 14 E 8.36 FERKINGSTADOYANE 59 14 N 5 04 E 3.4
BUSSESUNDET 70 22 N 31 02 E 9.27 FERKINGSTADVAG 59 14 N 5 11 E 3.5
BUVIKA 63 18 N 10 11 E 6.69 FIBORGTANGEN 63 43 N 11 09 E 6.74
BYGDEN 68 50 N 17 08 E 8.50 FINKONNA 66 07 N 12 44 E 7.50
FINN MALMGRENFJORDEN 80 17 N 24 31 E 11.43
FINNKONA 66 07 N 12 44 E 7.50
FINNOYFJORDEN 59 10 N 5 54 E 2.26
Pub. 182
Index—Gazetteer 281

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
FINNSNES 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.54 GARSUNDFJORDEN 59 13 N 6 00 E 2.27
FINNSNESRENNA 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.55 GARTEN 63 39 N 9 32 E 6.66
FINNSNESSKJAER 69 14 N 17 58 E 8.54 GASAHOLME 59 15 N 5 32 E 2.33
FINNVAER LIGHT 64 04 N 9 07 E 6.53 GASHOLMEN 61 55 N 5 06 E 5.46
FINSKJERSLUA 64 46 N 11 00 E 7.20 GASVAER 66 53 N 13 29 E 7.58
FISKANESET 58 54 N 5 45 E 2.14 GAUKVAEROY 68 37 N 14 21 E 8.41
FISKHOLMEN 61 46 N 4 56 E 5.23 GAUPHOLMEN 60 22 N 5 42 E 3.60
FISTERFJORDEN 59 09 N 6 00 E 2.28 GAUSNESET 62 28 N 6 46 E 5.55
FJELLSPOLLEN 60 18 N 5 03 E 4.8 GAVLFJORDEN 68 56 N 15 22 E 8.40
FJORD BASE 61 37 N 5 05 E 5.16 GEIRANGER 62 06 N 7 12 E 5.57
FJORDAFLU 60 01 N 5 07 E 3.24 GEITUNGANE 59 08 N 5 15 E 2.8
FJORDGRUNNSKJERET 63 48 N 11 19 E 6.75 GEITUNGEN 59 08 N 5 15 E 2.22
FLAGSUNDET 67 55 N 15 00 E 8.18 GIBOSTAD 69 21 N 18 05 E 8.56
FLAMA 58 04 N 6 50 E 1.18 GILDRENESET LIGHT 62 30 N 6 11 E 6.9
FLATEGRUNNANE 61 35 N 4 50 E 5.15 GIMSOYSTRAUMEN 68 16 N 14 15 E 8.7
FLATFLESA LIGHT 62 50 N 6 41 E 6.15 GIMSOYSTRAUMEN 68 20 N 14 19 E 8.37
FLATHOLME 58 55 N 5 34 E 2.3 GINEVRABOTNEN 78 37 N 20 20 E 11.49
FLATHOLMEN 59 56 N 5 51 E 3.37 GIPLINGOYA 63 54 N 11 01 E 6.76
FLATOY 67 55 N 14 46 E 8.3 GISKE 62 30 N 6 03 E 6.6
FLATOYFLU 61 19 N 5 03 E 5.38 GISKESUNDET 62 30 N 6 01 E 6.4
FLATSTADBUKTA 58 05 N 7 07 E 1.6 GISLOYA 68 57 N 15 16 E 8.40
FLAVAER LIGHT 62 19 N 5 35 E 5.59 GISUNDET 69 18 N 17 58 E 8.55
FLEINVAER 67 10 N 13 45 E 7.60 GJELBUNESET 67 11 N 15 24 E 7.62
FLEKKEFJORDEN 58 18 N 6 40 E 1.29 GJEMNESSUNDET 62 58 N 7 48 E 6.41
FLESA 62 52 N 8 35 E 6.47 GJERDINGGALTEN 64 56 N 11 28 E 7.22
FLESA LIGHT 63 39 N 9 14 E 6.61 GJERMUNDSHAMN 60 04 N 5 55 E 3.40
FLESENE 62 17 N 5 27 E 5.60 GJESLINGENE LIGHT 64 44 N 10 51 E 7.20
FLESSA 64 06 N 9 54 E 6.59 GJESLINGSKJER LIGHT 63 15 N 7 48 E 6.31
FLOHOLMAN 66 10 N 11 42 E 7.47 GLOMFJORD 66 49 N 13 59 E 7.56
FLOHOLMAN 67 01 N 13 42 E 7.59 GLOMSTADHOLMEN LIGHT 63 19 N 8 38 E 6.64
FLORO 61 36 N 5 02 E 5.16 GOLDNES LIGHT 62 22 N 5 34 E 5.28
FLORO LIGHT 61 36 N 5 01 E 5.43 GOLTASTEINEN 60 13 N 4 58 E 4.7
FLOTTRA 64 40 N 11 04 E 7.17 GOTEBERGHAMAREN 61 57 N 5 08 E 5.24
FLOVIKA 68 15 N 14 57 E 8.10 GRANDEVIKA 63 41 N 9 29 E 7.2
FLUSTEIN 59 08 N 5 39 E 2.25 GRANEBAEN 61 23 N 5 01 E 5.38
FOGNAFJORDEN 59 07 N 5 56 E 2.28 GRANVINFJORDEN 60 28 N 6 37 E 3.46
FOLDOY 59 20 N 5 58 E 2.24 GRASOYANE LIGHT 62 26 N 5 46 E 5.29
FOLLAFOSS 63 59 N 11 07 E 6.77 GRATANGEN 68 45 N 17 18 E 8.50
FOLVAGFLUENE 61 25 N 4 58 E 5.41 GRAVODDEN KOBBEBUKTA 74 31 N 18 54 E 11.4
FORDESFJORDEN 59 20 N 5 23 E 2.32 GREIPSTAD 69 31 N 18 13 E 8.58
FORDESPOLLEN 59 39 N 5 25 E 3.19 GRIMESKJARET LIGHT 60 51 N 4 45 E 5.4
FORHJELMO 60 40 N 4 48 E 4.15 GRIMO 60 23 N 6 39 E 3.51
FORLANDSUNDET 78 30 N 12 40 E 11.24 GRIMSTADFJORDEN 60 19 N 5 14 E 4.18
FOROYA 68 01 N 15 07 E 8.19 GRIP LIGHT 63 14 N 7 37 E 6.30
FOROYA 68 54 N 17 41 E 8.51 GRIPNESVAG 60 04 N 5 40 E 3.53
FOSNAHOLMEN 59 18 N 5 23 E 2.32 GRONESTADVAG 59 12 N 5 23 E 3.28
FOSSE 60 16 N 6 02 E 3.42 GRONFJORDEN 78 03 N 14 11 E 11.15
FOYNFJORDEN 59 21 N 5 11 E 3.8 GRONHOLMEN 61 02 N 4 53 E 5.9
FREEMANSUNDET 78 14 N 21 37 E 11.51 GRONHOLMEN LIGHT 63 41 N 9 09 E 6.61
FREIFJORDEN 63 03 N 7 55 E 6.39 GRONNA 67 01 N 13 10 E 7.57
FREIKOLLEN 63 03 N 7 46 E 6.25 GRONNA 67 01 N 13 11 E 7.47
FREINES LIGHT 63 01 N 7 49 E 6.39 GRONSFJORDEN 58 02 N 7 02 E 1.5
FRIARFJORDEN 70 28 N 26 57 E 9.20 GRONSTABBEN 65 16 N 11 56 E 7.32
FRIDTJOVHAMNA 77 46 N 14 39 E 11.12 GROTHOLM 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.8
FRIGG GAS FIELD 59 53 N 2 04 E 3.3 GROTOY 67 50 N 14 46 E 8.17
FRITHJOFHAMN 77 46 N 14 39 E 11.12 GROTOYA 70 10 N 18 52 E 9.4
FROHOLMAN 69 04 N 16 19 E 8.47 GROTOYSUNDET 67 50 N 14 46 E 8.17
FROM ARSUNDFJORDEN 63 07 N 8 00 E 6.45 GROVFJORDEN 68 42 N 17 05 E 8.50
FROSKJERET 63 25 N 10 07 E 6.68 GRUNNREISASKJAER 69 11 N 18 02 E 8.53
FROYA BANK 63 47 N 7 21 E 6.51 GRUTLEFJORDEN 59 38 N 5 10 E 3.14
FROYFJORDEN 63 40 N 8 40 E 6.57 GRUTLEFJORDEN 59 40 N 5 10 E 3.15
FRUHOLMEN LIGHT 71 06 N 24 00 E 9.13 GULGOFJORDEN 70 41 N 28 36 E 9.22
FUGLEFJORDEN 79 47 N 11 28 E 11.35 GULLFAKS OIL FIELD 61 12 N 2 12 E 5.2
FUGLEHUKEN 78 53 N 10 30 E 11.23 GUNNARSKJAERSHALET 59 33 N 5 08 E 3.11
FUGLEN 63 03 N 7 09 E 6.26 GUNNARSKJERSHOLET 59 33 N 5 08 E 3.11
FUGLESANGEN 66 59 N 13 38 E 7.59 GURSKOYA 62 15 N 5 40 E 5.28
FUGLOYA 67 04 N 13 50 E 7.46 GUTVIKFJELLET 65 08 N 11 56 E 7.29
FUGLOYA 70 16 N 20 15 E 9.4 GYLTEFJORDEN 64 39 N 11 22 E 7.16
FUGLOYA LIGHT 67 04 N 13 52 E 7.59
FUGLOYHAMN 60 10 N 5 01 E 4.5
FURUHOLMEN 58 16 N 6 28 E 1.33 H
FUSAFJORDEN 60 10 N 5 32 E 3.57
FYKSESUNDET 60 25 N 6 15 E 3.45 HAAKONSVERN 60 20 N 5 14 E 4.18
HADSELOYA 68 33 N 14 49 E 8.38
HADYRET 58 20 N 6 10 E 1.39
G HAESHOLMAN 68 14 N 13 26 E 8.37
HAJA 69 44 N 18 05 E 8.57
GALTAHOLMEN 59 09 N 5 37 E 2.25 HALHOLMEN LIGHT 65 32 N 12 05 E 7.37
GALTTAREN 65 09 N 10 41 E 7.25 HALSEFJORDEN 63 04 N 8 12 E 6.46
GANDSFJORDEN 58 55 N 5 46 E 2.14 HALSFJELL 64 19 N 10 37 E 7.7
GAPAFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 55 E 2.30 HALSNE 59 11 N 5 57 E 2.26
GAPET 68 09 N 13 28 E 8.5 HALTEN LIGHT 64 10 N 9 25 E 6.53
Pub. 182
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
HALVMANEOYA 77 16 N 23 10 E 11.50 HJORINGNES LIGHT 62 21 N 6 07 E 5.54
HAMARHAUGFLU 60 00 N 5 44 E 3.36 HJORUNGNESET LIGHT 62 21 N 6 07 E 5.54
HAMMERFEST 70 40 N 23 40 E 9.6 HODDOYA 64 28 N 11 14 E 7.11
HAMMERFEST 70 41 N 23 35 E 9.7 HOGBRAKEN 65 24 N 11 02 E 7.25
HAMMERSNES 60 33 N 5 20 E 4.32 HOGGSTEINEN LIGHT 62 28 N 6 02 E 5.62
HAMNESHOLMEN 68 25 N 16 35 E 8.24 HOGSFJORDEN 58 56 N 6 00 E 2.16
HAMNVIK 68 32 N 17 34 E 8.29 HOGSNES LIGHT 62 50 N 6 58 E 6.20
HANASKJAER 59 44 N 5 10 E 3.16 HOKSTAREN 65 24 N 11 58 E 7.36
HANSNESET 61 07 N 5 06 E 5.10 HOL 68 33 N 16 24 E 8.32
HAREID 62 22 N 6 02 E 5.54 HOLA 68 14 N 14 39 E 8.10
HAROYSUND 62 54 N 6 58 E 6.21 HOLDOYA 68 27 N 14 54 E 8.38
HARSTAD 68 48 N 16 33 E 8.34 HOLEN 68 14 N 14 39 E 8.10
HARTVIKGRUNNEN LIGHT 67 49 N 14 44 E 8.17 HOLLENDARANE 61 41 N 4 56 E 5.23
HASKALLEN 61 18 N 4 57 E 5.37 HOLMEFJORDEN 60 17 N 5 40 E 3.59
HASTEIN 58 57 N 5 26 E 2.3 HOLMEFLU 59 57 N 5 58 E 3.37
HASTEINFJORDEN 59 00 N 5 30 E 2.3 HOLMENGRA 60 51 N 4 39 E 5.4
HATBOEN 66 48 N 13 21 E 7.56 HOLMENGRAFJORDEN 69 51 N 30 19 E 9.36
HAUGBERGET 63 26 N 10 41 E 6.71 HOLMENVAER 69 18 N 16 45 E 8.47
HAUGESUND 59 25 N 5 16 E 3.10 HOLSOYANE 59 39 N 5 07 E 3.14
HAUGNESET 62 37 N 6 20 E 6.10 HOLVIKTAREN 64 36 N 11 18 E 7.15
HAUGNESET LIGHT 62 37 N 6 20 E 6.10 HOMENGRA 60 51 N 4 37 E 5.50
HAUGSNESET 65 53 N 12 24 E 7.43 HOMMELVIK 63 25 N 10 48 E 6.71
HAUKEDALSHOLMEN LIGHT 61 52 N 5 16 E 5.23 HOMNNESET 70 45 N 25 42 E 9.19
HAUKOMKIN LIGHT 63 09 N 8 16 E 6.48 HONNINGSVAG 70 59 N 26 00 E 9.15
HAUKOYA 68 12 N 16 24 E 8.22 HOOYA 63 54 N 11 05 E 6.77
HAUSEN 67 17 N 14 12 E 8.12 HOPEN 76 35 N 25 10 E 11.52
HAUSVIGODDEN 58 03 N 6 59 E 1.7 HORGEFJORDEN 59 01 N 5 50 E 2.16
HAVBOEN 68 30 N 14 28 E 8.38 HORGEFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 05 E 3.26
HAVEROY 60 24 N 4 56 E 4.8 HORNBAEN 64 59 N 11 35 E 7.24
HAVFRUSKALLEN 62 03 N 4 51 E 5.20 HORNELEN 61 51 N 5 14 E 5.18
HAVIK 58 04 N 6 44 E 1.21 HORNELSFLUA 61 52 N 5 16 E 5.49
HAVOGAVLEN 71 1N 24 33 E 4. HORNNESET 68 10 N 13 20 E 8.36
HAVSTEINEN LIGHT 62 29 N 6 04 E 5.62 HORNSNESET 65 35 N 12 18 E 7.37
HEGGNESET 62 43 N 6 56 E 6.20 HORNSTAREN 65 35 N 12 19 E 7.38
HEIKENESET 69 48 N 30 44 E 9.37 HORR FARM 58 33 N 5 40 E 1.51
HEIMDAL GAS FIELD 59 35 N 2 15 E 3.3 HORTAFJORDEN 65 10 N 11 30 E 7.29
HEISSAFJORDEN 62 27 N 6 08 E 5.61 HOVDEBUKTA 58 04 N 7 06 E 1.6
HEKKINGEN 69 36 N 17 50 E 8.58 HOVDENES LIGHT 62 33 N 7 31 E 6.18
HELBERGOTAREN 65 20 N 12 03 E 7.32 HOVDENESET LIGHT 61 56 N 5 01 E 5.44
HELGELANDSFLESA 65 13 N 11 54 E 7.31 HOVEDEHAMMAREN LIGHT 63 12 N 8 51 E 6.50
HELGELANDSFLESA LIGHT 65 13 N 11 53 E 7.29 HOVEN 68 21 N 14 06 E 8.37
HELGESTONES LIGHT 62 36 N 7 22 E 6.18 HOYANGER 61 13 N 6 04 E 5.33
HELKLAKKEN 63 09 N 7 38 E 6.29 HOYLANDSNESET 59 07 N 5 59 E 2.29
HELLA 62 41 N 5 59 E 6.10 HUGLNESET 66 10 N 12 51 E 7.53
HELLANDNESET 68 02 N 16 09 E 8.22 HULDRA GAS FIELD 60 50 N 2 40 E 4.2
HELLESYLT 62 05 N 6 53 E 5.57 HULLOYNESET 68 03 N 16 11 E 8.23
HELLEVIK 62 38 N 6 10 E 6.10 HUMULRASA 64 57 N 11 23 E 7.23
HELLIGVAER 67 25 N 13 55 E 8.3 HUMULRASA LIGHT 64 55 N 11 22 E 7.22
HELLISOY LIGHT 60 45 N 4 43 E 4.22 HUNDERAVAG 59 20 N 5 49 E 2.23
HELLOYSKJERET 67 37 N 14 47 E 8.14, HUNDHOLMEN 68 10 N 13 27 E 8.37
8.15 HUNDVAKOSEN 60 07 N 5 12 E 3.25
HELMOYA 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.27 HUSAVAGEN 60 00 N 5 48 E 3.38
HELNES LIGHT 71 04 N 26 14 E 9.16 HUSEVIKFLUA 62 46 N 6 32 E 6.15
HEMMINGFJORDEN 69 12 N 18 04 E 8.53 HUSNES 59 52 N 5 46 E 3.34
HEMNESBERGET 66 13 N 13 36 E 7.51 HUSVAERFJORDEN 65 58 N 12 05 E 7.30
HENGSOY 58 53 N 5 26 E 2.4 HUSVAERSUNDET 65 56 N 12 12 E 7.30
HENNINGSVAER 68 09 N 14 13 E 8.7 HYENESE 61 51 N 5 59 E 5.48
HERAND 60 20 N 6 23 E 3.43 HYLSFJORDEN 59 31 N 6 16 E 2.37
HERDLEFJORDEN 60 32 N 5 05 E 4.28
HERDLESUND 60 4N 4 58 E 4.26
HERJANGSFJORDEN 68 30 N 17 27 E 8.29 I
HEROYSUND 59 55 N 5 47 E 3.35
HERREHOLMEN 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.7 IDSEFJORDEN 59 01 N 5 58 E 2.17
HESTEBAEN 68 56 N 16 16 E 8.48 IMARSUNDET 63 12 N 8 18 E 6.49
HESTOYFLUA 63 43 N 11 04 E 6.74 INDRE FOLDFJORDEN 64 53 N 11 44 E 7.18
HESTSKJER LIGHT 63 05 N 7 30 E 6.25 INDRE HAROY LIGHT 62 53 N 6 56 E 6.20
HETSKJER LIGHT 63 05 N 7 30 E 6.28 INDRE HAUGOYTAREN 64 56 N 11 22 E 7.23
HEVNSKJELOVA 63 29 N 9 08 E 6.66 INDRE SKARBERGNESET 68 13 N 16 12 E 8.22
HIDLEFJORDEN 59 04 N 5 49 E 2.17 INDRE SOLVAERREVET 66 24 N 12 41 E 7.63
HIDSNESET LIGHT 62 17 N 5 33 E 5.60 INDROY 60 09 N 5 25 E 3.54
HILBAANE 63 12 N 7 44 E 6.30 INGELSFJORDEN 68 29 N 15 14 E 8.38
HILBAREN 63 12 N 7 44 E 6.30 INGOYA 71 04 N 24 04 E 9.13
HILLE KJEOY 59 02 N 5 48 E 2.11 INNHOLMEN LIGHT 62 38 N 6 07 E 6.9
HILLEROEN 64 46 N 10 25 E 7.7 INNVIK 61 51 N 6 37 E 5.48
HINLOPENSTRETET 79 30 N 19 20 E 11.44 ISFJORDEN 78 18 N 15 00 E 11.15
HISSFJORDEN 60 12 N 6 03 E 3.42
HJARTOYA 67 39 N 15 05 E 8.14
HJELMEHOLSEN 60 25 N 4 56 E 4.10 J
HJELMSOYA 71 04 N 24 43 E 9.14
HJELTEFFJORDEN 60 35 N 4 55 E 4.23 JAERENS REV 58 45 N 5 30 E 1.51
HJELTEFJORDEN 60 35 N 4 55 E 4.23 JAEVA 68 32 N 15 04 E 8.38
HJELTENESET 61 51 N 5 47 E 5.48 JAKOBSELV 69 47 N 30 50 E 9.37
Pub. 182

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
JARSTEINEN 59 09 N 5 11 E 2.8 KOLTREPYNTEN 59 19 N 5 20 E 3.31
JASUNDET 58 04 N 7 09 E 1.5 KONG KARLS LAND 78 50 N 28 10 E 11.53
JELSAFJORDEN 59 19 N 6 02 E 2.35 KONGSFJORDEN 70 45 N 29 24 E 9.23
JELSAVAG 59 20 N 6 02 E 2.35 KONGSFJORDEN 78 57 N 12 00 E 11.26
JENDEMSFJELLET 62 48 N 7 03 E 6.8 KONGSMOEN 64 53 N 12 26 E 7.19
JERVIKA LIGHT 64 38 N 11 09 E 7.15 KONGSOYA 78 54 N 28 13 E 11.54
JONDAL 60 16 N 6 15 E 3.42 KONGSVIKTIND 68 35 N 16 16 E 8.32
JORPELAND 59 01 N 6 02 E 2.17 KOPERVIK 59 17 N 5 19 E 3.29
JOSENFJORDEN 59 15 N 6 10 E 2.36 KORNSTADFJORDEN 62 57 N 7 25 E 6.38
JOSSINGFJORDEN 58 19 N 6 20 E 1.35 KORSNES 68 15 N 16 04 E 8.21
JUKLEBAEN 62 22 N 5 24 E 5.28 KORSNESODDEN LIGHT 63 35 N 10 50 E 6.72
JULEDAGENE LIGHT 65 51 N 12 23 E 7.43 KRAAKENES 62 02 N 4 59 E 5.17
JULHOLMEN LIGHT 62 44 N 6 58 E 6.20 KRABBEN LIGHT 62 52 N 6 43 E 6.23
KRAKA 59 09 N 5 25 E 2.9
KRAKA LIGHT 63 01 N 7 18 E 6.27
K KRAKENES 62 02 N 4 59 E 5.17
KRAKHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 7 47 E 6.41
KALSHOLMEN LIGHT 66 55 N 13 06 E 7.64 KRAKVAGFJORDEN 63 40 N 9 15 E 6.60
KALSOYANE 60 19 N 4 56 E 4.9 KRIGSBORNTAREN 64 54 N 11 20 E 7.22
KALVOYA 68 33 N 16 27 E 8.32 KRISTIANSUND 63 07 N 7 44 E 6.37
KAMOYFJORDEN 71 04 N 26 04 E 9.14 KRISTIANSUNDSLEIA 63 09 N 7 42 E 6.24
KAPP BULL 74 21 N 19 05 E 11.3 KROKSHAVN 62 41 N 8 32 E 6.44
KAPP DUNER 74 29 N 18 46 E 11.5 KROKVIK 64 31 N 11 04 E 7.10
KAPP LINNE 78 04 N 13 37 E 11.13 KROPPEN 63 03 N 6 59 E 6.26
KAPP NATHORST 78 47 N 15 25 E 11.22 KROSSFJORDEN 79 09 N 11 46 E 11.28
KAPP RUDSEN 70 56 N 8 53 W 10.10 KROSSHAVNSUND 60 09 N 5 12 E 3.25
KARHOLMEN 65 55 N 12 23 E 7.43 KULESEIDVAG 59 44 N 5 14 E 3.16
KARISKJER LIGHT 61 55 N 5 07 E 5.50 KUNNA 66 57 N 13 31 E 7.47
KARL XII OYANE, 80 39 N 25 03 E 11.43 KUNNA 68 00 N 13 14 E 8.5
KARLEBOTN 70 07 N 28 45 E 9.31 KVAEFJORDEN 68 50 N 16 00 E 8.48
KARLSOYFJORDEN 67 31 N 14 40 E 8.13 KVAEREKNAPP 60 59 N 4 42 E 5.9
KARSTO GAS TERMINAL 59 16 N 5 30 E 2.22 KVALBAKSKJER LIGHT 64 52 N 11 41 E 7.19
KARTVEIT 60 23 N 5 00 E 4.9 KVALHOLMEN LIGHT 66 25 N 12 28 E 7.63
KATTLORTEN LIGHT 67 51 N 14 47 E 8.17 KVALOSEN 60 34 N 4 50 E 4.13
KAURA 64 14 N 10 08 E 7.3 KVALTYVAN 69 39 N 17 45 E 8.59
KIKUTODDEN 76 35 N 17 00 E 11.48 KVALVAGHOLMEN 62 59 N 8 00 E 6.42
KINN 61 34 N 4 46 E 5.17 KVALVAGHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 8 00 E 6.42
KINSARVIKBUKTA 60 23 N 6 43 E 3.51 KVANFLESSVEET 65 58 N 12 03 E 7.30
KIRKEHAMN 58 14 N 6 32 E 1.32 KVANHOLMEN 67 27 N 14 40 E 8.13
KIRKENES 69 44 N 30 03 E 9.35 KVANHOVDEN LIGHT 61 42 N 4 50 E 5.17
KIRKGRUNNEN 67 15 N 14 14 E 7.67 KVEDFJORDBUKTA 79 25 N 10 55 E 11.30
KIRKNESTANGEN LIGHT 63 55 N 11 12 E 6.77 KVELDSUND 58 04 N 6 54 E 1.19
KJEFALLET 63 16 N 7 40 E 6.30 KVERNESFJORDEN 62 57 N 7 37 E 6.38
KJEHOLMEN LIGHT 62 42 N 6 15 E 6.11 KVERVEN 63 07 N 7 40 E 6.32
KJELDEBOTN 68 25 N 16 41 E 8.26 KVINA 66 28 N 13 10 E 7.53
KJENGBAEN 67 29 N 14 01 E 8.3 KVISVIKHOLMANE 63 03 N 7 57 E 6.40
KJEOY LIGHT 64 48 N 11 35 E 7.18 KVITBERGET 67 14 N 14 36 E 7.61
KJEOYA 68 52 N 16 34 E 8.48 KVITHOLM 59 23 N 6 03 E 2.34
KJEPSOY 58 01 N 7 00 E 1.7 KVITHOLMEN LIGHT 63 01 N 7 14 E 6.25
KJERGRONESET 62 58 N 8 28 E 6.48 KVITNES LIGHT 63 08 N 7 48 E 6.36
KJERRINGA 62 11 N 5 08 E 5.18 KVITOYA 80 09 N 32 38 E 11.56
KJERRINGHOLMEN 61 24 N 4 58 E 5.40 KVITSOYA 59 04 N 5 25 E 2.7
KJERRINGNESET 69 19 N 16 55 E 8.57 KVITSOYA BDOADCAST STATION 59 04 N 5 24 E 2.7
KJERRINGOY 67 31 N 14 46 E 8.13 KYA 63 46 N 8 19 E 6.58
KJERRINGSKJERET 66 20 N 12 53 E 7.53 KYA 64 28 N 10 13 E 7.7
KJERRKLUBBEN 68 02 N 16 19 E 8.23 KYSNES 60 12 N 6 07 E 3.42
KJERRVIKA 68 01 N 16 20 E 8.23
KJOFJORDEN 69 50 N 29 47 E 9.33
KJOLIBAEN 67 45 N 14 23 E 8.3 L
KJOLLEFJORDEN 70 57 N 27 20 E 9.20
KJOLNES LIGHT 70 51 N 29 14 E 9.23 LADY FRANKLINFJORDEN 80 09 N 19 11 E 11.39
KJOLVA 69 36 N 17 30 E 8.57 LAEDERSHOLME 58 29 N 5 50 E 1.48
KJOPMANNEN 67 39 N 14 43 E 8.16 LAKSELV 67 22 N 15 36 E 8.15
KJOPSVIK 68 06 N 16 21 E 8.23 LAKSSHOLMBAEN 58 56 N 5 34 E 2.5
KLAKKEN 62 57 N 6 43 E 6.22 LAMANNSKJERET 66 36 N 13 05 E 7.54
KLAKKEN 64 40 N 10 27 E 7.8 LAMHOLME 59 20 N 5 12 E 3.7
KLAKKSBROREN LIGHT 63 21 N 8 25 E 6.65 LAMHOLME 59 20 N 5 45 E 2.23
KLAUVA LIGHT 61 07 N 5 02 E 5.35 LANDEGODE 67 24 N 14 20 E 7.46
KLAUVA LIGHT 69 11 N 17 58 E 8.53 LANDEGODE 67 25 N 14 20 E 8.12
KLEVEBOEN 62 16 N 5 30 E 5.58 LANDEGODE LIGHT 67 27 N 14 23 E 8.12
KLOKKARVIK 60 13 N 5 10 E 4.17 LANGENESET 59 31 N 5 14 E 3.9
KLOVNINGEN 61 56 N 4 57 E 5.23 LANGESKALLEN 67 57 N 12 43 E 8.36
KLUBBEN LIGHT 62 19 N 5 37 E 5.60 LANGESKJERET 62 32 N 5 52 E 6.5
KNAPHOLMENE 64 36 N 11 02 E 7.9, LANGESTRAUMEN 59 41 N 5 15 E 3.20
7.12 LANGGRUNNEN 68 42 N 16 38 E 8.33
KNAPPEN 62 38 N 6 02 E 6.7 LANGGRUNNODDEN 80 09 N 17 46 E 11.39
KNARRHOLME 59 13 N 5 28 E 2.19 LANGHOLM 58 02 N 6 58 E 1.7
KNUTSTAREN 65 26 N 11 55 E 7.36 LANGHOLMEN 65 49 N 12 27 E 7.41
KOBBALEIDA 60 19 N 5 09 E 4.19 LANGKVITNESET 68 38 N 16 35 E 8.32
KOBBHOLMFJORDEN 69 47 N 30 44 E 9.37 LANGNESET 69 41 N 18 54 E 8.63
KOKODDEN 58 14 N 6 39 E 1.26 LANGODBAEN 65 58 N 12 07 E 7.30
KOLBEINSFLU 62 58 N 6 53 E 6.26 LANGOY 58 04 N 6 52 E 1.12
Pub. 182
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
LANGOYSUND 60 37 N 4 48 E 4.15 M
LANGOYSUNDET 68 35 N 14 55 E 8.42
LANGRO LIGHT 64 29 N 10 30 E 7.4 MADSOYGALTEN 65 02 N 11 41 E 7.29
LANGSTEIN 63 33 N 10 54 E 6.72 MADSOYGALTEN LIGHT 65 03 N 11 41 E 7.31
LANGSUNDET 65 14 N 11 58 E 7.31 MAGDALENEFJORDEN 79 34 N 10 54 E 11.30
LAPONIAHALVOYA 80 25 N 19 50 E 11.40 MAGDALENEHUKEN 79 34 N 10 44 E 11.30
LATREVIKKLUBBEN 60 04 N 5 59 E 3.39 MAGEROYA 71 03 N 25 40 E 9.14
LAUKHAMARSUND 59 52 N 5 36 E 3.33 MAGNILLEN 63 06 N 8 05 E 6.25
LAUVOY 63 56 N 9 56 E 7.5 MAGNILLEN 63 08 N 8 05 E 6.27
LAUVOYFJORDEN 63 00 N 7 20 E 6.38 MAGNUS OIL FIELD 61 37 N 1 20 E 5.2
LAUVOYFJORDEN 64 35 N 11 20 E 7.15 MAHOLMEN 65 00 N 10 58 E 7.26
LAUVOYTAREN 64 33 N 11 20 E 7.15 MAHOLMRASA 65 00 N 10 55 E 7.26
LAVANGEN 68 47 N 17 37 E 8.51 MAKKAUR LIGHT 70 42 N 30 05 E 9.25
LEIRFJORDEN 67 32 N 15 37 E 8.15 MALANGSGRUNNEN 69 58 N 17 30 E 9.2
LEIRVIK 59 47 N 5 31 E 3.19 MALM 64 04 N 11 14 E 6.77
LEITNES LIGHT 63 02 N 7 41 E 6.39 MALOY 61 56 N 5 07 E 5.24
LEKAFJORDEN 65 05 N 11 47 E 7.31 MALOY SKARHOLMEN 67 46 N 14 24 E 8.3
LEPSOYA 62 37 N 6 11 E 6.7 MALSNES 69 21 N 18 34 E 8.60
LEPSOYKLOVNINGEN 62 38 N 6 03 E 6.7 MANGERSFJORDEN 60 37 N 5 00 E 4.25
LEPSOYREVET 62 36 N 6 15 E 6.10 MARFLESA LIGHT 64 10 N 10 08 E 7.3
LEROYOSEN 60 14 N 5 10 E 4.17 MARIASUNDET 77 41 N 14 51 E 11.11
LEVANGER 63 45 N 11 18 E 6.74 MARKUSSUNDET 63 06 N 7 45 E 6.35
LEVRA LIGHT 64 32 N 11 28 E 7.14 MARNESSKAGEN 67 10 N 14 05 E 7.59
LI 58 55 N 5 48 E 2.15 MARSTEINSBAEN 60 08 N 4 59 E 3.22
LILAND 68 29 N 16 53 E 8.27 MASOYA 71 01 N 25 00 E 9.14
LILAND LIGHT 68 28 N 16 55 E 8.26 MASOYSUND 70 59 N 25 01 E 9.18
LILANDSGRUNNEN 68 27 N 16 50 E 8.25 MASTRAFJORDEN 59 06 N 5 39 E 2.18
LILLE EKKEROYA 70 05 N 30 14 E 9.29 MAURANGERFJORDEN 60 06 N 6 10 E 3.41
LILLE LAUGAROY 60 09 N 5 15 E 3.27 MEBAEN 60 54 N 4 42 E 5.9
LILLE MOLLA 68 12 N 14 46 E 8.9 MEFALDTAREN 64 37 N 11 00 E 7.10
LILLEOYA LIGHT 63 20 N 8 44 E 6.64 MEFALLSTAREN 64 46 N 11 29 E 7.17
LILLESVEET 66 06 N 11 31 E 7.47 MEFJORDBAEN 65 08 N 11 12 E 7.28
LILLETAREN 65 10 N 11 50 E 7.29 MEFJORDINGEN 68 55 N 16 05 E 8.48
LILLIEHOOKFJORDEN 79 15 N 11 40 E 11.29 MEFJORDSHOLMAN 66 12 N 12 50 E 7.53
LINDESNES 57 59 N 7 03 E 1.4 MEHAMNFJORDEN 71 04 N 27 52 E 9.21
LINDHOLMEN 58 03 N 6 52 E 1.14 MEKGRUNNA 62 43 N 7 06 E 6.16
LINDOY 59 17 N 5 42 E 2.23 MELINGSVAG 59 47 N 5 07 E 3.17
LINESFJELL 64 01 N 9 54 E 6.52 MELOY 66 04 N 11 37 E 7.25
LINESOYA 64 01 N 9 54 E 7.6 MELOY LIGHT 62 48 N 8 18 E 6.44
LINFLUA 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.34 MELOYNESET LIGHT 66 50 N 13 35 E 7.57
LISTA 58 07 N 6 34 E 1.22 MELSTEINEN 63 58 N 9 35 E 6.60
LISTAFJORDEN 58 11 N 6 37 E 1.24 MELSTEINEN 65 11 N 11 51 E 7.31
LITLE BALLANGEN 68 20 N 16 51 E 8.26 MESJOYGRUNNEN 67 12 N 13 59 E 7.66
LITLE EKKEROYA 70 05 N 30 14 E 9.29 MESKFJORDEN 70 10 N 28 40 E 9.31
LITLE SKJELBREIDA 63 10 N 7 10 E 6.29 MESOYA 66 51 N 13 40 E 7.57
LITLEGRUNNEN 63 28 N 10 46 E 6.71 MIA 62 40 N 6 38 E 6.8
LITLOYA 68 35 N 14 19 E 8.41 MIDFJORDEN 62 38 N 6 40 E 6.16
LODINGEN 68 25 N 16 00 E 8.31 MIDFJORDENSKJAER 58 02 N 6 54 E 1.10
LOFOTODDEN 67 50 N 12 50 E 8.35 MIDFJORDFLU 61 19 N 4 49 E 5.39
LOFOTODDEN 67 50 N 12 51 E 8.4 MIDTERKUKEN 77 39 N 14 46 E 11.10
LOKKAREN 64 30 N 11 26 E 7.14 MIDTFJORDSKJER 61 16 N 4 54 E 5.36
LOKKSUNDET 60 03 N 5 43 E 3.36 MIMERBUKTA 78 39 N 16 25 E 11.21
LOMFJORDEN 79 36 N 17 54 E 11.44 MJOSUNDET 68 54 N 17 27 E 8.52
LONEVAGEN 60 33 N 5 27 E 4.34 MJOSUNDHOLMEN 68 53 N 17 28 E 8.52
LONGYEARBYEN 78 14 N 15 39 E 11.19 MOFFEN 80 02 N 14 30 E 11.36
LONTARANE 63 11 N 7 31 E 6.29 MOKALASSET 60 18 N 4 56 E 4.8
LOPPHAVET 70 30 N 21 00 E 9.5 MOKALASSET 61 18 N 5 01 E 5.37
LOPSFELLET 67 19 N 14 29 E 8.12 MOKSTER 60 04 N 5 06 E 3.24
LOPSHOLMEN 67 20 N 14 24 E 8.12 MOKSTRA GRONINGEN 60 03 N 5 07 E 3.25
LOSBATEN 70 56 N 8 40 W 10.5 MOLDE 62 44 N 7 10 E 6.17
LOVOFJORDEN 63 00 N 7 20 E 6.38 MOLDTU 62 18 N 5 38 E 5.60
LOVUNDEN 66 22 N 12 20 E 7.46 MOLDTUSTRANDA 62 18 N 5 39 E 5.60
LUNDANES 62 07 N 6 58 E 5.57 MONGSTAD 60 49 N 5 02 E 5.7
LUNDENES 63 00 N 7 44 E 6.39 MORKEDALSTUA 63 30 N 8 31 E 6.52
LUNDEVIKEN 58 26 N 5 55 E 1.45 MOSJOEN 65 51 N 13 11 E 7.42
LUNDSNESET 63 20 N 10 02 E 6.69 MOSSELBUKTA 79 53 N 15 55 E 11.38
LUNEKEVIKA 74 28 N 18 47 E 11.5 MOSTERHAMN 59 42 N 5 24 E 3.18
LUREF JORDEN 60 42 N 5 07 E 4.30 MOSTEROY 59 05 N 5 38 E 2.9
LYGREPOLLEN 60 04 N 5 46 E 3.56 MUKEN 66 45 N 12 29 E 8.2
LYKLINGFJORDEN 59 42 N 5 11 E 3.15 MULTIND 68 00 N 16 30 E 8.23
LYNGHOLMEN 64 35 N 11 24 E 7.15 MUNKHOLMEN LIGHT 63 27 N 10 23 E 6.69
LYNGSFJORDEN 69 40 N 20 25 E 9.10 MURCHISONFJORDEN 80 00 N 18 20 E 11.46
LYNGVAER 65 16 N 11 58 E 7.32 MURUVIK 63 26 N 10 51 E 6.72
LYNGVAERFJORDEN 65 15 N 12 05 E 7.33 MYKEN 66 45 N 12 25 E 7.47
LYNGVAERGALTEN LIGHT 65 16 N 12 03 E 7.33 MYKEN 66 46 N 12 29 E 7.64
LYRODDANE 60 10 N 4 59 E 4.5 MYRBOEN 69 12 N 16 30 E 8.47
LYSEFJORDEN 58 54 N 6 05 E 2.30 MYRFLESAN 69 06 N 16 04 E 8.47
LYSEFJORDEN 60 12 N 5 19 E 4.16
N
NAEROYSUNDET 64 50 N 11 11 E 7.20
Pub. 182

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
NALAUVIKEN 58 23 N 6 04 E 1.40 OS 60 11 N 5 28 E 3.57
NAMSOS 64 28 N 11 30 E 7.12 OSAFJORDEN 60 30 N 6 55 E 3.49
NAPPHOLMEN 68 08 N 13 28 E 8.5 OSNESGAVLEN 59 25 N 5 14 E 3.9
NARVIK 68 26 N 17 25 E 8.28 OSPA 61 13 N 4 45 E 5.12
NEDSTRANDSFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 44 E 2.23 OSTHOLMEN 66 53 N 13 31 E 7.58
NEDSTRANDSVAG 59 20 N 5 52 E 2.24 OSTMARKTANGEN 63 27 N 10 27 E 6.71
NEKKOYOSEN LIGHT 61 35 N 4 57 E 5.42 OSTRE STOLEN 58 13 N 6 43 E 1.25
NERLANDSOY 62 21 N 5 33 E 5.28 OSUNDER 60 33 N 4 51 E 4.13
NESNA 66 12 N 13 01 E 7.51 OTEREN 64 58 N 11 31 E 7.23
NEVERNES LIGHT 65 26 N 12 35 E 7.38 OTNESET 63 08 N 8 31 E 6.49
NINIAN OIL FIELD 60 51 N 1 28 E 5.2 OTTOY 59 24 N 6 06 E 2.34
NOGVAFJORDEN 62 41 N 6 20 E 6.11 OVSKALLEN 66 25 N 11 58 E 7.48
NORDAUSTLANDET 79 50 N 23 00 E 11.39 OYENSVE 67 35 N 14 17 E 8.14
NORDENSKIOLDBUKTA 80 25 N 21 10 E 11.41 OYNAFJORDEN 60 06 N 5 55 E 3.40
NORDFJORDEID 61 54 N 5 59 E 5.48 OYSTESEVAGEN 60 23 N 6 12 E 3.44
NORDFJORDEN 58 20 N 6 15 E 1.38
NORDFJORDEN 78 30 N 15 00 E 11.22
NORDFOLD 67 46 N 15 14 E 8.14 P
NORDFOLLA 67 45 N 15 17 E 8.14
NORDGATTET 79 45 N 11 05 E 11.33 PASVIKHAMN 69 49 N 30 35 E 9.36
NORDHAMN 74 31 N 18 59 E 11.4 PENNINGFLU 62 19 N 5 33 E 5.60
NORDKAPP 71 10 N 25 47 E 9.2 PERSFJORDEN 70 26 N 30 48 E 9.25
NORDKAPP 71 10 N 7 57 W 10.8 POLLATIND 61 06 N 4 52 E 5.5
NORDKAPP 74 31 N 19 07 E 11.4 PORSANGEN 70 30 N 25 30 E 9.19
NORDOERNE LIGHT 64 48 N 10 33 E 7.1 PRESTEID 68 05 N 15 40 E 8.20
NORDOY 60 43 N 4 44 E 4.15 PRINS KARLS FORLAND 78 30 N 11 06 E 11.23
NORDOYANE 59 36 N 5 07 E 3.14
NORDRE BRATTHOLME 60 24 N 5 06 E 4.26
NORDRE FAUSKEN 63 14 N 7 33 E 6.30 R
NORDRE NEKKOYA 61 35 N 4 56 E 5.42
NORDRE OYGARDSKJERET 67 32 N 15 08 E 8.15 RABBAROSEN 60 18 N 4 57 E 4.8
NORDRE TJORNOY 60 22 N 4 55 E 4.9 RADOYFJORDEN 60 35 N 5 11 E 4.29
NORDRE VAGAHOLME 59 13 N 5 31 E 2.33 RAEVOYSUND 58 02 N 7 00 E 1.6
NORDREGAPET 58 27 N 5 52 E 1.46 RAFTSUNDET 68 23 N 15 05 E 8.10
NORDSTANDSKJAER 68 30 N 16 09 E 8.32 RAMBERG 68 05 N 13 14 E 8.36
NORDTAREN 65 34 N 12 11 E 7.37 RAMBERGHOLMEN 64 02 N 11 14 E 6.77
NORESKALLEN 62 03 N 4 52 E 5.20 RAMSNES 59 38 N 6 20 E 2.38
NORHEIMSUND 60 22 N 6 09 E 3.43 RAMSOY 60 26 N 5 03 E 4.26
NORTH CORMORANT OIL FIELD 61 15 N 1 09 E 5.2 RAMSUNDET 68 29 N 16 31 E 8.25
NUPEN 67 08 N 13 43 E 7.65 RANDABERGVIGA 59 02 N 5 37 E 2.10
NY-ALESUND 78 55 N 11 57 E 11.26 RANDOY 59 12 N 6 02 E 2.27
NYHAMNA 62 51 N 6 57 E 6.13 RANSKJERET 66 09 N 12 52 E 7.51
NYLANDSKJERET 64 41 N 10 33 E 7.7 RASVAGEN 58 14 N 6 34 E 1.30
RASVAGHOLMANE 58 13 N 6 35 E 1.31
RAUDFJORDEN 79 50 N 12 00 E 11.36
O RAUDHOLMANE 60 10 N 5 28 E 3.57
RAUDHOLMANE 62 38 N 6 24 E 6.15
OBRESTADBREKRA 58 40 N 5 33 E 1.51 RAUDHOLMENE 59 33 N 5 09 E 3.11
ODDA 60 05 N 6 33 E 3.52 RAUDOY 61 18 N 4 55 E 5.40
ODDANE 61 33 N 5 00 E 5.41 RAUDOY LIGHT 62 14 N 5 59 E 5.53
ODDANE 62 54 N 6 53 E 6.20 RAUDSANDNES LIGHT 63 04 N 7 41 E 6.32
ODDEN 60 26 N 4 56 E 4.9 RAUNA 58 04 N 6 40 E 1.21
ODOYFLUA 66 21 N 12 55 E 7.53 RAUNEFJORDEN 60 16 N 5 10 E 4.17
OEN 58 06 N 6 47 E 1.20 REIMANE 63 31 N 7 50 E 6.53
OFFERSOY 68 19 N 15 37 E 8.11 REINE 67 56 N 13 06 E 8.4
OGNABUKTI 58 31 N 5 45 E 1.49 REINSFJELLET 62 56 N 7 56 E 6.25
OKSBASHEIA 64 25 N 10 31 E 7.7 REKEFJORDEN 58 20 N 6 16 E 1.37
OKSEBAASEN 69 51 N 30 07 E 9.35 REKVEDBUKTA 70 57 N 8 34 W 10.4
OKSEBASEN LIGHT 62 31 N 6 09 E 6.9 REMMINGSKJER LIGHT 63 22 N 8 17 E 6.65
OKSENDAL 62 43 N 8 26 E 6.44 REVINGEN 59 00 N 5 49 E 2.11
OKSFJORD 70 14 N 22 21 E 9.9 REVOY 58 03 N 6 48 E 1.13
OKSFJORDEN 70 12 N 22 18 E 9.9 REVSHOLMEN 63 01 N 7 47 E 6.40
OKSNESODDEN 68 03 N 15 14 E 8.19 RIBBA 61 54 N 5 00 E 5.45
OKSREVLTAREN 65 01 N 10 51 E 7.26 RINGOY 60 27 N 6 47 E 3.48
OKSSUNDET 68 00 N 15 18 E 8.19 RINGVASSOY 69 55 N 19 10 E 9.3
OKSTRAFJORDEN 59 20 N 6 06 E 2.36 RINNOYVAG 68 22 N 15 46 E 8.11
OLA-PERSOYA LIGHT 67 40 N 14 43 E 8.16 RISAVIKI 58 56 N 5 35 E 2.5
OLASKJAER LIGHT 61 44 N 4 57 E 5.23 RISHOLMEN LIGHT 63 09 N 8 32 E 6.49
OLDEN 61 50 N 6 49 E 5.48 RISHOLMFLUA 61 38 N 4 53 E 5.22
OLSFLUA 62 30 N 5 51 E 6.4 RISHOLMSUNDET 58 14 N 6 40 E 1.26
OMBOFJORDEN 59 17 N 6 07 E 2.30 RISKAFJORDEN 58 56 N 5 49 E 2.15
ONA LIGHT 62 52 N 6 33 E 6.22 RISVAER 64 55 N 11 32 E 7.22
ONARHEIM 59 57 N 5 38 E 3.35 RISVAER 68 15 N 15 09 E 8.11
ONARHEIMSFJORDEN 59 57 N 5 41 E 3.33 RISVAERSUNDET 64 58 N 11 31 E 7.23
ONGLESUNDET 60 43 N 4 52 E 4.22 ROBBEGANSTANGEN 60 41 N 4 48 E 4.15
OPPLOYFJORDEN 64 48 N 11 45 E 7.17 RODBERG 63 29 N 10 00 E 6.68
ORKANGER 63 19 N 9 53 E 6.69 RODBERGSODDEN 69 27 N 18 08 E 8.56
ORMOYA 65 26 N 12 09 E 7.34 RODOY 66 39 N 13 05 E 7.54
ORNES 66 52 N 13 42 E 7.57 RODSUNDA 64 38 N 11 10 E 7.15
ORSTA 62 12 N 6 08 E 5.53 ROEDVIKA 74 24 N 19 13 E 11.3
ORSTAFJORDEN 62 14 N 6 00 E 5.53 ROGNAN 67 06 N 15 25 E 7.62
ORSVAG 68 12 N 14 25 E 8.8 ROGNAN LIGHT 63 34 N 9 17 E 6.61
Pub. 182
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
ROGNANNES LIGHT 63 23 N 8 39 E 6.64 SAUDEFJORDEN 59 33 N 6 17 E 2.38
ROHOLME 58 02 N 6 52 E 1.10 SAUDEHOLMEN LIGHT 62 11 N 5 36 E 5.51
ROKKEM LIGHT 62 53 N 8 30 E 6.47 SAUEHORNET 62 14 N 6 09 E 5.27
ROLVSOYA 70 58 N 24 00 E 9.13 SAWGRUNNEN 65 09 N 10 56 E 7.27
ROMBAKEN 68 28 N 17 36 E 8.29 SEIOSKALLEN 67 17 N 13 31 E 7.66
RONELDEN 61 55 N 5 01 E 5.44 SEIRSTADFJORDEN 64 37 N 11 22 E 7.16
RONGEVAER 60 49 N 4 47 E 5.5 SELSOYA 68 09 N 15 29 E 8.20
RONGEVAERSKALLEN 60 50 N 4 46 E 5.5 SELVAER 66 36 N 12 18 E 7.63
RONGOYNI 60 30 N 4 55 E 4.11 SELVBUKTA 63 37 N 9 43 E 6.68
RONGSUND 60 30 N 4 56 E 4.26 SENDINGANE 61 39 N 4 34 E 5.18
RONVIKSKJERANE 66 40 N 13 11 E 7.55 SHANNONBOEN 79 34 N 10 56 E 11.30
RORSUND 60 31 N 4 53 E 4.13 SHEMSHESTEN 62 58 N 7 11 E 6.24
RORVIK 64 52 N 11 14 E 7.21 SIGGJA 59 45 N 5 18 E 3.12
ROSANESET 68 24 N 17 12 E 8.27 SIGNEHAMNA 79 16 N 11 35 E 11.29
ROSENDAL 59 59 N 6 00 E 3.37 SILDA 70 20 N 21 45 E 9.5
ROSOK HAVFLUA 62 49 N 6 13 E 6.22 SILDSKJERET 67 48 N 14 44 E 8.16
ROSOYTAREN 65 52 N 12 22 E 7.43 SIMADALSFJORDEN 60 30 N 7 05 E 3.49
ROSSHOLMEN 62 36 N 6 03 E 6.7 SIRAGRUNNEN 58 15 N 6 20 E 1.33
ROSSOY 60 59 N 4 48 E 5.10 SIREVAG 58 30 N 5 48 E 1.49
ROST 67 31 N 12 07 E 8.4 SJOVEGAN 68 53 N 17 50 E 8.52
ROTVAER 68 22 N 15 56 E 8.10 SKAFTENES LIGHT 64 57 N 12 01 E 7.19
ROVDESKJERET LIGHT 62 11 N 5 45 E 5.52 SKAGSTADSUNDET 67 58 N 15 10 E 8.19
ROYKENESBOEN 68 51 N 16 39 E 8.33 SKALEVIK 60 24 N 5 14 E 4.21
ROYTINGKALVEN 60 52 N 4 47 E 5.8 SKALLEFLUENE 61 35 N 4 46 E 5.15
RUMPENNESET 63 11 N 8 35 E 6.50 SKARDHOLMEN 60 24 N 5 13 E 4.20
RUNDE 62 25 N 5 35 E 5.27 SKAREKINNA 61 42 N 4 51 E 5.22
RUNDOY LIGHT 62 25 N 5 36 E 5.29 SKARHOLMAN 67 39 N 14 28 E 8.14
RUTLETANGEN 61 05 N 5 10 E 5.32 SKARNESET 67 12 N 14 17 E 7.60
RUTLETANGEN LIGHT 61 05 N 5 10 E 5.10 SKARVBERGNES LIGHT 63 05 N 7 58 E 6.40
RYK YSEOYANE 77 47 N 25 12 E 11.50 SKARVHAUSBAEN 68 57 N 16 10 E 8.47
RYSSLANDSVIK 59 52 N 5 44 E 3.33 SKARVOY 60 30 N 4 50 E 4.12
RYSTRAUMEN 69 33 N 18 43 E 8.59 SKARVOYA 65 53 N 12 20 E 7.43
RYVARDEN 59 32 N 5 14 E 3.11 SKARVOYSUND 60 27 N 4 56 E 4.10
SKATEN LIGHT 61 52 N 5 13 E 5.45
SKIVEN 67 58 N 12 56 E 8.35
S SKJAHOLMEN 67 43 N 14 43 E 8.16
SKJEGGENE 62 16 N 5 20 E 5.28
SAEBOSUNDET 59 10 N 5 56 E 2.18 SKJELHOLMEN 63 54 N 9 51 E 7.5
SAEBUOY 63 30 N 8 15 E 6.56 SKJELJANGER LIGHT 60 37 N 4 57 E 4.25
SAEVAREID 60 11 N 5 45 E 3.55 SKJELJAVAG 60 22 N 5 40 E 3.59
SAGFJORDEN 67 38 N 15 16 E 8.15 SKJELVA 65 43 N 12 19 E 7.39
SAGFJORDEN 67 58 N 15 36 E 8.20 SKJERVHEIM 59 28 N 5 45 E 2.40
SAGFJORDEN 69 49 N 30 32 E 9.36 SKJOMGRUNNEN 68 25 N 17 13 E 8.25
SAGVAG 59 46 N 5 23 E 3.21 SKJORAFJORDEN 64 06 N 10 10 E 7.6
SAKRISSKJER 61 14 N 4 57 E 5.36 SKLINNA 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.25
SAKSA LIGHT 64 24 N 10 26 E 7.4 SKLINNA BANKEN 65 16 N 10 10 E 7.25
SAKSNES LIGHT 63 02 N 8 14 E 6.46 SKLINNA LIGHT 65 12 N 11 00 E 7.27
SALANGEN 68 53 N 17 34 E 8.51 SKLINNAFLESAN 65 08 N 10 59 E 7.27
SALANGSVERKET 68 55 N 17 44 E 8.52 SKOLMNESET 68 15 N 13 31 E 8.35
SALFJELLET 78 14 N 12 03 E 11.23 SKOLTAFJORDEN 60 02 N 5 00 E 3.23
SALHUSSTRAUMMEN 59 22 N 5 18 E 3.30 SKOLTEN 62 16 N 6 00 E 5.53
SALSBRUKET 64 48 N 11 52 E 7.18 SKOMVAER LIGHT 67 25 N 11 52 E 8.4
SALTOYA 63 33 N 10 54 E 6.72 SKONGSNES LIGHT 62 02 N 5 08 E 5.25
SALTRAK 58 03 N 6 49 E 1.18 SKORNESET T59 21 N6 58 E 2.35
SALTVIKHAMN LIGHT 63 47 N 11 00 E 6.75 SKORPA 62 20 N 5 30 E 5.28
SAMSKALLEN 66 22 N 11 58 E 7.63 SKORPA 66 02 N 12 33 E 7.44
SAND 59 29 N 6 15 E 2.35 SKORPEFLUENE 61 55 N 4 46 E 5.23
SANDHOLMEN 69 25 N 18 06 E 8.56 SKORPEGAVLEN 59 56 N 5 48 E 3.37
SANDNES 58 51 N 5 45 E 2.13 SKORPERAUVA 61 46 N 4 40 E 5.23
SANDNESSJOEN 66 01 N 12 38 E 7.45 SKORPESUND 59 55 N 5 38 E 3.33
SANDNESSUNDET 69 41 N 18 54 E 8.63 SKOTAMEDGRUNN 58 48 N 5 26 E 1.52
SANDOY LIGHT 61 18 N 4 36 E 5.13 SKRAEDDEREN 58 28 N 5 51 E 1.48
SANDOYA 70 02 N 18 32 E 9.3 SKROVA 68 10 N 14 41 E 8.8
SANDOYA LIGHT 61 33 N 4 46 E 5.34 SKROVA HAVN 68 10 N 14 40 E 8.8
SANDOYNI 60 27 N 4 53 E 4.9 SKROVKJOSEN 68 15 N 16 19 E 8.22
SANDOYTAREN 65 23 N 12 00 E 7.36 SKUDENESFJORDEN 59 00 N 5 15 E 2.6
SANDSFJORDEN 59 21 N 6 00 E 2.34 SKUDENESHAVN 59 09 N 5 16 E 2.8
SANDSFJORDEN 62 15 N 5 31 E 5.58 SKULEN 62 41 N 6 19 E 6.11
SANDSHAMN LIGHT 62 15 N 5 30 E 5.58 SLAADBUKTA 79 42 N 11 15 E 11.34
SANDSKJER 70 05 N 29 33 E 9.31 SLEIPNER GAS FIELD 58 21 N 1 45 E 1.2
SANDSORA LIGHT 63 45 N 11 03 E 6.74 SLETRINGEN LIGHT 63 40 N 8 16 E 6.53
SANDSOY 62 15 N 5 26 E 5.28 SLETTEBAKKEN LIGHT 68 31 N 16 58 E 8.26
SANDVAER 65 21 N 11 58 E 7.36 SLETTNES LIGHT 71 05 N 28 14 E 9.21
SANDVAERODTAREN 65 22 N 12 03 E 7.32 SLETTNESET 69 23 N 18 06 E 8.56
SANDVEHAMN 59 11 N 5 11 E 3.5 SLOVAER 67 36 N 14 39 E 8.14
SANDVERKEN 66 39 N 13 06 E 7.55 SMASKJAER 59 17 N 5 57 E 2.24
SANNA 66 30 N 12 03 E 7.46 SMEERENBURGFJORDEN 79 43 N 11 06 E 11.31
SARNESFJORDEN 70 58 N 25 45 E 9.16 SMITSKJAERLEIEN 68 20 N 15 25 E 8.11
SARSTANGEN 78 44 N 11 29 E 11.24 SMORSUNDNES 59 30 N 5 14 E 3.9
SASSENFJORDEN 78 23 N 16 30 E 11.20 SNERTHOLMEN LIGHT 65 43 N 12 28 E 7.39
SAUDA 59 39 N 6 21 E 2.39 SOGNDALSSTRANDA 58 19 N 6 18 E 1.36
SAUDAFJORDEN 59 33 N 6 17 E 2.38 SOGNEUKSEN 60 57 N 4 46 E 5.8
Pub. 182

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
SOLAVIKI 58 53 N 5 34 E 2.4 STORE ROGLA 68 44 N 16 39 E 8.33
SOLBERGFJORDEN 59 15 N 5 55 E 2.30 STORE SORTNA 63 05 N 7 24 E 6.28
SOLBERGFJORDEN 69 08 N 17 38 E 8.53 STORE SOTRA 60 20 N 5 05 E 4.6
SOLBJORG 60 18 N 5 37 E 3.59 STORE STEINEN 66 00 N 12 01 E 7.30
SOLEMSUNDET 63 12 N 8 11 E 6.49 STORE SVARTOKSEN 67 16 N 14 14 E 7.67
SOLOYET 62 57 N 8 26 E 6.47 STORE VERNOY 60 05 N 5 26 E 3.53
SONDRE SOROYHOLME 65 55 N 12 22 E 7.44 STOREGRUNNEN 63 30 N 10 26 E 6.71
SONDREGAPET 58 26 N 6 00 E 1.42 STORENESET 63 30 N 5 20 E 6.51
SONOYOSEN 59 35 N 5 07 E 3.14 STORENESET 63 45 N 5 20 E 6.51
SORAGAPET 58 26 N 6 00 E 1.42 STORFJELLET 67 28 N 11 56 E 8.4
SORAUSTKAPP 71 01 N 8 00 W 10.7 STORFJORDEN 78 00 N 20 00 E 11.48
SORE GUTVIK LIGHT 65 05 N 11 49 E 7.31 STORGRUNDEN 65 09 N 11 07 E 7.28
SORE RAMNEN 63 08 N 7 24 E 6.28 STORHOLMANE 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.6
SOREIDSVIK 60 03 N 5 28 E 3.54 STORHOLMEN 61 01 N 4 47 E 5.9
SORFJORDEN 60 24 N 6 42 E 3.50 STORHOLMEN 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.6
SORFJORDEN 60 31 N 5 22 E 4.32 STORHOLMEN 68 43 N 16 46 E 8.33
SORFJORDSKALLEN 60 32 N 5 19 E 4.32 STORHOLMEN LIGHT 62 39 N 5 56 E 6.22
SORFOLLA 67 32 N 15 16 E 8.15 STORMBUKTA 76 41 N 16 18 E 11.8
SORGATTET 79 39 N 11 00 E 11.33 STORNESORA LIGHT 63 59 N 11 18 E 6.77
SORGFJORDEN 79 54 N 16 50 E 11.44 STORSUNDET 59 57 N 5 53 E 3.37
SORGRUNNEN 63 33 N 8 00 E 6.56 STORTAREN 65 08 N 11 01 E 7.28
SORHAUGOY 59 25 N 5 14 E 3.9 STORTAREN 65 09 N 11 50 E 7.29
SORHUNDEN 64 39 N 10 53 E 7.20 STORVIKA 67 31 N 15 36 E 8.15
SORKAPP 70 50 N 8 59 W 10.3 STOTT 66 55 N 13 28 E 7.58
SORKAPP LAND 76 50 N 16 25 E 11.8 STOTT LIGHT 66 57 N 13 28 E 7.58
SORNES 65 58 N 12 52 E 7.41 STOTTVAER 66 56 N 13 20 E 7.64
SORSKJOMEN 68 12 N 17 19 E 8.27 STOVHOLME 60 03 N 5 06 E 3.24
SORSUNDET 63 06 N 7 44 E 6.33 STOVIKA 58 15 N 6 31 E 1.32
SORTLAND 68 42 N 15 25 E 8.40 STRANDA 62 18 N 6 57 E 5.56
SORTLANDSUNDET 68 42 N 15 26 E 8.39 STRANDANES LIGHT 62 59 N 7 42 E 6.40
SORVAER 70 38 N 21 59 E 9.13 STRANDSFJORDEN 58 13 N 6 39 E 1.26
SPANNHOLMANE 59 17 N 4 51 E 3.4 STRANDVIK 60 10 N 5 41 E 3.55
SPILDEROYA 69 25 N 18 29 E 8.60 STRAUMEN 68 26 N 17 42 E 8.29
SPINDSFJORDEN 58 05 N 6 56 E 1.10 STRAUMSUNDI 60 35 N 4 51 E 4.14
SPITSBERGEN BANK 75 00 N 21 00 E 11.2 STROMOYA 64 52 N 11 16 E 7.22
SPRANGBUKT 58 27 N 5 56 E 1.45 STUSVIK 58 00 N 7 02 E 1.6
SPRINGEN LIGHT 65 55 N 12 13 E 7.30 SUFFOLKPYNTEN 76 52 N 15 34 E 11.8
STABBEN 63 08 N 7 16 E 6.28 SULA LIGHT 63 51 N 8 27 E 6.58
STABBEN LIGHT 61 36 N 4 57 E 5.42 SULA LIGHT 63 51 N 8 28 E 6.53
STABSAET 58 24 N 5 59 E 1.43 SUNDSODDEN LIGHT 67 05 N 14 04 E 7.60
STAFLUA 62 54 N 6 51 E 6.23 SUNNDALSORA 62 41 N 8 33 E 6.44
STAKNES LIGHT 63 01 N 8 21 E 6.46 SURVIKSUNDET 64 33 N 11 24 E 7.14
STALLEN 60 17 N 4 57 E 4.6 SVAHOLMANE 58 23 N 6 03 E 1.41
STAMSUND 68 07 N 13 51 E 8.6 SVANEFLU 58 03 N 6 45 E 1.21
STANGHOLMGALTEN 64 56 N 11 28 E 7.24 SVARTESKJAER 62 11 N 5 21 E 5.50
STANGNESODDEN 68 48 N 16 37 E 8.33 SVARTSKJERET 63 18 N 8 18 E 6.63
STATFJORDEN OIL FIELD 61 15 N 1 51 E 5.2 SVEABUKTA 77 52 N 16 45 E 11.12
STATPIPE PLATFORM NO. 1 58 11 N 2 28 E 1.2 SVEFJORDEN 64 23 N 10 30 E 7.6
STATTHAVET 62 12 N 5 06 E 5.27 SVEHOLMEN LIGHT 63 17 N 8 29 E 6.50
STATTLANDET 62 12 N 5 08 E 5.27 SVEIO BROADCASTING STATION 59 37 N 5 19 E 3.11
STAVANGER 58 59 N 5 45 E 2.12 SVELEDEN 68 11 N 14 42 E 8.9
STAVENES LIGHT 61 25 N 4 59 E 5.40 SVELEIA 68 11 N 14 42 E 8.9
STAVENES LIGHT 63 07 N 7 40 E 6.29 SVELLINGEN 68 18 N 15 18 E 8.11
STAVSUNDET 67 01 N 13 56 E 7.60 SVENSSKJERET 66 06 N 12 41 E 7.49
STEET 63 00 N 7 48 E 6.40 SVERTINGANE 58 15 N 6 30 E 1.32
STEGLEHOLME 60 09 N 5 41 E 3.54 SVESKALLEN 64 33 N 10 15 E 7.8
STEINAN 65 36 N 11 17 E 7.25 SVINEFLU 61 20 N 4 33 E 5.14
STEINHOLMEN LIGHT 63 17 N 8 20 E 6.63 SVINOY 62 20 N 5 16 E 5.28
STEINKJER 64 01 N 11 30 E 6.79 SVINOYA 68 03 N 13 33 E 8.5
STEINODDEN 58 07 N 6 33 E 1.23 SVINVAER 66 45 N 13 10 E 7.55
STEINSFLESA 65 09 N 11 31 E 7.29 SVOLVAER 68 14 N 14 35 E 8.9
STEINSHOLMEN 67 44 N 14 43 E 8.16 SYKKYLVFJORDEN 62 24 N 6 33 E 5.56
STJERNDALEN 68 02 N 13 14 E 8.5 SYLEN 74 22 N 19 02 E 11.6
STJERNSUND 70 14 N 22 44 E 9.9 SYNESFJELLET 62 33 N 6 02 E 6.6
STOKHOLMEN 66 29 N 12 21 E 7.63
STOKKGRUNNEN 64 39 N 11 00 E 7.17
STOKKMARKNES 68 34 N 14 55 E 8.43 T
STOKKSUND 59 45 N 5 23 E 3.20
STOLSFJORDEN 58 14 N 6 41 E 1.27 TA 59 14 N 5 27 E 2.19
STONGI 60 22 N 5 10 E 4.19 TAFJORDEN 62 14 N 7 25 E 5.58
STORANESET 59 45 N 5 08 E 3.16 TAKNESET 63 09 N 8 20 E 6.49
STORDALSVIKA 62 23 N 6 58 E 5.56 TALGJEFJORDEN 59 08 N 5 49 E 2.25
STORE BERGSHOLME 58 56 N 6 07 E 2.31 TALSGRUNNANE 63 10 N 7 46 E 6.36
STORE GRINDOY 69 38 N 18 51 E 8.63 TALVIK 70 03 N 22 58 E 9.12
STORE HISKJO 59 44 N 5 09 E 3.15 TAMBAR OIL FIELD 56 58 N 2 57 E 1.2
STORE KLAKKSOY 59 50 N 5 16 E 3.20 TANAFJORDEN 70 45 N 28 25 E 9.22
STORE KOPPEREN 63 48 N 8 44 E 6.52 TANGEFLU 59 56 N 5 44 E 3.35
STORE KVITHOLME 65 01 N 11 36 E 7.29 TANNOYA 68 09 N 15 48 E 8.20
STORE LAGMANSVIKA 67 55 N 15 53 E 8.20 TARMEVIKODDEN 58 13 N 6 41 E 1.24
STORE MARSTEIN 60 08 N 5 01 E 4.3 TARVFJORDEN 63 46 N 9 25 E 7.5
STORE OIL TERMINAL 60 37 N 4 52 E 4.24 TAU 59 04 N 5 55 E 2.17
STORE OTERHOLMEN 64 58 N 11 32 E 7.24 TAUTRA LIGHT 63 35 N 10 37 E 6.73
Pub. 182
° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
TAUTREFLUA 62 41 N 6 56 E 6.16 VAEROY 61 18 N 4 44 E 5.13
TEINEGRUNNEN 61 24 N 4 29 E 5.14 VAEROY 67 40 N 12 40 E 8.4
TEISTEN 66 22 N 12 56 E 7.53 VAGEN 58 58 N 5 44 E 2.12
TEKSLO 60 09 N 5 01 E 4.4 VAGEN 62 13 N 5 39 E 5.58
TELAVAG 60 15 N 4 59 E 4.7 VAGENE 58 20 N 6 13 E 1.39
TEMPLEFJORDEN 78 24 N 17 00 E 11.20 VAIGATTOYANE 79 20 N 20 00 E 11.47
TENNHOLME 59 17 N 5 52 E 2.30 VAKSDAL 60 29 N 5 44 E 4.32
TENNHOLMEN 67 18 N 13 30 E 7.65 VALLABAANE 62 28 N 5 41 E 5.59
TENNHOLMEN LIGHT 67 18 N 13 30 E 8.12 VALLOYGALTEN 65 57 N 12 24 E 7.43
TENNSKJERHOLMEN 69 29 N 18 19 E 8.60 VALSHOLMSKJAER LIGHT 63 49 N 9 36 E 7.5
TERNEHAUG 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.15 VALSOYA 63 52 N 9 44 E 7.2
TERNEHOLMEN 58 14 N 6 41 E 1.27 VARANGERFJORDEN 70 00 N 30 00 E 9.28
TERNESKJERFLU LIGHT 62 11 N 5 24 E 5.50 VARDHOLMEN 60 46 N 4 52 E 4.22
TERNHOLMEN LIGHT 65 00 N 11 07 E 7.26 VARDO 70 22 N 31 07 E 9.26
TERNINGEN LIGHT 63 30 N 9 03 E 6.65 VARGSUND 70 22 N 23 30 E 9.12
TERNINGEN LIGHT 64 13 N 10 15 E 7.3 VARNES 58 11 N 6 38 E 1.23
TERNNESET 60 14 N 4 59 E 4.6 VASKINNKVIGA 68 53 N 16 26 E 8.48
TEROY 58 03 N 6 56 E 1.8 VATLESTRAUMEN 60 19 N 5 12 E 4.18
THAMSHAMN 63 19 N 9 53 E 6.69 VATNEMOHOLMENE 58 29 N 5 49 E 1.49
TINGVOLLVAGEN 62 54 N 8 11 E 6.43 VEANESET 60 03 N 5 29 E 3.53
TISNES 69 36 N 18 50 E 8.59 VEAVAGEN 59 18 N 5 13 E 3.7
TJELDODDEN 68 23 N 16 08 E 8.24 VEINESBOTN 70 05 N 28 47 E 9.32
TJELDSUNDET 68 31 N 16 10 E 8.32 VELFJORDEN 65 35 N 12 21 E 7.38
TJOTTA 65 50 N 12 26 E 7.40 VEMMELSVIKHOLMEN 61 54 N 5 10 E 5.50
TJUVAHOLMEN 60 22 N 6 16 E 3.44 VENNESODDEN LIGHT 63 53 N 11 03 E 6.76
TJUVHOLMEN 63 04 N 7 42 E 6.39 VERDAL HAVN 63 47 N 11 27 E 6.75
TODALSFJORDEN LIGHT 62 50 N 8 38 E 6.47 VESTERALSFJORDEN 68 35 N 14 32 E 8.42
TOFTEVAG 60 29 N 4 56 E 4.12 VESTERHOLMEN 63 43 N 11 00 E 6.73
TOMMELPYNTEN 79 33 N 18 42 E 11.45 VESTKLEPPEN 63 18 N 7 21 E 6.30
TOPPSUNDET 68 53 N 16 23 E 8.48 VESTPYNTEN 78 15 N 15 27 E 11.17
TORSFLU 62 04 N 4 57 E 5.26 VESTRE BRADSTEINEN 58 02 N 6 52 E 1.10
TORSKJAER LIGHT 63 46 N 9 28 E 7.5 VETEGJOGRASKJAER LIGHT 60 49 N 4 45 E 5.8
TORSVAG LIGHT 70 15 N 19 30 E 9.4 VETEN 60 01 N 5 15 E 3.22
TORVIKNESET 62 57 N 8 26 E 6.48 VETRUNGANE 61 56 N 4 49 E 5.23
TOVIK 68 41 N 16 53 E 8.49 VEVLAN 65 01 N 11 19 E 7.29
TOVIKHOLMEN LIGHT 62 59 N 7 21 E 6.38 VIKAFJORDEN 59 38 N 5 11 E 3.14
TRAENA 66 25 N 12 00 E 7.63 VIKAHOLMEN LIGHT 63 06 N 7 46 E 6.35
TRAETHOLMEN 65 56 N 12 12 E 7.30 VIKANESET 63 12 N 8 36 E 6.50
TRANOY 68 11 N 15 40 E 8.20 VIKANESFLU LIGHT 62 28 N 6 07 E 5.61
TRANOYFJORDEN 69 04 N 17 19 E 8.52 VIKEVAG 59 06 N 5 42 E 2.18
TROLL GAS FIELD 60 44 N 3 33 E 4.2 VIKHOLMEN 65 57 N 12 26 E 7.44
TROMSO 69 39 N 18 57 E 8.62 VIKINGEN LIGHT 66 32 N 12 58 E 7.54
TROMSOYA 69 40 N 18 57 E 8.60 VIKINGNESET 60 51 N 4 56 E 5.8
TRONDEN 62 19 N 5 38 E 5.60 VIKNA 64 55 N 11 00 E 7.26
TRONDHEIM 63 26 N 10 24 E 6.70 VIKSOY 60 10 N 5 03 E 4.4
TROSNAVAG 59 13 N 5 23 E 3.28 VIKUM 61 10 N 5 43 E 5.33
TROYTAROSEN 59 44 N 5 13 E 3.16 VIKVAGEN 65 18 N 12 07 E 7.33
TUNGENES 59 02 N 5 35 E 2.3 VILNESFJORDEN LIGHT 61 18 N 5 04 E 5.37
TUNSOY 58 59 N 5 49 E 2.11 VINDAFJORDEN 59 20 N 5 56 E 2.40
TUROY 60 27 N 4 55 E 4.10 VINDNESKARVEN 60 27 N 5 00 E 4.6
TUSSEN 61 23 N 4 50 E 5.39 VINGLEIA LIGHT 63 55 N 8 41 E 6.53
TYRHAUG LIGHT 63 19 N 8 14 E 6.62 VOLDSFJORDEN 62 12 N 5 56 E 5.53
TYSFJORDEN 68 06 N 16 15 E 8.21 VOLONGOYA 63 08 N 8 09 E 6.45
TYSNESVIK 60 03 N 5 32 E 3.53 VORDNESHOLMEN 59 45 N 5 13 E 3.16
TYSSEDAL 60 07 N 6 34 E 3.51 VOTLOY 60 28 N 5 28 E 4.32
TYSSEFJORDEN 59 21 N 6 14 E 2.37
W
U
WAHLENBERGFJORDEN 79 40 N 20 00 E 11.46
ULA GAS FIELD 57 06 N 2 51 E 1.2 WALDENOYA 80 37 N 19 46 E 11.41
ULLENSVANG 60 19 N 6 39 E 3.51 WIJDEFJORDEN 79 22 N 15 37 E 11.38
ULLEROYSUND 58 03 N 6 55 E 1.11 WILHELMOYA 79 03 N 20 24 E 11.45
ULLSFJORDEN 69 50 N 19 52 E 9.10 WOODFJORDEN 79 40 N 13 58 E 11.37
ULVEN LIGHT 61 58 N 5 09 E 5.25
URBERGET 68 04 N 13 43 E 8.6
URTER 59 22 N 5 02 E 3.4 Y
USKEDAL 59 56 N 5 52 E 3.37
UTGRUNNEN 67 42 N 14 17 E 8.3 YLVINGEN 65 36 N 12 10 E 7.37
UTNE 60 26 N 6 37 E 3.46 YSTESTEINEN 58 01 N 6 53 E 1.10
UTNEFJORDEN 60 26 N 6 38 E 3.46 YTRE ALVIK 60 25 N 6 23 E 3.45
UTOYBAEN 66 14 N 12 36 E 7.49 YTRE ASAROY 59 25 N 6 08 E 2.34
UTSIRA 59 18 N 4 53 E 3.4 YTRE KIBERG 70 17 N 31 00 E 9.28
UTSKARPEN 66 15 N 13 35 E 7.51 YTRE LANGHOLMEN LIGHT 63 11 N 7 52 E 6.31
UTTORGFLESSA LIGHT 65 26 N 11 57 E 7.36 YTRE LANGOYFLUI 60 47 N 4 49 E 5.8
UTVAER LIGHT 61 02 N 4 31 E 5.11 YTRE LOGRUNNEN 64 01 N 11 24 E 6.78
YTRE POLLEN 58 11 N 6 42 E 1.25
YTRE SAMLAFJORDEN 60 21 N 6 18 E 3.43
V YTRE SKALLEN 67 28 N 14 25 E 8.12
YTRE SMASTRAUMNESET 69 48 N 30 41 E 9.37
VABERGET 63 31 N 10 46 E 6.72 YTREHOLMEN 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.25
VADSO 70 04 N 29 44 E 9.30 YTREHOLMEN LIGHT 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.1
Pub. 182

° ' ° ' Para ° ' ° ' Para
YTSTE TAREN 61 17 N 4 55 E 5.36 YTTERTUVEN 67 50 N 12 52 E 8.4
YTSTEBOEN 62 09 N 5 04 E 5.26
YTSTEFLU 62 12 N 5 27 E 5.51
YTTERHOLMEN 66 01 N 11 42 E 7.25 Z
YTTEROYANE 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.15
YTTEROYANE LIGHT 61 35 N 4 41 E 5.17 ZORGDRAGERFJORDEN 80 23 N 22 40 E 11.42
Pub. 182

Sailing Directions - Pub182bk

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sailing Directions - Pub182bk

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sailing Directions - Pub182bk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PUB.

NORTH AND WEST COASTS OF

Prepared and published by the

© COPYRIGHT 2022 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Preface NGA Maritime—Contact Information

Sailing Directions are published by the National Geospatial-

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

International Ship and Port Facility Security (ISPS)

notification for innocent passage of warships in the territorial winds blow.

tory, including its territorial sea. Norwegian Sailing Directions.

charts and are expressed in meters. ments in possession of the Agency.

0.0 http://www.geo.uni.torun.pl 0.0 http://www.portfocus.com

Date of Change: 30 July 2022

0.0 SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 182

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Pub. 182 VII

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Norway be

Ekofisk Oil and Gas Field Complex

chart. The VTS Centers can be contacted 24 hours on VHF chan-

Norwegian authorities recommend that tankers of 40,000

1.1 Reused with permission from Norwegian Petroleum (https://www.norskpetroleum.no)

Varg Field, with a well head platform standing in position

58°05'N, 1°54'E, was shut down in 2016. Decommissioning is

58°41.6'N, 1°40.4'E, was shut down in 2013.

Ula Gas Field (57°06'N., 2°51'E.) is situated about 36 miles

about 103 miles SW of Feistein and equipped with a racon.

Directions (Enroute) North Sea.

Ula Field, where a lighted platform is located above the Gyda

visit the Norwegian Petroleum web site.

Hausvigodden. Ostre Roholmflu, about 0.4 mile SE of Roholme, has a depth

of 4.5m; a 10.1m depth lies between them.

Boro. light on the E extremity of Ulleroy, which leads W of Bispen

Skarvoyhamn and close within the harbor entrance. The reef

Ystesteinen (58°01'N., 6°53'E.), a cluster of above and be-

Breiflu, with depths of 3.7 to 7.8m, lies about 0.5 mile S of

Roholme (58°02'N., 6°52'E.), about 1 mile W of Vikelen,

Revoyflu, marked on its N side by a buoy, is located about 1

Several dangers lie near this channel, but a least depth of

and about 0.2 mile SE of the S end of Uroy. A rocky patch,

W side of the roadstead within about 206m of the E side of

NNW of Sondre Katland, is marked by a buoy.

Aspect.—A light is shown from the SW side of Faroy in

Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and 16.

A concrete wharf, 135m long, with a depth alongside of

Anchorage.—Small vessels can take sheltered anchorage in

Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken here, in about 33m,

With the exception of a shoal extending across the entrance

A 5m shoal lies on the E side of Lyngdalsfjorden entrance

fjorden, about 1 mile E of Farsund. of the S shore of Brekneholme.

fjorden, a submarine cable is laid NW across Oftefjorden to a up to 4m alongside.

E side of Oen, in 11.9m, pebbles and shells.

fjorden; a 5.5m channel leads across the shoal fronting this

1.21 The coast between Einarsneset and Steinodden, about

Steinodden to Rauna, the bottom slopes steeply. This leads to

Rauna (58°04'N., 6°40'E.), an island, is located about 3

Listahamn, between Brekneholmen and the mainland, has a